Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
MARSHALL STREET WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY - CHLORINE CONTRACT TANK IMPROVEMENTS - 12-0007-UT
• • CHLORINE CONTACT TANK IMPROVEMENTS MARSHALL STREET WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY ( #12- 0007 -UT) CONTRACT DOCUMENTS & SPECIFICATIONS Prepared for LL rwater CITY OF CLEARWATER FINAL SUBMITTAL Prepared by: Jones Edmunds & Associates, Inc. 324 South Hyde Park Avenue, suite 250 Tampa, Florida, 33606 Jones Edmunds Project No. 03720 - 042 -02 Certificate of Authorization #1841 AUGUST 2013 ACCORD ® CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE D/DDIYYYY) 0 /04 10/04/2013 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES •BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER 1- 813 -229 -8021 M. E. Wilson Co., Inc. 300 W. Platt St. Ste 200 Tampa, FL 33606 CONTACT Diana Defreeuw NAME: (A/C NNo. Ext): 813-229-8021 FAX No): E-MAIL ADDRESS: ddefreeuw@mewilson.com INSURER(S)AFFORDINGCOVERAGE NAIC# INSURERA: WESTFIELD INS CO 24112 INSURED TLC Diversified, Inc. 2719 17th Street East Palmetto, FL 34221 INSURER B : FCCI INS CO 10178 INSURER C : $ 1,000,000 INSURERD: $ INSURERS: $ 10, 000 INSURER F : COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: 36232468 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL INSR SUBR D MD POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF POLICY EXP (MM/DDIYYYY) JMMIDDIYYYY) LIMITS A GENERAL X LIABILITY COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY TRA3972460 04/01/13 04/01/14 ■ EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES (Ea occurrence) $ MED EXP (Any one person) $ 10, 000 CLAIMS -MADE X OCCUR PERSONAL BADVINJURY $1,000,000 X X Contractual Liability GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000 $500 Prop Dmg Ded PRODUCTS - COMP /OP AGG $ 2,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE POLICY X LIMIT APPLIES JECT X PER: LOC $ • A AUTOMOBILE X X LIABILITY ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS HIRED AUTOS X SCHEDULED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS TRA3972460 04/01/13 04/01/14 1 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT 1,000,000 (Ea accident) $ BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE $ (Per accident) $ A X UMBRELLA LIAB EXCESS LIAB X OCCUR CLAIMS -MADE TRA3972460 04/01/13 04/01/14 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 5,000,000 AGGREGATE $ 5,000,000 $ DED X RETENT ON $ 0'. B WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory in NH) If DESs,RIPTIONunder DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below Y / N N N / A 001WC13A61661 04/01/13 04/01/14 1'. '.... X TORY IMTS 6R E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 500, 000 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 500,000 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 500,000 A Installation Floater TRA3972460 04/01/13 04/01/14 Any One Site: 1,000,000 Transit & Storage: Included Deductible: 1,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (Attach ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, If more space is required) City of Clearwater, FL Chlorine Contact Tank Improvements Project ( #12- 0007 -UT) TLC Job No. 13 -26 -01 Certificate Holder Listed as Additional Insured CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION City of Clearwater P.O. Box 4748 Clearwater, FL 33758- 4748LVnu-. USA SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE """" ""--�� ��J,,,,,,--yy���,�� �r" 0 ACORD 25 (2010/05) JL002 36232468 © 1988-2010 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD City of Clearwater, Florida CHLORINE CONTACT TANK IMPROVEMENTS MARSHALL STREET WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY (12- 0007 -UT) TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION IVa SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Prepared in the Office of the City Engineer Cover.doc Page II 8/6/2013 SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS • • • SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS CHLORINE CONTACT TANK IMPROVEMENTS 12- 0007 -UT CLEARWATER, FLORIDA Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this Project are available for inspection and/or purchase by prospective bidders at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address: www .myClearwater.com/citvprojects, ON MONDAY AUGUST 19th, 2013, until no later than close of business three (3) days preceding the bid opening. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the website, reflects reproduction cost only. The work for which proposals are invited consists of installation of a static mixer, flow meter, new walkway, sluice gates, openings in the existing walls, and baffle walls; modification of the sodium hvpochlorite and sodium bisulfite feed piping and control systems; and associated electrical Work. MANDATORY Pre -Bid Conference for all prospective bidders will be held on Monday September 2"x, 2013. Representatives of the Owner and Consulting Engineer will be present to discuss this Project. Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasing Manager, at the Purchasing Office, located at the Municipal Services Bldg., 100 S. Myrtle Ave., 3rd Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756 -5520, until 1:30 P.M. on MONDAY SEPTEMBER 16th, 2013. The bids will be publicly opened in Purchasing Conference Room 342 and read at that hour and place for Chlorine Contact Tank. Improvements (12- 0007 -UT). A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and proposal form is available to the general public (Contractors, Sub - contractors, suppliers, vendors, etc.) for review and purchase. However, sealed proposals will only be accepted from those Contractors that are currently City pre - qualified Contractors in the construction . category of wastewater with a minimum pre - qualification amount of $500,000.00. Contractors wanting to pre - qualify to bid this project must do so two (2) weeks /ten (10) workdays prior to the bid opening date. A 10% bid bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects. The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids. The City of Clearwater, Florida Michael Murray, Purchasing Manager (727) 562 -4633 Sectionl Page 1 of 1 8/6/2013 SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SECTION 11 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Table of Contents: 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 1 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 1 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 2 5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 3 6 CONTRACT TIME 3 7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 3 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 3 9 SUBCONTRACTORS 3 10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM 4 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 4 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 5 13 REJECTION OF BIDS 5 • 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 5 15 OPENING OF BIDS 5 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 5 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 6 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT 7 19 BID PROTEST 7 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT 9 • 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 9 Sectionll.doc i 8/6/2013 • • • Section II — Instructions to Bidders 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1.1 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are available at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room — website address: www .myclearwater.com/cityprojects. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the City' s Website, reflects reproduction costs only, which is non - refundable. A complete bidder's package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and bid/proposal form is available only to pre - qualified bidders. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre - qualified but who may be a possible subcontractor, supplier, or other interested person may purchase a "Subcontractor" package consisting of plans, specifications, and list of pay items. 1.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub - bidders or others. 1.3 The City, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant any other permission to use the documents for any other purpose. 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 2.1 Each prospective Bidder must pre - qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner before obtaining drawings, specifications and contract documents. An application package for pre - qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering Department, P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758 -4748 (mailing address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756 -5520 (street address only) or by phone at (727) 562 -4750. Pre - Qualification requirements information is also available on City of Clearwater Website at address: www. myclearwater. com/ gov/ depts/ pwa/ engin/Construction/prequal.asp. Contractors wanting to pre - qualify to bid on a project as a General Contractor must do so two weeks (ten work days) prior to the bid opening date. Bidders currently pre - qualified by the City do not have to make reapplication. 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 3.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. 3.2 In reference to the Technical Specifications and/or the Scope of the Work for identification of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports but not upon non - technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. In reference to those drawings relating to physical SectionII.doc Page 1 of 9 8/6/2013 Section II — Instructions to Bidders conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. 3.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions, possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions appear in the General Conditions. 3.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 3.6 On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations and tests. 3.7 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights -of -way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 3.8 The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that, without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work. 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 4.1 All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to the Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda, by the City's planroom to all parties recorded by the City's planroom as planholders having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received after the time frame specified at the pre -bid meeting prior to the date for opening of SectionII.doc Page 2 of 9 8/6/2013 • • • Section II — Instructions to Bidders Bids may not be answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect. 4.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the City or Engineer. 5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 5.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in an amount equal to ten percent (10 %) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified or cashier's check or a Bid Bond (on form attached) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions. A cash bid bond will not be accepted. 5.2 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the Agreement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract by the City Council, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after the Bid opening. 5.3 The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in the State of Florida. • 6 CONTRACT TIME • 6.1 The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set forth in the Technical Specifications. 7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 7.1 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement. 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 8.1 The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications. 9 SUBCONTRACTORS 9.1 If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the Sectionll.doc Page 3 of 9 8/6/2013 Section II — Instructions to Bidders Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed fifty percent (50 %) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award of the Contract to the City Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the City Council will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions. 9.2 No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or organization against whom he has reasonable objection. 10 BID /PROPOSAL FORM 10.1 The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be completed in ink or by typewriter. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. Unit Prices shall be to no more than two decimal points in dollars and cents. The Bidder must state in the Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures, the price for which he will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump sum for each section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items. 10.2 Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice - president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind the corporation or partnership. 10.3 Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership shall be shown below the signature. 10.4 All names shall be typed or printed below the signature. 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 11.1 Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a 8.5 "x11" manila envelope with the project name and number on the bottom left hand corner. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and Sectionl.doc Page 4 of 9 8/6/2013 • • • • Section II — Instructions to Bidders addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Telegraphic or facsimile bids received by the Purchasing Manager will not be accepted. 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 12.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified. 12.2 After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or modify any bid. 13 REJECTION OF BIDS 13.1 To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in the interest of the public. 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 14.1 Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non - Collusion Affidavit contained in the Contract Documents. 15 OPENING OF BIDS 15.1 Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids. 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 16.1 The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees SectionII.doc Page 5 of 9 8/6/2013 Section II — Instructions to Bidders and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. 16.2 The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be stated by the Contractor. 16.3 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law. The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements. 16.4 The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials incorporated into the WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in the Scope of Work Description in Section IV — Technical Specifications and as defined in Section III — General Conditions. 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDSNENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 17.1 In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders with drug -free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has implemented a drug -free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process. Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied bidders have a drug -free workplace program. In order to have a drug -free workplace program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six statements and the accompanying certification statement: (1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. (2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug -free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. (3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). (4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction. (5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is so convicted. Sectionl.doc Page 6 of 9 8/6/2013 • • • • Section II — Instructions to Bidders (6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug -free workplace through implementation of this section. I certify that this firm does /does not (select only one) fully comply with the above requirements. 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT 18.1 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 18.2 In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 18.3 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the best interest of the City. 18.4 Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will be awarded to only one Contractor. 19 BID PROTEST 19.1 RIGHT TO PROTEST: Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with protest procedures set forth in this section. 19.2 PROTEST PROCEDURE: A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposals, unless the aggrieved person could not have been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening or the closing date for proposals. Opening dates for bids or due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid/request document itself. B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each bidder, whichever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite SectionII.doc Page 7 of 9 8/6/2013 Section H — Instructions to Bidders specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly been violated. C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception. D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five (5) work days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully coordinated with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager. E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager, he /she may then submit in writing within five (5) work days of receipt of that response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City Manager. F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten (10) work days of receipt of the appeal. 19.3 PROTEST FEE: When filing a formal protest, the protesting vendor must include a fee in the amount of 5% of the selected vendor's total bid to offset the City's additional expenses related to the protest. This fee shall not exceed $2,500 nor be less than $50. If either the Purchasing Manager or the City Manager upholds the protest, the City will refund 100% of the fee paid. 19.4 STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best interest of the City. Sectionll.doc Page 8 of 9 8/6/2013 • • • • • • Section 11 — Instructions to Bidders 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT 20.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance related to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918 -08) along with the Florida Trench Safety Act (Sections 553.60 - 553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws. 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 21.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) stormwater permit and implement stormwater pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or stormwater management programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively reduce or prevent the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters. A. The control of construction- related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining water quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control practices during the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment loadings to surface waters. B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and sediment control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion and sediment control provisions. NPDES Management Measures available at City of Clearwater Engineering Environmental Division and EPA websites to help address construction- related Best Management Practices. References EPA website Sectionll.doc Page 9 of 9 8/6/2013 SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION I11 GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents: 1 DEFINITIONS 1 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS 5 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE 5 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS 5 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT 5 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION 6 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 6 2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS 6 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 7 3.1 INTENT 7 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES 7 4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 8 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS 8 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS 8 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES 8 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS 9 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE 9 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND /CONTRACT BOND 9 5.2 INSURANCE 9 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE 10 5.2.2 PUBLIC LL4BIL1TYAND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE 11 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY 11 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS ....12 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES x,...12 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE 12 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 13 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS 14 6.4 SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS 14 6.5 USE OF PREMISES 15 6.5.1 STAGING AREAS 15 6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS 16 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES 16 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS 16 6.8 PERMITS 17 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION 17 6.10 EMERGENCIES 18 6.11 DRAWINGS 18 Sectionnl.doc i $/6/2013 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW 18 6.11.2 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS 20 6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS 22 6.11.4 DELIVERABLES: 23 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE 23 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK 24 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION 24 6.15 CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION 25 7 OTHER WORK 25 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE 25 7.2 COORDINATION 25 8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY 25 9 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 26 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE 26 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 26 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK 26 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS 26 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES 27 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES 27 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK 28 11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 29 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 29 11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT 30 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK 31 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME 31 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK. 32 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION 32 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK 33 13.3 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK 33 13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK 33 13.5 WARRANTY /CORRECTION PERIOD 33 13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 34 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK 34 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION . 35 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT 35 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE 35 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS 36 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION 37 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION 37 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 37 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE 38 14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS 39 SectionIII.doc ii 8/6/2013 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 39 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK 39 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE 39 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE 40 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 41 17 MISCELLANEOUS 41 17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS 41 17.2 GIVING NOTICE 41 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM 41 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED 41 17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT 41 17.6 RENEWAL OPTION 42 17.7 ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND /OR DUMPSTERS 42 18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK. 42 19 MATERIAL USED 42 20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 42 21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION 42 22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 43 22.1 GENERAL 43 22.2 EXAMPLE 44 23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 44 23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE 44 23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE 45 23.3 FIXED SIGN 45 23.4 PORTABLE SIGNS 45 23.5 SIGN COLORING 45 23.6 SIGN PLACEMENT 45 23.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE 45 23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN 46 24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE 46 25 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM 47 Sectionf.doc iii 8/62013 Section III — General Conditions 1 DEFINITIONS 110 Addenda Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents, Agent Architect, engineer or other outside agency, consultant or person acting on behalf of the City. Agreement The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. Application for Payment The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. Approve The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Bid The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the work to be performed. Bidding Documents The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). Bonds Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security. Change Order A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement. City The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida. Construction Inspector A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and inspects City construction projects in order to insure the Contractor's work complies with the intent of the Contract Documents. Construction Manager The person who is typically in responsible charge of City construction projects. The Construction Manager assumes responsibility for the management of construction contracts at the Preconstruction Conference. The Construction Manager chairs the Sectionlitdoc Page 1 of 50 8/6/2013 Section III — General Conditions Preconstruction Conference and is the authority on any disputes or decisions regarding contract administration and performance. The Construction. Manager typically acts as the Owner's Representative during construction. Contract Documents The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid (including documentation accompanying the bid and any post -Bid documentation submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of the Agreement. Contract Price The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work. Contract Time The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work. Contractor The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of this contract, the person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative. Critical Path Method Construction Schedule—CPM A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work in a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution of the schedule. Day A calendar day of twenty -four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. Defective An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval : referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final payment. Drawings The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement, which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents, Shop drawings are not Drawings as so defined. Engineer The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida, or his authorized representative. For certain projects, the Engineer may serve as the. Owner's Representative during construction. SectionEldoc Page 2 of 50 8/6/2013 Section III — General Conditions Engineer's Consultant A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. F.D.O.T Specifications The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida Department of Transportation (latest English edition). Furnish The words "furnish ", "furnish and install ", "install ", and "provide" or words of similar meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and install complete in place and ready for service ". Inspection The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or overseeing. Laws and Regulations Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction. Liens Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property. Milestone A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to the final completion date. Notice to Proceed (NTP) A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his obligations under the Contract Documents. Owner The City of Clearwater,. Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be responsible for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed. For certain projects, a designee of the Owner may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. Owner's Representative Designee of the Owner with authority to act on behalf of the Owner during construction. Person A natural person, or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial entity. Project The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. SectionIII.doc Page 3 of 50 8/6/2013 Section Di — General Conditions Partial Utilization Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work. Representative of Contractor The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre-construction conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City Engineer. Request for Information (RFI) An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents fro the Contractor to the Engineer. Shop Drawing All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work. Specifications Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. Subcontractor A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. Substantial Completion The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, hi the opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. Supplementary Conditions The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions Supplier A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor. Surety Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid, Performance or Payment Bond. SectionIII.doc Page 4 of 50 8/6/2013 Section III — General Conditions Underground Facilities All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or water. Unit Price Work Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. Work The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or fumishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract Documents. Work Change Directive A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by this contract. 2.2 ' COPIES OF DOCUMENTS Engineer shall furnish to Contractor one (1) copy of Contract Documents for execution. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction. 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run. SectionIII.doc Page 5 of 50 8/6/2013 Section III — General Conditions 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however, Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, Agent or employee of the Owner or Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Within twenty (20) days of Award of Contract and before the start of the Work, the Owner's Representative shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer, Owner and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures. Typically, oversight of the project officially passes from the Engineering Department to the Construction Department at the preconstruction conference. In these cases, the preconstruction conference is run by the Construction Department and chaired by the City's Construction Manager. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the Preconstruction Conference a color Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule. This is to be a sequence of events including submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at this conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall also bring a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the list is complete and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the preconstruction conference a completed Emergency Call List and a completed Authorized Signature List. The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a project disk that has all of the necessary data and survey control points for the purpose of construction stakeout and as -built survey. The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction ;conference a Contractor evaluation package. This is for the purpose of rating the Contractor's performance for reference when considering future contracts and bid prequalification. 2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be scheduled on a weekly, bi- weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a SectionIII.doc Page 6 of 50 8/6/2013 Section III — General Conditions look -ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting, and all material test reports generated in the same time period. 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 3.1 INTENT The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well - known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code, whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents, shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, Engineer or Owner's Representative, or any of their Agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion. 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall report it to the Owner's Representative in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner, or Owner's Representative for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof. SectionIII.doc Page 7 of 50 8/6/2013 Section III - General Conditions AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be Performed, rights -of -way, easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the Owner, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions. 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The Contractor is required to call the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a member of the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation. The LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER is an agency for the protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in local telephone directory. SectionIII.doc Section III — General Conditions 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by a surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. If a City survey crew is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor will be charged at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one -hour increments with a minimum charge of one hour. 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND /CONTRACT BOND Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in effect at least one year after the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit. Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner. 5.2 INSURANCE Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance and furnishing of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or furnished by Contractor, and Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable for the following: (i) Claims under worker's compensation, disability SectionlII.doc Page 9 of 50 8/6/2013 Section III t General Conditions benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; (ii) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; (iii) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; (iv) Claims for damages insured by customary personal injury liability coverage which are sustained by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor, or by any other person for any other reason; (v) Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and (vi) Claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by the Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with this paragraph. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph to be purchased and maintained shall: (i) include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of professional liability) Owner of Clearwater and any other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insured, and include coverage for the respective officers and employees of all such additional insures; (ii) include completed operations insurance; (iii) include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity obligations in Article for Contractor's Responsibilities; (iv) contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until; at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplemental Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor as described in this paragraph); (v) remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in accordance with Article for Correction of Defective Work; (vi) with respect to completed operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims -made basis, shall remain in effect for at least two years after final payment. Contractor shall furnish the Owner and each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued evidence satisfactory to the Owner and any such additional insured, of continuation of such insurance at fmal payment and one year thereafter and (vii) Name and telephone number of the authorized insurance agent for the Insurer. The limits of liability for the insurance. required shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations: 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE Sectiordndoc Page 10 of 50 Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Workers' Compensation Statutory, Statutory (2) Employer's Liability $500,000. $1,000,000. Sectiordndoc Page 10 of 50 Section III — General Conditions 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE Comprehensive General Liability including Premise /Operations; Explosion, Collapse and Underground Property Damage; Products/Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual, Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities: 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY including all owned (private and others), hired and non -owned vehicles: Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury: $500,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate $1,000,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate (2) Property Damage: $500,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate $1,000,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate (3) Personal Injury, with employment exclusion deleted $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY including all owned (private and others), hired and non -owned vehicles: Receipt and acceptance by Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other similar document does not;. constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which may be less than required by these Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors or others in the Work. Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be accepted without prior approval from Owner. Lonashore and Harbor Worker's Compensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932, requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self- insurer. Sectionf.doc Page 11 of 50 8/6/2013 Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury $500,000. Each Person $500,000. Each Accident $1,000,000. Each Person $1,000,000. Each Accident (2) Property Damage $500,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Receipt and acceptance by Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other similar document does not;. constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which may be less than required by these Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors or others in the Work. Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be accepted without prior approval from Owner. Lonashore and Harbor Worker's Compensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932, requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self- insurer. Sectionf.doc Page 11 of 50 8/6/2013 Section III — General Conditions For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable for and shall secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7, 8, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required to secure the payment of compensation. 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the penis covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Sub - contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under such policies for losses and damages so caused None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise payable under any policy so issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against. Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the ^ officers, directors, employees and agents of any of them for (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and; (ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof- caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by the Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after final payment. 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner's Representative except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All Sectionlf.doc Page 12 of 50 8/6/2013 Section III — General Conditions communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The Contractor's superintendent shall keep a mobile cell phone on his person so he can be contacted whenever necessary. Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's Representative shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of the Owner's Representative. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner normally approved holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign an overtime slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his records. At the end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full reimbursement of all Inspector overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the Owner has received this check. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be $60.00 per hour. Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer. 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline andl order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without the Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer. Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start -up and completion of the Work. All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. SectionIII.doc Page 13 of 50 8/6/2013 Section III — General Conditions The City of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment to be incorporated into the WORK under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in the Contract Documents. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of Clearwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures. 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposedis essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to Owner's Representative and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a determination. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of acceptability. 6.4 SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative before or at the preconstruction conference a list of all Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for Work to be performed on the Project. The Contractor shall include with this list the qualifications and references for each Subcontractor, supplier or other person and organization for review and approval. Any changes to this list must be submitted to the Owner's Representative for approval prior to the substitution of any Subcontractors, suppliers or other persons and organizations before performing any Work on the Project for the Contractor. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all SectionIIl.doc Page 14 of 50 8/6/2013 Section III — General Conditions Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to communicate with the Engineer through Contractor. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the work to be performed by any specific trade. All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his Subcontractors or between Subcontractors. 6.5 USE OF PREMISES Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right -of -way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors, employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. 6.5.1 STAGING AREAS The Contactor shall obtain and deliver to the City written permission for the use of all staging and storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction. SectionIIl.doc Page 15 of 50 8/6/2013 Section III — General Conditions 6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially right -of -ways, is very important to the Citizens of Clearwater; therefore these time limits are imposed: • Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days. • Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10) consecutive calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times. • All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP. • Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (15) consecutive calendar days. Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times. • Sod must be restored within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days of a successful pipe pressure test, removal of concrete forms, backfill of excavations, replacement of driveways or sidewalks or other project specific milestone. It must be watered for a period of thirty (30) days after it is placed. Erosion control and dust control of denuded areas must be maintained at all times. If the project or a portion of it does not involve right -of ways, then a different schedule of sod restoration may be considered. 6.6. LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and, hold harmless. Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or;copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work. 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Owner's Representative shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations,. Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: Sectionlll.doc Page 16 of 50 8/62013 Section III — General Conditions however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above. When City projects include Federal or State funding, the requirements of Executive Order 11-02 shall be adhered to utilizing the Homeland Security E -Verify System to verify employment eligibility. 6.8 PERMITS Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and the Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment fees. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner of Clearwater Building Permit Fees will be waived. 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and (iii) other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work, or during inclement weather, or whenever Owner's Representative may direct; Contractor shall, and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of Work or materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention program which shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there is . exposure to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to the Owner's employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract Section111.doc Page 17 of 50 8/6/2013 Section III — General Conditions performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when prosecution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable. 6.10 EMERGENCIES In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or the Owner's Representative, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If the Owner's Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action. 6.11 DRAWINGS 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW Contractor shall submit Shop. Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to SectionIII.doc Page 18 of 50 Section III — General Conditions Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each submittal within twenty -one (21) consecutive calendar days. The Contractor shall maintain a request for information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within twenty -one (21) consecutive calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds for a delay claim from the Contractor. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor. Contractor shall furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy in order to achieve required approval of an item within two (2) submittals. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor, for Engineer's costs for resubmittals that account for a number greater than twenty percent (20%) of the total number of first time submittals. Owner's. Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for all third submittals. The number of first time submittals shall be equal to the number of submittals agreed to by Engineer and Contractor. All costs to Engineer involved with subsequent submittal of Shop Drawings, Samples or other items requiring approval will be backcharged to Contractor at the rate of 3.0 times direct technical labor cost by deducting such costs from payments due Contractor for Work completed. In the event that Contractor requests a substitution for a previously approved item, all of Engineer's costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution will be backcharged to Contractor, unless the need for such substitution is beyond the control of Contractor. SectionlII.doc Page 19 of 50 8/6/2013 Section III — General Conditions 6.111 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As -Built Drawings, in good order< and legible condition to be continuously marked -up at the job site The Contractor shall mark and annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans, including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the construction process, The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which are revealed during the construction period. The As -Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer, Engineer's Consultant, and the Owner's Representative at all times during the progress of the Project. The As -Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative, or his designee, for accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As -Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked -up blueline prints do not conform to the "As -Built Drawings" requirements. As -Built Drawings shall be submitted to the Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay request. Final pay request shall not be processed until As- Built Drawings have been reviewed by the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness. Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains. The Owner's acceptance of the "As -Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As -Built Drawings. 6.11.2.1 General The Contractor shall prepare an "AS BUILT ` SURVEY" per chapter 5J- 17.052, Florida Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As -Built Drawings and an AutoCAD file. 51- 17.050 Defnftion: (10)(a) As -Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal and/or vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and delineated also knonw as Record Survey. This survey shall be clearly titled "As -Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction Division upon substantial completion of the project, If this condition is not met, the Owner will procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the Owner with the required As -Built Survey. 6.11.2.2 Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems 1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, Basting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. New sanitary service connections and replaced sanitary service connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes, SectionM.doc Page 20 of 50 816/2013 Section III — General Conditions cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions, pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. 2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted. 6.11.2.3 Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain) All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points. 6.11.2.4 Electrical and Control Wiring The as -built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as -built drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional conduit runs, 1 -line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder diagram. 6.11.2.5 Horizontal and Vertical Control The As -Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans or if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983 /90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical), must be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department. 6.11.2.6 Standards The As -Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 5J -17 and the Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that pertain to the as -built survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes. 6.11.2.7 Other The As -Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans. Sectionlll.doc Page 21 of 50 8/6/2013 Section III - General Conditions 6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS 6.11.3.1 Layer Naming 6.11.3.1.1 Prefixes and Suffixes DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line work and symbols TX suffix denotes text — use for all text, no matter the prefix 6.11.3.1.2 Layer Naming Definitions: GAS gas lines and appurtenances ELEC power lines and appurtenances PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances BOC curbs WALK sidewalk WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers STORM storm lines and appurtenances TREES trees, bushes, planters SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances FENCE all fences BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation DRIVE driveways EOP edge of pavement without curbs TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes TOPBANK top of bank TOESLOPE toe of slope TOPBERM top of berm TOEBERM toe of berm SEAWALL seawall CONCSLAB concrete slabs Sectionffi.doc Page 22 of 50 8/6/2013 Section III — General Conditions WALL walls, except seawall SHORE shoreline, water elevation CL centerline of road CLD centerline of ditch CLS centerline of Swale CORNER property corners, monumentation BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks Other layers may be created as required, using above format. 6.11.3.2 Layer Properties All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer. All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer. All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts. 6.11.3.3 Text Styles Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 0 °, and a text height of .008 times the plot scale. Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.5 °, and a text height of .010 times the plot scale. 6.11.4 DELIVERABLES: The as -built survey shall be produced on bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1"=20' unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver all drawing files in digital format. Acceptable file formats include: DWG, of a shape file. Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562 -4762 or e-mail address Thomas.Mahony@myClearwater.com. 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism, modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution or non - execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance ". SectionIlI.doc Page 23 of 50 8/6/2013 Section III — General Conditions Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work, which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the. Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by Owner's Representative, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's Representative, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by the Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer. 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole, or in part by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person. If, through acts of neglect on the part of Contractor, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor shall suffer loss or damage on the work, Contractor shall settle with such other Contractor or Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor or Subcontractor will so settle. If such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against the Owner on such account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, the Owner shall notify Contractor, who shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any such claim. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work, or anyone for whose acts any, of them may be liable, the indemnification' obligation under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Sub - contractor, SectionIIl.doe Page 24 of 50 8//2013 Section III — General Conditions Supplier or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under this paragraph shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's Consultants, officers, directors, employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any of them. 6.15 CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION Contractor shall notify Owner by US mail addressed to the City Engineer of any changes in company contact information. This includes: contact phone, address, project manager, email addresses, etc. 7 OTHER WORK 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE The City reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and perform work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether related to the project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utility owners for these purposes. The City may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work will be identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity is denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with the Contractor's work or schedule. 7.2 COORDINATION If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility in respect of such coordination. 8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Owner's Representative. The Owner shall furnish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General Conditions. The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The Work. The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the Article on Tests and Inspections. SectionlII.doc Page 25 of 50 8/6/2013 Section III — General Conditions In connection with the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances. Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE Dependent of the project type, the Owner's Representative during the construction period will either be the Construction Manager, the Engineer, or a designee of the Project's Owner. The duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Owner's Representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of Owner and Engineer. 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents regarding design issues only, in the form of Submittal responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise, as Engineer may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents. All other clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued form the Owner's Representative. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on the Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract -Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes to be defective, or that Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop Drawings and Samples. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Change Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time In connection SectionflLdoc Page 26 of 50 816/2013 Section III — General Conditions with Owner's Representative authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to Contractor and Completion. 9:5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES The Owner's Representative will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will be referred initially to Owner's Representative in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be delivered by the claimant to Owner's Representative and the other party to the Agreement promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Owner's Representative and the other party within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit any response to Owner's Representative and the claimant within thirty (30) days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time. Owner's Representative will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Owner Representative's written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Owner Representative's decision is taken within thirty (30) days of the Owner Representative's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a Dispute Resolution Agreement between Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention to appeal from Owner Representative's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor to the other and to Owner's Representative within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim, dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60) days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and Contractor. When functioning as interpreter and judge, Owner's Representative will not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Owner's Representative with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any exercise by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution. 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES Neither Owner Representative's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Owner's Representative in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, Sectionff.doc Page 27 of 50 8/6/2013 Section III — General Conditions exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Owner's Representative shall create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Owner's Representative to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. Owner's Representative will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the work. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work. Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating: instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to Owner Representative's CEI, the Engineer's Consultants, and assistants. 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided). If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as, provided in article for Uncovering Work. The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments' recommended by Owner's Representative covering: changes in . the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of acceptance of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the parties; SectionIII.doc Page 28 of 50 Section III — General Conditions changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Owner's Representative pursuant to the article for Decisions on Disputes; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. 11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (i) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work. Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and where the Owner's Representative, the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Consultant, and Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the City of Clearwater shall pay for directed changes in the WORK, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT" basis. The Contractor shall apply for compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, subcontractors, and other items of direct costs required for the directed work. SectionIn.doc Page 29 of 50 8/6/2013 Section III — General Conditions The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items: 1. Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work (actual payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor taxes established by law). Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with negotiating the subject change. 2. Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall be substantiated through vendors' invoices. 3. Rental or equivalent rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation costs if specifically used for the WORK. The rental rates shall not exceed the current rental rates prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as the full- unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment and shall cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs associated with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor- owned equipment will be paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed estimated operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for equipment on stand -by. 4. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the City of Clearwater. The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed by the Contractor or Subcontractor. A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15%) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above, If work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five percent (5 %), and the subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10%). B. A fixed fee of ten percent (10 %) shall be added to the costs of Item 2 above. C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4. The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for all cost of general supervision, overhead, profit, and other general expense. 11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL _CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that (i) the allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii) Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Owner's Representative to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. SectionIII.doc • Section III — General Conditions 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit . Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Owner's Representative. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project construction and completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable deduction of fmal Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid. 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence, unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Owner's Representative. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones) may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the SectionfII.doc Page 31 of 50 8/6t2013 Section III — General Conditions Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be Limited to, acts by the Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for Other Work. 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Owner's Representative the required certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation of the Work. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Owner's Representative has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. SectionfII.doc Page 32 of 50 8/612013 Section I1! — General Conditions 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for Owner Representative's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Owner's Representative or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Owner Representative's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as Engineer or Owner's Representative may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 13.3 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer or Owner's Representative may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner's Representative to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner's Representative or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Owner's Representative stops Work under this paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract Price. 13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK If required by Engineer or Owner's Representative, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer or Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). 13.5 WARRANTY /CORRECTION PERIOD If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in SectionM.doc Page 33 of 50 8/6/2013 Section III — General Conditions accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting .therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. 13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to the Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work such costs to be approved by Owner's Representative as to reasonableness. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner Representative's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Owner Representative's recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to the Owner. 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Owner's Representative to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner's Representative in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents,,the Owner may, after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's Representatives, Agents and employees, the Owner's other contractors, and Owner's Representative, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable SectionIII.doc Page 34 of 50 8/6/2013 • Section III — General Conditions the Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by the Owner of the Owner's rights and remedies hereunder. 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION Requests for payment shall be processed in accordance with F.S. 218.735 and as described herein. Progress payments on account 'of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Owner's Representative for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the 25th of each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Owner's Representative and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5 %) of the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work, including as -built survey and Inspector overtime reimbursement, completed to date will be held until final completion and acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract. The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all quantities and work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an Official Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on -site marked up as -built drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with the Contract Documents. In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any progress payment, evidence and/or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report is provided. 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work SectionIII.doc Page 35 of 50 8/6/2013 Section III — General Conditions shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him m the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and fur fisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract. Contractor shall at the Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. if Contractor fails to do so, then the Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid bills, of which the Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by the Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by the Owner to Contractor, and the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith. 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS The Owner's Representative will within twenty (20) business days after receipt authorize and process payment by the Owner a properly submitted and documented Application for payment, unless the application requires review by an Agent. If the Application for payment requires review and approval by an Agent, properly submitted and documented Applications for payment will be paid by the Owner within twenty -five (25) business days. If an Application for payment is rejected, notice shall be given within twenty (20) business days of receipt indicating the reasons for refusing payment. The reasons for rejecting an Application will be submitted m writing, specifying deficiencies and identifying actions that would make the Application proper. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application: The Owner's Representative or Agent may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to Owner. Owner's Representative or Agent may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in Owner Representative's or Agent's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because: (i) the Work is defective, or completed Work has, been damaged requiring correction or replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Owner's Representative or Agent has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination. The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Owner's Representative or Agent because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Ovvner to a set -off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor notice of refusal to pay SectionIII.doc Page 36 of 50 816/2013 Section III — General Conditions in accordance with the time constraints of this section with a copy to the Owner's Representative or Agent, stating the reasons for such actions, and Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action. 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which (i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, Owner's Representative, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final Completion of all the Work subject to the following: The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such part of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with Engineer, Owner and Contractor and will within thirty (30) days notify Contractor in writing of particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Owner's Representative will produce a final punch list, deliver it to the Contractor within five (5) days of completion and assign a date for this work to be completed not less than thirty (30) days from delivery of the list. Failure to include any corrective work or pending items does not alter the responsibility of the contractor to complete all the construction services purchased pursuant to the contract. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions, As- built/Record Drawings, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other SectionlII.doc Page 37 of 50 8/6/2013 Section III — General Conditions evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The fmal Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, (ii) consent of the surety, if any or if necessary, to fmal payment, and (iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to the Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu of such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by the Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any Lien. Prior to application for fmal payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition. 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE If through no fault of Contractor, fmal completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if Owner's Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's fmal Application for payment and recommendation of Owner's Representative, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner's Representative with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims. If on the basis of Owner Representative's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Owner Representative's review of the fmal Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Owner's Representative is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will indicate in writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment. Thereupon, Owner's Representative will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Owner's Representative will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the ` reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount recommended by Owner's Representative. Sectionlll.doc Page 38 of 50 8/6/2013 Section III — General Conditions 14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS The making and acceptance of fmal payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK At any time and without cause, Owner's Representative may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time); if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; if Contractor disregards the authority of Owner's Representative; if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise than as herein specified, or at any time Owner's Representative certifies in writing to the Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed. The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and damages sustained by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to Contractor. SectionIII.doc Page 39 of 50 8/6/2013 Section DI — General Conditions If such claims, costs; losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be reviewed by Owner's Representative as to their reasonableness and when so approved by Owner's Representative incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not release Contractor from liability. Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor and Owner's Representative, the Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items): for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE If, through no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety '. (90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Owner's Representative fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum filially determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative, and provided the Owner or Owner's Representative does not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor shall not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Owner's Representative has failed to act on an Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has failed for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon seven (7) day's written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article. SectionJlLdoc Page 40 of 50 8/ /2013 Section III — General Conditions 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding arbitration. 17 MISCELLANEOUS 17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Owner's Representative subject to the approval of Owner. 17.2 GIVING. NOTICE Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose. 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs. 17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights to notice of assignment. SectionlII.doc Page 41 of 50 8162013 Section III — General Conditions 17.6 RENEWAL OPTION Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may renewed for up to two (2) years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the Contractor/Meendor. All terms, conditions and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner, and must be agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent u on the availability of funds, and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as dete ed by the Construction Department. 17.7 ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS ANDIOR DUMPSTRS All City construction projects shall utilize City of Clearwater Solid Waste roll -off containers and/or dumpsters for their disposal needs. For availability or price contact Mike Pryor at the City of Clearwater, Solid Waste Department, phone: (727) 562 -4923 or email: Michael. Pryor@mvClearwater,com: 18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the worlwhenever it is considered to the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to du ct on what line or street the Contractor shall work and order thereof. 19 MATERIAL USED All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unnless otherwise approved by the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all materials. 20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, ink case of conflict, error or discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications, Technical Specifications, Drawings. In a series of Modifications or Addenda ti# latest will govern. 21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION The Owner reserves the right, when identified during the bidding prcess as part of the project's documents, to contract with the Contractor to purchase certain portions of materials identified in the project as a sales tax savings option in compliance with Florkda Law since the Owner is exempt from payment of sales tax. The Contract price includes Floritpla sales and other applicable taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment, which will be a part of the Contractor's work. The Owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make Idirect purchases of various construction materials included in the Contractor's contract The Owner purchasing of construction materials, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. Additionally, Purchase Orders will include Owner's Certificate of Exemption number. See SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION for ODP it+ms included in the Contract Documents and the APPENDIX for ODP Documents. SectionIIhdoc Page 42 of 50 Section III — General Conditions 22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 22.1 GENERAL The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route or within a 500 -foot radius, unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, with a printed door hanger notice indicating the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water service disruption and/or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo (optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and/or other private appurtenances which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4 -1/4 by 11 inches in size. Notification (door hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's activities no later than seven (7) days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property, etc. Contractor cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice period to residents. Contractor is required to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business hours. Resident notification by the Contractor is a non- specific pay item to be included in the bid items provided in the contract proposal. SectionlII.doc Page 43 of 50 8/6/2013 Section III — General Conditions 22.2 •EXAMPLE CITY SEAL Of. CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION TODAY'S DATE: / / PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE We are the construction contractor performing (state type of contract) for the City of Clearwater in your area. The work will be performed in the public right-of-way adjacent to your property. This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property owners of the pending start of construction. (Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners) The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right-of-way. Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the contractor within a reasonably short period of time The replacement of driveways and sidewalks will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors, textures and/or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or structures within the right-of-way which must be removed due to the construction process will not be replaced The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within the right-of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere. We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or any particular item that must be relocated Please contact our Construction Manager at (727) . We will be more than happy to assist you Construction is anticipated to begin on: Company Name Company Address Contractor Phone Number 23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To 'help accomplish this purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during the full course of the contract period These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active work. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s) shall be included in the cost of the work. The number of and type of signs will be stated hi SECTION IV, ARTICLE l .1 — SCOPE DESCRIPTION. • SectionIII.doc Section III — General Conditions 23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended locations or various locations. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on sign at the preconstruction conference. 23.3 FIXED SIGN Fixed sign shall be 4 -foot by 6 -foot (4'x6') in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade plywood of the same size and a minimum thickness of 1/2- inches. Sign shall be attached to a minimum of two (2) 4 -inch by 4 -inch (4 "x4 ") below grade pressure treated (P.T.) wooden posts and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be enough to provide secure anchoring in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24- inches above the ground. Alternate mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for approval. Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint. 23.4 PORTABLE SIGNS Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24- inches by 30- inches (24 "x30 ") in size and will be attached to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080 - inches or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic barricade. 23.5 SIGN COLORING Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional to the sign itself. Each sign shall depict the City's sun and waves logo. The color of the sun shall be pantone yellow; the wave shall be process blue; and the text shall be black. 23.6 SIGN PLACEMENT Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right -of -way, the signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right -of- way, the signs will be placed in the right -of -way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and will remain in place until the request for final payment. 23.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement, removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced. SectionlII.doc Page 45 of 50 8/6/2013 Section III — General Conditions 23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN PROJECT NAME (CONTRACT NUMBER) DEPARTMENT NAME) PROJECT CONTRACTOR: T COMPLETION. DATE: FUNDING: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: imum rwater u 2'— 3" 4 "x4" P.T. Post (Typ.) N 24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the Engineer gives written notice to proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in Article 2 of these General Conditions. It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number of consecutive calendar days as determined in SECTION W, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION. Contract date to commence at issuance of notice to proceed. If the Contractor fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee SectionIII.doc Page 46 of 50 8/6/2013 Section III — General Conditions Holidays, that in the opinion of the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the Contractor shall pay the City of Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars ($480.00) per each eight -hour (8) day for each Inspector given such assignment. The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. 25 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM Any company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan' List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or is engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, is ineligible for, and may not bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars. Therefore, if applicable, each entity submitting a bid, proposal, or response to a solicitation must certify to the City of Clearwater that it is not on either list or engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria at the time of submitting a bid, proposal or response, in accordance with section 287.135, Florida Statutes. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing, or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce. The certification form (the Certification) is attached hereto, and it must be submitted, along with all other relevant contract documents, at the time of submitting a bid, proposal, or response. Failure to provide the Certification may deem the entity's submittal non - responsive. If the City of Clearwater determines that an entity has submitted a false certification form, been placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (for contracts entered into or renewed on or after July 1, 2011 through June 30, 2012), or submitted a false certification form, has been placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List or been engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, (for contracts entered into or renewed on or after July 1, 2012) then the contract may be terminated at the option of the City of Clearwater. Other than the submission of a false certification, the option to waive the aforementioned deficiencies mentioned in the previous sentence may be asserted on a case -by -case basis, at the sole discretion of the City of Clearwater, if to the following conditions are found to exist: A. For Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (all of the following must occur): 1. The scrutinized business operations were made before July 1, 2011. 2. The scrutinized business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July 1, 2011. 3. The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to contract with the company or entity. SectionlI.doc Page 47 of 50 8/6/2013 Section III — General Conditions 4. The company or entity has adopted, has publicized and is implementing a formal plan to cease scrutinized business operations and to refrain from engaging in any new scrutinized business operations. B. For Companies Engaged in Business Operations in Cuba or Syria: 1. The business operations were made before July 1, 2012. 2. The business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July 1, 2012. 3. The City of Clearwater determines . that it is in the best interest of the City to contract with the company or entity. 4. The company or entity has adopted, has publicized, and is implementing a formal plan to cease business operations and to refrain from engaging in any new business operations in Cuba or Syria. Further, the City may allow a company to bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars, if the City makes a public finding that, absent one of the above exemptions, the City would otherwise be unable to obtain goods or services for which the contract is offered. The City retains the right to pursue civil penalties and any other applicable rights and remedies as provided by law for the false submission of the attached certification form. SectionIII.doc Page 48 of 50 Section III — General Conditions SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBM1iiED WITH THE BID PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM AS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE. The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that: 1. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the requirements of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or engaging in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to participate in this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engaged in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 3. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce; and 4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwater in writing, no later than five (5) calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engages in business operations in Cuba and Syria. Sectionndoc Authorized Signature Printed Name Title Name of Entity /Corporation Page 49 of 50 8/6/2013 STATE OF Section III — General Conditions COUNTY OF The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me on this day of , 201 , by (name of person whose signature is being notarized) as the (title) of (name of corporation/entity), personally known to me as described herein , or produced a (type of identification) as identification, and who did/did not take an oath. Notary Public Printed Name My Commission Expires: NOTARY SEAL ABOVE Sectioni l.doc Page 50 of 50 SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table of Contents: SECTION IV i , TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1 SCOPE OF WORK 1 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION 1 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST 1 2 FIELD ENGINEERING 3 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR 3 2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS 3 2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA 3 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY 3 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS 4 3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS 4 3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS 4 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK 5 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK 5 6 CONCRETE 6 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 7 7.1 EXCAVATION 7 7.2 FORMS 7 8 REINFORCEMENT 7 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT 7 9 OBSTRUCTIONS 7 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT 8 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS 8 12 DEWATERING 9 12.1 GENERAL 9 12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 9 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL 9 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROMANYNON- CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY 10 13 SANITARY MANHOLES 12 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE 12 • 13.2 PRECAST TYPE 12 SectionlV.doc i 8/6/2013 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) 13 13.3 DROP MANHOLES 13 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS 13 • 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS 13 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES 13 14 BACKFILL 14 15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. 14 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES 14 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT 14 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL 14 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 14 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 15 18 UNDERDRAINS ... 15 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ; 15 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 15 19 . STORM SEWERS 15 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION 16 19.2 TESTING 16 19.3 .BASIS OF PAYMENT 16 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 17 20.1 MATERIALS 17 20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE 17 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE 17 20.2 INSTALLATION 17 20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE 17 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE 18 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS 18 20.4 TESTING 18 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS 18 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS 18 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT 19 20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE 19 20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE 19 21 DRAINAGE 19 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 19 22.1 BASE 19 22.1.1 BASIS OFMEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE 21 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE 21 22.2 SUBGRADE 21 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 21 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 22 SectionW.doc ri 8/6/2013 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS 22 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 22 23.1.1 AGGREGATE 22 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS 22 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE 22 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES 23 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS 23 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 24 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 24 23.6.1 CRACKS 24 23.6.2 POTHOLES 24 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES 24 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 25 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 26 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 26 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT 26 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT 26 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 27 25.1 IRRIGATION 27 25.1.1 DESCRIPTION 27 25.1.2 PRODUCTS 28 25.1.3 EXECUTION 33 25.2 LANDSCAPE 36 25.2.1 GENERAL 36 25.2.2 PRODUCTS 41 25.2.3 EXECUTION 44 26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 51 26.1 INTENT 51 26.2 PRODUCT AND C ONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY 51 26.3 MATERIALS 51 26.4 CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION 52 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION 53 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION 53 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION 53 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION 53 26.9 PAYMENT 53 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS 54 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 54 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 54 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS 54 29 CONCRETE CURBS 54 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 54 • 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 54 Sectionw,doc 8/6/2013 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS.. 54 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 54 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS 55 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 55 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT 55 31 SODDING ,...55 32 SEEDING 56 33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES 56 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES 56 33.2 PRECAST TYPE 57 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT 57 34 MATERIAL USED 57 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 57 36 STREET SIGNS ,..... 57 37 AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 57 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING 57 37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING 58 37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS 58 37.4 EQUIPMENT 58 37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO 58 37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO 58 37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION 58 37.8 LIGHTING 59 37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL 59 37.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX 59 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE 59 37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES 59 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL 59 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS 59 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES 60 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS 60 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES 60 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS 60 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES 60 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS 61 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION 61 38.9 MAINTENANCE 61 38.10 COMPLIANCE 61 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING 64 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE 64 Sectionrv.doc iv 8/6/2013 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND • APPURTENANCES ......... ........................ ........ 64 41.1 SCOPE 64 41.2 MATERIALS 65 41.2.1 GENERAL 65 41.2.2 PIPE MATER ALSAND FITTINGS 65 41.2.3 GATE VALVES 67 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES 67 41.2.5 HYDRANTS 68 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES 69 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTIONAND REPAIRS 69 41.2.8 BACKFLOWPREVENTERS 69 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES 70 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS 70 41.3 CONSTRUCTION 70 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING 70 41.3.2 PIPE LAYING 70 41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 72 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES 72 41.4 TESTS 73 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS 73 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST 73 41.5 STERILIZATION 73 41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT 73 41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM 73 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE 73 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS 74 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS 74 41.6 MEASUREMENTAND PAYMENT 74 41.6.1 GENERAL 74 41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 75 41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 75 41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES COVERS 75 41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 75 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 76 43 TENNIS COURTS 76 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS 76 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS 76 43.1.2 BASE COURSE 76 43.1.3 PRIME COAT 76 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE 76 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE 76 43.1.6 COLOR COAT 77 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS 78 43.2:1 GENERAL 78 • 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION 79 Sectionw.doc v 8/6/2013 43.2.3 SLOPE 79 43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION 80 43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING 80 43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE 80 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER 80 43.2.8 FENCING 81 43.2.9 WINDSCREENS 81 43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT 81 43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE 83 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) 83 43.2.13 CONCRETE 83 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING 83 43.2.15 WATER COOLER. 84 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION 84 43.2.17 WARRANTY 84 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 85 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 85 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 85 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY 85 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES 86 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS 86 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERLALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS 86 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS 86 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS 86 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 86 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION 87 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 87 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR 87 45 CURED -IN -PLACE PIPE LINING 87 45.1 INTENT 87 45.2 PRODUCT AND C ONTRA CTOR /INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY 88 45.3 MATERIALS 88 45.4 CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION 88 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION 89 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION 89 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION 89 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION 89 45.9 PAYMENT 89 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING 90 46.1 MATERIALS 90 46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS 90 46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL 90 46.1.3 SAMPLES 90 46.1.4 REJECTION 90 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS 90 SectionlV.doc vi 8/6/2013 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES 91 46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE 91 46.3.2 REPAIR OFDAIVIAGED SECTIONS 91 46.3.3 PIPE JOINING 91 46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE 91 46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE 91 46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS 91 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION 91 46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS 92 46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER 92 46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES ,.., 92 46.4.6 UNDF,RDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED 92 46.4.7 BACKFILLING 93 46.4.8 POINT REPAIR 93 46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS 93 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE 93 47.1 SCOPE 93 47.2 MATERIALS 93 47.3 PIPE 93 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM 94 47.5 FITTINGS . 94 48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS 94 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT 94 • 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE 94 48.3 COMPOSITION 94 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS 95 48.5 MATERIALS 95 48.6 WATER 95 48.7 REINFORCEMENT 95 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS 95 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION 96 48.10 PROPORTIONING 96 48.11 MIXING 96 48.12 APPLICATION 96 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS 97 48.14 SURFACE FINISH 97 48.15 CURING 97 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION 97 48.17 INSPECTION 98 48.18 EQUIPMENT 98 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 99 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT 99 49.2 PAYMENT 99 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 99 49.3.1 MATERIALS 99 49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 100 SectionWV.doc vii 8/6/2013 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS -2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM ` 100 49.4.1 MATERIALS 101 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL 101 49.6 GROUTING MIX 101 49.7 LINER MIX 101 49.8 WATER 102 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS 102 49.10 EQUIPMENT 102 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 102 49.11.1 PREPARATION 102 49.11.2 MIXING 103 49.11.3 SPRAYING t, 103 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING 103 49.11.5 CURING 103 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE 104 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL, SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 104 49.12.1 SCOPE 104 49.12.2 MATERIALS 104 49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 106 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 108 51 IN -LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM 109 51.1 SCOPE 109 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS ,.109 51.2.1 ASPHALT 109 51.2.2 CONCRETE j 109 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX 109 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT 109 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE 110 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION 110 51.6 PLAYING LINES 110 51.7 GENERAL. 110 51.8 LIMITATIONS 111 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 111 53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 111 53.1 MATERIAL 111 53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL 111 53.1.2 GABIONAND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: 114 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE 114 53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC 114 53.2 PERFORMANCE 114 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 115 54.1 SCOPE 115 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK 116 SectionIV.doc viii 8/6/2013 54.3 WORK METHODS 116 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING 116 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT 116 54.4 LITTER 116 54.5 VISUAL CHECK 116 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING 116 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.) 117 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL 117 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL 117 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY 117 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION 117 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA 117 54.13 MULCH CONDITION 117 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR 117 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL 118 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION 118 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION 118 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE 118 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK 118 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL 118 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 119 55 MILLING OPERATIONS 119 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE 119 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 119 • 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS 120 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS 120 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES 120 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES 120 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING 121 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS 121 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 121 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT 121 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 121 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 121 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 121 57 RIPRAP 122 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 122 572 BASIS OF PAYMENT 122 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY 122 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL 122 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING 122 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 123 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 123 Sectionw.doc ix 8/62013 60 SIGNING AND MARKING. 123 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 123 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING 124 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 124 62 TREE PROTECTION .. ». ...» 124 62.1 TREE BARRICADES 124 62.2 ROOT PRUNING 125 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING 126 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES ....... »..... ».f 126 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN 126 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES 126 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE 127 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS 127 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS 127 63.6 POSTING 127 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES 127 64 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE 127 64.1 CLEARANCE OPTIONS 127 64.2 REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES 128 Sectioarv.doc x 8/6/2013 • • • Section N — Technical Specifications 1 SCOPE OF WORK 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION Project Name: Chlorine Contact Tank Improvements Project Number: 12- 0007 -UT Scope of Work: The project generally consists of, but is not limited to, installing a static mixer, flow meter, baffle walls, sluice gates, baffles, and walkway; modifying the sodium hypochlorite and sodium bisulfite feed piping and associated control logic; modifying the weir levels; associated electrical and SCADA modification; and related work. The Contractor shall refer to Section 01100 — Summary of Work, and Section 01815 — Maintenance of Plant Operation and Sequence of Construction, for details. The Owner has pre - purchased the static mixer, baffle walls, and sluice gates. The Owner will deliver and unload pre - purchased equipment at the project site. The Contractor is responsible for storage and installation of the equipment. The Contractor shall provide 1 Fixed project signs as described in SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 of the Contract Documents. The final number of project signs will be determined at the beginning of the project based on the Contractor's schedule of work submitted for approval. Additional project signs may be required above the indicated amount due to the Contractor's schedule of work, which will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. List ODP Items to be included in the Contract Document — Not Applicable CONTRACT PERIOD: 150 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST Project Name: Chlorine Contact Tank Improvements Project Number: 12- 0007 -UT The following Articles of the Technical Specifications will apply to this contract if marked "X" as shown below: 1 to Scope Of Work 2.1 Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The Contractor 2.2 ❑ Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The City 3 /i4 Definition Of Terms 4 t:1 Order And Location Of The Work 5 I Excavation For Underground Work 6 1 Concrete 7 ❑ Excavation And Forms For Concrete Work 8 El Reinforcement 9 ❑ Obstructions 10 ❑ Restoration Or Replacement Of Driveways, Curbs, Sidewalks And Street Pavement 11 ❑ Work In Easements Or Parkways 12 III Dewatering SectionIV.doc Page 1 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 13 ❑ Sanitary Manholes 14 ■ Backfill 15 ❑ Street Crossings, Etc. 16 E Raising Or Lowering Of Sanitary Sewer, Storm Drainage Structures 17 ❑ Unsuitable Material Removal 18 ❑ Underdrains 19 ❑ Storm Sewers 20 ❑ Sanitary Sewers And Force Mains 21 ❑ Drainage 22 ❑ Roadway Base And Subgrade 23 n Asphaltic Concrete Materials 24 ❑ Adjustment To The Unit Bid Price For Asphalt 25 ❑ General Planting Specifications 26 E Hdpe Deformed - Reformed Pipe Lining 27 ❑ Plant Mix Driveways 28 ❑ Reporting Of Tonnage Of Recycled Materials 29 n Concrete Curbs 30 n Concrete Sidewalks And Driveways 31 /1 Sodding 32 /1 Seeding 33 ❑ Storm Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins Or Other Storm Structures 34 n Material Used 35 Conflict Between Plans And Specifications 36 ❑ Street Signs 37 II Audio/Video Recording Of Work Areas 38 E Erosion And Siltation Control 39 ❑ Utility Tie In Location Marking 40 /1 Award Of Contract, Work Schedule And Guarantee 41 ❑ Potable Water Mains, Reclaimed Water Mains and Appurtenances 42 ❑ Gas System Specifications 43 ❑ Tennis Courts 44 // Work Zone Traffic Control 45 ❑ Cured -In -Place Pipe Lining 46 ❑ Specifications for Polyethylene Sliplining 47 ❑ Specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Ribbed Pipe 48 [1 Gunite Specifications 49 ❑ Sanitary and Storm Manhole Liner Restoration 50 ►1 Project Information Signs 51 ❑ In -Line Skating Surfacing System 52 ❑ Resident Notification of Start of Construction 53 ❑ Gabions and Mattresses 54 ❑ Lawn Maintenance Specifications 55 ❑ Milling Operations 56 ❑ Clearing and Grubbing 57 n Riprap 58 Treatment Plant Safety 59 ❑ Traffic Signal Equipment and Materials SectionIV.doc Page 2 of 128 8/6/2013 • • • Section N — Technical Specifications 60 ❑ Signing And Marking 61 ❑ Roadway Lighting 62 ❑ Tree Protection 63 ❑ Project Web Pages 64 ❑ Overhead Electric Line Clearance 2 FIELD ENGINEERING 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR The Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service required for the project. Such work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to locate and lay out site improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the construction of the work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required to execute the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals under the laws of the state of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As- built Survey to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents. 2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the Engineer. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any permanent property corners or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any such markets. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Land Surveyor qualified under the laws of the state of Florida. 2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record drawings for the project. 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY At the completion of all work the contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence. of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one -hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The City will generate the project Record construction drawings. SectionIV.doc Page 3 of 128 8/6/2013 Section N — Technical Specifications 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS For the purpose of these Technical Specifications, the definition of terms from SECTION III, ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS of these Contract Documents shall apply. For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal Sheet is approximate and is given only as a basis of calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not assume any responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated quantities nor shall the contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining thereto. 3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard adopted and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise. 3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS Abbreviations used in the Contract Documents are defined as follows: AA Aluminum Association, Inc. AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers' Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ACI American Concrete Institute AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AMA Acoustical Materials Association AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. ANSI American National Standards Institute APA American Plywood Association ASAE American Society of Agricultural Engineers ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWG American Wire Gauge AWMA Aluminum Window Manufacturer's Association AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association CFR Code of Federal Regulations CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CS Commercial Standards and National Bureau of Standards DEP Department of Environmental Protection (Florida) DOT Department of Transportation (Florida) EPA Environmental Protection Agency Section1V.doc Page 4 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications FAC Florida Administrative Code FBC Florida Building Code FFPC Florida Fire Prevention Code FGC Florida Gas Code FMC Florida Mechanical Code FPC Florida Plumbing Code FedSpec Federal Specifications HI Standards of Hydraulic Institute IBBM Iron Body, Bronzed Mounted IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IPS Iron Pipe Size MIL Military Specification NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NPT National Pipe Thread NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers' Association PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute SBC Standard Building Code (SBCCI) SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. SDI Steel Door Institute SFPC Standard Fire Prevention Code (SBCCI) SGC Standard Gas Code (SBCCI) SJI Steel Joist Institute SMACCNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association SMC Standard Mechanical Code (SBCCI) SPC Standard Plumbing Code (SBCCI) SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council TCA Title Council of America UL Underwriters' Laboratories 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 18 — ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK. 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK The contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property. The contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in SectionN.doc Page 5 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the contractor. For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as OSHA "Type C ". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify his Competent Person to City staff at the start of construction. City staff are required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the contractor. City staff in conformance with the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements are to only enter an excavation in compliance with these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is unsafe or does not conform OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the contractor must either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense. The restoration quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract to not contain sufficient quantities to allow the contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the Contractor is required to use excavation and trench - shoring methods in compliance with all safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work necessary to complete the project. Not more than one hundred (100) feet of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be six (6) inches wider on each side than the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place, excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without compensation. 6 CONCRETE Unless otherwise directed, all concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. All appropriate testing shall be performed according to the American Society of Testing Materials. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall conform to AASHTO M -85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C -33. All ready mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C -94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of 3" to 5 ", except when admixtures or special placement considerations are required. SectionN.doc Page 6 of 128 8/6/2013 • Section N — Technical Specifications The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all concrete placement. All concrete shall be tested in the following manner: Placement of less than 5 cubic yards (cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise, for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding 5 cy, one set of 3 compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and compensation or denial thereof. 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 7.1 EXCAVATION Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a point 6" outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. Concrete shall be poured "in the dry', 7.2 FORMS Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal (except curbs, metal only, unless by written permission from Engineer). They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or springing. 8 REINFORCEMENT When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed: ASTMA -A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM A185). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Epoxy coated reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM 775/A77 M -86 requirements. 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the contract unit price for the item of work specified. 9 OBSTRUCTIONS Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof. Should it become necessary to change the position of water or gas or other pipes, sewer drains, or poles, the Engineer shall be at once notified of the locality and circumstances, and no claims for damages arising from the delay in adjusting the pipe, sewer drains or poles shall be made. Failure of the plans to show the location, nature or extent of any existing structures or SectionN.doc Page 7 of 128 8/6/2013 Section N - Technical Specifications obstructions shall not be the basis of a claim for extra work. Any survey monument or benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means. 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards, whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved material. All replaced base shall be a minimum 8" compacted thickness, or same thickness as base destroyed plus 2 ", if over 6 ", and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T- 180. Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor, materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per lineal foot of main or square yard of base. The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the pipe. All over this will be at the Contractor's expense. The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard: concrete - per square foot; curbs - per lineal foot; sidewalk 4" or 6" thick - per square foot. Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of 6" thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10 /10 welded wire mesh (also see Articles 8 and 30). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work. 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the construction progress. The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration Activities within a reasonable time following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests. Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work. SectionlV.doc Page 8 of 128 8/6/2013 • Section 1V — Technical Specifications The contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on any and all phases of the contract work. The contractor shall not obtain water from local residents or businesses except as the contractor shall obtain written permission. Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's wastewater treatment plants, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the treatment plants will be coordinated at the pre - construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory requirements. 12 DEWATERING 12.1 GENERAL Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the dry". The contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity underdrain system, or sumps with pumps. Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of handling large volumes of air as well as of water. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work, the surrounding area, or the general public. He shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this he may be required to conduct the water to a suitable place of discharge may be determined by the Engineer. The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures. 12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL The City of Clearwater will hold the Contractor responsible for obtaining a Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Groundwater from Any Non - Contaminated Site Activity prior to dewatering or discharging into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways. Prior to discharging produced groundwater from any construction site, the contractor must collect samples and analyze the groundwater, which must meet acceptable discharge limits. The following document has been incorporated into this section for reference... SectionIV.doc Page 9 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON- CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY City Notification Procedure - Contractor must provide the City of Clearwater Environmental Department with the following information prior to beginning dewatering activities: 1) A copy of all groundwater laboratory results 2) A copy of the FDEP Notification It is recommended that the Contractor call or meet with the City Environmental staff if you have any questions. You may contact the City at 562 -4750 for direction or further assistance. STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON - CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY The facility is authorized to discharge produced ground water from any non - contaminated site activity which discharges by a point source to surface waters of the State, as defined in Chapter 62- 620, F.A.C., only if the reported values for the parameters listed in Table 1 do not exceed any of the listed screening values. Before discharge of produced ground water can occur from such sites, analytical tests on samples of the proposed untreated discharge water shall be performed to determine if contamination exists. Minimum reporting requirements for all produced ground water dischargers. The effluent shall be sampled before the commencement of discharge, again within thirty (30) days after commencement of discharge, and then once every six (6) months for the life of the project to maintain continued coverage under this generic permit. Samples taken in compliance with the provisions of this permit shall be taken prior to actual discharge or mixing with the receiving waters. The effluent shall be sampled for the parameters listed in Table 1. TABLE 1 SectionlV.doc Page 10 of 128 8/6/2013 Screening Values for Discharges into: Parameter Fresh Waters Coastal Waters Total Organic Carbon (TOC) 10.0 mg /1 10.0 mg/1 PH, standard units 6.0 -8.5 6.5 -8.5 Total Recoverable Mercury — by Method 1631E 0.012 µg /1 0.025 µg/1 Total Recoverable Cadmium 9.3 i.g /1 9.3 µg/1 Total Recoverable Copper 2.9 µg /1 2.9 µg/1 Total Recoverable Lead 0.03 mg /1 5.6 µg/1 Total Recoverable Zinc 86.0 µg/1 86.0 µg/1 SectionlV.doc Page 10 of 128 8/6/2013 Section N — Technical Specifications If any of the analytical test results exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, except TOC, the discharge is not authorized by this permit or by the Ciry of Clearwater. (a) For initial TOC values that exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, which may be caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds, the permittee may request to be exempted from the TOC requirement. To request this exemption, the permittee shall submit additional information with a Notice of Intent (NOI), described below, which describes the method used to determine that these compounds are naturally occurring. The Department shall grant the exemption if the permittee affirmatively demonstrates that the TOC values are caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds. (b) The NOI shall be submitted to the appropriate Department district office thirty (30) days prior to discharge, and contain the following information: 1. the name and address of the person that the permit coverage will be issued to; 2. the name and address of the facility, including county location; 3. any applicable individual wastewater permit number(s); 4. a map showing the facility and discharge location (including latitude and longitude); 5. the name of the receiving water; and 6. the additional information required by paragraph (3)(a) of this permit. (c) Discharge shall not commence until notification of coverage is received from the Department. For fresh waters and coastal waters, the pH of the effluent shall not be lowered to less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units for coastal waters, or raised above 8.5 units, unless the permittee submits natural background data confirming a natural background pH outside of this range. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units in coastal waters, the pH shall not vary below natural background or vary more than one (1) unit above natural background for fresh and coastal waters. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be higher than 8.5 units, the pH shall not vary above natural background or vary more than one (1) unit below natural background of fresh and coastal waters. The permittee shall include the natural background pH of the receiving waters with the results of the analyses required under paragraph (2) of this permit. For purposes of this section only, fresh waters are those having a chloride concentration of less than 1,500 mg/1, and coastal waters are those having a chloride concentration equal to or greater than 1,500 mg/l. SectionIV.doc Page 11 of 128 8/6/2013 Screening Values for Discharges into: Parameter Fresh Waters Coastal Waters Total Recoverable Chromium (Hex.) 11.0 µg /1 50.0 µg/1 Benzene 1.0 µg/1 1.0 tg /1 Naphthalene 100.0 1.1g/1 100.0 tg /1 If any of the analytical test results exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, except TOC, the discharge is not authorized by this permit or by the Ciry of Clearwater. (a) For initial TOC values that exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, which may be caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds, the permittee may request to be exempted from the TOC requirement. To request this exemption, the permittee shall submit additional information with a Notice of Intent (NOI), described below, which describes the method used to determine that these compounds are naturally occurring. The Department shall grant the exemption if the permittee affirmatively demonstrates that the TOC values are caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds. (b) The NOI shall be submitted to the appropriate Department district office thirty (30) days prior to discharge, and contain the following information: 1. the name and address of the person that the permit coverage will be issued to; 2. the name and address of the facility, including county location; 3. any applicable individual wastewater permit number(s); 4. a map showing the facility and discharge location (including latitude and longitude); 5. the name of the receiving water; and 6. the additional information required by paragraph (3)(a) of this permit. (c) Discharge shall not commence until notification of coverage is received from the Department. For fresh waters and coastal waters, the pH of the effluent shall not be lowered to less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units for coastal waters, or raised above 8.5 units, unless the permittee submits natural background data confirming a natural background pH outside of this range. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units in coastal waters, the pH shall not vary below natural background or vary more than one (1) unit above natural background for fresh and coastal waters. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be higher than 8.5 units, the pH shall not vary above natural background or vary more than one (1) unit below natural background of fresh and coastal waters. The permittee shall include the natural background pH of the receiving waters with the results of the analyses required under paragraph (2) of this permit. For purposes of this section only, fresh waters are those having a chloride concentration of less than 1,500 mg/1, and coastal waters are those having a chloride concentration equal to or greater than 1,500 mg/l. SectionIV.doc Page 11 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications In accordance with Rule 62- 302.500(1)(a -c), F.A.C., the discharge shall at all times be free from floating solids, visible foam, turbidity, or visible oil in such amounts as to form nuisances on surface waters. If contamination exists, as indicated by the results of the analytical tests required by paragraph (2), the discharge cannot be covered by this Generic Permit. The facility shall apply for an individual wastewater permit at least ninety (90) days prior to the date discharge to surface waters of the State is expected, or, if applicable, the facility may seek coverage under any other applicable Department generic permit. No discharge is permissible without an effective permit. If the analytical tests required by paragraph (2) reveal that no contamination exists from any source, the facility can begin discharge immediately and is covered by this permit without having to submit an NOI request for coverage to the Department. A short summary of the proposed activity and copy of the analytical tests shall be sent to the applicable Department district office within one (1) week after discharge begins. These analytical tests shall be kept on site during discharge and made available to the Department if requested. Additionally, no Discharge Monitoring Report forms are required to be submitted to the Department. All of the general conditions listed in Rule 62- 621.250, F.A.C., are applicable to this Generic Permit. There are no annual fees associated with the use of this Generic Permit. 13 SANITARY MANHOLES 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe. The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed twenty four inches. Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. 13.2 PRECAST TYPE Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of 5 inches. The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be SectionN.doc Page 12 of 128 8/6/2013 • Section N — Technical Specifications a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "0" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days. Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve contractor of responsibility for compliance to these specifications unless letter from contractor requesting specific variance is approved by the City Engineer. Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before being sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered. Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of Clearwater Engineering Index #302 Sheets 1 and 2 of 2. Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed. The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five (5) inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section IV, Article 23.7 — Asphaltic Concrete — Adjustment of Manholes. 13.3 DROP MANHOLES Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as detailed on the drawings. 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Detail 301. 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type II Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class I) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equal. Interior of built up manholes which have sewers entering with a free drop or which receive discharge from a force main shall have the inside plastered with 1/2 -inch of grout and coated as precast manholes below. The exterior of all precast manholes shall have a 15 mil dry thickness of PROCO EP214 -351 Sewper Coating or approved equal. The interior shall be AGRU SUREGRIP HDPE or PP -R Liner with a minimum thickness of 2 mm. 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a manhole adapter coupling by Flo Control, Inc., or approved water stop coupling. SectionIV.doc Page 13 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 14 BACKFILL Material for backfill shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from organic matter or debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than 3" in the largest dimension and all fill shall be similar material. Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand shovels and thoroughly compacted to 12" above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means. Backfill under all types of paving shall be compacted in layers not to exceed 12" in thickness unless alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98% compaction as determined by the modified Proctor Density Test to the bottom of pavement. Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted the full depth to the ground surface to a minimum of 95% compaction of AASHTO T 180 Standard Density Test. The cost of backfill shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of the pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structure. 15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, the trenches shall be bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be satisfactory to the Engineer. The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation. 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES Sanitary Sewer or Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated and removed from the site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off - site at his expense. The limits of the excavation shall be determined in the field by the Engineer. 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of unsuitable material excavated and replaced with suitable material as determined by either cross sections of the excavation, truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal. SectionlV.doc Page 14 of 128 8/6/2013 • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT • The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment, tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item. • 18 UNDERDRAINS The Contractor shall construct sub - surface drainage pipe as directed in the Contract Scope of Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT crushed aggregate, located behind the back of curb and aggregate surface covered with a non - degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be 8" diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F -758 "Standard Specification For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of 46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M -189 described in FDOT Section 948 -4.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 - SDR 35. Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A -2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C, manufactured per ASTM F949 -93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60% flatting and with a double gasket joint. Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non - perforated pipe with compacted backfill. All poly- chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140 -N or approved equal) per the construction detail drawings. 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of lineal feet of 8" Sub -drain in place and accepted. 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be based upon the unit price per lineal foot for underdrain as measured above, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain (specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean -outs, sod, driveway, road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item. 19 STORM SEWERS All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be reinforced concrete unless otherwise specified or approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 941 of the current FDOT Specifications. SectionIV.doc Page 15 of 128 8/6/2013 Section N — Technical Specifications All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent (as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit price for the pipe. All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty is found in the fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and not simply wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout. 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the stations and left or right offsets of all manholes, inlet structures and terminals ends of subdrains, as measured from the nearest downstream manhole along the centerline of the sewer along with the elevations of the north edge of manhole cover, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets. (Gutter) 19.2 TESTING The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly watertight sewer under all conditions. At the discretion of the City Engineer or his designee, the watertightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring the infiltration. The watertightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section of the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 150 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No trench made joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted, measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap, labor and incidentals, etc.). SectionIV.doc Page 16 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS • 20.1 MATERIALS • 20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform with ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R. 35. Sewer pipe with more than 10 feet of cover shall be SDR 26. The pipe shall be plainly marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212 76. The laying length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of 20 -feet. Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for DIP water main except pipe shall be interior "polylined" in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in Technical Section 41. A two -way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property line. 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe except that DIP shall be "polylined" in accordance with manufactures recommendations. All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. 20.2 INSTALLATION 20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Installation of gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained in ASTM D 2321 and Unibell UNI B 5. The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable width (typically pipe OD plus 8 to 12 -inch on each side) allowing working space to place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted haunching material or pipe alignment. Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to prevent flotation or misalignment. SectionIV.doc Page 17 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the contractor will be required to remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (1/2" Dia. aggregate) to provide firm support of pipe. Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint 2 feet in length and shall use an approved water stop around pipe joint entry. The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The contractor is required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction inspector the location of all new laterals. 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS The contractor shall submit to the Engineer a marked set of "As Built" construction drawings describing both the stations and left or right offset of all lateral terminal ends as measured from the nearest downstream manhole along the center line of the sewer main. The as built drawings will also describe elevations of the north edge of the manhole cover rings and inverts of all main pipes in manholes. 20.4 TESTING 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 50 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The Contractor shall TV inspect all mains to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance. Any infiltration, dips or sags of more than 1/4 -inch shall be cause for rejection. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.I. for two (2) hours, as described in Section 41.04 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains. SectionIV.doc Page 18 of 128 8/6/2013 • Section IV — Technical Specifications 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT 20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per lineal foot per appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes. Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per lineal foot of pipe as measured from the centerline of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two -way cleanout at the property line. Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering, backfill and grading. 20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 21 DRAINAGE The Contractor shall provide proper outlet for all water courses and drains interrupted during the progress of the work and replace them in as good condition as he found them. 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 22.1 BASE This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall refer to Section IV, Article 1 "Scope of Work" of the city's Contract Specifications for additional roadway base and subgrade items. Roadway base shall be 8" compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be 12" compacted minimum thickness with a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the base, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material shall be included in the bid item for base. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all base and subgrade placement or reworking. The following base materials are acceptable: SectionlV.doc Page 19 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 1. SHELL BASE: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 2. LIMEROCK BASE: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 3. CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed concrete material shall be FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 185. LBR and gradation tests shall be provided to the city by the Contractor once a week for continuous operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 4. SOIL CEMENT BASE: Unless otherwise noted, soil cement base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 270 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. An Asphalt Rubber Membrane Interlayer (ARMI) shall be included in the pavement design per Section 341 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) to minimize reflective cracking unless otherwise noted in the project plans and specifications. The ARMI layer shall be overlaid with asphalt on the same day it is placed for the Contractor to receive full compensation for the work. The soil cement base design shall be by a certified lot under the direction of a Registered Florida Professional Engineer, and must be approved by the City Engineer. Said design shall provide for a minimum of 300 P.S.I. in seven days. All plant mixed soil cement shall be certified by a registered laboratory that has been approved by the Engineer. The only approved method for spreading the cement is the use of a spreader box. The use of a spreader bar for spreading cement will not be allowed. The applying of the cement shall not be allowed when the wind velocity is sufficient to jeopardize material interests (i.e. vehicles, etc.) from airborne cement particles. The density testing frequency shall be at the discretion of the registered Florida Professional Engineer responsible for the soil cement design. 5. ASPHALT BASE: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 280 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base. 6. REWORKED BASE: When the plans call for the working of the existing base, the finished reworked base shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 8" unless SectionIV.doc Page 20 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, and be constructed in accordance with the applicable FDOT requirements for the type of material used. The density requirements (except for asphalt and soil cement base) shall be per Section 200 -7 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). For asphalt, the density requirements are per Section 330 -11 and for soil cement per Section 270 -5 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half -inch (1/2 "). Areas deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place. 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item), stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 22.2 SUBGRADE All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the subgrade, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing, grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value after the mixing of materials for the stabilized subgrade. 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth shall be per Section 161 -6.4 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values shall be per Section 160 -7.2 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values shall either be corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place (latest edition). SectionN.doc Page 21 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in the bid item for base. 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS This specification is for the preparation and application of all S -Type Marshall Mix Design asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted. 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 23.1.1 AGGREGATE All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 through 915 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall note that the City shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. Tests to be performed by the independent testing laboratory every 1000 tons include, but are not limited to, Marshall stability and flow, extraction/gradation and cores to determine density and thickness. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the Contractor. Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined by the following: 1. Density per Section 330 -11 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per Section 330 -13 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of 'A" or greater shall be corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness SectionIV.doc Page 22 of 128 8/6/2013 • • • Section N — Technical Specifications for a length extending at least 25' from each end of the deficient area, or when the Engineer allows for an overlay per Section 330 - 15.2.3 of FDOT's Standard Specifications 2000 edition. In addition, for excesses of i /a" or greater, the Engineer will determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness specified in the contract. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all asphalt. 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES All asphalt mix designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer PRIOR to the commencement of the paving operation. Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) material may be substituted for aggregate in the asphaltic concrete mixes up to 25% by weight. 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements: Table 1: Layer Thickness for Asphalt (Layers Are Listed in Sequence of Construction) COURSE THICKNESS (Inches) LAYER THICKNESS (Inches) Type S —I Type S —I with Type S —III Top Layer Type S —III FC -3 Type S —III with FC -3 Top Layer Type S —I with FC -3 Top Layer 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st rd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1 1 1 1%2 1%2 2 11/4 3/4 * 1 1 21/2 11/4 11/4 11/2 1 11/2 1 3 11/2 11/2 2 1 2 1 * At the Engineer's discretion, 2" of S -III is acceptable for use on residential streets Additional Notes: 1. Type S —III shall be limited to the final (top) structural layer (one layer only). 2. All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. All pavement designs shall include a minimum of two inches of asphalt. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible to review the project plans for complete pavement design detail. SectionIV.doc Page 23 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 5. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, Type S —III per Section 331 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used as final riding surface on streets with the speed limit of less than 35 mph, streets with an average daily traffic (ADT) of less than 3000, and all residential streets. 6. An FC -3 friction course per Section 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used on streets with a speed limit of 35 mph or greater, and streets with an ADT of 3000 or greater. 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture, surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, etc.) shall be in accordance with Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 23.6.1 CRACKS Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method. 2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the level of the surrounding roadway surface. 3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking. 4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 23.6.2 POTHOLES Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method. 2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole. 3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted. 4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each item. The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions: The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements. The riser shall consist of an A -36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum requirements of A.S.T.M. A -36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel SectionlV.doc Page 24 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per manufacturer's specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure that the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each riser. If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable. All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On arterial roadways, the manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree aeration vents, etc. will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure that they are not paved over. It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the scheduled paving. • 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed by the Construction Inspector or Engineer, with payment to be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt. 2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans. 3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements. 4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. Prior to paving, all construction areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre- wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the job site. 5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost (including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard • SectionlV.doc Page 25 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be ' /a" above the lip or face of said curb per City Index 101. 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 1. Unless otherwise noted in this section, all of the asphaltic concrete specifications in Sections 23.1 through 23.8 above shall apply to superpave asphaltic concrete. All asphaltic concrete pavement shall be designed and placed in accordance with the FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (latest edition). 2. All aggregate shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 and 902 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 3. All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Asphaltic binder shall be Grade PG 67 -22 unless otherwise specified in the Scope of Work. 4. All superpave mix designs shall conform to Sections 320 and 334 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 5. All general construction requirements shall conform to Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used. 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack and/or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching, filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and specifications. 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in accordance with the following provisions: 1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price Index varies more than 10% from the bid price at the time of the bid opening. 2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet site. The address is: http://www11.myflorida.com. It is under the section "Doing Business Sectionl.doc Page 26 of 128 8/6/2013 • • Section N — Technical Specifications with FDOT" in the "Contracts Administration" section under "Asphalt Index ". For additional information, call FDOT @ 850- 414 -4000. 3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be used for the initial determination of the asphalt price. 4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt will be used for payment calculation. 5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index. 6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat. 7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time. 8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt. 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 25.1 IRRIGATION 25.1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and/or specified. Work noted as "NIC ", "existing ", or "by others" is not included in this pay item. B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the turf/landscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of the Engineer. 25.1.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope, mainline, system pressure, controls, etc. B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work shall apply. C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the contractor's expense. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of three (3) hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information: Section1V.doc Page 27 of 128 8/6/2013 Section ry - Technical Specifications 1. Index sheet stating the contractor's address and business telephone number, 24 hour emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where replacement equipment can be purchased. 2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract. 3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment. 4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and "hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered. a. Four -hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and maintenance. b. Two -hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and maintenance. 25.1.1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting requiring excavation 24 in. diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of main lines. B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials. C. The Irrigation Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen, or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the contractor. D. The Irrigation Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the public. 25.1.1.3 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City of Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater or FDOT. 25.1.2 PRODUCTS 25.1.2.1 GENERAL A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted. SectionIV.doc Page 28 of 128 8/6/2013 • Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.1.2.2 PIPING A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and tested in accordance with these specifications. B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785. C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80. 25.1.2.3 PIPE FITTINGS A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval. The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples. 25.1.2.4 PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end. B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe. 25.1.2.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant. 25.1.2.6 GATE VALVES 25.1.2.6.1 MANUAL GATE VALVES 2 IN. AND SMALLER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. 200 -250 psi Ball Valve 2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals 3. Threaded -Dual end Union Connectors 4. Non -Shock Safe -T Shear Stem 5. Safe -T Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing Company , Sylmer, California, or approved equal. 25.1.2.6.2 GATE VALVES 21/2" IN. AND LARGER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. AWWA -C -509 2. 200 lb. O.W.G 3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B SectionlV.doc Page 29 of 128 8/6/2013 Section N — Technical Specifications 4. Deep socket joints 5. Rising stem 6. Bolted bonnet 7. Double disc 8. Equipped with 2" square operating key with tee handle B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve 3" and larger. The "street key" shall be 5' long with a 2" square operating nut. 25.1.2.7 SLEEVES A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater) 25.1.2.8 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance - pressure across -the diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25 -30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 150 psi. B. The valve body and bonnet shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic, stainless steel and other chemical/UV resistant materials. The valve's one -piece diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice. C. The valve body shall have a 1" inch (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch slip by slip inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections. D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation. E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California, or approved equal. F. Identify all control valves using metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings. 25.1.2.9 VALVE BOXES A. For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks #36 concrete value box with #36 -T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal. B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 (10 ") circular valve box with #181015 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek #182001 (6 ") economy turf box with #182002 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. 25.1.2.10 DRIP IRRIGATION 25.1.2.10.1 CONSTRUCTION A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one -half inch (1/2 ") low- density linear polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self - cleaning, integral drippers at a specified spacing, (12 ", 18 ", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside SectionlV.doc Page 30 of 128 8/6/2013 • Section N — Technical Specifications diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self - flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper. 25.1.2.10.2 OPERATION A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet pressure of seven to seventy (7 -70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating pressure shall be between 15 -45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9 gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow /reduced pressure compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be available in 12 ", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified. Techline pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius shall be 7 ". B. For on- surface or under mulch installations, 6" metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be installed 3' -5' on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction. 25.1.2.10.3 LINE FLUSHING VALVES A. The sub - surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect directly to the dripline. 25.1.2.10.4 AIR/VACUUM RELIEF VALVE A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an Air/Vacuum Relief Valve at its high point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi. 25.1.2.10.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressures of 25 psi. Regulating accuracy shall be within =/ -6 %. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high - impact engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the water passage. 25.1.2.10.6 FILTERS A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance. Section1V.doc Page 31 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.1.2.10.7 FITTINGS A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the integrity of the subsurface irrigation system. 25.1.2.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall function if submerged in water. B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to insure waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box. C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt alkaline battery for one full year regardless of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either sequentially or independently. D. The controller shall have three independent programs with eight start times each, station run time capability from one minute to twelve hours in one minute increments, and a seven day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of manual single station or manual program operation. E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.2.12 FIELD TRANSMITTER A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall operate on one 9V alkaline battery. B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven -key programming pad. A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after one minute when not in use. C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIX. Control Modules. D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. SectionN.doc Page 32 of 128 8/6/2013 • • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.1.2.13 LATCHING SOLENOID A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES -B, GB, of EFB series valve. B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.3 EXECUTION 25.1.3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general details of the work. B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced. C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed, except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by outside authorities. E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned in these Technical Special Provisions. F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the decisions. In event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost. G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the manner by which it relates to the installation. H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. I. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving prior to roadway base. SectionlV.doc Page 33 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.1.3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 25.1.3.2.1 TRENCHING - GENERAL A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches. Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on Drawings. B. Maintain 6 in. horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all lines of other trades. C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind. D. Maintain 6 in. vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45 degrees to 90 degrees. E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities. 25.1.3.2.2 BACKFILLING A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have 18" of fill placed over the pipe. B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter larger than Y2 in. C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Specification Book, 1996 Edition. D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil. E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs. F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per AASHTO T 180 - latest edition. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed 95% of maximum density. G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more than six (6 ") inches thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities. 25.1.3.2.3 ROUTING OF PIPING: A. Routing of pressure and non - pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines. 1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations. 2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated. C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure supply line. D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original Drawings, and without additional cost. SectionlV.doc Page 34 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of approved layout. 25.1.3.3 INSTALLATION 25.1.3.3.1 WATER SUPPLY A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost to the Owner. 25.1.3.3.2 ASSEMBLIES A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings. B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly. C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical Special Provisions. D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the male threads only. 25.1.3.3.3 SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER) A. The contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway, utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies. 25.1.3.3.4 PLASTIC PIPE A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent. 1. Allow welded joints as least 15 minutes setup /curing time before moving or handling. 2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water pressure is on. 3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent manufacturer. C. Curing 1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least 24 hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure. D. Flushing the system: 1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control valves and flush out the system with a full head of water. E. Installing piping under existing pavement: 1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & boring. SectionlV.doc Page 35 of 128 8/6/2013 Section N — Technical Specifications 2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be accomplished at no additional cost. 25.1.3.3.5 CONTROLLERS A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans. 1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineers representative prior to installation. 25.1.3.3.6 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than 6 in., nor less than 4 in. cover from the top of the valve to finish grade. B. Install valves in a plumb position with 24 in. minimum maintenance clearance from other equipment, 3 feet minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer than 7 feet from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways. C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for each sprinkler zone. 25.1.3.3.7 GATE VALVES A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper maintenance. B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill. 25.2 LANDSCAPE 25.2.1 GENERAL 25.2.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Contract Documents shall include the Plans, Details, Specifications, Bid Proposal, Contract Agreement, including Installation Schedule, all Addenda, and Contractual and Special Conditions when required. 25.2.1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and environmental matters. B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing. 25.2.1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to the work specified in this Section. The Scope of Work includes everything for and SectionlV.doc Page 36 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans, Schedules, Notes, and as specified herein. B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish, plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans. C. Work under this Section shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the landscape drawings. D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document. 25.2.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work, shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their commencement of work on the project. B. All work of this Section shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices. C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plan shall predominate and be considered the controlling document. D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among persons in his employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting from compliance or non - compliance with these standards. E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is built into or affects the work in this Section. F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to excavation. Call "One Call" at 1- 800 - 432 -4770. G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect. 25.2.1.5 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance period, two copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one year. B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all specified work. SectionIV.doc Page 37 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.1.6 ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS A. If there are additions /alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions /alternates at the time of bidding. B. The Owner, through his Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void. C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk. D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions and warranties stated herein. 25.2.1.7 ABBREVIATIONS /DEFINITIONS O.A. or HT: The over -all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. C.T.: C.W.: SPR.: Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds. Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the fronds. Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. ST TR.: Straight trunk. MIN.: Minimum. GAL.: Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc. O.C.: On center, distance between plant centers. DIA.: Diameter. LVS.: Leaves. SectionlV.doc Page 38 of 128 8/6/2013 • • D.B.H.. CAL.: B &B: PPP: FG: STD.: Section IV — Technical Specifications Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4 -1/2 feet above grade. Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade, larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade. Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Plants per pot. Field grown. Standard, single, straight trunk. Owner: To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work is performed. Owner's Representative: Owner's on -site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of materials specified and execution of installation. Contractor: Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor. Landscape Architect: This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the landscape Plans and Specifications. 25.2.1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 25.2.1.8.1 PLANT MATERIALS A. Provide container grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered. B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time. C. Balled and burlapped plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than 1 foot diameter of ball to every 1 inch caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less than 2/3 of root ball diameter. B & B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch. SectionIV.doc Page 39 of 128 8/6/2013 Section N — Technical Specifications D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root pruning to be done a minimum of 4 weeks before removal from the field and planting at the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except plastic shrink wrap for transport only. E. Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of 12 inches of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling. Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within 24 hours of delivery. F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots moist. G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. H. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty -four (24) hours after stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing in a shaded area. 25.2.1.9 JOB CONDITIONS 25.2.1.9.1 ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS. A. The Contractor shall examine the sub - grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of conditions and full responsibility for the completed work. B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape Architect for adjustments to the Schedule. C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting procedures. D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing prior to planting. E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to the planting of lawns, protecting lawn trees and promptly repairing damages from planting operations. 25.2.1.9.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy SectionlV.doc Page 40 of 128 8/6/2013 • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications to the Owner's Representative and/or the Landscape Architect for approval. The Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule. B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc. in order to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. C. The Owner's Representative's may request in writing work stoppage. Upon written request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor with respect to any additional costs which may result from work stoppage. 25.2.1.9.3 UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities. Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned. 25.2.2 PRODUCTS 25.2.2.1 MATERIALS 25.2.2.1.1 PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE A. Plant species, sizes, etc. shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material Scheduled. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names accepted in the nursery trade. 25.2.2.1.2 PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect pests or their eggs, plant diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in leaf and shall have healthy, well- developed root systems. B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable. C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II, Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition). D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with requirements for name variety, size quality, or designated area. SectionIV.doc Page 41 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that are applicable to landscape materials. F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit Landscape Architect proof of it being non - available. In such event, if the Landscape Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source. When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by adjustment to Contract amount. G. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect; with no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery. H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible. I. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B procedures. J. Container -grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice -versa provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect approves the substitution. K. Container grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound condition exists. 25.2.2.1.3 GRASSES: SOD OR SEED A. Sod or seed (as /if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious week, freshly mowed before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than 24 hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation. B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place. Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements. 25.2.2.1.4 MULCH A. Mulch shall be 100% Grade `B" shredded cypress bark mulch, thoroughly mixed with a pre- emergence weed killer according to the label directions as specified on the plan. B. Install mulch to an even depth of 3" before compaction. SectionIV.doc Page 42 of 128 8/6/2013 • Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.2.1.5 FERTILIZER A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws. B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein. C. Agriform 20 -10 -5 fertilizer tablets, or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St. Augustine grass at the rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per one thousand (1,000) square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be 1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than '/4 the nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e. manganese, iron, zinc, copper, etc.). 25.2.2.1.6 STAKES AND GUYS A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used. B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over 2" caliper. Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees 2" caliper and under. A minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree shall be used. C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with a minimum of 3 stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x 4" by 16" wood connected with two - 3/4" steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk. D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved. 25.2.2.1.7 PLANTING SOIL A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test, prior to planting and at no additional cost to the Contract, any soils which may be unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to the Landscape Architect immediately in writing. B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist of 1/3 peat and 2/3 sandy loam, with no lumps over 1 ". C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil. There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 — 6.5 pH) with no excess of calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or SectionlV.doc Page 43 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt. D. Bed preparation for annual beds under 1 gallon container size shall consist of 3" of Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width of planting area. Rototil organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into native soil. 25.2.2.1.8 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Terra -Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans. 25.2.2.1.9 TREE PROTECTION A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal members. Space vertical members 6 feet to 8 feet on center. The barricade shall be placed so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree within a circle described by a radius of one foot for each inch of the tree's diameter at breast height DBH at 4 - 1/2 feet above grade. 25.2.2.1.10 ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and/or specifications for protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install as directed by the manufacturer. 25.2.2.1.11 PACKAGED MATERIALS A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the site. 25.2.2.1.12 PESTICIDES A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's directions. 25.2.3 EXECUTION 25.2.3.1 PREPARATION 25.2.3.1.1 OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities, irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work. B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a relocated position for any materials necessary. 25.2.3.1.2 GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas SectionIV.doc Page 44 of 128 8/6/2013 • Section TV — Technical Specifications adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's specifications. B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting bed. C. Pre - emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round -Up" or "Rodeo ", and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect. D. Should any plant material in the same, or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals, the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will conform to the required fmish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface drainage without puddling. F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over 1 - %2 inches in any dimension form individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated material off the site. 25.2.3.1.3 PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread 3 inches of Florida peat (1/3), sandy loam (1/3), or other approved organic soil amendment over the full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. 25.2.3.1.4 PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's Specifications. B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub - grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches. C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth, even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing yard drains. D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1000 square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 505 of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top 4 inches of soil. SectionlV.doc Page 45 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition. 25.2.3.2 INSTALLATION 25.2.3.2.1 BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED) A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated. Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction. B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect. C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well - drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 - 6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction. 25.2.3.2.2 LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc. as the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent blockage of signage, etc. B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the normally accepted spacing for each species. C. Leave an 18 inch (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant sizes. D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as possible to the intent of the plans. 25.2.3.2.3 PLANTING PROCEDURES A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root ball about 1 inch higher than the surrounding grade. C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20 -10 -5 planting tablets, or approved equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the middle and the bottom of the root mass. SectionN.doc Page 46 of 128 8/6/2013 • • Section IV — Technical Specifications Application rate: 1 gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet 3 gallon 2 - 21 gram tablet 5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet 7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet Trees 3 tablets each 1/2" (12 millimeters) caliper Palms 7- 21 gram tablets D. Native soil shall be used in back - filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers. E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 inches (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all tie -down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the back -fill up to the proper grade Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection. F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade. G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant a minimum of 18 inches from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant. H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed -free Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree angles in a triangular pattern. I. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved. 25.2.3.2.4 SODDING A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut. B. An application of 6 -6 -6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made to all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1,000 square feet. The ground shall be wet down before the sod is laid in place. C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub areas. Cut down soil level to 1 inch to 1 -1/2 inches below top of walks prior to laying sod. D. Within 2 hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of 2 inches (50 millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will SectionlV.doc Page 47 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade. E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated. F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be leveled, filling -in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas. G. On slopes steeper than 2:1 and as required, the sod shall be fastened in place with suitable wooden pins or by other approved method. 25.2.3.2.5 SEEDING A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of Transportation. See plan for type of seed. 25.2.3.2.6 TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by approved plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of 4 feet height of stake above grade and a minimum of 30 inches of stake below grade. B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of 3 stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2 inch x 4 inch x 16 inch wood connected with two 3 inch steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a minimum of 5 feet of stake above grade. C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work. D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially hazardous areas. 25.2.3.2.7 MULCHING A. All planting beds shall be weed -free prior to mulching. B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied mulch. C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a 3 inch layer (before compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified on the Plans or General Notes. D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of buildings. Maintain a minimum 3 inch clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a minimum 6 inch clearance for the walls of buildings. SectionIV.doc Page 48 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum 6 inches of non - mulched clearance from the outside edge of annuals. 25.2.3.2.8 PRUNING A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape and form of the plant. B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches, and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree. 25.2.3.2.9 CLEAN -UP A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job, keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition. C. The clean-up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying, staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications. 25.2.3.2.10 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on, about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards. B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage. C. The Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms as specified. 25.2.3.2.11 REPAIR OF DAMAGES E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by his operations to other materials, property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage. F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by his work or employees to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be done by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the Contractor who is responsible for the damage. 25.2.3.3 MAINTENANCE A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance. B. Operations: 1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds, mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control, replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections, SectionlV.doc Page 49 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash -out repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service. 2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy, vigorous growth of the landscape. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch of water for all planted materials before leaving the site. 25.2.3.4 INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE 25.2.3.4.1 INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within 15 days of notifications, the installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and/or graphic inspection report will be sent to the Owner and/or Landscape Contractor. 25.2.3.4.2 REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set forth in Plans and Specifications. B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within 15 days and notify the Landscape Architect that the correction has been made. 25.2.3.4.3 ACCEPTANCE A. After replacement of rejected plant material (if any) have been made, and completion of all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in writing. B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty period. C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the Owner. 1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such claim. 2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent ", or in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from his Contract price. The final selection rests with the Owner or his representative. SectionIV.doc Page 50 of 128 8/6/2013 • Section N — Technical Specifications 3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to compensate for the value not received from the under - specified plant materials. No additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that exceed specifications. 25.2.3.5 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a period of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant shall be given the equal amount of warranty. 26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 26.1 INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of 8" to 12" sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold and form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 26.3 MATERIALS Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material shall have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements: SectionlV.doc Page 51 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Material Property ASTM Method Value HDPE HDPE Tensile Strength D 638 3,300 psi Elasticity Modulus E= 113,000 psi Impact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft -lb /in Flexure Modulus E= 136,000 psi Expansion Coeff. c =0.009 in/in/deg F At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field samples to the above requirements. Liner shall be marked at 5 -foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS -20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Pipe Liners, Inc. 3421 N. Causeway, Suite 321, New Orleans, LA 70002, 1- 800 - 344 -3744 or approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 26.4 CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. SectionlV.doc Page 52 of 128 8/6/2013 • Section IV — Technical Specifications 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed- circuit color television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe, pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met. 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than a eight hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 26.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. SectionIV.doc Page 53 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS New driveways or existing black top driveways that must be broken back in widening the pavement (remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street) shall be constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the exception that the base shall be six (6) inches. Use Section 23 G Asphaltic Concrete as specified for the street paving. When finished surface of existing drive is gravel, replacement shall be of like material. Payment shall be the same as Plant Mix Driveways. 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Plant Mix Driveways in place and accepted. 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Plant Mix Driveways as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS This Article deleted. 29 CONCRETE CURBS Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 10 feet. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs. 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be lineal feet of curb in place and accepted. 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete SectionlV.doc Page 54 of 128 8/6/2013 • • • • Section N — Technical Specifications sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4 "), except at driveway crossings where a minimum thickness of six inches (6 ") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every 5 feet. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six (6) inches in thickness with 6/6 x 10 /10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal distance between expansion joints of no less than four (4) feet measured in any direction. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways. 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of 4" concrete sidewalk, 6" concrete sidewalk, and 6" concrete driveways in place and accepted. 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 31 SODDING Unless otherwise noted herein, the contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The area for sod application shall be loosened and excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod that has been cut for more than 72 hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure, soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract. Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be determined by the Engineer. SectionlV.doc Page 55 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials, placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor, equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. 32 SEEDING Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The seed and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic conformance with the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982 and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye Seed (to total 60 lb. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured. When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment (including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work. 33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Part B Index Numbers 200 to 235. When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans and applicable parts of the specifications, Section Numbers 7, 8, & 9, and as approved by the Engineer. Said structures shall be protected and saved from damage by the elements or other causes until acceptance of the work. 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the Index Numbers 201 and 202. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi - circular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with brick and mortar on top of concrete base. The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of the manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. SectionIV.doc Page 56 of 128 8/6/2013 • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer. 33.2 PRECAST TYPE The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturer's option. Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Manhole using 0 ring between precast sections will not be acceptable for storm structures. 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis. 34 MATERIAL USED This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 19 — MATERIAL USED. 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 20 — CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 36 STREET SIGNS The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is PROHIBITED. All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal. 37 AUDIONIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO RECORDING Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio /video recording taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets, easements, rights -of -way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of a pre - construction conditions. SectionIV.doc Page 57 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty -one (21) days prior to construction in any area. 37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio videotapes shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of pre - construction color audio -video recording documentation. 37.4 EQUIPMENT All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the Contractor. The total audio video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. 37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be free from any conversations. 37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom -in and zoom out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during videotape playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. The construction documentation shall be recorded in SP mode. 37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the videotape viewer, highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly SectionIV.doc Page 58 of 128 8/6/2013 • Section IV — Technical Specifications indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture. 37.8 LIGHTING All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No taping shall be done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects. 37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features within that construction areas zone of influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping shall not exceed forty -four (44) feet per minute. 37.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX All videotapes shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by videotape number and project title. Each videotape shall have a log of that videotape's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video tape in terms of the names of the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the date. 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE Tape coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc. within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or right of way at any one time. 37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work. 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other permanent vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a SectionN.doc Page 59 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping. 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on -site drainage controls which prevent erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days. 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc., which shall be maintained and modified as required by construction progress, and which must be approved by the City Engineer before installation. 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences, berms, sediment barriers, vegetative buffers and other measures intended to trap sediment and/or prevent the transport of sediment onto adjacent properties, or into existing water bodies; must be installed, constructed, or, in the case of vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land alteration process. Such systems shall be fully operative and inspected by the City before any other disturbance of the site begins. Earthen structures including but not limited to berms, earth filters, dams or dikes shall be stabilized and protected from drainage damage or erosion within one week of installation. 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS Areas of 3 acres or more shall be required to have temporary sedimentation basins as a positive remedy against downstream siltation and will be shown and detailed on construction plans. During development, permanent detention areas may be used in place of silt basins, provided they are maintained to the satisfaction of the City. The Contractor will be required to prohibit discharge of silt through the outfall structure during construction of any detention area and will be required to clean out the detention area before installing any permanent subdrain pipe. In addition, permanent detention areas must be totally cleaned out and operating properly at final inspection and at the end of the one year warranty period. When temporary sedimentation basins are used, they shall be capable at all times of containing at least one (1) cubic foot of sediment for each one hundred (100) square feet of area tributary to the basin. Such capacity shall be maintained throughout the project by regular removal of sediment from the basin. 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES Land alteration and construction shall be minimized in both permanent and intermittent waterways and the immediately adjacent buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and the buffer area whenever possible, and barriers shall be used to prevent access. Where in channel work cannot be avoided, precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land alteration, development and/or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area SectionIV.doc Page 60 of 128 8/6/2013 • Section IV — Technical Specifications are disturbed during land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after the in channel work is completed. Silt curtains or other filter /siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream side of the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity. Wherever stream crossings are required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be provided by the contractor and removed when construction is completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity. 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance with the following standards: a. No more than 400 lineal feet of trench shall be open at any one time; b. Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway. 38.9 MAINTENANCE • All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required. 38.10 COMPLIANCE Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and/or more stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order ". City of Clearwater Standard Detail Drawings No. 601 and 607 are examples of accepted methods that may be used or required to control erosion and siltation. SectionlV.doc Page 61 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications City of Clearwater - Erosion Control This notice is to inform the prime contractor that the City of Clearwater holds them responsible for soil erosion control on their site. The City of Clearwater Engineering Department has the responsibility to minimize the amount of soil erosion into the City's streets, storm sewers and waterways. The construction of a new residence or commercial site and major remodeling of an existing site creates a potential for soil erosion. These instances are usually the result of contractors and subcontractors accessing the property with equipment or construction materials. Then rain storms redistribute the eroded soil into the adjacent streets, storm systems and waterways. When erosion takes place, a City Inspector will place a correction notice at the site. The procedure will be as follows: 1st occurrence Warning 2nd occurrence - $32 Re- inspection Fee 3rd occurrence $80 Re- inspection Fee 4th occurrence Stop Work Order Dependent on the severity of the erosion, the City's Engineering Department may elect to rectify the erosion problem and charge the contractor accordingly. The attached drawings and details are recommendations for the contractor to use as means to support the site from eroding. The contractor may elect to shovel and sweep the street daily or on an as needed basis. However, erosion must be held in check. If the contractor would like to meet with a City inspector on any particular site, please contact Construction Services at 562 -4750 or Planning & Development Services at 562 -4741. Erosion Control Required - City of Clearwater's Code of Ordinances requires erosion control on all land development projects. Erosion control must be in place and maintained throughout the job. Failure to do so may result in additional costs and time delays to the permit holder. Contact Engineering Department with specific questions at 562 -4750. SectionlV.doc Page 62 of 128 8/6/2013 • • • • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF EROSION VIOLATION UNDER SECTION 3 -701 (DIVISION 7 — EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL) OF THE CITY OF CLEARWATER CODE OF ORDINANCES, THIS SITE HAS BEEN FOUND IN VIOLATION. THIS SITE MUST BE RESTORED TO AN EROSION CONTROLLED SITE PRIOR TO ANY FURTHER DEVELOPMENT TO CONTINUE. Warning $32.00 Re- inspection Fee $80.00 Re- inspection Fee Stop Work Order DATE POSTED: CITY OF CLEARWATER PLANNING & DEVELOPMENT SERVICES 727 562 -4741 ENGINEERING /CONSTRUCTION 727 562 -4750 Inspector's Name: Received by: (Signature indicates only a copy of this notice has been received and does not in any way indicate admission of guilt or concurrence with findings of the inspector.) Inspector's Signature: IT IS A VIOLATION TO REMOVE THIS NOTICE ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERSON REMOVING THIS SIGN WILL BE PROSECUTED SectionIV.doc Page 63 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to service connection. Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by the American Public Works Association as follows: SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission Municipal Electric Systems HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission Oil Distribution and Transmission Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems Police and Fire Communications Cable Television SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems Slurry Pipe Lines SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems LAVENDER RECLAIMED WATER WHITE PROPOSED EXCAVATION Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall be 6 -inch x 3 -inch and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical curb shall be 4 -inch X 2 -inch and be placed on the curb face. 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE This article not used. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 24 — AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE. 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND APPURTENANCES 41.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in connection with the construction of potable water mains, reclaimed water mains and appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up. SectionlV.doc Page 64 of 128 8/6/2013 • • • • Section N — Technical Specifications 41.2 MATERIALS 41.2.1 GENERAL Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation, except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects during shipment and construction. 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 41.2.2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table: Size Class Thickness (In.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) 4" 51 0.26 350 6" 50 0.25 350 8" 50 0.27 350 12" 50 0.31 350 The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to centerline of pipe. Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 80 or latest revision. 41.2.2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 4 -inch through 8 -inch shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C900 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241 and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings. Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table: SectionlV.doc Page 65 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Size Dimension Ratio (OD/Thick.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) Laying Length (Ft) 4 18 150 20 6 18 150 20 8 18 150 20 Pipe larger than 8 -inch shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of ductile iron in sizes 4 -inch through 8 -inch when needed due to laying conditions or usage. The bell of 4 -inch and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1869. Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling, storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe material for potable water service. All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated 12 gauge A.W.G solid strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about 18- inches between each piece of tape. It is to be installed at every valve box through a 2 -inch PVC pipe to 12- inches minimum above the top of the concrete slab. The 2 -inch PVC pipe shall be the same length as the adjustable valve box, and the 2 -inch PVC pipe shall be plugged with a 2 -inch removable brass plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous with splices made only by direct bury 3M brand splice kit approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and elbows. 41.2.2.3 FITTINGS AND JOINTS Fitting from 4 -inch through 16 -inch in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with ANSUAWWA C153 /A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in accordance with requirements of ANSUAWWA C 153/A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with require requirements of ANSUAWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in accordance with ANSUAWWA C111 /A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSUAWWA Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic (USA) manufacture will be acceptable. 41.2.2.4 RESTRAINT Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturer's recommendations. Hydrants shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint connectors. 41.2.2.5 PIPE WITHIN CASING All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed and have properly sized casing spacers (Cascade Series) installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing. SectionlV.doc Page 66 of 128 8/6/2013 • • • • • • Section N — Technical Specifications Each end of the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or debris within the casing itself. It shall be sealed by brick and mortar, cement or any approved method by the Engineer. 41.2.3 GATE VALVES Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with respect to the vertical. Gate valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures, shall be handwheel operated with rising stems. Valves 4- inches and larger, buried in earth shall be equipped with 2 -inch square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening for all valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise). Pressure Rating: Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, nonshock. The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body. Installation: Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves. Two Inch Diameter and smaller: Not allowed. These should be approved ball valves. Three Inch Diameter: Not allowed. Four Inch to Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate Valves, 4 to 16 -inch diameter, inclusive, shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM Rubber in conformance with ANSUA.W.W.A. Standard Specification C509 -515 latest revision. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509 -515, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing body from pressure main, corrosion resistant bronze or stainless steel nonrising stem with 0 ring bonnet seal with epoxy coated inside and outside cast iron or ductile iron valve body.. Larger than Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate valves larger than 16 -inch shall be suitable for the service intended and shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM rubber in conformance with ANSI/AWWA. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509 -80, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure. All valves shall be equipped with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers, bronze or babbitt tracks and scrapers and valved by -pass. 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast iron. No PVC Risers or Derisers are allowed as part of a valve box assembly. They are to be 3 -piece valve box assembles. The lower part of the assembly can be ordered in various heights to accommodate different depths. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be provided where shown. The valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve boxes and pad detail. SectionlV.doc Page 67 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.2.5 HYDRANTS No other hydrants, other than those listed below, may be used in extension to or replacement of the City of Clearwater potable water system: • Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant, • Mueller Super Centurion 25 Fire Hydrant • AVK Nostalgic 2780. • American Darling B -84 -B. No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater. Above hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AWWA Specification C 502 and include the following modifications: 1. All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery. 2. Hydrants shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard C -502 latest revision and must be UL/FM listed. 3. Hydrants shall be of the compression type, closing with line pressure. 4. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and bottom with an 0-ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil. 5. Hydrants shall be of the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in two sections with the break flange located approximately 2 -inch above the ground line. Breakaway bolts not allowed. 6. Operating nut shall be of one -piece bronze or ductile iron construction. 7. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and corrosion due to moisture. 8. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate operation. 9. Operating nut shall be a #7 (1 -1/2 -inch) pentagon nut. 10. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, 1/4 turn type with 0-ring seals or threaded into upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking device. 11. The main valve shall be of EPDM solid rubber. 12. The seat shall be of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with 0- rings to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe. 13. The main valve stem will be 304 or higher grade stainless steel and made in two sections with a breakable coupling. 14. Hydrant shall have a 6 -inch Mechanical Joint epoxy lined elbow, less accessories. 15. Hydrant shall have a 5 -1/4 -inch valve opening, and shall be a left hand operation to open. 16. Hydrant shall be without drains. 17. Hydrant shall have two (2) 2 -1/2 -inch hose nozzles and one (1) 4 -1/2 -inch pumper nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread Specifications. SectionIV.doc Page 68 of 128 8/6/2013 • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications 18. Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow paint. All paints shall comply with AWWA standard C- 502 -85 or latest revision. All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA Specification C 502. Constrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Constrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent movement of the hydrant. All hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to 4 -inch P.V.C. water main. The largest service connection allowable on 4 -inch main shall be 1 -1/2 -inch. Service saddles shall be used on all 2- inch service connections to 6 -inch and larger mains. Service saddles (JCM 406 series or Ford FC 202 series) shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have stainless steel straps. 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials. 2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery; and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory material shall be used. 3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site. 4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. 41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS The City of Clearwater owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that are installed within their system. Therefore, any and all devices must be purchased from the City and installed by City work forces. Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery (service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 or latest revision. Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, when required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from possible backflow of water within the customers private system. The types of devices allowed are: SectionlV.doc Page 69 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 1. Double Check Valve Assembly a device composed of two single, independently acting, approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the assembly and suitable connections for testing the watertightness of each check valve. 2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device a device containing a minimum of two independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks. 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412 or Smith -Blair 622. All steel body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and 3/4 -inch bronze test plug. 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS Blow offs are not allowed. 41.3 CONSTRUCTION 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING 1. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded rolled against pipe already on the ground. 2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. 3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. 41.3.2 PIPE LAYING 41.3.2.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems plumb. All pipe installed shall be pigged and properly blown off before any pressure testing and sterilization of the pipe can be completed. The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of 30- inches and a maximum of 42- inches below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the obstructions. SectionIV.doc Page 70 of 128 8/6/2013 • Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.3.2.2 INSTALLATION Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick, ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped in the trench. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs or rejection. All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place without getting earth into it, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe. As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to prevent dirt from entering the joint space. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer. The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of 10 per cent or greater, the laying shall start at bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade. Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems; or where long radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of ANSI/AWWA C600 -82 and C900 81 or latest revisions. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable. SectionIV.doc Page 71 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 41.3.3.1 GENERAL Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified above for installation of pipe. 41.3.3.2 VALVES Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended unless shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed at the tee in all cases, not to exceed 18- inches from the main line. The valve box shall not transmit any shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished pavement or such other level as may be directed. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve box and pad detail. 41.3.3.3 HYDRANTS Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants located 10 -feet of more from the main shall have a gate valve at the main and another gate valve at the hydrant location. No valve can be located anywhere in the hydrant run to circumvent the use of two valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 5 of 5 for potable water hydrants. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer. Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a 6 -inch ductile iron branch controlled by an independent 6 inch gate valve. 41.3.3.4 ANCHORAGE Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant runout length precludes the use of hydrant connecting swivel joints. Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown on the plans. 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer. SectionlV.doc Page 72 of 128 8/6/2013 • Section IV — Technical Specifications Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the actual conditions. All fittings shall be properly sterilized and pipe will be properly swabbed before connections to existing facilities. All connections to existing facilities will be completed under the supervision of the City of Clearwater Water Division. 41.4 TESTS 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds per square inch for a period of two (2) hours and shall conform to AWWA C600 latest revision. All mains shall be pigged and flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter before any hydrostatic test can or will be performed. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and all necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor at his expense. The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line. 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater's Owner Representative 48 -hours advance notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing. 41.5 STERILIZATION Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance with AWWA C651. 41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to Federal Specification 0 S 602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or "Perchloron ". 41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing shall continue until a clean, clear stream of water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the installed blow off devices generally at the ends of the lines. 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight (8) hours and never more than 24 hours before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period. SectionIV.doc Page 73 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set. 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of Clearwater Water Division or the Owner's Representative personnel shall take samples of water from remote points of the distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall forward the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial examination in accordance with AWWA C651. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as outlined above. If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of samples shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure clearance of the water main from the Florida Department of Environmental Protection before the water distribution system is put into operation. 41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 41.6.1 GENERAL Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form. Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the applicable pay items of work: • Clearing and grubbing • Excavation, including necessary pavement removal • Shoring and/or dewatering • Structural fill • Backfill • Grading • Tracer wire • Refill materials • Joints materials • Tests and sterilization • Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. Section V.doc Page 74 of 128 8/6/2013 • • Section N — Technical Specifications 41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 41.6.2.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line, including the length of valves and fittings. 41.6.2.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains complete and ready for operation. 41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 41.6.3.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more than the tolerances permitted in ANSI/AWWA C110 /A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case, the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance. 41.6.3.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings. 41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 41.6.4.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished and installed. 41.6.4.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover. 41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 41.6.5.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and installed. The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the City of Clearwater utilities system are listed in Section 41.2.5. No exceptions. 41.6.5.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant complete including necessary thrust SectionIV.doc Page 75 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications anchorage, 6 -inch pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the hydrant lead. 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS This article not applicable. 43 TENNIS COURTS 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS All soil under courts shall be treated with DSMA 184 at the rate of 2 pounds active ingredient per 1,000 square foot. Materials shall be brought to the job site in tagged containers. Tags shall be retained and turned into the Engineer's Office. 43.1.2 BASE COURSE Base Course shall be Limerock 6" thick after compaction. Specifications for the base shall be the same as those for Limerock in Section IV - Article 22 of the City of Clearwater Technical Specifications. Subgrade stabilizing will not be required. Surface shall be cut to within 1/2" of true grade in preparation of 1" leveling course. Prior to applying prime coat, surface shall be approved by the Engineer. 43.1.3 PRIME COAT The material used for prime coat shall be cut -back Asphalt Grade RC -70 or RC -250 and shall conform to Section 300 of the Florida State Department of Transportation's "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction ". 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE A.Leveling Course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S -III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Leveling Course shall be constructed running East and West. Finish surface of leveling course shall not vary more than 1/4" when checked with a 10 foot straight edge. If a deficiency of more than IA" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE Surface course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S -III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Surface Course shall be constructed running North and South. Finish surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4" in 10 feet. Prior to application of color coat, surface shall be checked for low areas by flooding the surface with water. Low areas shall be patched as approved by the Engineer prior to application of the color coat. No areas which retain water will SectionlV.doc Page 76 of 128 8/6/2013 • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications be approved. If a deficiency of more than 1/4" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. 43.1.6 COLOR COAT 43.1.6.1 MATERIALS Materials used in the patching and color coating of Tennis Courts shall be manufactured specifically for Tennis Court Application. All materials must be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of construction. Request for approval of coating materials may be submitted prior to the opening of bids. In requests for approval, the Contractor shall present manufacturer's literature along with the name, address, and date of three previous Tennis Court applications of the proposed material. 43.1.6.2 CONSTRUCTION 43.1.6.2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION The surface to be coated must be sound, smooth, and free from loose dirt or oily materials. Prior to the application of surfacing materials, the entire surface should be checked for minor depressions or irregularities. If it is determined that minor corrections are necessary, the Contractor shall make repairs using approved tack coat and/or patching mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use. After patching the surface shall not vary more than 1/8" in ten feet in any direction. If a deficiency of more than 1/8" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. In order to provide a smooth, dense underlayment of the finish course, one or more applications of resurfacer or patch mix shall be applied to the underlaying surface as deemed necessary by the Engineer. Asphaltic concrete Surface Course with a smooth tight mix and no ponding, will not require the resurfacing or patching mix. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course which is course and rough or is ponding water will require the use of the resurfacer or patch mix. No applications shall be covered by a succeeding application until thoroughly cured. 43.1.6.2.2 FINISH COLOR COURSE The finish course shall be applied to a clean, dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. A minimum of two applications of color coat will be required. Texture of cured color coat is to be regulated in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to provide a medium speed surface for tennis play. The color of application shall be dark green for the regulation double's playing area and red for all other others. The finished surface shall have a uniform appearance and be free from ridges and tool marks. 43.1.6.3 PLAYING LINES Forty -eight (48) hours minimum after completion of the resurfacing, 2 inch wide playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with approved marking paint. SectionlV.doc Page 77 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.1.6.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS No parts of the construction involving Tennis Court surfacing or patching products shall be conducted during rainfall, or when rainfall is imminent or unless the air temperature is at least 50 degrees, Fahrenheit and rising. NOTE: The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum or 24 hours in advance of all base and asphalt related work. 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS 43.2.1 GENERAL 43.2.1.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of clay tennis court(s) as set forth in these specifications and /or the construction drawings. The scope of work is indicated on drawings and specified herein. Basis of design for clay courts with sub - surface irrigation system is Hydrogrid Tennis, Inc. or prior approved equal. 43.2.1.2 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS The Owner may make such investigation as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to perform the work and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigations of such Bidders fail to satisfy the owner that such Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work contemplated herein within the time limit agreed upon. Factors to be considered in awarding the Bid shall include the successful completion of similar sub - surface irrigation clay tennis court installations of like value, scope, size and quality as this project, with in the last five (5) years. The Owner desires to award this contract to firms that have been in business for a minimum of five (5) years. The qualifications and experience of the personnel assigned to the project will be a determining factor in the award of the Bid. 43.2.1.3 STANDARDS The Contractor shall perform all work in a thorough, workmanlike manner and conform to standards for tennis court construction as prescribed or approved by the United States (Lawn) Tennis Association and the United States Tennis Court and Tract Builders Association. The Contractor shall construct the tennis courts with laser guided equipment. 43.2.1.4 BUILDING PERMITS AND TAXES The Contractor shall secure all construction permits required by law, the City of Clearwater will waive all permit fees. 43.2.1.5 COURT LAYOUT The Owner shall establish two horizontal control points and a construction bench mark. The Contractor shall locate the four corners of each battery and shall layout the courts in conformance with the specifications and drawings. SectionIV.doc Page 78 of 128 8/6/2013 • Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.2.1.6 BUILDING REQUIREMENTS The Owner shall provide and maintain reasonable access to the construction site, as well as an area adjacent to the site for storage and preparation of materials. Adequate water outlets within fifty (50) feet of the site shall be provided. 43.2.1.7 SCHEDULE The Owner desires to award the contract to firms who will complete this project in a reasonable time schedule. Consideration in awarding this bid will be given to firms who may commence and complete the project within a reasonable period of time after award of the bid. The Owner, in its sole discretion, will determine the reasonable schedule standard as it relates to the "Notice to Proceed." 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION 43.2.2.1 SUITABILITY The Contractor shall examine the site to determine its suitability for installation of the courts. 43.2.2.2 DEMOLITION The contractor shall demo the existing tennis courts, remove the existing ten (10) foot high fence surrounding the tennis courts and all underground utilities within the limits of the construction area. Utilities extending outside the construction limits shall be capped and terminated. The existing tennis courts shall be ground into millings suitable to be mixed into the sub -grade at the proposed location of the new clay tennis courts. Any sub -grade material beneath the existing tennis courts not suitable for planting beds shall be removed and also utilized as sub -grade material beneath the new courts. All demolition materials not utilized in construction of the new courts shall be removed and disposed from the project site. The Contractor shall provide documentation of any recycled materials. 43.2.2.3 SUB -GRADE The sub -grade shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final sub -grade elevation. The sub -grade shall be graded level. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The Contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.2.4 FINAL GRADE The final grades outside the tennis court areas and within the construction limits shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final grade elevations with positive drainage away from tennis courts and towards drainage swales or outfall structures. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.3 SLOPE 43.2.3.1 SLOPE REQUIREMENTS Rate and direction of slope of the finished surfaces shall be one (1) inch in forty (40) feet, all in one plane, as indicated on the drawings. SectionIV.doc Page 79 of 128 8/6/2013 Section N — Technical Specifications 43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION 43.2.4.1 LINER Two layers of 6 mil construction plastic shall be installed over the sub -grade surface with a minimum overlap of five (5) feet where pieces are joined. Use only materials that are resistant to deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows: a. Polyethylene sheet, Construction Grade. 43.2.4.2 BASE COURSE The base course shall consist of six (6) inches of porous base material as supplied by Quality Aggregate of Sarasota Florida. The surface of the base course shall be smooth and even, and it shall be within one - quarter (1/4) inch of the established grade. 43.2.4.3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Perforated pipe shall be installed in trenches in the base course. These trenches shall be in on four (4) foot centers and shall be run perpendicular to the slope of the court. The pipe shall be two and one - quarter (2 -1/4) inch diameter with a nylon needle punched sock surrounding the pipe. Six (6) water control canisters shall be installed per court with each canister controlling five (5) grid pipe trenches. Provide all required controls systems time clocks; float switches, control wiring and solenoids, etc. for a complete sub - surface irrigation system. 43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING 43.2.5.1 CURB Brick curb shall be installed around the entire perimeter of the court area with an elevation of one - quarter (1/4) to one -half (1/2) inch above the finished screening course elevation. 43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE 43.2.6.1 COURT SURFACE A surface course of ISP Type II Aquablend or Lee Hyroblend tennis court material shall be installed over the screening course to a compacted depth of one (1) inch. The AqualHydroblend material shall be watered to its full depth immediately after leveling and then compacted by rolling with a tandem roller weighing 600 to 1000 pounds. The finished surface shall not vary from specified grade by more than one - eighth (1/8) inch. 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER Root barrier (geo -tech fabric) eighteen (18) inches height shall be placed in a trench on the outside edge of the perimeter curbing eighteen (18) inches in depth with herbicide coating buttons to prevent plant root systems in entering the sub- surface base course of the clay tennis courts. SectionlV.doc Page 80 of 128 8/6/2013 • Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.2.8 FENCING 43.2.8.1 DESIGN The contractor shall provide a total color coated fencing system as indicated on drawings and described herein. All components: frames, fabric and fittings shall be black. Basis of Design Ameristar HT-25 or prior approved equal subject to strict compliance with Ameristar published specification. 43.2.8.2 POSTS All posts shall be a minimum 2 -1/2" Ameristar HT-25 pipe; top rails 1 -5/8" Ameristar HT-25 pipe with manufacturers standard "Permacoat" color system. 43.2.8.3 FENCE FABRIC Fence Fabric shall be 1 -3/4" #6 gauge mesh throughout, manufactures standard galvanized wire with PVC coating. All fabric to be knuckled on both selvages. 43.2.8.4 GATES Provide gates at locations indicated. At service gates, provide a keeper that automatically engages gate life and holds it in the open position until manually released. Provide gate stops for double gates consisting of a mushroom -type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger -bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock. Provide latch, fork type or plunger -bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with padlock eye as an integral part of the latch. Gate Hinges — Size and material to suit gate size, non - lift -off type, and offset to permit 180 - degree gate opening. Provide one and one -half (1 -1/2) pair of hinges for each leaf over six (6) foot nominal height. 43.2.9 WINDSCREENS The contractor shall provide nine (9) foot high windscreens at all ten (10) foot high fencing. Basis of design is Durashade plus by Ball Products, Inc. or equal by Putterman. Black high - density polyethylene, eight (8) oz. per square yard edges hemmed with grommets at twelve (12) inch on center. Attach to chain link fencing at the top and bottom with 50 LBS plastic ties. 43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT 43.2.10.1 POST FOUNDATIONS Post foundations shall be not less than thirty -six (36) inches in length, eighteen (18) inches in width and thirty (30) inches in depth. Foundations shall be placed to provide an exact distance between posts of forty -two (42) feet on a doubles court and thirty -three (33) feet on a singles court. 43.2.10.2 NET POSTS & SLEEVES Net posts shall be galvanized steel having an outside diameter of not less than two and seven - eighths (2 7/8) inches with electrostatically applied enamel finish and shall be equipped with a reel type net tightening device. Post sleeves and posts shall be set plumb and true so as to support SectionIV.doc Page 81 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications the net a height of forty -two (42) inches above the court surface at the posts. Post sleeves shall be Schedule 40 PVC to be set in concrete per net post manufactures recommendation. 43.2.10.3 CENTER STRAP ANCHOR A center strap anchor shall be firmly set in accordance with the rules of the USTA. 43.2.10.4 NET A tennis net conforming to the USTA regulations shall be installed on each court. The net shall have black synthetic netting, a headband of white synthetic material in double thickness with the exterior treated for resistance to mildew and sunlight, and bottom and end tapes of back synthetic material treated to prevent deterioration from the sunlight. A vinyl coated, impregnated steel cable, having a diameter of one quarter (1/4) inch and a length five (5) feet greater than length between the net post shall hold the net in suspension. The net shall have tie strings of a synthetic material at each corner. Basis of Design — Duranet DTS by Ball Products, Inc. 43.2.10.5 CENTER STRAP Provide a center strap of white heavy duty polyester webbing with black oxide coated brass slide buckles and nickel plated double end snap. Center strap shall be placed on the net and attached to the center strap anchor. 43.2.10.6 LINE TAPES Line tapes shall be 100% nylon and shall be two (2) inches in width. The tapes shall be firmly secured by aluminum nails with aluminum length of two and one -half (2 — 1/2) inches. Positioning shall be in accordance with regulations of the USTA. 43.2.10.7 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT Deliver the following equipment to the owner: 1. Ride -on Tandem Roller - Brutus AR -I Roller, automatic forward- neutral- reverse transmission; 24 inch wide drum; 3 -horse power Briggs and Stratton engine. 2. Hand drag brooms (4 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame with 4 -1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 3. Tow drag brooms (1 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame 4 -1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 4. Deluxe Proline Line Sweeper (4 each) - friction - driven rubber sleeves; synthetic bristle brush; with fence hook cast aluminum. 5. Scarifier/Lutes (2 each) - 30" wide all aluminum; Proline. 6. Tennis Shoe Cleaners (2 each) - steel frame construction "Scrusher" exact installation location by Owner. 7. Tennis Two Step (2 each) - polyethylene construction with two rubber panels. 8. Court Rake (1 each) — six -foot length aluminum. SectionlV.doc Page 82 of 128 8/6/2013 • • Section N — Technical Specifications 43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE Provide shade structures as indicted on drawings. Basis of design: Suntrends, Inc. "Cabana Bench 8" — 8'Iong x 6' wide gable design with standard canvas canopy, direct burial installation. Provide concrete footing, size and reinforcement as required by shade structure manufacture. 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) The owner shall supply water line to within fifty (50) feet of the courts with 50 pounds per square inch running pressure at its terminus. This line shall have the capacity to supply 30 gallons of water per minute for each court. 43.2.13 CONCRETE Provide concrete consisting of Portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33, and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 3,500 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., 1 -inch maximum size aggregate, 3 -inch maximum slump. 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING 43.2.14.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide signed and sealed electrical shop drawings by a professional electrical engineer for approval of the relocation and re- aiming of the existing tennis court sport lighting fixtures and electrical service to water coolers. The shop drawings shall include all necessary information according to local electrical codes in providing a complete operating system from the existing electrical panel. The shop drawings shall provide data showing the maximum foot candles the existing fixtures will provide at its new locations for tournament play. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.14.2 RE -LAMP The Contractor shall re -lamp and clean lens of all existing lighting fixtures after relocating the light pole and fixtures to its new location. The City will provide the new lamps. 43.2.14.3 ELECTRICAL PERMIT The Contractor shall submit electrical drawings to City of Clearwater Planning and Development Services to obtain permits for installation of the electrical works. 43.2.14.4 POLES & FIXTURES The Contractor shall install three (3) new sixty foot (60') poles and fourteen (14) new fixtures. The City will purchase and provide the new poles and fixtures for the Contractor to install, any other miscellaneous items required to provide a complete operable system shall be provided by the Contractor. Attached with this specification are the photometric lumination charts for the eight -(8) tennis courts. This information is provided by Musco Sport Lighting, 1838 East Chester Drive, Suite #104, High Point, NC 27265, phone (336) 887 -0770 fax (336) 887 -0771. Contact Douglas A. Stewart. SectionIV.doc Page 83 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Contractor shall install the poles and fixtures based on the following information: Pole Ti existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5 Pole T2 existing 12 fixture pole, remove six fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T3 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5 Pole T4 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits Pole T5 new pole w /existing sixteen fixtures (8 on one side and 8 on the other) and 2 circuits Pole T6 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits Pole T7 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T8 existing 12 fixture pole, remove four fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T9 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5 Light levels ended up at 58+ footcandles. Existing poles have concrete footing approximately one foot wide on all sides Contractor shall plan relocation light poles accordingly. 43.2.14.5 ELECTRICAL CONDUITS Existing electrical conduits are installed individually to the existing light pole, it is suggested the Contractor place electrical junction boxes at existing pole locations and utilize existing conduits. New conduits will be required for the three (3) new light poles and the Contractor shall include the cost for these electrical conduits in the relocating of the new light poles. 43.2.15 WATER COOLER 43.2.15.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for the installation of water cooler in the cabana area of the tennis courts, electrical, water and drainage submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.15.2 WATER FOUNTAIN Basis for design: Halsey Taylor HOF Series — water cooler with sealed back panels, or equal. 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of court and equipment. 43.2.17 WARRANTY 43.2.17.1 EQUIPMENT The Contractor shall supply warranty cards and operation and maintenance manuals for all equipment to the Owner upon completion of construction of the project. 43.2.17.2 WARRANTY The Contractor shall warranty the courts, fencing, sidewalks and court accessories against defective materials and /or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of completion. SectionIV.doc Page 84 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.2.17.3 WARRANTY SUB - SURFACE IRRIGATION SYSTEM The Contractor shall warranty the sub - surface irrigation of the clay tennis courts for a period of two years from the day of completion. 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization, hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be necessary at outlying points. 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction permits issued by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of Transportation, or most recent addition. • 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY The general objectives of a program of work zone safety is to protect workers, pedestrians, bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives: • Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones. • Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation he will be facing as he proceeds through or around the work zone. • Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle. • Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material. • Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site). • Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices. • Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or maintenance work zones. • The 2004 Design Standards (DS), Index 600 "When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone, accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only approved temporary traffic control devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and detours marked shall be provided by appropriate signs ". SectionIV.doc Page 85 of 128 8/6/2013 Section N — Technical Specifications 2004 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction 102 -5 Traffic Control: 102 -5.1 Standards: FDOT Design Standards (DS) are the minimum standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of requirements increase with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the designated "Spring Break" season with prior approval by the City Engineer. 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS Obtain permits for Pinellas County and Florida Department of Transportation roadways. Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards. 44.3.1.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected by the construction process. 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS Consult with City Traffic staff for preliminary traffic control options. Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary. 44.3.2.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Message Board Display, Minimum of 7 -day notice period prior to road closure and maybe longer for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor. 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS 44.3.3.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION C -View Release 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS 44.3.4.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION News Release The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than 7 days. 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the Traffic Operations Division, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone SectionlV.doc Page 86 of 128 8/6/2013 • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications 562 -4750, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan. All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer or an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida. 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION The Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic control devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector. 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL Payment for work zone traffic control is a non - specific pay item to be included in the construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise in the Scope of Work in these Technical Specifications and a bid item(s) is included for Work Zone Traffic Control in the proposal form. 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and/or sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a 24 -hour per day basis and shall review the project on a day -to -day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure that routine deficiencies are corrected within a 24 -hour period. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control or to provide alternate traffic arrangements. Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety. 45 CURED -IN -PLACE PIPE LINING 45.1 INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of sanitary sewer and storm pipes by the installation if a cured in place jointless, continuous, thermosetting resin impregnated polyester flexible felt liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand SectionIV.doc Page 87 of 128 8/6/2013 Section N — Technical Specifications exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system(s) and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 45.3 MATERIALS The liner shall be polyester fiber felt tubing saturated with a resin prior to insertion. Resin type and qualities shall be as specified by the manufacturer to obtain a cured liner with the following properties: Tensile Strength Flexural Strength Flexural Modulus of Elasticity Long Term Modulus of Elasticity (50 Years) ASTM D638 ASTM D790 ASTM D790 ASTM D2290 3,000 psi 4,500 psi 300,000 psi 150,000 psi Liner shall meet strengths as shown in ASTM F1216 unless otherwise submitted and approved by the Engineer. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS -20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Insituform of North America, Inc., 3315 Democrat Road, Post Office Box 181071, Memphis, Tennessee 38118; or InLiner USA 1900 N.W. 44th St., Pompano Beach Florida 33064, 305- 979 -0802, or an approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 45.4 CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. SectionIV.doc Page 88 of 128 8/6/2013 • Section IV — Technical Specifications 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed- circuit color television, and recorded on DVD, CD VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide for a tight fit on the interior of the existing pipe to be lined. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including operations for inversion, heat curing and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, excessive wrinkling or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 95% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight -hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 45.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, lateral reconnection, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. SectionIV.doc Page 89 of 128 8/6/2013 Section N — Technical Specifications 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING 46.1 MATERIALS 46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS The pipe supplied under this specification shall be high performance, high molecular weight, high density polyethylene pipe (Driscopipe 1000) as manufactured by Phillips Driscopipe, Inc., Dallas, Texas and shall conform to ASTM D 1248 (Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34) or approved equal. Minimum cell classification values shall be 345434C as referenced in ASTM D 3350 latest edition. If fittings are required, they will be supplied under this specification and shall be molded or manufactured from a polyethylene compound having a cell classification equal to or exceeding the compound used in the pipe. To insure compatibility of polyethylene resins, all fittings supplied under this specification shall be of the same manufacture as the pipe being supplied. 46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL The resin used for manufacturer of the pipe shall be manufactured by the pipe manufacturer, thus maintaining complete control of the pipe quality. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from the same raw material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other deleterious defects, and shall be identical in color, density, melt index, and other physical properties. The polyethylene resin used shall have all ingredients pre compound prior to extrusion of pipe, in plant blending is not acceptable. The Engineer may request, as part of the quality control records submittal, certification that the pipe produced is represented by the quality assurance testing. Additionally, test results from manufacturer's testing or random sampling by the Engineer that do not meet appropriate ASTM standards or manufacturer's representation, may be cause for rejection of pipe represented by the testing. These tests may include density and flow rate measurements from samples taken at selected locations within the pipe wall and thermal stability determinations according to ASTM D 3350, 10.1.9. 46.1.3 SAMPLES The owner or the specifying engineer may request certified lab data to verify the physical properties of the materials supplied under this specification or may take random samples and have them tested by an independent laboratory. 46.1.4 REJECTION Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this specification. 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS Pipe supplied under this specification shall have a nominal IPS (Iron Pipe Size) O.D. unless otherwise specified. The SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) of the pipe supplied shall be as specified by the Engineer, on the construction plans and/or the scope of work. SectionIV.doc Page 90 of 128 8/6/2013 • • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES 46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE Pipe shall be stored on clean, level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging of the pipe. If the pipe must be stacked for storage, such stacking should be done in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The handling of the pipe should be done in such a manner that it is not damaged by dragging over sharp objects or cut by chokers or lifting equipment. 46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS Segments of pipe having cuts or gouges in excess of 10% of the wall thickness of the pipe should be cut out and removed. The undamaged portions of the pipe shall be rejoined using the butt fusion joining method. 46.3.3 PIPE JOINING Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed by the manufacturer's representative and in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to, temperature requirements, alignment, and fusion pressures. 46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE Fused segments of pipe shall be handled so to avoid damage to the pipe. When lifting fused sections of pipe, chains or cable type chokers should be avoided. Nylon slings are preferred. Spreader bars should be used when lifting long fused sections. Care should be exercised to avoid cutting or gouging the pipe. 46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE 46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS The liner(s) to be slip lined into the existing storm sewer shall have the following sizes: 12 -inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 15 -inch existing sewer. 16 -inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 18 -inch existing sewer. 18 -inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 21 -inch existing sewer. 211/2cinch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 24 -inch existing sewer. 28 -inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 30 -inch existing sewer. 34 -inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 36 -inch existing sewer. 42 -inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 48 -inch existing sewer. 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION The existing line shall be cleaned of debris and other obstructions prior to TV inspections or insertion of the polyethylene liner. Cleaning can be accomplished with a high velocity cleaner, a bucket and scrapper, root saws, corkscrews, and rodding or balling units. The method used will be determined by the condition of the existing line. Final cleaning may be required prior to inserting the liner. SectionIV.doc Page 91 of 128 8/6/2013 Section N — Technical Specifications 46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS All excavations shall conform to OSHA requirements and any additional requirements as set by the specifying engineer or his representative. Insertion shaft excavations shall coincide with points requiring removal of obstructions or shall be determined by the engineer. An entry slope grade of 2 1/2:1 maximum shall be used to provide a safe bending radius for the polyethylene. The bottom of the entry pit should provide a straight section for ease of entry of the liner into the existing pipe. The length of the level excavation should be at least twelve times the diameter of the liner being inserted. The width of the shaft should be as narrow as possible. The required width will depend on the location, type of soil, depth of the existing sewer line and the water table. 46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER After completion of the access shaft, the top half of the existing sewer shall be broken or cut and removed for the full length of the access shaft. A fabricated pulling head shall be connected to the leading end of the liner pipe. A cable shall be connected to the pulling head so that the liner pipe can be pulled into the existing sewer. Power winches used for pulling in long lengths of polyethylene liner pipe shall be rated equal to the project requirements. Once started, the pulling operation should continue to completion. Insertion is normally done at about a slow walking speed. After insertion, a minimum of 12 hours shall be allowed for the liner pipe to reach equilibrium with the sewer temperature and to allow the liner pipe to stress relieve itself. The polyethylene liner pipe should protrude at least 6 inches into the manhole where it terminates. After the 12 -hour equilibrium period, the annular space between the original pipe and the liner shall be pressure grouted. Said grouting must be from the bottom up to prevent air pockets from forming. Also the grout must be recommended for underwater application and have elastomeric properties. Products used shall be approved by the engineer. The liner shall not be displaced when the annular space is being filled. Spacers, inflatable plugs or other methods approved by the Engineer must be used to prevent displacement. The length of fused pipe that can be pulled will vary depending on field conditions, the ease of access to the area, and the working space available. 46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES The Contractor shall be solely responsible to confirm all pipe sizes prior to ordering, fusing and installation of the liner. 46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED After the liner has been pulled into place, allowed to recover and sealed at the manholes, pipe connections okayed by the engineer shall be reconnected to the liner pipe. SectionIV.doc Page 92 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Pipe connections shall be connected by the use of a pre- fabricated polyethylene saddle. A neoprene gasket shall be installed between the saddle and the liner pipe so that a complete water seal is accomplished when the saddle is placed on the liner pipe and secured with stainless steel bands. 46.4.7 BACKFILLING All excavations shall be backfilled using on site materials or as specified by the engineer. Cost for backfilling of access shafts and underdrain connections shall be including in the unit price bid for sliplining and reconnection of service laterals. Before any excavation is done for any purpose, it will be the responsibility of the contractor to contact the various utility companies and to determine the locations of their facilities. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to provide adequate protection for utility facilities. Any temporary construction right of way and/or storage areas will be arranged for by the contractor. 46.4.8 POINT REPAIR The engineer or his representative will determine if a point repair is necessary only after it has been demonstrated that a liner pipe cannot be pulled through the existing pipe. Payment will be made for each repair. The contractor will be expected to remove the obstruction and clear the pipe. If removing the top of the existing pipe will accomplish the removal of the obstruction, the bottom of the existing pipe should remain in place to form a cradle for the liner. 46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS All materials not used in the backfilling operation shall be disposed of off site by the contractor. Finish grading shall be required. In locations other than street right -of -ways, the surface shall be graded smooth and sodded with the same kind of grass as the existing lawn. Excavation points in street right -of -ways shall be repaired as specified by the engineer. 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE 47.1 SCOPE This specification designates general requirements for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic (spiral wound) pipe with integral wall bell and spigot joints for the conveyance of storm water. 47.2 MATERIALS All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with specification for "Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large Diameter Ribbed Gravity Storm Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter ". The pipe and fittings shall be made of PVC plastic. 47.3 PIPE The bell shall consist of an integral wall section. The solid cross section fiber ring shall be factory assembled on the spigot. Sizes and dimensions shall be as shown in this specification. SectionIV.doc Page 93 of 128 8/6/2013 Section N — Technical Specifications Standard laying lengths shall be 13 ft. + 1 inch. At manufacturer's option, random lengths of not more than 15% of total footage may be shipped in lieu of standard lengths. 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM Joints shall be either an integral bell gasketed joint. When the joint is assembled according to manufactures recommendation it will prevent misalignment of adjacent pipes and form a silt tight joint. 47.5 FITTINGS All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier or approved equal and have bell and/or spigot configurations compatible with that of the pipe. 48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT Pressure injected grout shall be of cement and water and shall be proportioned generally in the ratio of 1.5 (one and one half) cubic foot (one and one half bags) of cement to 1 (one) cubic foot (7.50 gal.) of water. This mix shall be varied as the grouting proceeds as is necessary to provide penetration in the operator's judgment. Cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, latest edition serial designation C150 for Portland Cement, Type I. Portland Cement shall weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Water used in the grout shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, vegetable, sewage and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon. Grout pump shall be of the positive displacement type and shall be capable of producing adequate pressure to penetrate the area. All pressure grouting will be at the direction of the Engineer. 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE Guniting shall conform to all requirements of "Specifications for Materials, Proportioning, and Application of Shotcrete (ACI 506.2 77)" published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, except as modified by those specifications. Steel reinforcement shall be incorporated in the Gunite as required and shall be furnished, bent, set and placed in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. The purpose of this specification is to obtain a dense and durable concrete having the specified strength. 48.3 COMPOSITION Gunite shall be composed of Portland Cement, aggregate and water so proportioned as to produce a concrete suitable for pneumatic application. SectionIV.doc Page 94 of 128 8/6/2013 • • Section IV — Technical Specifications 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS Concrete ingredients shall be selected, proportioned in such a manner as will produce concrete which will be extremely strong, dense and resistant to weathering, and abrasion. Concrete shall have a minimum 28 -day strength of 4,000 psi. 48.5 MATERIALS Portland Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C150 for Portland Cement, Type I. A bag of cement shall be deemed to weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be natural siliceous sand consisting of hard, clean, strong, durable and uncoated particles, conforming to the requirements of American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C33 for Concrete Aggregates. Fine aggregate shall not contain less than 3% nor more than 6% of moisture. Fine aggregate shall be evenly graded from fine to coarse and shall be within the following limits: Passing No. 3/8 Sieve 100% Passing No. 4 Sieve 95% to 100% Passing No. 8 Sieve 80% to 100% Passing No. 16 Sieve 50% to 85% Passing No. 30 Sieve 25% to 60% Passing No. 50 Sieve 10% to 30% Passing No. 100 Sieve 2% to 10% 48.6 WATER Water used in mixing, at the nozzle shall be fresh, clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, vegetable, sewage, and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon. 48.7 REINFORCEMENT Steel mesh reinforcement shall be electrically welded, cold drawn, mild steel fabric conforming to the latest requirements of ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 185 for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. Mesh can be fabricated from cold drawn steel wire conforming to the requirements of the latest ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 82 and sized as shown on Plans Page 7 of 7. 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS Cement shall be stored with adequate provisions for the prevention of absorption of moisture. It shall be stored in a manner that will permit easy access for inspection and identification of each shipment. Aggregate shall be stockpiled at points selected to provide maximum drainage and to prevent the inclusion of any foreign material during rehandling. Section1V.doc Page 95 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION Unsound materials of construction and all coated, scaly, or unsound concrete in manholes and inlets shall be removed by chipping with pneumatic hammers and chisels to sound surface, all cracks and cavities shall be chipped to such formation that their sides form approximately a 45 degree angle to the exposed surface for at least one (1) inch in depth. All areas to receive pneumatic concrete shall be cleaned by flushing or scouring with water and compressed air jets to assure removal of all loose particles. All areas of existing surfaces that do not require chipping shall be given a wet sandblasting with the gunite equipment and the air pressure at the cement gun shall not be less than 50 psi. Surface preparation of existing metal surface of a corrugated pipe shall be lightly sandblasted to remove loose material. All sandblasted areas shall then be cleaned by an air /water blast to remove all particles from the cleaning operation. To insure perfect bond, the newly sandblasted surface shall be thoroughly moistened with water prior to application of gunite. In no instance shall gunite be applied in an area where free running water exists. 48.10 PROPORTIONING Prior to start of guniting the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the recommended mix as a ratio of cement to aggregate. Recommended mix shall be on the basis of test data from prior experience. Provided data submitted is adequate no further testing of recommended mix will be required. If required, the Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary to control the actual amounts of all materials entering into the concrete. The types of equipment and methods used for measuring materials shall be subject to approval. 48.11 MIXING Gunite shall be thoroughly mixed by machine and then passed through a sieve to remove all large particles before placing in hopper of the cement gun. The mixture shall not be permitted to become damp. Each batch should be entirely discharged before recharging is begun. The mixer should be cleaned thoroughly enough to remove all adherent materials from the mixing vanes and from the drum at regular intervals. Water in any amount shall not be added to the mix before it enters the cement gun. Quantities of water shall be controlled by a valve at the nozzle of the gun. Water content shall be adjusted as required for proper placement, but shall in no case exceed four gallons of water per sack of cement, including the water contained in the aggregate. Remixing or tempering shall not be permitted. Mixed material that has stood 45 minutes without being used shall be discarded. Rebound materials shall not be reused. 48.12 APPLICATION Gunite shall not be placed on a frozen surface nor during freezing weather. Gunite shall not be placed when it is anticipated that the temperature during the following 24 hours will drop below 32 degrees, Fahrenheit. Sequence of application may be from bottom to top or vice versa if rebound is properly removed. Corners shall be filled first. "Shooting" shall be from an angle as near perpendicular to the SectionIV.doc Page 96 of 128 8/6/2013 • Section IV — Technical Specifications surface as practicable, with the nozzle held approximately 3 feet from the work (except in confined control). If the flow of material at the nozzle is not uniform and slugs, sand spots, or wet sloughs result, the nozzleman shall direct the nozzle away from the work until the faulty conditions are corrected. Such defects shall be replaced as the work progresses. Guniting shall be suspended if: 1. Air velocity separates the cement from the sand at the nozzle. 2. Temperature approaches freezing and the newly placed gunite cannot be protected. Gunite shall be applied in one or more layers to such total thickness as required to restore the area as detailed over the original lines of the adjoining surface, unless otherwise specified. All cavities, depressions, washouts and similar failures shall be rebuilt to original lines by use of gunite reinforced with wire mesh. Where the cavity exceeds 4 inches in depth a layer of mesh shall be used for each 3 inches of depth of gunite. In no case shall wire mesh be placed behind existing reinforcement. The time interval between successive layers in sloping vertical or overhanging work must be sufficient to allow initial but not final set to develop. At the time the initial set is developing, the surface shall be cleaned to remove the thin film of laitance in order to provide a perfect bond with succeeding applications. 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Construction joints or day's work joints shall be sloped off to a thin, clean, regular edge, preferably at a 45- degree slope. Before placing the adjoining work, the slope portion and adjacent gunite shall be thoroughly cleaned as necessary, then moistened and scoured with an air j et. 48.14 SURFACE FINISH Nozzleman shall bring the gunite to an even plane and to well formed corners by working up to ground wires or other guides, using lower placing velocity than normal. After the body coat has been placed, the surface shall be trued with a thin edge screed to remove high areas and expose low areas. Low areas shall be properly filled with concrete to insure a true, flat surface. After the concrete surface has been trued, the entire surface shall be given a flashcoat finish except where a special type finish is specified on the drawings. 48.15 CURING Curing shall be in accordance with either paragraph 3.7.1(d) or paragraph 3.7.5. of ACI 506.2 77 depending upon atmospheric condition. 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION During progress of the work, where appearance is important, adjacent areas or grounds which may be permanently discolored, stained, or otherwise damaged by dust and rebound, shall be adequately protected sensitive areas, when contacted, shall be cleaned by early scraping, brushing or washing, as the surroundings permit. Sectionl.doc Page 97 of 128 8/6/2013 Section N — Technical Specifications 48.17 INSPECTION Because of the importance of workmanship affecting the quality of the gunite, continual inspection during placing shall be maintained. Any imperfections discovered shall be cut out and replaced with sound material. 48.18 EQUIPMENT Cement Gun: The mixing and delivering equipment shall be either the vertical double chamber type or rotary type. The upper chamber of the double chamber type shall receive and pressurize the dry mix and deliver it to the lower chamber. The lower chamber shall force the pressurized mix into the delivery hose by means of a feed wheel. The type of feeder utilized should be of sufficient capacity that the lower chamber may continuously furnish all required material to the delivery hose while the upper chamber receives the recharge. The rotary type cement gun shall have an enlarged hopper to feed material into a rotating multiported cylinder. Material shall fall by gravity into a port which shall then be rotated to a position in which the material is expelled by air into a moving stream of air. All equipment must be kept in good repair. The interior of drums, feed gearing and valves shall be cleaned as often as necessary (at least once every 8 hour shift) to prevent material from caking on critical parts. Nozzle: Nozzle shall be the premixing type with perforated water feed ring inside the nozzle. The maximum length of material hose for the application of gunite shall be approximately 150 feet although it shall be permissible to use as much as 800 feet of material hose if the supply air pressure measured at the cement gun is increased to maintain proper velocity. The following table gives requirements for compressor size, hose size and air pressure using 150 feet of material hose: Comp. Cap (cfm) Max. Hose Dia. (In.) Max. Size Nozzle (In.) Min. Air Press. (psi) 365 1 5/8 1 5/8 60 600 2 2 80 750 2 1/2 2 1/2 90 For each 25 feet of material hose used in excess of 150 feet, the required air pressure shall be increased by 5 psi. Air Compressor: Any standard type of compressor shall be satisfactory if it is of sufficient capacity to provide, without interruption, the pressures and volume of air necessary for the longest hose delivery. The air compressor capacity determinations shall include allowances made for the air consumed in blowing rebound, cleaning, reinforcing and for incidental uses. Compressor equipment shall be of such capacity so as to insure air pressures at the special mixer capable of producing the required material velocities. Water Supply: The water pressure at the discharge nozzle should be sufficiently greater than the operating air pressure to assure the water is intimately mixed with the other materials. If the line water pressure is inadequate, a water pump or pressurized tank shall be introduced into the line. The water pressure shall be uniformly steady (nonpulsating). SectionN.doc Page 98 of 128 8/6/2013 • • • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made -in -place liner systems used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All OSHA regulations shall be met. 49.2 PAYMENT Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the pay item per linear foot of liner: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation, including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and/or dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 49.3.1 MATERIALS 49.3.1.1 LINERS Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D 3753. 49.3.1.2 MORTAR Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two and three parts clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No. 8 sieve. 49.3.1.3 GROUTING Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four bags of Portland Cement Type II per cubic yard of clean, well graded sand. SectionIV.doc Page 99 of 128 8/6/2013 Section N — Technical Specifications 49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the removal of the manhole ring and corbel section. Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls. Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole. Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner. If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar. Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts. Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout. Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the outside of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertically as possible. Pour six inches of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular void to insure an adequate bottom seal. Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to seal the area around the manhole liner and piping. Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure. Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed. Observe watertightness and repair any visible leakage. Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing sod. Where manholes fall in paved areas, disturbed base shall be replaced twice the original thickness and compacted in 8" layers. Asphalt shall be replaced with 1 1/2" of Pinellas County Type II surface. 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS -2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong Seal MS 2 product. Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory training. The applicator /contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural cementitious liner of a minimum 1/2" thickness using a machine specially designed for the application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the following specifications which includes: 1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application. 2. The removal of any loose and unsound material. SectionlV.doc Page 100 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a 2 coat application. 49.4.1 MATERIALS 49.4.1.1 PATCHING MIX Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C -109) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi 2. Shrinkage (ASTM C -596) 28 days, 150 psi 3. Bond (ASTM C -952) 28 days, 150 psi 4. Cement Sulfate resistant 5. Density, when applied 105 +/- 5 pcf 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacture's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C -109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs. 2. Bond (ASTM C -952) - 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs. • 49.6 GROUTING MIX Strong -Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according to the manufacture's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 250 psi and a 1 day strength of 50 psi. • 49.7 LINER MIX Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at 28 days: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi 2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi 3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi 4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H. 5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi 6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Job site. Bag weight shall be 50 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be 1/2" to 5/8" long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the un mixed state, have a lead content not greater than two percent (2 %) by weight. SectionIV.doc Page 101 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide conditions. Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site. Bag weight shall be 50 -51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 56 pounds per cubic foot. Cement content must be 65 % -75% of total weight of bag. One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 108 pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of .67 cubic foot of volume. Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than 1/2" in length nor greater than 5/8" in height. Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for any heavy metal. Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process. A two coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray applied to assure minimum 1/2" thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively smooth finish. 49.8 WATER Shall be clean and potable. 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or recommendation from the manufacturer. 49.10 EQUIPMENT A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered. Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power the hydraulic system and air compressor. 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 49.11.1 PREPARATION 1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole. 2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and SectionlV.doc Page 102 of 128 8/6/2013 Section 1V — Technical Specifications concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any large voids with quick setting patching mix. 3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present, drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required. 4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations. 5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material. 49.11.2 MIXING For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using the Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for 30 seconds to a minute after all materials have been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption until each application is complete. 49.11.3 SPRAYING The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all cracks, crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface sheen which could be 15 minutes to 1 hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of 1/2 inch. The surface is then troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than 24 hours have elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is sprayed such that a gradual slope is produces from the walls to the invert with the thickness at the edge of the invert being no less than 1/2 inch. The wall bench intersection shall be rounded to a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow. 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING At some point during the application, at least four (4) 2 inch cubes may be prepared each day or from every 50 bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the Owner's or Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109. 49.11.5 CURING Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been completed. SectionlV.doc Page 103 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 49.12.1 SCOPE Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of: 1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume infiltration 2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows: a. Hydrophilic foam - injected through wall of manhole to fill voids and/or b. Hydrophilic gel- injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks 3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing) 4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of 1/2 inch 5. Epoxy coating, minimum of 30 dry mils 49.12.2 MATERIALS 49.12.2.1 REPAIRING CEMENT A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall have the following properties: Set Time Tensile Strength ASTM C 307 Compressive Strength ASTM -C 109 SectionlV.doc 1 -3 minutes 1 day 510 psi 3 days 745 psi 28 days 855 psi 1 day 3,125 psi 7 days 7,808 psi 28 days 9,543 psi Page 104 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Flexural Strength ASTM C 78 1 day 410 psi 3 days 855 psi 28 days 1,245 psi 49.12.2.2 HYDROPHILIC GROUTING Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either one or both of the following materials: 1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks in and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows: Tensile Strength Elongation Bonding Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574 -86 400% ASTM D 3574 -86 250 -300 psi 2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole -to prevent seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior of manhole. Physical properties are as follows: Density Tensile Strength Elongation Shrinkage Toxicity 8.75 -9.17 lbs /gal 150 psi 250% Less than 4% Non Toxic ASTM D -3574 ASTM D- 412 ASTM D -3574 ASTM D -1042 49.12.2.3 WATERPROOFING A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three components -two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for approximately six months. Upon completion the color will be light grey. Physical properties are as follows: Slant/Shear bond Strength to ASTM (to be given) Tensile Strength (7 day cure) ASTM C 190 Permeability (3 day cure) CRD 48 55 Calcium Aluminate Cement 1,200 1,800 psi 380 psi (2.62 MPa) 325 psi (2.24 MPa) 8.1x10 11cm/sec to 7.6x10 cm/sec at 100% RH at 50% RH 49.12.2.4 CEMENT LINING A self bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following properties: SectionIV.doc Page 105 of 128 8/6/2013 Section W — Technical Specifications Calcium Aluminate Cement 12 Hrs 24 Hrs 7 Days 28 Days Astm C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000 Astm C 293 Flexural Strength, Psi 1000 1500 1800 2000 Astm C 596 Shrinkage At 90% Humidity -- <0.04 <0.06 <0.08 Astm C 666 Freeze -Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage Astm C 990 Pull - Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile Astm C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3% Astm C 497 Porosity /Adsorption Test 4 - 5% Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after 24 Hrs moist curing at 68 F. The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C 1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch, but no greater than two inches. It will have a dark grey color. 49.12.2.5 EPDXY COATING A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of 30 dry mils. This epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can be applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the following properties at 75 degrees F: Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume 1:1 Color (other colors available on request) Light Gray Pot Life, hrs 1 Tensile Strength, psi, min 2,000 Tensile Elongation, % 10 —20 Water Extractable Substances, mg. /sq. in., max 5 Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi 1,800 49.12.2.6 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3 %), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10 %), MEK, Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3 %), Gasoline, Corn Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (3 %), and many others. 49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 49.12.3.1 PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW Work shall proceed as follows: 1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client. 2. Clean manhole and remove debris. a. Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris. b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease. SectionW.doc Page 106 of 128 8/6/2013 • Section IV — Technical Specifications c. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure. d. Remove debris from work area. 3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement. (Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as required by client. 4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration. 5. Apply cementitious /crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as needed. 6. Spray and/or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces. 7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces. NOTE: Steps 1 -5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step 6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty -four hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to cement lining. 49.12.3.2 PREPARATION An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines (where feasible) or inserting protective screens. • 49.12.3.3 STRUCTURAL REPAIR Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying waterproofing/crystallization. • 49.12.3.4 INFILTRATION CONTROL Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam. 1. Drill 5/8" holes through active leaking surface. 2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Inject material until water flow stops. 4. Remove fittings (if necessary). 49.12.3.5 WATERPROOFING /CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS 1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stiff brush, forming an undercoat. 2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand. 3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal forming process. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks. 5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat. SectionlV.doc Page 107 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining. 49.12.3.6 CEMENT LINING 1. Dampen surface. 2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application. 3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (and no more than 2 inches) has been achieved. 4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole. 5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish. 6. Allow for a 24 -hour cure time prior to epoxy coating. NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing times. 49.12.3.7 EPDXY COATING Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a thickness of at least 30 mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6) hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours. 49.12.3.8 CLEAN UP The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area. 49.12.3.9 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12.3.10 WARRANTY All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years, provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used. 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 — PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS. SectionIV.doc Page 108 of 128 8/6/2013 • Section IV — Technical Specifications 51 IN -LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM 51.1 SCOPE 1. These specifications pertain to the application of the Plexiflor Color Finish System over recreational areas intended for In -Line Skating activities. The materials specified in the site plans shall be of colors indicated and for application over the Plexipave Acrylic Latex System. 2. The work shall consist of suitable cleaning and preparation of the surface to assure a satisfactory bond of the system to the existing surface. 3. All coverage rates are calculated prior to dilution. 4. Plexiflor In -line Skating Surfacing System • 1 Coat of Acrylic Resurfacer • 2 Coats of Fortified Plexipave • 2 Coats of Plexiflor • Plexicolor Line Paint 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS 51.2.1 ASPHALT Allow new asphalt to cure a minimum of 6 months. The surface must be checked for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repaired with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. (Surfacing prior to six months may make the asphalt subject to indentation). 51.2.2 CONCRETE Concrete shall have a wood float or broom finish. DO NOT PROVIDE STEEL TROWEL FINISH. DO NOT USE CURING AGENTS OR CONCRETE HARDENERS. Allow the concrete to cure a minimum of 30 days. Acid Etch the entire surface with Concrete Preparer according to California Specification Section 10.13. Check surface for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repair with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX Court Patch Binder Mix: 100 Lbs. #80 -100 Mesh Silica Sand (dry) 3 gallons Couth Patch Binder 1 to 2 gallons Portland cement. 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT 1. Application of the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix shall be applied to the clean, dry, level surfaces to receive the Plexiflor Surfacing System. The mix shall be applied according to California Specification Section 10.8 using the following mix: Acrylic Resurfacer 55 gallons Water (Clean and Potable) 20 -40 gallons Sand (60 -80 mesh) 600 -900 pounds Liquid Yield 112 -138 gallons SectionIV.doc Page 109 of 128 8/6/2013 Section N — Technical Specifications 2. Over asphalt surfaces, apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two coats (depending on surface porosity) at a rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Non - coated concrete surfaces must be neutralized with concrete preparer and primed with California Ti -Coat according to Specification Section 10.17. The Acrylic Resurfacer Mix must be applied within 3 hours of the TiCoat application while the primer is dry but still tacky to the touch. Apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two applications at a rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE After the filler coat application has dried, apply two coats of Fortified Plexipave at an undiluted rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat using the following mix: Plexipave Color Base 30 gallons Plexichrome 20 gallons Water 20 gallons 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION 1. Plexiflor is factory premixed and ready to use from the container. The material may be diluted with one (1 ) part water to six (6) parts Plexiflor to improve flowability and provide uniform application. 2. Apply two coats of Plexiflor at a rate of .04 -.05 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Plexiflor is applied (in a similar manner to Plexipave) in windrows on the surface with sufficient quantity to cover as the squeegee is pulled over the surface. Apply only light pressure to the squeegee. Do not allow ridges to form between passes of the squeegee. Ridges existing after material dries should require corrective action. 4. Plexiflor and its preliminary coatings should be allowed to thoroughly dry prior to application of subsequent coats. 51.6 PLAYING LINES Four hours minimum after completion of the color resurfacing, playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with Plexicolor Line Paint as specified by The National In -Line Hockey Association. 51.7 GENERAL 1. The contractor shall remove all containers, surplus materials and debris upon completion of work leaving the site in a clean, orderly condition that is acceptable to the owner. Gates shall be secured and all containers shall be disposed of in accordance with Local, State and Federal regulations. 2. Materials specified for the Plexiflor System shall tee delivered to the site in sealed, property labeled arums with California Products Corporation labels that are stenciled with the proper batch code numbers. Products packaged or labeled in any other manner will not be accepted. Mixing with clear, fresh water shall only be done at the job site. Coverage rates are based upon material prior to mixing with water as specified. SectionN.doc Page 110 of 128 8/6/2013 Section 1V — Technical Specifications 51.8 LIMITATIONS 1. Do not apply if surface temperature is less than 50 °F or more than 1 40 °F. 2. Do not apply when rain or high humidity is imminent. 3. Do not apply when surface is damp or has standing water. 4. Plexiflor will not hide surface imperfections of previous coatings. 5. Keep from freezing. Do not store in the hot sun. 6. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use. 7. Plexiflor will not prevent substrate cracks from occurring. 8. Plexiflor will mark slightly from normal use of some In -line Skates. 9. Coefficient of friction = 0.78 10. Coating Application Drying Time: 30 minutes to 1 hour at 70 °F with 60% relative humidity. 11. Keep court clean. Excess dirt or foreign material can cause the surface to be slippery. In -Line hockey is a physical sport. Always wear NIHA recommended protective gear. 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 22 - RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION. • 53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES • 53.1 MATERIAL 53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL 53.1.1.1 PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES Gabion & mattress basket units shall be of non - raveling construction and fabricated from a double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.1063 inches (approx. US gauge 12). All wire used in the fabrication of the gabion shall comply with or exceed Federal Specifications QQ- W -461H, possess a maximum tensile strength of 70,000 p.s.i. with a Finish 5, Class 3 zinc coating in accordance with the current ASTM A -641. The weight of zinc coating shall be determined by ASTM A -90. The grade of zinc used for coating shall be High Grade or Special High Grade, as prescribed in ASTM B -6, Table 1. Uniformity of coating shall equal or exceed four 1- minute dips by the Preece test, as determined by ASTM A -239. The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3 1/4 inches by 4 %2 inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire core, 0.1338 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 10), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.173 inches. Lacing and connecting wire shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, SectionlV.doc Page 111 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 0.087 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 13 1/2), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. Tiger -Tite Interlocking Fasteners are an approved alternate joint material. The Interlocking Wire Fastener shall meet stainless steel material specification ASTM A -313, Type 302, Class 1, or equal. All of the above wire diameters are subject to tolerance limit of 0.004 inches in accordance with ASTM A -641. 53.1.1.2 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to attack from acids and resistant to abrasion. 1. Specific Gravity: a. According to ASTM D -2287 and ASTM D- 792; in the range of 1.30 to 1.34. 2. Tensile Strength: a. According to ASTM D -142; not less than 2980 psi. 3. Modulus of Elasticity: a. According to ASTM D -412; not less than 2700 psi at 100% strain. 4. Resistance to Abrasion: a. According to ASTM 1242; weight loss <12% (Method B). 5. Brittleness Temperature: a. According to ASTM D -746, Procedure A; shall be at least 8.3 degrees centigrade below the minimum temperature at which the gabions will be handled or placed but not lower than -9.4 degrees centigrade. 6. Hardness: a. According to ASTM D -2240; shall be between 50 and 60 Shore D when tested. 7. Creeping Corrosion: a. Maximum corrosion penetration to the wire core from a square cut end section shall not be more than 25mm when the specimen has been immersed for 2000 hours in a 50% SOLUTION HC1 (hydrochloric acid 12 Be). SectionlV.doc Page 112 of 128 8/6/2013 • Section IV — Technical Specifications 53.1.1.3 ACCELERATED AGING TESTS Variation of the initial properties will be allowed, as specified below, when the specimen is submitted to the following Accelerated Aging Tests: 1. Salt Spray Test: a. According to ASTM B -117 b. Period of test = 3000 hours. 2. Exposure to ultraviolet rays: a. According to ASTM D -1499 and ASTM G -23 (Apparatus Type E). Period of test = 3000 hours at 63 degrees centigrade. 3. Exposure to high temperature: a. Testing period: 240 hours at 105 degrees centigrade, when tested in accordance with ASTM D- 1203 and ASTM D -2287. 53.1.1.4 PROPERTIES AFTER AGING TESTS After the above Accelerated Aging Tests have been performed, the PVC compound shall exhibit the following properties: 1. Appearance: a. The vinyl coating shall not crack, blister or split and shall not show any remarkable change in color. 2. Specific Gravity: a. Shall not show change higher than 6% of its initial value. 3. Durometer Hardness: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 4. Tensile Strength: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 5. Elongation: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 6. Modulus of Elasticity: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 7. Resistance to Abrasion: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 8. Brittleness Temperature: a. Cold Bend Temperature - Shall not be lower than -20 degrees centigrade. b. Cold Flex Temperature - Shall not be higher than +18 degrees centigrade. SectionlV.doc Page 113 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: The filler stone shall be limestone from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure. The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be retained in the gabion or mattress baskets. The stone shall meet the following physical requirements: • Absorption, maximum 5% • Los Angeles Abrasion (FM 10T096), maximum loss 45% • Soundness (Sodium Sulphate), (FM 1- T104), maximum loss 12% • Flat and elongated pieces, materials with least dimension less than one third of greatest dimension shall not exceed 5% by weight. All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening. 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE Mattress wire shall conform to the same specifications as gabions except as follows: 1. The nominal diameter of the wire used in the fabrication of the netting shall be 0.0866 inches minimum, subject to diameter tolerance in accordance with the current ASTM A 641, Table 3. 2. All wire shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 641, Table 1. The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 0.70 ozs. /sq. ft. for the 0.0866 inch wire used for mesh and lacing and 0.80 ozs. /sq. ft. for the 0.106 wire used for selvedge. 3. Adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be capable of being wrapped in a close helix at a rate not exceeding 15 turns per minute around a cylindrical steel mandrel having a diameter 3 times the nominal wire diameter being tested. After the wrap test is completed, the wire shall not exhibit any cracking or flaking of the zinc coating to such an extent that any zinc can be removed by rubbing with bare fingers. 53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Index 199, Type D -2, and FDOT Standard Specifications, 1996 edition, Section 985. 53.2 PERFORMANCE Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the SectionIV.doc Page 114 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one -half its horizontal width, they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of mesh is cut. Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single and double loops are alternated. A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back. To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended. Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top. Filler stone shall not be dropped more than 12" into the gabions and mattresses. Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less. 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 54.1 SCOPE To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems; ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone. The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the landscaped street medians including: • Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic; • Trash and debris removal from the job site; • Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces; • Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms; • Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted); • Irrigation service and repair; SectionIV.doc Page 115 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications • Mulch replacement; • Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the • Reporting of irregularities at the job site. 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract maintenance at other hours. All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, that is the cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc., be completed before leaving the job site. 54.3 WORK METHODS 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service). Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in writing by an authorized representative of the other party. 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT The contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated location: 54.4 LITTER Remove trash and debris from the area to be maintained. Proper disposal of collected trash and debris is a requirement of the contractor. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes, tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The contractor should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the extraordinary cleanup from the contractor would be considered. 54.5 VISUAL CHECK The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within 24 hours after providing the service. 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature size of the particular specie. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope. Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following flower formation, according to the following specifications: SectionIV.doc Page 116 of 128 8/6/2013 Section 1V — Technical Specifications 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY • DATE, ETC.) Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded heads that are encountered in the pruning process; remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation; such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed on palms. 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the contractor. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion. 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the contractor, according to the attached Maintenance of Traffic specifications. 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high pedestrian use areas. • 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20 -6 -12 sulfur coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in mid - February, early June, and mid - September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials. • 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable. Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by contractor at his/her expense. 54.13 MULCH CONDITION Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil moisture, usually 3 inches. 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR Should be performed at each visit to assure the systems proper operation and timing. Drip tubing should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled system running time. All repairs which will be charged at $20.00 or more must be approved in SectionlV.doc Page 117 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications advance by the city. Minor repairs, less than $20.00, should be billed to the City in addition to the monthly maintenance fee. 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be replaced by the contractor at the contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on City properties. 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION Apply three pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February. 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION The City will provide a freeze /frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze /frost sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility (yet to be determined). Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty -four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or remain in place as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day (5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on -site work at the contracted rate per man -hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate per employee required. The City and contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations with weather conditions. Should freeze /frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City. 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE This location is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within 7 working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six and no further than ten calendar days apart. 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK Within 24 hours of completing work the contractor shall notify the supervisor assigned to monitor the contract either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a phone message. However, to make certain the message is received, it is advisable to call between 6:30 a.m. — 7:30 a.m. or 2:30 p.m. — 3:00 p.m. 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City SectionlV.doc Page 118 of 128 8/6/2013 • Section N — Technical Specifications shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be given 48 hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed. 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a six month period on plants and 12 month warranty on palms. Landscape installer will coordinate irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm heads /fronds as he feels appropriate. 2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates. 3. All maintenance shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature caused by the Contractor or his/her employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option, invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs the next regular payment to the Contractor. 5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall schedule to perform the required maintenance to the location as soon as the pertaining circumstances are relieved. 55 MILLING OPERATIONS 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all milling. 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 1. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the contractor is responsible to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment. 2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven days from the time it was milled, unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. 3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of the vacuum or the mechanical type, that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre- wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving the job site. Section V.doc Page 119 of 128 8/6/2013 Section N — Technical Specifications 4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the concrete surface. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this removal shall be included in the bid item for milling. 6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling. 7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications for S -Type resurfacing projects or Section 330 (latest edition) for superpave resurfacing projects. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to said base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for milling. 9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after the milling operation is complete. 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS All surplus existing materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the Public Services Division at (727) 562 -4950 to schedule delivery of material. 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the property of the Contractor. The Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City. 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES All utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their owners at the owner's expense. The Contractor shall arrange his schedule to allow utility owners the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing operations. 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 23.7 of the City's Technical Specifications. SectionIV.doc Page 120 of 128 8/6/2013 • Section IV — Technical Specifications 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING There are two types of milling used by the City: A. Wedge — This will consist of milling a six foot wide strip along the curb line of the pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height and pavement cross section. B. Full Width — This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line /edge of pavement to curb line /edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer. 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to restore and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend approximately 50 to 100 feet in both directions from the low point of the existing swale. 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted. 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of radius returns and intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications. 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures, appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles, posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction. Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off -site in accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements. 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. SectionlV.doc Page 121 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 57 RIPRAP The work included in this specification includes the construction of either sand - cement or rubble riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the volume of sand used in cubic yards for sand - cement, or the dry weight in tons for rubble. 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for sand - cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling, equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand - cement and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on -site is used as rubble riprap. 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY This article applies to all City projects located at one of the City's Wastewater Treatment Plants (WWTP) or Potable Water Reservoirs. 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL The Contractor shall be aware that hazardous materials are used at the WWTP's and the water reservoirs. These may include sodium hypochlorite, gaseous chlorine, sulfur dioxide and ammonia. Potential safety hazards associated with these substances include: • An accidental spill or release can impair respiratory functions and result in severe burns to the skin and eyes. At the pre - construction conference, the contractor will be provided with a copy of the City of Clearwater Public Utilities Department Emergency Response Plan, and a copy of the applicable Material Safety Data Sheets. All employees of the contractor and sub - contractor assigned to this job shall be familiar with the content of these documents. 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING Prior to issuance of a notice to proceed, the contractor must submit documentation regarding employee safety training relating to the items in Section A above. The documentation must include: • Verification that all employees assigned to this job have received and understood training in the proper work practices necessary to safely perform the job while working around gaseous chlorine and sulfur dioxide gas. • The date of the training, and • The means used to verify that the employee understood the training. SectionIV.doc Page 122 of 128 8/6/2013 • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS All traffic signal work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications (Sections 603 through 699), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment, materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit, signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors, pedestrian detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, removal of existing traffic signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs. All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's Mast Arm Assembly standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm colors shall be determined and approved by the City prior to ordering from the manufacturer. All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LED's and, approved by both the City and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize countdown features. Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is PROHIBITED unless directed by the City's Traffic Engineering Division. 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 60 SIGNING AND MARKING All signing and marking work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular delineators /flex posts (Sections 705 and 972). The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or markings shall be "blacked -out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No payment will be made for these incorrect or "blacked -out" areas. Omissions in striping or markings shall be corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made. 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. SectionlV.doc Page 123 of 128 8/6/2013 Section 1V — Technical Specifications 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. 6t1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 62 TREE PROTECTION 62.1 TREE BARRICADES A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all staging and/or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows: 1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms. 2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer species. 3. At or greater than two- thirds of the dripline of all other protected species 4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand. B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two -inch lumber for upright posts. Upright posts are to be at least four feet in length with a minimum of one foot anchored in the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet apart. Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch by four -inch lumber and shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The project City's representative must approve any variation from the above requirements. C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative. D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such protective barriers. E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any protected tree or palm. F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees. SectionIV.doc Page 124 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 62.2 ROOT PRUNING • A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of 18 inches below existing grade or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than 18 inches from existing grade. Tim Kurtz, Senior Landscape Architect is the City's Representative on Engineering Department projects for root Pruning issues and can be reached at (727) 562 -4737, or through the construction inspector assigned to the project. B. Root pruning shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted) inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning. D. Root pruning shall be performed as far in advance of other construction activities as is feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning. E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any root pruning activities. F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches per one inch of the trunk diameter from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said root pruning. G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be done to a minimum depth of 18" from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less than 18 ". • H. Root pruning shall be performed using a Doscocil Root Cutting Machine or equivalent. Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to any work adjacent to trees to be preserved. I. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected. J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled around to prevent damage to the root. K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established. SectionlV.doc Page 125 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root pruned trees. M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional boring as opposed to open trenching. 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING A. All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations — Tree, Shrub and other Woody Plant Maintenance — Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A -300. B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts (pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree) are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. C. No protected tree shall have more than 30 percent of its foliage removed. D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion - tailed. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project Contacts. Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the Project Web Pages. 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section 508 guidelines whenever possible: http://www.w3.org/TR/1999/WAI-WEBCONTENT-19990505/ SectionlV.doc Page 126 of 128 8/6/2013 Section N — Technical Specifications http://vvww.section508.gov/ In particular, use of variable -width tables, user - adjustable /relative font sizes, ALT text for images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics. 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles, apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to fit a space. The logo is approved for use by city departments, and is not to be used by outside vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from the Public Communications. This is for internal use only. 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics should be posted to the Project Web Pages. 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow Public's input sent back to the City regarding the Project. • 63.6 POSTING The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different than City's Web server, if approved, should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity issues. • 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES Unless otherwise specified and agreed Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages up -to -date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's Webmaster for posting. 64 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE 64.1 CLEARANCE OPTIONS When working in the vicinity of overhead power lines the Contractor shall utilize one of the following options: Option 1 - Having the power lines de- energized and visibly grounded. Option 2 - Maintaining a minimum distance of 20 feet of clearance for voltages up to 350 kV an 50 feet of clearance for voltages more than 350 kV. Option 3 - Determine the line voltage and provide clearance in accordance with the table included in Section 64.2. SectionN.doc Page 127 of 128 8/6/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 64.2 REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES VOLTAGE (nominal, kV, alternating current) MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCE (feet) Upto50 10 Over 50 to 200 15 Over 20 to 350 20 Over 350 to 500 25 Over 500 to 750 35 Over 750 to 1,000 45 Over 1000 (as established by the utility owner /operator or registered professional engineer who is a qualified person with respect to electric power transmission and distribution) Note: The value that follows "to" is up to and includes that value. For example, over 50 to 200 means up to and including 200kV. SectionlV.doc Page 128 of 128 8/6/2013 • • SECTION IVa SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL, SPECIFICATIONS • SECTION WA • SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1-GENERAL REOUIREMENTS 01000 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 01100 SUMMARY OF WORK 01200 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01290 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01300 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION 01310 CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION 01320 PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01330 SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE 01350 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PROCEDURES 01355 SPECIAL PROVISIONS 01450 TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01650 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 01720 FIELD ENGINEERING 01730 CUTTING, CORING, AND PATCHING 01740 FINAL CLEANING 01755 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP 01770 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01780 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01785 RECORD DOCUMENTS 01815 MAINTENANCE OF PLANT OPERATION AND SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION 01820 TRAINING 01830 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS DIVISION 2 -SITE CONSTRUCTION 02220 DEMOLITION AND MODIFICATIONS 02230 SITE PREPARATION 02240 DEWATERING 02300 EARTHWORK FOR STRUCTURES 02305 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES 02370 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL 02920 SEEDING AND SODDING 03720-042 -02 August 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 3--CONCRETE 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03250 CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES 03300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03360 CONCRETE FINISHES 03600 GROUT 03740 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE DIVISION 5 -METALS 05520 METAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS DIVISION 6 -WOODS AND PLASTICS 06610 FRP BAFFLE WALLS DIVISION 9- FINISHES 09900 PAINTING AND COATING DIVISION 11 EOUIPMENT 11222 CHANNEL STATIC MIXERS DIVISION 13- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13401 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15055 PIPING SYSTEMS-GENERAL 15060 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15075 PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION 15110 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES 15121 MISCELLANEOUS PIPE FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES 15124 CHEMICAL INJECTION ASSEMBLIES 15144 PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING 15155 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15220 SLUICE GATES 15225 HOSE AND TUBING 15250 SMALL - DIAMETER PIPING 03720 -042 -02 ii TABLE OF CONTENTS August 2013 DIVISION I6- ELECTRICAL 16050 ELECTRICAL APPENDICES MANUFACTURERS' QUOTES GEOTECHNICAL REPORT 03720-042 -02 iii TABLE OF CONTENTS August 2013 • • DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • • SECTION 01000 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Work to be done consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials, and equipment and the performance of all Work included in this Contract. The summary of the Work is presented in Section 01100, Summary of Work. B. Work Included: 03720 - 042 -02 August 2013 1. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, materials, plant power, light, heat, fuel, water, tools, appliances, equipment, supplies, and means of construction necessary for proper performance and completion of the Work. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary local building permits NPDES, or WMD permits. The Contractor shall perform and complete the Work in the manner best calculated to promote rapid construction consistent with safety of life and property and to the satisfaction of the Engineer and in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall clean up the Work and maintain it during and after construction, until accepted, and shall do all Work and pay all costs incidental thereto. He shall repair or restore all structures and property that may be damaged or disturbed during performance of the Work. 2. The cost of incidental work described in these Project Requirements for which there are no specific Contract Items shall be considered as part of the general cost of doing the Work and shall be included in the prices for the various Contract Items. No additional payment will be made therefore. 3. The Contractor shall provide and maintain such modern plant, tools, and equipment as may be necessary, in the opinion of the Engineer, to perform in a satisfactory and acceptable manner all the Work required by this Contract. Only equipment of established reputation and proven efficiency shall be used. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the adequacy of his workmanship, materials, and equipment, prior approval of the Engineer notwithstanding. 01000 -1 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS C. Public Utility Installations and Structures: 03720- 042 -02 August 2013 Public utility installations and structures shall be understood to include all poles, tracks, pipes, wires, conduits, vaults, manholes, and all other appurtenances and facilities pertaining thereto whether owned or controlled by the Owner, other governmental bodies, or privately owned by individuals, firms, or corporations used to serve the public with transportation, traffic control, gas, electricity, telephone, sewerage, drainage, water, or other public or private property which may be affected by the Work shall be deemed included hereunder. 1. The Contract Documents contain data relative to existing public utility installations and structures above and below the ground surface. These data are not guaranteed as to their completeness or accuracy and it is the responsibility of the Contractor to make his own investigations to inform himself fully of the character, condition, and extent of all such installations and structures as may be encountered and as may affect the construction operations. 2. The Contractor shall protect all public utility installations and structures from damage during the Work. Access across any buried public utility installation or structure shall be made to avoid any damage to these facilities. All required protective devices and construction shall be provided by the Contractor at his expense. All existing public utilities damaged by the Contractor shall be repaired by the Contractor, at his expense. No separate payment shall be made for such protection or repairs to public utility installations or structures. 3. Public utility installations or structures owned or controlled by the Owner or other governmental body which are shown on the Drawings to be removed, relocated, replaced, or rebuilt by the Contractor shall be considered as a part of the general cost of doing the Work and shall be included in the prices bid for the various Contract Items. No separate payment shall be made therefor. 4. Where public utility installations of structures owned or controlled by the Owner or other governmental body are encountered during the Work and are not indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications, and when, in the opinion of the Engineer, removal, relocation, replacement, or rebuilding is necessary to complete the Work under this Contract, such Work shall be accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction, or such Work may be ordered, in writing by the Engineer, for the Contractor to accomplish. If such work is accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction it will be carried out expeditiously, and the Contractor shall give full cooperation to permit the utility to complete the removal, relocation, 01000 -2 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS • • • • • replacement, or rebuilding as required. If such work is accomplished by the Contractor, it will be paid for as extra work as provided in the Agreement. 5. At all times in performance of the Work the Contractor shall employ acceptable methods and exercise reasonable care and skill so as to avoid unnecessary delay, injury, damage, or destruction of public utility installations and structures and shall at all times in the performance of the Work avoid unnecessary interference with or interruption of public utility services and cooperate fully with the owners thereof to that end. 6. The Contractor shall give written notice to the Owner and other governmental utility departments and other owners of public utilities of the location of his proposed construction operations at least 48 -hours in advance of breaking ground in any area or on any unit of the Work. 7. The maintenance, repair, removal, relocation, or rebuilding of public utility installations and structures, when accomplished by the Contractor as herein provided, shall be done by methods approved by the owners of such utilities. 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 03720 - 042 -02 August 2013 01000 -3 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 1.10 DRAWINGS AND PROJECT MANUAL A. Drawings: When obtaining data and information from the Drawings, figures shall be used in preference to scaled dimensions and large -scale drawings in preference to small -scale drawings. B. Supplementary Drawings: 1. When, in the opinion of the Engineer, it becomes necessary to explain more fully the Work to be done or to illustrate the Work further or to show any changes which may be required, the Engineer will prepare drawings known as Supplementary Drawings, with specifications pertaining to such Drawings, and the Contractor will be furnished one complete set of electronic drawings and one electronic copy of the specifications. Hard copies may be provided if requested. 2. The Supplementary Drawings shall be binding upon the Contractor with the same force as the Contract Drawings. Where such Supplementary Drawings require either less or more than the estimated quantities of Work, credit to the Owner or compensation therefor to the Contractor shall be subject to the terms of the Agreement. C. Contractor to Check Drawings and Data: 1. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions, quantities, and details shown on the Drawings, Supplementary Drawings, Schedules, Specifications, or other data received from the Engineer, and shall notify the Engineer of all errors, omissions, conflicts, and discrepancies found therein. Failure to discover or correct errors, conflicts, or discrepancies shall not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for unsatisfactory work, faulty construction, or improper operation resulting therefrom, nor from rectifying such conditions at his own expense. He will not be allowed to take advantage of any errors or omissions, as full instructions will be furnished by the Engineer should such errors or omissions be discovered. 2. All schedules are given for the convenience of the Engineer and the Contractor and are not guaranteed to be complete. The Contractor shall assume all responsibility or the making of estimates of the size, kind, and quality of materials and equipment included in Work to be done under the Contract. D. Specifications: The Technical Specifications each consist of three parts: General, Products, and Execution. The General part of a Specification contains General Requirements which govern the Work. The Products and Execution parts modify 03720 - 042 -02 August 2013 01000 -4 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS • • and supplement the General Requirements by detailed requirements for the Work and shall always govern whenever there appears to be a conflict. E. Intent: 1. All Work called for in the Specifications applicable to this Contract, but not shown on the Drawings in their present form, or vice versa, shall be of like effect as if shown or mentioned in both. Work not specified in either the Drawings or in the Specifications but involved in carrying out their intent or in the complete and proper execution of the Work is required and shall be performed by the Contractor as though it were specifically delineated or described. 2. The apparent silence of the Specifications as to any detail or the apparent omission from them of a detailed description concerning any work to be done and materials to be furnished shall be regarded as meaning that only the best general practice is to prevail and that only material and workmanship of the best quality is to be used. The interpretation of these Specifications shall be made upon that basis. 1.11 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturer: 1. All transactions with the manufacturers or subcontractors shall be through the Contractor, unless the Contractor shall request and at the Engineer's option that the manufacturer or subcontractor deal directly with the Engineer. Any such transactions shall not in any way release the Contractor from his full responsibility under this Contract. 2. Any two or more pieces of material or equipment of the same kind, type, or classification, and being used for identical types of service, shall be made by the same manufacturer. B. Delivery: 03720-042 -02 August 2013 1. The Contractor shall deliver materials in ample quantities to ensure the most speedy and uninterrupted progress of the Work so as to complete the Work within the allotted time. 2. The Contractor shall also coordinate deliveries in order to avoid delay in or impediment of the progress of the work of any related Contractor. 01000 -5 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS C. Tools and Accessories: 1. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall furnish with each type, kind, or size of equipment, one complete set of suitably marked high -grade special tools and appliances which may be needed to adjust, operate, maintain, or repair the equipment. Such tools and appliances shall be furnished in approved painted steel cases, properly labeled and equipped with good -grade cylinder locks and duplicate keys. 2. Spare parts shall be furnished as specified herein and as recommended by the manufacturer necessary for the operation of the equipment, not including materials required for routine maintenance. 3. Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a substantial nameplate, securely fastened in place and clearly inscribed with the manufacturer's name, year of manufacture, serial number, weight, and principal rate data. D. Service of Manufacturer's Engineer: 1. The Contract Prices for equipment shall include the cost of furnishing a competent and experienced engineer or superintendent who shall represent the manufacturer and shall help the Contractor, when required, install, adjust, test, and place in operation the equipment in conformity with the Contract Documents. 2. After the equipment is placed in permanent operation by the Owner, the engineer or superintendent shall make all adjustments and tests required by the Engineer to prove that the equipment is in proper and satisfactory operating condition and shall instruct such personnel as may be designated by the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such equipment. 1.12 INSPECTION AND'lESTING A. General: 03720 - 042 -02 August 2013 1. For tests specified to be made by the Contractor, the testing personnel shall make the necessary inspections and tests, and the reports thereof shall be in such form as will facilitate checking to determine compliance with the Contract Documents. Five copies of the reports shall be submitted and authoritative certification thereof must be furnished to the Engineer as a prerequisite for the acceptance of any material or equipment. 2. If, in the making of any test of any material or equipment, the Engineer ascertains that the material or equipment does not comply with the 01000 -6 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS • • • • • Contract Documents, the Contractor will be notified thereof and he will be directed to refrain from delivering said material or equipment, or to remove it promptly from the site or from the Work and replace it with acceptable material without cost to the Owner. 3. Tests of electrical and mechanical equipment and appliances shall be conducted in accordance with the recognized test codes of the ANSI, ASME, or the IEEE, except as may otherwise be stated herein. 4. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of equipment during testing and instruction periods and shall neither have nor make any claim for damage which may occur to equipment before the time when the Owner formally takes over the operation thereof. B. Costs: 1. The Contractor shall provide all inspection and testing of materials furnished under this Contract, unless otherwise expressly specified. 2. The Contractor shall bear the cost of shop and field tests of equipment and of certain other tests specifically called for in the Contract Documents, and such costs shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Price. 3. The Owner may test materials and equipment submitted by the Contractor as the equivalent to those specifically named in the Contract for compliance. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the expenditures incurred in making such tests of materials and equipment which are rejected for non - compliance. C. Certificate of Manufacture: 1. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with authoritative evidence in the form of a certificate of manufacture that the materials to be used in the Work have been manufactured and tested in conformity with the Contract Documents. 2. These certificates shall be notarized and shall include copies of the results of physical tests and chemical analyses, where necessary, that have been made directly on the product or on similar products of the manufacturer. D. Shop Tests: • 1. Each piece of equipment for which pressure, duty, capacity, rating, efficiency, performance, function, or special requirements are specified 03720 - 042 -02 August 2013 01000 -7 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS shall be tested in the shop of the maker in a manner which shall conclusively prove that its characteristics comply fully with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Five copies of the manufacturer's actual test data and interpreted results thereof, accompanied by a certificate of authenticity sworn to by a responsible official of the manufacturing company and/or independent laboratory, shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. 3. The Contractor shall bear the cost of shop tests and of furnishing manufacturer's preliminary and shop test data of operating equipment. E. Start-up Tests: 1. As soon as conditions permit, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, and instruments and shall make start-up tests of equipment. 2. If the start-up tests disclose any equipment furnished under this Contract which does not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall, before demonstration tests, make all changes, adjustments, and replacements required. The furnishing contractor shall assist in the start-up tests as applicable. F. Demonstration Tests: Before the Contractor's request for a Substantial Completion inspection, all equipment and piping installed under this Contract shall be subjected to demonstration tests as specified or required to prove compliance with the Contract Documents. 2. The Contractor shall furnish labor, fuel, energy, water, and all other materials, equipment, and instruments necessary for all demonstration tests at no additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall assist in the demonstration tests as applicable. 1.13 LINES AND GRADES A. Grade: All work under this Contract shall be constructed in accordance with the lines and grades shown on the Drawings or as given by the Engineer. The full responsibility for keeping alignment and grade shall rest upon the Contractor. 03720 - 042 -02 August 2013 01000 -8 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS • • • 111/ B. Surveys: • • 1. At his own expense the Contractor shall furnish and maintain stakes and other such materials. 2. The Contractor shall check such reference marks by such means as he may deem necessary and, before using them, shall call the Engineer's attention to any inaccuracies. 3. At his own expense the Contractor shall establish all working or construction lines and grades as required from the reference marks set by the Engineer and shall be solely responsible for the accuracy of these lines and grades. He shall, however, be subject to check and review by the Engineer. C. Safeguarding Marks: 1. The Contractor shall safeguard all points, stakes, grade marks, monuments, and bench marks made or established on the Work, bear the cost of re- establishing them if disturbed, and bear the entire expense of rectifying work improperly installed due to not maintaining or protecting or to removing without authorization such established points, stakes, and marks. 2. The Contractor shall safeguard all existing and known property corners, monuments, and marks adjacent to but not related to the Work and shall bear the cost of re- establishing them if they are disturbed or destroyed. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) 03720 -042 -02 August 2013 END OF SECTION 01000 -9 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS • • • SECTION 01100 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, the Work must be performed in accordance with best modern practice, with materials and workmanship of the highest quality to the satisfaction of the Owner. A. The Project title is Chlorine Contact Tank Improvements, Marshall Street Water Reclamation Facility. B. The Specification divisions and Drawings are an integrated part of the Contract Documents and, as such, will not stand alone if used independently as individual sections, divisions, or drawing sheets. The Drawings and Specifications establish minimum scope of work and standards of quality for this project. They do not purport to cover all details entering into the design and construction of materials and equipment. 1.02 PROJECT DESCRIPTION The work for this project generally includes but is not limited to the following: A. Installation of an Owner pre - purchased channel static mixer as shown in the Drawings and as specified. B. Construction of a concrete wall within the Inside Chlorine Contact Tank and associated walkway with handrail system as shown in the Drawings and as specified. C. Construction of two concrete baffle walls (one in each Chlorine Contact Tank) as shown in the Drawings and as specified. D. Installation of seven Owner pre - purchased fiberglass reinforced plastic diffuser baffle walls within the Chlorine Contract Tanks as shown in the Drawings and as specified. E. Modifications to two concrete weirs walls (one between each reclaimed water transfer pump station wet well compartment and each downstream Dechlorination/Re- aeration Tank) as shown in the Drawings and as specified. 03720 - 042 -02 August 2013 01100 -1 SUMMARY OF WORK F. Installation of two Owner pre - purchased fiberglass reinforced plastic underflow baffle walls (one in each Dechlorination/Re- aeration Tank) as shown in the Drawings and as specified. G. Installation of four Owner pre - purchased sluice gates as shown in the Drawings and as specified. H. Replacement of four gates valve modifications to the sodium hypochlorite disinfection feed and control system as shown in the Drawings and as specified. I. Installation of 90% UV Block Shade Cloth, made of heavy nylon, over the Inside Chlorine Contact Tank, Outside Chlorine Contact Tank, and the Mixing Chamber. J. Modifications to the sodium hypochlorite chemical feed and control system and sampling system as shown in the Drawings and as specified. K. Modifications to the sodium bisulfite chemical feed and control system and sampling system as shown in the Drawings and as specified. L. Construction of yard piping and an ultrasonic flow metering station as shown in the Drawings and as specified. M. Electrical and instrumentation and control modifications as shown in the Drawings and as specified. 1.03 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.04 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.05 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.06 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to herein shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Specification Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) Formerly (AASHO) B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) C. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) D. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 03720 - 042 -02 August 2013 01100 -2 SUMMARY OF WORK • • • • • • F. American Standards Association (ASA) G. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) H. American Society of Testing and Material (ASTM) I. American Water Works Association (AWWA) J. American Welding Society (AWS) K. Anti- Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association (AFBMA) L. Building Officials and Code Administrators International, Inc. (BOCA) M. Construction Specifications Institute (CSI) N. Federal Specification (FS) O. Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Latest English Edition (Standard Specifications) P. FDOT Roadway and Traffic Design Standards Latest English Edition (FDOT Index) Q. Geosynthetics Institute (GSI) R. National Bureau of Standards (NB S) S. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) T. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) U. Portland Cement Association (PCA) V. Occupational Safety and Health Act (Public Law 91 -596), U.S. Department of Labor (OSHA) W. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) X. Southern Standard Building Code (SSBC) Y. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Z. United States of America Standards Institute (USASI) AA. Regulations of Florida Industrial Commission Regarding Safety BB. All local, state, county, or municipal building codes requirements of the Owner's Insurance 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.08 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.10 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 03720 - 042 -02 August 2013 01100 -3 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.11 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.12 WORKING HOURS A. Workdays shall consist of ten (10) hours maximum, between 6:00 am and 6:00 pm, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays. Owner inspection services are between 7:30 am and 3:30 pm, excluding weekends and holidays. The Contractor shall pay for any inspection services required outside normal work hours. 1.13 REIMBURSEMENT FEES A. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the charges of the Engineer and Engineer's Consultants as a result of the following actions: 1. Services due to Contractor's working beyond regular working hours as defined in the General Requirements. 2. Evaluation of substitutions. 3. Costs generated as a result of more than two submittals of any one Shop Drawing or Sample being required for evaluation due to rejection for noncompliance of the original submittal or for lack of information required by the Contract Documents. 4. Additional field observations, engineering analysis, correspondence, meetings, or other work due to non - complying or defective construction, materials, or equipment performed or furnished by the Contractor, Subcontractors, or Suppliers. 5. All costs due to work not being ready for tests and/or inspections when the Contractor has notified Engineer that work is ready for tests and/or inspections. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for all failed tests and subsequent retests. Partial payments payable to Contractor shall be distributed, first to reimburse the Owner for such charges, with the balance distributed to the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The Owner's reimbursement for the charges shall be a deduction from the Contractor's partial payment(s). C. The following rates shall be applied as the Owner's reimbursement of the Engineer's fee to be paid by the Contractor for expenses defined above. 03720 - 042 -02 August 2013 1. Senior Field Representative (Construction): $ 90.00/hour 2. Senior Construction Administrator: $ 100.00/hour 3. Engineering Consultant (Senior Project Manager): $ 170.00/hour 4. Administrative Assistant: $ 60.00/hour 01100 -4 SUMMARY OF WORK • • • PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) 03720- 042 -02 August 2013 END OF SECTION 01100 -5 SUMMARY OF WORK SECTION 01200 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section covers methods of measurement and payment for items of work under this Contract. The total Contract Price shall cover all work required by the Contract Documents. All cost in connection with the proper and successful completion of the work, including furnishing all materials, equipment, and tools and performing all necessary labor and supervision to fully complete the work, shall be included in the unit price and lump -sum Bid prices. All work not specifically set forth as a pay item in the Bidder's Proposal shall be considered a subsidiary/ancillary obligation of the Contractor and all costs in connection with these subsidiary/ancillary obligations shall be included in the Bid(s) to provide a complete and functional Project. 1.02 RELATED WORK NOT USED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STAND D S (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED) 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED) 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS NOT USED) 1.10 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, AND CLEARING A. Except where otherwise specified, the unit price or lump -sum price bid for each item of work that involves excavation, trenching, clearing, grubbing, or disposal of cleared and grubbed materials shall include all costs for such work. No direct payment shall be made for clearing, grubbing, disposal of cleared or grubbed materials, excavation, trenching, disposal of surplus excavated material, handling 03720-042 -02 01200 -1 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT August 2013 water (and groundwater), and purchasing and hauling of required fill material. All excavation and trenching shall be unclassified as to materials that may be encountered; in addition, trenches shall be unclassified as to depth, unless otherwise stated. 1.11 LUMP SUM A. For lump-sum items, payments shall be made to the Contractor in accordance: with an accepted Progress Schedule of Values on the basis of actual work completed and accepted by the Owner at the final completion of the Project. 1.12 ,UNIT PRICE A. For unit price items, payment shall be made based on the actual amount of work accepted by the Owner and for the actual amount of materials in place at the final completion of the Project, as confirmed by the final measurements: B. After the work is completed and before final payment is made, the Engineer will make final measurements, with all required assistance from the Contractor, to determine the quantities of various items of work accepted as the basis for the final unit price payment. 1.13 PAYMENT FOR INCREASED OR DECREASED QUAN111'iES NOT USED) 1.14 DELE'i'EllITEMS Should any items contained in the Bidder's Proposal be found unnecessary for the proper completion of the work contracted, the Engineer may eliminate such items from the Contract. This action shall in no way invalidate the Contract and no financial allowance or compensating payment for anticipated profit, overhead, etc.. will be made for items so eliminated in making final payment to the Contractor._ 1.15 PARTIAL PAYMENTS A. Partial payments shall be made monthly as the work progresses. Partial pa shall be made subject to the provisions of the General Conditions. 1.16 PAYMENT FOR STORED MATERIAL DELIVERED TO THE PROJECT A. When requested by the Contractor and at the discretion of the Owner, payment may be made for all or part of the value of acceptable materials and equipment to be incorporated into bid items, which have not been used, and which have been delivered to the construction site or placed in storage places acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall provide receipts fbr all stored material items 03720- 042-02 01200 -2 MEASUREMENT AND 'PAYMENT August 2013 requested for reimbursement which clearly identify the stored material item, where it is to be constructed, the unit cost of the item, as well as the total cost of the delivered item(s), the quantity of the item, the brand name of the item, and the supplier. Note that there are additional documentation requirements and storage requirements within the Contract Documents that must also be met before the Contractor can be reimbursed for these stored materials. B. No payment shall be made for fuels, supplies, installation or connection hardware, lumber, false work, or other similar materials or on temporary structures or other work (items) of any kind which are not a permanent part of the Contract. Items having a value of less than $2,500 shall not be compensated for as a stored material item. 1.17 FINAL PAYMENT A. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall field verify all quantities in dispute by using visual observation, taped measurements, or other methods designated by the Engineer. The field verification shall be made in the presence of the Engineer and agreed to by both the Engineer and the Contractor. The Engineer will prepare a fmal adjusting Change Order which will adjust the fmal quantities of the project Bid Schedule to reflect the actual work accepted by the Owner and for which the Contractor will be compensated. 1.18 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. A schedule of values for the lump -sum bid items and some of the unit price bid items as required by the Engineer shall be submitted and accepted before the first pay request is approved by the Engineer. The schedule of values shall be based on the prices bid in the Bid Schedule(s). Prices bid in the Bid Schedule(s) cannot be changed in the schedule of values; they can only be broken down into more detail so that the Engineer can more accurately pay the Contractor for the completed work. 1.19 MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION ITEMS A. The Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to protect existing utilities, roads, and miscellaneous items from damage during construction. B. The Contractor shall repair, relocate, or replace existing utilities, roadways, and miscellaneous items to pre- construction conditions. C. All repairs, relocations, and replacements necessary are considered incidental to the work and will be at the Contractor's cost, with no cost to the Owner. 03720-042 -02 01200 -3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT August 2013 PART 2 PAY ITEM DESCRIPTIONS 2.01 BID The descriptions provided in the following Paragraphs are to be used by the Bidder in preparing the Bidder's Proposal. They generally indicate how the major workscope items and their respective costs are to be separated into the line items listed in the Bid Schedule(s). These descriptions are not fully representative nor all inclusive of the work required to complete the project in accordance with the Contract Documents. It is the Bidder's responsibility to include all required costs within the most appropriate line item(s). Item 1. Chlorine Contact Tank Improvements —This item includes mobilization and demobilization, overhead and profit, the costs for performance of construction, preparatory work including but not limited to movement of personnel and equipment to and from the site, sanitary facilities, project administration and management, insurance, bonds, Owner and Engineer indemnification, temporary utilities, permits related to construction, performance of bypass pumping required to divert plant flow from the Inside to the Outside or Outside to the Inside of the Chlorine Contact Tanks and Dechlorination/Re- aeration Tanks during installation of sluice gates or other piping and equipment, performance of bypass pumping required to divert plant flow from the Chlorine Contact Tanks to the Dechlorination/Re- aeration Tanks during modifications to the concrete weir walls to maintain facility operations, and all other similar activities and facilities necessary for executing this project. The work shall include but is not limited to: • Provide all bypass pumps, temporary piping, and valves. • Remove existing aeration system piping with all associated ball valves, fittings, supports, and appurtenances inside the Chlorine Contact Tanks. • Demolish associated electrical connections. • Perform concrete restoration and repair. • Load, transport, and dispose of demolished materials in an approved disposal facility in accordance with applicable federal, state, and local regulations in accordance with the Contract Documents. • Install Owner pre- purchased equipment including one channel static mixer in the mixing chamber, seven fiberglass- reinforced plastic diffuser baffles walls within the Chlorine Contact Tanks, two fiberglass - reinforced plastic underflow baffle walls (one in each Dechlorination/Re - aeration Tank), and four sluice gates in accordance with the Contract Documents. • Construct a concrete wall within the Inside Chlorine Contact Tank and associated walkway with handrail system, construct two concrete baffle walls (one in each Chlorine Contact Tank), and modify two concrete weir walls (one between each reclaimed water transfer pump station wet well compartment and each downstream Dechlorination/Re - aeration Tanks) in accordance with the Contract Documents. 03720- 042-02 August 2013 01200 -4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT • • Install UV block shade cloth in the Inside Chlorine Contact Tank, Outside Chlorine Contact Tanks, and Mixing Chamber in accordance with the Contract Documents. • Construct and place in operation all yard piping, fittings, tracing wire, concrete pads, waives, pipe restraint, excavation, backfill, compactions, testing, and ultrasonic flow metering stations and related appurtenances in accordance with the Contract Documents. • Modify the sodium hypochlorite and sodium bisulfite chemical feed and control systems and sampling systems, relocate chemical feed pumps and analyzers, and install pipe supports, fittings, and valves at the Chlorine Contact Tanks in accordance with the Contract Documents. • Install new and modifying existing electrical components, ductbank and conduit, control panels, wiring, and instrumentation including electrical work associated with the ultrasonic flow metering stations and chemical feed and control systems. • Include the costs for all other work, material, equipment, and item not included in other Bid items. All work shall be performed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Payment for this item shall be on a lump -sum basis in accordance with a percentage of completion, in accordance with the Contractor's approved schedule of bid -item breakdown, and upon Engineer verification. Item 2. Testing Allowance —This allowance is for paying for invoices for geotechnical in- place density testing of soils and concrete cylinder testing and other testing as required by the Engineer and as specified in the Contract Documents. Only the amount properly documented by the Contractor and authorized by the Engineer will be paid to the Contractor. The Contractor shall not request any additional payment above the approved geotechnical laboratory's invoice amounts. If the Contractor has any cost associated with this bid item, it shall be included in the other (non - allowance bid item) Bid items. Failed tests will not be compensated for. Payment for this item will be in accordance with the allowance sections of General and Supplementary Conditions. Item 3. Owner's 10% Contingency —The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and services to perform unforeseen work not included in the other Bid items that may be requested and approved by the Engineer. The scope of work and cost of this additional work shall be agreed on in writing and approved by the Engineer before the work begins. The Contractor shall be paid based on the percent completion of approved work. ADDITIVE ALTERNATE The following work will be done based on the sole decision of the Owner. Item 4. Stainless Steel Aeration Piping —The Contractor shall furnish and install new aeration system piping for the Chlorine Contact Tanks to replace the existing system. The new aeration system piping shall include but not be limited to all stainless steel air header and branch 03720-042 -02 01200 -5 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT August 2013 piping, ball valves, fittings, supports, and all associated appurtenances. The Contractor shall be paid based on percent completion in accordance with Contractor's approved schedule of value and upon Engineer verification. Item 5. Owner's 10% Contingency —The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and services to perform unforeseen work not included in the other bid items that may be requested and approved by the Engineer. The scope of work and cost of this additional work shall be agreed on in writing and approved by the Engineer before the work begins. The Contractor shall be paid based on the percent completion of approved work. 03720 -042-02 August 2013 END OF SECTION 01200 -6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT SECTION 01290 SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK (NOT USED) 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section III, General Conditions. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. To the Engineer, a proposed Schedule of Values allocated to the various portions of the Work, in accordance with Section 01000, Project Requirements, and Section 01200, Measurement and Payment. B. Upon request of the Engineer, supporting data which will substantiate the values' correctness. C. The accepted Schedule of Values shall be used only as the basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment. D. An update and resubmittal of the Schedule of Values when Change Orders affect the listing or when the actual performance of the Work involves necessary changes of substance to values previously listed and approved. E. Schedule of Values: 1. Submit typed schedule on EJCDC 1910 -8 -E forms provided by the Engineer. The Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered. 2. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 10 days after the date of Owner - Contractor Agreement. 3. Format —Use the schedule of prices in the Bid Proposal. Show the cost breakdown for each lump -sum item. The lump -sum breakdown shall, at a minimum, use the Table of Contents of this manual outline. Identify each line item with the number and title of the major Specification Section. 03720 - 042-02 01290 -1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES August 2013 Identify site mobilization and demobilization, bonds and insurance, Record Drawings, photographs, and operations and maintenance manuals, etc. 4. For unit cost allowances, identify quantities taken from the Contract Documents multiplied by the unit cost to achieve the total for the item. 5. Include within each line item a direct proportional amount of the Contractor's overhead and profit. 6. Revise the schedule to list approved Change Orders with each Application for Payment. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED) A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 CASH ALLOWANCES A. Costs Included in Allowances: The cost of the product to the Contractor or subcontractor, less applicable trade discounts and applicable taxes. B. Costs Not Included in the Allowance, But Included in the Contract Price: Product handling at the site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage; protection of products from elements and from damage and labor for installation and finishing. C. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Execute purchase agreement with designated supplier. 03720 - 042 -02 01290 -2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES August 2013 • • • • • • 2. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data, and samples. Arrange for delivery. 3. Promptly inspect products upon delivery for completeness, damage, and defects. Submit claims for transportation damage. D. Differences between allowance amounts and actual costs will be adjusted by Change Order before final payment. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 01290 -3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES August 2013 • • • SECTION 01300 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section sets forth some of the general project requirements. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with revised progress schedules with each Application for Payment in addition to the number required by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with required photographs to accompany each Application for Payment. C. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with five copies of the Application for Payment. D. At Contract closeout, the Contractor shall transmit Record Documents and samples with cover letter to the Engineer listing the following: 1. Date. 2. Project title and number. 3. Contractor's name, address, and telephone number. 4. Number and title of each Record Document. 5. Signature of Contractor or authorized representative. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 03720 - 042-02 01300 -1 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION August 2013 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 FORMAT (NOT USED) 1.11 SCHEDULE CONTENT (NOT USED) 1.12 REVISIONS TO SCHEDULES (NOT USED) 1.13 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. The Owner and Engineer will organize and conduct progress meeting at least once a month to discuss the progress of the Work. The Contractor and any subcontractors the Contractor deems necessary shall attend these meetings. At the Engineer's discretion, the frequency of the meetings may be increased if the progress of the Work is not satisfactory or if coordination problems should arise. 1.14 RECORD DOCUMENTS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall employ a competent photographer to take construction record photographs during the Work. END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 01300 -2 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION August 2013 • • • • • SECTION 01310 CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall coordinate Work with that of other construction projects as needed. B. Before starting Work and from time to time as the Work progresses, the Contractor and each subcontractor shall examine the work and materials installed by others as it applies to its own work and shall notify the Engineer immediately in writing if any conditions exist which will prevent satisfactory results in the installation of the system. Should the Contractor or subcontractor start work without such notification, it shall be construed as an acceptance of all claims or questions as to the suitability of the work of others to receive its Work. The Contractor shall remove and/or replace, at its own expense, all work under this Contract which may have to be removed on account of such defects or omissions. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01000, Project Requirements. B. Section 01300, Contract Administration. C. Section 01320, Progress Schedule. D. Section 01770, Project Closeout. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. The Contractor shall ensure that all drawing, product data, and samples comply with Contract Documents and field dimensions and clearances. B. The Contractor shall submit requests for interpretation of Contract Documents in a timely fashion to ensure there are no disruptions with the Work as scheduled. Obtain instructions through the Engineer to resolve all queries. C. Process requests for substitutions and Change Orders through the Engineer. D. Deliver close -out submittals to the Engineer. 03720 - 042 -02 01310 -1 CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION August 2013 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE A. The Contractor shall submit a preliminary Progress Schedule, in accordance with Section 01320, Progress Schedule, to the Engineer. After review the Contractor shall revise and resubmit the Progress Schedule to comply with requested revisions. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 CONSTRUCTION MOBILIZATION The Contractor shall do the following: A. Cooperate with the Owner in allocating mobilization areas on site for field offices and sheds, access, traffic, and parking facilities. During construction, the Contractor shall coordinate the use of the site and facilities through the Engineer. B. Comply with the Engineer's procedures for intra - project communications: submittals, reports and records, schedules, coordination drawings, recommendations, and resolution of ambiguities /conflicts. C. Comply with the Engineer's instructions for use of temporary utilities and construction facilities. D. Coordinate field engineering and layout work under instructions of the Engineer. E. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various Sections of Contract Documents to ensure the efficient and orderly sequence of installation of 03720 - 042 -02 01310 -2 CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION August 2013 • • • • construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items to be installed later. • • F. Coordinate the sequence of Work to accommodate the Owner occupancy as specified in the Contract Documents. G. In addition to Progress Meetings specified in Section 01300, Contract Administration, hold pre - construction conferences with personnel and Subcontractors to ensure coordination of Work. The Engineer shall be informed of such meetings and shall be allowed to attend. H. Coordinate the Work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing equipment, connecting equipment, and placing such equipment in service. Coordinate the use of project space and the sequence of installing civil, architectural, mechanical, structural, instrumentation, systems, and electrical work. Follow practicable routings for pipes, ducts, and conduits, with due allowance for available physical space; make runs parallel with lines of building. Use space efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, maintenance, and repairs. J. Coordinate Work at existing facilities to minimize disruption of the Owner's operations. K. Assemble and coordinate close -out submittals specified in Section 01770, Project Closeout. 1.11 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall provide information required by the Engineer for preparing coordination drawings. B. The Contractor shall review drawings before submitting them to the Engineer. 1.12 CLOSE -OUT PROCEDURES The Contractor shall do the following: A. Notify the Owner when Work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. B. Comply with the Owner's instructions to correct items of Work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion. 03720 - 042 -02 01310 -3 CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION August 2013 C. Notify the Owner when Work has reached Final Completion. D. Comply with the Owner's instructions for completing items of Work found incomplete in the Engineer's final inspection. E. Comply with Section 01770, Project Closeout. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All vehicles on the property or easement must be operative. B. All personnel on the property or the easement are to be informed of line voltage and necessary changes. 3.02 UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall coordinate the activities of all utility companies with equipment in the construction area with the Contractor's and Subcontractor's Work. 3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. No cutting and patching of new Work will be accepted. All Work must be new and continuous in its final form. END OF SECTION 03720 - 042-02 01310 -4 CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION August 2013 • • • • • • SECTION 01320 PROGRESS SCHEDULE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. All work of this Contract shall be scheduled and monitored by the Contractor using the Critical Path Method (CPM) and shall use the Precedence Diagram Method (PDM) of scheduling. The Contractor shall prepare all schedules and all monthly updates described in this Section. The Contractor will prepare revisions of the schedule to reflect changes in the Contractor's plan of performance or changes in the Work and submit these revisions to the Engineer for acceptance. The Engineer's acceptance of the scheduling documents is to ensure that all CPM Scheduling documents prepared by the Contractor are in conformance with the Contract Documents and Specifications described herein. This acceptance will not impose on the Engineer or Owner the responsibility for the schedule or for the sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the Work, nor will the acceptance interfere with or relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for the schedule and the means, methods, procedures, and sequence of construction. B. The Contractor shall use the latest version of Primavera Scheduling software, or an approved equal, for all CPM Scheduling applications. C. The Engineer or Owner may retain the professional services of a CPM Scheduling Consultant to assist in the review and acceptance of the CPM Scheduling documents prepared by the Contractor. Therefore, any reference to the Engineer or Owner within this Section may also indicate the involvement of the Engineer's or Owner's CPM Scheduling Consultant. D. The Contractor shall prepare and maintain a detailed progress schedule throughout the construction of the Project. The schedule shall be the Contractor's working schedule and be used to plan, organize, and execute the Work, record and report actual performance and progress, and show how the Contractor plans to complete the Work. The schedule will be in the form of an activity- oriented network diagram (Critical Path Method). E. When the Contractor prepares the CPM Schedule and the schedule is accepted by the Engineer, it shall become part of the Contract Documents and will be used by Contractor and Engineer to monitor the progress of the Project. The CPM Schedule may be revised to show changes in the Contractor's method or manner of performance; delays, or authorized changes in the Work. All changes to the schedule will be made in accordance with Article 1.15 of this Section. 03720 - 042 -02 01320 -1 PROGRESS SCHEDULE August 2013 F. The Contractor acknowledges that free float belongs to the Owner. 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS A. To help prepare the detailed CPM Schedule, the Contractor shall engage at his own expense a Consultant who is skilled in the time -and -cost application of network techniques for construction projects. If the Contractor has qualified personnel on staff, the Contractor can perform the required scheduling within his own organization. B. The person performing the CPM scheduling shall have a minimum of 3 years of CPM scheduling experience within the past 5 years on projects of similar size and complexity. C. Before engaging a Consultant or using in -house staff personnel and within 5 calendar days after Award of Contract, the Contractor shall submit the following to the Engineer: 1. The name and address of the proposed Consultant or employee who will prepare the CPM schedule. 03720 - 042 -02 01320 -2 PROGRESS SCHEDULE August 2013 2. Sufficient information to show that the proposed Consultant or employee has the above qualifications including a list of prior construction projects of similar size and complexity, along with selected network samples, which the proposed Consultant or employee has performed. These network samples must show complete project planning similar to that required under this Contract. D. The Engineer shall have the right to approve or disapprove employment of the proposed Consultant or the performance of the requirements herein by the Contractor's employee and will notify the Contractor of the decision within 7 calendar days from receipt of the information. If the proposed Consultant is rejected, the Contractor shall resubmit another name within 7 calendar days for renewed consideration. Such approval or disapproval does not release the Contractor from his obligations under this Contract. E. If the Owner or Engineer has reasonable objections to the qualifications of the Contractor's nominated scheduling personnel, the Contractor shall, at no additional cost to the Owner, employ a scheduler whose qualifications comply with the requirements of this Section or employ a qualified subcontractor, subject to review of his qualifications by the Engineer and the Owner. 1.10 PRELIMINARY 90 -DAY CPM SCHEDULE A. The Contractor shall develop a 90 -Day CPM Schedule within 10 days after the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. This schedule shall be a computerized CPM Schedule showing only the early start, early finish of each work activity. The 90 -Day CPM Schedule shall contain work activities over the first 90 days, and the estimated durations for each work activity shall be 15 work days or less. The balance of the job shall be shown in summary log. The 90 -Day CPM Schedule shall include but not be limited to site work, hazardous material removal, demolition, key procurement activities (i.e. submissions, approvals, fabrication, and delivery), equipment, mechanical, electrical, and plumbing coordination and any other work that will occur during the first 90 days. This 90 CPM Day Schedule shall become part of the Detailed CPM Schedule. 1.11 DEFINITIONS The following terms used in this Section shall have the following meanings: A. Activity.A fundamental unit of work in a CPM Schedule establishing the time and resources required for performing or furnishing a part of the Work or a requisite step. Each Activity has defined geographical boundaries, time duration in days, and a detailed estimate of resources required to construct the task. Each activity is assigned a unique description, activity number, activity code, and a dollar value. 03720- 042 -02 01320 -3 PROGRESS SCHEDULE August 2013 B. Record Schedule. The Record Schedule will have actual start dates and actual finish dates for all work Activities and Milestones necessary to complete the Work. C. Baseline Schedule. The Engineer- accepted Proposed Baseline Schedule. The Baseline Schedule is the Contractor's plan which has been approved by the Engineer for completion of the Work in compliance with the Milestones listed in the Contract Documents and within the Contract Time. The Baseline Schedule may be revised only by the Engineer's approval of a Contractor- produced adjusted Baseline Schedule. The Baseline Schedule for the Work is the sole basis for (a) the monitoring of the Contractor's progress against Milestones and the Contract Time; (b) calculating Total Float or Contract Float; and (c) the evaluation and reconciliation of extensions in Contract Time, if any. The first Baseline Schedule shall be designated by all parties as the Baseline Schedule, Rev. 0. When Baseline Schedules are adjusted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer, they shall be designated as Baseline Schedule, Rev. 1,2,3, etc. (as appropriate) and shall replace the previously approved Baseline Schedule. D. Contract Float. Working days between the Contractor's anticipated date for early completion of the Work, or specified part, and the corresponding Contract Time. E. CPM Network. The structure of the computerized schedule. The CPM Network accounts for the entire Work and defines the construction logic in terms of all of the Activities with their logical dependencies. F. Critical Path. A series of Activities linked by dependencies that determine the shortest possible time to complete the Work. G. Early Dates. The early start dates and early finish dates, i.e., the dates each Activity will start and finish if each is started at the earliest end of the range of dates that the CPM indicates the Activities can be performed. H. Excusable Delay. An unforeseeable delay, beyond the control of the Contractor, experienced due to no fault or negligence by the Contractor, its subcontractors, or suppliers. I. Free Float. The amount of time that any activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the following activity. J. Fragnet. A predefined or individual segment of a network which represents a specified sequence of the Work. Fragnets shall be submitted which include all Activities, required resources, and costs and shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval of all Change Orders before their incorporation into the Baseline 03720 - 042 -02 01320 -4 PROGRESS SCHEDULE August 2013 • • • • • • Schedule by the Contractor. A Fragnet shall be submitted before approval of any proposed logic changes. Fragnets are banded Activities representing a revised portion of the Baseline Schedule and shall be logically connected and constrained by previously existing predecessor and successor Activities, as applicable. K. Late Dates. The late start dates and the late finish dates; i.e. the dates each Activity will start and finish if each is started at the latest end of the range of dates that the CPM Network indicates the Activities can be performed and still achieve the Milestones and Contract Time. L. Milestone. A point of progress designated for the purpose of establishing start or finish times for a key aspect of the Work. M. Predecessor Activity. An Activity which precedes another Activity (to which it is logically tied) in the CPM Network. N. Preliminary Schedule -The Contractor's Baseline Schedule for the first 180 days of the Contract. O. Proposed Baseline Schedule. The Proposed Baseline Schedule shall represent the Contractor's plan for completion of the Work in compliance with Milestones listed in the Contract Documents and within the Contract Time. It represents the Contractor's first complete planned schedule submitted for review and approval by the Engineer. The Proposed Baseline Schedule shall take into account all foreseeable activities to be accomplished by any separate contractors, utility owners, or the Owner's operations. The Proposed Baseline Schedule shall anticipate all necessary manpower and resources to accomplish activities within the durations set forth in the Proposed Baseline Schedule. The Proposed Baseline Schedule shall address and indicate all submittals required by the Contract and indicate the times allowed for review, resubmittal, and approval of submittals. Upon approval by the Engineer, the first Proposed Baseline Schedule shall become the Baseline Schedule, Rev. 0. P. Resource Loading. The allocation of work force and equipment necessary for the completion of an Activity as scheduled. Q. Six -Week Schedule. A detailed progress schedule taken from the Working Schedule, which discloses the plan for the next 6 weeks' Work and the actual schedule for the previous 6 weeks' Work. R. Successor Activity. An Activity which follows another Activity (to which it is logically tied) in the CPM Network. 03720 -042 -02 01320 -5 PROGRESS SCHEDULE August 2013 S. Total Float. The number of working days by which a part of the Work in the Baseline Schedule or Revised Baseline Schedule may be delayed from its Early Dates without necessarily extending the Contract Time. T. Working Schedule. When the Proposed Baseline Schedule (or a subsequent adjustment is made by the Contractor to the Baseline Schedule) is accepted by the Engineer and becomes the Baseline Schedule, Rev. 0,1,2,3, etc., it shall be duplicated and become the Working Schedule. The Contractor shall update the Working Schedule monthly. The Working Schedule shall be updated monthly to reflect actual progress only and shall be the basis for determining monthly progress payments and the Contractor's performance in relation to the most recently approved Baseline Schedule. The Final Working Schedule shall be the Record Schedule. 1.12 DETAILED CPM SCHEDULE A. The Detailed Network Diagram shall provide sufficient detail and clarity of form and technique so that the Contractor can plan, schedule, and control his work properly and the Engineer can readily monitor and follow the progress for all portions of the Work. The Detailed Network Diagram shall comply with the Contract Times of the Agreement and various limits imposed by the Contract Documents, including required sequencing of portions of the Work described in the Summary of Work Section. The degree of detail shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer, but the following factors shall have a bearing on the required depth of activity detail: 1. The structural breakdown of the Project. 2. Project Phasing and/or Milestones. 3. The type of work to be performed and the labor trades involved. 4. All purchase, manufacture, and delivery activities for all major materials and equipment. 5. Maintenance of Facilities in Operation. 6. Submittal and approval of shop drawings and material samples. 7. Plans for all subcontract work. 8. Crew flows and sizes. 9. Assignment of responsibility for performing all activities. 10. Access and availability to work areas. 11. Identification of interfaces and dependencies with preceding, concurrent, and follow -on subcontractors and contractors. 12. Testing and start-up of systems. 13. Planning for phased takeover by the Owner. B. Activities shown shall be in working days and shall have a maximum duration of 5 days, except in the case of non - construction activities such as procurement of 03720 - 042 -02 01320 -6 PROGRESS SCHEDULE August 2013 • • • • • • materials and delivery of equipment. All durations shall be the result of definitive manpower and resource planning by the Contractor. 1.13 COMPUTERIZATION OF THE DETAILED CPM SCHEDULE A. The mathematical analysis of the Detailed Network Diagram shall be made by computer, and a tabulation for each activity shall include the following: 1. Unique event numbers. 2. Activity descriptions. 3. Durations in work days for each activity. 4. Earliest start date (by calendar date). 5. Earliest finish date (by calendar date). 6. Latest start day (by calendar date). 7. Latest finish day (by calendar date). 8. Slack or total float in work days. 9. Percentage of activity completed. B. The following computer outputs shall be prepared as part of the initial schedule submission and each update thereafter: 1. Activity file sort. 2. Eight -week "Look Ahead" detailed bar chart. 3. Summary bar chart. 4. Additional computer sorts as required by the Owner. 5. CDs of all computer files. 6. Items 1 through 4 above, submit seven (7) copies of each. 1.14 COMPLETION REQUIREMENT A. The 90 -Day Schedule shall be completed within 10 calendar days after the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. B. The Detailed CPM Schedule shall be prepared within 30 calendar days after the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. C. If the Contractor fails to provide the required CPM scheduling documents to the Engineer within the time prescribed and/or revisions of the scheduling documents within the required time, the Contractor shall be in default of the Contract requirements and the Engineer may withhold approval of progress payments until such time as the Contractor submits the required information. 03720 - 042 -02 01320 -7 PROGRESS SCHEDULE August 2013 D. Notwithstanding the implementation of the Progress Schedule, it shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to complete the Work within the time of completion required by the Contract. 1.15 UPDATINGS A. The 90 -Day CPM Schedule shall be updated monthly until the Engineer accepts the Detailed CPM Schedule. B. The first update of the Detailed CPM Schedule shall take place 60 calendar days after the Notice to Proceed with subsequent updates performed monthly at the jobsite for the duration of the contract. C. The Contractor shall update the Detailed CPM Schedule monthly, using a cutoff/data date agreeable to the Contractor and the Engineer. This cutoff/data date shall be consistent from month to month. The update information shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Actual start dates. 2. Actual completion dates. 3. Activity percent completion. 4. Remaining duration of activities in progress. D. The Contractor shall update all the scheduling documents and submit these documents to the Engineer within 5 workdays of the cutoff/data date. E. The Contractor shall submit seven copies of the CPM schedule and one electronic copy of the CPM schedule on a CD. F. As part of the normal CPM update, the Contractor shall prepare a written narrative report highlighting the progress during the past update period. The written narrative report shall include but not be limited to the following information: 1. Summary of work accomplished during the past update period. 2. Milestone Comparison Chart. 3. Analysis of Critical Path(s). 4. Analysis of Secondary Critical Path(s). Secondary Critical Path is defined as float within 10 W.D. of Critical Path. 5. Analysis of time lost/gained during the update period. 6. Identification of problem areas. 7. Identification of change orders and/or any delay that is impacting /delaying the project schedule. 8. Solutions to current problems. 03720 - 042 -02 01320 -8 PROGRESS SCHEDULE August 2013 • • • • • G. The Contractor is required to attend and participate in a CPM update review meeting with the Engineer. Attendance is mandatory. This meeting will take place during progress meetings. The purpose of this meeting is to review past progress, current status, problem areas, and future progress. The Contractor's narrative report will be reviewed at this meeting. H. All schedule update information outlined above will be reviewed and accepted by the Engineer. 1.16 RECOVERY SCHEDULE A. If the Contractor fails to achieve the planned progress, as indicated in the approved/updated detailed CPM Schedule, and the Contractor's lack of progress delays the Critical path and/or an intermediate milestone by more than 10 work days (monthly or cumulatively), the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review and acceptance a proposed Recovery Schedule indicating how the Contractor will recover the time lost. B. If the Contractor fails to submit a Recovery Schedule and/or fails to cooperate with the Engineer in the Recovery Schedule process, the Owner can immediately order the Contractor to accelerate completion of the late activities which have been delayed by whatever means necessary without any additional costs to the Owner. The Owner can withhold future progress payments until the Contractor's progress is in compliance with the Contract Schedule or until the Owner has approved by Change Order proposed adjustments to the contract milestones, extension of contract time, or modification of the Contract Schedule. 1.17 CHANGE ORDERS, DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME A. When proposed Change Orders, approved Change Orders, or any delays are experienced and the Contractor believes the Change Order/Delay is causing delay to an intermediate contract milestone or to the project completion, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a Time Impact Analysis, explaining the influence of each Change Order/Delay on the current updated Contract CPM Schedule. The Contractor shall prepare a "Fragnet" (network analysis) of each Change Order/Delay on the current updated Contract CPM Schedule. The analysis will demonstrate the time impact based on the date the change is given to the Contractor, the status of construction at that point in time, and the event time computation of all affected activities. The event times used in the analysis shall be those included in the latest updated copy of the detailed CPM Schedule closest to the time of delay or as accepted by the Engineer. 03720 - 042 -02 01320 -9 PROGRESS SCHEDULE August 2013 B. For the Contractor to be entitled to an extension of Contract time to an intermediate contract milestone and/or to the project completion, the Time Impact Analysis must show that the Change Order/Delay impacts the intermediate contractual milestone date and/or the updated CPM Schedule's Critical Path, thereby directly impacting the project completion date. Change Orders/Delays that do not impact intermediate contractual milestones and/or the critical path and impact activities with float will not be considered as a delay to the project and no extension of time will be granted. C. The Contractor must submit a written analysis within 7 calendar days after a delay occurs or authorized change in work is given to the Contractor. If the Contractor does not submit a written analysis for specific Change Order(s) or Delay(s) within the specified period of time, then it is mutually agreed that the particular Change Order of Delay has no time impact on the Project CPM Schedule and no time extension is required. D. The Engineer will accept or reject each Time Impact Analysis within 14 calendar days after submission, unless subsequent meetings and negotiations are necessary. Upon the Engineer's acceptance, the Contractor will incorporate fragnets illustrating the influence of the Change Orders and Delays into the Detailed CPM Schedule during the first update after agreement is reached. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 01320 -10 PROGRESS SCHEDULE August 2013 • • SECTION 01330 SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall submit documentation that describes the Work to be performed under the Contract as required in this Section. This documentation will be for the Engineer and Owner's review and use. The documentation furnished by the Contractor must enable the Engineer and Owner to verify the Contractor's performance and compliance with Contract requirements. The documentation shall cover all services and deliverables required and secured by the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. The Contractor shall prepare documentation and submittals required by other sections of the Contract. The format of documents and submittals required by other sections shall conform to the requirements of this Section. 1. Section III, General Conditions. 2. Section 01785, Record Documents. 3. Section 01820, Training. 4. Section 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manuals. 5. All Sections and Divisions that require submittal of documents. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General —The Contractor shall submit the following: 1. Project documentation: For the Engineer and Owner's internal use and shall include all information that will be essential for the facility's operations, maintenance, training, and repair of equipment and facilities supplied by the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit all documentation necessary to ascertain compliance with technical /contractual provisions. 2. Shop drawings: Drawings, schedules, diagrams, warrant, and other data prepared specifically for this Contract by the Contractor or through the Contractor by way of subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, distributor, or other lower -tier contractor to illustrate a portion of the Work. 03720 - 042 -02 01330 -1 SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE August 2013 3. Product data: Preprinted materials such as illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, manufacturer's descriptive literature, catalog data, and other data to illustrate a portion of the Work, but not prepared exclusively for this Contract. 4. Samples: Physical examples of products, materials, equipment, assemblies, or workmanship that are physically identical to portions of the Work, illustrating portions of work, or establishing standards for evaluating appearance of finished work or both. 5. Administrative submittals: Data presented for reviews and acceptance to ensure that administrative requirements of the project are adequately met but not to ensure directly that work is in accordance with the design concept and in compliance with Contract Documents. 6. Mockups: Before installing work requiring mockups, the Contractor shall build mockups for each form of construction and finish required using materials indicated for the completed Work, as follows: a. Build mockups in the location and of the size directed by the Engineer. b. Notify the Engineer 7 days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. c. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. d. Obtain the Engineer's acceptance of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. e. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. f. Demolish and remove mockups when directed by the Engineer. B. Coordination 1. Submittals and schedules shall be checked and coordinated with the Work of all trades involved before they are submitted and shall bear the Contractor's stamp of approval as evidence of such checking and coordination. Drawings or schedules submitted without this stamp of approval shall be returned to the. Contractor for resubmission. C. Start of Work 1. Within 30 calendar days after the notice to proceed for the project, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a Contract Data Requirements List that defines all data to be submitted under this Contract. Included in this 03720- 042 -02 01330 -2 SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE August 2013 • • • • list shall be the names of all proposed manufacturers furnishing specified items to the extent known. Review of this list by the Engineer shall in no way relieve the Contractor from providing materials, equipment, systems, and structures fully in accordance with the Specifications. D. General Requirements 1. The Contractor shall prepare, assemble, and submit all documents as described herein. The Contractor shall submit certification that the documents prepared conform to the Contract requirements and will result in a complete and operable project. The Engineer and Owner shall review the Contractor's documents for conformance to the Contract requirements and may comment on the documents. 2. All submittals shall be provided electronically and in hard copy. The hard copies shall have a minimum of eight copies that will be distributed in the following way: a. 3 —Owner b. 3 —Jones Edmunds c. 2— Returned. 3. The Contractor shall approve and certify all project documents. The Contractor's failure to certify the documents or failure to provide documents that demonstrate conformance to the Contract requirements are grounds for rejection. The Contractor shall be responsible for and bear all costs for proceeding with any part of the Work that fails to meet the Contract requirements. 4. Submittal of documents for the Engineer's review shall in no way relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing a complete, safe, reliable, operating, and coordinated Work (system/equipment /facilities) that is in compliance with these Contract documents. E. Requests for Substitution 1. All requests for substitution shall clearly and specifically indicate any and all differences or omissions between the products specified as basis of design and the product proposed for substitution. Data shall include but not be limited to differences as follows for both the specified and substituted products: a. Principle of operation. b. Materials of construction or finishes. 03720 - 042 -02 01330 -3 SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE August 2013 c. Thickness or gauge of materials. d. Weight of item. e. Deleted features or items. f. Added features or items. g. Changes in other work caused by the substitution. h. If the substitution contains differences or omissions not specifically called to the attention of the Engineer, the Engineer reserves the right to require equal or similar features to be added to the substituted product at the Contractor's expense. F. Submittal Requirements and Procedures 1. Drawing Formats and Requirements a. Drawings —All Drawings and Shop Drawings shall be prepared on 22 -x -34 -inch paper and shall have a blank area of 3 x 4 inches in the lower right hand corner above the title block. Each Drawing shall indicate the following information in the title block: (1) Title and Drawing Number. (2) Date of Drawing or Revision. (3) Name of Building or Facility. (4) Name of Contractor or subcontractor. (5) Drawing contents and locations. (6) Specification Section and Subsection Numbers. 2. Product Data a. Requirements— Product data shall include all catalog cuts, performance surveys, test reports, equipment lists, material lists, diagrams, pictures, and descriptive material. All product data shall be submitted on either 8.5 x 11 inches or folded 11 x 17 inches size paper of 20 lb. (9.072 kg) weight. The submittal information shall show the standard and optional product features, as well as all performance data and specifications. The manufacturer's recommendation for special tools shall be supplied. 3. Samples —The Contractor shall furnish samples required by the Contract Documents, for review by the Engineer. Samples shall be delivered to the Engineer as specified or directed. a. All samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to illustrate clearly the functional characteristics of the product, with integrally 03720 - 042 -02 01330 -4 SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE August 2013 • • related parts and attachment devices. The samples shall show the full range of color, texture, and pattern. b. The Contractor shall submit a minimum of four samples of items submitted. All samples shall be marked with required submittal information, as specified above. 4. Color, Texture, and Pattern Charts a. The Contractor shall submit color, texture, or pattern charts of all required finishes. b. A minimum of four charts of each item shall be submitted. 5. Submittal Information Requirements a. When used in the Contract Documents, the term "Submittal Information" shall be considered to mean the following information at a minimum: (1) Contract Name. (2) Contract Number. (3) Location within Facility. (4) Date Submitted. b. Drawings —The Contractor shall mark submittal information on all Drawings in the left half of the 4 -x -3 -inch block as described above. c. Product Data and Manufacturer's Literature —The Contractor shall mark all product data and manufacturer's literature with submittal information and note which item is being furnished. The Contractor shall mark the option and supplies to be furnished with the item. At least one original manufacturer product data sheet must be submitted; the balance can be copied. Do not submit the manufacturer's general catalog: submit only items being installed or delivered. When manuals are being submitted, the Contractor shall mark submittal information on both the cover and title page. If manuals being submitted contain more than just one item, each item must be marked and only Contract name and number is to be marked on the cover and title page. 6. Training, Operation and Maintenance Manuals a. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review and • acceptance of manufacturer's installation, operations, lubrication, 03720 - 042-02 01330 -5 SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE August 2013 maintenance, and training manuals for all equipment installed or delivered under this Contract. All manuals shall have submittal information marked on the front cover, title page, and three places inside the manual. If the manual being submitted is for different components, mark the front cover and title page only. Each component section must be marked with the Specification Section and subsection numbers. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall conform to requirements defined in Sections 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manual, and 01820, Training. G. Required Submittals 1. Architectural and Structural Submittals a. This Section specifies general procedural requirements for contractual submittals for the following architectural and structural schedules, product data, samples, and manufacturer's certificates. (1) Product Data —The Contractor shall provide product data for all architectural and structural items, options, and other data and provide supplemental manufacturer's standard data for information unique to the Work and installation. The submittals shall reflect all items delivered or installed under this Contract. (2) Samples —The Contractor shall provide all samples required under this Specification including color charts and product samples. (3) Material, equipment, and installation and demolition Specifications. 2. Mechanical and Electrical System Submittals a. This Section specifies general procedural requirements for mechanical schedules, performance data, control diagrams, and other submittal data. b. The Contractor shall submit the following: (1) Performance Data. (2) Power and Riser Diagrams— Single line riser, power diagrams, and all conduit runs shall be provided for all equipment and facilities. 03720 - 042 -02 01330 -6 SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE August 2013 • • • • • • (3) Wiring Diagrams — Elementary controls diagrams and separate wiring diagrams for mechanical and electrical unit/subsystem. Drawing for starting and shutdown of equipment including controls shall be provided, including a comprehensive description of operation. (4) Finished Data — Complete surface preparation and finished data for all mechanical and electrical unit/subsystems shall be provided, including a complete list of cleaning instructions. (5) Factory Testing— Detailed description of factory testing procedures, reporting procedures and criteria for test passing or failing shall be provided for all mechanical and electrical units /subsystems. Testing shall comply with the General Requirements and Technical Requirements Sections. (6) Site (Field) Testing and Acceptance — Detailed description of site testing and acceptance tests including descriptions of procedures, testing equipment, reporting procedures, and criteria for passing or failing tests shall be provided for all mechanical and electrical units /subsystems. Testing shall comply with General Requirements and Technical Requirements. (7) Factory Test Report—After fabrication and testing, the Contractor shall submit the results of tests. No shipment of any mechanical and electrical unit/subsystem shall be allowed without the written certification from the Contractor that the equipment conforms to the Contract requirements. (8) Site Test and Acceptance Report—Site test and acceptance reports shall be submitted to the Owner and Engineer. (9) Operations and Maintenance Manuals —The Contractor shall furnish manuals for all mechanical and electrical equipment specified under this Contract. Each manual shall include the following at a minimum: 03720 - 042-02 01330 -7 SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE August 2013 (a) Description of equipment. (b) Record shop drawing. (c) Operation and maintenance instructions. (d) Part lists. (e) Equipment ratings. (f) Valve list. (g) Lubrication instructions. c. Compliance with this Section does not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the requirements of Section 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manuals. H. Submittal Review 1. The Engineer's review of the Contractor's documents shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for meeting all of the requirements of the Contract nor of the responsibility for correcting the documents furnished. The Contractor shall have no claim for additional cost or extension in time because of delays due to revisions of the documents that may be necessary for ensuring compliance with the Contract. 2. The Engineer will review a submittal or re- submittal once, after which the cost of review shall be borne by the Contractor. The cost of Engineering shall be equal to the Engineer's full cost. 3. No partial submittals will be reviewed. A submittal or re- submittal not complete will be returned to the Contractor for completing and re-submittal. 4. Documents submitted by the Contractor for approval by the Engineer will be returned bearing a project- specific stamp bearing the dated signature of the reviewer and one of four boxes checked: a. NO EXCEPTIONS NOTED —This indicates that the submittal appears to be in compliance with the requirements of the performance specifications and that the Work may proceed. b. MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED —This indicates that the reviewer has added a minor correction to the submission and that the Work (modified in accordance with the correction comment) may proceed. The Contractor shall accept the responsibility of the modified document and resulting Work with no additional compensation. c. AMEND AND RESUBMIT —This indicates that the submittal will require Contractor modifications based on the reviewer's comments 03720 - 042 -02 01330 -8 SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE August 2013 • • • • • • that accompanied the returned submittal. The Contractor will be cautioned that work may not proceed under this review status. d. REJECTED —This indicates that the submittal is not in conformance with the requirements of the performance Specifications and cannot be modified to gain compliance. A new submittal will be required in the instance of a "reject" status and the Contractor will be cautioned that work may not proceed under this condition. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Before submitting documents for the Engineer's review, the Contractor shall review the documentation for conformance to the Contract requirements. Submittals shall be complete and comprise a logical division of the Contract Work. B. All documentation submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer shall be accompanied by a letter of transmittal and shall be submitted in a sequence that allows the Engineer to have all of the information necessary for checking and accepting a particular document at the time of submittal. 03720 - 042 -02 01330 -9 SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE August 2013 C. Each document shall be identified by a document number, Contract number, Contract name, location, Specification Section, subsection numbers, and submittal date. Where a manual/drawing is revised to reflect a change in design or a change for any other reason, each such revision shall be shown by a revision number, date, and subject in a revision block. Indication of official approval by the Contractor's Project Manager shall also be included. To permit rapid location of the revision, additional notation shall be made in the manual opposite the line or area where the change was made and identified by the corresponding revision number. 3.02 DOCUMENTATION CONTROL AND SUBMITTAL SEQUENCING A. The Contract Data Requirements List shall be updated and resubmitted to the Engineer monthly, throughout the duration of the Contract. This list shall identify the Contractor's submittal number, proposed and actual submittal date, Contract Specification Section Number, Paragraph, Item of the Work, and type of document. B. The Contractor shall work with the Engineer to provide a regulated flow of submittals that allows the Engineer to review the submittals in the defined time frame without undue delays. Monthly the Contractor shall provide the Engineer a schedule of the approximate quantities and delivery dates for all submittals due for the next 120 days. 3.03 FINAL RECORD DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall submit the Final Record Drawing Package to the Engineer for review 30 days before Final Completion. Record Drawings shall be in accordance with Section 01785, Record Documents. 3.04 REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTAL A. Additional documents, drawings, interface data, and other pertinent project submittal data are listed in specific sections of this Contract. 3.05 RECORD PRINTS A. The Contractor shall submit one set of all record prints before final completion. The record print or project records shall include submittals, catalog cuts, drawings, calculations, test reports, manufacturer's data, maintenance manuals, installation instructions, and operating manuals. All "record prints" shall be delivered to the Engineer in three -ring binders with dividers and shall be placed in order by Specification Section. END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 01330 -10 SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE August 2013 • • • • • • SECTION 01350 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Work covered by this Section consists of furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment and performing all work required for the prevention of environmental pollution in conformance with applicable laws and regulations during and as the result of construction operations under this Contract. In this Section environmental pollution is defined as the presence of chemical, physical, or biological elements or agents which adversely affect human health or welfare, unfavorably alter ecological balances of importance to human life, affect other species of importance to man, or degrade the utility of the environment for aesthetic and/or recreational purposes. B. The control of environmental pollution requires considering air, water, and land and involves managing noise and solid waste as well as other pollutants. C. The Contractor shall schedule and conduct all work in a manner that will minimize the erosion of soils in the area of the Work. The Contractor shall provide erosion - control measures such as diversion channels, sedimentation or filtration systems, berms, staked hay bales, seeding, mulching or other special surface treatments that are required to prevent silting and muddying of streams, rivers, impoundments, lakes, etc. All erosion - control measures shall be in place in an area before any construction activity in that area. Specific requirements for erosion and sedimentation controls are specified in Section 02370, Erosion and Sedimentation Control. D. This Section is intended to ensure that construction is achieved with a minimum of disturbance to the existing ecological balance between a water resource and its surroundings. These are general guidelines. It is the Contractor's responsibility to determine the specific construction techniques to meet these guidelines. E. All phases of sedimentation and erosion control shall comply with and be subject to the laws of the State of Florida. The Contractor shall prepare a sedimentation and erosion - control drawing meeting the requirements of the law and furnish two copies of the approved Drawing to the Engineer. F. The Contractor shall take every reasonable precaution throughout construction to prevent the erosion of soil and the sedimentation of streams, bays, storm systems, 03720 - 042 -02 01350 -1 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PROCEDURES August 2013 or other water impoundments, ground surfaces, or other property as required by federal, state, and local regulations. G. The Contractor shall prevent damage to properties outside the construction limits from siltation due to construction of the project and assume all responsibilities to the affected property owners for correction of damages that may occur. Erosion - control measures shall be performed conforming to the requirements of and in accordance with plans approved by applicable state and local agencies and as specified by the erosion - control portion shown on the Drawings and as required by these Specifications. The Contractor shall not allow mud and debris to accumulate in the streets or enter drainage ditches, canals, or waterways. If the Contractor pumps water from excavations during construction, appropriate siltation preventative measures shall be taken before the pumped water is discharged into any drainage ditch, canal, or waterway. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01100, Summary of Work. B. Section 02230, Site Preparation. C. Section 02370, Erosion and Sedimentation Control. 1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE A. Before beginning the Work, the Contractor shall meet with the Engineer to establish agreed -upon compliance with these provisions and administration of the environmental pollution control program. B. The Contractor shall remove temporary environmental control features when approved by the Engineer and incorporate permanent control features into the project at the earliest practicable time. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. B. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable Federal, State, and local laws and regulations concerning environmental pollution control and abatement. 03720 - 042 -02 01350 -2 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PROCEDURES August 2013 • • • • 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) • • 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EROSION CONTROL A. The Contractor shall construct all devices (silt fences, retention areas, etc.) for sediment control at the locations required to protect federal, state, and local water bodies and water courses and drainage systems before beginning to excavate the site. All devices shall be properly maintained in place until a structure or paving makes the device unnecessary or until directed to permanently remove the device. B. The Contractor shall provide positive means of erosion control such as shallow ditches around construction to carry off surface water. Erosion - control measures, such as siltation basins, hay check dams, mulching, jute netting, and other equivalent techniques shall be used as appropriate. Surface water shall be prevented from flowing into excavated areas. At the completion of the Work the ground surface restored to its original condition. C. The Contractor shall remove all silt, sediment, and debris buildup regularly to maintain functioning storm systems and erosion - control devices. D. The angle for graded slopes and fills shall be no greater than the angle that can be retained by vegetative cover or other adequate erosion - control devices or structures. All disturbed areas outside embankment left exposed will, within 30 working days of completion of any phase of grading, be planted or otherwise provided with either temporary or permanent ground cover, devices, or structures sufficient to restrain erosion. 03720 -042 -02 01350 -3 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PROCEDURES August 2013 3.02 PROTECTION OF STREAMS AND SURFACE WATERS A. Care shall be taken to prevent or reduce to a minimum any damage to any stream or surface water from pollution by debris, sediment, or other material or from the manipulation of equipment and/or materials in or near such streams. Water that has been used for washing or processing or that contains oils or sediments that will reduce the quality of the water in the stream shall not be directly returned to the stream. Such waters shall be diverted through a settling basin or filter before being directed into streams or surface waters. B. The Contractor shall not discharge water from dewatering operations directly into any live or intermittent stream, channel, wetlands, surface water, or any storm sewer. Water from dewatering operations shall be treated by filtration, settling basins, or other approved method to reduce the amount of sediment contained in the water to allowable levels. C. All preventative measures shall be taken to avoid spillage of petroleum products and other pollutants. In the event of any spillage, prompt remedial action shall be taken in accordance with a contingency action plan approved by the Florida Department of Environmental Protection and the US EPA. The Contractor shall submit two copies of approved contingency plans to the Engineer. D. Water being flushed from structures or pipelines after disinfection with C12 shall be treated with a dechlorination solution approved by the Engineer before discharge. 3.03 PROTECTION OF LAND RESOURCES A. After completion of construction, the Contractor shall restore land resources within the project boundaries and outside the limits of permanent work to a condition that will appear to be natural and not detract from the appearance of the project. All construction activities shall be confined to areas shown on the Drawings. B. Outside of areas requiring earthwork for the construction of the new facilities, the Contractor shall not deface, injure, or destroy trees or shrubs nor remove or cut them without prior approval. No ropes, cables, or guys shall be fastened to or attached to any existing nearby trees for anchorage unless specifically authorized by the Engineer. Where such special emergency use is permitted, the Contractor shall first wrap the trunk with a sufficient thickness of burlap or rags over which softwood cleats shall be tied before any rope, cable, or wire is placed. The Contractor shall in any event be responsible for any damage resulting from such use. 03720- 042 -02 01350 -4 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PROCEDURES August 2013 • • • • C. The Contractor shall protect trees that may possibly be defaced, bruised, injured, or otherwise damaged by the construction equipment, dumping, or other operations by placing boards, planks, or poles around them. Monuments and markers shall be protected similarly. D. Any trees or other landscape features scarred or damaged by the Contractor's equipment or operations shall be restored as nearly as possible to their original condition. The Owner will decide the method of restoration to be used and whether damaged trees shall be treated and healed or removed and disposed of. 1. All scars made on trees by equipment, construction operations, or by the removal of limbs larger than 1 inch in diameter shall be coated as soon as possible with an approved tree wound dressing. All trimming or pruning shall be performed in an approved manner by experienced workmen with saws or pruning shears. Tree trimming with axes will not be permitted. 2. Climbing ropes shall be used where necessary for safety. Trees that are to remain, either within or outside established clearing limits, that are subsequently damaged by the Contractor and, in the opinion of the Owner, are beyond saving shall be immediately removed and replaced. E. The Contractor's storage and other construction buildings required temporarily in the performance of the work shall be located in cleared portions of the job site or areas to be cleared as shown on the Drawings and approved by the Engineer and shall not be within wetlands or floodplains. Preserving the landscape shall be required in the selection of all sites and in the construction of buildings. Drawings showing storage facilities shall be submitted for the Engineer's approval. F. If the Contractor proposes to construct temporary roads or embankments and excavations for plant and/or work areas, the Contractor shall submit the following for approval at least 10 days before the scheduled start of such temporary work: 1. A layout of all temporary roads, excavations, embankments, and drainage to be constructed within the work area. 2. Details of temporary road construction. 3. Drawings and cross sections of proposed embankments and their foundations, including a description of proposed materials. 4. Landscaping drawings showing the proposed restoration of the area. The proposed removal of any trees and shrubs outside the limits of the existing clearing area must be indicated. Locations of guard posts or barriers required to control vehicular traffic and protect trees and shrubs to be 03720 -042 -02 01350 -5 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PROCEDURES August 2013 maintained undamaged must also be indicated. The drawings shall provide for the obliteration of construction scars as such and shall provide for a natural appearing final condition of the area. Modification of the Contractor's approved drawings shall be made only with the written approval of the Engineer. No unauthorized road construction, excavation, or embankment construction including disposal areas will be permitted. G. The Contractor shall remove all signs of temporary construction facilities such as haul roads, work areas, structures, foundations of temporary structures, stockpiles of excess waste materials, or any other vestiges of construction as directed by the Engineer. It is anticipated that excavation, filling, and plowing of roadways will be required to restore the area to near natural conditions which will permit the growth of vegetation the roadway areas. The disturbed areas shall be prepared and seeded as approved by the Engineer or Owner. H. All debris and excess material will be disposed of outside wetland or floodplain areas in an environmentally sound manner. 3.04 PROTECTION OF AIR QUALITY A. Burning— Burning will not be permitted at the project site for the disposal of refuse and debris. B. Dust Control —The Contractor shall maintain all excavations, embankment, stockpiles, access roads, plant sites, waste areas, borrow areas, and all other work areas within or outside the project boundaries free from dust which could cause the standards for air pollution to be exceeded and which would cause a hazard or nuisance to others. C. An approved method of stabilization consisting of sprinkling or other similar methods will be permitted to control dust. The use of petroleum products is prohibited. The use of chlorides may be permitted with approval from the Engineer. D. To be approved, sprinkling must be repeated at such intervals as to keep all parts of the disturbed area at least damp at all times, and the Contractor shall have sufficient competent equipment on the job to accomplish this. Dust control shall be performed as the Work proceeds and whenever a dust nuisance or hazard occurs, as determined by the Owner. 3.05 NOISE CONTROL A. The Contractor shall make every effort to minimize noises caused by the construction operations. Equipment shall be equipped with silencers or mufflers 03720- 042 -02 August 2013 01350 -6 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PROCEDURES • • • designed to operate with the least possible noise in compliance with Federal, State, and local regulations. • 3.06 MAINTENANCE OF POLLUTION - CONTROL FACILITIES DURING CONSTRUCTION A. During the life of this Contract, the Contractor shall maintain all facilities constructed for pollution control as long as the operations creating the particular pollutant are being carried out or until the material concerned has become stabilized to the extent that pollution is no longer being created. END OF SECTION 03720 -042 -02 01350 -7 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PROCEDURES August 2013 • SECTION 01355 SPECIAL PROVISIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK (NOT USED) 1.02 RELATED WORK A. This Section specifies general work requirements related to the products and execution services included elsewhere in the Contract Documents: 1. Section 01350, Environmental Protection Procedures. 2. Section 01600, Materials and Equipment. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. • 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. B. Unless specified otherwise in the Contract Documents, all equipment supplied under these Specifications shall be warranted by the Contractor and the equipment manufacturers for 1 year. The warranty period shall begin on the date of Owner acceptance. C. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design, and materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the warranty period, it shall be replaced in the machine(s) and the unit(s) restored to service at no expense to the Owner. • D. The manufacturer's warranty period shall run concurrently with the Contractor's warranty or guarantee period. No exception to this provision shall be allowed. The 03720 - 042 -02 01355 -1 SPECIAL PROVISIONS August 2013 Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining equipment warranties in accordance with Section 01780 from each of the respective suppliers or manufacturers for all the equipment. E. If the manufacturer is unwilling to provide a 1 -year warranty beginning at the time of Owner acceptance, the Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer a 2 -year warranty starting at the time of equipment delivery to the job site. This 2 -year warranty shall not relieve the Contractor of the 1 -year warranty starting at the time of Owner acceptance of the equipment. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) 1.11 SLEEVES AND OPENINGS A. The Contractor shall provide all openings, channels, chases, etc., in new construction and furnish and install anchor bolts and other items to be embedded in concrete, as required to complete the Work under this Contract. The Contractor shall perform all cutting, coring, and rough and finish patching required in existing construction for the work of all trades. 1.12 GREASE, OIL, AND FUEL (NOT USED) 1.13 TOOLS A. The Contractor shall furnish any special tools (including grease guns or other lubricating devices) which may be necessary for the adjustment, operation, and maintenance of any equipment with the respective equipment. B. Tools shall be furnished in heavy steel tool boxes complete with lock and duplicate keys. 1.14 POWER SUPPLY (NOT USED) 1.15 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS (NOT USED) 03720 - 042 -02 01355 -2 SPECIAL PROVISIONS August 2013 • • • 1.16 ARCHITECTURAL COATINGS (NOT USED) 1.17 PIPE MARKING (NOT USED) 1.18 VALVE IDENTIFICATION (NOT USED) 1.19 NOISE LIMITATIONS • • A. All equipment to be furnished under this Contract, unless specified otherwise in the Technical Specifications, shall be designed to ensure that the sound pressure level does not exceed 85 decibels over a frequency range of 37.8 to 9,600 cycles per second at a distance of 3 feet from any portion of the equipment, under any load condition, when tested using standard equipment and methods. Noise levels shall include the noise from the motor. Mufflers or external baffles shall not be acceptable for reducing noise. Data on noise levels shall be included with the shop drawing submittal. 1.20 SPARE PARTS A. Where spare parts are specified in the Specification Sections, the Contractor shall furnish all spare parts recommended by the manufacturer or system supplier for 1 year of service. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish all spare parts itemized in each Section. B. The Contractor shall collect and store all spare parts in an area to be designated by the Owner and shall furnish the Owner with an inventory listing all spare parts, the equipment they are associated with, the name and address of the supplier, and the delivered cost of each item. Copies of actual invoices for each item shall be furnished with the inventory to substantiate the delivery cost. C. Spare parts shall be packed in cartons properly labeled with indelible markings with complete descriptive information, including manufacturer, part number, part name, and equipment for which the part is to be used and shall be properly treated for 1 year of storage. 1.21 HURRICANE PREPAREDNESS PLAN A. Within 30 calendar days of the date of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit a Hurricane Preparedness Plan to the Engineer and the Owner for approval. The Plan shall describe in detail the necessary measures that the Contractor will perform, at no additional costs to the Owner, in case of a hurricane warning. The Contractor shall revise the Plan as required by the Engineer and Owner. 03720- 042 -02 01355 -3 SPECIAL PROVISIONS August 2013 1.22 WEATHER PROTECTION A. In the event of inclement weather, the Contractor shall protect the Work and materials from damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, any portion of the Work or materials has been damaged by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor to protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced with new materials and Work to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 1.23 PROVISIONS FOR CONTROL OF EROSION (NOT USED) 1.24 PROVISIONS FOR THE CONTROL OF DUST AND LITTER A. The Contractor shall take sufficient precautions during construction to minimize the amount of dust created. Wetting down the Site may be required or as directed by the Engineer to prevent dust as a result of vehicular traffic. Control of blowing litter caused by any regrading by the Contractor shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 1.25 ON -SITE STORAGE (NOT USED) 1.26 ELECTRICAL POWER AND TESTING EQUIPMENT The Contractor shall furnish electric power and all equipment and tools required for testing equipment. 1.27 PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTROLYSIS (NOT USED) 1.28 DAMAGE DUE TO HIGH WATER A. The Contractor will be responsible for all damage done to his work by heavy rains or floods and he shall take all reasonable precautions to provide against damages by building such temporary dikes, channels, or shoring to carry off stormwater as the nature of the work may require. 1.29 EMERGENCY PHONE NUMBERS AND ACCIDENT REPORTS A. Emergency phone numbers (fire, medical, police) shall be posted at the Contractor's phone and the phone's location be made known to all. B. Accidents shall be reported immediately to the Owner and Engineer by messenger or phone. 03720 - 042 -02 01355 -4 SPECIAL PROVISIONS August 2013 • • • C. The Contractor shall document all accidents and shall submit to the Owner and Engineer a fully detailed written report about the accident after each accident. • 1.30 ITEMS SPECIFIED ON DRAWINGS A. Items of material, equipment, machinery, and the like may be specified on the Drawings and not in the Specifications. The Contractor shall provide such items in accordance with the Specification on the Drawings. 1.31 DISINFECTION (NOT USED) 1.32 SALVAGE A. Any existing equipment or material, including but not limited to valves, pipes, fittings, couplings, etc., which is removed or replaced as a result of construction under this project may be designated as salvage by the Engineer or Owner and, if so, shall be excavated, if necessary, and shall be cleaned and stored in the location designated by the Owner. Any equipment or material not worthy of salvaging, as directed by the Owner, shall be disposed of by the Contractor at a suitable location at the Contractor's expense. 1.33 WORKMANSHIP, MATERIAL, AND EQUIPMENT A. When a particular product or products are specified or called for, it is intended and shall be understood that the proposal tendered by the Contractor include those products in his bid. Should the Contractor desire to substitute a product or products equal to those specified, the Contractor shall furnish information as described in the Standard General Conditions. The alternate product or products submitted by the Contractor shall meet the requirements of the Specifications and shall, in all respects, be equal to the product or products specified by name in the Specifications. B. All apparatus, mechanisms, equipment, machinery, and manufactured articles for incorporation into the Work shall be the new and unused standard products of recognized reputable manufacturers. 1.34 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICE TECHNICIAN (NOT USED) 1.35 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA (NOT USED) 1.36 RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR • A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the entire Work determined by the Drawings, Specifications, and Contract from the date of the starting of the Work 03720- 042 -02 01355 -5 SPECIAL PROVISIONS August 2013 until it is accepted as evidence of approval of the Completion Certificate by the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for removals, renewals, and replacements due to action of the elements and all other causes except as otherwise provided in the Specifications. The Contractor shall keep the Contract under his own control and it shall be his responsibility to see that the Work is properly supervised and carried on faithfully and efficiently. The Contractor shall supervise the work personally or shall have a competent English- speaking superintendent or representative, who shall be on the site of the project at all working hours and who shall be empowered with full authority by the Contractor to direct the performance of the Work and make arrangement for all necessary materials, equipment, and labor without delay. B. Renewals or repairs required because of defective materials or workmanship or due to the action of the elements or other natural causes, including fire and flood, before the acceptance as determined by the Completion Certificate, shall be done in accordance with the Contract and Specifications at the expense of the Contractor. 1.37 CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS AND SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION A. The Contractor shall strictly adhere to the specific requirements of the governmental unit(s) or agency(ies) having jurisdiction over the Work. Wherever there is a difference in the requirements of a jurisdictional body and these Specifications, the more stringent shall apply. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for having determined to his satisfaction, before submitting his bid, the nature and location of the Work, the conformation of the ground, the character and quality of the substrata, the types and quantity of materials to be encountered, the nature of the groundwater conditions, the character of equipment and facilities needed before and during the execution of the Work, the general and local conditions, and all other matters which can in any way affect the Work under this Contract. The prices established for the work to be done will reflect all costs pertaining to the Work. Any claims for extras based on substrata, groundwater table, and other such conditions will not be allowed. 1.38 SUSPENSION OF WORK DUE TO WEATHER A. During inclement weather, all work which might be damaged or rendered inferior by such weather conditions shall be suspended. The ability to issue such an order shall not be interpreted as a requirement to do so. During suspension of the work from any cause, the Work shall be suitably covered and protected so as to preserve it from injury by the weather or otherwise, and if the Engineer shall so direct, the rubbish and surplus materials shall be removed. 03720 - 042 -02 01355 -6 SPECIAL PROVISIONS August 2013 • • • • 1.39 PERMITS A. Upon notice of award, the Contractor shall immediately apply for all applicable permits not previously obtained by the Owner to do the Work from the appropriate governmental agency or agencies. No work shall begin until all applicable permits have been obtained and copies delivered to the Engineer. The Contractor shall bear all costs for obtaining all permits. 1.40 PUMPING A. The Contractor with his own equipment shall do all pumping necessary to prevent flotation of any part of the structures during construction operations. B. For the duration of the Contract and with his own equipment, the Contractor shall pump out water and wastewater which may seep or leak into the excavations or structures. Galleries and other operating areas shall be kept dry at all times 1.41 OWNER OCCUPANCY AND OPERATION OF COMPLETED FACILITIES A. It is assumed that portions of the Work will be completed before the entire work is completed. Upon completion of construction in each individual facility, including testing, if the Owner, at its sole discretion, desires to accept the individual facility, the Contractor will be issued a dated certificate of completion and acceptance for each individual facility. The Owner will assume ownership and begin operation of the individual facility on that date and the 1 -year guaranty period shall begin on that date. The Owner has the option of not accepting any individual completed facility, but accepting the entire work as a whole when it is completed and tested. 1.42 CLAIMS FOR PROPERTY DAMAGE A. Upon notification by the Owner or Engineer, the Contractor shall investigate each claim for property damage and shall file, within 10 days of such notification, a statement with the Owner or Engineer setting forth all facts and details relative to the claim. 1.43 DAILY REPORTS A. The Contractor shall submit daily reports of construction activities, including non- work days. The report shall include the following: 1. Manpower, number of workers by craft. 2. Equipment on the project. 3. Major deliveries. 03720 - 042 -02 01355 -7 SPECIAL PROVISIONS August 2013 4. Activities work with reference to the CPM schedule activity numbers. 5. New problems. 6. Other pertinent information. B. A similar report shall be submitted for/by each subcontractor. C. The reports shall be submitted to the Engineer's Field Office within 2 days of the respective report date. Each report shall be signed by the Contractor's Superintendent or Project Manager. 1.44 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEMS A. The Contractor shall perform all work necessary to locate, excavate, and prepare for connections to the terminus of the existing systems all as shown on the Drawings or where directed by the Engineer. The cost of this work and for the actual connection of the existing mains shall be included in the bid for the Project and shall not result in any additional cost to the Owner. 1.45 COORDINATION OF WORK A. Because of the nature of this Project, the Contractor should expect other construction to occur in the vicinity of this Project during the Contract. In such instances the Contractor will be required to cooperate fully to eliminate or minimize the creation of conflicts. Adjustments from time to time may be required in the Contractor's work location and/or schedule provided a reasonable notice is given by the Owner or Engineer. B. The Contractor shall afford other contractors and the Owner reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and the execution of their work and shall properly connect and coordinate the Work with such other work. The Contractor shall coordinate his Work with the Owner and other contractors to store his apparatus, materials, supplies, and equipment in such orderly fashion at the site of the Work so that it will not unduly interfere with the progress of the Work or the work of any other contractors. C. If the execution or result of any part of the Work depends on any work of the Owner or of any separate contractor, the Contractor shall, before proceeding with the Work, inspect and promptly report to the Owner in writing any apparent discrepancies or defects in such work of the Owner or of any separate contractor that render it unsuitable for the proper execution or result of any part of the Work. D. Failure of the Contractor to inspect and report any deficiencies shall constitute an acceptance of the Owner's or separate contractor's work as fit and proper to receive the Work, except as to defects which may develop in the Owner's or 03720 - 042-02 01355 -8 SPECIAL PROVISIONS August 2013 • • separate contractor's work after completion of the Work and which the Contractor could not have discovered by his inspection before the Work was completed. E. If the Contractor damages the work or property of the Owner or of any separate contractor on the Project or other work on the Site, or delays or interferes with the Owner's work on ongoing operations or facilities or adjacent facilities or the separate contractor's work, the Contractor shall be liable for damage caused, and, in the case of another contractor, the Contractor shall attempt to settle the claim with the other contractor before the other contractor institutes litigation or other proceedings against the Contractor. F. If a separate contractor sues the Owner on account of any damage, delay, or interference caused or alleged to have been caused by the Contractor, the Owner shall notify the Contractor, who shall defend the Owner in such proceedings at the Contractor's expense. If any judgment or award is entered against the Owner, the Contractor shall satisfy the same and shall reimburse the Owner for all damages, expenses, attorneys' fees, and other costs which the Owner incurs as a result of the judgment or award G. If a separate contractor causes damage to the Work or to the property of the Contractor or causes delay or interference with the Contractor's performance of the Work, the Contractor shall present directly to the separate contractor any claims it may have as a result of such damage, delay, or interference (with an information copy to the Owner) and shall attempt to settle its claim against the separate contractor before instituting litigation or other proceedings against the separate contractor. H. In no event shall the Contractor seek to recover from the Owner or the Engineer, and the Contractor hereby represents to the Owner and the Engineer that he will not seek to recover from them, or either of them, any costs, expenses, (including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees) or losses of profit incurred by the Contractor as a result of any damage to the Work or property of the Contractor or any delay or interference caused or allegedly caused by any separate contractor. I. If the work of the Contractor is delayed because of any acts of omissions of any other contractor of the Owner, the Contractor shall on that account have no claim against the Owner other than for an extension of time. 1.46 FINAL GUARANTEE A. The Contractor shall guarantee all work for 1 year from the date of Substantial Completion of the Work by the Owner. 03720 - 042 -02 01355 -9 SPECIAL PROVISIONS August 2013 B. If, within the guarantee period, repairs or changes are required in connection with guaranteed work, which, in the opinion of the Engineer, are rendered necessary as the result of the use of materials, equipment, or workmanship which are inferior, defective, or not in accordance with the terms of the Contract, the Contractor shall do the following promptly upon receipt of notice from the Owner and without expense to the Owner: 1. Place in satisfactory condition in every way all such guaranteed work and correct all defects in the guaranteed work. 2. Make good all damage to the building or site, or equipment or piping, or their contents, which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is the result of the use of materials, equipment, or workmanship which are inferior, defective, or not in accordance with the terms of the contract. 3. Make good any work or material or the equipment and contents of the building, structure, or site disturbed in fulfilling any such guarantee. C. If the Contractor, after notice, fails to proceed to comply with the terms of this guarantee within 10 days, the Owner may have the defects corrected and the Contractor and his surety shall be liable for all expenses incurred provided. However, that in case of an emergency where, in the opinion of the Owner, delay would cause loss or damage, repairs may be started without notice being given to the Contractor and the Contractor shall pay the cost of such repairs. D. All special guarantees or warranties applicable to specific parts of the Work as may be stipulated in the Contract Specifications or other papers forming a part of this Contract shall be subject to the terms of this Paragraph during the first year of life of each such guarantee. The Contractor shall assemble all special guarantees and manufacturers' warranties, along with a summary list of the special guarantees and warranties, and deliver these to the Engineer before the Work is accepted. 1.47 AUTOMATICALLY CONTROLLED EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) 1.48 EQUIPMENT DATA FORMS A. The Contractor shall obtain, prepare, and submit a complete, detailed listing of equipment and motor data for all electrical items furnished under this Contract. This listing shall be submitted with the preliminary draft of Operations and Maintenance Data Manuals on Equipment Data sheets and the Equipment Manufacturer's Certificate of Installation, Testing, and Instruction and the Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance forms, which are included at the end of Section 11222, Channel Static Mixers. 03720 - 042 -02 01355 -10 SPECIAL PROVISIONS August 2013 • • • 1.49 RIGHTS IN AND USE OF MATERIALS FOUND ON THE WORK A. With the approval of the Engineer, the Contractor may use on the project such stone, gravel, sand, or other material determined suitable by the Engineer as may be found in the excavation and will be paid both for the excavation of such materials at the corresponding Contract unit price and for the pay item for which the excavated material is used. The Contractor shall replace at his own expense, with other acceptable material, all of that portion of the excavation materials so removed and used which were needed for use in the embankments, backfills, approaches, or otherwise. No charge for the materials used will be made against the Contractor. 1.50 OWNER - FURNISHED MATERIAL A. The Contractor shall furnish all materials required to complete the Work. No materials will be furnished by the Owner. 1.51 MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION SCHEDULES A. The Contractor's attention is directed to Section 01830 for requirements relative to the submission of operating and maintenance data for the mechanical equipment. For all mechanical and electrical equipment furnished, the Contractor shall provide a list including the equipment name, address, and telephone number of the manufacturer's representative and service company so that service and/or spare parts can be readily obtained. 1.52 INSTALLATION LISTS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 01355 -11 SPECIAL PROVISIONS August 2013 • • • SECTION 01450 TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Owner will pay for the costs of all passing laboratory tests required to determine soil density and concrete compressive strength. The cost of all testing shall be paid for from the Bid Item allowance as stated in the Bid Form. Costs will be determined from direct invoices from the testing laboratory to the Contractor. Failed tests will be back - charged to the Contractor at the time of final payment. All required soil and concrete shall be coordinated with and scheduled by the Contractor. 1. The Contractor shall cooperate with the laboratory to facilitate the execution of required services. 2. The Owner shall approve the selection of the testing laboratory. 3. Employment of a testing laboratory shall in no way relieve the Contractor of the obligation to perform work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Conditions of the Contract: Inspections and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders, or approvals of public authorities. B. Respective Sections: Certification of products. C. Each Section listed: Laboratory tests required and standards for testing. D. Testing Laboratory inspection, sampling, and testing are required for but are not limited to the following: 1. Section 02230, Site Preparation. 2. Sections 02300 and 02305, Earthwork. 3. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement. 4. Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. 03720 - 042 -02 01450 -1 TESTING AND TESTING August 2013 LABORATORY SERVICES 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. B. Submit to the Engineer for review a list and schedule of all tests to be conducted. C. Describe test procedures along with duration of tests. D. After each inspection and test, the Laboratory shall promptly submit two copies of the laboratory report to the Engineer, one copy to the Contractor, and one copy to the Owner. E. Include the following: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name of field testing technician or inspector. 4. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 5. Identification of product and Specifications Section. 6. Location in the Project. 7. Type of inspection or test. 8. Date of test. 9. Results of test. 10. Conformance with Contract Documents. F. When requested by the Engineer, provide interpretation of test results. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM E329— Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing. 2. ASTM D3740— Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction. 03720 - 042-02 01450 -2 TESTING AND TESTING August 2013 LABORATORY SERVICES • • • • • 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Laboratory is not authorized to do any of the following: 1. Release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Approve or accept any portion of the work. 3. Perform any duties of the Engineer of Record or the Engineer. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the following: 1. Cooperating with laboratory personnel, providing access to work and to manufacturer's operations. 2. Securing and delivering to the laboratory adequate quantities of representational samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing. 3. Providing to the laboratory the preliminary design mix proposed to be used for concrete and other materials mixes which require control by the testing laboratory. 4. Furnishing incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to work to be tested. b. To obtain and handle samples at the project site or at the source of the product to be tested. c. To facilitate inspections and tests. d. To store and cure test samples. 5. Notifying the Engineer and laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for the laboratory to assign personnel and schedule tests. 6. Employing and paying for the services of the same or a separate, equally qualified independent testing laboratory to perform additional inspections, sampling, and testing required for the Equipment Supplier or Contractor's (as applicable) convenience. C. Materials and equipment used in the performance of Work under this Contract are subject to inspection and testing at the point of manufacture or fabrication. Standard requirements for quality and workmanship are indicated in the Contract Documents. The Engineer may require the equipment supplier or Contractor (as applicable) to provide statements or certificates from the manufacturers and 03720- 042 -02 01450 -3 TESTING AND TESTING August 2013 LABORATORY SERVICES fabricators that the materials and equipment provided by them are manufactured or fabricated in full accordance with the standard specifications for quality and workmanship indicated in the Contract Documents. All costs of this testing and providing statements and certificates shall be a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor, and no extra charge to the Owner shall be allowed on account of such testing and certification. D. If the test and any subsequent retest results indicate that the materials or equipment fail to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, the equipment supplier or Contractor (as applicable) shall pay for the laboratory costs directly to the testing firm and these will not be reimbursable to the equipment supplier or Contractor (as applicable). 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS A. Comply with requirements of ASTM E329 and ASTM D3740. B. Laboratory: Licensed to operate in Florida. C. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full -time Professional Engineer registered in Florida on staff to review the services performed under this project. D. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of accuracy traceable to either Nation Bureau of Standards (NBS) or accepted values of natural physical constants. E. Provide qualified personnel at the site. Cooperate with the Engineer and Contractor in performing services. F. Perform specified inspection, sampling, and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 03720 - 042 -02 01450 -4 TESTING AND TESTING August 2013 LABORATORY SERVICES • • • G. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. H. Promptly notify the Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or non- conformance of Work or Products. I. Perform additional inspections and tests required by Engineer. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720- 042 -02 01450 -5 TESTING AND TESTING August 2013 LABORATORY SERVICES SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK (NOT USED) 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 RESPONSIBILITY A. This Section specifies the minimum requirements for temporary facilities, utilities, and controls required to provide an adequate and safe work site at every stage during construction of the Project. The Contractor is solely responsible for the requirements set forth in this Section. 1.11 ONSITE TEMPORARY A. Except as otherwise indicated, the Contractor may, at his option, furnish stand- alone utility plants to provide needed services in lieu of connected services from available public utilities, provided such stand -alone plant facilities comply with all governing regulations. Before availability of temporary utility services, the 03720- 042-02 01500 -1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS August 2013 Contractor will provide trucked - in/trucked -out containerized or unitized services for start-up of construction operations at the site. 1.12 COSTS A. Except as otherwise indicated, the costs of providing and using temporary utility services are included in the contract sum. 1.13 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. The types of utility services required for temporary use at the project site include the following (other specific services may be required for specific construction methods of operations): 1. Electrical Power Service. 2. Water Service (potable for certain uses). 3. Sanitary. 4. Storm Sewer or Open Drainage/Run -off Control. 5. Gas (fuel) Service. 6. Telephone Service. 1.14 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. The Contractor shall make the necessary applications and arrangements and pay all fees and charges for electrical energy for power and light necessary for proper completion of the Work and during its entire progress up to time of final acceptance by the Owner. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all temporary switches, connections, and meters. 1.15 TEMPORARY WATER A. The Contractor shall make all necessary application and arrangements and pay all fees and charges for water necessary for the proper completion of the Project up to the time of final acceptance. The Contractor shall provide and pay for any temporary piping and connections. 1.16 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. The Contractor shall provide adequate sanitary facilities for the use of those employed on the Work. Such facilities shall be made available when the first employees arrive on the site of the Work, shall be properly secluded from public observation, and shall be constructed and maintained during the progress of the Work in suitable numbers and at such points and in such manner as may be required or approved. 03720 - 042 -02 01500 -2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS August 2013 • • 1.17 CLEANLINESS OF FACILITIES A. The Contractor shall maintain the sanitary facilities in a satisfactory and sanitary condition at all times and shall enforce their use. He shall rigorously prohibit the committing of nuisances on the site of the Work, on the lands of the Owner, or on adjacent property. 1.18 TERMINATION AND REMOVAL A. At the time the need for a temporary utility service has ended or has been replaced by use of permanent services, or not later than the time of final completion, the Contractor shall promptly remove the installation unless requested by the Engineer to retain it for a longer period. Any work which may have been delayed or affected by the installation and use of the temporary utility, including repairs to construction and grades and restoration and cleaning of exposed surfaces, shall be completed at this time. The Contractor shall replace any work damaged beyond acceptable restoration. 1.19 NOISE CONTROL A. The Contractor shall provide adequate protection against objectionable noise levels caused by the operation of construction equipment. 1.20 DUST CONTROL A. The Contractor shall provide for adequate protection against raising objectionable dust clouds caused by moving construction equipment, high winds, or any other cause. 1.21 WATER CONTROL A. The Contractor shall provide for satisfactory disposal of surplus water and shall submit a plan to the Engineer for review before initiating and implementing the plan. Prior approval shall be obtained from the proper authorities for the use of public or private lands or facilities for such disposal. 1.22 POLLUTION CONTROL A. The Contractor shall provide for adequate protection against polluting any public or private lands, lakes, ponds, rivers, streams, creeks, and other such areas by the disposal of surplus material in the form of solids, liquids, gases, or from any other cause. 03720 -042 -02 01500 -3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS August 2013 1.23 ADVERSE IMPACT A. The Contractor shall evaluate and assess the impact of any adverse effects on the natural environment which may result from construction operations and shall operate to minimize pollution of air, ground, or surface waters vegetation, and afford the neighboring community the maximum protection during and up to completion of the construction project. 1.24 STREAMS, LAKES, AND OTHER BODIES OF WATER A. The Contractor shall take sufficient precautions to prevent pollution of streams, lakes, and reservoirs with fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium chloride, or other harmful materials. He shall conduct and schedule his operations so as to avoid or otherwise prevent pollution of siltation of streams, lakes, and reservoirs and to avoid interference with the movements of migratory fish. 1.25 CHEMICALS A. All chemicals used during project construction or furnished for project operation, whether herbicide, pesticide, disinfectant, polymer, reactant, or of other classification, must show approval of either EPA or USDA. Use of all such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in strict conformance with instructions. 1.26 EROSION CONTROL A. The Contractor shall not expose by construction operations a larger area of erosive land at any one time than the minimum necessary for efficient construction operations, and the duration of exposure of the uncompleted construction to the elements shall be as short as practicable. Erosion - control features shall be constructed concurrently with other work and at the earliest practicable time. 1.27 STORAGE FACILITIES A. All products, materials, and equipment shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Products subject to damage by the elements shall be stored in weathertight enclosures. Temperature and humidity shall be maintained within the ranges required by the manufacturer's instructions. Fabricated products shall be stored above the ground on blocking or skids. Products which are subject to deterioration shall be covered with impervious coatings with adequate ventilation to avoid condensation. Loose granular materials shall be stored in a well- drained area on solid surfaces to 03720 - 042 -02 01500 -4 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS August 2013 • prevent mixing with foreign matter. Any products which will come in contact with water shall be stored off the ground to prevent contamination. 1.28 INSPECTION A. Storage shall be arranged in such a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Periodic inspections shall be made of all stored products to ensure that they are maintained under specified conditions and free from damage or deterioration. 1.29 TEMPORARY PROTECTION A. After installation, the Contractor shall provide substantial coverings as necessary to installed products to protect them from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. Coverings shall be removed when no longer needed. 1.30 ADJACENT TO WORK A. The Contractor shall preserve from damage all property along the line of the Work or which is in the vicinity of or in any way affected by the Work, the removal or destruction of which is not called for by the Plans. Wherever such property is damaged due to the activities of the Contractor, it shall be immediately restored to its original condition by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. 1.31 REMEDY BY OWNER A. In case of failure on the part of the Contractor to restore such property or make good such damage or injury, the Owner may, after 48 hours' notice to the Contractor, proceed to repair, rebuild, or otherwise restore such property as may be deemed necessary and the cost of such repairs, rebuilding, or restoration will be deducted from any monies due or which may become due to the Contractor under this Contract. 1.32 PROTECTION FROM DAMAGE A. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting property in the areas in the vicinity of the Project and for protecting his equipment, supplies, materials, and work against any damage resulting from the elements, such as flooding, rainstorm, wind damage, or other such damage, and shall be responsible for damage resulting from the same. The Contractor shall provide adequate drainage facilities, tie - downs, or other protection throughout the contract period for the protection of his, the Owner's, and other properties from such damage. 03720 - 042-02 01500 -5 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS August 2013 1.33 TRAFFIC REGULATION A. Signs, marking barricades, and procedures shall conform to the requirements of the Florida Department of Transportation Manual on Traffic Controls and Safe Practices for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, and Utility Operations. 1.34 SIGNAGE A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate barricades around open excavations. 1.35 REMOVAL OF SIGNAGE A. On completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove all debris, excess materials, barricades, and temporary work, leaving walkways and roads clear of obstructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 01500 -6 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS August 2013 • • • • • SECTION 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK This Section includes the minimum requirements for the furnished materials and equipment for this project. The more stringent requirements in the Technical Specification Sections shall take precedence over these requirements for any conflicts. A. Materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be new and shall not have been in service at any other installation unless otherwise approved. They shall conform to applicable specifications approved in writing by the Engineer. B. Manufactured and fabricated products shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with the best engineering and shop practices. Like parts of duplicate units shall be manufactured to standard sizes and gauges so as to be interchangeable. C. Quantities of items that are identical shall be by the same manufacturer, regardless of the Design Package breakdown. D. Equipment sizes, capacities, and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to unless variations are specifically approved in writing. E. Materials and equipment shall not be used for any purpose other than that for which they are designed or specified. F. Where materials or equipment are specifically shown or specified to be reused in the Work, special care shall be used in removing, handling, storing, and reinstalling to ensure their proper function in the completed Work. G. Material and equipment incorporated into the Work: 1. Shall conform to applicable specifications and standards. 2. Shall comply with size, make, type, and quality specified or as specifically approved in writing by the Engineer. 03720 - 042-02 01600 -1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT August 2013 3. Manufactured and fabricated products: a. Rotating machinery shall be designed and fabricated to provide satisfactory operation without excessive wear and without excessive maintenance during its operating life. Rotating parts shall be statically and dynamically balanced and shall operate without excessive vibration. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01000, Project Requirements. B. Section 01740, Final Cleaning. C. Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. D. Section 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manuals. 1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 ACCEPTANCE OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Only new materials and equipment shall be incorporated in the Work. All materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be subject to the inspection and acceptance of the Engineer. No material shall be delivered to the site that does not meet the Contract Specifications. 03720 - 042 -02 01600 -2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT August 2013 • B. The Contractor shall submit data and samples sufficiently early to permit consideration and acceptance before materials are necessary for incorporating in the work. Any delay of acceptance resulting from the Contractor's failure to submit samples or data promptly shall not be used as a basis of claim against the Owner. C. The materials and equipment used in the Work shall correspond to the approved samples or other data. D. If requested, the Contractor shall be required to submit to the Engineer ample evidence that each and every part of the materials, machinery, and equipment to be furnished is of a reliable make and of a type that has been in successful operation within the continental United States. No equipment will be considered unless the manufacturer has designed and manufactured equipment of a comparable type and size for at least 3 years. The Engineer or Owner will not allow any experimental or untried type of material or machinery to be installed. E. The equipment specified shall be carefully designed and installed to ensure that it adequately performs all required functions within the specified degree of precision. Each unit shall operate with each of the other parts of the equipment to provide a completely integrated system that shall operate to the satisfaction of the Engineer and Owner. F. All equipment, machinery, parts, and assemblies of equipment, machinery, or parts entering into the Work shall be tested as specified. Unless waived in writing by the Engineer, all field and operating tests shall be made in the presence of the Engineer or the Engineer's authorized representative. When such a waiver is issued, the Contractor or manufacturer shall furnish sworn statements in duplicate of the tests conducted and the results of the tests to the Engineer. 1.11 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION A. The equipment installation details shall suit the existing and furnished equipment and are subject to acceptance by the Engineer. B. Any changes or revisions made necessary by the type and dimensions of the equipment furnished shall be made at the expense of the Contractor who shall furnish detailed drawings showing such changes or revision for the acceptance of the Engineer. C. The installation of all work shall comply with the manufacturer's printed instructions. The Contractor shall obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation, including six copies to the Engineer for 03720 - 042-02 01600 -3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT August 2013 distribution. One complete set of instructions shall be maintained at the job site during installation and until the Project is complete. D. All products and equipment shall be handled, installed, connected, cleaned, conditioned, and adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and specified requirements. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with the manufacturer's instructions, such conflicts shall be called to the Engineer's attention for resolution and revised instructions. E. The Contractor shall perform work according to the manufacturer's instructions and not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless the instructions are specifically modified or the step or procedure exempted by the Contract Documents. 1.12 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT A. The cost of the Work shall include the cost of competent manufacturers' representatives of all equipment to supervise the installation, adjustment, and testing of the equipment and to instruct the Owner's operating personnel on operation and maintenance. B. A certificate from the manufacturer stating that the installation of the equipment is satisfactory, that the unit has been satisfactorily tested, is ready for operation, and that the operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication, and care of the unit shall be submitted before Substantial Completion. C. The Contractor shall furnish the service of competent manufacturers' representatives for Contractor- or Owner- furnished equipment when evident malfunction or over - heating makes such services necessary or as determined by the Engineer. All such equipment shall be installed by skilled mechanics and in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer. D. Special care shall be taken to ensure proper alignment of all equipment with particular reference to mechanical equipment such as pumps and electric drives. These units shall be carefully aligned on their foundations after their sole or base plates have been shimmed to true alignment at the anchor bolts. The anchor bolts shall be set in place and the nuts tightened against the shims. After the manufacturer has approved the foundation alignments, the bedplates or wing feet of the equipment shall be securely bolted in place. The alignment of equipment shall be further checked after securing to the foundations. After all alignments are confirmed, the sole or base plates shall be finally grouted in place. The Contractor shall be responsible for the exact alignment of equipment with associated piping, and under no circumstances, will "pipe springing" be allowed. Special installation 03720 - 042 -02 01600 -4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT August 2013 • • requirements in the Technical Specifications shall take precedence over the requirements of this Section. E. The Contractor shall furnish all wedges, shims, filling pieces, keys, packing, grout, or other materials necessary to properly align, level, and secure an apparatus in place. All parts intended to be plumb or level must be proven exactly so. Any grinding necessary to bring parts to proper alignment after erection shall be done at the expense of the Contractor. F. The Contractor shall furnish the necessary materials and construct suitable concrete foundations or pads for all equipment installed by the Contractor, even though such foundations or pads may not be indicated on the Drawings. The tops of foundations shall be at such elevations as will permit grouting. G. Unless otherwise directed in the Drawings, in setting pumps, motors, and other items of equipment customarily grouted, the Contractor shall make an allowance of at least 1 inch (2.54 cm) for grout under the equipment bases. Shims used to level and adjust the bases shall be steel. Shims may be left embedded in the grout, in which case they shall be installed neatly and so as to be as inconspicuous as possible in the completed work. Unless otherwise permitted, all grout shall be a suitable non - shrinking grout. 1. Grout shall be mixed and placed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. Where practicable, the grout shall be placed through the grout holes in the base and worked outward and under the edges of the base and across the rough top of the concrete foundation to a peripheral form so constructed as to provide a suitable chamber around the top edge of the finished foundation. 2. Where such procedure is impracticable, the method of placing grout shall be as permitted. After the grout has hardened sufficiently, all forms, hoppers, and excess grout shall be removed, and all exposed grout surfaces shall be patched in an approved manner and, if necessary, as required by the Engineer, given burlap - rubbed fmish, and painted with at least two coats of an acceptable paint. 1.13 SPECIAL TOOLS A. Manufacturers of equipment and machinery shall furnish two sets of any special tools (including grease guns or other lubricating devices) required for normal adjustment, operations and maintenance, and disassembly, together with instructions for their use. The Contractor shall preserve and deliver to the Owner these tools and instructions in good order before completing the Contract. Tools 03720 - 042 -02 01600 -5 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT August 2013 shall be high - grade, smooth, forged, alloy tool steel. Grease guns shall be lever - type. B. Special tools are considered to be those tools which because of their limited use are not normally available, but which are necessary for the particular equipment. C. Special tools shall be delivered at the same time as the equipment to which they pertain. The Contractor shall properly store and safeguard such special tools until completion of the work, at which time they shall be delivered to the Owner. 1.14 LUBRICATION SYSTEM A. The minimum design criteria for lubricating moving parts of the equipment shall include 1 week of continuous operation during which no lubricants shall be added to the system. B. The system shall be designed to receive lubricants whether in operation or shut down and shall not leak or waste lubricants under either condition. The manufacturer's recommendations of grade and quality and a supply of the lubricants so recommended in quantities sufficient to conduct start-up and testing operations shall be furnished with the equipment. 1.15 TESTS AND TEST REPORTS A. When used in the Contract Documents, "Factory/Fabricating Shop Performance, Evaluation, Certification, and/or Acceptance Tests and Test Reports" shall be considered to mean the corresponding manufacturer's, fabricator's, and /or other builder's official test and tests reports. Included in these test reports shall be appropriate substantiating documentation/data ascertaining the correct and complete manufacture, fabrication, and "shop performance" (to the greatest extent normally practicable) of the particular material, equipment, system, and/or facilities proposed for eventual delivery. These are subdivided into three significant tests and test report types: 1) Certification Tests and Test Reports, 2) Factory Tests and Test Reports, and 3) Shop Performance/Evaluation Tests and Test Reports. Minimal requirements are described below. B. Certification Tests and Test Reports 1. Standard specifications, code references, etc. for minimum quality and workmanship levels are indicated in the Contract Documents and Construction Documents. Statements, certificates, and other substantiating reporting data, called "Certification Test Reports" in this Section, of tests conducted on previously manufactured materials or equipment identical to that proposed for use shall be compiled by the Contractor. 03720 - 042-02 01600 -6 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT August 2013 • • • 2. At a minimum all Certification Test Reports shall contain an official analysis of sufficient material composition or show evidence of meeting or exceeding the specified material standard(s) referenced, e.g., ASTM, ASME, or other designations. All reports shall also indicate from whom the material was /will be purchased. 3. The Contractor shall pay all costs of certification tests and test reports. C. Factory Tests and Test Reports 1. Additional tests and reports performed on material or equipment by the manufacturer or fabricator to ascertain quality or workmanship are referred to here as "Factory Tests and Test Reports." 2. Before the delivery of any Factory Test Report, the Contractor shall first submit for review and approval a detailed description of the proposed testing, including reporting procedure and criteria. Such descriptions shall also be delivered to the Engineer for review as part of the first submission of the technical submittal. 3. Materials and equipment used in the performance of the Work under this Contract are subject to inspection and testing at the point of manufacture or fabrication. If Work to be accomplished away from the construction site is to be inspected on behalf of the Owner during its fabrication or manufacture, the Contractor shall give prior notice to the Engineer of the place and time where such fabrication or manufacture is to be done. Such notice shall be in writing and delivered to the Engineer not less than 30 days before the Work is to be done so that the necessary arrangements for the particular factory inspection tests can be made. 4. Upon completion of the factory inspection tests and immediately following manufacture or fabrication, the Contractor shall compile a complete Factory Test Report following the approved format above. All such reports shall be delivered to the Engineer for review as part of the technical submittal corresponding to such tested material or equipment. D. Shop Performance/Evaluation Tests and Tests Reports 1. Material and equipment used in the performance of the Work of this Contract are also subject to evaluation and testing after the complete full - scale assembly into major equipment and/or systems. Shop Performance/Evaluation Tests, i.e., tests of simulated startup, steady- state, variable loading, and other normal operating conditions, for such 03720 - 042 -02 01600 -7 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT August 2013 assembled equipment/systems shall be accomplished in strict accordance with the standard testing practices specified or otherwise accepted by the Engineer. 2. Before the delivery of any Shop Performance/Evaluation Test Report, the Contractor shall submit for review a detailed description of the proposed performance /evaluation tests, including anticipated reporting procedures, data reduction, and criteria used. Where appropriate, such descriptions shall also be delivered to the Engineer for review as part of a first or subsequent submission of the technical submittal. 3. Should such performance /evaluation tests be accomplished away from the construction site, the Contractor shall give prior notice to the Engineer of the places and times where such tests will be accomplished. Such prior notice shall be in writing and delivered not less than 30 days before such events so that necessary arrangements for the particular tests can be made. 4. The requirements above pertaining to Factory Tests and Test Reports shall be incorporated for shop Performance/Evaluation Tests and Test Reports. Unless factory tests are coincident with shop performance tests and vice versa for the same material or equipment, a minimum of 15 days shall be scheduled between such multiple equipment tests where extended travel is required. E. Cost of Performance Shop Tests 1. The Contractor shall conduct shop performance full -scale tests at its expense on all equipment as specified. Each piece of equipment shall be tested completely assembled and the shop tests performed by the equipment manufacturer until successful tests are achieved. 2. If the performance tests are conducted outside the continental United States, the Contractor shall pay all transportation expenses incurred by the Owner's representatives in witnessing the tests at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.16 FIELD TESTING A. Field- testing shall be conducted when called for in the Technical Specification Sections and on all completed systems in general. The Contractor shall provide services of a factory- authorized service representative to perform, approve, and certify the field testing specified in this Section. Field testing shall generally consist of performing the pre - startup and startup. The Contract Documents may 03720- 042 -02 01600 -8 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT August 2013 • require the Contractor to perform factory testing on equipment items before the Engineer approves their use for this project. B. After completing the installation, the Contractor shall test the system in the presence of the Engineer and under actual operating conditions. Tests shall be performed according to the manufacturer's recommendations. C. The Contractor shall include with its bid the services of the equipment manufacturer's field service technician for a period necessary to complete the Work to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the Owner. D. This service shall be for the purposes of checkout, initial start-up, certification, and instruction of facilities personnel. E. A written report covering the technician's findings and installation approval shall be submitted to the Engineer covering all inspections and outlining in detail any deficiencies noted. 1.17 ACCEPTANCE OF INSTALLATION A. The Engineer may accept an equipment system installation as ready for Substantial Completion when: 1. The Engineer has accepted all factory tests and all other component testing. 2. The Engineer has accepted all performance shop tests. 3. All components of the system are installed and tested, including without limitation hydrostatic tests, leak tests, continuity tests, insulation resistance tests, phase rotation tests, bump tests, stroke testing, calibration, adjustment for proper operation, and all other component tests as appropriate. 4. Field start-up activities have been completed and approved by the Engineer. 5. The appropriate certificates have been submitted. 6. All equipment has met the performance requirements. 03720- 042 -02 01600 -9 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT August 2013 7. The Engineer has accepted integrated system tests and adjustments performed by the Contractor to demonstrate that the system as a whole functions reliably and meets the performance requirements, in manual and automatic modes, without failure, fault, or defect of any component or of the system as a whole. 8. The Engineer has accepted integrated facilities tests performed by the Contractor to demonstrate that the entire Construction functions together reliably as an integrated facility and meets the performance requirements, in manual and automatic modes, without failure, fault, or defect of any component. 9. The Engineer has accepted facilities performance tests which demonstrate that the design criteria and performance criteria are met. 10. The Engineer has accepted the O &M Manuals. 11. All required Owner personnel have been trained. 12. All other Contract requirements for Substantial Completion have been satisfied. 1.18 GREASE, OIL, AND FUEL A. All grease, oil, and fuel required for start-up and testing of equipment shall be furnished with the respective equipment. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for changing the oil in all drives and intermediate drives of each mechanical equipment from after initial break -in of the equipment, which shall be no greater than 30 days. 1.19 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES A. All items of electrical equipment that are furnished with process, heating, ventilating, or other equipment shall conform to the requirements specified under the appropriate electrical sections of the Specifications. Enclosures for electrical equipment, such as switches and starters, shall conform to the requirements specified under the appropriate electrical sections of the Specifications. 1.20 EQUIPMENT DRIVE GUARDS A. Screens, guards, or cages shall be provided for all exposed rotating or moving parts in accordance with accepted practices of applicable governmental agencies. 03720- 042 -02 01600 -10 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT August 2013 • • • • Unless specified otherwise in the technical sections, guards shall be constructed of galvanized sheet steel or galvanized woven wires or expanded metal set in a frame of galvanized steel members. Guards shall be secured in position by steel braces or straps, which will permit easy removal for servicing the equipment. 1.21 PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTROLYSIS A. Where dissimilar metals are used in conjunction with each other, suitable insulation shall be provided between adjoining surfaces so as to eliminate direct contact and any resultant electrolysis. The insulation shall be bituminous - impregnated felt, heavy - bituminous coatings, nonmetallic separators or washers, or other acceptable materials. 1.22 CONCRETE INSERTS A. Concrete inserts for hangers shall be designed to support safely, in the concrete that is used, the maximum load that can be imposed by the hangers used in the inserts. Inserts for hangers shall be of a type which will permit adjustment of the hangers both horizontally (in one plane) and vertically and locking of the hanger head or nut. All inserts shall be galvanized. 1.23 SLEEVES A. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified, openings for the passage of pipes through floors and walls shall be formed of sleeves of standard- weight, galvanized -steel pipe. Each sleeve shall be of ample diameter to pass the pipe and its insulation, if any, and to permit such expansion as may occur. Sleeves shall be of sufficient length to be flush at the walls and the bottom of the slabs and to project 2 inches above the finished floor surface. Threaded nipples shall not be used as sleeves. B. Sleeves in exterior walls below ground or in walls to have liquids on one or both sides shall have a 2 -inch annular fin of 1/4 -inch plate welded with a continuous weld completely around the sleeve at about mid - length. Sleeves shall be galvanized after the fins are attached. C. All sleeves shall be set accurately before the concrete is placed or shall be built -in accurately as the masonry is being built. 1.24 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. The Contractor shall arrange for a qualified service representative from each company manufacturing or supplying certain equipment as listed in this Section 03720 - 042-02 01600 -11 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT August 2013 (or in the respective Technical Specification sections) to perform the duties described in this Section. B. After the listed equipment has been installed and the equipment is presumably ready for operation but before it is operated by others, the representative shall inspect, operate, test, and adjust the equipment. The inspection shall include but not be limited to the following points as applicable: 1. Soundness (without cracked or otherwise damaged parts). 2. Completeness in all details, as specified and required. 3. Correctness of setting, alignment, and relative arrangement of various parts. 4. Adequacy and correctness of packing, sealing, and lubricants. 5. Calibration and adjustment of all related instrumentation and controls. 6. Energize equipment. 7. Deficiency correction. 8. Demonstration of compliance with application performance specification. C. The operation, testing, and adjustment shall be as required to prove that the equipment is left in proper condition for satisfactory operation under the conditions specified. D. On completion of his or her work, the manufacturer's or supplier's representative shall submit in triplicate to the Engineer a complete, signed report of the result of the inspection, operation, adjustments, and tests. The report shall include detailed descriptions of the points inspected, tests and adjustment made, quantitative results obtained if such are specified, and suggestions for precautions to be taken to ensure proper maintenance. The report also shall include a certificate that the equipment conforms to the requirements of the Contract and is ready for permanent operation and that nothing in the installation will render the manufacturer's warranty null and void. E. After the Engineer has reviewed the reports from the manufacturer's representatives, the Contractor shall make arrangements to have the manufacturer's representatives present when the field acceptance tests are made. 03720 - 042 -02 01600 -12 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT August 2013 • F. A certificate from the manufacturer stating that the installation of the equipment is satisfactory; that the unit has been satisfactorily tested and is ready for operation; and that the operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication, and care of the unit shall be submitted before start-up and acceptance by the Owner. The certificate shall indicate date and time the instruction was given and names of the operating personnel in attendance. G. See the detailed Specifications for additional requirements for furnishing the services of the manufacturers' field service technician. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 01600 -13 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT August 2013 • SECTION 01650 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section specifies the general requirements for the delivery, handling, storage, and protection of all items required in the construction of the Work. Specific requirements, if any, are specified with the related item. 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1111 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in this Section for storing and protecting the items. B. The Contractor shall do the following: 1. Materials and equipment shall be loaded and unloaded by methods affording adequate protection against damage. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent injury to the material or equipment during transportation and handling. Suitable power equipment shall be used and the material or equipment shall be under control at all times. Under no condition shall the material or equipment be dropped, bumped, or dragged. When a crane is used, a suitable hook or lift sling shall be used. The crane shall be so placed that all lifting is done in a vertical plane. Materials or equipment skid loaded, palletized, or handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against material or equipment already unloaded. 03720 - 042 -02 01650 -1 DELIVERY, STORAGE August 2013 AND HANDLING 2. Material and equipment shall be delivered to the job site by means that will adequately support it and not subject it to undue stresses. Material and equipment damaged or injured in the process of transportation unloading or handling shall be rejected and immediately removed from the site. 3. The Contractor shall coordinate the delivery of all materials, including those furnished by the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper transport, handling, and storing of all materials, and materials shall be protected to ensure their expected performance. Delivery schedules shall be coordinated by the Contractor, in advance, so that the Work will be done in a timely manner. 4. The Contractor shall coordinate deliveries of products with construction schedules to avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site. The Contractor shall also do the following: a. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in the manufacturer's original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. b. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to ensure compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents and approved submittals and to ensure that the products are properly protected and undamaged. 5. The Contractor shall provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage to products or packaging. 6. All materials and equipment shall be stored on -site in complete compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 7. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weather -tight enclosures. 8. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by the manufacturer's instructions. 9. Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids to prevent soiling or staining. Cover products that are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings, and provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation. 03720 - 042 -02 01650 -2 DELIVERY, STORAGE August 2013 AND HANDLING • • • • 10. All materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work shall be handled and stored by the Contractor before, during, and after shipment in a manner that will prevent warping, twisting, bending, breaking, chipping, rusting, and any injury, theft, or damage of any kind to the material or equipment. 11. All materials which, in the opinion of the Engineer, have become so damaged as to be unfit for the use intended or specified shall be promptly removed from the site of the Work, and the Contractor shall receive no compensation for the damaged material or its removal. 12. The Contractor shall arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection and make periodic inspections of stored products to ensure that products are maintained under specified conditions, free from damage or deterioration. 13. The Contractor shall provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from traffic damage and subsequent construction operations and shall remove these coverings when they are no longer needed. 14. Should the Contractor fail to take proper action on storage and handling of equipment supplied under this Contract, within 7 days after written notice to do so has been given, the Owner retains the right to correct all deficiencies noted in the previously transmitted written notice and deduct the cost associated with these corrections from the Contractor's Contract. These costs may include expenditures for labor, equipment use, administrative, clerical, engineering, and any other costs associated with making the necessary corrections. 15. Schedule delivery to reduce long -term onsite storage before installation and/or operation. Under no circumstances shall equipment be delivered to the site more than 1 month before installation without written authorization from the Engineer. 16. Coordinate delivery with installation to ensure minimum holding time for items that are hazardous, flammable, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration. 17. Deliver products to the site in the manufacturer's original sealed containers or other packing systems, complete with instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 03720 - 042 -02 01650 -3 DELIVERY, STORAGE August 2013 AND HANDLING 18. Unload and place all items delivered to the site in a manner which will not hamper normal construction operation nor that of subcontractors and other contractors and will not interfere with the flow of necessary traffic. 19. Provide necessary equipment and personnel to unload all items delivered to the site. 20. The Contractor shall store and protect products in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Follow storage instructions, review them with the Engineer, and keep a written record of this. Arrange storage to permit access for inspection. 21. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well- drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. 22. Store cement and lime under a roof and off the ground and keep it completely dry at all times. All structural, miscellaneous, and reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground or otherwise to prevent accumulations of dirt or grease and in a position to prevent accumulations of standing water and to minimize rusting. Beams shall be stored with the webs vertical. Precast concrete shall be handled and stored in a manner to prevent accumulations of dirt, standing water, staining, chipping, or cracking. Handle and store brick, block, and similar masonry products in a manner to keep breaking, cracking, and spilling to a minimum. 23. Store all mechanical and electrical equipment and instruments subject to corrosive damage by the atmosphere if stored outdoors (even though covered by canvas) in a weathertight building to prevent damage. The building may be a temporary structure on the site or elsewhere, but it must be satisfactory to the Engineer. The building shall be provided with adequate ventilation to prevent condensation. The Contractor shall ensure that temperature and humidity are maintained within the range required by the manufacturer. a. All equipment shall be stored fully lubricated with oil, grease, and other lubricants unless otherwise instructed by the manufacturer. b. Moving parts shall be rotated a minimum of once weekly to ensure proper lubrication and to avoid metal -to -metal "welding." Upon installation of the equipment, the Contractor shall start the equipment, at least at half load, once weekly for an adequate period to ensure that the equipment does not deteriorate from lack of use. 03720 - 042 -02 01650 -4 DELIVERY, STORAGE August 2013 AND HANDLING • • c. Lubricants shall be changed when installation is complete and as frequently as required thereafter during the period between installation and acceptance. The Contractor shall put new lubricants into the equipment at the time of acceptance. d. Before accepting equipment that has been stored for some time, the Contractor shall have the manufacturer inspect the equipment and certify that its condition has not been detrimentally affected by the long storage period. Such certifications by the manufacturer shall be deemed to mean that the equipment is judged by the manufacturer to be in a condition equal to that of equipment that has been shipped, installed, tested, and accepted in a minimum time period. As such, the manufacturer will guarantee the equipment equally in both instances. If such a certification is not given, the equipment shall be judged to be defective. It shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 01650 -5 DELIVERY, STORAGE August 2013 AND HANDLING SECTION 01720 FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK The Contractor shall do the following: A. Provide and pay for the following field engineering services required for the Project: 1. Survey work required in the execution of the Project. 2. Civil, structural, or other professional engineering services specified or required to execute the Contractor's construction methods. B. Retain the services of a registered land surveyor licensed in Florida to do the following: 1. Verify all existing structure locations and all proposed structure corner locations, and weir elevations within the Project site. 2. Maintain an accurate location of all buried piping 4 inches in diameter and larger. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01100, Summary of Work. B. Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. C. Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling. D. Section 01785, Record Documents. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. B. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the name and address of the registered land surveyor or professional engineer. C. On request of the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit documentation to verify the accuracy of field engineering work. 03720 - 042 -02 01720 -1 FIELD ENGINEERING August 2013 D. The Contractor shall submit a certificate signed by a registered land surveyor certifying that elevations and locations of improvements are in conformance or non - conformance with Subcontract Documents. E. At the end of the Project and before final payment, submit the certified drawings listed below with the Surveyor's title block (signed and sealed by the registered land surveyor) of the items listed below. These drawings shall be included with and made a part of the project record documents. 1. Certified site survey at 1 -inch = 10 -ft scale on sheets 24 inches by 36 inches, indicating the building corners, sidewalks, paved areas, and location of all above - ground structures for the project site. 2. Certified drawing showing the location, lines, and grades of all lines 4 inches in diameter and larger buried and exterior to buildings and other buried facilities (e.g., valves, tanks, vaults, etc.) installed as a result of the work. This shall be at the same scale as the Engineer's yard piping drawing and submitted on reproducible tracing paper. 3. Certified drawings showing elevations of all flow control points such as weirs, elevations of all existing and new structures, and equipment in the treatment plant. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. All work will be performed in accordance with the Minimum Technical Standards set forth by the Board of Professional Surveyors and Mappers. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Establish horizontal and vertical control points before starting site work and preserve all reference points during construction: 1. Make no changes or relocations without prior written notice to the Engineer. 03720 - 042 -02 01720 -2 FIELD ENGINEERING August 2013 • • • 2. Report to the Engineer when any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations. 3. Require the surveyor to correctly replace project control points which may be lost or destroyed. 4. Establish replacements based on original survey control. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS A. Registered land surveyor of the discipline required for the specific service on the project, currently licensed in Florida. 1.10 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall establish a minimum of 2 permanent benchmarks on the site, referenced to data established by survey control points: 1. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Record Documents. B. Establish lines and levels, locate and lay out, by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements: a. Stakes for grading, fill, and topsoil placement. b. Utility slopes and invert elevations. 2. Slab floor elevations and top of concrete walls and walkway elevation. 3. Controlling lines and levels required for mechanical and electrical trades. 4. Weir plate elevations. 03720 -042 -02 01720 -3 FIELD ENGINEERING August 2013 C. From time to time, verify layouts by the same methods. D. Maintain a complete and accurate log of all control and survey work as the work progresses. E. As a condition for approval of monthly progress payment requests, update the project record drawings monthly based on the work performed during the month ending at the pay request. The Contractor shall coordinate this monthly with the Owner's representative on the site as part of the pay request. F. Maintain an accurate record of piping changes, revisions, and modifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720 - 042-02 01720 -4 FIELD ENGINEERING August 2013 • • • • • • SECTION 01730 CUTTING, CORING, AND PATCHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall provide all cutting, coring, fitting, and patching, including attendant excavation and backfill, required to complete the Work or to accomplish the following: 1. Make the Work's several parts fit together properly. 2. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill -timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective work. 4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Subcontract Documents. 5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing. 6. Provide routine penetrations of non - structural surfaces for installing piping and electrical conduit. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01100, Summary of Work. B. Division 2, Site Construction. C. Division 3, Concrete. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. B. The Contractor shall submit a written request well in advance of executing any cutting or alteration which affects the following: 1. Work of the Owner or any other Contractor. 2. Structural value or integrity of any element of the Project. 03720 - 042 -02 01730 -1 CUTTING, CORING, AND PATCHING August 2013 3. The integrity or effectiveness of weather- exposed or moisture - resistant elements or systems. 4. The efficiency, operational life, maintenance, or safety of operational elements. 5. Visual qualities of elements exposed to view. C. The written request shall include the following: 1. Identification of the Project. 2. Description of affected Work. 3. The necessity for cutting, altering, or excavating. 4. The effect on the work of the Owner or any other Contractor or on the structural or weatherproof integrity of the Project. 5. Description of proposed Work: a. Scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation. b. Trades which will execute the Work. c. Products proposed to be used. d. Extent of refinishing to be done. 6. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 7. Cost proposal, when applicable. 8. Written permission of any other Contractor whose work will be affected. D. The Contractor shall submit written notice to the Engineer designating the date and the time the Work will be uncovered. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 03720 - 042 -02 01730 -2 CUTTING, CORING, AND PATCHING August 2013 • • • • • • 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete and grout for rough patching shall be as specified in Division 3. B. Materials for finish patching shall be equal to those of adjacent construction. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall inspect existing conditions of project, including elements subject to damage or to movement during cutting and patching. B. After uncovering Work, the Contractor shall inspect conditions affecting installation of products or performance of the Work. C. The Contractor shall report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to the Engineer in writing and shall not proceed with work until the Engineer has provided further instructions. D. All cutting and coring shall be performed in such a manner as to limit the extent of patching. E. All holes cut through concrete and masonry walls, slabs, or arches shall be core - drilled unless otherwise approved. No structural members shall be cut without approval of the Engineer, and all such cutting shall be done in a manner directed by the Engineer. No holes may be drilled in beams or other structural members without obtaining prior approval. All work shall be performed by mechanics skilled in this type of work. 03720 - 042-02 01730 -3 CUTTING, CORING, AND PATCHING August 2013 F. Rough patching shall be such as to bring the cut or cored areas flush with existing construction unless otherwise shown. Finish patching shall match existing surfaces as approved. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to ensure the structural value or integrity of the affected portion of the Work. B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the Project from damage. C. Provide protection from elements for that portion of the Project which may be exposed by cutting and patching work and maintain excavations free from water. D. Perform coring with an approved non - impact rotary tools with diamond core drills. The size of the holes shall be suitable for pipe, conduit, sleeves, and equipment or mechanical seals to be installed. E. Ensure that all equipment conforms to OSHA standards and specifications pertaining to plugs, noise and fume pollution, wiring, and maintenance. F. Provide protection for existing equipment, utilities, and critical areas against water or other damage cause by drilling operation. G. Following drilling, vacuum or otherwise remove from the area all slurry or tailings resulting from coring operations. 3.03 PERFORMANCE A. Cut and demolish by methods which will prevent damage to other work and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs. B. Excavate and backfill by methods which will prevent settlement or damage to other work. C. Employ the original installer or fabricator to perform cutting and patching for the following: 1. Weather- exposed or moisture- resistant elements. 2. Sight - exposed finished surfaces. D. Fit and adjust products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances, and finishes. 03720 - 042 -02 01730 -4 CUTTING, CORING, AND PATCHING August 2013 • • • • • E. Cut with a concrete wall saw and diamond saw blades of proper size. F. Control slurry generated by sawing operation on both sides of wall. G. When cutting a reinforced concrete wall, cut so as not to damage the bond between the concrete and reinforcing steel left in structure. Make the cut so that steel neither protrudes nor is recessed from the face of the cut. H. Install adequate bracing of the area to be cut before cutting starts. Check the area during sawing operation for partial cracking and provide additional bracing as required to prevent a partial release of the cut area during sawing operations. I. Provide equipment of adequate size to remove cut panel. J. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed work in accordance with requirements of Subcontract Documents. K. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. L. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes: 1. For continuous surfaces, refinish to the nearest intersection. 2. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit. M. Provide for Proper Pavement Restoration: The Contractor shall restore existing paving, including underdrains if any are encountered and broken into, and shall replace or rebuild the paving using the same type of construction as was in the original. The Contractor shall be responsible for restoring all such work, including subgrade and base courses where present. The Contractor shall obtain and bear the expense of such local or other governmental permits as may be necessary. END OF SECTION 03720- 042 -02 01730 -5 CUTTING, CORING, AND PATCHING August 2013 • • • SECTION 01740 FINAL CLEANING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall execute cleaning during progress of the Work and at the completion of the Work as required by General Conditions. 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL CONCERNS A. Cleaning and disposal operations shall comply with codes, ordinances, regulations, and anti - pollution laws. 03720 -042 -02 01740 -1 FINAL CLEANING August 2013 PART 2 PRODUCTS The Contractor shall do the following: A. Use only those cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or property and which will not damage surfaces. B. Use only those cleaning materials and methods recommended by the manufacturer of the surface material to be cleaned. C. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by the cleaning material manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PERIODIC CLEANING The Contractor shall do the following: A. Execute periodic cleaning to keep the work, the site, and adjacent properties free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and windblown debris. B. Provide onsite containers for the collection of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. C. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from the site periodically and dispose of at legal areas away from the site. 3.02 DUST CONTROL The Contractor shall do the following: A. Clean interior spaces before the start of finish painting and continue cleaning on an as- needed basis until painting is finished. B. Schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet or newly coated surfaces. 3.03 FINAL CLEANING The Contractor shall do the following: A. Employ skilled workers for final cleaning. 03720 - 042 -02 01740 -2 FINAL CLEANING August 2013 • • • • B. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels, and other foreign materials from interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view. C. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of the grounds. D. Before final completion or Owner occupancy, inspect interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view and all work areas to verify that the entire Work is clean. END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 01740 -3 FINAL CLEANING August 2013 • • SECTION 01755 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall provide a competent field services technician of the manufacturers of all equipment furnished under Divisions 11, 13, 15, and 16 to supervise installation, adjustment, initial operation and testing, performance testing, final acceptance testing, and startup of the equipment. B. The Contractor shall perform specified equipment field performance tests, final acceptance tests, and startup services. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01830, Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Divisions 11, 13, 15, and 16, performance and acceptance testing and startup requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. Submit name, address, and resume of proposed field services technicians at least 30 days in advance of the need for such services. B. Submit for review detailed testing procedures for shop tests, field performance tests, and final acceptance tests as specified in the various equipment Specification Sections. Test procedures shall be submitted at least 30 days in advance of the proposed test dates and shall include at least the following information: 1. Name of equipment to be tested, including reference to Specification Section number and title. 2. Testing schedule of proposed dates and times for testing. 3. Summary of power, lighting, chemical, water, sludge, gas, etc., needs and identification of who will provide them. 03720 - 042 -02 01755 -1 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP August 2013 4. An outline of specific assignments of the responsibilities of the Contractor and manufacturers' factory representatives or field service personnel. 5. Detailed description of step -by -step testing requirements, with reference to appropriate standardized testing procedures and laboratory analyses by established technical organizations (e.g., ASTM, WPCF Standard Methods, etc.). 6. Samples of forms to be used to collect and record test data and to present tabulated test results. C. Submit copies of test reports upon completion of specified shop, performance, and acceptance tests. Test reports shall incorporate the information provided in the test procedures submittals, modified to reflect the actual conducting of the tests and the following additional information: 1. Copies of all test data sheets and results of lab analyses. 2. Summary comparison of specified test and performance requirements vs. actual test results. 3. Should actual test results fail to meet specified test and performance requirements, a description of actions to be taken before re- testing equipment. D. Submit copies of the manufacturer's field service technician's report summarizing the results of the initial inspection, operation, adjustment, and pre- tests. The report shall include detailed descriptions and tabulations of the points inspected, tests and adjustments made, quantitative results obtained, suggestions for precautions to be taken to ensure proper maintenance, and the equipment supplier's Certificate of Installation in the format specified in this Section. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1. AWWA C653 - Disinfection for Water Treatment Plants. 03720 - 042 -02 01755 -2 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP August 2013 • • B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C. Water Pollution Control Federation (WPCF) D. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field service technicians shall be competent and experienced in the proper installation, adjustment, operation, testing, and startup of the equipment and systems being installed. B. Manufacturers' sales and marketing personnel will not be accepted as field service technicians. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRELIMINARY REQUIREMENTS A. After the equipment has been installed and the equipment is presumably ready for operation but before it is operated by others, the manufacturer's field service technician shall inspect, operate, test, and adjust the equipment. The inspection shall include at least the following points where applicable: 1. Soundness (without cracks or otherwise damaged parts). 2. Completeness in all details, as specified and required. 03720-042 -02 01755 -3 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP August 2013 3. Correctness of setting, alignment, and relative arrangement of various parts. 4. Adequacy and correctness of packing, sealing, and lubricants. B. The operation, testing, and adjustment shall be as required to prove that the equipment has been left in proper condition for satisfactory operation under the conditions specified. C. Upon completion of this work, the manufacturer's field service technician shall submit a signed report of the results of his/her inspection, operation, adjustments, and tests. 3.02 WITNESS REQUIREMENTS A. Shop tests or factory tests may be witnessed by the Owner and/or the Owner's representatives, as required by the various equipment specifications. B. Field performance and acceptance tests shall be performed in the presence of the Owner, the Owner's designated personnel, and/or the Owner's representatives. 3.03 STARTUP AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE TREATMENT PLANT AND RELATED SYSTEMS A. General Requirements 1. Successfully execute the step -by -step procedure of startup and performance demonstration specified in this Section. 2. The startup and performance demonstration shall be successfully executed before Substantial Completion and acceptance by the Owner of the treatment plant and its related systems. 3. All performance tests and inspections shall be scheduled at least 5 working days in advance or as otherwise specified with the Owner and the Engineer. All performance tests and inspections shall be conducted during Monday through Friday, unless otherwise specified. B. Preparation for Startup 1. All mechanical and electrical equipment shall be checked to ensure that it is in good working order and properly connected. Preliminary run -ins of the various pumps, compressors, and other remaining equipment shall be made. All systems shall be cleaned and purged as required. All sumps, tanks, basins, chambers, pump wells, and pipelines which are 03720 - 042 -02 01755 -4 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP August 2013 • hydraulically checked shall be drained and returned to their original condition once the water testing is complete. 2. All instruments and controls shall be calibrated through their full range. All other adjustments required for proper operation of all instrumentation and control equipment shall be made. 3. The Contractor shall perform all other tasks needed for preparing and conditioning the treatment facilities for proper operation. 4. No testing shall be conducted or equipment operated until the Engineer has verified that all specified safety equipment has been installed and is in good working order. 5. No testing shall be conducted or equipment operated until the Engineer has verified that all lubricants, tools, maintenance equipment, spare parts, and approved equipment operation and maintenance manuals have been furnished as specified. C. Facilities Startup 1. The startup period shall not begin until all new treatment facilities and equipment have been tested as specified and are ready for operation. The Owner shall receive spare parts, safety equipment, tools and maintenance equipment, lubricants, approved operation and maintenance data, and the specified operation and maintenance instruction before the startup with waste water. All valves shall be tagged before this startup. 2. Demonstrate seven consecutive 24 -hour days of successful operation of the facility as a prerequisite of Substantial Completion and Acceptance. 3. If the facility fails to demonstrate satisfactory performance on the first or any subsequent attempt, the Contractor shall make all necessary alterations, adjustments, repairs, and replacements. When the facility is again ready for operation, it shall be brought on line and a new test shall be started. This procedure shall be repeated as often as necessary until the facility has operated continuously to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer for the specified duration. 4. The Owner will furnish all operating personnel (other than vendor's or subcontractor's service personnel) needed to operate equipment during the final test period; however, these personnel will perform their duties under the Contractor's direct supervision. Until performance tests are completed and units and systems are accepted by the Owner as substantially 03720 - 042 -02 01755 -5 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP August 2013 complete, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for the operation and maintenance of all new facilities. 5. The Owner will provide all necessary chemicals and electricity. However, the Contractor shall provide all necessary personnel of the various construction trades, i.e., electricians, plumbers, etc., and field service personnel of the major equipment suppliers on an 8- hour - per -day basis at the facilities and on a 24- hour - per -day basis locally during the startup period. Major equipment suppliers shall include but not be limited to the following: a. Telemetry, Instrumentation, and Control Equipment b. Treatment Units c. Chemical Feed Pumps d. All Pumping Equipment e. Boilers and Associated Control Systems 6. At no time during startup shall the Contractor allow the facility to be operated in a manner which subjects equipment to conditions that are more severe than the maximum allowable operating conditions for which the equipment was designed. END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 01755 -6 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP August 2013 • • SECTION 01770 PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK (NOT USED) 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01000, Project Requirements. B. Section 01740, Final Cleaning. C. Section 01785, Record Documents. D. Section 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manuals. 1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) • 1.07 WARRANTIES • A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. When the Contractor considers that the Work or designated portion of the Work is Substantially Complete, the Contractor shall submit written notice to the Engineer with a list of items to be completed or corrected. B. If the Engineer's inspection finds that the Work is not substantially complete, the Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing observed deficiencies. 03720 - 042-02 01770 -1 PROJECT CLOSEOUT August 2013 C. The Contractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second written notice of Substantial Completion. D. When the Engineer finds the Work is Substantially Complete the Engineer will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion. 1.11 FINAL COMPLETION A. When the Contractor considers that the Work or designated period of the Work is complete, the Contractor shall submit written certification to the Engineer indicating the following: 1. The Contract Documents have been reviewed. 2. The Work has been inspected for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3. The Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and deficiencies listed with Certificates of Substantial Completion have been corrected. 4. The Work is complete and ready for final inspection. 5. All required shop drawings, catalog cuts, maintenance manuals, instruction manuals, test reports, samples, operational manuals, and all other submittals have been submitted and reviewed by the Engineer. 6. All deliverables have been delivered or placed as accepted by the Engineer. B. If the Engineer's inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete, the Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing listing observed deficiencies. C. The Contractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second certification of Final Completion. D. When the Engineer finds that the Work is complete, the Engineer will consider closeout submittals. 1.12 REINSPECTION FEES If the status of Completion of Work requires more than one re- inspection by the Engineer due to failure of the Work to comply with the Contractor's claims on initial inspection, the Owner will 03720 - 042 -02 01770 -2 PROJECT CLOSEOUT August 2013 • • • • deduct from the final payment to the Contractor the amount of the Engineer's compensation for additional re- inspection services. 1.13 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Evidence of Compliance with Requirements of Governing Authorities: 1. Certificate of Occupancy. 2. All required Certificates of Inspection. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Under provisions of Section 01830. C. Record Documents: Under provisions of Section 01785. D. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens: In accordance with Conditions of the Contract. E. Consent of Surety to Final Payment. 1.14 STATEMENT OF ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS A. Submit final statement reflecting adjustments to total Contract Price, indicating the following: 1. Original total Contract Price. 2. Previous change orders. 3. Changes under allowances. 4. Changes under unit prices. 5. Deductions for uncorrected Work. 6. Penalties and bonuses. 7. Deductions for liquidated damages. 8. Deductions for re- inspection fees. 9. Other adjustments to total Contract Price. 10. Total Contract Price as adjusted. 11: Previous payments. 12. Sum remaining due. B. The Engineer will issue a final Change Order reflecting approved adjustments to the total Contract Price not previously made by change orders. 1.15 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT Submit application for final payment in accordance with provisions of Conditions of the Contract. 03720 - 042 -02 01770 -3 PROJECT CLOSEOUT August 2013 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720- 042 -02 01770 -4 PROJECT CLOSEOUT August 2013 • • • • • SECTION 01780 WARRANTIES AND BONDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK The Contractor shall do the following: A. Compile specified warranties and bonds. B. Co- execute submittals when so specified. C. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents. D. Submit submittals to the Engineer for review. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section III, General Conditions. B. Section IV, Technical Specifications. C. Section 01600, Materials and Equipment. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. Assemble warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers, and subcontractors. B. Number of original signed copies required: two each. C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in sequence of the Specifications. Provide completion information for each item as follows: 1. Product or work item. 2. Firm, address, telephone, fax and E -mail number, and name of principal. 3. Scope. 4. Date of beginning of warranty, bond, or service and maintenance contract. 5. Duration of warranty, bond, or service and maintenance contract. 03720 - 042 -02 01780 -1 WARRANTIES AND BONDS August 2013 6. Provide information for Owner's personnel: a. Proper procedure in case of failure. b. Instances that might affect the validity of warranty or bond. 7. Contractor, with address, telephone, faxes and E -mail numbers, and the name of responsible principal. D. Submittal of warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts shall be included in submittals for review and before Final Completion with actual dates included. E. The Contractor's obligation to correct defective or nonconforming Work shall run for 1 year (or such longer period may otherwise be specified in the Contract Documents) beginning from the date Substantial Completion is achieved. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES Warranties shall be in accordance with Section III, General Conditions, and this Specification. A. All mechanical and electrical equipment together with devices of whatever nature and all components which are furnished and/or installed by the Contractor shall be guaranteed. B. The guarantee shall be against the manufacturing and/or design inadequacies, materials, and workmanship not in conformity, improper assembly, hidden damage, failure of devices and/or components, excessive leakage, or other circumstances which would cause the equipment to fail under normal design and/or specific operating conditions for 1 year or such longer period as may be shown and/or specified from and after the date of Substantial Completion. C. The Contractor shall replace and install each piece of equipment, device, or component which shall fail within the term specified above of the guarantee with reasonable promptness without increase in the Contract Price. If the Contractor fails to provide timely repairs as specified in this Section, the Owner shall issue a claim against the Contractor's Bond. In some instances, if approved by the Owner, the Contractor may be allowed to repair the equipment. 03720 - 042 -02 01780 -2 WARRANTIES AND BONDS August 2013 • • • • • 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 01780 -3 WARRANTIES AND BONDS August 2013 SECTION 01785 RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section details the minimum requirements for the Contractor for maintenance and recording of Record Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01000, Project Requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. The Contractor shall store documents and samples in the Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction and shall do the following: 1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents. 2. Provide cabinet or secure storage space for storage of samples. B. The Contractor shall institute a computerized record control program. C. The Contractor shall make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by the Engineer. D. At Contract closeout, the Contractor shall transmit Record Documents and samples with cover letter to the Engineer, listing the following: 1. Date 2. Project title and number 3. Contractor's name and addresses 4. Number and title of each Record Document 5. Signature of Contractor or its authorized representative 6. Contract Section and Subsection numbers 7. Location • E. Before assembling and submitting records, the Contractor shall review for completeness the records maintained by its subcontractors. 03720 - 042-02 August 2013 01785 -1 RECORD DOCUMENTS F. Tracings of all Construction Documents and Shop Drawings made by the Contractor, subcontractors, and suppliers of materials or equipment shall be corrected to show the Work as actually completed or installed. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT RECORD A. The Contractor shall label and file Record Documents and samples in accordance with the corresponding Specification Section number. Each document shall be labeled "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters. Record Documents shall be maintained in a clean, dry, and legible condition. Record documents shall not be used for construction purposes. 3.02 RECORDING The Contractor shall record construction information as follows: A. Record and update daily Record information from field notes on a set of opaque drawings and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 03720 - 042 -02 August 2013 01785 -2 RECORD DOCUMENTS • • • • B. Provide felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colors for each major system, for recording information. C. Record information concurrently (daily) with construction progress. Work shall not be concealed until required information is recorded. D. Mark Record Drawings to reflect the following: 1. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced to permanent surface improvements. 2. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction. 3. Field changes of dimension and detail. 4. Changes made by modifications. 5. Details not on original construction drawings. E. CAD Requirements for Record Drawings: The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a complete set of Record Drawings in the latest version of AutoCAD format upon completion of the Work. No additional compensation will be allowed for the Contractor to provide the Record Drawings. The Contractor shall use the AutoCAD drawings furnished by the Engineer for this purpose. Record Drawings must be submitted in the AutoCAD format of the contract drawings. No other CAD software or format will be accepted. It is Contractor's sole responsibility to ensure that the Record Drawings conform to the following CAD requirements: 03720 - 042-02 August 2013 1. Drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer on CD -ROM. Each CD shall be clearly labeled with the appropriate project number, client name, date, and file names included on each CD. If files are compressed, a description of the compression software must be included along with a copy of the appropriate uncompressing software. 2. All changes to drawings must be done in accordance with the appropriate scale of the drawing revised and shall be delineated by placing a "cloud" around the areas revised and adding a revision triangle indicating the appropriate revision number. 3. Each drawing must have the revision block completed to indicate the revision number, date, and initials of the person revising the drawing. The description of the revision must say "Record Drawing." This procedure 01785 -3 RECORD DOCUMENTS must be followed for every drawing even when no changes are made to the drawing. 4. All revisions to drawings must be put on separate layers with the layer names prefixed Record followed by the appropriate existing layer name. The colors and line types of the appropriate existing layers shall be adhered to when creating new layers. 5. The Contractor shall supply one full set of Record Drawings on reproducible black line prints and five full sets of opaque copies. F. The Contractor shall have the Licensed Land Surveyor certify the Record Drawings as being correct and complete. 03720 - 042 -02 August 2013 END OF SECTION 01785 -4 RECORD DOCUMENTS • • • • • • SECTION 01815 MAINTENANCE OF PLANT OPERATION AND SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The existing water pollution control facilities will be maintained in continuous operation by the Owner at all times during the entire construction period. The Contractor shall schedule and conduct his work such that it will not impede any treatment process, create potential hazards to operating equipment and/or personnel, reduce the quality of the plant effluent, or cause odor or other nuisance. B. The Contractor shall schedule his operations to conform to the requirements specified herein and shall include in his construction schedule all events which will impact operation of the existing treatment facilities. C. The Owner will continue to operate the treatment facilities during the construction period and will be responsible for maintaining effluent quality. The Contractor shall fully cooperate with the Owner, coordinate the construction schedule with the Owner and Engineer, and provide the necessary labor, equipment, and materials to prevent interruption to flow and treatment. The Owner and Engineer reserve the right to modify or expand the schedule during construction to meet prevailing conditions. D. The Contractor shall not make any alterations to affect operation of the treatment facility without giving two weeks prior written notice to the Owner and Engineer requesting authorization to proceed. Except as noted herein, the Owner will perform all operation of existing valves or equipment. E. Operation of valves or equipment by the Owner may be limited on specific occasions because of process limitations or unavailability of personnel. Delays caused by such limitations shall be expected and shall not be the basis for claim of extra costs by the Contractor. F. The work specified in this Section shall be accomplished at such times that will be convenient to the Owner. Overtime work by the Contractor to conform to these requirements shall be considered as normal procedure under this Contract, and the Contractor shall make no claim for extra compensation as a result of this overtime work. 03720- 042 -02 01815 -1 MAINTENANCE OF PLANT OPERATION AND August 2013 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION G. To maintain continuous treatment facilities operation during construction a phased removal and construction sequence shall be required. Specific constraints are outlined in this Section. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a detailed sequence of construction to complete the work while maintaining plant operation. H. The Contractor shall furnish all temporary materials and equipment that may be required to complete the work of this Contract. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance, for construction schedule. B. Section 02220, Demolition and Modifications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. Submit a complete description of procedures to maintain plant operation to supplement the construction schedule developed. The description shall include step -by -step procedures, required duration, and specific procedures required to be performed by the Owner's personnel. B. Submit complete plans of temporary systems required as part of this contract to maintain plant operations. The plans shall clearly delineate the intended location of these items and the Contractor's proposed method for phasing from existing to temporary to completed facilities. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.06 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 03720 - 042 -02 01815 -2 MAINTENANCE OF PLANT OPERATION AND August 2013 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION • • 1.08 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL • • A. The following constraints shall be applied to all equipment, treatment units, and appurtenances and utility systems on the plant site. 1. Vehicular access for the Owner's personnel to the plant site and to all operating treatment units shall be maintained at all times. 2. Plant operating personnel shall have access to all areas that remain in operation. 3. Sanitary facilities shall remain operational at all times. 4. Electric power and lighting service shall be uninterrupted. 5. If underground piping or utilities not shown on the Drawings are encountered, such piping or utilities shall not be disturbed without prior approval of the Engineer. 6. Before making a change in existing piping, electrical, or control systems, the Contractor shall inform the Owner and Engineer of such change and assist in instructing operations and maintenance personnel in any new operating procedures. 7. Portions of some pipelines must remain in service while alterations are being made on other portions. Piping systems that must remain in service shall be isolated by placing blind flanges, plugs, or caps on all open ends. 8. Flow to and through the treatment plant shall not be interrupted. 9. Before shutting down a piece of equipment to allow for rebuilding or re- piping, the Contractor shall have on hand all materials required to reconstruct the piping system in its new arrangement. 10. All temporary facilities provided by the Contractor must be demonstrated to be operational to the satisfaction of the Engineer before any existing systems can be removed from use. The temporary facilities are critical to the operation of the wastewater treatment facilities. Availability of these 03720 -042 -02 01815 -3 MAINTENANCE OF PLANT OPERATION AND August 2013 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION facilities must be maintained at all times. The Contractor must respond to requests from the Engineer for repair and maintenance immediately (7 days per week, 24 hours per day, including holidays). If the Contractor fails to immediately respond to request for repair and maintenance, such repair and maintenance may be performed by the Owner. All costs associated with such repair and maintenance performed by the Owner shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 3.02 SPECIFIC CONSTRAINTS AND SEQUENCING A. The following constraints shall be applied to the sequencing of construction on the project. These constraints and sequencing do not purport to include all constraints for sequencing required for the construction of this project. The Contractor may propose alternate constraints and sequencing with the detailed sequence of construction required in Paragraph 1.01.G for approval by the Owner and Engineer. The submittal must demonstrate all requirements of the scope of work for this Section are met. 1. Install sluice gate 10SG -1 in the existing wall at the beginning of the Outside Chlorine Contact Tank. The Contractor shall use a coffer dam or similar means of performing the work around the gate, while maintaining the flow in the Outside Chlorine Contact Tank. The sluice gate shall be installed, tested, and placed into service. 2. After sluice gate 10SG -1 is placed into service, all work on the Inside Chlorine Contact Tank and Mixing Chamber shall be performed, completed, and placed into service. 3. The gate valve between the Inside and Outside Dechlorination Tank shall be closed, and the Inside Dechlorination Tank shall be drained. The Contractor shall install sluice gate 10SG -4 and use a coffer dam or similar means of performing the work around the gate while maintaining flow in the Outside Dechlorination Tank. All work on the Inside Dechlorination Tank, except the lowering of the Reclaimed Water Transfer Pump Station Wet Well Effluent Weir, shall be performed, completed, and placed into service. 4. After the Mixing Chamber, Inside Chlorine Contact Tank, and Inside Dechlorination Tank are placed into service, the plant flow shall be diverted to those tanks, and the Outside Chlorine Contact Tank and Outside Dechlorination Tank shall be drained. All work on the Outside Chlorine Contact Tank and Outside Dechlorination Tank, except the lowering of the Reclaimed Water Transfer Pump Station Wet Well Effluent Weir, shall be performed, completed, and placed into service. 03720- 042 -02 01815 -4 MAINTENANCE OF PLANT OPERATION AND August 2013 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION • • • • • • 5. After all work on the Chlorine Contact Tanks and Dechlorination Tanks is completed, the flow shall be pumped to bypass the Reclaimed Water Transfer Pump Station. The wet well shall be drained, sluice gate 10SG -3 shall be installed, and the wet well effluent weirs shall be lowered. The Contractor shall use a coffer dam or similar means of performing work around the wet well effluent weirs. While the transfer pump station is out of service, the piping connection between the existing 30 -inch reclaimed water main and the flow meter assembly shall be completed. END OF SECTION 03720 -042 -02 01815 -5 MAINTENANCE OF PLANT OPERATION AND August 2013 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION • • SECTION 01820 TRAINING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK The Contractor shall do the following: A. Instruct and train the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment and systems supplied and/or installed under this Contract. B. Incorporate operation and maintenance data and training services furnished by the suppliers into the training program such as shop drawings, equipment manuals, and start-up engineering and training assistance. C. Ensure that system suppliers provide a qualified training instructor to help the Contractor train the Owner's employees in the proper operation and maintenance of all equipment and systems. D. Prepare instructors and training materials required for complete factory, field, classroom, and hands -on training. E. Furnish training videos and manuals during the training program. F. Include in the total Contract Price the cost for training equipment; preparing training manuals; conducting classroom instructions; performing field, factory, and hands -on training; and coordinating and incorporating training service provided by suppliers and all other activities required to provide a comprehensive training program of sufficient length, as determined by the Owner. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01000, Project Requirements. B. Section 01600, Materials and Equipment. C. Section 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manuals. 1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 03720- 042 -02 01820 -1 TRAINING August 2013 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE A. All factory training programs, if required, shall be completed before start-up of the Owner's system and shall use equipment similar to the Owner's equipment. B. The field training programs shall be conducted in accordance with the approved schedule. C. Individuals requiring training shall be trained in small groups during Mondays through Fridays. The Contractor will normally provide training during the 8 -hour day shift. D. The hands -on training shall be conducted with a maximum of 10 students per instructor. E. The Contractor shall coordinate and submit a training schedule to the Engineer 30 days before the first training event. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preparation of training materials and instructions to be provided shall be performed by personnel: 1. Trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of equipment and systems installed under this Contract. 2. Familiar with the training requirements of the Owner. B. The Contractor shall furnish resumes, including three outside references, for each instructor to be used in the training program. C. The Engineer and Owner may review the resumes. Based on the review of the resumes and contacts with references, the Engineer shall approve, request additional information, or reject proposed instructors for the training program. If a proposed instructor is rejected, the Contractor shall submit the resume and references of another candidate within a reasonable time. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 03720 - 042 -02 01820 -2 TRAINING August 2013 • • • • • • 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TRAINING PLAN A. At the completion of the Work, the Contractor shall provide a competent and experienced person thoroughly familiar with the Work for not less than 3 days to instruct permanent operating personnel in the operation of equipment and control systems. B. At least 30 days before training, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a detailed training plan including the following: 1. Title and objectives. 2. Training schedule. 3. Prerequisite training and experience of attendees. 4. Recommended types of attendees (e.g., managers, engineers, operators, maintenance staff). 5. Course description and outline of course content. 6. Duration. 7. Location (e.g., training center or site). 8. Format (e.g., lecture, self - study, demonstration, hands -on). 9. Instruction materials and equipment requirements. 1.11 FORM OF TRAINING MANUALS A. The Contractor shall prepare training packages in the form of an instruction manual for use by the Owner's personnel. At least 30 days before the training, the Contractor shall submit the training packages to the Engineer for acceptance. B. Format 1. Size: 8 1/2 x 11 inch (21.59 x 27.94 cm). 2. Paper: 20 -lb (9.072 kg) minimum, white, for typed pages. 03720 - 042 -02 01820 -3 TRAINING August 2013 3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data or neatly word processed including the following: a. Table of contents. b. Pretest. c. Learning objectives. d. General operations, theory, and specific equipment information. 4. Drawings a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text. b. Reduce larger drawings and fold to size of text pages, not larger than 11 x 17 inch (27.94 x 43.18 cm). 5. Cover: Identify each volume with the following: a. Title of Project. b. Identity of separate structure or system as applicable. c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. d. Locations. C. Binders 1. Commercial quality three -post binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers. 2. Maximum post width shall be 3 inches (7.62 cm). 3. When multiple binders are used, correlate the information into related consistent groupings. 1.12 VIDEOTAPED TRAINING MATERIAL The Contractor shall do the following: A. Produce or provide video training material subject to approval of the Owner. B. Furnish four copies of each videotape in DVD format in plastic case with title, the Owner's name, and time on a label in a clear plastic sleeve. C. Bear all costs associated with production and provision of the DVDs. 03720 - 042 -02 01820 -4 TRAINING August 2013 • • • • • 1.13 INSTRUCTIONS A. At the completion of Work, the Contractor shall provide a competent and experienced person thoroughly familiar with the Work for a period of time as directed by the Owner to instruct permanent operating personnel in the operation of equipment and control systems. B. The Contractor shall furnish four complete sets of operating instructions applying to each piece of equipment installed in conjunction with this Contract. C. An "As- Installed" diagram of all control wiring and operating instructions shall be mounted in a watertight pocket on the inside door of the control panel of each unit. D. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall provide engraved metal, plastic tags, or instructions on any valve, switch, control, pipe or other piece of equipment which is not self evident as to its function or mode of operation. This includes, but is not limited to, all exposed piping and all switches. This shall particularly apply to operations which must be manually sequenced. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720- 042 -02 01820 -5 TRAINING August 2013 • SECTION 01830 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK The Contractor shall do the following: A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for the Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under the Contract. 1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as referenced in other pertinent sections of the Specifications. The data presented in the O &M Manuals shall be specifically related to this Contract and application. 2. Incorporate maintenance and operation data furnished by the Owner, if any. B. Furnish all labor, equipment, materials, and all other items to supply and deliver to the Engineer O &M Manuals for the Work in accordance with the requirements of this Section. C. Provide O &M Manuals for all equipment, including instrumentation, electrical, and process control system equipment and software for the entire Facility. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01000, Project Requirements. B. Section 01785, Record Documents. C. Section 01820, Training. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. Manuals which, in general, shall have two levels: a facilities -wide systems level and an individual- component level. 03720 - 042-02 01830 -1 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS August 2013 1. The facilities -wide systems level shall do the following: a. Describe the facilities -wide systems, including diagrams. b. Explain start-up, shutdown, normal operations, and malfunctions of the facilities -wide systems. c. Tabulate a lubrication schedule for the facilities -wide systems. d. Describe preventive maintenance checking procedures for the facilities -wide systems. e. Include a cross - reference to all individual component manuals. 2. The individual - component level shall contain the following: a. Storage requirements. b. Installation instructions. c. Alignment instructions and tolerances. d. Operating instructions. e. Troubleshooting instructions. f. Lubrication requirements. g. Maintenance instructions. h. Parts list. i. Recommended spare parts list and how to obtain same. B. Format: 1. Size: 8 1/2 x 11 inch (21.59 x 27.94 cm). 2. White paper: 20 -1b (9.072 kg) minimum. 3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data or neatly word - processed. 4. Drawings: a. Provide reinforced, punched binder tab, bind in with text. b. Reduce larger drawings and fold to size of text pages but not larger than 11 x 17 inch (27.94 x 43.18 cm). c. Place all drawings at the end of each Section and drawing shall be printed on one side only. 5. Provide a blank page for each separate product or each piece of operation equipment. a. Provide a word - processed description of the product and major component parts of equipment. b. Provide indexed tabs. 03720 - 042 -02 01830 -2 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS August 2013 • • 6. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title, "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS," listing the following: a. Title of Project. b. Identity of separate structure as applicable. c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. C. Media 1. Original word - processed CD shall be delivered to the Engineer. 2. All word processing must be done using the latest version of Microsoft Word or as directed by the Engineer. 3. All drawings except control system configuration drawings must be submitted on CD using AutoCAD. D. Binders 1. Filled to not more than 75% capacity. 2. When multiple binders are used, arrange the data into related consistent groupings. E. The Contractor shall submit the following: 1. Equipment Manuals —Five copies of the O &M Instruction Manual for each piece of equipment shall be submitted to the Engineer with delivery of the equipment. O &M manuals will not include the manufacturer's test results and Record specifications. 2. Systems O &M Manuals —Five copies of the systems O &M Manuals, bound and indexed and submitted to the Engineer no later than 60 days before the Facility's Phase I start-up. Systems O &M Manuals will be complete except for field results and refinements added as result of demonstrations. 3. Final O &M Manuals —Five copies of the Final Equipment and Systems O &M Manuals, bound and indexed and submitted to the Engineer before the Substantial Completion under this Contract. 4. The cost of these Manuals submitted shall be included in the total Contract Price. Copies supplied under Item 2 will not be included under Item 3. 03720 - 042 -02 01830 -3 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS August 2013 F. Any modifications required after final O &M submission shall be made to the manuals by issuance of addenda in the form of change pages to the manual. The addenda will identify where the new data are to be inserted, what data are to be removed, and new index sheets as necessary and list of shop drawings and submittals. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to herein shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Specification Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. Florida Administrative Code, 62- 555.350, "Operation and Maintenance of Public Water Systems." 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Data shall be prepared by personnel: 1. Trained and experienced in maintaining and operating the described products. 2. Familiar with requirements of this Section. 3. Skilled as a technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential data. 4. Skilled as a draftsman competent to prepare required drawings. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 03720 -042 -02 01830 -4 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS August 2013 • • • 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 CONTENTS, EACH VOLUME A. Neatly word - processed table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic order, to include the following: 1. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address, fax number, and telephone number. 2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume. 3. A list with each product, name, address, fax number, and telephone number of the following: a. Subcontractor or installer. b. A list of each product to be included, indexed to content of the volume. c. Identify area of responsibility of each subcontractor or installer, if more than one. d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement. e. Manufacturer. 4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in the Contract Documents. B. Product Data 1. Include only those sheets that are pertinent to the specific product. 2. Annotate each sheet to achieve the following: a. Clearly identify the specific product or part installed. b. Clearly identify data applicable information. c. Delete references to inapplicable information. 03720 - 042-02 01830 -5 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS August 2013 C. Drawings 1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to illustrate the following clearly: a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. b. Control and flow diagrams. c. Owner Tag Numbers. 2. Coordinate drawings with information in Record Documents to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 3. Do not use Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Written text as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: 1. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. 2. Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. 3. Describe how the complete system is to operate. E. Copy of pertinent information related to warranty, bond, and service Contract issued. 1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel with the following information: a. Proper procedures in event of failure. b. Instances that might affect the validity of warranties or bonds. F. Training manuals used in training courses will become part of this Manual. 1.11 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Content, for architectural products, applied materials, and finishes: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. a. Catalog number, size, composition. b. Color and texture designations. c. Information required for re- ordering special - manufactured products. 03720- 042 -02 01830 -6 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS August 2013 • • • • • 2. Instructions for care and maintenance. a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods. b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods that are detrimental to product. c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. B. Content, for moisture- protected and weather- exposed products: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. a. Applicable standards. b. Chemical composition. c. Details of installation. 2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair. C. Additional requirements for maintenance data as required by other Sections of the Specifications. 1.12 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Content, for each electrical, mechanical, instrumentation, and communication system, as appropriate: 1. A table identifying each piece of equipment, each associated control or instrument, the location of the control or instrument, and the function of the control or instrument. 2. A description of the system and its component parts: a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions for the system, the sub - system, and the component parts. b. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replaceable parts. 3. Circuit directories of panel board: a. Electrical service. b. Controls. c. Communications. 03720 -042 -02 01830 -7 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS August 2013 4. As- installed color -coded wiring diagrams. 5. Instrument loop diagrams showing the path that a control or instrumentation signal takes from its origin to the action it takes. a. An electrical schematic for each item. b. A chart listing the controls /instruments in a loop identifying the equipment's abbreviated symbol, a description of the symbol, design criteria, process flow, quantity supplied, and manufacturer's model and serial number. 6. Operating procedures: a. Routine and normal operating instructions. b. Sequences required. c. Special operating instructions. 7. Maintenance procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to "trouble- shooting." c. Disassembly, repair, and re- assembly. d. Alignment, adjustment, and checking. 8. The manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 9. A list of the original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 10. Other data as required under pertinent Sections of the Specifications. 11. Abnormal and emergency operations: a. Potential overloads. b. Procedures for equipment breakdown. c. Action to be taken in a power outage. d. Identity of alarms by equipment location and action to correct. e. Equipment safety features, requirements, and potential hazards. 12. Programming manuals for programmable devices including list of standard programming. 03720- 042 -02 01830 -8 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS August 2013 • • • • B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate: 1. Description of unit and component parts: a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. d. Model number and name plate data for each piece of equipment. e. Assembly drawings. f. List of all special tools required to service equipment and/or systems including where the tools are stored. 2. Operating procedures: a. Start-up, break -in, routine, and normal operating instructions. b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency instructions. c. Summer and winter operating instructions. d. Special operating instructions. e. Control settings and ranges. 3. Maintenance procedures: a. Type and frequency of preventive maintenance activities required for each piece of equipment. b. Guide to "trouble- shooting." c. Disassembly, repair, and re- assembly. d. Alignment, adjusting, and checking. 4. Servicing and lubrication schedule: a. List of lubricants required. b. Period between lubrications. 5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. (This is not to be a generalized catalog of the entire product line.) 6. Description of sequence of operation. 03720 - 042 -02 01830 -9 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS August 2013 7. The original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance: a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear. b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. 8. As- installed control diagrams. 9. Each Contractor's coordination drawings. 10. List of the original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 11. Other data as required under pertinent Sections of the Specifications. 12. Charts of equipment, instrument, and valve tag numbers with location and function: a. Reference drawing which shows equipment, instrument, or valve location. b. Manufacturer's model and serial number. c. Valve actuator type (manual, hydraulic, electric, or pneumatic). 13. Local services (process water and air, drains, HVAC, natural gas and steam). C. The Contractor shall prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent during instruction of the Owner's personnel. D. Additional requirements for O &M data required by Sections of Specifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 O &M MANUALS A. Binders: The manuals shall be supplied in binders that are the same as those provided in Paragraph 1.03D above. B. Electronic Version: Word - processed portions of the manuals shall also be provided on CDs. The electronic version manuals must be capable of being read, edited, and printed with Microsoft Word or Owner - approved file format at the time of the transmittal of documents. The format will be provided to the Contractor upon request. All drawings shall be generated using personal computer and plotter with the software package program from AutoCAD. 03720 - 042 -02 01830 -10 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS August 2013 • • PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 01830 -11 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS August 2013 • • • DIVISION 2 SITE CONSTRUCTION • • • SECTION 02220 DEMOLITION AND MODIFICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and demolish, modify, remove, and dispose of work shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. B. The work includes but is not limited to demolishing, modifying, and removing existing materials, equipment, or work necessary to install the new work as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section and to connect with existing work in an approved manner. C. Demolition, modifications, and removals which may be specified under other Sections shall conform to requirements of this Section. D. Demolition and modifications include: 1. Removal and disposal of existing concrete walls, piping, valves, and miscellaneous items as shown on the Drawings. 2. Temporary relocation of sampling pumps, piping, and associated electrical and instrumentation systems as shown on the Drawings. 3. Off -site disposal of excess and unacceptable materials. E. Blasting and the use of explosives will not be permitted for any demolition work. F. Coordinate with the Owner during the Work to maintain the operation of the facility and meet discharge permit requirements. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01100, Summary of Work. B. Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. C. Section 01350, Environmental Protection Procedures. 03720-042 -02 02220 -1 DEMOLITION AND MODIFICATIONS August 2013 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. Submit to the Engineer six copies of proposed methods and operations of demolition of the structures and modifications before beginning work. Include in the schedule the coordination of shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility service as required. B. Furnish a detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure the uninterrupted progress of the Owner's operations. The sequence shall be compatible with sequence of construction and shutdown coordination requirements. C. Before beginning demolition work, the Contractor shall complete all modifications necessary to bypass the affected structure. Actual work shall not begin until the Engineer has observed and approved the modifications and authorized beginning the demolition work in writing. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) 1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS (NOT USED) 03720 - 042 -02 02220 -2 DEMOLITION AND MODIFICATIONS August 2013 • • • • • 1.13 JOB CONDITIONS A. Protection 1. The Contractor shall conduct the demolition and removal work to prevent damage or injury to structures, equipment, piping, instrumentation, conduit, light fixtures, etc., and occupants of the structures and to adjacent features which might result from falling debris or other causes, and so as not to interfere with the use and free and safe passage to and from adjacent structures. B. Scheduling 1. Carry out operations so as to avoid interference with operations and work in the existing facilities. C. Notification 1. At least 48 hours before beginning demolition or removal, notify the Engineer in writing of the proposed schedule of the demolition or removal. The Owner shall inspect the existing equipment and identify and mark those items which are to remain the property of the Owner. No removals shall be started without the permission of the Engineer. D. Conditions of Structures 1. The Owner and the Engineer assume no responsibility for the actual condition of the structures to be demolished or modified. 2. Conditions existing at the time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by the Owner insofar as practicable. However, variations within a structure may occur before the start of demolition work. E. Repairs to Damage 1. The Contractor shall promptly repair damage caused to adjacent facilities by demolition operation when, directed by the Engineer and at no cost to the Owner. Repairs shall be made to a condition at least equal to that which existed before construction. F. Traffic Access 1. The Contractor shall conduct demolition and modification operations and remove equipment and debris to ensure minimum interference with roads 03720-042 -02 02220 -3 DEMOLITION AND MODIFICATIONS August 2013 onsite and to ensure minimum interference with occupied or used facilities. 2. Special attention is directed towards maintaining safe and convenient access to the existing facilities by plant personnel and plant associated vehicles. 1.14 RULES AND REGULATIONS A. No building or structure or any part thereof shall be demolished until an application has been filed with the Building Inspector and a permit issued. The fee for this permit shall be the Contractor's responsibility. 1.15 DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL A. Salvageable material and equipment shall become the property of the Owner. The Contractor shall dismantle all such items to a size that can be readily handled and deliver them to a designated storage area. B. All other material and items of equipment shall become the Contractor's property and must be removed from the site. C. Storing or selling removed items on the site will not be allowed. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All materials and equipment removed from existing work shall become the property of the Contractor, except for those which the Owner has identified and marked for his/her use. All materials and equipment marked by the Owner to remain shall be carefully removed so as not to be damaged and shall be cleaned and stored on or adjacent to the site in a protected place specified by the Engineer or loaded onto trucks provided by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall dispose of all demolition materials, equipment, debris, and all other items — except those marked by the Owner to remain —off the site and in conformance with all existing applicable laws and regulations. C. Pollution Controls 1. Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the amount of dust and dirt rising and scattering in the air to the 03720 - 042-02 02220 -4 DEMOLITION AND MODIFICATIONS August 2013 • • • lowest practical level. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. a. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, and pollution. b. Clean adjacent structures, facilities, and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to conditions existing before starting the work. 3.02 STRUCTURAL REMOVALS A. The Contractor shall remove structures to the lines and grades shown unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. B. All demolition debris shall be removed and taken from the site, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. C. After parts or all of slabs and like work which tie into new work or existing work are removed, the point of junction shall be neatly repaired so as to leave only finished edges and surface exposed. 3.03 DEMOLITION, REPLACEMENT, AND REPAIR A. Structural elements shall not be overstressed. The Contractor shall be responsible for shoring and/or bracing as required for adequate structural support as a result of work performed. B. The temporary shoring and/or bracing shall be used as required to perform the work. C. The shoring and/or bracing shall remain in place until the repair mortar and/or concrete in each stage has attained design strength. 3.04 CLEAN -UP A. The Contractor shall remove from the site all debris resulting from the demolition operations as it accumulates. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall remove all materials, equipment, waste, and debris of every sort and shall leave the premises clean, neat, and orderly. END OF SECTION 03720- 042 -02 02220 -5 DEMOLITION AND MODIFICATIONS August 2013 • • • SECTION 02230 SITE PREPARATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, and equipment required and perform all site preparation, complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. B. The Contractor shall obtain all permits required for site preparation before proceeding with the work, including clearing and tree removal. C. The areas to be cleared, grubbed, and stripped within public rights -of -way and utility easements shall be minimized to the extent possible for the scope of pipeline work and in consideration of the actual means and methods of construction used. No unnecessary site preparation shall be performed within these areas. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01350, Environmental Protection Procedures. B. Section 02300, Earthwork for Structures. C. Section 02305, Earthwork for Utilities. D. Section 02920, Seeding and Sodding. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. B. Submit to the Engineer copies of all permits required before clearing, grubbing, and stripping work. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 03720 - 042 -02 02230 -1 SITE PREPARATION August 2013 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) 1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CLEARING A. The Contractor shall cut and remove all timber, trees, stumps, brush, shrubs, roots, grass, weeds, rubbish, and any other objectionable material resting on or protruding through the surface of the ground. B. The Contractor shall preserve and protect trees and other vegetation designated on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer to remain as specified below. 3.02 GRUBBING A. The Contractor shall grub and remove all stumps, roots in excess of 1 -1/2 inches in diameter, matted roots, brush, timber, logs, concrete rubble, and other debris encountered to a depth of 18 inches below original grade or 18 inches beneath the bottom of foundations, whichever is deeper. B. The Contractor shall refill all grubbing holes and depressions excavated below the original ground surface with suitable materials and compact to a density conforming to the surrounding ground surface in accordance with Sections 02300 and 02305. 03720 - 042 -02 02230 -2 SITE PREPARATION August 2013 • • • • • • 3.03 STRIPPING A. The Contractor shall strip topsoil from all areas to be occupied by buildings, structures, and roadways and all areas to be excavated or filled. B. Topsoil shall be free from brush, trash, large stones, and other extraneous material. Avoid mixing topsoil with subsoil. C. The Contractor shall stockpile and protect topsoil until it is used in landscaping, loaming, and seeding operations and dispose of surplus topsoil after all work is completed. 3.04 DISPOSAL A. The Contractor shall cut tree trunks and limbs exceeding 4 inches in diameter cut into 4 -ft lengths and stockpiled on site in the area designated by the Owner. B. Dispose of material and debris from site preparation operations by hauling such materials and debris to an approved offsite disposal area. No rubbish or debris of any kind shall be buried on the site. C. Burning of cleared and grubbed materials or other fires for any reason will not be permitted. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Trees and other vegetation designated on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer to remain shall be protected from damage by all construction operations by erecting suitable barriers, guards and enclosures, or by other approved means. The Contractor shall conduct clearing operations in a manner to prevent falling trees from damaging trees and vegetation designated to remain and to the work being constructed. The Contractor shall provide for the safety of employees and others. B. The Contractor shall maintain protection until all work in the vicinity of the work being protected has been completed. C. The Contractor shall not operate heavy equipment or stockpile materials within the branch spread of existing trees. D. The Contractor shall immediately repair any damage to existing tree crowns, trunks, or root systems. Roots exposed and/or damaged during the work shall immediately be cut off cleanly inside the exposed or damaged area. Treat cut 03720- 042 -02 02230 -3 SITE PREPARATION August 2013 surfaces with an acceptable tree wound paint and topsoil spread over the exposed root area. E. When work is completed the Contractor shall remove all dead and downed trees. Live trees shall be trimmed of all dead and diseased limbs and branches. All cuts shall be cleanly made at their juncture with the trunk or preceding branch without injury to the trunk or remaining branches. Cuts over 1 inch in diameter shall be treated with an acceptable tree wound paint. F. The Contractor shall restrict construction activities to those areas within the limits of construction designated on the Drawings, within public rights -of -way, and within easements provided by the Owner. Adjacent properties and improvements on these properties, public or private, which become damaged by construction operations shall be promptly restored to their original condition to the full satisfaction of the property owner. G. The Contractor shall remove trees damaged beyond saving, through no fault of the Contractor, as directed by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 02230 -4 SITE PREPARATION August 2013 • • • • • SECTION 02240 DEWATERING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section covers the work necessary to complete the dewatering activities. All work in this Section shall be done in accordance with the requirements of the Environmental Resource Permit and Water Use Permit (if required) as issued by Southwest Florida Water Management District. B. In addition to the requirements listed in this Section, the Contractor shall obtain, if required, and comply with all requirements of the Generic Permit for the Discharge of Ground Water From Any Non - Contaminated Site Activity as described in FAC 62 -621 -300. C. Design, furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, and maintain dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control groundwater flow into excavations and permit construction to proceed on dry, stable subgrades. 1. Maintain dewatering operations to ensure erosion control, stability of excavations and constructed slopes, that excavation does not flood, and that damage to subgrades and permanent structures is prevented. 2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means. 3. Remove dewatering system if no longer needed. D. The Contractor shall dewater so as to prevent damage to existing work. The Contractor shall repair or replace damage resulting from the dewatering activities promptly, remedy environmental damage as approved by the Engineer, and pay any and all fines levied to Contractor at no additional cost or time to the Owner. E. The Dewatering Plan shall be signed and sealed by the licensed professional engineer responsible for its preparation. F. The Contractor shall design the dewatering system. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining whatever investigations are necessary, before bidding, to design the dewatering system. 03720 - 042 -02 02240 -1 DEWATERING August 2013 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit the following in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. Before construction, the Contractor shall obtain a dewatering permit from the Southwest Florida Water Management District, as required. At a minimum, the dewatering plan submitted with the dewatering application shall include the following: 1. Duration of dewatering for each area. 2. Number and size of pumps. 3. Method of dewatering each area. 4. Methods for routing/containing the discharge. 5. Methods of isolating dewatering areas. 6. Time dewatering structure will be in place. 7. Proposed discharge points. Five copies of the plan shall be submitted to the Engineer for record purposes only. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining if a Water Use Permit will be required. If a Water Use Permit is required. It is the Contractor's responsibility to obtain the required information from the Engineer and Owner to complete the Water Use Permit application to submit with the Dewatering Plan. If a Water Use Permit is required, the Contractor shall submit five copies of the application to the Owner/Engineer for submittal purposes only. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining a Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Ground Water from any Non - Contaminated Site Activity as set forth in FDEP Rule 62- 621.300(2), FAC. The Contractor shall obtain the required permit form 62- 621.300(2) and the required information from the Engineer and Owner to complete the Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Ground Water from any Non - Contaminated Site Activity application to submit with the Dewatering Plan. The Contractor shall submit five copies of the application to the Owner/Engineer for submittal purposes only. D. Provide photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining properties, facilities, and other construction and site improvements that might be later misconstrued as damage caused by dewatering operations. 03720- 042 -02 02240 -2 DEWATERING August 2013 • • E. Submit Record Drawings at Project closeout identifying and locating utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical items encountered during dewatering. 1. Note locations and capping depth of wells and well points. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with water disposal requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Pre - installation Conference: Conduct conference at the Project site to present and discuss dewatering means, methods, and monitoring program. C. Identify a person who shall be present at all times during the execution of this portion of the Work and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the dewatering system being installed for this Project, the referenced standards, environmental and permit requirements, the requirements of this Work, and who shall direct all work performed under this Section. D. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine the water levels before and during the dewatering work. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS A. The Contractor shall provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during the execution of this portion of the Work and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the dewatering system being installed, the referenced standards, the 03720 - 042 -02 02240 -3 DEWATERING August 2013 requirements of this Work, and who shall direct all work performed under this Section. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the water level before beginning excavation and construction. 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) 1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS (NOT USED) 1.13 PRE -BID INSPECTION AND TESTING A. The Contractor is advised that site soil borings may indicate groundwater levels below the levels which may occur in response to normal, seasonal, extreme, or prolonged rainfall. The Contractor is further advised that site soil borings may not necessarily represent soil conditions to be encountered elsewhere on the job site, other than at the specific boring locations. B. Before bidding, the Contractor shall perform a detailed site inspection and, if desired, obtain the Owner's permission to perform site - specific testing as he deems necessary to obtain all required information relative to project dewatering requirements. C. The Contractor shall include as part of his Bid the total cost of all surface and subsurface dewatering as required to construct the Project in complete compliance with the Drawings and these Specifications. 1.14 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless approved by the Owner and Engineer and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. B. A geotechnical report is available for the site vicinity for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of the geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by the geotechnical engineer. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from these data. 1. The geotechnical report is included in an Appendix section of these specifications. 03720- 042 -02 02240 -4 DEWATERING August 2013 • 2. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for dewatering. • C. Survey adjacent structures and improvements, employing a professional land surveyor licensed in Florida to establish exact elevations at fixed points to monitor settlement. Clearly identify monitoring points and reference vertical datum, and benchmarks. Monitor and record existing initial elevations. 1. During dewatering, regularly resurvey benchmarks, maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify the Engineer if changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction and existing structures. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DEWATERING SYSTEM A. The dewatering system shall be adequate to drain the soils to be excavated to the extent that the piezometric water level in the construction area is a minimum of 2 feet below the bottom of the excavation, side slopes of excavations, or bottom of the footings at all times, or as otherwise required to obtain the specified compaction and installation conditions. Pipeline trenches must be dewatered at least 6 inches below the trench bottom. B. If layered soils are encountered, the hydrostatic head in the zone below the subgrade elevation shall be relieved to prevent uplift. C. Unless otherwise noted and before any excavating below or within 2 feet above the groundwater level, a dewatering system shall be placed into operation to lower water levels to the extent specified previously and then shall be operated continuously 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, throughout the excavation to maintain and protect all work until the work has been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. D. Where used, well points shall be installed in an Engineer- approved manner and in sufficient numbers to provide the necessary removal of water as stated previously. Well points and header piping shall be installed so that traffic on public thoroughfares and site access roads will not be impeded. • E. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the arrangement, location, and depths of the dewatering system necessary to accomplish the specified work. The 03720 - 042 -02 02240 -5 DEWATERING August 2013 dewatering system shall stay in full operation until not less than 90% of the total building load is applied, as will be determined by the Engineer, or until excavations and trenches have been backfilled and compacted. F. To prevent excessive noise, exhaust from all pumps and engines shall be silenced and muffled. G. Wellpoint or surface water pump discharge shall be controlled to prevent erosion, undermining, and all other damage and be piped to approved locations. H. With the Engineer's assistance, the Contractor is responsible for determining what approvals and permits are required to comply with any and all applicable regulations and permitting requirements relating to dewatering activities. With the Engineer's assistance the Contractor shall obtain all necessary approvals and permits and comply with any and all applicable regulations and permitting requirements concerning all dewatering activities, including pumpage and discharge. The Contactor is solely responsible for all costs associated with the proper implementation of dewatering activities. I. The Contractor shall perform all dewatering work in strict compliance with Section 01350, Environmental Protection Procedures and the Contract Drawings. J. Excavations shall be kept free from water during the placing of concrete and for 36 hours after or until concrete forms are removed. K. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by dewatering operations. 1. Prevent surface water and subsurface or groundwater from entering excavations, ponding on prepared subgrades, or flooding the site and surrounding area. 2. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation. L. Install dewatering system to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from the Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. 03720 - 042 -02 02240 -6 DEWATERING August 2013 • • • • M. Install sufficient dewatering equipment to drain water - bearing strata above and below the bottom of foundations. If excavating through layered soils, relieve any potential groundwater hydrostatic head in the zones below to prevent uplift. 1. Open -sump pumping which leads to loss of fines, subgrade softening, and slope instability shall not be permitted. N. Dispose of water removed by dewatering in a manner that avoids endangering public health, property, and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose of water in a manner that avoids flooding or accumulation on private property. Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and other flow - control devices as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3.02 OBSERVATION WELLS A. The Contractor shall install observation wells as may be required to record accurate water levels. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining all observation wells and observing and recording the elevation of the piezometric water levels daily. C. Wells damaged or destroyed shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.03 CLEANUP A. Upon completing dewatering elsewhere on the Project, the Contractor shall remove all equipment and leave the project site in a neat, clean, and acceptable condition satisfactory to the Owner. Wellpoint holes and excavations shall be adequately backfilled and compacted to prevent settlement. END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 02240 -7 DEWATERING August 2013 • • • SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK FOR STRUCTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, tools, appliances, and materials and perform all operations necessary for the following: 1. Preparing subgrades for slab -on- grade, walks, pavements, and lawns and grasses. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Laying the subbase course for concrete sidewalks and pavements. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01350, Environmental Protection Procedures. B. Section 01500, Temporary Facilities and Controls. C. Section 02230, Site Preparation. D. Section 02240, Dewatering. E. Section 02305, Earthwork for Utilities. F. Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit the following shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 1. Classification according to ASTM D2487 of each onsite and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D1557 for each onsite and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. B. The Contractor shall submit records before the start of this work. The Contractor shall verify that the existing conditions are correct as shown on the plans and mentioned in these Specifications. The Contractor shall note any discrepancies found immediately and notify the Owner and Engineer. 03720 - 042-02 02300 -1 EARTHWORK FOR STRUCTURES August 2013 The records shall include the following: 1. The location of all underground utilities, structures, etc. surrounding the areas to be excavated that may be impacted by the work. 2. The location of test excavations. 3. The location of inspections. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM C33— Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 2. ASTM D698— Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12 400 ft- lbf/ft3 (600 kN- m/m3)). 3. ASTM D1556— Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand -Cone Method. 4. ASTM D1557— Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft- lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN- m/m3)). 5. ASTM D2167— Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method. 6. ASTM D2487— Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). 7. ASTM D2937— Standard Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Drive - Cylinder Method. 8. ASTM D2940— Standard Specification for Graded Aggregate Material For Bases or Subbases for Highways or Airports. 9. ASTM D3740— Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction. 10. ASTM D6938— Standard Test Method for In -Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil- Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 11. ASTM E329— Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing. 03720 - 042 -02 02300 -2 EARTHWORK FOR STRUCTURES August 2013 • • • • • • 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E329 to conduct soil materials and definition testing, as documented according to ASTM D3740. B. The Contractor shall do the following: 1. Ensure that excavations provide adequate working space and clearance for the work to be performed and for installing piping and buried utilities. In no case shall excavation faces be undercut. 2. Ensure that foundation surfaces are clean and free of loose material of any kind when pipelines and buried utilities are placed on them. 3. Excavate, trench, and backfill in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Ensure that shoring and sheeting for excavations are designed by a Florida - registered Professional Engineer and are in accordance with the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Document 2226, Safe Working Practices — Excavating and Trenching. 5. Before beginning any excavation or grading, ensure the accuracy of all survey data indicated on the Contract Drawings and in the Specifications and/or as provided. If the Contractor discovers any inaccuracies, errors, or omissions in the survey data, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner so that proper adjustments can be anticipated or ordered. If the Contractor begins any excavation or grading, this shall be considered an acceptance of the survey data by the Contractor, after which time the Contractor has no claim against the Owner resulting from alleged errors, omissions, or inaccuracies of the survey data. 6. Ensure that tolerances for excavation are plus or minus 0.10 foot to the required line and to the required grade. Tolerance for compaction of in- place material shall be plus or minus 0.10 foot to the required grade, unless otherwise noted. 7. Remove unsatisfactory materials and unsuitable materials including muck, silts, peat, and other loose and very loose compressible soils from excavations before placing pipe foundation, bedding, and buried utilities. 03720 - 042 -02 02300 -3 EARTHWORK FOR STRUCTURES August 2013 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) 1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS (NOT USED) 1.13 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: The Contractor shall not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others unless permitted to do so in writing by the Engineer and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. 1. Notify the Engineer not less than 2 days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without the Engineer's written permission. 3. Contact a utility- locator service and obtain utility locations for the Project area before excavating. B. The Contractor shall demolish and completely remove from the site underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. 03720 - 042 -02 02300 -4 EARTHWORK FOR STRUCTURES August 2013 • • • • 1.14 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low - strength material used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Base Course: The course placed between the subbase course and hot -mix asphalt paving. C. Bedding Course: The course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off -site for use as fill or backfill. E. Drainage Course: The course supporting the slab -on -grade that also minimizes the upward capillary flow of pore water. F. Excavation: Removing material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. 1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by the Engineer. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit prices. 2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by the Engineer. Unauthorized excavation as well as remedial work directed by the Engineer shall be without additional compensation. G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man -made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. I. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. 03720 - 042-02 02300 -5 EARTHWORK FOR STRUCTURES August 2013 J. Utilities: On -site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: The Contractor shall provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D2487 Soil Classification Groups SW and SP or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. C. Unsuitable Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MIL OH, AND PT according to ASTM D2487, or a combination of these groups. 1. Unsuitable soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2% of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. D. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940; with at least 95% passing a 1 -1/2 -inch sieve and not more than 8% passing a No. 200 sieve. E. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940; with at least 90% passing a 1 -1/2 -inch sieve and not more than 12% passing a No. 200 sieve. F. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940; except with 100% passing a 1 -inch sieve and not more than 8% passing a No. 200 sieve. G. Sand: ASTM C33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand. H. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state. 03720 - 042 -02 02300 -6 EARTHWORK FOR STRUCTURES August 2013 • • • PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. The Contractor shall protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B. The Contractor shall prepare subgrade for earthwork operations including removing vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface as specified in Section 02230, Site Preparation. C. The Contractor shall protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Section 01350, Environmental Protection Procedures. 3.02 DEWATERING A. The Contractor shall prevent surface water and groundwater from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding the Project site and surrounding area. B. The Contractor shall protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 2. Install a dewatering system, specified in Section 02240, Dewatering, to keep subgrades dry and convey groundwater away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required. 3.03 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives: Do not use explosives. 3.04 EXCAVATION, GENERAL A. Unclassified Excavation: The Contractor shall excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions. 03720- 042 -02 02300 -7 EARTHWORK FOR STRUCTURES August 2013 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsuitable soil materials, replace with satisfactory soil materials. 3.05 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. The Contractor shall excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb the bottom of the excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot. Do not disturb the bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces. 3.06 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. The Contractor shall excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. 3.07 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES (NOT USED) 3.08 SUBGRADE INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when excavations have reached the required subgrade. B. If the Engineer determines that unsuitable soil is present, the Contractor shall continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. C. The Contractor shall proof -roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic -tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof -roll wet or saturated subgrades. 1. Completely proof -roll the subgrade in one direction, repeating proof - rolling in the direction perpendicular to the first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. 03720 - 042 -02 02300 -8 EARTHWORK FOR STRUCTURES August 2013 • • • • 2. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by the Engineer, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed. D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit prices or additional work. E. As directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities without additional compensation. 3.09 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. The Contractor shall fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending the bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to the excavation bottom without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28 -day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by the Engineer. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by the Engineer. 3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. The Contractor shall stockpile excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within the drip line of remaining trees. 3.11 BACKFILL A. The Contractor shall place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Constructing below finish grade, including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 03720 -042 -02 02300 -9 EARTHWORK FOR STRUCTURES August 2013 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring, bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. B. The Contractor shall place backfill on subgrades free of mud. 3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL (NOT USED) 3.13 SOIL FILL A. The Contractor shall plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. B. The Contractor shall place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 4. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill. C. The Contractor shall place soil fill on subgrades free of mud. 3.14 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL A. The Contractor shall uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compacting to within 2% of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy. 2. Remove and replace or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2% and is too wet to compact to the specified dry unit weight. 3.15 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. The Contractor shall place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment 03720 - 042 -02 02300 -10 EARTHWORK FOR STRUCTURES August 2013 • • • • and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand - operated tampers. B. The Contractor shall place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. The Contractor shall compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D698: 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact the top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 %. 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact the top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 %. 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact the top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 90 %. 4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85% in unpaved lawn areas. Final backfill compaction shall meet the requirement listed above depending on the location of the trench. 3.16 GRADING A. General: The Contractor shall uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 03720 - 042 -02 02300 -11 EARTHWORK FOR STRUCTURES August 2013 C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10 -foot straightedge. 3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The number and location of the tests shall be as specified in these Specifications and as directed by the Engineer during construction. B. The Contractor shall coordinate activity with the Engineer and the testing agency to permit testing as directed in the presence of the Engineer. C. The cost of all testing to achieve specified requirements shall be borne by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be reimbursed by the Owner for passing field tests. D. The costs of any and all retests due to failure to achieve specified requirements shall be solely borne by the Contractor and are not reimbursable under this Contract. E. All materials proposed for use shall be tested as follows: Material Required Test Min No. Tests Satisfactory Soil Materials Soil Classification using ASTM D2487 (including all tests contained therein) One per source of materials to determine conformance with materials specified herein; additional test whenever there is any apparent change. Soil moisture - density relationship using Modified Proctor ASTM D1557 One per source of material or apparent change in material. F. The Contractor shall allow the testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after the test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. G. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, the testing agency will perform at least one test of each soil stratum to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Engineer. H. The testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D1556, ASTM D2167, ASTM D2937, and ASTM D6938 as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 03720 -042 -02 02300 -12 EARTHWORK FOR STRUCTURES August 2013 • • 1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2,000 square feet or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. 2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for each 100 feet or less of wall length but no fewer than two tests. 3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for each 400 feet or less of trench length but no fewer than two tests. When the testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved the degree of compaction specified, the Contractor shall scarify and moisten or aerate or remove and replace soil to the depth required and recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. J. The approved testing agency shall transmit copies of field testing results as follows: 1. One copy to the Owner. 2. Two copies to the Engineer. 3. Two copies to the Contractor. The field test reports shall include, at a minimum, project title; project location; location of sample(s) tested; time of testing; date of testing; testing person's full name; testing agency name, address, and telephone number; and test results. K. No soil material shall be used until 1) the Engineer has reviewed and approved test reports and 2) the Contractor submits certification that the soil material proposed for construction is clean and meets gradation and other parameters specified in this Specification. L. At no cost to the Owner, the Contractor shall remove and replace or correct all materials and work which tests indicate do not conform, in the opinion of the Engineer, to the requirements of these Specifications. M. The results of in -place density tests shall be considered satisfactory if the density in each instance is equal to or greater than the specified density. Soil moisture content at the time of testing shall conform to requirements of these Specifications. N. Where unsatisfactory compaction is revealed by the tests, the Contractor shall re- excavate, backfill, recompact, and/or rework the backfill as required to obtain the required degree of compaction over the entire depth of the excavation. 03720- 042 -02 02300 -13 EARTHWORK FOR STRUCTURES August 2013 O. The testing agency shall transmit to the Engineer copies of all testing agency invoices submitted to the Contractor for payment. Invoices shall clearly indicate specific services and date and time services are rendered and shall indicate if the invoiced testing cost is an initial test of the Contractor's work or is a re -test required due to the Contractor's failure to initially achieve the specified requirements. 3.18 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: The Contractor shall protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion and keep them free of trash and debris. B. The Contractor shall repair and reestablish grades to the specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by the Engineer and reshape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before the Project Correction Period elapses, The Contractor shall remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible. 3.19 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: The Contractor shall transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on the Owner's property and stockpile and spread this soil as directed by the Engineer. 1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property. END OF SECTION 03720- 042 -02 02300 -14 EARTHWORK FOR STRUCTURES August 2013 • • SECTION 02305 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall provide all materials, equipment, labor, and work necessary to completely construct the project in accordance with the Contract Documents. This work includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Excavating and removing unsatisfactory materials. 2. Preparing trench foundations. 3. Providing satisfactory material for all trenches as specified and as required. 4. Obtaining, storing, maintaining, and disposing of materials. 5. Dewatering, shoring, and sheeting. 6. Placing, compacting, testing, final grading, and demolishing subgrade. 7. Performing all other work required by the Contract Documents. B. The Contractor is responsible for performing all work so as not to damage existing roadways, facilities, utilities, structures, etc. and shall repair and replace such damage to equal or better than its original undamaged condition without cost to the Owner. C. The Contractor shall examine the site before submitting a bid, taking into consideration all conditions that may affect the work. D. The Contractor shall coordinate all additional subsurface investigations and testing included with this work with the Engineer before performing the excavation and foundation preparation work. In general, if the Contractor finds different and unsuitable /unsatisfactory soil conditions during the work, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer and the Owner immediately. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01350, Environmental Protection Procedures. B. Section 02230, Site Preparation. C. Section 02300, Earthwork for Structures. D. Section 02240, Dewatering. 03720 - 042 -02 02305 -1 EARTHWORK FOR UTILI11bS August 2013 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit the following shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 1. Classification according to ASTM D2487 of each onsite and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D1557 for each onsite and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. B. The Contractor shall submit records before the start of this work. The Contractor shall verify that the existing conditions are correct as shown on the plans and mentioned in these Specifications. The Contractor shall note any discrepancies found immediately and notify the Owner and Engineer. The records shall include the following: 1. Location of all existing underground utilities, structures, etc. surrounding the areas to be excavated that may be impacted by the work. 2. Location of test excavations. 3. Location of inspections. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply: A. OSHA Excavation Safety Standards, 29 CFR 1926, Subpart P B. Florida Trench Safety Act (90 -96, Laws of Florida) 03720 - 042 -02 02305 -2 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES August 2013 • • C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM D1556— Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand -Cone Method. 2. ASTM D1557— Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft- lbf /ft3 (2,700 kN- m/m3)). 3. ASTM D2937— Standard Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Drive - Cylinder Method. 4. ASTM D2487— Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). 5. ASTM D3282— Standard Practice for Classification of Soils and Soil - Aggregate Mixtures for Highway Construction Purposes. 6. ASTM D3740— Standard Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used In Engineering Design and Construction. 7. ASTM D6938— Standard Test Method for In -Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil- Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 8. ASTM E329— Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing. D. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA) 1. AWPA C1 —All Timber Products — Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes. 2. AWPA C3 —Piles – Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E329 to conduct soil materials and definition testing, as documented according to ASTM D3740. B. The Contractor shall do the following: 1. Ensure that excavations provide adequate working space and clearance for the work to be performed and for installing piping and buried utilities. In no case shall excavation faces be undercut. 2. Ensure that foundation surfaces are clean and free of loose material of any kind when pipelines and buried utilities are placed on them. 3. Excavate, trench, and backfill in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction. 03720 - 042-02 02305 -3 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES August 2013 4. Ensure that shoring and sheeting for excavations are designed by a Florida- registered Professional Engineer and are in accordance with the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Document 2226, Safe Working Practices— Excavating and Trenching. 5. Before beginning any excavation or grading, ensure the accuracy of all survey data indicated on the Contract Drawings and in these Specifications and/or as provided. If the Contractor discovers any inaccuracies, errors, or omissions in the survey data, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner so that proper adjustments can be anticipated or ordered. If the Contractor begins any excavation or grading, this shall be considered an acceptance of the survey data by the Contractor, after which time the Contractor has no claim against the Owner resulting from alleged errors, omissions, or inaccuracies of the survey data. 6. Ensure that tolerances for excavation are ±0.10 foot to the required line and to the required grade. Tolerance for compaction of in -place material shall be ±0.10 foot to the required grade. 7. Ensure that all trench materials derived from the project site and imported to this site are examined, tested, and classified by an Engineer- approved soils testing laboratory. 8. Remove unsatisfactory materials and unsuitable materials including muck, silts, peat, and other loose and very loose compressible soils from excavations before placing pipe foundation, bedding, and buried utilities. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 03720 - 042 -02 02305 -4 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES August 2013 • • • • 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: The Contractor shall not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others unless permitted to do so in writing by the Engineer and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to the requirements indicated. 1. Notify the Engineer not less than 2 days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without the Engineer's written permission. 3. Contact utility- locator service and obtain utility locations for the Project Area before excavating. B. The Contractor shall demolish and completely remove from the site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. 1.11 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low- strength material used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Base Course: The course placed between the subbase course and hot -mix asphalt paving. C. Bedding Course: The course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off -site for use as fill or backfill. E. Drainage Course: The course supporting the slab -on -grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water. 03720 - 042-02 02305 -5 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES August 2013 F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. 1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by the Engineer. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to the Contract provisions for unit prices. 2. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet in width and more than 30 feet in length. 3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by the Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Engineer, shall be without additional compensation. G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man -made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. I. Subgrade: The surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. J. Utilities: On -site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. 1.12 TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall furnish a soil survey for satisfactory material and samples of materials. B. Testing for source material, for classification, and for prequalification of material (on or off site) shall be performed by an independent testing agency retained by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. C. Testing for in -place compacted fill shall be performed by the same independent testing agency as approved by the Engineer and retained by the Contractor. D. The number and location of the tests shall be as specified in these Specifications and as directed by the Engineer during construction. 03720- 042 -02 02305 -6 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES August 2013 • • • • • E. The Contractor shall coordinate activity with the Engineer and the testing agency to permit testing as directed in the presence of the Engineer. F. The cost of all testing to achieve specified requirements shall be borne by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be reimbursed by the Owner for passing field tests. G. The costs of any and all retests due to failure to achieve specified requirements shall be solely borne by the Contractor and are not reimbursable under this contract. H. All materials proposed for use shall be tested as follows: Material Required Test Min. No. Tests Satisfactory Soil Materials Soil Classification using ASTM D2487 (including all tests contained therein) One per source of materials to determine conformance with materials specified in these Specifications; additional tests whenever there is any apparent change. Soil moisture - density relationship using Modified Proctor ASTM D1557 One per source of material or apparent change in material. I. Soil materials shall be tested during construction as follows: Material Required Test Min. No. Tests Satisfactory Field Density For each layer of trench bottom subgrade Soil Material in -place after ASTM D1556 -Sand Cone Method, or before addition of soil materials, refill, bedding, and backfill, and for each 400 lineal compaction ASTM D6938- Nuclear feet of trench or fraction thereof, whichever is Density Method, or ASTM D2937 -Drive greater; two tests for each drainage, manhole, or wet well structure; additional test whenever Cylinder Method there is any change in native soil, groundwater, or soil moisture conditions. J. The approved testing agency shall transmit copies of required laboratory test results as follows: 1. One copy to the Owner. 2. Two copies to the Engineer. 3. Two copies to the Contractor. The laboratory test reports shall include, at a minimum, project title; project location; location of sample; source, time, and date of testing; testing agency's name, address, and telephone number; and test results. Each test report shall be 03720 - 042 -02 02305 -7 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES August 2013 signed and sealed by the Professional Engineer representing the testing agency as specified in these Specifications. K. The approved testing agency shall transmit copies of field testing results as follows: 1. One copy to the Owner. 2. Two copies to the Engineer. 3. Two copies to the Contractor. The field test reports shall include, at a minimum, project title; project location; location of sample(s) tested; time of testing; date of testing; testing person's full name; testing agency name, address, and telephone number; and test results. L. No soil material shall be used until 1) the Engineer has reviewed and approved test reports and 2) the Contractor submits certification that the soil material proposed for construction is clean and meets gradation and other parameters specified in these Specifications. M. At no cost to the Owner, the Contractor shall remove and replace or correct all materials and work which tests indicate do not conform, in the opinion of the Engineer, to the requirements of these Specifications. N. The results of in -place density tests shall be considered satisfactory if the density in each instance is equal to or greater than the specified density. Soil moisture content at the time of testing shall conform to requirements of these Specifications. O. Where the tests reveal unsatisfactory compaction, the Contractor shall re- excavate, backfill, recompact, and/or rework the backfill as required to obtain the required degree of compaction over the entire depth of the excavation. P. The testing agency shall transmit to the Engineer copies of all testing agency invoices submitted to the Contractor for payment. Invoices shall clearly indicate specific services and date and time services are rendered and shall indicate if the invoiced testing cost is an initial test of the Contractor's work or is a re -test required due to the Contractor's failure to initially achieve the specified requirements. 1.13 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) 03720- 042 -02 02305 -8 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES August 2013 • • • 1.14 RECORD DRAWINGS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STRUCTURAL MATERIALS A. Materials used for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers, and crossbraces, shall be in good serviceable condition. Any timber used shall be sound and free from large or loose knots. B. Pressure - treated timber shall be used where wood sheeting or piling is specified or indicated to be cut and left in place. 2.02 TRENCH SOIL MATERIALS A. Materials used for trench construction shall be free of clumps of clay, rock or gravel, debris, waste, frozen materials, and other deleterious matter as determined by the Engineer and shall be satisfactory soil materials as follows: Area Classification Soil Materials In excavations and trenches Excavated and borrow material that has been sampled, tested, and approved as "Satisfactory Soil Material." B. Satisfactory Soil Materials 1. Soil Classification Groups Satisfactory soil materials for each trench shall be as follows: Satisfactory Soil Material (ASTM D3282, Soil Classification Groups) In -situ Foundation Bedding, Haunching, and Initial Backfill Final Bacll SW SP SW SP SW SP 03720 -042 -02 02305 -9 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES August 2013 2. Maximum Particle Size Limitations for Satisfactory Soil Materials The maximum allowable particle size for satisfactory soil materials within each trench for each type of utility shall be as follows: Conduit Maximum Allowable Particle Size In -situ Foundation Bedding, Haunching, and Initial Backfill Final Backfill Plastic Pipe (PVC, CPVC, HDPE, etc.) less than 6- inch - diameter See Note 1 1/2 inch 3 inches Plastic Pipe (PVC, CPVC, HDPE, etc.) 6- inch - diameter and Larger See Note 1 3/4 inch 3 inches Concrete Pipe Steel Pipe Ductile Iron Pipe Fiberglass Pipe See Note 1 3/4 inch or three times the wall thickness, whichever is less 3 inches Other Conduit Materials See Note 2 See Note 2 See Note 2 (1) There is no requirement when satisfactory undisturbed native soil material is used. Disturbed portions of the foundation and/or unsatisfactory native soil material shall be replaced with satisfactory soil materials meeting all the requirements for Bedding. (2) The maximum allowable particle size shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendation. 3. Additional Requirements of Satisfactory Materials Satisfactory soil materials shall be free of debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, or other deleterious matter. Soils within 4 inches of the exterior surface of the pipe shall be free of gravel, stones, or other materials which may abrade the pipe surface. C. Unsatisfactory Materials Unsatisfactory soil materials shall mean ASTM D2487, Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT and other highly organic soils and soil materials of any classification that have a moisture content at the time of compaction beyond the range of 1 percentage point below and 3 percentage points above the optimum moisture content of the soil material as determined by moisture - density relations test. 03720 - 042 -02 02305 -10 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES August 2013 • I/ PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The Contractor shall do the following: A. Carefully verify by hand methods the location of all surrounding underground utilities before performing utility excavations and trenches. B. Protect utilities to be left in place from damage. C. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by the Owner, except when permitted in writing by the Owner. D. Protect bench marks, survey points, and existing structures, roads, sidewalks, monitoring wells, paving, curbs, etc. against damage from equipment, vehicular or foot traffic, settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and all construction- related activities. E. Repair and replace damage to existing facilities to equal or better than their original undamaged condition without cost to the Owner and to the approval of the Engineer. F. Excavate and trench in ways that will prevent surface water and subsurface water from flowing into excavations and will also prevent flooding of the site and surrounding area. G. Protect excavations and trenching by shoring, bracing, sheet piling, underpinning, or other methods as required to prevent cave -ins or loose dirt from falling into excavations and trenches. H. Do not operate earth- moving equipment within 5 feet of walls of concrete structures for depositing or compacting backfill material. I. Compact the backfill material placed next to concrete walls with hand - operated tampers or similar equipment that will not damage the structure. J. Excavate, fill, backfill, and grade to elevations required by the Contract Documents. K. Pile excavated materials suitable for backfill in an orderly manner a sufficient distance from excavations to prevent overloading, slides, and cave -ins. L. Do not obstruct access ways, roadways, and plant facilities. 03720 - 042 -02 02305 -11 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES August 2013 M. Dewater excavations and trenches in accordance with Section 02240, Dewatering. N. Refer to the Contract Drawings for additional requirements related to earthwork and protection of existing features. 3.02 TRENCH EXCAVATION A. Before excavating the trench, the Contractor shall prepare the surface including clearing and grubbing as specified in Section 02230, Site Preparation. B. The Contractor shall be required to fully comply with all applicable OSHA Excavation Safety Standards and to abide by them as covered by the most current version of the Florida Trench Safety Act (90 -96, Laws of Florida). C. The Contractor shall ensure that mechanical equipment used for trench excavation shall be of a type, design, and construction and shall be so operated that conduit/utility, when accurately laid to specified alignment, will be centered in the trench with adequate clearance between the conduit/utility and sidewalis of the trench. Undercutting the trench sidewall to obtain clearance will not be permitted. D. The Contractor shall not use mechanical equipment in locations where its operation would cause damage to trees, buildings, culverts, other existing property, utilities, structures, etc. above or below ground. In all such locations, the Contractor shall use hand excavating methods. E. The Contractor shall not use blasting. F. The Contractor shall cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable proper installation of services and to allow for testing and inspection. The Contractor shall also trim and shape trench bottoms and leave them free of irregularities, lumps, and projections. Trench width shall be excavated as specified on the Contract Drawings. G. The Contractor shall construct trench walls so as to avoid side wall collapse or sloughing. Trenches shall be either braced or open construction in accordance with the Contract Documents. No separate payment will be made for any special procedure used in connection with the excavation. H. Where sheeting and bracing are not required, the Contractor shall construct trench walls in the bottom of the excavation as vertical as possible to the maximum height allowable by OSHA. Trench walls above this height shall be sloped to guard against side wall collapse or sloughing as specified on the Contract Drawings. 03720 - 042 -02 02305 -12 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES August 2013 • • I. Where sheeting and bracing are required, the sheeting and bracing system shall meet the requirements in these Specifications. J. Excavations shall be to the design elevations shown on the Contract Drawings or as specified, unless unsatisfactory or unsuitable foundation materials are encountered in the bottom of the excavation. Where unsatisfactory or unsuitable foundation materials are encountered, this material shall be undercut and removed as indicated on the Contract Drawings and replaced with satisfactory soil material meeting all the requirements for Bedding. The lift thicknesses and compaction requirements for the replacement soil shall also meet the requirements for Bedding. The Contractor shall be careful not to overexcavate except where necessary to remove unsatisfactory or unsuitable materials, irregularities, lumps, rock, and projections. Unnecessary overexcavation shall be replaced as specified in these Specifications at the Contractor's sole expense. L. The Contractor shall accurately grade bedding soil materials at the bottoms of the trenches to provide uniform bearing and support for each section of conduit/utility at every point along its entire length except where it is necessary to excavate the bedding for conduit/utility bells (e.g., pipe bells), etc. or for proper sealing of conduit/utility joints. Abrupt changes in grade of the trench bottom shall be avoided. M. The Contractor shall dig bell holes and depressions after the bedding has been graded to ensure that the conduit/utility rests on the prepared bedding for as much of its full length as practicable. Bell holes and depressions shall be only of such length, depth, and width as required to make the joint. N. The Contractor shall do the following: 1. Pile all excavated material in a manner that will not endanger the work or erode the stormwater management facilities or water courses. 2. Avoid obstructing sidewalks, driveways, and plant facilities. 3. Leave hydrants, valve pit covers, valve boxes, or other utility controls unobstructed and accessible. 4. Keep gutters, drainage inlets, natural water courses, and miscellaneous drainage structures clear or make other satisfactory provisions for their proper operation. 03720 - 042 -02 02305 -13 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES August 2013 0. The Contractor shall keep all satisfactory materials that are suitable for use /reuse in the trench construction separated from unsatisfactory materials. P. Except where otherwise authorized, indicated, or specified, the Contractor shall replace, at the Contractor's own expense, all materials excavated below the bottom of concrete walls, footings, slabs on grade, and foundations with concrete or flowable fill, as directed by the Engineer. Q. The Contractor shall adhere to these Additional Excavation Requirements for piping: 1. Excavate trenches so that the piping can be laid to the lines, grades, and elevations indicated on the Contract Drawings. 2. For piping designated to be laid to a minimum cover requirement, grade trenches to avoid high and low points to the extent practical. Record Drawings of such pipes shall present top -of -pipe and grade elevations at all high and low points along each pipe segment, at the end points of each pipe segments, and at intervals not to exceed 100 feet along each pipe segment. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, additional air release and/or vacuum relief valves are required, the Contractor shall install the additional items as directed by the Engineer. 3. Except at locations specifically indicated otherwise on the Contract Drawings, the required minimum cover over the top of the pipe from finished grade for various pipe diameters shall be as follows: Continue dewatering operations along each pipe segment until the required minimum cover is provided. During the dewatering operations, the ground water level in the trench shall remain at all times a minimum of 1 foot below bottom of trench excavations. R. The Contractor shall adhere to these Additional Excavation Requirements for Electrical Utilities: 1. Avoid abrupt changes in grade of the trench bottom. 03720- 042 -02 02305 -14 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES August 2013 • Pipe Diameter 48 inch or less 66 inch 72 inch 96 inch Minimum Cover 3 feet 4 feet 4.5 feet 5 feet Continue dewatering operations along each pipe segment until the required minimum cover is provided. During the dewatering operations, the ground water level in the trench shall remain at all times a minimum of 1 foot below bottom of trench excavations. R. The Contractor shall adhere to these Additional Excavation Requirements for Electrical Utilities: 1. Avoid abrupt changes in grade of the trench bottom. 03720- 042 -02 02305 -14 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES August 2013 • • • 2. The required minimum cover over the top of electrical conduits from finished grade shall be as follows: 3. The required minimum clearance from the bottom of mat foundations and/or footings shall be 2 feet. Provide additional cover where necessary to satisfy the minimum clearance requirement. 4. Provide additional cover depth if necessary to avoid interference of other cables, ducts, piping, structures, and other utilities. S. The Contractor shall adhere to this Additional Excavation Requirement for Appurtenances: 1. Ensure that excavations for valves and similar appurtenances shall be sufficient to leave at least 12 inches in the clear between the outer surfaces and the embankment or timber used to hold and protect the walls. 3.03 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. The Contractor shall do the following: 1. Barricade and post excavations with warning signs for the safety of persons. Provide warning lights during hours of darkness. 2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities immediately adjacent to excavations against damage including loading, settlement, lateral movement, undermining, and washout. B. Conduct topsoil removal operations to ensure the safety of persons and to prevent damage to existing structures and utilities, construction in progress, trees and vegetation to remain standing, and other property. 3.04 SHEETING AND BRACING A. Where sheeting and bracing are required to support the side walls of the excavation, the Contractor shall retain a Professional Engineer, registered in Florida, to design sheeting and bracing. The design shall establish requirements for sheeting and bracing and shall comply with all applicable codes; authorities having jurisdiction; and federal, state, and local regulations. 03720 -042 -02 02305 -15 EARTHWORK FOR UTILr1'1ES August 2013 Electrical Conduits (Lines less than 5 kV) Electrical Conduits (Lines 5 kV and up) Minimum Cover 2 feet 3 feet 3. The required minimum clearance from the bottom of mat foundations and/or footings shall be 2 feet. Provide additional cover where necessary to satisfy the minimum clearance requirement. 4. Provide additional cover depth if necessary to avoid interference of other cables, ducts, piping, structures, and other utilities. S. The Contractor shall adhere to this Additional Excavation Requirement for Appurtenances: 1. Ensure that excavations for valves and similar appurtenances shall be sufficient to leave at least 12 inches in the clear between the outer surfaces and the embankment or timber used to hold and protect the walls. 3.03 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. The Contractor shall do the following: 1. Barricade and post excavations with warning signs for the safety of persons. Provide warning lights during hours of darkness. 2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities immediately adjacent to excavations against damage including loading, settlement, lateral movement, undermining, and washout. B. Conduct topsoil removal operations to ensure the safety of persons and to prevent damage to existing structures and utilities, construction in progress, trees and vegetation to remain standing, and other property. 3.04 SHEETING AND BRACING A. Where sheeting and bracing are required to support the side walls of the excavation, the Contractor shall retain a Professional Engineer, registered in Florida, to design sheeting and bracing. The design shall establish requirements for sheeting and bracing and shall comply with all applicable codes; authorities having jurisdiction; and federal, state, and local regulations. 03720 -042 -02 02305 -15 EARTHWORK FOR UTILr1'1ES August 2013 B. The sole responsibility for the design, methods of installation, and adequacy of sheeting and bracing shall be and shall remain that of the Contractor and the Contractor's Professional Engineer. The Contractor shall provide all necessary sheeting and bracing or other procedures as required to ensure safe working conditions and to protect the excavations. C. Sheeting and bracing shall consist of braced steel sheet piling, trench box, braced wood lagging, and soldier beams or other approved methods. D. The Contractor shall immediately fill and compact voids formed outside the sheeting. Where soil cannot be properly compacted to fill the void, the Contractor shall use Class B concrete as backfill at no additional cost to the Owner. E. The Contractor shall install sheeting outside the required clearances and dimensions. Sheeting shall be plumb, securely braced, and tied in position. Sheeting shall be adequate to withstand all pressure to which it may be subjected. The Contractor shall correct any movement or bulging at no expense to the Owner so as to provide the necessary clearances and dimensions. F. The Contractor shall maintain sheeting and bracing in excavations and trenches for the entire time excavations will be open. G. The Contractor shall not brace sheeting against pipe being laid. Sheeting shall be braced so that no concentrated load of horizontal thrust is transmitted to the pipe. H. Sheeting shall not be withdrawn if driven below the spring line of any pipe. The Contractor shall cut off tops as indicated on the Contract Drawings and leave bottoms permanently in place. 3.05 DEWATERING, WATER REMOVAL, AND DRAINAGE MAINTENANCE A. Water shall not be permitted to accumulate in excavations. The Contractor shall provide dewatering systems to convey water away from excavations so that softening of foundations bottoms, footing undercutting, and soil changes detrimental to subgrade stability and foundation will not occur. Dewatering systems and methods of disposal shall be as specified in Section 02240, Dewatering, and as approved by the Engineer before being installed by the Contractor. Groundwater levels shall be maintained a minimum of 1 foot below bottom of trenches or excavations. B. Dewatering systems and equipment shall be in place as required to eliminate water during the excavation period until the work is completed. The Contractor shall provide ample means and equipment with which to remove promptly and dispose of properly all water entering any excavation. This includes the use of 03720 - 042 -02 02305 -16 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES August 2013 • • • • sand or gravel as required to maintain adequate flow during the pipe laying or installation of other items of work within the excavation. • • C. Water pumped or drained shall be disposed of in a suitable manner without damage to adjacent property, to other work under construction, or to roads. Water shall not be discharged onto surface improvements without adequate protection of the surface at the point of discharge. All gutter, drains, culverts, sewers, and inlets shall be kept clean and open for surface drainage. Water shall not be directed across or over pavements except through approved pipes or properly constructed troughs. The Contractor shall obtain permission from the Owner of any property involved before constructing water courses or installing discharge pipe or hose for removal of water and provide for disposal of the water without ponding or creating a public nuisance. D. All pumps used for dewatering shall have noise - reduction features and shall be able to run continuously with minimal attendance. If required by the Owner or Engineer, the pumps shall be enclosed on all sides with a plywood enclosure, with padded material suitable for outdoor conditions on the inside of the enclosure, to further reduce pump engine noise to an acceptable level. All applicable ordinances and codes for noise abatement shall be followed. The Contractor shall maintain pumps at all times, as necessary. When pumps are no longer required, the Contractor shall remove the pumps, wellpoints, pipes, and other apparatus from the area. E. It is essential that the discharge of the trench dewatering pumps be conducted to natural drainage channels, drains, or storm sewers. F. Trenches shall be constructed on the upstream side of the traffic way across roadways, driveways, or other traffic ways adjacent to drainage ditches or water to prevent impounding water after the pipe has been laid. The Contractor shall construct and maintain bridges and other temporary structures required to maintain traffic across such unfilled trenches. Backfilling shall be done so that water will not accumulate in unfilled or partially filled trenches. After backfilling is completed, the Contractor shall immediately remove all material deposited in roadway ditches or other water courses crossed by the line of trench and restore the original section, grades, and contours of ditches or water courses. Surface drainage shall not be obstructed longer than necessary. G. Where trenches are constructed in ditches or other water courses, backfill shall be protected from surface erosion. Where the grade of the ditch exceeds 1 %, the Contractor shall install ditch checks. Unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings, ditch checks shall be concrete or as otherwise approved by the Engineer. Ditch checks shall extend not less than 2 feet below the original ditch or 03720 - 042 -02 02305 -17 EARTHWORK FOR UTJLITIES August 2013 water course bottom for the full bottom width and at least 18 inches into the side slopes and shall be at least 12 inches thick. 3.06 BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION A. The Contractor shall not backfill trenches until required tests are performed. B. Trenches improperly backfilled shall be reopened to the depth required for proper compaction, then refilled and compacted as specified, or the condition shall be otherwise corrected as directed. C. The Contractor shall perform the following steps to ensure compaction at the bottom of the trench or excavation before bedding: 1. Remove disturbed native soil material and/or any soils not meeting the requirement of satisfactory soil material as indicated on the Contract Drawings. 2. Compact the bottom of the trench excavation (undisturbed native subsurface soil) to no less than 95% of the Modified Proctor maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D1557, before placement of foundation, bedding, piping, and backfill. D. To backfill below and around pipe to the spring line of the pipe, the Contractor shall do the following: 1. Construct foundation and bedding as indicated on the Contract Drawings before placement of pipe. 2. Install each pipe at proper grade, alignment, and final position. 3. Deposit satisfactory soil material uniformly and simultaneously on each side of pipe in completed course layers to prevent lateral displacement. 4. Compact under pipe haunches and on each side of pipe to the pipe spring line as shown on the Contract Drawings to hold the pipe in the proper position during subsequent pipe backfilling and compaction operations. 5. Construct haunching as indicated on the Contract Drawings. 03720- 042 -02 02305 -18 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES August 2013 • • • • E. To trench backfill above pipe spring line to finished grade, the Contractor shall do the following: 1. Deposit satisfactory soil material around and above pipe in uniform layers as shown on the Contract Drawings. 2. Backfill and compact trenches from the spring line of the pipe to the top of the trench in completed course layers as shown on the Contract Drawings. 3. Use material previously defined in these Specifications as satisfactory soil material. 4. Compact by hand or mechanical tampers. 3.07 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. The Contractor shall remove and legally dispose of waste materials, including excavated material classified as unsatisfactory soil material, trash, and debris from the property at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 03720- 042 -02 02305 -19 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES August 2013 • • SECTION 02370 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall take every reasonable precaution throughout construction to prevent the erosion of soil and the sedimentation of streams, bays, storm systems, or other water impoundments, ground surfaces, or other property as required by federal, state, and local regulations. B. The Contractor shall provide protective covering for disturbed areas upon suspension or completion of land - disturbing activities. Permanent vegetation shall be established at the earliest practicable time. Temporary and permanent erosion - control measures shall be coordinated to ensure economical, effective, and continuous erosion and siltation control throughout the construction and post - construction period. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 02920, Seeding and Sodding. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) 1. FDOT Section 103— Temporary Work Structures. 2. FDOT Section 104 — Prevention, Control, and Abatement of Erosion and Water Pollution. 3. FDOT Section 530 — Riprap. 03720 - 042 -02 02370 -1 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION August 2013 CONTROL 4. FDOT Section 982 — Fertilizer. 5. FDOT Section 985—Geotextile Fabrics. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) 1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS (NOT USED) 1.13 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall prevent damage to properties outside the construction limits from siltation due to construction of the project and assume all responsibilities to the affected property owners for correction of damages which may occur. Erosion - control measures shall be performed conforming to the requirements of and in accordance with plans approved by applicable state and local agencies and as specified by the erosion - control portion shown on the Drawings and as required by these Specifications. The Contractor shall not allow mud and debris to accumulate in the streets or enter drainage ditches, canals, or waterways. Should the Contractor pump water from excavations during construction, appropriate siltation preventative measures shall be taken before the pumped water is discharged into any drainage ditch, canal, or waterway. 1.14 PRACTICES The Contractor shall adhere to the following: A. Avoid dumping soil or sediment into any stream bed, pond, ditch, or watercourse. 03720 - 042 -02 02370 -2 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION August 2013 CONTROL S B. Maintain an undisturbed vegetative buffer where possible between a natural watercourse and trenching and grading operations. • • C. Avoid equipment crossings of streams, creeks, and ditches where practicable. 1.15 EROSION AND SEDIMENT- CONTROL DEVICES AND FEATURES A. The Contractor shall construct all devices (silt fences, retention areas, etc.) for sediment control at the locations required to protect federal, state, and local water bodies and water courses and drainage systems before beginning to excavate the site. All devices shall be properly maintained in place until a structure or paving makes the device unnecessary or until directed to permanently remove the device. B. The Contractor shall use mulch to temporarily stabilize areas subject to excessive erosion and to protect seed beds after planting where required. C. Filter fabric, hay bales, or other approved methods shall be placed and secured over the grates of each existing inlet, grating, or storm pipe opening near the area of excavation to prevent silt and debris from entering the storm systems. D. The Contractor shall use silt fences, hay bales, and floating turbidity barriers as shown on the plans or as directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative to restrict movement of sediment from the site. E. The Contractor shall establish vegetative cover on all unpaved areas disturbed by the work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Open -mesh biodegradable mulching cloth. B. Fertilizer shall be 10 -10 -10 grade or equivalent. C. Lime shall be Dolomitic Agricultural Ground limestone, in accordance with FDOT Section 982. D. Grass shall be in accordance with Section 02920, Seeding and Sodding. E. Silt fence shall consist of non - biodegradable filter fabric (Trevira, Mirafi, etc.), in accordance with FDOT Section 985, wired to galvanized wire mesh fencing and supported by wood or metal posts. 03720 - 042 -02 02370 -3 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION August 2013 CONTROL F. Floating or staked turbidity barriers as specified in FDOT Section 985 and FDOT Standard Index 103. G. Erosion Stone: FDOT Section 530 1. Sand - Cement Riprap 2. Concrete Block 3. Rubble 20 to 300 pounds each H. Filter Fabric for placing under Riprap shall meet the requirements of FDOT Section 985. I. Baled hay or straw in accordance with FDOT Section 104. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CLEARING A. The Contractor shall schedule and perform clearing and grubbing so that subsequent grading operation and erosion - control practices can follow immediately after. Excavation, borrow, and embankment operations will be conducted as a continuous operation. All construction areas not otherwise protected shall be planted with permanent vegetative cover within 30 working days after completing active construction. 3.02 STABILIZING A. The angle for graded slopes and fills shall be no greater than the angle that can be retained by vegetative cover or other adequate erosion - control devices or structures. All disturbed areas outside of embankment left exposed will, within 30 working days of completion of any phase of grading, be planted or otherwise provided with either temporary or permanent ground cover, devices, or structures sufficient to restrain erosion. 3.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Whenever land- disturbing activity is undertaken on a tract, a ground cover sufficient to restrain erosion must be planted or otherwise provided within 30 working days on that portion of the tract upon which further active construction is to be undertaken. B. If any earthwork is to be suspended for any reason for longer than 30 calendar days, the areas involved shall be seeded with vegetative cover or otherwise protected against excessive erosion during the suspension period. Suspension of 03720 - 042 -02 02370 -4 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION August 2013 CONTROL • • • • • work in any area of operation does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to control erosion in that area. 3.04 VEGETATIVE COVER A. Preparation of Seedbed. Areas to be seeded shall be scarified a depth of 4 inches until a firm, well - pulverized, uniform seedbed is prepared. Fertilizer shall be applied during the scarification process in accordance with the following rates: 1. Fertilizer - 10 to 15 pounds per 1,000 square feet. B. Seeding. Disturbed areas along embankments shall be permanently seeded with mix specified in Section 02920, Seeding and Sodding. C. The Contractor shall mulch all areas immediately after seeding. Mulch shall be applied and anchored as specified previously in this Section. 3.05 MAINTENANCE A. The Contractor shall maintain all temporary and permanent erosion - control measures in functioning order. Temporary structures shall be maintained until such time as vegetation is firmly established and grassed areas shall be maintained until completion of the project. Areas which fail to show a suitable stand of grass or which are damaged by erosion shall be immediately repaired. No additional payment will be made to the Contractor for re- establishing erosion - control devices, which may become damaged, destroyed, or otherwise rendered unsuitable for their intended function during the construction of the project. B. The Contractor shall remove all silt, sediment, and debris buildup regularly to maintain functioning storm systems and erosion - control devices. 3.06 REMOVAL OF SEDIMENT CONTROL DEVICES A. Near completion of the project, when directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall dismantle and remove the temporary devices used for sediment control during construction. All erosion - control devices in seeded areas shall be left in place until the grass is established. The Contractor shall seed areas around devices and mulch after removing or filling temporary control devices. B. The Contractor shall clean up all areas at the completion of the project. END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 02370 -5 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION August 2013 CONTROL • • • SECTION 02920 SEEDING AND SODDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section includes requirements for the following areas of work: 1. Fine grading 2. Preparation of areas to receive seeding and sodding 3. Fertilizing of areas to receive seeding and sodding 4. Maintenance 5. Seeding 6. Hydroseeding 7. Sodding of new areas to receive seeding and sodding 8. Mulching 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 02370, Erosion and Sedimentation Control. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. B. Certificates: 1. Fertilizer, seed, hydroseed, and sod shall be accompanied by certificate from vendors certifying these items meet the requirements of these Specifications, stating botanical name, percentage by weight, and percentage of purity. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. 03720 - 042 -02 02920 -1 SEEDING AND SODDING August 2013 A. FS O -F- 241 — Fertilizers, Mixed, Commercial B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Equivalent AASHTO standards may be substituted as approved. C. The Florida Department of Transportation (DOT) Standard Specifications for Road Bridge Construction (Standard Specifications) shall be referred to for both specific and general standards for materials, construction, workmanship, and quality control as specified in this Section with exceptions, as noted herein. Note that any reference in the Standard Specifications to the terms "Department" or "District Materials Engineer" shall be replaced by the term "Owner." 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor shall provide seed mixture in containers showing percentage of seed mix, year of production, net weight, date of packaging, and location of packaging. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. B. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to the site and prevent damage from wetness and weather conditions. C. Deliver grass seed mixture in sealed containers. Seed in damaged packaging is not acceptable. D. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis, and name of the manufacturer. E. No sod that has been cut for more than 72 hours may be used unless specifically authorized. A letter of certification from the grassing Contractor as to when the sod was cut and what type shall be provided to the Engineer upon delivery of the sod to the job site. 03720 - 042 -02 02920 -2 SEEDING AND SODDING August 2013 • • • 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 MAINTENANCE Maintenance shall be as indicated under Part 3, Execution, of this Specification Section. 1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS (NOT USED) 1.13 DEFINITIONS • • A. Weeds: Weeds include but are not limited to Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragqwort, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass. 1.14 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer and herbicide composition. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL A. The Contractor shall provide topsoil from off -site borrow or from project on -site excavation as approved by the Engineer. 2.02 SEED MIXTURE Seed Mixture: A. March 15 to October 15 1. Argentine Bahia B. Remainder of the Year 1. 1/3 Argentine Bahia 2. 1/3 Common Bermuda grass 3. 1/3 Rye 03720 -042 -02 02920 -3 SEEDING AND SODDING August 2013 2.03 SOD A. The Contractor shall provide strongly rooted sod, not less than 2 years old and free of weeds and undesirable native grasses. Provide only sod capable of growth and development when planted (viable, not dormant) and in strips not more than 18 inches wide x 4 feet long. Provide sod composed principally of the following: 1. Argentine Bahia (Palletized Sod) 2. Common Bermuda (Rolled Sod) 2.04 FERTILIZER FOR SOD A. The Contractor shall provide commercial fertilizer of neutral character, with some elements derived from organic sources, containing not less than 8% phosphoric acid, 8% potassium, and percentage of nitrogen required to provide less than 1.0 lb. of actual nitrogen per 1,000 square feet of area. Provide nitrogen in form that will be available to the seeded and sodded area during initial period of growth. The chemical designation shall be 5- 10 -10. B. The Contractor shall ensure that the fertilizer is delivered to the site in labeled bags or containers. 2.05 FERTILIZER FOR SEED A. Fertilizer: FS O -F -241, Type I, Grade A; recommended for grass, with 50% of the elements derived from organic sources, of a proportion necessary to eliminate any deficiencies of topsoil to the following proportions: Seeded Areas - 5% nitrogen, 10% phosphoric acid, 10% soluble potash. 2.06 WATER FOR SEEDING AND SODDING A. Water shall be free of acid, alkali, or organic materials and shall have a pH of 7.0 to 8.5. The Contractor shall provide all water needed for grassing by providing permanent or temporary piping valves and temporary trucks to convey water from the source to the point of use. The Contractor shall provide any meters required and pay for water used if the water is taken from a public water system. Water shall be free of petroleum products, pesticides, and any other deleterious impurities. 03720 - 042 -02 02920 -4 SEEDING AND SODDING August 2013 • • • • • • 2.07 EROSION - CONTROL FABRIC A. The Contractor shall provide 70% agricultural straw with 30% coconut fiber matrix stitches with degradable nettings designed to degrade within 18 months. Erosion - control anchors shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.08 STRAW MULCH A. Straw mulch shall be used on all newly graded and topsoiled areas sloped 3:1 or steeper to protect areas against washouts and erosion. Straw mulch shall consist of threshed straw of oats, wheat, barley, or rye that is free from noxious weeds, mold, or other objectionable material. The straw mulch shall contain at least 50% by weight of material that is 10 inches or longer. Straw shall be in an air -dry condition and suitable for placement with blower equipment. 2.09 TACKIFIER A. Latex acrylic copolymer shall be Soil Sealant with coalescing agent as manufactured by Soil Stabilization Products Company, Inc., Merced, CA or equal and shall be used as straw mulch tackifier. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION OF WORK A. The Contractor shall coordinate all work activities to provide for establishing grass cover at the earliest possible time in the construction schedule to minimize erosion of topsoil. 3.02 SOIL PREPARATION Concerning soil preparation, the Contractor shall do the following: A. Dispose of any existing sod, growth, rocks, or other obstructions which might interfere with tilling, seeding, sodding, or later maintenance operations. Remove stones over 1 -1/2 inches in any dimensions and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter. Remove from work area or site: do not stockpile. B. Till to a depth of not less than 12 inches. Thoroughly loosen and pulverize topsoil. C. Grade areas to be seeded and sodded to a smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly firm texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas which can be planted in the immediate future. 03720 - 042 -02 02920 -5 SEEDING AND SODDING August 2013 D. Moisten prepared areas to be seeded and sodded before planting if the soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow the surface to dry off before seeding and sodding. Do not create a muddy soil condition. E. Restore prepared areas to specified condition if eroded or otherwise disturbed after the fine grading and before planting. F. Spread the planting soil mixture to depth required to meet thickness, grades, and elevations indicated after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if the material is frozen or if the subgrade is frozen. G. Preparing Unchanged Grades: 1. Where seeding and sodding in areas that have not been altered or disturbed by excavating, grading, or stripping operations, prepare soil as follows: a. Till to a depth of not less than 12 inches. b. Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizers. c. Remove high areas and fill in depressions. d. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture, free of lumps, clods, stones, roots, and other extraneous matter. H. Allow for a 3 -inch sod thickness in areas to be added next to paving. I. Before preparing unchanged areas, remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Dispose of such material outside of the Owner's property: do not turn over into soil being prepared for seeding and sodding. J. Place approximately one -half of the total amount of planting soil required. Work into the top of the loosened subgrade to create a transition layer and then place the remainder of the planting soil. 3.03 FERTILIZING FOR SEEDING A. Seeding: The Contractor shall spread fertilizer uniformly at a rate of 10 pounds per 1,000 square feet. B. Apply after smooth raking of topsoil and before roller compaction. 03720- 042 -02 02920 -6 SEEDING AND SODDING August 2013 • • • • • C. Do not apply fertilizer at same time or with same machine as will be used to apply seed. D. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of topsoil. E. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer. 3.04 SEEDING A. Apply seed at the rate designated on the schedule evenly in two intersecting directions. Rake in lightly. B. Do not seed areas in excess of that which can be mulched on the same day. C. Do not sow immediately following rain, when ground is too dry, or during windy periods. D. Roll seeded area with appropriate equipment to achieve seed embedment and soil compaction. E. Apply water with a fine spray immediately after each area has been mulched. Saturate to 4 inches of soil. 3.05 HYDRO- SEEDING A. Apply seeded slurry with a hydraulic seeder at the rate designated on schedule evenly in two intersecting directions. B. Do not hydro -seed area in excess of that which can be mulched on the same day. C. Apply water with a fine spray immediately after each area has been mulched. Saturate to 4 inches of soil. 3.06 SEED PROTECTION A. When seeding is complete, apply straw mulch at a rate of 4,000 lb /acre. Apply tackifier as required. B. Cover seeded slopes where grade is 4 inches per foot or greater with erosion fabric. Roll fabric onto slopes without stretching or pulling. C. Lay fabric smoothly on surface, bury top end of each section in 6- inch -deep excavated topsoil trench. Provide a 2- to 4 -inch overlap of adjacent rolls. Backfill the trench and rake smooth, level with the adjacent soil. 03720 - 042 -02 02920 -7 SEEDING AND SODDING August 2013 D. Secure outside edges and overlaps in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. E. Lightly dress slopes with topsoil to ensure close contact between fabric and soil. F. At the sides of ditches, lay fabric laps in direction of water flow. Lap ends and edges a minimum of 6 inches. 3.07 SODDING NEW AREAS When sodding new areas, the Contractor shall do the following: A. Before laying sod, contact the Engineer to observe soil preparation work. Lay sod within 24 hours of the time of stripping. Do not plant dormant sod or if the ground is frozen. B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod strips; do not overlap. Stagger to offset joints in adjacent courses. Employ installation methods to avoid damage to subgrade or sod. On slopes install the sod with an overlap that allows water to flow over the adjacent strip and not under it. Tamp or roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade. Work sifted soil into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering adjacent grass. C. Anchor sod on slopes greater than 3:1 with wood pegs as required to prevent slippage. D. Water sod thoroughly with a fine spray immediately after planting. 3.08 RECONDITIONING SEEDED AND SODDED AREAS The Contractor shall ensure that seeded and sodded areas are properly reconditioned by doing the following: A. Recondition seeded and sodded areas that are damaged by work operations, including storage of materials or equipment and movement of vehicles. Also recondition seeded and sodded areas where settlement or washouts occur or where minor regrading is required. Recondition other existing seeded and sodded areas where indicated. B. Provide fertilizer, topsoil, seed, or sod amendments as specified for new seeded and sodded areas and as required to provide satisfactory reconditioning. Provide new planting soil as required to fill low spots and meet new finish grades. 03720 - 042 -02 02920 -8 SEEDING AND SODDING August 2013 • • • • B. Provide fertilizer, topsoil, seed, or sod amendments as specified for new seeded and sodded areas and as required to provide satisfactory reconditioning. Provide new planting soil as required to fill low spots and meet new finish grades. C. Cultivate bare and compacted areas thoroughly to provide a good deep planting bed. D. Remove diseased or unsatisfactory seeded and sodded areas; do not bury into soil. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials resulting from operations including oil drippings, stone, gravel, and other construction materials. Replace with new topsoil. E. Where substantial seeding and sodding remains (but is thin), mow, rake, aerate if compacted, fill low spots, remove humps and cultivate soil, fertilize, and seed. Remove weeds before seeding or, if extensive, apply selective chemical weed killers as required. Apply a seedbed mulch, if required, to maintain moist condition. F. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new grass is established. 3.09 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall erect barricades, warning signs, and fencing to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain barricade fencing and warning signs throughout the maintenance period until project is substantially completed. 3.10 MAINTENANCE To maintain the seeded and sodded area, the Contractor shall do the following: A. Mow sod to a height of 2 inches as soon as there is enough top growth to cut with a mower. Remove no more than 40% of grass leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowing. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. B. Maintain grass growth by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, and other operations such as rolling, re- grading, replanting as required to establish a smooth, acceptable seeding and sodding, free from eroded or bare areas. C. Remove weeds by pulling or chemical treatment. D. Perform maintenance until the date of final completion of project. 03720 - 042 -02 02920 -9 SEEDING AND SODDING August 2013 G. Watering: Provide and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and watering equipment as required to convey water from water sources and to keep seeded and sodded areas uniformly moist as required for proper growth. Do not apply more than 1 inch (25 mm) of water per week to sustain grass growth. H. Lay out temporary watering system and arrange watering schedule to avoid walking over muddy areas. Use equipment and water to prevent puddling and water erosion and displacing seed or mulch (if any). I. Apply water in sufficient quantities and as often as seasonal conditions require to keep the grassed areas moist. J. Provide supplemental water and irrigation to sod areas when the rainfall is not adequate to maintain soil moisture necessary for growth of the grass. The Contractor is responsible for determining the quantities of water required and when to irrigate. This obligation shall remain in full force and effect until final acceptance of the work by the Owner and shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. The Owner, at its discretion, may relieve the Contractor of this obligation at such time as the Owner is able to provide irrigation if available. This action, however, does not relieve the Contractor of the provisions and guarantees set forth in the Contract Documents. 3.11 ACCEPTANCE OF SEEDED OR SODDED AREAS A. When seeding or sodding work, including maintenance, is substantially complete, the Engineer and the Owner will, upon request, observe to determine satisfactory growth and acceptability: 1. The term "Satisfactory Growth" as used in this Section is defined as even plant growth in healthy condition without bare spots larger than 1 square foot in seeded areas and without bare spots in sodded areas. Bare spots in sodded areas shall be resodded. The Contractor shall maintain all grassed and sodded areas until satisfactory growth has been demonstrated at project final completion. If the subsequent stand of grass is found contaminated with weeds or other obnoxious or undesirable growth, the Contractor shall eliminate such undesirable growth at the Contractor's own expense. B. The Contractor shall re -plant rejected work and continue specified maintenance until the work is accepted by the Engineer and the Owner and found to be acceptable. 03720 - 042 -02 02920 -10 SEEDING AND SODDING August 2013 • • • • C. Sodded areas will be acceptable provided requirements, including maintenance, have been complied with and a healthy, well- rooted, even - colored, viable seeded or sodded area is established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities. 3.12 CLEANUP A. The Contractor shall promptly remove soil and debris created by seeding and sodding work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before they leave the site to avoid tracking soil onto surfacing of roads, walks, or other paved areas. END OF SECTION 03720- 042 -02 02920 -11 SEEDING AND SODDING August 2013 • • • DIVISION 3. CONCRETE • • • SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to design, install, and remove formwork for cast -in -place concrete as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. B. Secure to forms as required or set for embedment as required all miscellaneous metal items, sleeves, reglets, anchor bolts, inserts, and other items furnished under other Sections and required to be cast into concrete or approved in advance by the Engineer. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement. B. Section 03250, Concrete Joints and Joint Accessories. C. Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. D. Section 03600, Grout. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: 1. Form release agent 2. Form ties B. Samples 1. Demonstrate to the Engineer on a designated area of the concrete substructure exterior surface that the form release agent will not adversely affect concrete surfaces to be painted, coated, or otherwise finished and will not affect the forming materials. 2. Certify that the form release agent is suitable for use in contact with potable water after 30 days (non -toxic and free of taste and odor). 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 03720- 042 -02 03100 -1 CONCRETE FORMWORK August 2013 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1. ACI 301— Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 318 — Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. 3. ACI 347 —Guide to Formwork for Concrete. B. American Plywood Association (APA) 1. Material grades and designations as specified C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED) 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED) 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 WEATHER CONSTRAINTS (NOT USED) 1.12 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: Architectural Concrete is wall, slab, beam, or column concrete which will have surfaces exposed to view in the finished work. It includes similar exposed surfaces in water - containment structures from the top of walls to 2 feet below the normal water surface in open tanks and basins. B. Formwork shall be designed and erected in accordance with the requirements of ACI 301 and ACI 318 and as recommended in ACI 347 and shall comply with all applicable regulations and codes. The design shall consider any special requirements due to the use of plasticized and/or retarded set concrete. 03720- 042 -02 03100 -2 CONCRETE FORMWORK August 2013 • • • • • • PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The use of a manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is to establish the standard of quality and general configurations desired. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Forms for cast -in -place concrete shall be made of wood, metal, or other approved material. Construct wood forms of sound lumber or plywood of suitable dimensions and free from knotholes and loose knots. Where used for exposed surfaces, dress and match boards. Sand plywood smooth and fit adjacent panels with tight joints. Metal forms may be used when approved by the Engineer and shall be of an appropriate type for the class of work involved. All forms shall be designed and constructed to provide a flat, uniform concrete surface requiring minimal finishing or repairs. B. Wall Forms 1. Forms for all exposed exterior and interior concrete walls shall be "Plyform" exterior -grade plywood panels manufactured in compliance with the APA and bearing the trademark of that group or an equal acceptable to the Engineer. Provide B grade or better veneer on all faces to be placed against concrete during forming. The class of material and grades of interior plies shall be of sufficient strength and stiffness to provide a flat, uniform concrete surface requiring minimal finishing and grinding. 2. All joints or gaps in forms shall be taped, gasketed, plugged, and/or caulked with an approved material so that the joint will remain watertight and will withstand placing pressures without bulging or creating surface patterns. C. Rustication strips shall be at the location and shall conform to the details shown on the Drawings. Moldings for chamfers and rustications shall be milled and planed smooth. Rustications and corner strips shall be of a nonabsorbent material, compatible with the form surface, and fully sealed on all sides to prohibit the loss of paste or water between the two surfaces. 03720 - 042 -02 03100 -3 CONCRETE FORMWORK August 2013 D. Column Forms 1. Rectangular columns shall be formed as specified for wall forms. All corners shall have a 3/4 inch chamfer unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. E. Form Release Agent 1. Coat all forming surfaces in contact with concrete using an effective, non- staining, non - residual, water - based, bond - breaking form coating unless otherwise noted. Form release agents used in potable water containment structures shall be suitable for use in contact with potable water and shall be non toxic and free of taste or odor. F. Form Ties 1. Form ties encased in concrete other than those specified in the following paragraphs shall be designed so that after removal of the projecting part no metal shall remain within 1 1/2 inch of the face of the concrete. The part of the tie to be removed shall be at least 1/2 inch diameter or be provided with a wood or metal cone at least 1/2 inch diameter and 1 1/2 inch long. Form ties in concrete exposed to view shall be the cone washer type. 2. Form ties for exposed exterior and interior walls shall be as specified in the preceding paragraph except that the cones shall be of approved wood or plastic. 3. Flat bar ties for panel forms, if used, shall have plastic or rubber inserts having a minimum depth of 1 1/2 inches and sufficient dimensions to permit proper patching of the tie hole. 4. Ties for liquid containment structures shall have an integral waterstop that is tightly welded to the tie. 5. Common wire shall not be used for form ties. 6. Alternate form ties consisting of tapered through bolts at least 1 -in diameter at the smallest end or through bolts that use a removable tapered sleeve of the same minimum size may be used at the Contractor's option. Obtain the Engineer's acceptance of the system and spacing of ties before ordering or purchase forming. Clean, fill, and seal the form tie hole with non - shrink cement grout. The Contractor shall be responsible for watertightness of the form ties and any repairs needed. 03720 - 042 -02 03100 -4 CONCRETE FORMWORK August 2013 • • • PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Forms shall be used for all cast -in -place concrete, including sides of footings. Forms shall be constructed and placed so that the resulting concrete will be of the shape, lines, dimensions, and appearance indicated on the Drawings. B. Forms for walls shall have removable panels at the bottom for cleaning, inspection, and joint surface preparation. Forms for walls of considerable height shall have closable intermediate inspection ports. Tremies and hoppers for placing concrete shall be used to allow concrete inspection, prevent segregation, and prevent the accumulation of hardened concrete on the forms above the fresh concrete. C. Molding, bevels, or other types of chamfer strips shall be placed to produce blockouts, rustications, or chamfers as shown on the Drawings or as specified in this Section. Chamfer strips shall be provided at horizontal and vertical projecting corners to produce a 3/4 -inch chamfer. Rectangular or trapezoidal moldings shall be placed in locations requiring sealants where specified or shown on the Drawings. Sizes of moldings shall conform to the sealant manufacturer's recommendations. D. Forms shall be sufficiently rigid to withstand construction loads and vibration and to prevent displacement or sagging between supports. Construct forms so that the concrete will not be damaged by their removal. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the adequacy of the forming system. E. Before form material is reused, all surfaces to be in contact with concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned, all damaged places repaired, all projecting nails withdrawn, and all protrusions smoothed. Reuse of wooden forms for other than rough finish will be permitted only if a "like new" condition of the form is maintained. 3.02 FORM TOLERANCES A. Forms shall be surfaced, designed, and constructed in accordance with the recommendations of ACI 347 and shall meet the following additional requirements for the specified finishes: 1. Formed Surface Exposed to View: Edges of all form panels in contact with concrete shall be flush within 1/16 inch and forms for plane surfaces shall be such that the concrete will be planed within 3/16 inch in 4 feet. Forms shall be tight to prevent the passage of mortar, water, and grout. The maximum deviation of the finish wall surface at any point shall not 03720 - 042 -02 03100 -5 CONCRETE FORMWORK August 2013 exceed 1/4 inch from the intended surface as shown on the Drawings. Form panels shall be arranged symmetrically and in an orderly manner to minimize the number of seams. 2. Formed surfaces not exposed to view or buried shall meet requirements of Class "C" Surface in ACI 347. 3. Formed rough surfaces including mass concrete, pipe encasement, electrical duct encasement, and other similar installations shall have no minimum requirements for surface smoothness and surface deflections. The overall dimensions of the concrete shall be plus or minus 1 inch. 3.03 FORM PREPARATION A. Wood forms in contact with the concrete shall be coated with an effective release agent before the forms are installed. B. Steel forms shall be thoroughly cleaned and mill scale and other ferrous deposits shall be sandblasted or otherwise removed from the contact surface for all forms, except those used for surfaces receiving a rough finish. All forms shall have the contact surfaces coated with a release agent. 3.04 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage resulting from removing the forms. Forms and shoring for structural slabs or beams shall remain in place in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 347. Form removal shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 03300 and a curing compound applied. 3.05 INSPECTION A. The Engineer on site shall be notified when the forms are complete and ready for inspection at least 6 hours before the proposed concrete placement. B. Failure of the forms to comply with the requirements specified in this Section or to produce concrete complying with requirements of this Section shall be grounds for rejection of that portion of the concrete work. Rejected work shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. Such repair or replacement shall be subject to the requirements of this Section and approval of the Engineer. END OF SECTION 03720- 042 -02 03100 -6 CONCRETE FORMWORK August 2013 • SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and install all concrete reinforcement complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. B. Furnish only all deformed steel reinforcement required to be entirely built into concrete masonry unit construction. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork. B. Section 03250, Concrete Joints and Joint Accessories. C. Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. D. Section 03600, Grout. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: 1. Reinforcing steel. Placement drawings shall conform to the recommendations of ACI 315. All reinforcement in a concrete placement shall be included on a single placement drawing or cross referenced to the pertinent main placement drawing. The main drawing shall include the additional reinforcement (around openings, at corners, etc.) shown on the standard detail sheets. Bars to have special coatings and/or to be of special steel or special yield strength are to be clearly identified. 2. Bar bending details. The bars shall be referenced to the same identification marks shown on the placement drawings. 3. Schedule of all placements to contain synthetic reinforcing fibers. The amount of fibers per cubic yard to be used for each of the placements shall be noted on the schedule. The name of the manufacturer of the fibers and the product data shall be included with the submittal. 03720 - 042 -02 03200 -1 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT August 2013 B. Submit Test Reports, in accordance with Section 01330, of each of the following items: 1. Certified copy of mill test on each steel proposed for use showing the physical properties of the steel and the chemical analysis. 2. Welder's certification. The certification shall be in accordance with AWS D1.4 when welding of reinforcement is required. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 03720- 042 -02 August 2013 1. ASTM A82— Standard Specification Reinforcement. 2. ASTM A184— Standard Specification Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. 3. ASTM A185— Standard Specification Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete. 4. ASTM A496— Standard Specification Concrete Reinforcement. 5. ASTM A497— Standard Specification Reinforcement, Deformed, for Concret ASTM A615— Standard Specification Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement 7. ASTM A704— Standard Specification Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. 8. ASTM A706— Standard Specification Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement 9. ASTM A767— Standard Specification Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 10. ASTM A775— Standard Specification Reinforcing Bars 11. ASTM A884— Standard Specification Welded Wire Reinforcement. 12. ASTM A934— Standard Specification Steel Reinforcing Bars. for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete for Welded Deformed Steel Bar for Steel Welded Wire for Steel Wire, Deformed, for for Steel Welded Wire te. for Deformed and Plain Carbon - for Welded Steel Plain Bar or Rod for Low -Alloy Steel Deformed and for Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) Steel for Epoxy- Coated Steel for Epoxy- Coated Steel Wire and for Epoxy- Coated Prefabricated 03200 -2 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT • • • • • • 13. ASTM A996— Standard Specification for Rail -Steel and Axle -Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1. ACI 301— Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 315— Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. 3. ACI 318— Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary. 4. ACI SP 66 —ACI Detailing Manual. C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) 1. Manual of Standard Practice. D. American Welding Society (AWS) 1. AWS D1.4— Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide services of a manufacturer's representative, with at least 2 years experience in the use of the reinforcing fibers for a preconstruction meeting and assistance during the first placement of the material. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. B. Reinforcing steel shall be substantially free from mill scale, rust, dirt, grease, or other foreign matter. C. Reinforcing steel shall be shipped and stored with bars of the same size and shape fastened in bundles with durable tags, marked in a legible manner with waterproof markings showing the same "mark" designations as those shown on the submitted Placing Drawings. 03720 - 042 -02 03200 -3 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT August 2013 D. Reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground and kept free from dirt, oil, or other injurious contaminants. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 WEATHER CONSTRAINTS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be new, of domestic manufacture, and shall comply with the following material specifications. B. Deformed Concrete Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 deformed bars. C. Concrete Reinforcing Bars required on the Drawings to be Welded: ASTM A706. D. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A185. Provide in flat sheets. E. Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A497. F. Welded Plain Bar Mats: ASTM A704 and ASTM A615 Grade 60 plain bars. G. Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A184 and ASTM A615 Grade 60 deformed bars. H. The following alternate materials are allowed: 1. ASTM A615 Grade 60 may be used for ASTM A706 provided the following requirements are satisfied: a. The actual yield strength of the reinforcing steel based on mill tests shall not exceed the specified yield strength by more than 18,000 psi. Retests shall not exceed this value by more than an additional 3,000 psi. b. The ratio of the actual ultimate tensile strength to the actual tensile yield strength of the reinforcement shall not be less than 1.25. c. The carbon equivalency (CE) of bars shall be 0.55 or less. 03720 - 042 -02 03200 -4 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT August 2013 • • • I. Reinforcing Steel Accessories 1. Plastic Protected Bar Supports: CRSI Bar Support Specifications, Class 1 Maximum Protection. 2. Stainless Steel Protected Bar Supports: CRSI Bar Support Specifications, Class 2 Moderate Protection. 3. Precast Concrete Block Bar Supports: CRSI Bar Support Specifications, Precast Blocks. Blocks shall have equal or greater strength than the surrounding concrete. 4. Steel Protected Bar Supports: #4 Steel Chairs with plastic or rubber tips. J. Tie Wire 1. Tie Wires for Reinforcement shall be 16 -gauge or heavier, black annealed wire, or stranded wire. K. Mechanical reinforcing steel butt splices shall be positive connecting taper threaded -type employing a hexagonal coupler such as Lenton rebar splices as manufactured by Erico Products Inc., Solon, OH or equal. They shall meet all ACI 318 Building Code requirements. Bar ends must be taper threaded with coupler manufacturer's bar threader to ensure proper taper and thread engagement. Bar couplers,shall be torqued to the manufacturer's recommended value. 1. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, mechanical tension splices shall be designed to produce a splice strength in tension or compression of not less than 125% of the ASTM - specified minimum yield strength of the rebar. 2. Compression -type mechanical splices shall provide concentric bearing from one bar to the other bar and shall be capable of developing the ultimate strength of the rebar in compression. L. Fiber Reinforcement 1. Synthetic reinforcing fiber for concrete shall be 100% polypropylene collated, fibrillated fibers as manufactured by Fibermesh Company of Synthetic Industries Inc., Chattanooga, TN Fibermesh or equal. Fiber length and quantity for the concrete mix shall be in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Engineer. 03720 - 042 -02 03200 -5 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT August 2013 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabrication of reinforcement shall be in compliance with the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. B. Bars shall be cold bent. Bars shall not be straightened or rebent. C. Bars shall be bent around a revolving collar having a diameter of not less than that recommended by the ACI 318. D. Bar ends that are to be butt spliced, placed through limited diameter holes in metal, or threaded shall have the applicable end(s) saw cut. Such ends shall terminate in flat surfaces within 11/4° of a right angle to the axis of the bar. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Surface condition, bending, spacing, and tolerances of placement of reinforcement shall comply with the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for providing an adequate number of bars and maintaining the spacing and clearances shown on the Drawings. B. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, the minimum concrete cover of reinforcement shall be as follows: 1. Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth: 3 inches 2. Concrete exposed to soil, water, sewage, sludge and/or weather: 2 inches (including bottom cover of slabs over water or sewage) 3. Concrete not exposed to soil, water, sewage, sludge, and/or weather: a. Slabs (top and bottom cover), walls, joists, shells, and folded plate members: 1 inch. b. Beams and columns (principal reinforcement, ties, spirals, and stirrups): 11/4-inches. C. Reinforcement which will be exposed for a considerable length of time after being placed shall be coated with a heavy coat of neat cement slurry. D. No reinforcing steel bars shall be welded either during fabrication or erection unless specifically shown on the Drawings or specified in this Section or unless 03720 - 042 -02 03200 -6 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT August 2013 • • • • prior written approval has been obtained from the Engineer. All bars that have been welded, including tack welds, without such approval shall be immediately removed from the work. When welding of reinforcement is approved or called for, it shall comply with AWS D1.4. E. Reinforcing steel interfering with the location of other reinforcing steel, conduits, or embedded items may be moved within the specified tolerances or one bar diameter, whichever is greater. Greater displacement of bars to avoid interference shall only be made with the approval of the Engineer. Do not cut reinforcement to install inserts, conduits, mechanical openings, or other items without the prior approval of the Engineer. F. Securely support and tie reinforcing steel to prevent movement during concrete placement. Secure dowels in place before placing concrete. G. Reinforcing steel bars shall not be field bent except where shown on the Drawings or specifically authorized in writing by the Engineer. If authorized, bars shall be cold bent around the standard diameter spool specified in the CRSI. Do not heat bars. Closely inspect the reinforcing steel for breaks. If the reinforcing steel is damaged, replace, Cadweld, or otherwise repair as directed by the Engineer. Do not bend reinforcement after it is embedded in concrete unless specifically shown otherwise on the Drawings. 3.02 REINFORCEMENT AROUND OPENINGS A. Unless specific additional reinforcement around openings is shown on the Drawings, provide additional reinforcing steel on each side of the opening equivalent to one half of the cross sectional area of the reinforcing steel interrupted by an opening. The bars shall have sufficient length to develop bond at each end beyond the opening or penetration. 3.03 SPLICING OF REINFORCEMENT A. Splices designated as compression splices on the Drawings, unless otherwise noted, shall be 30 bar diameters but not less than 12 inches. The lap splice length for column vertical bars shall be based on the bar size in the column above. B. Tension lap splices shall be provided at all laps in compliance with ACI 318. Splices in adjacent bars shall be staggered. Class A splices may be used when 50% or less of the bars are spliced within the required lap length. Class B splices shall be used at all other locations. C. Splicing of reinforcing steel in concrete elements noted to be "tension members" on the Drawings shall be avoided whenever possible. However, if required for 03720 - 042 -02 03200 -7 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT August 2013 constructability, splices in the reinforcement subject to direct tension shall be welded to develop, in tension, at least 125% of the specified yield strength of the bar. Splices in adjacent bars shall be offset the distance of a Class B splice. D. Install wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Wire fabric from rolls shall be rolled flat and firmly held in place. Splices in welded -wire fabric shall be lapped in accordance with the requirements of ACI 318 but not less than 12 inches. The spliced fabrics shall be tied together with wire ties spaced not more than 24 inches on center and laced with wire of the same diameter as the welded wire fabric. Do not position laps midway between supporting beams or directly over beams of continuous structures. Offset splices in adjacent widths to prevent continuous splices. E. Mechanical reinforcing steel splicers shall be used only where shown on the Drawings. Splices in adjacent bars shall be offset by at least 30 bar diameters. Mechanical reinforcing splices are only to be used for special splice and dowel conditions approved by the Engineer. 3.04 ACCESSORIES A. Determine, provide, and install accessories such as chairs, chair bars, and the like in sufficient quantities and strength to adequately support the reinforcement and prevent its displacement during the erection of the reinforcement and the placement of concrete. B. Use precast concrete blocks where the reinforcing steel is to be supported over soil. C. Stainless steel bar supports or steel chairs with stainless steel tips shall be used where the chairs are set on forms for a concrete surface that will be exposed to weather, high humidity, or liquid (including bottom of slabs over liquid containing areas). Use of galvanized or plastic- tipped metal chairs is permissible in all other locations unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or specified in this Section. D. Alternate methods of supporting top steel in slabs, such as steel channels supported on the bottom steel or vertical reinforcing steel fastened to the bottom and top mats, may be used if approved by the Engineer. 3.05 INSPECTION A. In no case shall any reinforcing steel be covered with concrete until the installation of the reinforcement, including the size, spacing, and position of the reinforcement has been observed by the Engineer and the Engineer's release to 03720- 042 -02 03200 -8 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT August 2013 • • • • proceed with the concreting has been obtained. The Engineer shall be given ample prior notice of the readiness of placed reinforcement for observation. The forms shall be kept open until the Engineer has finished his/her observations of the reinforcing steel. END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 03200 -9 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT August 2013 • SECTION 03250 CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and install accessories for concrete joints as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork. B. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement. C. Section 03300, Cast -In -Place Concrete. D. Section 03360, Concrete Finishes. E. Section 03600, Grout. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: 1. Standard Waterstops: Product data, including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, splicing methods, and conformity to ASTM standards. 2. Special Waterstops: Product data, including catalogue cut, technical data, location of use, storage requirements, splicing methods, installation instructions, and conformity to ASTM standards. 3. Premolded joint fillers: Product data, including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, installation requirements, location of use, and conformity to ASTM standards. 4. Bond breaker: Product data, including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, installation requirements, location of use, and conformity to ASTM standards. 5. Expansion joint dowels: Product data on the complete assembly, including dowels, coatings, lubricants, spacers, sleeves, expansion caps, installation requirements, and conformity to ASTM standards. 03720 - 042 -02 03250 -1 CONCRETE JOINTS AND August 2013 JOINT ACCESSORIES 6. Compressible joint filler: Product data, including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, installation requirements, location of use, and conformity to ASTM standards. 7. Bonding agents: Product data, including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, product life, application requirements, and conformity to ASTM standards. B. Certifications 1. Certification that all materials used within the joint system are compatible with each other. 2. Certification that materials used in the construction of joints are suitable for use in contact with potable water 30 days after installation. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A675— Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot - Wrought, Special Quality, Mechanical Properties. 2. ASTM C881— Standard Specification for Epoxy- Resin -Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. 3. ASTM C1059— Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete. 4. ASTM D1751— Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types): 5. ASTM D1752— Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. B. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (CRD). 1. CRD C572— Specification for Polyvinylchloride Waterstop. 03720 - 042 -02 03250 -2 CONCRETE JOINTS AND August 2013 JOINT ACCESSORIES • • C. Federal Specifications 1. FS SS- S -210A— Sealing Compound, Preformed Plastic, for Expansion Joints and Pipe Joints. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 WEATHER CONSTRAINTS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The use of the manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is to establish the standard of quality and general configuration desired. B. All materials used together in a given joint (bond breakers, backer rods, joint fillers, sealants, etc) shall be compatible with one another. Coordinate selection of suppliers and products to ensure compatibility. Under no circumstances shall asphaltic bond breakers or joint fillers be used in joints receiving sealant. C. All chemical sealant type waterstops shall be products specifically manufactured for the purpose for which they will be used and the products shall have been successfully used on similar structures for more than 5 years. 03720 - 042 -02 03250 -3 CONCRETE JOINTS AND August 2013 JOINT ACCESSORIES 2.02 MATERIALS A. Special Waterstops 1. Provide waterstops as called for on the Drawings. Waterstops shall be attached to existing concrete using adhesive and anchors per manufacturer's recommendations. B. Premolded Joint Filler 1. Premolded joint filler structures. Self - expanding cork, premolded joint filler shall conform to ASTM D1752, Type III. The thickness shall be 3/4 inch unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. 2. Premolded joint filler sidewalk and roadway concrete pavements or where fiber joint filler is specifically noted on the Drawings. The joint filler shall be asphalt impregnated fiber board conforming to ASTM D1751. Thickness shall be 3/4 inch unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. C. Bond Breaker 1. Bond breaker tape shall be an adhesive- backed glazed butyl or polyethylene tape which will satisfactorily adhere to the premolded joint filler or concrete surface as required. The tape shall be the same width as the joint. 2. Except where tape is specifically called for on the Drawings, bond breaker for concrete shall be either bond breaker tape or a nonstaining type bond prevention coating such as Williams Tilt -up Compound by Williams Distributors Inc.; Silcoseal 77, by SCA Construction Supply Division, Superior Concrete Accessories or equal. D. Bonding Agent 1. Epoxy bonding agent shall be a two- component, solvent -free, moisture - insensitive, epoxy -resin material conforming to ASTM C881, Type II. The bonding agent shall be Sikadur 32 Hi Mod by Sika Corporation of Lyndhurst, N.J.; Concressive Liquid (LPL) by Master Builders of Cleveland, OH, or equal. Acrylic may be used if approved by the Engineer. 03720 - 042 -02 03250 -4 CONCRETE JOINTS AND August 2013 JOINT ACCESSORIES • • E. Compressible Joint Filler 1. The joint filler shall be a non - extruded watertight strip material use to fill expansion joints between structures. The material shall be capable of being compressed at least 40% for 70 hours at 68 °F and subsequently recovering at least 20% of its original thickness in the first 1/2 hour after unloading. Compressible joint filler shall be Evasote 380 E.S.P, by E Poxy Industries, Inc., Ravena, NY, Sikaflex la by Sika, or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install waterstops for all joints where indicated on the Drawings. Waterstops shall be continuous around all corners and intersections so that a continuous seal is provided. Provide factory-made waterstop fabrications for all changes in direction, intersections, and transitions leaving only straight butt joints splices for the field. B. Horizontal waterstops in slabs shall be clamped in position by the bulkhead (unless previously set in concrete). C. Waterstops shall be installed so that half of the width will be embedded on each side of the joint. Care shall be exercised to ensure that the waterstop is completely embedded in void -free concrete. D. Waterstops shall be terminated 3 inches below the exposed top of walls. Expansion joint waterstop center bulbs shall be plugged with foam rubber, 1 inch deep, at point of termination. E. Special Waterstops 1. Install special waterstops at joints where specifically noted on the Drawings. Waterstops shall be continuous around all corners and intersections so that a continuous seal is provided. 2. Each piece of the waterstop shall be of maximum practicable length to provide a minimum number of connections or splices. Connections and splices shall conform to the manufacturer's recommendations and as specified in this Section. 3. Waterstops shall be terminated 3 inches below the exposed top of walls. 03720 - 042 -02 03250 -5 CONCRETE JOINTS AND August 2013 JOINT ACCESSORIES F. Construction Joints 1. Make construction joints only at locations shown on the Drawings or as approved by the Engineer. Any additional or relocation of construction joints proposed by the Contractor must be submitted to the Engineer for written approval. 2. Additional or relocated joints should be located where they least impair the strength of the member. In general, locate joints within the middle third of spans of slabs, beams, and girders. However, if a beam intersects a girder at the joint, offset the joint a distance equal to twice the width of the member being connected. Locate joints in walls and columns at the underside of floors, slabs, beams, or girders and at tops of footings or floor slabs. Do not locate joints between beams, girders, column capitals, or drop panels and the slabs above them. Do not locate joints between brackets or haunches and walls or columns supporting them. 3. All joints shall be perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue reinforcing steel through the joint as indicated on the Drawings. When joints in beams are allowed, provide a shear key and inclined dowels as approved by the Engineer. 4. Provide sealant grooves for joint sealant where indicated on the Drawings. 5. At all construction joints and at concrete joints designated on the Drawings to be "roughened," uniformly roughen the surface of the concrete to a full amplitude (distance between high and low points or side to side) of approximately 1/4 -inch to expose a fresh face. Thoroughly clean joint surfaces of loose or weakened materials by waterblasting or sandblasting and prepare for bonding. 6. Provide waterstops in all wall and slab construction joints in liquid containment structures and at other locations shown on the Drawings. 7. Keyways shall not be used in construction joints unless specifically shown on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer. G. Contraction Joints 1. Provide sealant grooves, sealants, and waterstops at contraction joints in slabs on grade or walls as detailed. Provide waterstops at all wall and slab contraction joints in water containment structures and at other locations shown on the Drawings. 03720 - 042 -02 03250 -6 CONCRETE JOINTS AND August 2013 JOINT ACCESSORIES • • • 2. Contraction joints may be sawed if specifically approved by the Engineer. If contraction joint grooves are sawed, properly time the saw cutting with the time of the concrete set. Start cutting as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent aggregates from being dislodged by the saw. Complete cutting before shrinkage stresses have developed sufficiently to induce cracking. No reinforcing shall be cut during sawcutting. 3. Extend every other bar of reinforcing steel through contraction joints or as indicated on the Drawings. Where specifically noted on the Drawings, coat the concrete surface with a bond breaker before placing new concrete against it. Avoid coating reinforcement or waterstops with bond breaker at these locations. END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 03250 -7 CONCRETE JOINTS AND August 2013 JOINT ACCESSORIES • • • SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor and materials required and install cast -in- place concrete complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork. B. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement. C. Section 03250, Concrete Joints and Joint Accessories. D. Section 03360, Concrete Finishes. E. Section 03600, Grout. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: 1. Sources of cement, pozzolan, and aggregates. 2. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all concrete components and admixtures. 3. Air entraining admixture. Product data, including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, product life, recommended dosage, temperature considerations, and conformity to ASTM standards. 4. Water- reducing admixture. Product data, including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, product life, recommended dosage, temperature considerations, and conformity to ASTM standards. 5. High -range water - reducing admixture (plasticizer). Product data, including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, product life, recommended dosage, temperature considerations, retarding effect, slump range, and conformity to ASTM standards. Identify proposed locations of use. 03720- 042 -02 03300 -1 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE August 2013 6. Concrete mix for each formulation of concrete proposed for use, including constituent quantities per cubic yard, water - cementitious materials ratio, concrete slump, type, and manufacturer of cement. Provide either a. or b. below for each mix proposed: a. Standard deviation data for each proposed concrete mix based on statistical records. b. The curve of water - cementitious materials ratio versus concrete cylinder strength for each formulation of concrete proposed based on laboratory tests. The cylinder strength shall be the average of the 28 -day cylinder strength test results for each mix. Provide results of 7- and 14 -day tests if available. 7. Sheet curing material. Product data, including catalogue cut, technical data, and conformity to ASTM standard. 8. Liquid curing compound. Product data, including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, product life, application rate, and conformity to ASTM standards. Identify proposed locations of use. B. Samples 1. Fine and coarse aggregates if requested by the Engineer. C. Test Reports 1. Fine aggregates —sieve analysis, physical properties, and deleterious substance. 2. Coarse aggregates —sieve analysis, physical properties, and deleterious substances. 3. Cements — chemical analysis and physical properties for each type. 4. Pozzolans— chemical analysis and physical properties. 5. Proposed concrete mixes — compressive strength, slump, and air content. D. Certifications 1. Certify that admixtures used in the same concrete mix are compatible with each other and with the aggregates. 03720 - 042 -02 03300 -2 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE August 2013 • • 2. Certify that admixtures are suitable for use in contact with potable water after 30 days of concrete curing. 3. Certify that the curing compound is suitable for use in contact with potable water after 30 days (non toxic and free of taste or odor). 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM C31— Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 2. ASTM C33— Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 3. ASTM C39— Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 4. ASTM C42— Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. 5. ASTM C94— Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete. 6. ASTM C143— Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic- Cement Concrete. 7. ASTM C150—Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 8. ASTM C171— Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. 9. ASTM C173—Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. 10. ASTM C231— Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 11. ASTM C260— Standard Specification for Air - Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 12. ASTM C309— Standard Specification for Liquid- Membrane Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 13. ASTM C494— Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 14. ASTM C618— Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. 15. ASTM C1017—Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete. 03720 - 042 -02 03300 -3 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE August 2013 B. American Concrete Institute (ACI). 1. ACI 304R —Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. 2. ACI 305R —Hot Weather Concreting. 3. ACI 306.1— Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. 4. ACI 318— Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 5. ACI 350R— Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reinforced concrete shall comply with ACI 318; the recommendations of ACI 350R; and other stated requirements, codes, and standards. The most stringent requirement of the codes, standards, and this Section shall apply when conflicts exist. B. Only one source of cement and aggregates shall be used on any one structure. Concrete shall be uniform in color and appearance. C. Thirty days before placing concrete, the Contractor shall discuss with the Engineer the sources of individual materials and batched concrete proposed for use. Discuss placement methods, waterstops, and curing. Propose methods of hot and cold weather concreting as required. Before placing any concrete containing a high -range water - reducing admixture (plasticizer), the Contractor, accompanied by the plasticizer manufacturer, shall discuss with the Engineer the properties and techniques of batching and placing plasticized concrete. D. If, during the progress of the work, it is impossible to obtain concrete of the required workability and strength with the materials being furnished, the Engineer may order such changes in proportions or materials, or both, as may be necessary to obtain the desired properties. All changes so ordered shall be made at the Contractor's expense. E. If, during the progress of the work, the materials from the sources originally accepted change in characteristics, the Contractor shall, at his/her expense, make new acceptance tests of aggregates and establish new design mixes. F. The Contractor shall furnish testing of the following materials to verify conformity with this Specification Section and the stated ASTM Standards: 1. Fine aggregates for conformity with ASTM C33 —sieve analysis, physical properties, and deleterious substances. 03720 - 042 -02 03300 -4 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE August 2013 • • • . 2. Coarse aggregates for conformity with ASTM C33 —sieve analysis, physical properties, and deleterious substances. • • 3. Cements for conformity with ASTM C150— chemical analysis and physical properties. 4. Pozzolans for conformity with ASTM C618 —chemical analysis and physical properties. 5. Proposed concrete mix designs — compressive strength, slump, and air content. G. A firm providing field testing and inspection services will be approved by the Owner. The cost of such work, except as specifically stated otherwise, shall be paid by the Contractor and reimbursed by the Owner under the Concrete Testing Allowance The following items shall be tested by the Owner to verify conformity with this Specification Section: 1. Concrete placements — compressive strength (cylinders), compressive strength (cores), slump, and air content. 2. Other materials or products that may come under question. H. All materials incorporated in the work shall conform to accepted samples. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section: A. Cement: Store in weathertight buildings, bins, or silos to provide protection from dampness and contamination and to minimize warehouse set. B. Aggregate: Arrange and use stockpiles to avoid excessive segregation or contamination with other materials or with other sizes of like aggregates. Build stockpiles in successive horizontal layers not exceeding 3 feet in thickness. Complete each layer before the next is started. Do not use frozen or partially frozen aggregate. 03720 - 042 -02 03300 -5 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE August 2013 C. Sand: Arrange and use stockpiles to avoid contamination. Allow sand to drain to a uniform moisture content before using. Do not use frozen or partially frozen aggregates. D. Admixtures: Store in closed containers to avoid contamination, evaporation, or damage. Provide suitable agitating equipment to ensure uniform dispersion of ingredients in admixture solutions which tend to separate. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing and other temperature changes which could adversely affect their characteristics. E. Pozzolan: Store in weathertight buildings, bins, or silos to provide protection from dampness and contamination. F. Sheet Curing Materials: Store in weathertight buildings or off the ground and under cover. G. Liquid Curing Compounds: Store in closed containers. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 WEATHER CONSTRAINTS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The use of the manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired. B. Like items of materials shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to provide standardization for appearance, maintenance, and manufacturer's service. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Materials shall comply with this Section and any applicable State or local requirements. B. Cement: Domestic Portland cement complying with ASTM C150. Air entraining cements shall not be used. The brand of cement shall be subject to approval by the Engineer and one brand shall be used throughout the Work. The following cement type(s) shall be used: 03720 - 042 -02 03300 -6 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE August 2013 • • • • • • 1. Class A,B,C,D Concrete Type II with the addition of fly ash resulting in C3A being below 5% of total cementitious content, Type III limited to 5% C3A or Type V. C. Fine Aggregate: Washed inert natural sand conforming to the requirements of ASTM C33. D. Coarse Aggregate: Well - graded crushed stone or washed gravel conforming to the requirements of ASTM C33. Grading requirements shall be as listed in ASTM C33 Table 2 for the specified coarse aggregate size number. Limits of Deleterious Substances and Physical Property Requirements shall be as listed in ASTM C33 Table 3 for severe weathering regions. Size numbers for the concrete mixes shall be as shown in Table 1 in this Section. E. Water: Potable water free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, organic matter, or other deleterious substances. F. Admixtures: Admixtures shall be free of chlorides and alkalis (except for those attributable to water). When it is required to use more than one admixture in a concrete mix, the admixtures shall be from the same manufacturer. Admixtures shall be compatible with the concrete mix, including other admixtures, and shall be suitable for use in contact with potable water after 30 days of concrete curing. 1. Air - Entraining Admixture: The admixture shall comply with ASTM C260. Proportioning and mixing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Water- Reducing Agent: The admixture shall comply with ASTM C494, Type A. Proportioning and mixing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3. High -Range Water- Reducer (Plasticizer): The admixture shall comply with ASTM C494, Type F and shall result in non - segregating plasticized concrete with little bleeding and with the physical properties of low water /cement ratio concrete. The treated concrete shall be capable of maintaining its plastic state in excess of 2 hours. Proportioning and mixing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Admixtures causing retarded or accelerated setting of concrete shall not be used without written approval from the Engineer. When allowed, the admixtures shall be retarding or accelerating water - reducing or high -range water - reducing admixtures. 03720 - 042 -02 03300 -7 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE August 2013 G. Pozzolan (Fly Ash) shall be Class F fly ash complying with ASTM C618 except that the Loss on Ignition (LOI) shall be limited to 3% maximum. H. Sheet Curing Materials. Waterproof paper, polyethylene film, or white burlap polyethylene sheeting all complying with ASTM C171. Liquid Curing Compound. Liquid membrane forming curing compound shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C309, Type 1 D (clear or translucent with fugitive dye) and shall contain no wax, paraffin, or oil. The curing compound shall be approved for use in contact with potable water after 30 days according to NSF 61 (non toxic and free of taste or odor). 2.03 MIXES A. An independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Owner engaged by and at the expense of the Contractor shall develop mix designs and testing. B. Select proportions of ingredients to meet the design strength and materials limits specified in Table 1 and to produce concrete having proper placability, durability, strength, appearance, and other required properties. Proportion ingredients to produce a homogenous mixture that will readily work into corners and angles of forms and around reinforcement without permitting materials to segregate or allowing excessive free water to collect on the surface. C. The design mix shall be based on standard deviation data of prior mixes with essentially the same proportions of the same constituents or, if such data are not available, be developed by a testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer and engaged by and at the expense of the Contractor. Mixes based on standard deviation shall be accepted based on the modification factors for standard deviation tests contained in ACI 318. The water content of the concrete mix, determined by laboratory testing, shall be based on a curve showing the relation between water cementitious ratio and 7- and 28 -day compressive strengths of concrete made using the proposed materials. The curves shall be determined by four or more points, each representing an average value of at least three test specimens at each age. The curves shall have a range of values sufficient to yield the desired data, including the specified design strengths as modified below, without extrapolation. The water content of the concrete mixes to be used, as determined from the curve, shall correspond to strengths 16% greater than the specified design strengths. The resulting mix shall not conflict with the limiting values for maximum water cementitious ratio and net minimum cementitious content as specified in Table 1. 03720- 042 -02 03300 -8 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE August 2013 • • • • • • D. Compression Tests: Provide testing of the proposed concrete mix or mixes to demonstrate compliance with the specified design strength requirements in conformity with the paragraph above. E. Entrained air, as measured by ASTM C231, shall be as shown in Table 1. 1. If the air - entraining agent proposed for use in the mix requires testing methods other than ASTM C231 to accurately determine air content, make special note of this requirement in the admixture submittal. F. Slump of the concrete as measured by ASTM C143 shall be as shown in Table 1. If a high -range water - reducer (plasticizer) is used, the slump indicated shall be that measured before plasticizer is added. Plasticized concrete shall have a slump ranging from 7 to 10 inches. G. Proportion admixtures according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Two or more admixtures specified may be used in the same mix provided that the admixtures in combination retain full efficiency and have no deleterious effect on the concrete or on the properties of each other. TABLE 1 CONCRETE MIX REQUIREMENTS Class Design Strength (1) Cement (2) Fine Aggregate (2) Coarse Aggregate (3) Cementitious Content (4) A 2500 C150 Type II C33 57 440 min. B 3000 C150 Type II C33 57 480 min. C 4000 C150 Type II C33 57 560 min. D 5000 C150 Type II C33 57 600 min. Class W/C Ratio (5) Fly Ash Range WR (7) (6) HRWR (8) Slump Range (Inches) A 0.62 max. -- 3.5 to 5 Yes * 1 -4 B 0.54 max. -- 3.5 to 5 Yes * 1 -3 C 0.44 max. 20 - 25% 3.5 to 5 Yes * 3 -5 D 0.40 max. -- 3.5 to 5 Yes * 3 -5 NOTES: (1) Minimum compressive strength in psi at 28 days (2) ASTM designation (3) Size Number in ASTM C33 (4) Cementitious content in lbs /cu yd (5) W/C is Water - Cementitious ratio by weight (6) AE is percent air - entrainment (7) WR is water- reducer admixture (8) HRWR is high -range water- reducer admixture * HRWR used at the Contractor's option 03720- 042 -02 03300 -9 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE August 2013 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MEASURING MATERIALS A. Concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water, and admixtures as specified and shall be produced by a plant acceptable to the Engineer. All constituents, including admixtures, shall be batched at the plant except a high -range water - reducer may also be added in the field. B. Measure materials for batching concrete by weighing in conformity with and within the tolerances given in ASTM C94 except as otherwise specified. Scales shall have been certified by the local Weights and Measures official within 1 year of use. C. Measure the amount of free water in fine aggregates within 0.3% with a moisture meter. Compensate for varying moisture contents of fine aggregates. Record the number of gallons of water as batched on printed batching tickets. D. Admixtures shall be dispensed either manually using calibrated containers or measuring tanks or by an automatic dispenser approved by the manufacturer of the specific admixture. 1. Charge air entraining and chemical admixtures into the mixer as a solution using an automatic dispenser or similar metering device. 2. Inject multiple admixtures separately during the batching sequence. 3.02 MIXING AND TRANSPORTING A. Concrete shall be ready mixed concrete produced by equipment acceptable to the Engineer. No hand mixing will be permitted. Clean each transit mix truck drum and reverse drum rotation before the truck proceeds under the batching plant. Equip each transit mix truck with a continuous, nonreversible, revolution counter showing the number of revolutions at mixing speeds. B. Ready mix concrete shall be transported to the site in watertight agitator or mixer trucks loaded not in excess of their rated capacities as stated on the name plate. C. Keep the water tank valve on each transit truck locked at all times. Any addition of water must be directed by the Engineer. Added water shall be incorporated by additional mixing of at least 35 revolutions. All added water shall be metered and the amount of water added shall be shown on each delivery ticket. 03720 - 042 -02 03300 -10 CAST -1N -PLACE CONCRETE August 2013 • • • • D. All central plant and rolling stock equipment and methods shall comply with ACI 318 and ASTM C94. • • E. Select equipment of size and design to ensure continuous flow of concrete at the delivery end. Metal or metal lined non - aluminum discharge chutes shall be used and shall have slopes not exceeding 1 vertical to 2 horizontal and not less than 1 vertical to 3 horizontal. Chutes more than 20 feet long and chutes not meeting slope requirements may be used if concrete is discharged into a hopper before distribution. F. Retempering (mixing with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water) of concrete or mortar which has reached initial set will not be permitted. G. Handle concrete from mixer to placement as quickly as practicable while providing concrete of required quality in the placement area. Dispatch trucks from the batching plant so they arrive at the work site just before the concrete is required, thus avoiding excessive mixing of concrete while waiting or delays in placing successive layers of concrete in the forms. H. Furnish a delivery ticket for ready -mixed concrete to the Engineer as each truck arrives. Each ticket shall provide a printed record of the weight of cement and each aggregate as batched individually. Use the type of indicator that returns for zero punch or returns to zero after a batch is discharged. Clearly indicate the weight of fine and coarse aggregate, cement and water in each batch, the quantity delivered, the time any water is added, and the numerical sequence of the delivery. Show the time of day batched and time of discharge from the truck. Indicate the number of revolutions of the truck mixer. I. Temperature and Mixing Time Control 1. In cold weather, do not allow the as -mixed temperature of the concrete and concrete temperatures at the time of placement in the forms to drop below 40 °F. 2. If water or aggregate has been heated, combine water with aggregate in the mixer before cement is added. Do not add cement to mixtures of water and aggregate when the temperature of the mixture is greater than 90 °F. 3. In hot weather, cool ingredients before mixing to maintain temperature of the concrete below the maximum placing temperature of 90 °F. If necessary, substitute well - crushed ice for all or part of the mixing water. 03720- 042 -02 03300 -11 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE August 2013 4. The maximum time interval between adding mixing water and /or cement to the batch and placing concrete in the forms shall not exceed the values shown in Table 2. TABLE 2 MAXIMUM TIME TO DISCHARGE OF CONCRETE Air or Concrete Temperature (whichever is higher) Maximum Time 80 to 90 °F (27 to 32 °C) 70 to 79 °F (21 to 26 °C) 40 to 69 °F (5 to 20 °C) 45 minutes 60 minutes 90 minutes J. If an approved high -range water - reducer (plasticizer) is used to produce plasticized concrete, the maximum time interval shall not exceed 90 minutes. 3.03 CONCRETE APPEARANCE A. Concrete mix showing either poor cohesion or poor coating of the coarse aggregate with paste shall be remixed. If this does not correct the condition, the concrete shall be rejected. If the slump is within the allowable limit but excessive bleeding, poor workability, or poor finishability are observed, changes in the concrete mix shall be obtained only by adjusting one or more of the following: 1. The gradation of aggregate. 2. The proportion of fine and coarse aggregate. 3. The percentage of entrained air within the allowable limits. B. Concrete for the work shall provide a homogeneous structure which, when hardened, will have the required strength, durability, and appearance. Mixtures and workmanship shall be such that concrete surfaces, when exposed, will require no finishing. When concrete surfaces are stripped, the concrete, when viewed in good lighting from 10 feet away, shall be pleasing in appearance and at 20 feet shall show no visible defects. 3.04 PLACING AND COMPACTING A. Placing 03720 - 042 -02 August 2013 1. The Contractor shall verify that all formwork completely encloses concrete to be placed and is securely braced before placing concrete. Remove ice, excess water, dirt, and other foreign materials from forms. Confirm that reinforcement and other embedded items are securely in place. Have a competent workman at the location of the placement who can ensure that reinforcing steel and embedded items remain in designated 03300 -12 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE • • • • • • locations while concrete is being placed. Sprinkle semi - porous subgrades or forms to eliminate suction of water from the mix. Seal extremely porous subgrades in an approved manner. 2. Deposit concrete as near its final position as possible to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Place concrete continuously at a rate which ensures the concrete is being integrated with fresh plastic concrete. Do not deposit concrete that has partially hardened or has been contaminated by foreign materials or on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If the section cannot be placed continuously, place construction joints as specified or as approved. 3. Pumping of concrete will be permitted. Use a mix design and aggregate sizes suitable for pumping and submit for approval. 4. Remove temporary spreaders from forms when the spreader is no longer useful. Temporary spreaders may remain embedded in concrete only when made of galvanized metal or concrete and if prior approval has been obtained. 5. Do not place concrete for supported elements until concrete previously placed in the supporting element (columns, slabs, and/or walls) has reached adequate strength. 6. Where surface mortar is to form the base of a finish, especially surfaces designated to be painted, work coarse aggregate back from forms with a suitable tool to bring the full surface of the mortar against the form. Prevent the formation of excessive surface voids. 7. Slabs a. After suitable bulkheads, screeds, and jointing materials have been positioned, the concrete shall be placed continuously between construction joints beginning at a bulkhead, edge form, or corner. Each batch shall be placed into the edge of the previously placed concrete to avoid stone pockets and segregation. b. Avoid delays in casting. If there is a delay in casting, the concrete placed after the delay shall be thoroughly spaded and consolidated at the edge of that previously placed to avoid cold joints. Concrete shall then be brought to correct level and struck off with a straightedge. Bullfloats or darbies shall be used to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. 03720- 042 -02 03300 -13 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE August 2013 c. Where slabs are to be placed integrally with the walls below them, place the walls and compact as specified. Allow 1 hour to pass between placement of the wall and the overlying slab to permit consolidation of the wall concrete. Keep the top surface of the wall moist so as to prevent cold joints. 8. Formed Concrete a. Place concrete in forms using tremie tubes and taking care to prevent segregation. Bottoms of tremie tubes shall preferably be in contact with the concrete already placed. Do not permit concrete to drop freely more than 4 feet. Place concrete for walls in 12- to 24 -inch lifts, keeping the surface horizontal. If plasticized concrete is used, the maximum lift thickness may be increased to 7 feet and the maximum free fall of concrete shall not exceed 15 feet. 9. Underwater concreting shall be performed in conformity with the recommendations of ACI 304R. The tremie system shall be used to place underwater concrete. Tremie pipes shall be in the range of 8 to 12 inches in diameter and be spaced at not more than 16 feet on centers nor more than 8 feet from an end form. Where concrete is being placed around a pipe, there shall be at least one tremie pipe on each side of each pipe. Where the tremie system is not practical, direct pumped concrete for underwater placement may be used subject to approval of the system, including details, by the Engineer. B. Compacting 1. Consolidate concrete by vibration, puddling, spading, rodding, or forking so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement, embedded items, and openings and into corners of forms. Puddling, spading, etc, shall be continuously performed along with vibration of the placement to eliminate air or stone pockets that may cause honeycombing, pitting, or planes of weakness. 2. All concrete shall be placed and compacted with mechanical vibrators. The number, type, and size of the units shall be approved by the Engineer in advance of placing operations. No concrete shall be ordered until sufficient approved vibrators (including standby units in working order) are on the job. 3. A minimum frequency of 7000 rpm is required for mechanical vibrators. Insert vibrators and withdraw at points from 18 to 30 inches apart. At each 03720 - 042 -02 03300 -14 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE August 2013 • • • insertion, vibrate sufficiently to consolidate concrete, generally from 5 to 15 seconds. Do not over vibrate so as to segregate. Keep a spare vibrator on the site during concrete placing operations. 4. Concrete Slabs: Concrete for slabs less than 8 inches thick shall be consolidated with vibrating screeds; slabs 8 to 12 inches thick shall be compacted with internal vibrators and (optionally) with vibrating screeds. Vibrators shall always be placed into concrete vertically and shall not be laid horizontally or laid over. 5. Walls and Columns: Internal vibrators (rather than form vibrators) shall be used unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. In general, for each vibrator needed to consolidate the batch at the point of discharge, one or more additional vibrators must be used to densify, homogenize, and perfect the surface. The vibrators shall be inserted vertically at regular intervals through the fresh concrete and slightly into the previous lift, if any. 6. Amount of Vibration: Vibrators are to be used to consolidate properly placed concrete but shall not be used to move or transport concrete in the forms. Vibration shall continue until: a. Frequency returns to normal. b. Surface appears liquefied, flattened, and glistening. c. Trapped air ceases to rise. d. Coarse aggregate has blended into the surface but has not disappeared. 3.05 CURING AND PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall protect all concrete work against injury from the elements and defacements of any nature during construction operations. B. Curing Methods 1. Curing Methods for Concrete Surfaces: Cure concrete to retain moisture and maintain specified temperature at the surface for a minimum of 7 days after placement. Curing methods to be used are as follows: a. Water Curing: Keep entire concrete surface wet by ponding, continuous sprinkling, or by covering with saturated burlap. Begin wet cure as soon as concrete attains an initial set and maintain wet cure 24 hours a day. 03720- 042 -02 03300 -15 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE August 2013 b. Sheet Material Curing: Cover entire surface with sheet material. Securely anchor sheeting to prevent wind and air from lifting the sheeting or entrapping air under the sheet. Place and secure sheet as soon as initial concrete set occurs. c. Liquid Membrane Curing: Apply over the entire concrete surface except for surfaces to receive additional concrete. Curing compound shall NOT be placed on any concrete surface where additional concrete is to be placed, where concrete sealers or surface coatings are to be used, or where the concrete finish requires an integral floor product. Curing compound shall be applied as soon as the free water on the surface has disappeared and no water sheen is visible, but not after the concrete is dry or when the curing compound can be absorbed into the concrete. Application shall be in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Specified applications of curing methods. a. Slabs for Water Containment Structures: Water curing only. b. Slabs on Grade and Footings (not used to contain water): Water curing, sheet material curing, or liquid membrane curing. c. Structural Slabs (other than water containment): Water curing or liquid membrane curing. d. Horizontal Surfaces that Will Receive Additional Concrete, Coatings, Grout, or Other Material that Requires Bond to the Substrate: Water curing. e. Formed Surfaces: None if nonabsorbent forms are left in place 7 days. Water cure if absorbent forms are used. Sheet cured or liquid membrane cured if forms are removed before 7 days. Exposed horizontal surfaces of formed walls or columns shall be water cured for 7 days or until next placement of concrete. f. Concrete Joints: Water cured or sheet material cured. C. Finished surfaces and slabs shall be protected from the direct sunlight to prevent checking and crazing. 03720 - 042 -02 03300 -16 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE August 2013 • • • • D. Cold Weather Concreting: 1. Cold weather is defined as a period when the average daily outdoor temperature drops below 40 °F for more than 3 successive days. The average daily temperature shall be calculated as the average of the highest and the lowest temperature from midnight to midnight. 2. Cold weather concreting shall conform to ACI 306.1 and the additional requirements specified in this Section. Temperatures at the concrete placement shall be recorded at 12 -hour intervals (minimum). 3. The Contractor shall discuss a cold weather work plan with the Engineer. The discussion shall encompass the methods and procedures proposed for use during cold weather, including producing, transporting, placeing, protecting, curing, and monitoring the temperature of the concrete. The procedures to be implemented upon abrupt changes in weather conditions or equipment failures shall also be discussed. Cold weather concreting shall not begin until the work plan is acceptable to the Engineer. 4. During periods of cold weather, concrete shall be protected to provide continuous warm, moist curing (with supplementary heat when required) for a total of at least 350 degree -days of curing. a. Degree -days are defined as the total number of 24 -hour periods multiplied by the average daily air temperature at the surface of the concrete (e.g., 5 days at an average 70 °F = 350 degree- days). b. To calculate the weighted average daily air temperature, sum hourly measurements of the air temperature in the shade at the surface of the concrete taking any measurement less than 50 °F as 0° F. Divide the sum thus calculated by 24 to obtain the weighted average temperature for that day. 5. Salt, manure, or other chemicals shall not be used for protection. 6. The protection period for concrete being water cured shall not be terminated during cold weather until at least 24 hours after water curing has been terminated. E. Hot Weather Concreting 1. Hot weather is defined as any combination of high air temperatures, low relative humidity, and wind velocity which produces a rate of evaporation 03720 - 042 -02 03300 -17 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE August 2013 estimated in accordance with ACI 305R, approaching or exceeding 0.2 lb /sq ft/hr). 2. Concrete placed during hot weather shall be batched, delivered, placed, cured, and protected in compliance with the recommendations of ACI 305R and the additional requirements specified in this Section. a. Temperature of concrete being placed shall not exceed 90 °F and every effort shall be made to maintain a uniform concrete mix temperature below this level. The temperature of the concrete shall be such that it will cause no difficulties from loss of slump, flash set, or cold joints. b. All necessary precautions shall be taken to deliver the concrete promptly, to place the concrete promptly upon its arrival at the job, and to provide vibration immediately after placement. c. The Engineer may direct the Contractor to immediately cover plastic concrete with sheet material. 3. The Contractor shall discuss with the Engineer a work plan describing the methods and procedures proposed for concrete placement and curing during hot weather. Hot weather concreting shall not begin until the work plan is acceptable to the Engineer. 3.06 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Except as otherwise specifically authorized by the Engineer, forms shall not be removed before the concrete has attained a strength of at least 30% of its specified design strength, nor before reaching the following number of degree -days of curing (whichever is longer): TABLE 3 MINIMUM TIME TO FORM REMOVAL Forms for: Degree -Days: Beams and slabs 500 Walls and vertical surfaces 100 (See definition of degree -days in Paragraph 3.05D above). B. Shores shall not be removed until the concrete has attained at least 70% of its specified design strength and also sufficient strength to support safely its own weight and construction live loads. 03720 - 042 -02 August 2013 03300 -18 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE • • • • • • 3.07 INSPECTION AND FIELD TESTING A. The batching, mixing, transporting, placing, and curing of concrete shall be subject to the inspection of the Engineer at all times. The Contractor shall advise the Engineer of his/her readiness to proceed at least 24 hours before each concrete placement. The Engineer will inspect the preparations for concreting, including the preparation of previously placed concrete, the reinforcing steel and the alignment, and the cleanliness and tightness of formwork. No placement shall be made without inspection and acceptance by the Engineer. B. In compliance with ASTM C31, the Engineer (or inspector) will take sets of field - control cylinder specimens during the work. The number of sets of concrete test cylinders taken of each class of concrete placed each day shall not be less than one set per day, nor less than one set for each 150 cu yd of concrete, nor less than one set for each 5,000 sq ft of surface area for slabs or walls. 1. A "set" of test cylinders consists of four cylinders: one to be tested at 7 days and two to be tested and their strengths averaged at 28 days. The fourth may be used for a special test at 3 days or to verify strength after 28 days if the 28 -day test results are low. 2. When the average 28 -day compressive strength of the cylinders in any set falls below the specified design strength or below proportional minimum 7 -day strengths (where proper relation between 7- and 28 -day strengths have been established by tests), proportions, water content, or temperature conditions shall be changed to achieve the required strengths. C. The Contractor shall cooperate in testing by allowing free access to the work for the selection of samples, providing an insulated closed curing box for specimens, affording protection to the specimens against injury or loss through the operations, and furnishing material and labor required for taking concrete cylinder samples. The cost of taking and shipping specimens will be paid for by the Contractor and reimbursed by the Owner under the Concrete Testing Allowance. Curing boxes shall be acceptable to the Engineer. D. In accordance with ASTM C143, slump tests will be made in the field immediately before placing the concrete. If the slump is greater than the specified range, the concrete shall be rejected. E. Air Content: Air content shall be tested for on fresh concrete samples. Air content for concrete made of ordinary aggregates having low absorption shall be tested for in compliance with either the pressure method complying with ASTM C231 or by the volumetric method complying with ASTM C173. If lightweight aggregates or aggregates with high absorptions are used, the latter test method shall be used. 03720 - 042 -02 03300 -19 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE August 2013 F. The Engineer may have cores taken from any questionable area in the concrete work such as construction joints and other locations as required for determining concrete quality. The results of tests on such cores shall be the basis for accepting, rejecting, or determining the continuation of concrete work. G. The Contractor shall cooperate in obtaining cores by allowing free access to the work and permitting the use of ladders, scaffolding, and such incidental equipment as may be required. Repair all core holes. The work of cutting and testing the cores will be at the expense of the Contractor. Work found to be acceptable will be reimbursed under the Concrete Testing Allowance. 3.08 FAILURE TO MEET REQUIREMENTS A. Should the strengths shown by the test specimens made and tested in compliance with the previous provisions fall below the values given in Table 1, the Engineer shall have the right to require changes in proportions outlined to apply to the remainder of the work. Furthermore, the Engineer shall have the right to require additional curing on those portions of the structure represented by the test specimens which failed. The cost of such additional curing shall be at the Contractor's expense. If such additional curing does not give the strength required as evidenced by core and/or load tests, the Engineer shall have the right to require strengthening or replacing those portions of the structure that fail to develop the required strength. The cost of all such core borings and/or load tests and any strengthening or concrete replacement required because strengths of test specimens are below those specified shall be entirely at the expense of the Contractor. In such cases of failure to meet strength requirements, the Contractor and Engineer shall confer to determine what adjustment, if any, can be made in compliance with Sections titled "Strength" and "Failure to Meet Strength Requirements" of ASTM C94. The "purchaser" referred to in ASTM C94 is the Contractor in this Section. B. When the tests on control specimens of concrete fall below the specified strength, the Engineer will permit check tests for strengths to be made by means of typical cores drilled from the structure in compliance with ASTM C42 and C39. In the case of cores not indicating adequate strength, the Engineer, in addition to other recourses, may require, at the Contractor's expense, load tests on any one of the slabs, beams, piles, caps, and columns in which such concrete was used. Tests need not be conducted until concrete has aged 60 days. C. Should the strength of test cylinders fall below 60% of the required minimum 28 -day strength, the concrete shall be rejected and shall be removed and replaced. 03720 - 042 -02 August 2013 03300 -20 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE • • • • 3.09 PATCHING AND REPAIRS A. This Section is intended to require quality work, including adequate forming and proper mixing, placing, and curing of concrete so completed concrete surfaces will require no patching. B. Defective concrete and honeycombed areas as determined by the Engineer shall be repaired as specified by the Engineer. C. As soon as the forms have been stripped and the concrete surfaces exposed, fins and other projections shall be removed; recesses left by the removal of form ties shall be filled; and surface defects which do not impair structural strength shall be repaired. Clean all exposed concrete surfaces and adjoining work stained by leakage of concrete to the approval of the Engineer. D. Immediately after removal of forms remove plugs and break off metal ties as required by Section 03100. Promptly fill holes upon stripping as follows: moisten the hole with water, followed by a 1/16 -inch brush coat of neat cement slurry mixed to the consistency of a heavy paste. Immediately plug the hole with a 1 to 1.5- mixture of cement and concrete sand mixed slightly damp to the touch (just short of "bailing "). Hammer the grout into the hole until dense and an excess of paste appears on the surface in the form of a spiderweb. Trowel smooth with heavy pressure. Avoid burnishing. E. When patching exposed surfaces, employ the same source of cement and sand as used in the parent concrete. Adjust color if necessary by adding proper amounts of white cement. Rub lightly with a fine Carborundum stone at an age of 1 to 5 days . if necessary to bring the surface down with the parent concrete. Exercise care to avoid damaging or staining the virgin skin of the surrounding parent concrete. Wash thoroughly to remove all rubbed matter. 3.10 SCHEDULE A. The following (Table 4) are the general applications for the various concrete classes and design strengths: 03720 - 042 -02 03300 -21 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE August 2013 TABLE 4 CONCRETE SCHEDULE Class Design Strength Description A 2,500 Concrete fill and duct encasement B 3,000 Concrete overlay slabs and pavements C 4,000 Walls, slabs on grade, suspended slab and beam systems, columns, grade beams, and all other structural concrete D 5,000 Prestressed concrete END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 03300 -22 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE August 2013 • • • • SECTION 03360 CONCRETE FINISHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and finish cast -in -place concrete surfaces as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork. B. Section 03300, Cast -In -Place Concrete. C. Section 03600, Grout. D. Division 9, Finishes, for painting, toppings, and special surfaces. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. Concrete sealer. Confirmation that the sealer is compatible with additionally applied coatings shall also be submitted. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM C33— Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 03720 - 042 -02 03360 -1 CONCRETE FINISHES August 2013 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Finishes 1. For concrete which will receive additional applied finishes or materials, the surface finish specified is required for the proper application of the specified manufacturer's products. Where alternate products are approved for use, determine if changes in finishes are required and provide the proper finishes to receive these products. 2. Changes in finishes made to accommodate products different from those specified shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. Submit the proposed new finishes and their construction methods to the Engineer for approval. B. Services of Manufacturer's Representative 1. Upon 72 hours notification, make available at no extra cost to the Owner the services of a qualified field representative of the manufacturer of the curing compound, sealer, or hardener to instruct the user on the proper application of the product under prevailing job conditions. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 WEATHER CONSTRAINTS (NOT USED) 03720 - 042 -02 03360 -2 CONCRETE FINISHES August 2013 • • PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Chemical hardener shall be Lapidolith by Sonneborn; Hornolith by A.C. Horn; Penalith by W.R. Meadows, or equal fluosilicate base material. B. Concrete sealer shall be "Kure N Seal," by Sonneborn, Minneapolis, MN or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FORMED SURFACES A. Forms shall not be removed before the requirements of Section 03300 have been satisfied. B. Exercise care to prevent damaging edges or obliterating the lines of chamfers, rustications, or corners when removing the forms or performing any other work adjacent to such chamfers, rustications, or corners. C. Clean all exposed concrete surfaces and adjoining work stained by leakage of concrete. D. Rough Form Finish 1. Immediately after stripping forms and before concrete has changed color, carefully remove all fins and projections. 2. Promptly fill holes left by tie cones and defects as specified in Section 03300. E. Rubbed Finish 1. Immediately upon stripping forms and before the concrete has changed color, carefully remove all fins. While the wall is still damp, apply a thin coat of medium - consistency neat cement slurry by bristle brushes to provide a bonding coat within all pits, air holes, or blemishes in the parent concrete. Avoid coating large areas with the slurry at one time. 2. Before the slurry has dried or changed color, apply a dry (almost crumbly) grout proportioned by volume and consisting of 1 part cement to 1 -1/2 parts of clean masonry sand having a fineness modulus of approximately 2.3 and complying with the gradation requirements of ASTM C33 for such a material. Grout shall be uniformly applied by damp 03720 - 042 -02 03360 -3 CONCRETE FINISHES August 2013 pads of coarse burlap approximately 6 -inch square used as a float. Scrub grout into the pits and air holes to provide a dense mortar in all imperfections. 3. Allow the mortar to partially harden for 1 or 2 hours depending on the weather. If the air is hot and dry, keep the wall damp during this period using a fine, fog spray. When the grout has hardened sufficiently so it can be scraped from the surface with the edge of a steel trowel without damaging the grout in the small pits or holes, cut off all that can be removed with a trowel. (Note: Grout allowed to remain on the wall too long will harden and will be difficult to remove.) 4. Allow the surface to dry thoroughly and rub it vigorously with clean dry burlap to completely remove any dried grout. No visible film of grout shall remain after this rubbing. The entire cleaning operation for any area must be completed the day it is started. Do not leave grout on surfaces overnight. Allow sufficient time for grout to dry after it has been cut off with the trowel so it can be wiped off clean with the burlap. 5. On the day after the repair of pits, air holes, and blemishes, the walls shall again be wiped off clean with dry, used pieces of burlap containing old hardened mortar which will act as a mild abrasive. After this treatment, there shall be no built -up film remaining on the parent surface. If, however, such a film is present, a fine abrasive stone shall be used to remove all such material without breaking through the surface film of the original concrete. Such scrubbing shall be light and sufficient only to remove excess material without changing the texture of the concrete. 6. A thorough wash down with stiff bristle brushes shall follow the final bagging or stoning operation. No extraneous materials shall remain on the surface of the wall. The wall shall be sprayed with a fine fog spray periodically to maintain a continually damp condition for at least 3 days after the application of the repair grout. F. Abrasive Blast Finish 1. Coordinate with Rubbed Finish application. Do not begin until Rubbed Finish operation is complete or before concrete has reached minimum 7 -day strength. The Rubbed Finish application may be deleted by the Engineer if the unfinished concrete surface is of superior quality. Apply the abrasive blast finish only where indicated on the Drawings. 2. Prepare a sample area a minimum of 4 feet high by 16 feet wide. Blast Finish as directed by the Engineer on a portion of new wall construction 03720 - 042 -02 03360 -4 CONCRETE FINISHES August 2013 • • • • which will not be exposed in the final work. The sample area shall contain a variety of finishes obtained with different nozzles, nozzle pressures, grit materials, and blasting techniques for selection by the Engineer. Final accepted sample shall remain exposed until all Blast Finish operations are complete. 3. The Blast Finish operation shall meet all regulatory agency requirements. The Blast Finish contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all required permits and/or licenses. 4. Perform abrasive blast finishing in as continuous an operation as possible, using the same work crew to maintain continuity of finish on each surface or area of work. Maintain patterns or variances in depths of blast as present on the accepted sample. 5. Use an abrasive grit of proper type and gradation as well as equipment and technique to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces as follows: a. Medium: Generally expose coarse aggregate 1/4 inch to 3/8 inch reveal. 6. Abrade blast corners and edge of patterns carefully, using back -up boards, to maintain uniform corner or edge line. Determine type of nozzle, nozzle pressure, and blasting techniques required to match the Architect's samples. 7. Upon completing the Blast Finish operation, thoroughly flush finished surfaces with clean clear water to remove residual dust and grit. Allow to air dry until curing of concrete is complete. 8. After the concrete has cured for a minimum of 28 days, apply a clear acrylic sealer as directed by the manufacturer. 3.02 FLOORS AND SLABS A. Floated Finish 1. Machine Floating a. Screed floors and slabs with straightedges to the established grades shown on the Drawings. Immediately after final screeding sprinkle a dry cement/sand shake in the proportion of two sacks of Portland cement to 350 lb of coarse natural concrete sand evenly over the 03720 - 042 -02 03360 -5 CONCRETE FINISHES August 2013 surface at the rate of approximately 500 lb /1,000 sq ft of floor. Do not sprinkle neat, dry cement on the surface. b. The application of the cement/sand shake may be eliminated at the discretion of the Engineer if the base slab concrete exhibits adequate fattiness and homogeneity and the need is not indicated. When the concrete has hardened sufficiently to support the weight of a power float without the float's digging into or disrupting the level surface, thoroughly float the shake into the surface with a heavy revolving disc -type power compacting machine capable of providing a 200 -1b compaction force distributed over a 24 -inch- diameter disc. c. Start floating along walls and around columns and then move systematically across the surface leaving a matte finish. d. The compacting machine shall be the "Kelly Power Float with Compaction Control" as manufactured by Kelley Industries of SSP Construction Equipment Inc., Pomona, CA or equal. Troweling machines equipped with float (shoe) blades that are slipped over the trowel blades may be used for floating. Floating with a troweling machine equipped with normal trowel blades will not be permitted. The use of any floating or troweling machine which has a water attachment for wetting the concrete surface during finishing will not be permitted. 2. Hand Floating a. In lieu of power floating, small areas may be compacted by hand floating. The dry cement/sand shake previously specified shall be used unless specifically eliminated by the Engineer. Screed the floors and slabs with straightedges to the established grades shown on the Drawings. While the concrete is still green but sufficiently hardened to support a finisher and kneeboards with no more than 1/4-inch indentation, wood float to a true, even plane with no coarse aggregate visible. Use sufficient pressure on the wood floats to bring moisture to the surface. 3. Finishing Tolerances a. Level floors and slabs to a tolerance of plus or minus 1/8 inch when checked with a 10 -foot straightedge placed anywhere on the slab in any direction. Where drains occur, pitch floors to drains such that no low spots are left undrained. Failure to meet either of 03720 - 042 -02 03360 -6 CONCRETE FINISHES August 2013 • • • • the above requirements shall be cause for removal, grinding, or other correction as directed by the Engineer. • • B. Broom Finish 1. Screed slabs with straightedges to the established grades indicated on the Drawings. When the concrete has stiffened sufficiently to maintain small surface indentations, draw a stiff bristle broom lightly across the surface in the direction of drainage or, in the case of walks and stairs, perpendicular to the direction of traffic to provide a non -slip surface. C. Steel Trowel Finish 1. Finish concrete as specified in Article 3.04. Then, hand steel trowel to a perfectly smooth hard even finish free from high or low spots or other defects. D. Concrete Sealer 1. Prepare and seal surfaces indicated on the room finish schedule to receive a sealer as follows: a. Finish concrete as specified in the preceding paragraphs and in accordance with the Schedule in Article 3.05 below. b. Newly Placed Concrete: Surface must be sound and properly finished. Surface is application ready when it is damp but not wet and can no longer be marred by walking workmen. c. Newly Cured Bare Concrete: Level any spots gouged out by trades. Remove all dirt, dust, droppage, oil, grease, asphalt, and foreign matter. Cleanse with caustics and detergents as required. Rinse thoroughly and allow to dry so that the surface is no more than damp and not wet. d. Aged Concrete: Restore surface soundness by patching, grouting, filling cracks and holes, etc. Surface must also be free of any dust, dirt, and other foreign matter. Use power tools and/or strippers to remove any incompatible sealers or coatings. Cleanse as required following the procedure indicated under cured concrete. e. Methods: Apply sealer to form a continuous, uniform film by spray, soft bristle pushbroom, long nap roller, or lambswool 03720- 042 -02 03360 -7 CONCRETE FINISHES August 2013 applicator. Ordinary garden -type sprayers, using neoprene hose, are recommended for best results. f. Applications: For curing only, apply the first coat evenly and uniformly as soon as possible after final finishing at the rate of 200 to 400 sq ft per gallon. Apply the second coat when all trades are completed and the structure is ready for occupancy at the rate of 400 to 600 sq ft per gallon. g. To meet guarantee and to seal and dustproof, two coats are required. For sealing new concrete, both coats shall be applied full strength. On aged concrete, when renovating, dustproofing, and sealing, the first coat should be thinned 10 to 15% with reducer in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. 3.03 CONCRETE RECEIVING CHEMICAL HARDENER A. After 28 days minimum concrete cure, apply chemical hardener in three applications to a minimum total coverage of the undiluted chemical of 100 square feet per gallon and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as reviewed. 3.04 APPROVAL OF FINISHES A. All concrete surfaces, when finished, will be inspected by the Engineer. B. Surfaces which in the opinion of the Engineer are unsatisfactory shall be refinished or reworked. C. After finishing horizontal surfaces, regardless of the finishing procedure specified, the concrete shall be cured in compliance with Section 03300 unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. 3.05 SCHEDULE OF FINISHES A. Concrete shall be finished as specified either to remain as natural concrete or to receive an additional applied finish or material under another Section. B. Concrete for the following conditions shall be finished as noted on the Drawings and as further specified in this Section: 1. Concrete to Receive Dampproofing: Rough form finish. See Paragraph 3.O1D above. 03720 - 042 -02 03360 -8 CONCRETE FINISHES August 2013 • • • • 2. Concrete Not Exposed to View and Not Scheduled to Receive an Additional Applied Finish or Material: Rough form finish. See Paragraph 3.01D above. 3. Exterior Vertical Concrete Above Grade Exposed to View: Rubbed finish. See Paragraph 3.01E above. 4. Interior Vertical Concrete Exposed to View Except in Water Containment Areas: Rubbed finish. See Paragraph 3.01E above. 5. Vertical Concrete in Water Containment Areas. Rubbed finish on exposed surfaces and extending to 2 feet below normal operating water level: Rough form finish on the remainder of submerged areas. See Paragraphs 3.01E and 3.01D above. 6. Interior and Exterior Underside of Concrete Exposed to View: Rubbed finish. See Paragraph 3.01E above. 7. Exterior surfaces exposed to view and indicated to have an abrasive blast finish. See Paragraph 3.01F above. 8. Interior or Exterior Horizontal Concrete not Requiring Floor Hardener or Sealer: Floated finish. See Paragraph 3.02A above. 9. Concrete for Exterior Walks and Interior and Exterior Stairs: Broomed finish perpendicular to direction of traffic. See Paragraph 3.02B above. 10. Concrete Slabs On Which Process Liquids Flow or In Contact with Sludge: Steel trowel finish. See Paragraph 3.02C above. 11. Concrete to Receive Hardener: see Paragraph 3.02D above. 12. Concrete tank bottoms to be covered with grout: see Section 03600. END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 03360 -9 CONCRETE FINISHES August 2013 • SECTION 03600 GROUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and install grout complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork. B. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement. C. Section 03250, Concrete Joints and Joint Accessories. D. Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.03 SUBMITTALS • A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: • 1. Commercially manufactured nonshrink cementitious grout. The submittal shall include catalog cuts, technical data, storage requirements, product life, working time after mixing, temperature considerations, conformity to required ASTM standards, and Material Safety Data Sheet. 2. Commercially manufactured nonshrink epoxy grout. The submittal shall include catalog cuts, technical data, storage requirements, product life, working time after mixing, temperature considerations, conformity to required ASTM standards, and Material Safety Data Sheet. 3. Cement grout. The submittal shall include the type and brand of the cement, the gradation of the fine aggregate, product data on any proposed admixtures, and the proposed mix of the grout. 4. Concrete grout. The submittal shall include data as required for concrete as delineated in Section 03300 and for fiber reinforcement as delineated in Section 03200. This includes the mix design, constituent quantities per cubic yard, and the water /cement ratio. 03720 - 042 -02 03600 -1 GROUT August 2013 Laboratory Test Reports: Submit laboratory test data as required under Section 03300 for concrete to be used as concrete grout. B. Certifications: Certify that commercially manufactured grout products and concrete grout admixtures are suitable for use in contact with potable water after 30 days curing. C. Qualifications: Grout manufacturers shall submit documentation that they have at least 10 years experience in the production and use of the proposed grouts which they will supply. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM C33— Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 2. ASTM C150—Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 3. ASTM C531— Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical - Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. 4. ASTM C579— Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical - Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. 5. ASTM C827— Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens of Cementitious Mixtures. 6. ASTM C 1107— Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic - Cement Grout (Nonshrink). 7. ASTM D695— Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics. B. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Standard (CRD) 1. CRD C- 621 —Corps of Engineers Specification for Non - Shrink Grout. 03720 - 042 -02 03600 -2 GROUT August 2013 • • • • • 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pre - installation Conference 1. Well in advance of grouting, the Contractor shall hold a pre - installation meeting to review the requirements for surface preparation, mixing, placing, and curing procedures for each product proposed for use. Parties concerned with grouting shall be notified of the meeting at least 10 days before its scheduled date. B. Services of Manufacturer's Representative 1. A qualified field technician of the nonshrink grout manufacturer, specifically trained in installing the products, shall attend the pre - installation conference and shall be present for the initial installation of each type of nonshrink grout. Additional services shall also be provided as required to correct installation problems. C. Field Testing 1. All field testing and inspection services required shall be provided by the Owner. The Contractor shall assist in the sampling of materials and shall provide any ladders, platforms, etc, for access to the work. The methods of testing shall comply in detail with the applicable ASTM Standards. 2. The field testing of Concrete Grout shall be as specified for concrete in Section 03300. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. B. Deliver materials to the jobsite in original, unopened packages, clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name, product identification, batch numbers, and printed instructions. 03720- 042 -02 03600 -3 GROUT August 2013 C. Store materials in full compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Total storage time from the date of manufacture to the date of installation shall be limited to 6 months or the manufacturer's recommended storage time, whichever is less. D. Material which becomes damp or otherwise unacceptable shall be immediately removed from the site and replaced with acceptable material at no additional expense to the Owner. E. Nonshrink- cement -based grouts shall be delivered as preblended, prepackaged mixes requiring only the addition of water. F. Nonshrink epoxy grouts shall be delivered as premeasured, prepackaged, three - component systems requiring only blending as directed by the manufacturer. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS A. The grout manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the production and use of the type of grout proposed for the work. 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 WEATHER CONSTRAINTS (NOT USED) 1.12 DEFINITIONS A. Nonshrink Grout: A commercially manufactured product that does not shrink in either the plastic or hardened state, is dimensionally stable in the hardened state, and bonds to a clean base plate. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The use of a manufacturer's name and product or catalog number is to establish the standard of quality desired. B. To standardize appearance, like materials shall be the products of one manufacturer or supplier. 03720 - 042 -02 03600 -4 GROUT August 2013 • • • • • • 2.02 MATERIALS A. Nonshrink Cementitious Grout 1. Nonshrink cementitious grouts shall meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM C1107, Grades B or C and CRD C -621. Grouts shall be Portland - cement based, contain a pre - proportioned blend of selected aggregates and shrinkage compensating agents, and shall require only the addition of water. Nonshrink cementitious grouts shall not contain expansive cement or metallic particles. The grouts shall exhibit no shrinkage when tested in conformity with ASTM C827. a. General purpose nonshrink cementitious grout shall conform to the standards stated above and shall be SikaGrout 212 by Sika Corp.; Set Grout by Master Builders, Inc.; Gilco Construction Grout by Gifford Hill & Co.; Euco NS by The Euclid Chemical Co.; NBEC Grout by U. S. Grout Corp.; or equal. b. Flowable (Precision) nonshrink cementitious grout shall conform to the standards stated above and shall be Masterflow 928 by Master Builders, Inc.; Hi Flow Grout by the Euclid Chemical Co.; SikaGrout 212 by Sika Corp.; Supreme Grout by Gifford Hill & Co.; Five Star Grout by U. S. Grout Corp.; or equal. B. Nonshrink Epoxy Grout 1. Nonshrink epoxy based grout shall be a pre - proportioned, three - component, 100% solids system consisting of epoxy resin, hardener, and blended aggregate. It shall have a compressive strength of 14,000 psi in 7 days when tested in conformity with ASTM D695 and have a maximum thermal expansion of 30x10 -6 when tested in conformity with ASTM C531. The grout shall be Ceilcote 648 CP by Master Builders Inc.; Five Star Epoxy Grout by U.S. Grout Corp.; Sikadur 42 Grout Pak by Sika Corp.; High Strength Epoxy Grout by the Euclid Chemical Co.; or equal. C. Cement Grout 1. Cement grouts shall be a mixture of one part Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150, Types I, II, or III and 1 to 2 parts sand conforming to ASTM C33 with sufficient water to place the grout. The water content shall be sufficient to impart workability to the grout but not to the degree that it will allow the grout to flow. 03720 - 042 -02 03600 -5 GROUT August 2013 D. Concrete Grout 1. Concrete grout shall conform to the requirements of Section 03300 except as specified in this Section. It shall be proportioned with cement, coarse and fine aggregates, water, water reducer, and an air - entraining agent to produce a mix having an average strength of 2,900 psi at 28 days, or 2,500 psi nominal strength. Coarse aggregate size shall be 3/8 -inch maximum. Slump should not exceed 5 inches and should be as low as practical yet still retain sufficient workability. 2. Synthetic reinforcing fibers as specified in Section 03200 shall be added to the concrete grout mix at the rate of 1.5 lb of fibers per cubic yard of grout. Fibers shall be added from the manufacturer's premeasured bags and according to the manufacturer's recommendations in a manner which will ensure complete dispersion of the fiber bundles as single monofilaments within the concrete grout. E. Water 1. Potable water, free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious substances. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Grout shall be placed over cured concrete which has attained its full design strength unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. B. Concrete surfaces to receive grout shall be clean and sound, free of ice, frost, dirt, grease, oil, curing compounds, laitance and paints, and free of all loose material or foreign matter which may affect the bond or performance of the grout. C. Roughen concrete surfaces by chipping, sandblasting, or other mechanical means to ensure bond of the grout to the concrete. Remove loose or broken concrete. Irregular voids or projecting coarse aggregate need not be removed if they are sound, free of laitance, and firmly embedded into the parent concrete. 1. Air compressors used to clean surfaces in contact with grout shall be the oilless type or equipped with an oil trap in the air line to prevent oil from being blown onto the surface. D. Remove all loose rust, oil, or other deleterious substances from metal embedments or bottom of baseplates before installing the grout. 03720- 042 -02 03600 -6 GROUT August 2013 • • • • • E. Concrete surfaces shall be washed clean and then kept moist for at least 24 hours before the placing of cementitious or cement grout. Saturation may be achieved by covering the concrete with saturated burlap bags, using a soaker hose, flooding the surface, or other method acceptable to the Engineer. Upon completion of the 24 -hour period, visible water shall be removed from the surface before grouting. An adhesive bonding agent should only be used in lieu of surface saturation when approved by the Engineer for each specific location of grout installation. F. Epoxy -based grouts do not require the saturation of the concrete substrate. Surfaces in contact with epoxy grout shall be completely dry before grouting. G. Construct grout forms or other leak -proof containment as required. Forms shall be lined or coated with release agents recommended by the grout manufacturer. Forms shall be of adequate strength, securely anchored in place, and shored to resist the forces imposed by the grout and its placement. 1. Forms for epoxy grout shall be designed to allow the formation of a hydraulic head and shall have chamfer strips built into forms. H. Level and align the structural or equipment bearing plates in accordance with the structural requirements and the recommendations of the equipment manufacturer. Equipment shall be supported during alignment and installation of grout by shims, wedges, blocks, or other approved means. The shims, wedges, and blocking devices shall be prevented from bonding to the grout by appropriate bond breaking coatings and removed after grouting unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 3.02 INSTALLATION— GENERAL A. The Contractor shall mix, apply, and cure products in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations and this Section. B. Have sufficient manpower and equipment available for rapid and continuous mixing and placing. Keep all necessary tools and materials ready and close at hand. C. Maintain temperatures of the foundation plate, supporting concrete, and grout between 40 and 90 °F during grouting and for at least 24 hours after or as recommended by the grout manufacturer, whichever is longer. Take precautions to minimize differential heating or cooling of baseplates and grout during the curing period. 03720 - 042 -02 03600 -7 GROUT August 2013 D. Take special precautions for hot weather or cold weather grouting as recommended by the manufacturer when ambient temperatures and/or the temperature of the materials in contact with the grout are outside of the 60 and 90 °F range. E. Install grout in a manner which will preserve the isolation between the elements on either side of the joint where grout is placed in the vicinity of an expansion or contraction joint. F. Reflect all existing underlying expansion, contraction, and construction joints through the grout. 3.03 INSTALLATION— CEMENT GROUTS AND NONSHRINK CEMENTITIOUS GROUTS A. Mix in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Do not add cement, sand, pea gravel, or admixtures without prior approval by the Engineer. B. Avoid mixing by hand. Mixing in a mortar mixer (with moving blades) is recommended. Pre -wet the mixer and empty excess water. Add premeasured amount of water for mixing, followed by the grout. Begin with the minimum amount of water recommended by the manufacturer and then add the minimum additional water required to obtain workability. Do not exceed the manufacturer's maximum recommended water content. C. Placements greater than 3 inches deep shall include the addition of clean, washed pea gravel to the grout mix when approved by the manufacturer. Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for the size and amount of aggregate to be added. D. Place grout into the designated areas in a manner which will avoid segregation or entrapment of air. Do not vibrate grout to release air or to consolidate the material. Placement should proceed in a manner which will ensure the filling of all spaces and provide full contact between the grout and adjoining surfaces. Provide grout holes as necessary. E. Place grout rapidly and continuously to avoid cold joints. Do not place cement grouts in layers. Do not add additional water to the mix (retemper) after initial stiffening. F. Just before the grout reaches its final set, cut back the grout to the substrate at a 45° angle from the lower edge of the bearing plate unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Finish this surface with a wood float (brush) finish. 03720- 042 -02 03600 -8 GROUT August 2013 • • • • • G. Begin curing immediately after form removal, cutback, and finishing. Keep grout moist and within its recommended placement temperature range for at least 24 hours after placement or longer if recommended by the manufacturer. Saturate the grout surface by use of wet burlap, soaker hoses, ponding, or other approved means. Provide sunshades as necessary. If drying winds inhibit the ability of a given curing method to keep grout moist, erect wind breaks until wind is no longer a problem or curing is finished. 3.04 INSTALLATION—NONSHRINK EPDXY GROUTS A. Mix in accordance with the procedures recommended by the manufacturer. Do not vary the ratio of components or add solvent to change the consistency of the grout mix. Do not overmix. Mix full batches only to maintain proper proportions of resin, hardener, and aggregate. B. Monitor ambient weather conditions and contact the grout manufacturer for special placement procedures to be used for temperatures below 60 or above 90 °F. C. Place grout into the designated areas in a manner which will avoid trapping air. Placement methods shall ensure the filling of all spaces and provide full contact between the grout and adjoining surfaces. Provide grout holes as necessary. D. Minimize "shoulder" length (extension of grout horizontally beyond base plate). In no case shall the shoulder length of the grout be greater than the grout thickness. E. Finish grout by puddling to cover all aggregate and provide a smooth finish. Break bubbles and smooth the top surface of the grout in conformity with the manufacturer's recommendations. F. Epoxy grouts are self curing and do not require the application of water. Maintain the formed grout within its recommended placement temperature range for at least 24 hours after placing, or longer if recommended by the manufacturer. 3.05 INSTALLATION— CONCRETE GROUT A. Screed underlying concrete to the grade shown on the Drawings. Provide the surface with a broomed finish, aligned to drain. Protect and keep the surface clean until placement of concrete grout. B. Remove the debris and clean the surface by sweeping and vacuuming all dirt and other foreign materials. Wash the tank slab using a strong jet of water. Flushing debris into tank drain lines will not be permitted. 03720 - 042 -02 03600 -9 GROUT August 2013 C. Saturate the concrete surface for at least 24 hours before placing the concrete grout. Saturation may be maintained by ponding, by the use or soaker hoses, or by other methods acceptable to the Engineer. Remove excess water just before placing the concrete grout. Place a cement slurry immediately ahead of the concrete grout so that the slurry is moist when the grout is placed. Work the slurry over the surface with a broom until it is coated with approximately 1/16- to 1/8- inch -thick cement paste. D. Place concrete grout to final grade using the scraper mechanism as a guide for surface elevation and to ensure that high and low spots are eliminated. Unless specifically approved by the equipment manufacturer, mechanical scraper mechanisms shall not be used as a finishing machine or screed. E. Provide grout contraction joints as indicated on the Drawings. F. Finish and cure the concrete grout as specified for cast -in -place concrete. 3.06 SCHEDULE A. The following list indicates where the particular types of grout are to be used: 1. General purpose nonshrink cementitious grout: Use at all locations where nonshrink grout is called for on the plans except for base plates greater than 3 feet wide by 3 feet long and, except for the setting of anchor rods, anchor bolts or reinforcing steel in concrete. 2. Flowable nonshrink cementitious grout: Use under all base plates greater in area than 3 feet by 3 feet. Use at all locations indicated to receive flowable nonshrink grout by the Drawings. The Contractor, at his/her option and convenience, may also substitute flowable nonshrink grout for general purpose nonshrink cementitious grout. 3. Nonshrink epoxy grout: Use for setting anchor rods, anchor bolts, and reinforcing steel in concrete and for all locations specifically indicated to receive epoxy grout. 4. Cement grout: Cement grout may be used for grouting incidental base plates for structural and miscellaneous steel such as post base plates for platforms, base plates for beams, etc. It shall not be used when nonshrink grout is specifically called for on the Drawings or for grouting primary structural steel members such as columns and girders. 03720 - 042 -02 03600 -10 GROUT August 2013 • • • 5. Concrete grout: Use for overlaying the base concrete under scraper mechanisms of clarifiers to allow more control in placing the surface grade. END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 03600 -11 GROUT August 2013 SECTION 03740 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and cut, remove, repair, or otherwise modify parts of existing concrete structures or appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Work under this Section shall also include bonding new concrete to existing concrete. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork. B. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement. C. Section 03250, Concrete Joints and Accessories. D. Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. E. Section 03360, Concrete Finishes. F. Section 03600, Grout. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01330, a schedule of Demolition and the detailed methods of demolition to be used at each location. B. Submit manufacturer's technical literature on all product brands proposed for use, to the Engineer for review. The submittal shall include the manufacturer's installation and/or application instructions. C. When substitutions for acceptable brands of materials specified herein are proposed, submit brochures and technical data of the proposed substitutions to the Engineer for approval before delivery to the project. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM C881— Standard Specification for Epoxy- Resin -Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. 2. ASTM C882— Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy -Resin Systems Used with Concrete by Slant Sheer. 03720 - 042 -02 03740 -1 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR August 2013 TO CONCRETE 3. ASTM C883— Standard Test Method for Effective Shrinkage of Epoxy -Resin Systems Used with Concrete. 4. ASTM D570— Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. 5. ASTM D638— Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. 6. ASTM D695— Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics. 7. ASTM D732— Standard Test Method for Shear Strength of Plastics by Punch Tool. 8. ASTM D790— Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. No existing structure or concrete shall be shifted, cut, removed, or otherwise altered until authorization is given by the Engineer. B. When removing materials or portions of existing structures and when making openings in existing structures, all precautions shall be taken and all necessary barriers, shoring, bracing, and other protective devices shall be erected to prevent damage to the structures beyond the limits necessary for the new work, protect personnel, control dust, and prevent damage to the structures or contents by falling or flying debris. Unless otherwise permitted, shown, or specified, line drilling will be required in cutting existing concrete. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: The manufacturer of the specified products shall have a minimum of 10 years of experience in the manufacture of such products and shall have an ongoing program of training, certifying, and technically supporting the Contractor's personnel. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver the specified products in original, unopened containers with the manufacturer's name, labels, product identification, and batch numbers. B. Store and condition the specified product as recommended by the manufacturer. 03720 - 042 -02 03740 -2 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR August 2013 TO CONCRETE • • • • • • PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General 1. Materials shall comply with this Section and any state or local regulations. B. Epoxy Bonding Agent 1. General a. The epoxy bonding agent shall be a two- component, solvent -free, asbestos -free moisture insensitive epoxy resin material used to bond plastic concrete to hardened concrete complying with the requirements of ASTM C881, Type II and the additional requirements specified herein. 2. Material a. Properties of the cured material: (1) Compressive Strength (ASTM D695): 8,500 psi minimum at 28 days. (2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 4,000 psi minimum at 14 days. (3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 — Modulus of Rupture): 6,300 psi minimum at 14 days. (4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 5,000 psi minimum at 14 days. (5) Water Absorption (ASTM D570 — 2 -hour boil): One percent maximum at 14 days. (6) Bond Strength (ASTM C882) Hardened to Plastic: 1,500 psi minimum at 14 days moist cure. (7) Effective Shrinkage (ASTM C883): Passes Test. (8) Color: Gray. 3. Approved manufacturers include: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ - Sikadur 32, Hi -Mod; Master Builder's, Cleveland, OH — Concresive Liquid (LPL) or equal. 03720 - 042 -02 03740 -3 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR August 2013 TO CONCRETE C. Epoxy Paste 1. General a. Epoxy Paste shall be a two- component, solvent -free, asbestos free, moisture insensitive epoxy resin material used to bond dissimilar materials to concrete and shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C881, Type I, Grade 3 and the additional requirements specified herein. It may also be used to patch existing surfaces where the glue line is 1/8 inch or less. 2. Material a. Properties of the cured material: (1) Compressive Properties (ASTM D695): 10,000 psi minimum at 28 days. (2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 3,000 psi minimum at 14 days. Elongation at Break - 0.3 percent minimum. (3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 — Modulus of Rupture): 3,700 psi minimum at 14 days. (4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 2,800 psi minimum at 14 days. (5) Water Absorption (ASTM D570): 1.0 percent maximum at 7 days. (6) Bond Strength (ASTM C882): 2,000 psi at 14 days moist cure. (7) Color: Concrete gray. 3. Approved manufacturers include: a. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ — Sikadur Hi -Mod LV 32; Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH — Concresive 1438 or equal. b. Overhead applications: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ — Sikadur Hi -Mod LV 31; Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH — Concresive 1438 or equal. D. Repair Mortal 1. General a. Repair mortal shall be a two - component, polymer modified, cement based, fast - setting, trowel grade, structural repair mortar 03720 - 042 -02 03740 -4 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR August 2013 TO CONCRETE • • • suitable for use on horizontal, vertical and overhead surfaces prepackaged product specifically formulated for the repair of concrete surface defects. 2. Material a. Properties of the cured material: (1) Compressive Strength (2 hours 50 percent RH) — 150 psi minimum. (2) Compressive Strength (28 days 50 percent RH) — 150 psi minimum. (3) Bond Strength (pull off method) — 100 - percent concrete substrate failure. (4) This system shall conform with ANSI/NSF standards for surface contact with potable water. 3. Approved manufacturers include: a. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ — SikaTop 122 PLUS or equal. • b. Overhead applications: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ — SikaTop 123 PLUS or equal. • E. Non - Shrink Precision Cement Grout, Non - Shrink Cement Grout, Non - Shrink Epoxy Grout and Polymer Modified mortar are included in Section 03600, Grout. F. Adhesive Capsule type anchor system shall be equal to the HVA adhesive Anchoring System by Hilti Fastening Systems, Tulsa, OK. The capsule shall consist of a sealed glass capsule containing premeasured amounts of polyester or vinylester resin, quartz sand aggregate and a hardener contained in a separate vial within the capsule. Where the adhesive anchor is under sustained tensile loading (i.e., vertically installed anchors), the anchor system shall be Hilti HIT RE -500 SD by Hilti Fastening Systems, Tulsa, OK. G. Acrylic Latex Bonding Agents shall not be used for this project. H. Crack Repair Epoxy Adhesive 1. General a. Crack Repair Epoxy Adhesive shall be a two- component, solvent -free, moisture insensitive epoxy resin material suitable for 03720 - 042 -02 03740 -5 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR August 2013 TO CONCRETE crack grouting by injection or gravity feed. It shall be formulated for the specific size of opening or crack being injected. b. All concrete surfaces containing potable water or water to be treated for potable use that are repaired by the epoxy adhesive injection system shall be coated with an acceptable epoxy coating system that conforms with ANSI/NSF standards for surface contact with potable water. 2. Material a. Properties of the cured material: • (1) Compressive Properties (ASTM D695): 10,000 psi minimum at 28 days. (2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 5,300 psi minimum at 14 days. Elongation at Break — 2 to 5 percent. (3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 — Modulus of Rupture): 12,000 psi minimum at 14 days (gravity); 4,600 psi minimum at 14 days (injection). (4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 3,700 psi minimum at 14 days. • (5) Water Absorption (ASTM D570 — 2 hour boil): 1.5 percent maximum at 7 days. (6) Bond Strength (ASTM C882): 2,400 psi at 2 days dry; 2,000 psi at 14 days dry plus 12 days moist. (7) Effective Shrinkage (ASTM C883): Passes Test. 3. Approved manufacturers include: a. For standard applications: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ — Sikadur Hi -Mod; Master Builders Inc., Cleveland, OH — Concressive 1380 or equal. b. For very thin applications: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ. c. Sikadur Hi -Mod LV; Master Builders Inc., Cleveland, OH — Concressive 1468 or equal. • 03720 - 042 -02 03740 -6 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR August 2013 TO CONCRETE • • • PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Cut, repair, reuse, demolish, excavate or otherwise modify parts of the existing structures or appurtenances, as indicated on the Drawings, specified herein, or necessary to permit completion of the Work. Finishes, joints, reinforcements, sealants, etc., are specified in respective Sections. All work shall comply with other requirements of this of Section and as shown on the Drawings. B. All commercial products specified in this Section shall be stored, mixed, and applied in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. In all cases where concrete is repaired in the vicinity of an expansion joint or control joint the repairs shall be made to preserve the isolation between components on either side of the joint. D. When drilling holes for dowels/bolts at new or existing concrete, drilling shall stop if rebar is encountered. As approved by the Engineer, the hole location shall be relocated to avoid rebar. Rebar shall not be cut without prior approval by the Engineer. Where possible, rebar locations shall be identified prior to drilling using " rebar locators" so that drilled hole locations may be adjusted to avoid rebar interference. 3.02 CONCRETE REMOVAL A. Concrete designated to be removed to specific limits as shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer shall be done by line drilling at limits followed by chipping or jack- hammering as appropriate in areas where concrete is to be taken out. Remove concrete in such a manner that surrounding concrete or existing reinforcing to be left in place and existing in place equipment is not damaged. Sawcutting at limits of concrete to be removed shall only be done if indicated on the Drawings or after obtaining written approval from the Engineer. B. Where existing reinforcing is exposed due to sawcutting /core drilling and no new material is to be placed on the sawcut surface, a coating or surface treatment of epoxy paste shall be applied to the entire cut surface to a thickness of 1/4 inch. C. In all cases where the joint between new concrete or grout and existing concrete will be exposed in the finished work, except as otherwise shown or specified, the edge of concrete removal shall be a 1 inch deep sawcut on each exposed surface of the existing concrete. 03720 - 042 -02 03740 -7 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR August 2013 TO CONCRETE D. Concrete specified to be left in place that is damaged shall be repaired by approved means to the satisfaction of the Engineer. E. The Engineer may from time to time direct the Contractor to make additional repairs to existing concrete. These repairs shall be made as specified or by such other methods as may be appropriate. 3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Connection surfaces shall be prepared as specified below for concrete areas requiring patching, repairs, or modifications as shown on the Drawings, specified herein, or as directed by the Engineer. B. Remove all deteriorated materials, dirt, oil, grease, and all other bond inhibiting materials from the surface by dry mechanical means, i.e., sandblasting, grinding, etc., as approved by the Engineer. Be sure the areas are not less than 1/2 inch in depth. Irregular voids or surface stones need not be removed if they are sound, free of laitance, and firmly embedded into parent concrete, subject to the Engineer's final inspection. C. If reinforcing steel is exposed, it must be mechanically cleaned to remove all contaminants, rust, etc, as approved by the Engineer. If half of the diameter of the reinforcing steel is exposed, chip out behind the steel. The distance chipped behind the steel shall be a minimum of 1/2 inch. Reinforcing to be saved shall not be damaged during the demolition operation. D. Reinforcing from existing demolished concrete that is shown to be incorporated in new concrete shall be cleaned by mechanical means to remove all loose material and products of corrosion before proceeding with the repair. It shall be cut, bent, or lapped to new reinforcing as shown on the Drawings and provided with a minimum cover all around as specified on the Drawings or 2 inches. E. The following are specific concrete surface preparation "methods" are to be used where called for on the Drawings, specified herein or as directed by the Engineer. All installation of anchors shall be according to the manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Method A: After the existing concrete surface at connection has been roughened and cleaned, thoroughly moisten the existing surface with water. Brush on a 1/16 -inch layer of cement and water mixed to the consistency of a heavy paste. Immediately after application of cement paste, place new concrete or grout mixture as detailed on the Drawings. 03720- 042 -02 03740 -8 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR August 2013 TO CONCRETE • • • • • 2. Method B: After the existing concrete surface has been roughened and cleaned, apply epoxy bonding agent at connection surface. The field preparation and application of the epoxy bonding agent shall comply strictly with the manufacturer's recommendations. Place new concrete or grout mixture to limits shown on the Drawings within time constraints recommended by the manufacturer to ensure bond. 3. Method C: Drill a hole 1/4 inch larger than the diameter of the dowel. The hole shall be blown clear of loose particles and dust just prior to installing epoxy. The drilled hole shall first be filled with epoxy paste, and then dowels/bolts shall be buttered with paste then inserted by tapping. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, deformed bars shall be drilled and set to a depth of ten bar diameters and smooth bars shall be drilled and set to a depth of fifteen bar diameters. If not noted on the Drawings, the Engineer will provide details regarding the size and spacing of dowels. 4. Method D: Combination of Methods B and C. 5. Method E: Capsule anchor system shall be set in existing concrete by drilling holes to the required depth to develop the full tensile and shear strengths of the anchor material being used. The anchor bolts system shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendation in holes sized as required. The anchor stud bolt, rebar, or other embedment item shall be tipped with a double 45- degree chamfered point, securely fastened into the chuck of all rotary percussion hammer drill and drilled into the capsule filled hole. 3.04 GROUTING A. Grouting shall be as specified in Section 03600. 3.05 CRACK REPAIR A. Cracks on horizontal surfaces shall be repaired by gravity feeding crack sealant into cracks per manufacturer's recommendations. If cracks are less than 1/16 inch in thickness they shall be pressure injected. B. Cracks on vertical surfaces shall be repaired by pressure injecting crack sealant through valves sealed to surface with crack repair epoxy adhesive per manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 03740 -9 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR August 2013 TO CONCRETE • • • DIVISION 5 METALS • • • SECTION 05520 METAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section includes the following: 1. Aluminum pipe handrails and railings. 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Specification Sections. B. Welder certificates signed by the Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article. C. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include a list of completed projects with project name, addresses, names of Engineers and Owner, and other information specified. D. Shop drawings shall indicate loading requirements as specified in this Section and be signed and sealed by a Registered Structural Engineer to be in conformance with all requirements as specified in this Section and in accordance with all State and local codes and regulations. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a 03720 - 042 -02 05520 -1 METAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS August 2013 part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. Aluminum Association (AA) 1. AA- M12- C22 -A41 —Clear Class 1 Anodized. 2. AA- M32- C22 -A41— Stainless Steel, Type 304. B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 1. AISI 316— Stainless Ball Bearings – Corrosion Resistant Bearings. C. American Society for Testing of Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A36— Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A47— Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. 3. ASTM A48— Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 4. ASTM A53— Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot - Dipped, Zinc - Coated, Welded and Seamless. 5. ASTM A312— Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes. 6. ASTM A554— Standard Specification for Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing. 7. ASTM A743— Standard Specification for Castings, Iron - Chromium, Iron - Chromium- Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for General Application. D. American Welding Society (AWS) 1. AWS D1.1— Structural Welding Code – Steel. 2. AWS D1.2— Structural Welding Code – Aluminum. 3. AWS D1.6— Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel. E. Federal Specifications (FS) 1. FS FF -S- 325— Shield, Expansion; Nail Expansion, and Nail, Drive Screw (Devices, Anchoring, Masonry). 2. FS FF -B -588— Toggle Bolts. F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 101 —Life Safety Code. 03720 - 042 -02 05520 -2 METAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS August 2013 • • • • 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Select a firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project with a record of successful in- service performance and with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work. B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code — Steel," AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code — Stainless Steel" and AWS D1.2 "Structural Welding Code — Aluminum." 1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone re- certification. C. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices that must be set in concrete or built into masonry for installing stair work. Coordinate templates for installing anchorage devices. 1. See Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete, for installation of inserts and anchorage devices. D. Shop Assembly: Pre - assemble items in shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Mark units for re- assembly and coordinated installation. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 03720 - 042 -02 05520 -3 METAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS August 2013 1.10 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS A. Design, engineer, and provide railings to withstand the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials involved, including anchors and connections: 1. Handrails: 250 pounds, concentrated load applied at any point in any direction and 50 pounds per linear foot applied in any direction. 2. Guardrails: a. 250 pounds, concentrated load applied at any point in any direction. b. 50 pounds per linear foot applied in any direction. c. 250 pounds, concentrated load applied on a 1 -foot area at any point in the system. 3. Loading conditions need not be assumed to act concurrently, but each shall be applied to produce the maximum stress in each respective component or any of the supporting components. B. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior railings that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 °F, ambient; 180 °F, material surfaces. 1.11 CODES AND REGULATIONS A. Handrails and railings shall conform to the Accessibility Requirements Manual from the Florida Department of Community Affairs, Florida Board of Building Codes and Standards. B. Handrails and railings shall conform to NFPA 101, Life Safety Code. C. Handrails and railings shall conform to Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Regulations. 03720 - 042 -02 05520 -4 METAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS August 2013 • • • • PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL PIPE HANDRAILS AND ACCESSORIES (NOT USED) 2.02 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE HANDRAILS AND ACCESSORIES (NOT USED) 2.03 ALUMINUM PIPE HANDRAILS AND ACCESSORIES • A. Handrail and railing systems shall comply with the requirements of OSHA and FBC. B. Aluminum railing and handrail shall be a welded or mechanically fastened, seamless, extruded- aluminum pipe system. Rails shall be 6063 -T6 alloy. Posts shall be 6061 -T6 alloy. Splice and reinforcing sleeves, brackets, end caps, toeboards, etc., shall be aluminum alloy 6063 -T6 or 6061 -T6. Cast fittings shall be aluminum alloy No. 214. Railing system fastening hardware shall be AISI 316 stainless steel. Aluminum shall have a mill finish. After welding, aluminum shall be anodized. All railing, posts, toeboards, and exposed aluminum shall be anodized with an architectural Class I satin finish providing a minimum coating thickness of 0.7 mils and a minimum coating weight of 32 milligrams per square inch in compliance with AA- M12- C22 -A41. C. Railing shall be two -rail welded railing systems, as shown on the Drawings, fabricated with 1 -1/2 -inch nominal diameter pipe. Posts shall be Schedule 80 pipe minimum and rails and handrail shall be Schedule 40 pipe minimum. Posts and top rails shall be continuous. Spacing of posts shall not exceed 5 feet on center and shall be uniformly spaced except as otherwise shown on the Drawings. Posts will be required on each side of structure expansion joints. All railing posts shall be vertical. D. Welds shall be circumferential welds ground smooth and even to produce a railing that is neat in appearance and structurally sound. Welding methods shall be in conformity with AWS standards for the materials being joined. All rail -to -post connections shall be coped and fastened by continuous welds. There shall be no burrs, sharp edges, or protrusions on any weld on any part of the handrail system. After fabrication, the welds and surrounding areas shall be cleaned and hand - buffed to blend with the adjacent finish. All mechanical fasteners shall be unobtrusively located in countersunk holes with the top flush with the surface of the rail. Bends in the railing shall be as indicated by the Drawings. No distortion of the circular railing shape will be allowed. Bends and terminal sections shall be made without the use of fittings. Corner bends shall be mitered and welded bends. 03720 - 042 -02 05520 -5 METAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS August 2013 E. The bases or supports for railing posts and handrail shall be the types indicated on the Drawings. 1. Where non - removable railing is set in concrete, the posts shall be placed in 2 -1/2- inch - diameter formed concrete openings and firmly caulked with a nonsulphur compound, hydraulic cement equal to Por -Rok by Minwax Construction Products Division Sterling Drug, Montvale, NJ. Collars shall be placed around the post bases and fastened in place with set screws on the side of the post away from the walkway. Posts shall be placed with the centerline 4 inches from the edge of the concrete except that posts shall be set at the centerline of concrete curbs. 2. Stainless steel and aluminum railing posts, which may collect condensation, shall have a 3/16 -inch drain hole drilled immediately above the concrete encased area, the base flange, or supporting socket on the side away from the walking area. The bottom of the rail post between the drain hole and the bottom of the post shall be filled with an inert material such as a compressed closed -cell neoprene rod. 3. Where handrail is to be fastened to walls, the rails shall be provided with screwed wall flanges fastened to the walls with three 3/8 -inch stainless - steel flat -head machine screws. F. All handrails shall be capable of withstanding a load of 200 pounds, minimum, applied in any direction at any point on the top rail. In addition, the handrail shall be capable of supporting a lateral load of 50 pounds per foot applied horizontally to the top railing. Handrails shall meet the minimum requirements of all national, state, and local standards, regulations, and code requirements, including OSHA. G. Safety gates for railing openings shall be fabricated of matching pipe and rail material and configuration. The gates shall be self - closing gates with approved stop, latch, and stainless -steel closure spring and hinges. H. Barrier chains for railing openings shall be fabricated of stainless -steel chains. Chain shall be '/4 -inch stainless -steel links, with 11 links per foot as manufactured by Eastern Chain Works, Inc., NY; Lawrence Metal Products, Inc., or equal. Chains shall be fastened to the handrail posts at the elevation of each rail. One end of each chain shall be connected to one post with a 1/4- inch - diameter stainless - steel eye bolt and the other end shall be connected to the other post by a heavy chromium - plated bronze swivel eye slide harness snap and a similar eye bolt. I. Toeboards shall be provided on all railing adjacent to a drop in elevation of 4 feet or more. Toeboards are not required on the inclined portion of stairway railings or where concrete or steel curbs 4 inches or more in height are present. Toeboards 03720- 042 -02 05520 -6 METAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS August 2013 • • • • • shall be 4- inch -high channels of the same material as the railing. The channels shall have a minimum thickness of 1/8 -inch and have flanges of not less than 3/4 inch or more than 1 -1/2- inches in width. Toeboards shall be positioned with a maximum clearance of 1/4 inch from the floor and fastened to railing posts with 1/4 -inch stainless steel U- bolts, with J -bolts at corner posts and with clip angles and two 1/4 -inch stainless -steel expansion bolts at walls. J. All railings shall be properly protected by paper or by an approved coating or by both against scratching, splashes or mortar, paint, or other defacements during transportation and erection and until adjacent work by other trades has been completed. After protective materials are removed, the surfaces shall be made clean and free from stains, marks, or defects of any kind. K. Handrails and accessories shall be as manufactured by Thompson Fabricating Co. or approved equal. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Interconnect railing and handrail members by butt- welding or welding with internal connectors, at fabricator's option, unless otherwise indicated. 1. At tee and cross intersections, provide coped joints. 2. At bends, interconnect pipe by prefabricated elbow fittings or flush radius bends, as applicable, of radiuses indicated. 3. Form bends by use of prefabricated elbow fittings and radius bends or by bending pipe at the fabricator's option. B. Form simple and compound curves by bending pipe in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain the cylindrical cross - section of pipe throughout the entire bend without buckling, twisting, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of pipe. C. Provide wall returns at the ends of wall- mounted handrails, except where otherwise indicated. D. Close exposed ends of pipe by welding 3/16- inch -thick plate in place or by use of prefabricated fittings. E. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnections of pipe and attachment of railings and handrails to other work. Furnish inserts and other 03720 - 042 -02 05520 -7 METAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS August 2013 anchorage devices for connecting railings and handrails to concrete or masonry work. 1. For railings posts set in concrete, provide sleeves of galvanized steel pipe not less than 6 inches long and with an inside diameter not less than Y2 inch greater than the outside diameter of pipe. Provide steel plate closure welded to the bottom of the sleeve and of width and length not less than 1 inch greater than the outside diameter of the sleeve. 2. Provide friction fit, removable covers designed to keep sleeves clean and hold the top edge of the sleeve V2 inch below the finished surface of concrete. F. Removable sections shall be fabricated of matching pipe, rail material, and configuration. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLING HANDRAILS A. Railing shall be assembled in sections as long as practical but shall not be greater than 24 feet in length. Use a field splice when an assembled section is to be attached to another section. Field splices shall be used in all railing panels that cross over structure - expansion joints. 1. Field splices shall use internal splice sleeves located within 8 inches of railing posts. The sleeve shall be welded to the rail on one side and fastened with a set screw to the rail on the other side. The field splice shall be detailed to take the differential expansion between the railing system and the supporting structure. 2. When the field splice occurs in a railing panel crossing a structure expansion joint, the sleeve shall be welded to the rail on one side and be free to slide in the rail on the other side. The field splice shall be detailed to take the same movement as the structure expansion joint. B. Secure handrails to wall with wall brackets and end fittings. Provide bracket with not less than PA-inch clearance from the inside face of the handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated. If not indicated, locate brackets at the spacing required for design loading. Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to building construction as follows: 1. Use bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. 03720 - 042 -02 05520 -8 METAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS August 2013 • • • 2. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled -in expansion shield and either concealed hanger bolt or exposed lag bolt, as applicable. 3. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts having square heads. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF RAILINGS A. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Install posts at spacing indicated. If not indicated, install posts as required by design loadings. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and railings ends to building construction as follows: 1. Anchor posts in concrete by pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After the posts have been inserted into the sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve solid with nonshrink grout. a. Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off excess grout, and leave 1/8 -inch build -up, sloped away from the post. For installation exposed on exterior or to flow of water, seal grout to comply with the grout manufacturer's directions. 2. Anchor posts with steel oval flanges, angle type or floor type as required by conditions, welded to posts and bolted to supporting members. 3. Anchor rail ends into concrete and masonry with round flanges welded to rail ends and anchored into wall construction with lead expansion shields and bolts. 4. Anchor rail ends to metal with oval or round flanges welded to rail ends and bolted to structural metal members, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Isolate railings when they are mounted to dissimilar materials. 3.03 FIELD SPLICES A. Splices shall be butted and reinforced by a tight - fitting dowel or sleeve not less than 6 inches in length. Center fitting dowels or sleeves to the splice joint. Tack weld or epoxy cement dowel or sleeve to one side of the splice. B. Place field splices within 8 inches of railing posts. 03720 - 042 -02 05520 -9 METAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS August 2013 3.04 REMOVABLE RAILING SECTIONS A. Provide removable railing sections as indicated. Safety gates shall be self - closing gates with approved stop, latch, and stainless -steel closure spring and hinges. END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 05520 -10 METAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS August 2013 • • • • DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS • SECTION 06610 FRP BAFFLE WALLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section includes provisions for the materials and complete installation for the Owner pre - purchased fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) baffle wall system as shown in the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. B. Section 01600, Materials and Equipment. C. Section 01770, Project Closeout. D. Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. E. Section 09900, Painting and Coating. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation in accordance with Section 01600, Materials and Equipment. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor shall inspect the Owner pre - purchased equipment; take field measurements; and verify that he has all required items, equipment, manufacturer's instructions before proceeding with the installation. B. These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is required but do not cover all details that may vary in accordance with the exact requirements of the equipment as provided. They are, however, intended to cover the installation and field testing of all materials and apparatus as required. Any additional equipment necessary for the proper operation of the proposed 03720- 042 -02 06610 -1 FRP BAFFLE WALLS August 2013 installation not specifically mentioned in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings shall be furnished and installed at no change in Contract Price or Time. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. B. The Contractor shall do the following: 1. Store and handle equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Properly protect all equipment and parts so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the units and equipment are ready for operation. 3. Properly protect all equipment and parts against any damage during a prolonged storage period at the site. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) 1.12 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O &M) MANUALS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS (NOT USED) 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. The Owner has pre - purchased the FRP baffle wall system. A copy of the manufacturer's quote is report is included in an Appendix of these specifications. 03720 - 042 -02 06610 -2 FRP BAFFLE WALLS August 2013 • • B. The Contractor shall review the manufacturer's quote, coordinate the requirements of the installation and any additional equipment and material needs with the manufacturer prior to bidding, and provide all additional items and equipment necessary for installation of the FRP baffle water system. 2.03 MATERIALS (NOT USED) 2.04 PAINTING AND COATINGS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MATERIAL HANDLING A. The Contractor shall protect FRP materials from cuts, scratches, gouges, abrasions, and impacts. When lifting crated FRP materials, spreader bars shall be used (not wire slings unless materials are fully protected). FRP components shall not be dragged across one another unless separated by a non - scratching spacer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall obtain all installation recommendations directly from the manufacturer. All work shall be performed according to the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Before placing and attaching components, the Contractor shall confirm the alignment and location of column base plates, surfaces, brackets, saddles, etc. All bearing surfaces must be level, flat, clean and free of debris. C. Erection shall proceed according to the manufacturer's recommendations. D. The Contractor shall install pads, curbs, or piers to modify uneven or sloped concrete surfaces to create a flat, level surface for baffle system attachment. E. The Contractor shall field -cut materials as required and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. F. The Contractor shall seal field cut edges. G. The Contractor shall install beams and connections as recommended by the manufacturer. Field modifications (cuts, copes, holes, etc.) are not allowed without the manufacturer's written approval. Shim FRP beams with manufacturer approved materials only. 03720 - 042 -02 06610 -3 FRP BAFFLE WALLS August 2013 H. Before placement of baffle panels, the Contractor shall check alignment and location of FRP framing members and existing structure. Baffle panels shall be nested at side -lap conditions. I. The Contractor shall adjust FRP baffle panels for proper bearing and alignment. The first panel installed at the bottom of the wall must have the side with a flat end (not an upturn) at the bottom. J. The Contractor shall drill holes for fasteners through baffle panel and support beam. K. The Contractor shall fasten baffle panels to structural supports as shown on the approved layout drawings. Unless noted otherwise, FRP baffle panels shall be attached to each support with three nut and bolt assemblies with 1.25 -inch- diameter Fender washers. At panel side laps, fastening shall be through two panels. Refer to manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings for proper fastener selection and procedure. L. The Contractor shall seal field- drilled holes. M. The Contractor shall place and fasten other miscellaneous components or hardware as shown on the approved drawings. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION A. The manufacturer' representative will review the installation, direct the Contractor to make any required corrective actions, and certify the installation after all corrective actions are complete. These manufacturer services are included in the manufacturer's quote. If additional manufacturer services are needed due to improper planning or workmanship by the Contractor, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for cost of these services. The reimbursement amount will be deducted from the Contractor's pay application. END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 06610 -4 FRP BAFFLE WALLS August 2013 • • DIVISION 9 FINISHES • • SECTION 09900 PAINTING AND COATING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section includes materials for and application of painting and coating systems for the following surfaces: 1. Submerged metal. 2. Exposed metal. 3. Buried metal. 4. Concrete and masonry. 5. PVC and FRP. 6. Metal in contact with concrete. B. It does not include coating steel water tanks and reservoirs. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03300, Cast -In -Place Concrete. B. Section 03360, Concrete Finishes. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. B. Submit manufacturer's data sheets showing the following information: 1. Percent solids by volume. 2. Minimum and maximum recommended dry-film thickness per coat for prime, intermediate, and finish coats. 3. Recommended surface preparation. 4. Recommended thinners. • 5. Statement verifying that the specified prime coat is recommended by the manufacturer for use with the specified intermediate and finish coats. 03720 - 042-02 09900 -1 PAINTING AND COATING August 2013 6. Application instructions including recommended equipment and temperature limitations. 7. Curing requirements and instructions. C. Submit color swatches. D. Submit certificate identifying the type and gradation of abrasives used for surface preparation. E. Submit material safety data sheets for each coating. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 03720 - 042 -02 August 2013 1. ASTM A780— Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot -Dip Galvanized Coatings. 2. ASTM C501— Standard Test Method for Relative Resistance to Wear of Unglazed Ceramic Tile by the Taber Abraser. 3. ASTM D520— Standard Specification for Zinc Dust Pigment. 4. ASTM D522— Standard Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings. 5. ASTM D1002— Standard Test Method for Apparent Shear Strength of Single- Lap -Joint Adhesively Bonded Metal Specimens by Tension Loading (Metal -to- Metal). 6. ASTM D2240— Standard Test Method for Rubber Property — Durometer Hardness. 7. ASTM D2697— Standard Test Method for Volume Nonvolatile Matter in Clear or Pigmented Coatings. 8. ASTM D3734— Standard Specification for High -Flash Aromatic Naphthas. 9. ASTM D4060— Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser. 10. ASTM D4138— Standard Practices for Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of Protective Coating Systems by Destructive, Cross - Sectioning Means. 09900 -2 PAINTING AND COATING • • • • 11. ASTM D4258— Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating. 12. ASTM D4260— Standard Practice for Liquid and Gelled Acid Etching of Concrete. 13. ASTM D4261— Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete Unit Masonry for Coating. 14. ASTM D4263— Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. 15. ASTM D4787— Standard Practice for Continuity Verification of Liquid or Sheet Linings Applied to Concrete Substrates. 16. ASTM D6386— Standard Practice for Preparation of Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coated Iron and Steel Product and Hardware Surfaces for Painting. 17. ASTM D7091— Standard Practice for Nondestructive Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of Nonmagnetic Coatings Applied to Ferrous Metals and Nonmagnetic, Nonconductive Coatings Applied to Non - Ferrous Metals. 18. ASTM E84— Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. National Association of Corrosion Engineers International (NACE) 1. NACE SP0188— Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates. C. Steel Structure Painting Council (SSPC) 1. SSPC PA -1 —Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel. 2. SSPC PA- 2— Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gauges. 3. SSPC SP -1— Solvent Cleaning. 4. SSPC SP -2 —Hand Tool Cleaning. 5. SSPC SP -3 —Power Tool Cleaning. 6. SSPC SP -5 —White Metal Blast Cleaning. 7. SSPC SP -6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. 8. SSPC SP -7— Brush -Off Blast Cleaning. 9. SSPC SP -10 —Near -White Blast Cleaning. 10. SSPC SP -11 —Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal. 11. SSPC SP- 13— Surface Preparation of Concrete. D. U.S. Department of Defense (MIL) 1. MIL -P- 21035 —Paint High Zinc Dust Content, Galvanizing Repair. 03720 - 042 -02 09900 -3 PAINTING AND COATING August 2013 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 MOCK -UP (NOT USED) 1.12 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 PAINTING AND COATING SYSTEMS The following index lists the various painting and coating systems by service and generic type: • • PAINT COATINGS SYSTEM INDEX No. Title Generic Coating Submerged Metal Coating Systems 7. 1 Submerged Metal, Potable or Nonpotable Water ( Epoxy Exposed Metal Coating Systems 10. Exposed Metal, Corrosive Environment High -build epoxy (two -coat system) with polyurethane topcoat 18. Exposed Metal, Organic Zinc Primer for Shop Coating and Field Touch -Up Organic zinc Buried Metal Coating Systems 21. Buried Metal Epoxy 24. Buried Metal Corrosion- resisting grease Concrete and Masonry Coating Systems PVC, CPVC, and FRP Coating Systems 41. 1 PVC and FRP, Ultraviolet Exposure or Color Coding 1 Polyurethane Coating Systems for Miscellaneous Metals 51. Insulate Aluminum (Insulation) from Concrete and Carbon Steel Bituminous ' 03720 - 042 -02 August 2013 09900 -4 PAINTING AND COATING • These systems are specified in detail in the following Paragraphs. For each coating, the required surface preparation, prime coat, intermediate coat (if required), topcoat, and coating thicknesses are described. Mil thicknesses shown are minimum dry-film thicknesses. A. Submerged Metal Coating Systems 1. System No. 7— Submerged Metal, Potable or Nonpotable Water: a. Type: Epoxy: 100% sbv Polyamine Epoxy with near "0" VOC. b. Service Conditions: For use with structures, valves, piping, or equipment immersed in potable or nonpotable water. c. Surface Preparation: Solvent clean per SSPC -SP1 to remove contaminants from the surface. Abrasive blast per SSPC SP -10, Near Abrasive White Metal Blast Cleaning. d. Coating System: Apply the manufacturer's recommended number of coats to attain the specified minimum coating thickness. Products: Devoe Bar -Rust 233H; Tnemec N140; or equal. Color of topcoat: white. Each coat shall be a different color than the one preceding it. Tnemec Series N140 Pota -Pox Plus Polyamidoamine epoxy at 6.0 to 8.0 mils /coat. Apply two (2) coats. Total system should not exceed 17 mils. B. Exposed Metal Coating Systems 1. System No. 10— Exposed Metal, Corrosive Environment: a. Type: High -build epoxy intermediate coat having a minimum volume solids of 60 %, with an inorganic zinc prime coat and a pigmented polyurethane finish coat having a minimum volume solids of 52 %. b. Service Conditions: For use with metal structures or pipes subjected to water condensation, chemical fumes such as hydrogen sulfide, salt spray, and chemical contact. c. Surface Preparation: Solvent clean per SSPC -SP1 to remove contaminants from the surface. Abrasive blast per SSPC- SP -10, Near White Metal Blast Cleaning. d. Prime Coat: Self- curing, two- component inorganic zinc -rich coating recommended by the manufacturer for overcoating with a 03720 - 042 -02 09900 -5 PAINTING AND COATING August 2013 high -build epoxy finish coat. Minimum zinc content shall be 12 pounds per gallon. Apply to a thickness of 3 mils. Products: Tnemec Series 90 -97; or equal. e. Intermediate Coat: Tnemec Series 104; or equal. Film thickness: 5.0 to 8.0 mils /coat. Minimum solids by volume should be 82 %. f. Finish Coat: Two - component pigmented acrylic or aliphatic polyurethane, minimum 70% sbv recommended by the manufacturer for overcoating a high -build epoxy coating. Apply to a thickness of at least 2 mils. Products: Tnemec Series 1075; or equal. 2. System No. 18— Exposed Metal Organic Zinc Primer for Shop Coating and Field Touch -Up: a. Type: Organic zinc primer having a minimum zinc content of 14 pounds per gallon. b. Service Conditions: For use as a shop - applied primer or field touch -up primer over inorganic zinc prime coatings on exposed metal. c. Surface Preparation: Solvent clean per SSPC -SP1 to remove contaminants from the surface. Abrasive blast per SSPC- SP -10, Near White Metal Blast Cleaning. d. Coating: Coating shall be of the two- or three- component converted epoxy, epoxy phenolic, or urethane type. Products: Tnemec 90 -97; or equal. Applied to a minimum dry -film thickness of 3 mils. Organic zinc primer shall be manufactured by the prime coat manufacturer. C. Buried Metal Coating Systems 1. System No. 21— Buried Metal: a. Type: High solids Cycloaliphatic Amine epoxy or phenolic epoxy having minimum volume solids of 80% (ASTM D2697). b. Service Conditions: Buried metal, such as valves, flanges, bolts, nuts, structural steel, and fittings. 03720 - 042 -02 09900 -6 PAINTING AND COATING August 2013 • • c. Surface Preparation: Solvent clean per SSPC -SP1 to remove contaminants from the surface. Abrasive blast per SSPC- SP -10, Near White Metal Blast Cleaning. d. Coating System: Apply three or more coats of Ameron 400; Tnemec 104 HS (6.0 to 8.0 mils per coat); ICI Devoe Bar -Rust 233H; Carboline 890LT; Sherwin - Williams Tank Clad HS B62 -80 Series/B60V80 Series at 5.0 to 8.0 mils /coat or equal; 30 mils total. Maximum thickness of an individual coating shall not exceed the manufacturer's recommendation. 2. System No. 24— Buried Metal: a. Type: Corrosion- resisting grease. b. Service Conditions: Buried metal, such as bolts, bolt threads, tie rods, and nuts. c. Surface Preparation: Solvent clean per SSPC -SP1 to remove contaminants from the surface. Power Tool Clean per SSPC -SP3 as a minimum. Abrasive blasting per SSPC -SP -6, Commercial Blast Cleaning is preferred. d. Coating: NO -OX -ID GG -2 as manufactured by Sanchem, Inc. Apply to a minimum thickness of 1/4 inch. D. PVC and FRP Coating System 1. System No. 41 —PVC and FRP Ultraviolet Exposure or Color Coding: a. Type: Epoxy primer with minimum volume solids of 54% and a pigmented polyurethane enamel having a minimum volume solids of 66 %. b. Service Conditions: Color coding of PVC or FRP exposed to sunlight. c. Surface Preparation: Clean the surface per SSPC SP -1, Solvent Cleaning. Then, lightly abrade the surface with medium -grain sandpaper. d. Prime Coat: One coat of Tnemec Series N69 Epoxoline; or engineer approved equal. Apply to a minimum dry-film thickness of 4 mils. 03720 - 042 -02 09900 -7 PAINTING AND COATING August 2013 e. Finish Coat: One coat of Tnemec Series 1075; or engineer approved equal. Apply to a minimum dry -film thickness of 3 mils. E. Coating Systems for Miscellaneous Metals 1. System No. 51— Insulate Aluminum (Insulation) from Concrete and Carbon Steel: a. Type: Bituminous paint having a minimum volume solids of 68% coal -tar pitch based. b. Service Conditions: Coat areas of aluminum grating, stairs, structural members or aluminum fabrications, in contact with concrete or carbon steel with this system. c. Surface Preparation: Solvent or steam clean in accordance with SSPC SP -1; do not use alkali cleaning. Then dust blast. Option to hand or power scarify. d. Prime Coat: Apply synthetic resin or epoxy primer to metal surface before finish coats. Products: International Intervinux VTA528/529, or equal. No primer required for Carboline or Tnemec. e. Finish Coat: Carboline Super Service Black; Tnemec 46 -465; International Intertuf 100; or equal. Apply two coats to a minimum dry-film thickness of 8.0 to 12.0 mils /coat. F. Abrasives for Surface Preparation 1. Abrasives used for preparation of ferrous (excluding stainless steel) surfaces shall be one of the following: a. 16- to 30- or 16- to 40 -mesh silica sand or mineral grit. b. 20- to 40 -mesh garnet. c. Crushed iron slag, 100% retained on No. 80 mesh. d. SAE Grade G -40 or G -50 iron or steel grit. 2. In the above gradations, 100% of the material shall pass through the first stated sieve size and 100% shall be retained on the second stated sieve size. 03720 - 042 -02 09900 -8 PAINTING AND COATING August 2013 • • • PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WEATHER CONDITIONS A. Do not paint in the rain, wind, snow, mist, or fog or when steel or metal surface temperatures are less than 5 °F above the dew point. B. Do not apply paint when the relative humidity is above 85 %. C. Do not paint when temperature of metal to be painted is above 120 °F. D. Do not apply alkyd, inorganic zinc, silicone aluminum, or silicone acrylic paints if air or surface temperature is below 40 °F or expected to be below 40 °F within 24 hours. E. Do not apply epoxy, acrylic latex, and polyurethane paints on an exterior or interior surface if air or surface temperature is below 60 °F or expected to drop below 60 °F in 24 hours. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION PROCEDURES A. Remove oil and grease from metal surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP -1. Use clean cloths and cleaning solvents and wipe dry with clean cloths. Do not leave a film or greasy residue on the cleaned surfaces before abrasive blasting. Powerwashing with a biodegradable degreaser is also acceptable. B. Remove weld spatter and weld slag from metal surfaces and grind smoothly rough welds, beads, peaked corners, and sharp edges including erection lugs in accordance with SSPC SP -2 and SSPC SP -3. Grind 0.020 inch (minimum) off the weld caps on pipe weld seams. Grind outside sharp corners, such as the outside edges of flanges, to a minimum radius of 1/4 inch. C. Do not abrasive blast or prepare more surface area in one day than can be coated in one day; prepare surfaces and apply coatings the same day. Remove sharp edges, burrs, and weld spatter. Prime all areas before rust bloom forms and within the same day. D. Do not abrasive blast PVC or FRP piping or equipment. Do not abrasive blast epoxy- or enamel- coated pipe that has already been factory coated, except to repair scratched or damaged coatings. E. For carbon steel, do not touch the surface between the time of abrasive blasting and the time the coating is applied. Apply coatings within 2 hours of blasting or before any rust bloom forms. 03720 - 042 -02 09900 -9 PAINTING AND COATING August 2013 F. Surface preparation shall conform to the SSPC specifications as follows: Solvent Cleaning SP -1 Hand Tool Cleaning SP -2 Power Tool Cleaning SP -3 White Metal Blast Cleaning SP -5 Commercial Blast Cleaning SP -6 Brush -Off Blast Cleaning SP -7 Pickling SP -8 Near -White Blast Cleaning SP -10 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal SP -11 Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Steel and Other Hard Materials by High- and Ultrahigh- Pressure Water Jetting Before Recoating SP -12 Surface Preparation of Concrete SP -13 G. Wherever the words "solvent cleaning," "hand tool cleaning," "wire brushing," or "blast cleaning" or similar words are used in these Specifications or in the paint manufacturer's specifications, they shall be understood to refer to the applicable SSPC (Steel Structure Painting Council), surface preparation specifications listed above. H. Dust blasting is defined as cleaning the surface through the use of very fine abrasives, such as siliceous or mineral abrasives, 80 to 100 mesh. Apply a fine etch to the metal surface to clean the surface of any contamination or oxide and to provide a surface profile for the coating. Brush -off blasting of concrete and masonry surfaces is defined as opening subsurface holes and voids and etching the surface for a coating to bond. J. For carbon steel surfaces, after abrasive blast cleaning, the height of the surface profile shall be 2 to 3 mils. Verify the surface profile by measuring with an impresser tape acceptable to the Owner's Representative. Perform a minimum of one test per 100 square feet of surface area. Testing shall be witnessed by the Owner's Representative. The impresser tape used in the test shall be permanently marked with the date, time, and locations where the test was made. Test results shall be promptly presented to the Owner's Representative. K. Do not apply any part of a coating system before the Owner's Representative has reviewed the surface preparation. If coating has been applied without this review, if directed by the Owner's Representative, remove the applied coating by abrasive blasting and reapply the coat in accordance with this Specification. 03720 - 042 -02 09900 -10 PAINTING AND COATING August 2013 • • • • • 3.03 ABRASIVE BLAST CLEANING A. Use dry abrasive blast cleaning for metal surfaces. Do not use abrasives in automatic equipment that have become contaminated. When shop or field blast cleaning with handheld nozzles, do not recycle or reuse blast particles. B. After abrasive blast cleaning and before coating is applied, dry clean surfaces to be coated by dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming to remove residue from blasting. Apply the specified primer or touch -up coating within an 8 -hour working day. Do not apply coating over damp or moist surfaces. Reclean any blast - cleaned surface not coated within the 8 -hour period before applying primer or touch -up coating. C. Keep the area of the work in a clean condition and do not permit blasting particles to accumulate and constitute a nuisance or hazard. D. During abrasive blast cleaning, prevent damage to adjacent coatings. Schedule blast cleaning and coating so that dust, dirt, blast particles, old coatings, rust, mill scale, etc., will not damage or fall upon wet or newly coated surfaces. 3.04 PREPARATION OF CONCRETE AND MASONRY SURFACES TO BE COATED (NOT USED) 3.05 COATING STAINLESS STEEL (NOT USED) 3.06 PROCEDURES FOR ITEMS HAVING SHOP - APPLIED PRIME COATS A. After applying primer to surfaces, allow coating to cure for a minimum of 2 hours before handling to minimize damage. B. When loading for shipment to the project site, use spacers and other protective devices to separate items to prevent damaging the shop -primed surfaces during transit and unloading. If wood spacers are used, remove wood splinters and particles from the shop - primed surfaces after separation. Use padded chains or ribbon binders to secure the loaded items and minimize damage to the shop - primed surfaces. C. Cover shop - primed items 100% with protective coverings or tarpaulins to prevent deposition of road salts, fuel residue, and other contaminants in transit. D. Handle shop -primed items with care during unloading, installation, and erection operations to minimize damage. Do not place or store shop - primed items on the ground or on top of other work unless the ground or work is covered with a protective covering or tarpaulin. Place shop -primed items above the ground upon platforms, skids, or other supports. 03720 - 042 -02 09900 -11 PAINTING AND COATING August 2013 3.07 FIELD TOUCH -UP OF SHOP - APPLIED PRIME COATS A. Remove oil and grease surface contaminants on metal surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP -1. Use clean rags wetted with a degreasing solution, rinse with clean water, and wipe dry. B. Remove dust, dirt, salts, moisture, chalking primers, or other surface contaminants that will affect the adhesion or durability of the coating system. Use a high - pressure water blaster or scrub surfaces with a broom or brush wetted with a solution of tri- sodium phosphate, detergent, and water. Before applying intermediate or finish coats to inorganic zinc primers, remove any soluble zinc salts that have formed by scrubbing with a stiff bristle brush. Rinse scrubbed surfaces with clean water. C. Remove loose or peeling primer and other surface contaminants not easily removed by the previous cleaning methods in accordance with SSPC SP -7. Take care that the remaining primers are not damaged by the blast cleaning operation. The remaining primers shall be firmly bonded to the steel surfaces with blast - cleaned edges feathered. D. Remove rust, scaling, or primer damaged by welding or during shipment, storage, and erection in accordance with SSPC SP -10. Take care that the remaining primers are not damaged by the blast cleaning operation. Areas smaller than 1 square inch may be prepared in accordance with SSPC SP -11. The remaining primers shall be firmly bonded to the steel surfaces with cleaned edges feathered. E. Use repair procedures on damaged primer that protect adjacent primer. Blast cleaning may require the use of lower air pressure, smaller nozzles and abrasive particle sizes, short blast nozzle distance from surface, shielding, and/or masking. F. After abrasive blast cleaning of damaged and defective areas, remove dust, blast particles, and other debris by dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming; then apply the specified touch -up coating. G. Surfaces that are shop primed with inorganic zinc primers shall receive a field touch -up of organic zinc primer as specified in System No. 18 to cover scratches or abraded areas. H. Other surfaces that are shop primed shall receive a field touch -up of the same primer used in the original prime coat. 03720 - 042 -02 09900 -12 PAINTING AND COATING August 2013 • • • • • • 3.08 PAINTING SYSTEMS A. All materials of a specified painting system, including primer, intermediate, and finish coats, shall be produced by the same manufacturer. Thinners, cleaners, driers, and other additives shall be as recommended by the paint manufacturer for the particular coating system. B. Deliver paints to the jobsite in the original, unopened containers. 3.09 PAINT STORAGE AND MIXING A. Store and mix materials only in areas designated for that purpose by the Owner's Representative. The area shall be well ventilated, with precautionary measures taken to prevent fire hazards. Post "No Smoking" signs. Storage and mixing areas shall be clean and free of rags, waste, and scrapings. Tightly close containers after each use. Store paint at an ambient temperature from 50 °F to 100 °F. B. Prepare multiple- component coatings using all of the contents of the container for each component as packaged by the paint manufacturer. Do not use partial batches. Do not use multiple- component coatings that have been mixed beyond their pot life. Provide small quantity kits for touch -up painting and for painting other small areas. Mix only the components specified and furnished by the paint manufacturer. Do not intermix additional components for reasons of color or otherwise, even within the same generic type of coating. 3.10 PROCEDURES FOR THE APPLICATION OF COATINGS A. Conform to the requirements of SSPC PA -1. Follow the recommendations of the coating manufacturer, including the selection of spray equipment, brushes, rollers, cleaners, thinners, mixing, drying time, temperature and humidity of application, and safety precautions. B. Stir, strain, and keep coating materials at a uniform consistency during application. Power mix components. For multiple component materials, premix each component before combining. Apply each coating evenly, free of brush marks, sags, runs, and other evidence of poor workmanship. Use a different shade or tint on succeeding coating applications to indicate coverage where possible. Finished surfaces shall be free from defects or blemishes. C. Do not use thinners unless recommended by the coating manufacturer. If thinning is allowed, do not exceed the maximum allowable amount of thinner per gallon of coating material. Stir coating materials at all times when adding thinner. Do not flood the coating material surface with thinner before mixing. Do not reduce 03720 - 042 -02 09900 -13 PAINTING AND COATING August 2013 coating materials more than is absolutely necessary to obtain the proper application characteristics and to obtain the specified dry -film thicknesses. D. Remove dust, blast particles, and other debris from blast cleaned surfaces by dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming. Allow ventilator fans to clean airborne dust to provide good visibility in working area before applying coating. Remove dust from coated surfaces by dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming before applying succeeding coats. E. Apply coating systems to the specified minimum dry-film thicknesses as determined in accordance with SSPC PA -2. F. Apply primer immediately after blast cleaning and before any surface rusting occurs, or any dust, dirt, or any foreign matter has accumulated. Before applying coating, re -clean surfaces that have surface colored or become moist by blast cleaning. G. Apply a brush coat of primer on welds, sharp edges, nuts, bolts, and irregular surfaces before applying the primer and finish coat. Apply the brush coat before and in conjunction with the spray coat application. Apply the spray coat over the brush coat. H. Before applying subsequent coats, allow the primer and intermediate coats to dry for the minimum curing time recommended by the manufacturer. In no case shall the time between coats exceed the manufacturer's recommendation. I. Each coat shall cover the surface of the preceding coat completely and there shall be a visually perceptible difference in applied shade or tint of colors. J. Applied coating systems shall be cured at 75 °F or higher for 48 hours. If temperature is lower than 75 °F, curing time shall be in accordance with printed recommendations of the manufacturer, unless otherwise allowed by the Owner's Representative. K. Assembled parts shall be disassembled sufficiently before painting or coating to ensure complete coverage by the required coating. 03720 - 042 -02 09900 -14 PAINTING AND COATING August 2013 • • • • • 3.11 SURFACES NOT TO BE COATED A. Do not paint the surfaces listed below unless otherwise noted in the drawings or in other Specification sections. Protect the following surfaces during the painting of adjacent areas: 1. Concrete walkways. 2. Mortar- coated pipe and fittings. 3. Stainless steel. 4. Metal letters. 5. Glass. 6. Roofing. 7. Fencing. 8. Electrical fixtures except for factory coatings. 9. Nameplates. 10. Grease fittings. 11. Brass and copper, submerged. 12. Buried pipe, unless specifically required in the piping specifications. 13. Aluminum handrail, stairs, and grating. 14. Fiberglass reinforced plastic baffles. 15. Channel static mixer. 3.12 PROTECTION OF SURFACES NOT TO BE PAINTED A. Remove, mask, or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switch plates, aluminum surfaces, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates on machinery, and other surfaces not intended to be painted. Provide drop cloths to prevent paint materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces. Protect working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage during surface preparation and painting process. Mask openings in motors to prevent paint and other materials from entering the motors. 3.13 SURFACES TO BE COATED A. The exact coating to be applied in any location is not designated by the descriptive phrases in the coating system titles such as "corrosive environment," "buried metal," or "submerged metal." Coat surfaces with the specific coating systems as described below: 1. Coat mechanical equipment as described below or in the various mechanical equipment specifications. The color of the finish coat shall be as shown below. 03720 - 042 -02 09900 -15 PAINTING AND COATING August 2013 2. Coat aboveground and exposed piping or piping in vaults and structures as described as shown in the Piping Schedule in the drawings. The color of the finish coat shall be as shown in the Piping Schedule in the drawings. 3. Coat submerged ductile iron piping and as specified in System No. 7. 4. Coat valves as described in the various valve specifications. Aboveground valves, or valves in vaults and structures, shall match the color of the connecting piping. 5. Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete as specified in System No. 51. 6. Coat buried flanges, nuts and bolts, valves, flexible pipe couplings, exposed rebar in thrust blocks, and valve boxes as specified in System No. 21 as specified in the particular specifications for the above items. Coat buried bolt threads, tie bolt threads, and nuts as specified in System No. 24. 3.14 DRY -FILM THICKNESS TESTING A. Measure coating thickness specified for carbon steel surfaces with a magnetic- type dry -film thickness gauge in accordance with SSPC PA -2. Provide certification that the gauge has been calibrated by a certified laboratory within the past 6 months. Provide dry-film thickness gauge as manufactured by Mikrotest or Elcometer. B. Test the finish coat of metal surfaces (except zinc primer and galvanizing) for holidays and discontinuities with an electrical holiday detector, low- voltage, wet - sponge type. Provide measuring equipment. Provide certification that the gauge has been calibrated by a certified laboratory within the past 6 months. Provide detector as manufactured by Tinker and Rasor or K -D Bird Dog. C. Check each coat for the correct dry-film thickness. Do not measure within 8 hours after application of the coating. D. For metal surfaces, make five separate spot measurements (average of three readings) spaced evenly over each 100 square feet of area (or fraction thereof) to be measured. Make three readings for each spot measurement of either the substrate or the paint. Move the probe or detector a distance of 1 to 3 inches for each new gauge reading. Discard any unusually high or low reading that cannot be repeated consistently. Take the average (mean) of the three readings as the spot measurement. The average of five spot measurements for each such 100- square- foot area shall not be less than the specified thickness. No single spot 03720 - 042 -02 August 2013 09900 -16 PAINTING AND COATING • • • • measurement in any 100- square -foot area shall be less than 80% nor more than 120% of the specified thickness. One of three readings which are averaged to produce each spot measurement may underrun by a greater amount as defined by SSPC PA -2. E. Perform tests in the presence of the Owner's Representative. 3.15 REPAIR OF IMPROPERLY COATED SURFACES A. If the item has an improper finish color or insufficient film thickness, clean and topcoat the surface with the specified paint material to obtain the specified color and coverage. Sandblast or power -sand visible areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded paint, feathering the edges. Then prime and finish the coat in accordance with the Specifications. The work shall be free of runs, bridges, shiners, laps, or other imperfections. 3.16 CLEANING A. During the work, remove discarded materials, rubbish, cans, and rags at the end of each day's work. B. Thoroughly clean brushes and other application equipment at the end of each period of use and when changing to another paint or color. C. Upon completion of painting work, remove masking tape, tarps, and other protective materials, using care not to damage finished surfaces. END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 09900 -17 PAINTING AND COATING August 2013 • • • DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT • SECTION 11222 CHANNEL STATIC MIXERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section includes provisions for the materials and complete installation for the Owner pre - purchased channel static mixer system as shown in the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. B. Section 01600, Materials and Equipment. C. Section 01770, Project Closeout. D. Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. E. Section 09900, Painting and Coating. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation in accordance with Section 01600, Materials and Equipment. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor shall inspect the Owner pre - purchased equipment; take field measurements; and verify that he has all required items, equipment, manufacturer's instructions before proceeding with the installation. B. These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is required but do not cover all details that may vary in accordance with the exact requirements of the equipment as provided. They are, however, intended to cover the installation and field testing of all materials and apparatus as required. Any additional equipment necessary for the proper operation of the proposed 03720 - 042 -02 11222 -1 CHANNEL STATIC MIXERS August 2013 installation not specifically mentioned in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings shall be furnished and installed at no change in Contract Price or Time. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. B. The Contractor shall do the following: 1. Store and handle equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Properly protect all equipment and parts so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the units and equipment are ready for operation. 3. Properly protect all equipment and parts against any damage during a prolonged storage period at the site. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) 1.12 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O &M) MANUALS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. The Owner has pre - purchased the channel static mixer system. A copy of the manufacturer's quote is report is included in the Appendix of these specifications. B. The Contractor shall review the manufacturer's quote, coordinate the requirements of the installation and any additional equipment and material needs 03720- 042 -02 11222 -2 CHANNEL STATIC MIXERS August 2013 • • • • with the manufacturer before bidding, and provide all additional items and equipment necessary for installation of the channel static mixer system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 STATIC MIXER INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall obtain all installation recommendations directly from the manufacturer. All work shall be performed according to the manufacturer's recommendations. B. The static mixer shall be installed as indicated in the Drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer's written directions. 3.02 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION A. The manufacturer' representative will review the installation, direct the Contractor to make any required corrective actions, and certify the installation after all corrective actions are complete. These manufacturer services are included in the manufacturer's quote. If additional manufacturer services are needed due to improper planning or workmanship by the Contractor, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for cost of these services. The reimbursement amount will be deducted from the Contractor's pay application. END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 11222 -3 CHANNEL STATIC MIXERS August 2013 • • • DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION • • SECTION 13401 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall perform all work necessary to furnish, install, commission, test, document, and start up the instrumentation and control system, including a replacement Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) Processor within the CH102' PLC Panel and modifying the existing program of this panel for the Marshall Street Chlorine Contact Tank Improvements for the City of Clearwater, Florida. The Contractor shall provide all materials, labor, equipment, incidentals, and services required for a complete and operational system. B. The Contractor shall acquire the services of a single, experienced instrumentation and control system provider specifically trained in the type of equipment to be provided. The provider shall assume responsibility for satisfactory operation of the process instrumentation and controls as an integrated system. C. The existing control system shall be modified to achieve the desired functionality as described in Control Descriptions (Attachment A). D. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner during the Work to ensure the facility is in compliance with the discharge permit requirements. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. The provisions of all other Sections of the Specifications are fully applicable to this Section as if incorporated in this Section. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating work with the Owner and Subcontractors. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. Provide shop drawings for all equipment, field panels, and enclosures. 1. At a minimum the Drawings shall show the fabrication design, internal • equipment arrangement, internal wiring, and external wiring connections. 03720 - 042 -01 13401 -1 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION August 2013 AND CONTROLS 2. Provide panel elementary diagrams. The diagrams shall show all control functions, power distribution, switched analog signals, and auxiliary devices such as relays, alarms, fuses, lights, fans, etc. 3. Provide power requirement (voltages, currents, phases) and heat dissipation (maximum Btu/hr) summary for all panels. 4. Panel connection drawings shall show ISA wire tags. 5. Provide any needed installation details to adequately define the installation of panels and field components. B. Provide loop diagrams for each specified loop. The loop diagrams shall meet the minimum requirements of ISA S5.4. Loop diagram(s) shall show the wiring and/or piping for all major components, resistors, diodes, DC power supplies, shield terminations, tubing, piping, valving, test taps, and other appurtenances for process connections. Each analog diagram shall tabulate loop impedances. An individual loop shall be shown on a diagram divided into three areas for identifying element locations: panel face, back -of- panel, and field. Loop diagrams shall be on 8- 1/2 -x -11 -inch or 11 -x -17 -inch drawings. 1. Provide an operation description for each loop. C. Provide electrical and plumbing interconnection diagrams showing all component and panel connection/terminal identification numbers and external wire numbers. These diagrams shall include all intermediate terminations (e.g., at terminal junction blocks and motor control centers). 1. The interconnection diagrams shall be coordinated with other suppliers and the electrical subcontractor. The electrical subcontractor shall review and approve the diagrams before any submission to the Engineer. 2. The diagrams, device designations, and symbols shall be in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 -101. D. The Contractor shall submit a complete list of materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work to the Engineer within 30 days after Award of Contract. 1. The list shall include catalog numbers, cut sheets, diagrams, and other descriptive data required to demonstrate conformance with the Specifications. Partial lists will not be acceptable. 03720 - 042 -01 13401 -2 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION August 2013 AND CONTROLS • • • • • 2. The basis of acceptance will be the manufacturer's published ratings for the equipment. The manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products specified. E. The Contractor shall submit testing procedures, test reports, and a training program. 1. Provide a test procedure outline, example operational report, and example functional test procedures and schedules. 2. Provide a factory test report. 3. Provide an operational acceptance report. The report shall contain a completed status sheet for each loop. Each sheet shall be signed off on by the Contractor's field crew. The report shall be reviewed, verified, and signed off on by the Contractor. 4. Provide a training program and schedule. F. Each submittal shall be complete, neat, orderly, and bound with a table of contents and section divider tabs. G. Each submittal shall include but not be limited to the requirements described in this Section. H. Or equal materials or products may be submitted for approval. Submissions shall be accompanied with adequate data to demonstrate equality. Equality of materials or products shall be the decision of the Engineer. Each submittal shall be accompanied by a cover letter describing any exceptions or deviations from the Specifications. Cover letters addressing resubmitted materials shall also describe any changes which have been made since the previous submittal and include a brief response to the Engineer's comments. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 03720 - 042 -01 13401 -3 August 2013 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 1. NEMA ICS -1— Industrial Control and Systems General Requirements. D. International Society of Automation (ISA) 1. ISA RP7.1— Pneumatic Control Circuit Pressure Test. 2. ISA RP55.1— Hardware Testing of Digital Process Computers. 3. ISA S5.4— Instrument Loop Diagrams. E. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.06 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. B. All work, equipment, and materials supplied shall be warranted against defective design, materials, and workmanship for 1 year. The warranty period shall begin at the time of project completion and acceptance by the Owner. C. The warranty shall cover replacement equipment and/or repair, including labor, travel time and miscellaneous expenses, at no cost to the Owner for the full warranty period. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650 for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. B. Deliver materials and equipment with the manufacturer's tags and labels and UL labels intact. Deliver packaged material in the manufacturer's original, unopened containers bearing the manufacturer's name, brand, and UL label. C. Throughout this Contract the Contractor shall provide suitable protection for materials and equipment against loss or damage and the effects of weather and the construction environment. The Contractor shall be responsible for the condition of materials and equipment until the acceptance of equipment by the Owner. 03720- 042 -01 13401 -4 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION August 2013 AND CONTROLS • • D. Before installation, store material and equipment indoors in a dry, clean location. Handle and store to avoid damage. Heat storage areas which contain items subject to corrosion under damp conditions. E. Turn off power to panels and equipment and close and cover control panels and equipment during any dusty construction to prevent degrading the operation or service life. F. Follow the manufacturer's installation instructions explicitly, unless otherwise indicated. Wherever any conflict arises between the manufacturer's instructions and these Contract Documents, follow the Engineer's decision at no additional cost to the Owner. Keep a copy of the manufacturer's installation instructions on the job site and available for review at all times. G. Keep the premises free of waste material or rubbish. Before final inspection and testing and upon completion of the work, remove materials, scraps, and debris from the premises and from the interior and exterior of all devices and equipment. H. Touch up scratches, scrapes, or chips in interior and exterior surfaces of devices and equipment with finishes matching as nearly as possible the type, color, and consistency of the original finish. • 1.08 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.09 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.10 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) 1.11 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Drawings shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01785 and this Section. B. The Contractor shall provide Record Drawings consisting of the following: 1. Process and instrumentation diagrams. 2. Loop diagrams. 3. Panel elementary diagrams. 4. Interconnecting wiring diagrams. 1.12 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The general arrangement of the instruments, controls, and monitoring systems are • shown on the Drawings and specified in this Section. The location of all 03720 - 042 -01 13401 -5 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION August 2013 AND CONTROLS transmitters, controllers, recorders, indicators, totalizers, etc., shall be as shown on the Drawings and/or as indicated in this Section. The Contractor shall be responsible for all detail installation drawings showing wiring, tubing, piping, etc., and shall be responsible for furnishing all devices required for a complete and functioning system. B. For this project, the programming to be modified is fully contained within an existing Allen- Bradley model SLC 5/04 PLC with modular I/O. The programming software is RSLogix 500. The PLC and the associated I/O is located in a control cabinet installed in the PLC/Electrical Room of the Chemical Building. Critical values needed to dose the chemicals, such as plant flow rates, chemical residual levels, etc., are obtained over the existing plant DH+ (data highway plus) network. The existing chemical control PLC was previously added as an additional node (address "25 "). The existing physical hardware link is a daisy chain from the existing "ZIMPRO" filter control panel (located in the filter building). All software data points are read in from the control room PLC, and all data required by the Citect SCADA system is written out to the control room PLC. 1.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O &M) MANUAL A. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manuals. B. Before final acceptance of this project, the Contractor shall submit an Operation and Maintenance Manual to the Engineer for all components provided under this Section. The manual shall comply with the following: 03720 - 042 -01 August 2013 1. The literature shall have sufficiently detailed descriptions and figures to facilitate the operation, removal, installation, adjustment, calibration, and maintenance of each component to the printed circuit board level. 2. The manual shall include internal wiring and piping diagrams. Termination designations and wire and pipe numbers shall be clearly shown. Diagrams, device designations, and symbols shall be in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 -101. 3. The manual shall include an updated set of the manufacturer's literature, data sheets, loop descriptions of operations, drawings corrected in accordance with shop drawing review comments and Record Drawing modifications and components parts list. 13401 -6 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS • • • • • • 4. Instructions and parts lists shall have been prepared for the specific equipment furnished. 5. List of suppliers and/or service shops that can provide parts and accessories and equipment repair for the components provided under this Section. The list shall include a contact name, telephone number, and address. C. The general arrangement of the instruments, controls, and monitoring systems is shown on the Drawings and specified in this Section. The location of all transmitters, controllers, recorders, indicators, totalizers, etc., shall be as shown on the Drawings and/or as indicated in this Section. The Contractor shall be responsible for all detail installation drawings showing wiring, tubing, piping, etc., and shall be responsible for furnishing all devices required for a complete and functioning system. 1.14 PATENTS AND LICENSES (NOT USED) 1.15 MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE A. The Contractor shall provide descriptive literature for all equipment provided under this Section. The literature shall include major components, electrical devices, panel materials, panel components, panel paints and colors, mechanical devices, equipment tags, tubing, valves, fittings, fasteners, and appurtenances. This descriptive literature shall include catalog information, external wiring information, dimensional data, and mounting requirements. B. Provide data (specification) sheets for all equipment and components. Provide a separate data sheet for each major component. The data sheets shall show the "component name," tag numbers, quantities, specific catalog/ordering numbers, specific features, and special options. C. Provide a components parts list with exact and complete (including options and accessories) manufacturer's part number. Group the list by the component name used in these Specifications. Group each component type by tag number used in these Specifications. Components without tag numbers shall be grouped by the manufacturer's part number. D. Provide a list of recommended spares, spare parts, and expendables with tag number, part number, unit pricing, and total purchase cost. E. Provide storage requirements for all components provided under this Section. 03720 - 042 -01 13401 -7 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION August 2013 AND CONTROLS 1.16 CERTIFICATION/DOCUMENTATION A. The instrument system supplier(s) shall verify the calibration and operation of all control, instrumentation, and telemetry components and shall present written certification of the operation. 1.17 PERMITS AND FEES A. The Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits, licenses, and inspections required for the work of this Section and pay all charges incidental to these permits, licenses, and inspections. The Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer all certificates of inspection and licenses issued by authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The manufacturer(s) and/or supplier(s) shall have regularly engaged in the manufacture of major components and/or assembly or instrumentation and control systems of the type and scope required for this project for a minimum of 5 years. B. Instrumentation, control, and SCADA systems for this project shall be furnished by one of the following Suppliers /Systems Integrators: 1. Company Name: Rocha Controls Contact person: Raymond Rocha Phone: 813- 628 -5584 C. One manufacturer may not make all the equipment required and specified under this Section. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the various manufacturers and equipment suppliers' products are coordinated and are compatible so that the equipment performs the specified functions. The Contractor shall ensure that they are fully aware and understand the requirements of the system. 2.02 GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS A. Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) Processor 1. `CH102' PLC Panel: Replace existing Allen- Bradley SLC 5 PLC /04 module with new Allen - Bradley SLC 5 PLC /05 module. `CH102' PLC Panel is located in the existing Chemical Building and shall be connected via Ethernet link to the existing `Filter Feed PLC' located in the existing North Generator Building. 03720 - 042 -01 13401 -8 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION August 2013 AND CONTROLS • • • 2. All control strategies specified in Specification Section 13401, Attachment A shall be implemented within the CH102 PLC. 3. Central Proccessor Unit (CPU). The CPU shall be Allen- Bradley SLC 5/05 Processor, 1747 -L552. A minimum of 32 Kbytes of RAM memory shall be installed. However, the actual amount of memory supplied shall be sufficient to provide 20% unused capacity when the entire PLC program, as provided, is loaded and running. Provide battery back -up sufficient to maintain memory integrity for a minimum of 24 hours to eliminate the need for down- loading system programs from the host computer following temporary (short-term) power failures. B. The Contractor shall provide all functions described under Article 1.12, System Description. Major components and equipment items to implement these functions are specified in Article 2.03, Instrumentation. C. All components and items of equipment that are necessary, whether indicated or not, to effect the required functions and performance shall be provided. In general and unless otherwise noted, corrosion - resistant materials such as Type 316 stainless steel shall be used. Working pressures, spans, and other ratings shall be selected to best fit the application. All like equipment shall be by the same manufacturer. D. Whenever any material or product is indicated by patent or proprietary name, by name of manufacturer, or by catalog number, such specifications shall be deemed to be used to establish a standard of quality to expand the description of the material or product desired. Materials and products equal to the named material or product may be provided unless specifically noted otherwise. E. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be new and unused and shall be the standard product of a manufacturer having a minimum of 5 years successful experience in the manufacture of the equipment. Wherever possible, equipment items having the same or similar rated capacity or function shall be identical. Equipment shall be of the manufacturer's latest proven design. F. The design of the instrumentation and control system is based on the equipment and components specified in this Section. If more than one manufacturer is noted, the first named is the basis for design where there are differences. If the Contractor selects equipment which changes the design basis, the Contractor shall obtain approval from the Engineer and make all approved changes at no additional cost to the Owner. 03720 - 042 -01 13401 -9 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION August 2013 AND CONTROLS G. Electrical Transient Protection: All instrumentation and control equipment shall be equipped with suitable surge - arresting devices to protect the equipment from damage due to electrical transients induced in the interconnecting lines by lightning discharges or by nearby electrical devices. 1. Voltage surge and transient protectors for both power and analog field circuits shall be provided on the field end and destination end of the circuits. a. Analog circuits shall be protected by EDCO SS Series suppressors. b. All instrument 120 -volt power and signal circuits shall be protected by EDCO SLAC Series suppressor. 2. The devices shall be connected to the system ground. The total resistance of the ground circuit from the device to the driven ground rod shall not exceed 0.1 ohm. H. Signal Characteristics 1. Analog signals shall be 4 -20 mA DC and shall conform to the compatibility requirements of ISA Standard S50.1. Unless otherwise noted, circuits shall be Type 2 two -wire. Transmitters shall have a load - resistance capability conforming to Class L. Transmitters and receivers shall be fully isolated. 2. Discrete signals are two -state logic signals of two types. Control signals shall use 120 -VAC sources. Alarm signals that interface directly with an annunciator shall use less than 30 -VDC sources. All alarm signals shall be "normally open, close to alarm" isolated contacts rated for 5 amperes at 120 VAC and 2 amperes at 30 VDC. I. Environmental Conditions 1. Unconditioned air: 20 °F to 105 °F, 10% to 100% humidity, subject to wash down or rain, corrosive (assume marine salts and H2S as a minimum), and nonhazardous. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4X. 2. Other conditions as noted or approved. J. Nameplates, Name Tags, and Service Legends: All field- and panel- mounted components provided under this Section shall be provided with permanently mounted name tags bearing the entire ISA tag number of the component. 03720 - 042 -01 13401 -10 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION August 2013 AND CONTROLS • • • • • • 1. Panel - mounted tags shall be engraved plastic. Field - mounted tags shall be stamped 16 -gauge 316 stainless steel with 3/16- inch -high characters. 2. Nameplates shall be inscribed to identify the component listed and mounted near a panel- face - mounted instrument. 3. Service legends shall be integrally mounted on a panel- mounted instrument. Unless otherwise noted, service legends shall be engraved with the functional explanation. 4. Nameplates and service legends shall be engraved, rigid, laminated plastic plates attached to enclosure with stainless steel screws maintaining NEMA rating of enclosure. Unless otherwise noted, plate color shall be black with 3/16- inch -high white lettering. Panel nameplates shall have 1/2- inch -high lettering. K. Colors and Inscriptions: Unless otherwise noted, the following inscription and color code shall be used for all push buttons and indicating light lenses: ON, green; OFF, red; OPEN, green; CLOSED, red; AUTO, white; MANUAL, yellow; START, red; STOP, green; RESET, red; TEST, black; ACKNOWLEDGE, green; and READY, blue. All unused or non - inscribed buttons shall be black. 1. Lettering shall be black on white, amber, or yellow. Lettering shall be white on black, red, blue, or green. L. Relays 1. Analog signal switching relays shall be provided for switching 4 -20 mA or 1 -5 VDC signals. The relays shall have double -throw dry circuit contacts in a break - before -make configuration rated for 15 VA minimum. The relays shall be sealed to prevent dust, dirt, or moisture contamination. Relays shall be UL recognized and shall be Potter and Brumfield KUP or KUL Series or Struthers -Dunn Series 219. 2. Control circuit switching relays shall be rated for not less than 2 amperes at 120 VAC or 28 VDC. 3. All relay connections shall have a screw terminal interface with the wiring. Terminals shall have a permanent, legible identification and shall be mounted so that terminal identifications are clearly visible and the terminals are readily accessible. 03720 - 042 -01 13401 -11 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION August 2013 AND CONTROLS M. Power Supplies: Provide DC power supplies as required to power instruments requiring external DC power. 1. Power supplies shall convert 120 -VAC power to DC power of the appropriate voltage(s) with sufficient voltage regulation and ripple control to ensure that the instruments being supplied can operate within their required tolerances. 2. Output overvoltage and overcurrent protective devices shall be provided with the power supply to protect the instruments from damage due to power supply failure and to protect the power supply from damage due to external failure. 3. Each power supply shall be provided with a NEMA 1 enclosure for mounting within other enclosures. Power supplies shall be mounted so that dissipated heat does not adversely affect other components. N. Wiring: All electrical wiring and wiring identification shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 16050, Electrical. 1. Wires shall be 600 -volt class, PVC - insulated stranded copper. 2. Wiring for 120 -volt circuits and signals shall be sized as required for the current to be carried, but not smaller than 14 AWG if enclosed in sheet metal raceway or plastic wiring duct. Wiring for signal circuits shall be twisted shielded pairs (TSP) not smaller than 16 AWG. Analog signals shall be separated from any power wiring by at least 6 inches. 3. All interconnecting wires to other enclosures shall be terminated at numbered terminal blocks. All external connections shall be to numbered terminal blocks. All connections for future functions shall be wired to numbered blocks. a. Terminal blocks shall be grouped to keep circuits of different voltages separate. Provide sufficient terminal blocks for all functions required, all spare annunciator points, and all spare conductors plus 15% spare. b. Terminal blocks shall be one -piece molded plastic blocks with screw -type terminals and barriers rated for 300 volts. Terminals shall be double sided and supplied with removable covers which prevent accidental contact with live circuits. Terminals shall have permanent, legible identification, clearly visible with protective cover removed. 03720 - 042 -01 13401 -12 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION August 2013 AND CONTROLS • • • • c. Wires shall be terminated at the terminal blocks with crimp -type, pre- insulated, ring- tongue lugs. Lugs shall be the appropriate size for the size of the terminal block screws and the size and number of wires terminated. 4. All analog signal wiring shall be TSP with tie points at terminal blocks. Provide external dropping resistors or diodes to allow an instrument to be removed from the loop without opening the circuit. 5. Shields shall be interconnected within each loop at terminals. Shield wires shall be dressed with heat - shrink tubing. Ground signal shields at control panels only (not field devices). 2.03 INSTRUMENTATION A. Flow Element — Ultrasonic Transit -Time (FE/FIT -10 -1) 1. Type: a. Dual clamp -on sensors. b. Stainless steel strapping fixture. 2. Operation: a. Purpose: To produce a 4 -20 mA signal proportional to bi- directional flow rate. b. Operating Principle: An ultrasonic signal of known frequency is transmitted by one sensor and detected by the second sensor. The difference between the received and nominal frequencies is proportional to the velocity of the process fluid. This is converted by the electronics unit into a 4 -20 mA analog signal proportional to the flow rate. 3. Functional: a. Power Requirement: 15 -30 VDC loop powered at up to 700 mW. b. Display: 128x64 pixel LCD display. 4. Physical: a. Transmitter: Epoxy coated aluminum NEMA 4X enclosure 03720- 042 -01 13401 -13 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION August 2013 AND CONTROLS 5. Performance: a. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 percent of full scale at up to 40 feet per second. b. Rangeability: 400:1. c. Operating range: -4 to 140 degrees F. d. Capable of operation with raw sewage. 6. Manufacturers: a. Panametrics UTX878. b. Approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall lay out the work and be responsible for necessary lines, levels, elevations, and measurements. Installations shall comply with the applicable requirements of Section 16050, Electrical. The Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the components. The Contractor shall familiarize himself with work of other trades engaged in the construction. Exact routing of raceways, piping, and locations of equipment may be governed by structural conditions and obstructions. The Contractor shall coordinate the details of equipment shop drawings for connections to equipment furnished by others. This is not to be construed to permit redesigning systems. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall comply with referenced standards, National Electrical Code (NEC), National Electrical Safety Code, local codes, and rules and regulations of local agencies having jurisdiction. The size of conductors, circuit breakers, motor controllers, and protective devices indicated or specified shall meet all requirements of the NEC. 3.03 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS A. The installer shall be acceptable to the manufacturer and/or supplier of the instrumentation and control systems. The installer shall have a minimum of 5 years' experience installing instrumentation and control systems of a similar type and scope. 03720 - 042 -01 August 2013 13401 -14 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS • • • • • • 3.04 WORKMANSHIP A. General 1. Install materials and equipment in a workmanlike manner using craftsmen skilled in the particular trade. Provide work which has a neat and finished appearance. 2. Coordinate the work with the Owner, the Engineer, and the work of other trades to avoid conflicts, errors, delays, and unnecessary interference. B. Electrical Power and Signal Wiring 1. Control and signal wiring in enclosures and racks shall be restrained by plastic ties or ducts. Hinge wiring shall be secured at each end so that any bending or twisting will be around the longitudinal axis of the wire and the bend area shall be protected with a sleeve. 2. Arrange wiring neatly, cut to proper length, and remove surplus wire. Provide abrasion protection for any wire bundles which pass through holes or across edges of sheet metal. 3. Use the manufacturer's recommended tool with the proper sized anvil for all crimp terminations. No more than one wire shall be terminated in a single crimp lug and no more than two lugs shall be installed on a single - screw terminal. 4. Wiring shall not be spliced or tapped except at device terminals or terminal blocks. All devices with pig -tail wiring shall terminate on terminal blocks within or near the device. 5. All materials, equipment, and workmanship shall be subject to inspection at any time by the Engineer. The Contractor shall correct any work, materials, or equipment not in accordance with these Contract Documents or found to be deficient or defective. Corrections shall be made in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. 03720- 042 -01 13401 -15 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION August 2013 AND CONTROLS 3.05 TESTING A. General: All elements of the instrumentation and control system shall be tested to demonstrate that the total system satisfies all of the requirements of this Specification. 1. All testing materials and equipment shall be provided by the Contractor. Where it is not practical to test with real process variables, the Contractor shall provide a suitable means of simulation. These simulation techniques shall be acceptable to the Engineer. 2. The Contractor shall have an updated set of Drawings and Specifications, a master copy of approved test procedures, and the master copy of current test failures and solutions to test failures. 3. Testing will not to be considered complete until all portions of the test have been approved by the Engineer. If a test or a portion of a test fails to the point where it needs to be rescheduled, the additional testing cost shall be borne by the Contractor. B. Factory Testing: The components shall be tested with simulated inputs and outputs at the factory. Factory tests shall generally conform to the applicable sections of ISA RP55.1. C. Operational Acceptance Testing: The objective of these tests is to demonstrate that each portion of the instrumentation and control system is ready for operation. 1. All components of the system shall be checked for proper installation, adjusted, and calibrated on a loop -by -loop basis. 2. All elements shall be checked to verify that they have been installed properly and that all terminations have been made correctly. All pneumatic tubing shall be tested in accordance with ISA procedure RP7.1. 3. All discrete elements and systems shall have their set points adjusted and shall be checked for proper operation. 4. All continuous elements and systems shall have three -point calibrations performed. All controller tuning constants shall be adjusted to preliminary settings. 5. The Contractor shall prepare operational acceptance test status report sheets for each loop listing the checks and adjustments performed and the 03720 - 042 -01 13401 -16 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION August 2013 AND CONTROLS • • • • calibration points actually set. Copies of completed status report sheets shall be submitted before final acceptance. • • D. Functional Acceptance Testing: The objective of these tests is to demonstrate that the instrumentation and control system is operating and complying with the specified performance requirements. 1. Each loop function shall be demonstrated to the Engineer in accordance with approved test procedures. Each loop shall be signed off by the Contractor and the Engineer upon satisfactory completion. 2. A test date may be set after the testing submittal has been approved and pre -test training has been completed. 3. No modifications shall be made to the system during the functional acceptance test period except as required to maintain Owner operations. The test shall not interrupt normal operations unless approved by the Owner. 4. If a test fails to produce the expected results, the Contractor will need to respond quickly to determine the cause and take corrective action. Construction shall not interfere with the tests unless approved by the Engineer. 5. All failed tests shall be retested until the result complies with the Specifications and/or is acceptable to the Engineer and Owner. 6. At the end of the test, a punch list will be provided to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then determine the cause of the failure, correct the deficiency, and report to the Engineer why the test failed and the corrective action taken. The Engineer will then determine if the function needs to be retested and determine any other tests which may be required. 7. Within 10 working days from the end of a test period or retest period, a formal punch list will be transmitted to the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit a single test report for the test period and reschedule retesting if needed. Retesting shall be scheduled for not less than 1 week after the Engineer receives the test report and the retest dates shall be acceptable to all. 03720 - 042 -01 13401 -17 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION August 2013 AND CONTROLS 3.06 ON -SITE SUPERVISION A. The Contractor shall provide factory- trained, onsite service engineers to supervise and coordinate installation, adjustment, testing, training, and startup of the instrumentation and control system. B. The Contractor shall provide startup and testing assistance by engineers and programmers as required to thoroughly check all of the equipment and perform all operational and functional tests required. C. The service engineer shall be specifically trained on the type of equipment specified and shall advise the Contractor in the location and method of installing special cable, mounting, pipe, and wiring of one of each type of device. The service engineer shall supervise the calibration, commissioning, and initial start- up of the instrumentation and control system. A signed and dated calibration sticker shall be affixed to each device. 3.07 TRAINING A. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of one 8 -hour day on -site training for the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel at the job site before functional acceptance testing. B. The training program shall include classroom and field instruction by experienced and knowledgeable technicians and engineers on the operation and maintenance of the instrumentation and control elements, components, and systems provided. 03720- 042 -01 August 2013 END OF SECTION 13401 -18 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS • • • • ATTACHMENT A CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS • • CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS 1.01 GENERAL A. Overview 1. This section covers revisions /additions to the existing WRF programming and Citect Graphic system modifications. 2. The System Supplier shall have previous experience with the existing Process Instrumentation and Control Systems (PICS) at the referenced facility. 3. The System Supplier shall have reviewed the existing "Training Overview" prepared by Rocha Controls on October 1, 2010, and obtained a thorough understanding of this document prior to bid. If a copy of this document is required, please request 14 days prior to bid. 4. The Supplier /Systems Integrator shall be responsible for providing all programming necessary to incorporate all revisions /additions into the existing WRF system and furnish a complete and operable PICS that performs all functions shown in the Contract Documents and maintains all other WRF communication and control functions. 6. This project specifically combines the Inside and Outside Chlorine Contact Tanks into a single channel for the purposes of sodium hypochlorite injection. B. System Supplier Control Work Summary 1. The following summarizes the control logic descriptions that will be used by the System Supplier to implement the PLC program modifications: a. Create new "Total Effluent Flow." b. Integrate /add new "Reclaim Water Flow" signal. c. Calculate "Surface Water Discharge Flow" d. Modify sodium hypochlorite control algorithm. e. Modify chlorine residual analyzer feedback control. f. Modify graphical system interfaces to reflect process changes. 03720 - 042 -02 13401A -1 CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS August 2013 1.02 WORK SPECIFICS A. Flow Monitoring 1. Total Effluent Flow (TEF) shall be calculated by summing the Inside and Outside Channel Chlorine Contact Chamber flow meters (LE -11 and LE -10, respectively). This flow shall be used for hypochlorite pacing into the mixing chamber downstream of the filter effluent discharge. The PLC program shall be modified to allow the operator, via the HMI graphics, to select which channel or channels are being used for plant effluent disinfection, i.e. inside channel/outside channel or inside and outside channel. This selection will dictate how LE -11 and LE -10 are used to calculate TEF. 2. Plant Reclaim Flow (PRF) shall be directly calculated from the new flow meter installed on this project. A spare analog input in PLC CH102 shall be configured for this input. This flow will be summarily displayed on the HMI and stored in the system database. Trends will be modified to reflect this. 3. Surface Water Discharge Flow (SWDF) shall be derived from a calculation in the PLC as follows: TEF- PRF =SWDF. This calculated value shall be used to pace sodium bisulfate. B. Sodium Hypochlorite Control Modifications 1. The sodium hypochlorite feed rate (SHFR) shall be flow -paced based on the TEF as calculated above. a. Modify the control of the hypochlorite dosing pumps from one per channel to LEAD/LAG /STANDBY sequence. A single injection point will now be in the mixing chamber at the head of the chlorine contact chambers. b. The operator will select from the HMI graphics which two of the three hypochlorite metering pumps are "online." These pumps will be reprogrammed to operate as follows: (1) Allow pumping when the flow is greater than an operator adjustable low value. Run the LEAD feed pump at a speed based on an operator adjustable ratio of flow TEF. (2) Start the lag pump after the lead pump reaches 95% speed (adjustable via the HMI). 03720 - 042 -02 13401A -2 CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS August 2013 • • • (3) Operate two pumps until the pump speeds reaches 50% (adjustable via the HMI), then stop the lead pump. (4) Alternate the lead metering every 24 hours or as selected via the HMI. (5) If the lead pump fails or a speed feedback signal is not received automatically start the lag pump and stop the lead pump. C. Sodium Bisulfite Feed 1. Modify the control algorithm to control the feed rate based on the sodium bisulfite residual and SWDF flow rate. 2. Specific feed pumps will no longer be dedicated to specific tanks. 3. Modify the control of the dosing pumps from one per channel to LEAD/LAG /STANDBY sequence typical of the sodium hypochlorite pumps. 4. Modify OIT screens, tag names, and trend names as necessary to accommodate the change. D. Graphics Changes 1. The following OIT screens on PLC panel CH102 require changes based on above programming /process changes: a. Sodium Hypochlorite Screen: Prefilter and Reuse CL2 Feed Pumps. b. Sodium Hypochlorite Screen: CCC CL2 Feed Pumps. c. Trend Screen. 2. The following CiTect HMI screens require changes based on above programming /process changes: a. SCADA — Filter Building Screen. b. SCADA — Sodium Hypochlorite Screen. c. SCADA — CCC CL2 Pumps Popup Screen. d. SCADA — Chemical Flow Totals Popup Screen. e. Alarm screen. 03720 - 042 -02 13401A -3 CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS August 2013 • • • DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL • SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section includes requirements for the following: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Sleeves. 4. Grout. 5. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 6. Painting and finishing. 7. Concrete bases. 8. Supports and anchorages. 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) • 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. Welding certificates. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS • Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM B32— Standard Specification for Solder Metal. 2. ASTM B813— Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube. 03720 - 042 -02 15050 -1 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS August 2013 3. ASTM B828— Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings. 4. ASTM C1173— Standard Specification for Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Piping Systems. 5. ASTM D1785— Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. 6. ASTM D2235— Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile- Butadiene - Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 7. ASTM D2564— Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems. 8. ASTM D2657— Standard Practice for Heat Fusion Joining of Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings. 9. ASTM D2661— Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene- Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings. 10. ASTM D2672— Standard Specification for Joints for IPS PVC Pipe Using Solvent Cement. 11. ASTM D2846— Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Hot- and Cold -Water Distribution Systems. 12. ASTM D2855— Standard Practice for Making Solvent- Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. 13. ASTM D3138— Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Transition Joints Between Acrylonitrile - Butadiene - Styrene (ABS) and Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Non- Pressure Piping Components. 14. ASTM D3139— Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals. 15. ASTM D3212— Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals. 16. ASTM F402— Standard Practice for Safe Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and Cleaners Used for Joining Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings. 17. ASTM F493— Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 18. ASTM F656— Standard Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 1. ASME B1.20.1—Pipe Threads, General Purpose, Inch. 2. ASME B16.21—Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges. 3. ASME B18.2.1—Square and Hex Bolts and Screws (Inch Series). 4. ASME B31— Standards of Pressure Piping. 5. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 03720- 042 -02 15050 -2 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS August 2013 • • • • C. American Welding Society (AWS) • • 1. AWS A5.8— Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding. 2. AWS D1.1— Structural Welding Code – Steel. 3. AWS D10.12 —Guide for Welding Mild Steel Pipe. D. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1. AWWA C110— Standard for Ductile -Iron and Gray -Iron Fittings. 2. AWWA C219— Bolted, Sleeve -Type Couplings for Plain -End Pipe. E. Manufacturers Standard Society (MSS) 1. MSS SP -107— Transition Union Fittings For Joining Metal And Plastic Products. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code -- Steel. B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications. 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, Code for Pressure Piping. 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for the welding processes involved and that certification is current. C. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing by the Engineer and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 03720 - 042 -02 15050 -3 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS August 2013 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. B. Stored items shall be protected from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Proper protection and care of all material before, during, and after installation shall be the Contractor's responsibility. Any materials found to be damaged shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. During the installation, piping, ductwork, and similar openings shall be capped to keep out dirt and other foreign matter. C. The Contractor shall store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight and supported to prevent sagging and bending. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) 1.12 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O &M) MANUALS A. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manuals. 1.13 COORDINATION The Contractor shall do the following: A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during construction to allow for mechanical installations. B. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured -in -place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. D. Provide coordination drawings at 1/4 inch = 1 foot, 0 inch scale illustrating the coordination of piping, ductwork, lighting, and structure for an interference -free installation. Provide 24- inch -x -36 -inch bond paper and submit for review. 03720 - 042 -02 15050 -4 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS August 2013 • • • 1.14 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below the roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts. E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1. ABS: Acrylonitrile- butadiene - styrene plastic. 2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. 3. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials: 1. EPDM: Ethylene- propylene -diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile- butadiene rubber. 03720 - 042 -02 15050 -5 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS August 2013 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 Articles where Paragraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to the manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.02 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Refer to individual Division 15 Piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: Refer to ASME B1.20.1 for factory - threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.03 JOINING MATERIALS Joining materials shall be as follows: A. Refer to individual Division 15 Piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. B. Pipe- Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents: 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos -free, 1/8 -inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated: a. Full -Face Type: For flat -face, Class 125, cast -iron and cast - bronze flanges. b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250, cast -iron and steel flanges. 2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 -inch thick, unless otherwise indicated, and full -face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated. C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. 03720 - 042 -02 15050 -6 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS August 2013 • • • • D. Plastic, Pipe- Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B32, lead -free alloys. Include water - flushable flux according to ASTM B813. F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper - phosphorus alloys for general -duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated, and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated. G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. ABS Piping: ASTM D2235. 2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F493. 3. PVC Piping: ASTM D2564. Include primer according to ASTM F656. 4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D3138. I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by the pipe manufacturer. 2.04 TRANSITION FITTINGS Transition fittings shall be as follows: A. AWWA Transition Couplings: The same size as and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with the piping to be joined. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div. d. JCM Industries. e. Smith - Blair, Inc. f. Viking Johnson. 2. Underground Piping NPS 1 -1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling. 03720 - 042 -02 15050 -7 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS August 2013 3. Underground Piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve -type coupling. 4. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting. B. Plastic -to -Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC and PVC one -piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions, one end with threaded brass insert and one solvent-cement-joint end. 1. Available Manufacturer: Eslon Thermoplastics. C. Plastic -to -Metal Transition Adaptors: One -piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent dimensions, one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end. 1. Available Manufacturer: Thompson Plastics, Inc. D. Plastic -to -Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP -107, CPVC, and PVC four -part union. Include brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber 0-ring, and union nut. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. NIBCO INC. b. NIBCO, Inc.; Chemtrol Div. 2.05 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems. B. The Drawings, schematics, and diagrams indicate the general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on the Coordination Drawings. C. Install the piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. 03720 - 042 -02 15050 -8 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS August 2013 • • • D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping to permit valve servicing. G. Install piping at indicated slopes. H. Install piping free of sags and bends. I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. J. Install piping to allow the application of insulation. K. Select system components with a pressure rating equal to or greater than the system operating pressure. L. Sleeves are not required for core - drilled holes. M. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves. N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs. 3.02 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream the ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel the plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from the inside and outside of the pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B813, water - flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to the tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B828 or CDA's Copper Tube Handbook using lead -free solder alloy complying with ASTM B32. 03720- 042 -02 15050 -9 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS August 2013 E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's Brazing Handbook, "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper - phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. H. Flanged Joints: Select the appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install the gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. I. Plastic Piping Solvent - Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F402 for safe - handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D2235 and ASTM D2661 Appendixes. 3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D2846/D 2846M Appendix. 4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D2672. Join other- than - schedule- number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D2855. 5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D2855. 6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D3138 Appendix. J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D3139. 03720 - 042 -02 15050 -10 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS August 2013 • • • K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D3212. L. PE Piping Heat - Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D2657: 1. Plain -End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain -End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion. M. Fiberglass- Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to the pipe manufacturer's written instructions. 3.03 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller adjacent to each valve and at the final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges in piping NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and larger next to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 3.04 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow the maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. D. Install equipment to allow the right of way for piping installed at the required slope. 03720 - 042 -02 15050 -11 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS August 2013 3.05 PAINTING A. The painting of mechanical systems, equipment, and components is specified in Section 09900, Painting and Coating. B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory- painted finishes with materials and procedures to match the original factory finish. 3.06 CONCRETE BASES A. Concrete Bases: Anchor the equipment to the concrete base according to the equipment manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Construct concrete bases of the dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than the supported unit. 2. Install dowel rods to connect the concrete base to the concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18 -inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 3. Install epoxy- coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through the concrete base and anchor into the structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use the supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with the items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to the supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to the anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3,000 -psi, 28 -day compressive - strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. 3.07 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 03720 - 042 -02 15050 -12 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS August 2013 • • • • • • 3.08 GROUTING The Contractor shall do the following: A. Mix and install grout for the mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C. Provide forms as required for the placement of grout. D. Avoid air entrapment during the placement of grout. E. Place grout so as to completely fill the equipment bases. F. Place grout on the concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for the equipment. G. Place the grout around the anchors. H. Cure placed grout. END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 15050 -13 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS August 2013 • • • SECTION 15055 PIPING SYSTEMS — GENERAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Specification describes responsibilities and requirements for Piping Systems including the following: 1. Labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services to be furnished in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents. The materials to be used for the piping systems shown in the Drawings are listed by service in the Piping Schedule, included in the Contract Drawings. 2. Coordination of work with other trades. 3. Furnishing and installing all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure, and complete installation, although such work is not specifically indicated. 4. Furnishing Record Drawings and documents for piping systems. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01300, Contract Administration. B. Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. C. Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling. D. Section 09900, Painting and Coating. E. Section 15155, Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings. F. Section 15250, Small- Diameter Piping. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit the following in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. If the Contractor deviates from the piping layout as shown on the Contract Drawings, the Contractor shall submit scaled piping drawings showing locations and dimensions to and from fittings, valves, tanks, equipment, structures, and related appurtenances. Provide scaled drawings to a minimum scale of 1 inch equals 10 feet. Provide details to minimum scale of 1/8 inch equals 1 foot. Elevations shall correspond to reference vertical elevation datum shown or provided for this project. 03720 - 042 -02 15055 -1 PIPING SYSTEMS — GENERAL August 2013 B. Copies of any manufacturer's written directions regarding material handling, delivery, storage, and installation. C. Record piping drawings shall meet the requirements of Section 01300, Contract Administration, or 01785, Record Documents. During the work, the Contractor shall maintain accurate, up -to -date Record Drawings of piping systems installed in the project, including pre- existing piping discovered, relocated, or at locations other than as originally shown on the Drawings. When the work is completed and accepted by the Owner and the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit Record Drawings in accordance with Section 01785, Record Drawings. The Contractor shall identify complete location, elevations, and description of piping systems. Piping systems and fittings are to be identified from three points on structures and/or stationary appurtenances. D. Submit copies of forms documenting required field pressure testing work and results. E. Submit welding certificate copies. F. Submit certified copies of mill test reports for bolts and nuts, including coatings if specified. Provide recertification by an independent domestic testing laboratory for materials originating outside of the United States. G. Submit manufacturer's data sheet for gaskets supplied showing dimensions and bolting recommendations. H. Support Systems: 1. Drawings of each piping system locating each support, guide, and anchor. 2. Identify support, guide, and anchor type by catalog number and shop/ contract drawing detail number 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. 03720 - 042 -02 15055 -2 PIPING SYSTEMS — GENERAL August 2013 • • • • • • A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI A21.11— Rubber Gasket Joints for Cast Iron and Ductile Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 2. ANSI B1.1—Unified Inch Screw Threads. 3. ANSI B2.1 —Pipe Threads. 4. ANSI B16.21 Nonmetallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges. 5. ANSI B18.2.1— Square and Hex Bolts and Screws, Including Askew Head Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Lag Screws. 6. ANSI B18.2.2 — Square and Hex Nuts. 7. ANSI B31.3— Process Piping. B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 1. ASME B31.1 —Power Piping (Pressure Piping). 2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A183— Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts. 2. ASTM A193— Standard Specification for Alloy - Steel; and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and other Special Purpose Applications. 3. ASTM A194— Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High- Pressure and High- Temperature Service. 4. ASTM A307— Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners. 5. ASTM D1330—Standard Specification for Rubber Sheet Gaskets. 6. ASTM F467— Standard Specification for Nonferrous Nuts for General Use. D. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1. AWWA C207 —Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service -Sizes 4 inch through 144 inch. E. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS) 1. MSS SP 58 —Pipe Hangars and Supports – Material, Design, and Manufacture. 03720 - 042 -02 15055 -3 PIPING SYSTEMS— GENERAL August 2013 F. NSF International (NSF) 1. NSF 61— Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. B. The Contractor shall protect the pipe from kinks, cuts, end damage, and other defects when transporting all piping. Binding and tie -down methods shall not damage or deflect the pipes in any way. Pipe damaged during shipment shall be rejected. C. Pipe shall be stored on level ground, preferably turf or sand, free of sharp objects that could damage the pipe. Stacking of any pipe shall be limited to a height that will not cause excessive deformation of the lower layers of pipe under anticipated temperature conditions. When necessary due to ground conditions, the pipe shall be stored on wooden sleepers, spaced suitably and of such widths to not allow deformation of the pipe at the point of contact with the sleeper or between supports. Pipe shall not be removed from storage until bedding or sub -grade work is complete and ready to receive the pipe. D. The joined pipe shall be handled in such a manner that the pipe is not damaged by dragging it over sharp and cutting objects. Ropes, fabric, or rubber- protected slings and straps shall be used when handling pipe. Chains, cables, or hooks inserted into the pipe ends shall not be used. Two slings spread apart shall be used for lifting each length of pipe. Pipe or fittings shall not be dropped. Slings for handling joined pipe shall not be positioned at socket - welded joints. Sections of the pipes with cuts and gouges shall be removed and the ends of the pipe rejoined. In accordance with the pipe manufacturer's written instructions, the Contractor shall repair all pipe with damaged linings and pipe exterior coatings that have been damaged before the pipe is installed. E. The Contractor shall cover all pipe stored on the site with canvas or other opaque material to protect it from sunlight. Provide air circulation under the covering. 03720- 042 -02 15055 -4 PIPING SYSTEMS — GENERAL August 2013 • • • • F. The Contractor shall inspect all pipe, fittings, and other accessories upon delivery and during the work. Any defective or damaged materials found during field inspection or during tests shall be removed from the site and replaced by, and at the expense of, the Contractor. G. The interior of all pipe, fittings, and other accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter at all times. Fittings shall be drained and stored in a manner that will protect them from damage by freezing. H. Gaskets shall be placed in a cool location out of direct sunlight. Gaskets shall not come in contact with petroleum products. Gaskets shall be used on a first - delivered -to -site and first- to -be- installed rotation basis. Mechanical joint glands, bolts, and washers shall be handled and stored in a manner that will ensure proper use with respect to types and sizes. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) • 1.12 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O &M) MANUALS A. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manuals. 1.13 DEFINITIONS OF BURIED, EXPOSED, AND SUBMERGED PIPING A. Buried piping is piping buried in soil, beneath a structure and/or encased in concrete. Where an exterior pipe coating is specified to be factory- or field - applied, the Contractor shall provide the coating up to the penetration of a structure. Piping encased in concrete does not require an exterior coating other than what is factory furnished. B. Exposed piping is piping in any of the following conditions or locations: 1. Above ground. 2. Inside buildings, vaults, or other structures. 3. In underground concrete trenches or galleries. C. Submerged piping is considered to be all piping within a liquid holding tank. 03720 - 042 -02 15055 -5 PIPING SYSTEMS — GENERAL August 2013 1.14 SYSTEM DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. General 1. The Specifications and Drawings are not all inclusive of explicit piping details; provide piping for intended use in compliance with laws and regulations, including ASME B31.1 Code (Power Piping). 2. Pressure ratings and materials specified represent minimum acceptable standards for piping systems. 3. Piping Systems: Suitable for the services specified and intended. 4. Piping shall be color coded in accordance with the Department of Environmental Protection requirements. B. Support Systems 1. The absence of pipe supports and details on the Drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for sizing and providing supports for this project. 2. Select and design within the specified spans and component requirements. 3. Comply with requirements of MSS SP 58, Pipe Hangers and Supports — Materials, Design, and Manufacture. 4. Criteria for structural design and selection of pipe support system components: a. Dead loads imposed by the weight of the pipes filled with water, within specified spans and component requirements, plus any insulation. b. Safety factor: Minimum of 5. 5. Design, size, and space support anchoring devices, including anchor bolts, inserts, and other devices used to anchor the support, to withstand the shear and pullout loads imposed by loading and spacing on each particular support. a. Piping smaller than 30 inches: Supports are shown only where specific types and locations are required; additional pipe supports may be required and are to be provided and installed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 03720 - 042 -02 15055 -6 PIPING SYSTEMS — GENERAL August 2013 • • • C. Adapters 1. No attempt has been made to show all adapters, spool pieces, reducers, bushings, or other fittings required to accommodate the connection of pipes, fittings, and valves of various joint design and sizes throughout the project. The Contractor is completely responsible for providing, at his expense, all adapters, reducers, sleeves, spool pieces, and other fittings and appurtenances necessary for connection of pipe (for the same pipe material of or a transition of pipe materials), valves, fittings, and appurtenances throughout the project, which shall be constructed of appropriate materials, coated and lined to match the materials, coatings, and linings specified for the connected components. All adapters, reducers, sleeves, spool pieces, and other fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with the specifications for each individual pipe system. D. Unions 1. No attempt has been made to show all unions required for the project. The Contractor shall provide unions at all connections of threaded pipe to installed equipment unless deleted by the Engineer, in writing, at certain locations. The unions shall meet or exceed the quality of materials, pressure rating, service, and painting requirements of connected piping. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SCHEDULE A. Unless noted otherwise in the Drawings, piping system materials, fittings, and appurtenances are subject to requirements of the individual Specifications for the piping systems. 2.02 PIPING SCHEDULE A. A piping schedule (flow stream identification) listing the piping identification abbreviations, piping materials, operating pressures, field test pressures, lining systems, and color coding associated with the flow streams is provided on the Contract Drawings. In project locations where the piping system material referenced on the piping schedule is not appropriate, the required piping material is indicated on the Contract Drawings. Materials called out in the Contract Drawings shall govern over materials stated in the piping schedule. 03720 - 042 -02 15055 -7 PIPING SYSTEMS — GENERAL August 2013 2.03 THREAD FORMING FOR STAINLESS -STEEL BOLTS A. Form threads for stainless steel bolts by rolling, not by cutting or grinding. 2.04 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR FLANGES FOR DUCTILE IRON PIPE FLANGES A. Bolts, washers, and nuts for pipe installed indoors, outdoors above and below ground, and in vaults and structures shall be as specified in Section 15155, Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings. B. Bolts, washers, and nuts for submerged Class 150 flanges shall be Type 304 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A193 (Grade B8) for bolts and ASTM A194 (Grade 8) for nuts. Fit shall be Classes 2A conforming to ANSI B1.1 when connecting to cast -iron valves having body bolt holes. 2.05 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR TYPE 304 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE FLANGES A. Bolts, washers, and nuts for flanges shall be Type 304 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A193, Grade B8, for bolts and ASTM A194, Grade 8, for nuts. 2.06 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR TYPE 316 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE FLANGES A. Bolts, washers, and nuts for flanges shall be Type 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A193, Grade B8, for bolts and ASTM A194, Grade 8, for nuts. 2.07 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR PVC PIPE FLANGES A. Bolts for piping in sodium hypochlorite service shall be made of titanium, in accordance with ASTM F467, Grade Til, Ti2, or Ti7. Nuts and washers shall conform to ASTM F467 and shall be made of titanium. B. Bolts, washers, and nuts in chemical service other than sodium hypochlorite shall be Type 304 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A193, Grade B8, for bolts and ASTM A194, Grade 8, for nuts. C. Bolts, washers, and nuts for buried and submerged flanges and flanges located outdoors above ground or in vaults and structures shall be Type 304 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A193, Grade B8, for bolts and ASTM A194, Grade 8, for nuts. D. The Contractor shall provide a washer under each nut and under each bolthead. Washers shall be of the same material as the nuts. 03720 - 042 -02 15055 -8 PIPING SYSTEMS — GENERAL August 2013 • • • 2.08 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR STEEL PIPE FLANGES A. Bolts, washers, and nuts for Class 150 flanges (including AWWA C207, Class D) located indoors, outdoors above ground, in vaults, and in structures shall be carbon steel, ASTM A307, Grade B. Bolts, washers, and nuts for buried service shall also be hot - dipped galvanized. B. Bolts, washers, and nuts for submerged Class 150 flanges shall be Type 304 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A193 (Grade B8) for bolts and ASTM A194 (Grade 8) for nuts. Fit shall be Class 2A in accordance with ANSI B1.1 when connecting to cast -iron valves having body bolt holes. 2.09 LUBRICANT FOR STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS AND NUTS A. Anti -seize thread lubricant shall be applied to the thread portion of all (above grade and below grade) stainless steel bolts (stainless steel tie rods, etc.) during assembly. Anti -seize lubricant shall be chloride free and shall be nongalling NSF approved. Anti -seize thread lubricant shall be Jet -Lube "Nikal," John Crane "Thred Gard Nickel," Never -Seez "Pure Nickel Special," or Permatex "Nickel Anti - Seize." 2.10 FLANGE GASKETS FOR STEEL, DUCTILE IRON, AND STAINLESS STEEL PIPE A. Flange gaskets shall be in accordance with AWWA C207, except as modified in this Section. Gaskets shall be ring type. All gasket material shall be suitable for the fluid being conveyed and shall be resistant to free chlorine concentrations up to 10 mg/L. All gasket material shall be rated to the surge pressures listed in the pipe schedule. Gaskets shall be EPDM, Viton, or an approved equal. 2.11 FLANGE GASKETS FOR DUCTILE -IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS IN RAW SEWAGE (NOT USED) 2.12 FLANGE GASKETS FOR PVC CPVC PIPE A. Gaskets for flanged joints shall be full faced, 1/8 inch thick, having a Brinell Hardness of 50 to 70 durometer A. Gasket material shall be EPR unless noted or specified otherwise. Gasket material for sodium hypochlorite service shall be Viton ETP unless noted or specified otherwise. Gaskets shall be compatible with the fluids conveyed. 2.13 FLANGE GASKETS FOR PVDF PIPE (NOT USED) 03720 - 042 -02 15055 -9 PIPING SYSTEMS — GENERAL August 2013 2.14 FLANGE GASKETS FOR STAINLESS STEEL PIPE IN CHEMICAL SERVICE (NOT • USED) 2.15 POTABLE WATER PIPING SYSTEMS (NOT USED) 2.16 LOCATOR WIRE A. All 2 -inch and larger buried piping shall be laid with two insulated, 12 -gauge minimum AWG, THWN strand copper wires taped with adhesive backed tape or tied to the nonmetallic pipe at 5 feet on center for location purposes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Field Alignment: 1. The piping shown on the Contract Drawings is generally indicative of the work, with symbols and notations provided for clarity. However, the Contract Drawings are not an exact representation of all conditions involved; therefore, install piping to suit actual field conditions and measurements as approved by the Engineer. No extra compensation will be made for work due to differences between indicated and actual dimensions. 2. The Contractor shall install all adapters, fittings, flanged connections, closures, restrained joints, etc. not specified but necessary for a complete installation acceptable to the Engineer. 3. The Contract Drawings do not indicate all adapters, fittings, spool pieces, bushings, unions, supports, hangers, and other items required to accommodate the installing and connecting of pipe, fittings, valves, and equipment of various joint designs and sizes. Provide such required items of appropriate designs, materials, coatings, and linings. 4. An extensive network of underground piping, duct, conduit, direct - buried conductors, and related structures of various sizes, materials, alignments, age, and function exist within the project site. Conclusive information concerning these facilities is not available. Consequently, the design of new piping indicated on the Contract Drawings is approximate. Adjust alignment, fitting, valve, and joint locations as required and as approved by the Engineer to accommodate and protect existing facilities and provide the intended functionality of new piping. 03720 - 042 -02 15055 -10 PIPING SYSTEMS— GENERAL August 2013 • • • • 3.02 FIELD LAYOUT AND MODIFICATIONS A. Unless directed otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for setting construction layout stakes and /or offsets required to complete the designated work. The Contractor shall ensure that those stakes and/or offsets are protected and any re- staking required for any reason including work stoppage shall be included in the bid price and no additional compensation to the Contractor will be made. B. The Engineer has the right to make any modifications the Engineer deems necessary due to field conditions, conflicts with other utilities, or to protect other properties. 3.03 PIPE PRODUCTS INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall obtain from the pipe manufacturer a certificate of inspection to the effect that the pipe, fittings, gaskets, glands, bolts, and nuts supplied for this Contract have been inspected at the plant and that they meet the requirements of these specifications. The Contractor shall submit these certificates to the Engineer before installing the pipe materials. The Contractor shall visually inspect all pipe and fittings at delivery and before they are lowered into the trench to be installed. Pipe or fittings that do not conform to these Specifications or have been damaged in any manner will be rejected and the Contractor must remove them immediately. The entire product of any plant may be rejected when, in the opinion of the Engineer, the methods or quality assurance and uniformity of manufacturer fail to secure acceptable and uniform pipe products or where the materials used produce inferior pipe products. 3.04 REMOVAL OF EXISTING PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe specifically identified on the Drawings to be removed or replaced from service shall be physically taken out of the ground. The limits of pipe to be removed shall be specifically called for in the plans or shall be approved in writing by the Engineer. Any other removal not specifically called for shall be approved in writing and shall be considered incidental to construction of other items in the contract and the Contractor will not receive compensation for such work. B. When removing pipe the Contractor shall excavate a trench wide enough to dislodge the pipe from the surrounding soil and long enough to be able to handle the pipe without causing any damage to nearby utilities, structures, or adjacent property. 03720 - 042 -02 15055 -11 PIPING SYSTEMS — GENERAL August 2013 C. The removed pipe, fitting, and appurtenances will become the Contractor's property and the Contractor shall be responsible for proper disposal and any required permits for disposal. D. Regarding pipe remaining in the ground subsequent to removal of connected pipe or pipe fittings, the remaining buried pipes, openings, and fittings shall be plugged or capped as approved by the Engineer. E. Pipe that will be abandoned in place shall be plugged or capped as approved by the Engineer. 3.05 BURIED PIPING AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Trenching and backfilling for all pipe and fittings shall also be in accordance with Section 02305, Earthwork for Utilities. B. Installation: 1. Inspect all piping for defects and remove all lumps or excess coatings before installation. The inside of the mechanical joint and outside of plain - end pipe shall be cleaned before joining pipe. Caution shall be taken to prevent damage to the pipe during lowering into the trench. Remove all foreign matter that has entered the pipe during storage and installation. The Contractor shall cover the pipe ends during installation to prevent debris from entering the pipe. No debris, tools, clothing, or other material shall be placed in the pipe. 2. After being placed in the trench, the pipe shall be brought to the proper line and grade by compacting the approved backfill material under it, except at the bell end. Joint deflection shall not exceed 75% of the manufacturer's limit. 3. The Contractor shall install temporary water -tight plugs on the pipe ends during the time that the pipe is in the trench but no work is in progress. If there is water in the trench upon beginning work, this plug shall remain in place until the trench has been pumped dry, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the Engineer's Representative, or the Owner's Representative. 4. Buried carbon steel bolts and nuts shall be coated in accordance with Section 09900, Painting and Coating, System No. 21. 5. Coat threaded portions of stainless steel bolts and nuts with lubricant before assembly. 03720 - 042 -02 15055 -12 PIPING SYSTEMS— GENERAI, August 2013 • • • • • • 6. Restrained plugs or caps shall be inserted into all buried dead end pipes, tees, or crosses. Provide blind flanges for all flanged exposed piping. Restrained plugs and caps installed for pressure testing shall be fully secured and blocked to withstand the test pressure. 7. Where plugging is required because of contract division or phasing for later connection, the ends of such lines shall be equipped with a suitable cast -iron or ductile -iron plug /cap or blind flange with or without a blowoff cock, as shown on the Drawings. Installation or removal of such plugging shall be considered incidental to the work and the Contractor shall not be compensated by the Owner for performing this work. 3.06 FLANGED JOINTS FOR EXPOSED PIPE AND FITTINGS A. When bolting flanged joints, the Contractor shall avoid restraint on the opposite end of the pipe or fitting, which would prevent uniform gasket compression or which would cause unnecessary stress in the flanges. One flange shall be free to move in any direction while the flange bolts are being tightened. Bolts shall be tightened gradually and at a uniform rate to ensure uniform compression of the gasket, in accordance with pipe and fitting manufacturer's recommendations. B. Coat threaded portions of stainless -steel bolts and nuts with lubricant before assembly. 3.07 PIPING CONNECTIONS TO PUMPS AND OTHER EQUIPMENT A. When connecting to pumps and equipment, the Contractor shall ensure that piping stresses are not transmitted to the pump and equipment. All connecting pipe shall be permanently supported and aligned so that accurate matching of bolt holes and uniform contact over the entire surface of pump flanges are obtained before any bolts are installed in the flanges or pipe is threaded into pump and equipment. In addition, pump connection piping shall be free to move parallel to its longitudinal center line while the bolts are being tightened. 1. Pumps and equipment shall be leveled, aligned, and wedged into a position that will fit the connecting pipe, but shall not be grouted until the initial fitting and alignment of the pump and equipment may be shifted on its foundation if necessary to properly install the connecting pipe. Each pump and piece of equipment shall, however, be grouted before final bolting of the connecting piping. 2. After final alignment and bolting, the pump and equipment connections shall be tested for applied piping stresses by loosening the flange bolts which, if the piping is properly installed, should result in no movement of 03720- 042 -02 15055 -13 PIPING SYSTEMS — GENERAL August 2013 the piping relative to the pump or opening of the pump connection joints. If any movement is observed, the piping shall be loosened and re- aligned as required and then the flanges bolted back together. The flange bolts then shall be loosened and the process repeated until no movement is observed. 3. All carbon steel bolts and nuts shall be coated with the same exterior coating applied to the piping system. 3.08 ANCHORING AND RESTRAINING (NOT USED) 3.09 FLUSHING, CLEANING, TESTING AND INSPECTION OF PIPING A. See Section 15144, Pressure Testing of Piping, for the requirements of pipe flushing, cleaning, pressure testing, and inspection requirements. 3.10 DISINFECTION (NOT USED) 3.11 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS AND PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Welding: 1. Use only certified welders meeting procedures and performance outlined in Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and other codes and requirements in accordance with local building and utility requirements. Submit Welder's certificates to the Engineer for the project record before beginning any welding on the project. The Welder must be certified for all positions (flat, vertical, and overhead). 2. Have all welds conform to highest industrial practice in accordance with ASME B31.3 and ANSI B31.1 or other codes and requirements in accordance with local building and utility requirements. 3.12 PIPE COLOR CODING A. The pipe color shall be as identified on the Drawings. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer and the Owner to generate a list of acceptable pipe colors for exposed piping systems. Where color- coding is achieved by painting exterior surfaces of the piping systems, painting shall be provided in accordance with Section 09900, Painting and Coating. On applicable pipes, color shall be in accordance with FDEP color - coding requirements. END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 15055 -14 PIPING SYSTEMS— GENERAL August 2013 • • • • SECTION 15060 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section includes requirements for materials and installation of pipe hangers and supports, including accessory items such as anchor bolts and screws, pipe spiders, neoprene isolation pads, cable trays for hoses, and drip guards. 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. Provide line drawings of each piping system to the scale shown on the Drawings, locating each support or hanger. Identify each type of hanger or support by the manufacturer's catalog number or figure. B. Provide installation drawings and manufacturer's catalog information on each type of hanger and support used. Clearly indicate the actual pipe outside diameter (not just nominal pipe size) that is used for the hangers and supports. D. Submit layout drawings for the drip guards, showing dimensions and thicknesses. Show design of seam or joint where field connections will be made between sections and pieces of drip guards. E. Submit a certificate listing the type of resin to be used, describing the manufacturer's brand name or designation, composition, and characteristics. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. 03720- 042 -02 15060 -1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS August 2013 A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI B31.1.0 —Power Piping. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A36— Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A47— Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. 3. ASTM A48— Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 4. ASTM A153— Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 5. ASTM A 194— Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both. 6. ASTM A276— Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 7. ASTM A307— Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. 8. ASTM A575— Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M- Grades. 9. ASTM A576— Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot - Wrought, Special Quality. 10. ASTM A635— Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy - Thickness Coils, Hot - Rolled, Alloy, Carbon, Structural, High - Strength Low - Alloy, and High- Strength Low -Alloy with Improved Formability, General Requirements for. 11. ASTM A1011— Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot - Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High - Strength Low - Alloy, High - Strength Low -Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra -High Strength. 12. ASTM D256— Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics. 13. ASTM E84— Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 14. ASTM F593— Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. 15. ASTM F594— Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts. C. Manufacturer's Standardization Society 1. MSS SP -58 —Pipe Hangers and Supports – Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation. 2. MSS SP -69 —Pipe Hangers and Supports – Selection and Application. 03720 - 042 -02 15060 -2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS August 2013 • • 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All hangers, supports, and appurtenances shall conform to the latest applicable requirements of ANSI B31.1.0, except as supplemented or modified by the requirements of this Section. B. All hangers, supports, and appurtenances shall be of approved standard design where possible and shall be adequate to maintain the supported load in proper position under all operating conditions. The minimum working factor of safety for all supporting equipment, with the exception of springs, shall be five times the ultimate tensile strength of the material, assuming 10 feet of water - filled pipe being supported. C. All pipe and appurtenances connected to equipment shall be supported so as to prevent any strain being imposed on the equipment. When manufacturers have indicated requirements that piping loads shall not be transmitted to their equipment, the Contractor shall submit certification stating that such requirements have been complied with. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. B. All supports and hangers shall be crated, delivered, and uncrated to protect against any damage. C. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration shall occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed. D. Finished iron or steel surfaces not galvanized or painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 03720 - 042 -02 15060 -3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS August 2013 1.11 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) 1.12 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O &M) MANUALS A. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manuals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Not all pipe supports or hangers required are shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall provide pipe supports for every piping system installed. Support piping by pipe support where it connects to pumps or other mechanical equipment. B. The Contractor shall ensure that pipe support and hanger components shall withstand the dead loads imposed by the weight of the pipes, fittings, and valves (all filled with water) plus valve actuators and any insulation and shall have a minimum safety factor of 5 based on the material's ultimate strength. C. All of the equipment specified in this Section is intended to support the various types of pipe and piping systems. The details shown on the Drawings are intended to indicate the generally desired methods of support under normal conditions. The Contractor shall develop final details and any details associated with special conditions not already covered to meet the system conditions specified in the respective Division 15 Pipe Sections. D. All pipe and tubing shall be supported as required to prevent significant stresses in the pipe of tubing material, valves, fittings, and other pipe appurtenances and to support and secure the pipe in the intended position and alignment. All supports shall be designed to adequately secure the pipe against excessive dislocation due to thermal expansion and contraction, internal flow forces, and all probable external forces such as equipment, pipe, and personnel contact. Any structural steel members required to brace any piping from excessive dislocation and shall be furnished and installed under this Section. E. Hangers and supports shall be spaced in accordance with ANSI B31.1.0 except that the maximum unsupported span shall not exceed 10 feet unless otherwise specified in this Section. F. Where flexible couplings are required at equipment, tanks, etc., the end opposite to the piece of equipment, tank, etc. shall be rigidly supported. 03720 - 042 -02 15060 -4 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS August 2013 • • • G. All pipe and appurtenances connected to the equipment shall be supported so as to prevent any strain from being imposed on the equipment or piping system. H. All rods, clamps, hangers, inserts, anchor bolts, brackets, and components for interior pipe supports shall be furnished with galvanized finish, hot - dipped, or electro- galvanized coated, except where field welding is required. Interior clamps on plastic pipe shall be plastic coated. Supports for copper pipe shall be copper plated or shall have a 1/16 -inch plastic coating. All rods, clamps, hangers, inserts, anchor bolts, brackets, and components for exterior pipe and pipe within outdoor structures shall be of Type 316 stainless steel. I. Supports shall be sufficiently close together so that the sag of the pipe is within limits that will permit drainage and avoid excessive bending stresses from concentrated loads between supports. J. All un- insulated non - metallic piping such as PVC, CPVC, etc., shall be protected from local stress concentrations at each support point. Protection shall be provided by galvanized steel protection shields or other method as approved by the Engineer. Where pipes are bottom supported 180 °, arc shields shall be furnished. Where 360° arc support is required, such as U bolts, protection shields shall be provided for the entire pipe circumference. Protection shields shall have an 18 -gauge minimum thickness, not be less than 12 inches in length, and be securely fastened to pipe with stainless steel or galvanized metal straps not less than 1/2-inch wide. K. All insulated pipe shall be furnished with a rigid foam insulating saddle at each pipe support location as specified under respective pipe insulation. Provide galvanized protection shields as specified in Paragraph 2.O1J above at each location. L. Where pipe hangers and supports come in contact with copper piping, provide protection from galvanic corrosion by wrapping pipe with 1/16- inch -thick neoprene sheet material and galvanized protection shield or copper - plated or PVC - coated hangers and supports. M. Pipe supports shall be provided as follows: 1. Cast -iron and ductile -iron piping shall be supported at a maximum support spacing of 10 feet with a minimum of one support per pipe section at the joints. 03720 - 042 -02 15060 -5 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS August 2013 2. Steel and stainless steel piping 2 -1/2 inches or larger diameter shall be supported at a maximum support spacing of 10 feet with a minimum of one support per pipe section at the joints. 3. Support spacing for steel and stainless piping 2 inches and smaller diameter and copper tubing shall not exceed 5 feet. 4. Supports for multiple PVC plastic piping shall be continuous wherever possible. Individually supported PVC pipes shall be supported as recommended by the manufacturer except that support- spacing shall not exceed 3 feet. Multiple, suspended, horizontal plastic PVC pipe runs shall, where possible, be supported by ladder -type cable trays such as the Electray Ladder by Husky- Burndy; Cable Tray by Enduro Composite Systems; the Globetray by the Metal Products Division of United States Gypsum or equal. Ladder shall be of FRP construction. Rung spacing shall be 12 inches. Tray width shall be approximately 6 inches for single runs and 12 inches for double runs. Ladder -type cable trays shall be furnished complete with all hanger rods, rod couplings, concrete inserts, hanger clips, etc., required for a complete support system. Individual plastic pipes shall be secured to the rungs of the cable tray by strap clamps, or fasteners similar to Globe, Model M -CAC; Husky- Burndy, Model SCR; or equal. Spacing between clamps shall not exceed 9 feet. The cable trays shall provide continuous support along the length of the pipe. Individual clamps, hangers, and supports in contact with plastic PVC pipe shall provide firm support but not so firm as to prevent longitudinal movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. 5. All vertical pipes shall be supported at each floor or at intervals of not more than 12 feet by approved pipe collars, clamps, brackets, or wall rests and at all points necessary to ensure rigid construction. 6. Pipe supports shall not induce point loadings, but shall distribute pipe loads evenly along the pipe circumference. 7. Supports shall be provided at changes in direction and elsewhere as shown on the Drawings or as specified in this Section. No piping shall be supported from other piping or from metal stairs, ladders, and walkways, unless specifically directed or authorized by the Engineer. 8. Pipe supports shall be provided to minimize lateral forces through valves, both sides of split -type couplings, and sleeve -type couplings and to minimize all pipe forces on pump housings. Pump housings shall not be used to support connecting pipes. 03720 - 042 -02 15060 -6 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS August 2013 • 9. Effects of thermal expansion and contraction of the pipe shall be accounted for in the pipe support selection and installation. • • N. Any required pipe support for which the supports specified in this Section are not applicable shall be fabricated or constructed from standard structural steel shapes and concrete and anchor hardware similar to items previously specified in this Section and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. 2.02 HANGER AND SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. Pipe hangers and supports shall be as manufactured by Anvil, Unistrut, Cooper B -Line, Aikinstrut, Superstrut, or equal. B. Pipe hangers and supports shall comply with MSS SP -58 for the standard types referenced on the Drawings. The Contractor shall construct special hangers and supports if detailed in the Drawings. Type numbers for standard hangers and supports shall be in accordance with MSS SP -58 as listed below: 03720- 042 -02 August 2013 Type Number Description Manufacturer and Model (or Equal) 1 Adjustable steel clevis Anvil Fig. 590 or 260, B -Line B3100 or B3102 3 Steel double -bolt pipe clamp Anvil Fig. 295A or 295H, B -Line B3144 or B3144A 4 Steel pipe clamp (pipes smaller than 3 inches) Anvil Fig. 212, B -Line B3140 4 Steel pipe clamp (pipes 3 inches and larger) Anvil Fig. 216, B -Line 3142 5 Pipe hanger B -Line B6690 6 Adjustable swivel pipe ring Anvil Superstrut 714, Anvil Fig. 104 7 Adjustable steel band hanger B -Line B3172 8 Extension pipe or riser clamp Anvil Fig. 261, B -Line B5573 9 Adjustable band hanger Anvil Fig. 97 10 Adjustable swivel ring band hanger Anvil Fig. 70, B -Line B3170 NF 11 Split pipe ring with adjustable turnbuckle Anvil Fig. 108, B -Line B3173 13 Steel turnbuckle Anvil Fig. 230, B -Line B3202 14 Steel clevis Anvil Fig. 299, B -Line B3201 15 Swivel turnbuckle Anvil Fig. 114, B -Line B3224 16 Malleable iron socket Anvil Fig. 1108, B -Line B3222 17 Steel weldless eye nut B -Line B3200 18 Steel or malleable iron concrete insert Anvil Fig. 281, Superstrut 452 19 Top beam C -clamp Anvil Fig. 92, B -Line B3033 20 Side I -beam or channel clamp Anvil Fig. 14 or 217 21 Center I -beam clamp Anvil Figure 134 22 Welded attachment type Anvil Fig. 66 B -Line B3083 15060 -7 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Type Number Description Manufacturer and Model (or Equal) 23 C -clamp Anvil Fig. 86, B -Line B3036L 24 U -bolt Anvil Fig. 137, B -Line B3188 26 Clip Anvil Fig. 262, B -Line B3180 28 Steel I -beam clamp with eye nut Anvil Fig. 228 29 Steel wide flange Anvil Fig. 228 clamp with eye nut 30 Malleable iron beam clamp with extension piece Superstrut CM -754, B -Line B3054 31 Light welded steel bracket Anvil Fig. 194, B -Line B3063 32 Medium welded steel bracket Anvil Fig. 195, B -Line B3066 33 Heavy welded steel bracket Anvil Fig. 199, B -Line B3067 34 Side beam bracket Anvil Fig. 202, B -Line B3062 36 Pipe saddle support Anvil Fig. 258, B -Line B3095 37 Pipe stanchion saddle Anvil Fig. 259, B -Line B3090 38 Adjustable pipe saddle support Anvil Fig. 264, B -Line B3093B3089 39 Steel pipe covering Anvil Fig. 160, 161, 162, 163, 164, or 165; Superstrut A 789; B -Line B3160/B3165 40 Insulation protection shield Anvil Fig. 167, B -Line B3151 41 Single pipe roll Anvil Fig. 171, B -Line B3114 43 Adjustable roller hanger with swivel Anvil Fig. 181, B -Line B3110 44 Pipe roll, complete Anvil Fig. 271, B -Line B3117SL C. Pipe hangers and supports shall be hot - dipped galvanized according to ASTM A153 carbon steel (ASTM A36, A575, or A576). Bases, rollers, and anchors shall be steel as described above or may be cast iron (ASTM A48). Pipe clamps shall be steel as described above or may be malleable iron (ASTM A47). D. Offset Pipe Clamp. E. Anvil Figure 103, Cooper B -Line B3148, or equal. Material shall be Type 316 stainless steel unless otherwise noted. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS PIPE SUPPORTS AND HANGERS A. Pipe Anchor Chair: Anvil Figure 198 or equal. B. One Hole Clamp: Anvil Figure 126 or equal. C. Roller Chair: Anvil Figure 175 or equal. 2.04 STEEL CHANNEL FRAMING SYSTEM A. Steel channel frames shall be 1 -5/8 inches wide by 1 -5/8 or 3 -1/4 inches high by 12 -gauge metal thickness, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Material 03720 - 042 -02 15060 -8 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS August 2013 • • • shall conform to ASTM A36, A1011 (Grade 33 minimum), or A653 unless stainless steel is indicated on the Drawings. Stainless steel shall be Type 304. One side of the channel shall have a continuous open slot with inturned clamping ridges. Maximum allowable stress under any combination of applied uniformly distributed loads and concentrated loads shall not exceed those recommended in the AISC or AISI. Deflection shall not exceed 1/240 of span. The Contractor shall use multiple back -to -back channels to achieve these criteria if single channels are not sufficient. Products: Unistrut P1000 or P5000 Series, B -Line B11 or B22 Series, or equal. B. Steel channels shall be hot - dipped galvanized according to ASTM A153. C. Nuts shall be machined and case hardened. The Contractor shall provide rectangular nuts with the ends shaped to permit a quarter turn crosswise in the framing channel. Provide two serrated grooves in the nut to engage the inturned edges of the channel. D. Pipe clamps (including attachment screws and nuts) shall be Unistrut P1100 or P2000 Series, B -Line B2000 Series, or equal. Material shall be Type 304 stainless steel. E. Hanger rods for trapezes shall be carbon steel (ASTM A36, A575, or A576) unless stainless steel is indicated on the Drawings. Stainless -steel hanger rod material shall comply with ASTM A276, Type 304. F. Accessory fittings and brackets shall be the same material as the channel or trapeze. Provide coating on carbon steel fittings and brackets as specified for the channels and frames. 1. Flat Plate Fittings: Unistrut P1065, P1066, P1925; Superstrut AB -206, AB -207; or equal. 2. Post Bases: Unistrut P2072A, Superstrut AP -232, or equal. 3. 90° Brackets: Unistrut P1326, P1346; Superstrut AB -203; or equal. 4. Rounded -End Flat Plate Fittings: Unistrut P2325, Superstrut X -240, or equal. G. Parallel pipe clamps shall be Unistrut P1563 through P1573, Superstrut AB -719, or equal. Material shall be Type 304 stainless steel. 03720- 042 -02 15060 -9 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS August 2013 2.05 FIBERGLASS - REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) CHANNEL FRAMING SYSTEM A. FRP pipe hangers and supports shall be Aickinstrut, Inc. or equal. B. Material properties shall be as follows: Longitudinal Direction Ultimate Tensile (psi) 37,500 minimum Ultimate Compressive (psi) 35,000 minimum Ultimate Flexural (psi) 37,500 minimum Tensile Modulus (psi) x 10 * *6 3.00 minimum Flexural Modulus (psi) x 10 * *6 2.00 minimum Ultimate Shear Strength (psi) 6,000 minimum Ultimate Bearing Stress (psi) 35,000 minimum Izod Impact (ASTM D256) ft-lb /inch notch 30 minimum Transverse Direction Ultimate Tensile (psi) 10,000 minimum Ultimate Compressive (psi) 20,000 minimum Ultimate Flexural (psi) 14,000 minimum Tensile Modulus (psi) x 10 * *6 1.0 minimum Compressive Modulus (psi) x 10 * *6 1.4 minimum Flexural Modulus (psi) x 10 * *6 1.0 minimum Ultimate Shear Strength (psi) 5,500 minimum Ultimate Bearing Stress (psi) 35,000 minimum Izod Impact, ft-lb notch 5 minimum Hardness Barcol Test 50 minimum C. Glass- fiber- reinforced composites and plastic products shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. D. Channel framing shall be 1 -5/8 inches deep by 1 -5/8 inches wide and shall be made using vinylester resin equal to Ashland Derakane 411, Ashland Hetron 922, or Reichhold Dion 9800. It shall have a nexus polyester surfacing veil over 100% of the surface which, along with a filler system, will protect against degradation from ultraviolet light. Channel shall be supplied with integral notches 1 inch on center. Notches shall be located on the interior flange to prevent slippage of pipe clamps and fittings after installation. In place of notched channel, unnotched channel may be used if the vertical channel sections supporting the horizontal piping are provided with stop lock hardware at each pipe clamp to prevent slippage. Channel framing shall be Aickinstrut G.R.P. Type V 2000 series or equal. 03720 - 042 -02 15060 -10 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS August 2013 • • • E. Channel framing connections shall be made with vinylester glass fiber composite nuts, bolts, all threaded rods, channel fittings, bases, and hanger assemblies. Nut, bolts, and rods shall be Aickinstrut 4200 series, Strut Tech PVCG, or equal. Channel fittings shall be Aickinstrut 2800 style or equal. F. Load - bearing pipe clamps and nonload - bearing pipe straps shall be nonmetallic and nonconductive and shall be made by the injection - molding process using polyurethane -base resin. Pipe clamps and straps shall be Aickinstrut 3100 series or equal. G. Clevis hangers shall be made with vinylester glass fiber and be Aickinstrut 1500 series or equal. H. Hanger rods for trapezes shall be carbon steel (ASTM A36, A575, or A576) unless stainless steel or FRP is indicated on the Drawings. Stainless steel hanger rod material shall comply with ASTM A276, Type 304. FRP hanger rod shall be by Aickinstrut, StrutTech, or equal. 2.06 PIPE SPIDERS A. Cooper B -Line B3281 to 3286, Superstrut S -794 or equal. • 2.07 WAFFLE ISOLATION PADS A. Mason Type "W;" Machinery Installation Systems "Unisorb" Type S, SB, F, or FB; or equal. Provide minimum 1/4 -inch thickness. 2.08 NEOPRENE ISOLATING SLEEVES FOR METAL PIPE 6 INCHES AND SMALLER A. Unistrut P2600, B -Line "Vibrocushion," or equal. 2.09 ANCHOR BOLTS AND SCREWS • A. Anchor bolts and screws for attaching pipe supports and hangers to walls, floors, ceilings, and roof beams shall be Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A276 or F593. Nuts shall be Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A194, Grade 8M, or ASTM F594, Type 316 stainless steel. 03720 - 042 -02 15060 -11 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS August 2013 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PIPE HANGER AND WALL SUPPORT SPACING A. The Contractor shall install pipe hangers and wall supports on horizontal and vertical runs at the spacing shown or detailed on the Drawings. Provide hanger rods (for horizontal runs) and wall supports of the sizes shown or detailed on the Drawings. If no spacing or rod sizes are given on the Drawings or in the Specifications for a particular piping system, use the following: 1. Pipe Hanger and Wall Support Spacing for Steel and Ductile -Iron Pipe: Pipe Size (inches) Maximum Support or Hanger Spacing (feet) Minimum Rod Size (inches) 3/8 and smaller 4 3/8 1/2 through 1 6 3/8 1 -1/4 through 2 8 3/8 2 -1/2 and 3 10 1/2 3 -1/2 and 4 10 5/8 6 12 3/4 8 12 7/8 10 and 12 14 7/8 14 and 16 16 1 18 15 1 20 through 24 9 1 30 6 1 B. Pipe Hanger or Wall Support Spacing for PVC Pipe: Pipe Size (inches) Maximum Support or Hanger Spacing (feet) Minimum Rod Size (inches) 3/4 4 3/8 1 4 3/8 1 -1/2 5 3/8 2 5 3/8 2 -1/2 5 1/2 3 6 1/2 C. For piping services not described, the Contractor shall provide hangers and supports according to MSS SP -58 and SP -69. D. The Contractor shall provide bracing for piping 8 inches and smaller that is installed on hangers or trapezes according to MSS SP -127, except provide lateral bracing at maximum 10 -foot center -to- center spacings. Provide sway bracing for hangers for piping larger than 8 inches as detailed on the Drawings. 03720 - 042 -02 15060 -12 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS August 2013 • • • 3.02 PIPE SUPPORT SPACING FOR SUPPORTS ON TOP OF SLABS OR GRADE A. The Contractor shall install pipe supports on horizontal runs at the spacing shown or detailed on the Drawings. Provide supports of the type shown or detailed on the Drawings. If no spacings are given on the Drawings or in the Specifications for a particular piping system, use the following: 1. Pipe Support Spacing and Ductile -Iron Pipe: Pipe Size (inches) Maximum Support Spacing (feet) 3/8 and smaller 4 1/2 through 1 6 1 -1/4 through 2 8 2 -1/2 and 3 10 3 -1/2 and 4 10 6 12 8 12 10 and 12 14 14 and 16 16 18 16 20 through 24 18 30 18 B. Pipe support spacing for other pipe materials shall be the same as described in Article 3.01 "Pipe Hanger and Wall Support Spacing" above. 3.03 INSTALLING PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS The Contractor shall do the following: A. Provide separate hangers or supports at each valve. Provide one hanger or support around each end of the valve body or on the adjacent connecting pipe within one pipe diameter of the valve end. Provide additional hangers or supports to relieve eccentric loadings imposed by offset valve actuators. B. Provide separate hangers or supports at each pipe elbow, tee, or fitting. Provide separate hangers or supports on both sides of each nonrigid joint or flexible pipe coupling. C. Adjust pipe hangers according to MSS SP -89, Paragraph 10.6. D. Install leveling bolts beneath support baseplates. Provide 3/4- inch -thick grout pad beneath each base. 03720 - 042 -02 15060 -13 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS August 2013 E. Install piping without springing, forcing, or stressing the pipe or any connecting valves, pumps, and other equipment to which the pipe is connected. 3.04 INSTALLING STEEL AND FRP CHANNEL FRAMES A. The Contractor shall use 1 -5/8- inch -high channel frames, unless 3 -1/4 inch is needed, to provide clearance from walls. Use multiple back -to -back channels if additional clearance is needed. 3.05 INSTALLING NEOPRENE ISOLATING SLEEVES A. The Contractor shall install a sleeve around each metal pipe 6 inches and smaller at the point of bearing or contact with the pipe hanger or support. 3.06 PAINTING AND COATING The Contractor shall do the following regarding painting and coating: A. Grind the welds of fabricated steel pipe supports smooth, prepare surface by sandblasting, and apply coating system. B. Coat submerged pipe hangers and supports in accordance with Section 09900, Painting and Coating, System No. 7. C. Coat FRP pipe hangers and supports exposed to direct sunlight with System No. 41 in accordance with Section 09900, Painting and Coating. FRP pipe hangers and supports that are hidden from direct sunlight need not be coated. END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 15060 -14 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS August 2013 • SECTION 15075 PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section includes requirements for materials and installation of markers, labels, and signs for pipes, tanks, and valves; for mechanical equipment; for hazardous materials warnings; and for miscellaneous plant services. 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. B. The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's catalog data and descriptive literature describing materials, colors, letter size, and size of labels. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 03720 - 042 -02 15075 -1 PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND August 2013 VALVE IDENTIFICATION 1.11 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) 1.12 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O &M) MANUALS A. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manuals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LABELS FOR PIPING A. Labels for piping shall bear the full piping system name as shown in the Piping Schedule on the Drawings. The Contractor shall provide separate flow directional arrows next to each label. Color, size, and labeling shall conform to ANSI A13.1 and Z535.1. Labels for piping inside buildings shall be vinyl cloth: W. H. Brady Co. B -500 vinyl cloth, Seton Name Plate Corporation Pipe Markers, or equal. Labels for piping located outdoors shall be weather- and UV- resistant acrylic plastic and shall be W. H. Brady Co. B -946, Seton Name Plate Corporation Pipe Markers, or equal. B. Alternatively, the Contractor shall provide preprinted, semirigid, snap -on, color -coded pipe markers. Color, size, and labeling shall conform to ANSI A13.1 and Z535.1. Label shall cover 360° (minimum). Labels shall be fabricated of weather- and UV- resistant acrylic plastic. Labels shall be Seton Nameplate Corporation SetMark pipe marks or equal. 2.02 LABELS FOR VALVES A. The Contractor shall provide each valve listed on the Tag Number list with an identification tag. The tag shall be 2- inch - square or circular aluminum or 1/16- inch -thick fiberglass: W. H. Brady B -60, Seton Name Plate Corp. Series SVT, or equal. Aluminum tags shall have black - filled letters. The tag shall show the valve tag number and/or name or designation as given on the Drawings. 2.03 HOSE BIBB SIGNS — UNSAFE WATER (NOT USED) 2.04 LABELS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT A. The Contractor shall provide a label for each piece of mechanical equipment. The label shall show the equipment name and tag number as shown on the Tag Number list or on the Drawings. Labels shall be 1 -1/2 inches (minimum) by 4 inches (minimum) brass, aluminum, or 1/8- inch -thick fiberglass tags. Provide 03720 - 042 -02 15075 -2 PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND August 2013 VALVE IDENTIFICATION • • . fiberglass tags for chemical system equipment: Brady B -120 Fiber - Shield, Seton Style 2065, or equal. 2.05 LABELS FOR TANKS (NOT USED) 2.06 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS WARNING AND DANGER SIGNS A. The Contractor shall provide 10- inch - square hazardous materials warning diamond signs complying with NFPA 704. Wall signs shall be 1/8- inch -thick fiberglass: Brady B -120 Fiber - Shield or equal. Signs attached to tanks, cabinets, or pieces of equipment shall be self - adhesive vinyl cloth. Provide four signs for each bulk chemical storage tank, one for each quadrant of the tank. Affix a sign to the exterior side of each chemical feed room door: Brady B -946 or equal. Provide signs at the following locations: 2.07 UNDERGROUND PLASTIC WARNING TAPE FOR METAL PIPE A. The Contractor shall provide permanent, bright - colored, continuous- printed plastic tape intended for direct burial service, not less than 6 inches wide by 3.5 mils thick. Provide tape with printing that most accurately indicates the type of service of buried pipe. Provide the following colored tape for the various piping services: Service Color Cable TV, Telephone Orange Gas Yellow Electric Red Water Blue Sewer Green Chemical Yellow Reclaimed Water Violet 2.08 UNDERGROUND DETECTABLE METALLIC PIPE WARNING TAPE A. The Contractor shall provide permanent, bright - colored, continuous - printed tape consisting of an aluminum or steel foil sheathed in a plastic laminate, not less than 2 inches wide by 3 mils thick. Provide tape with printing that most accurately indicates the type of buried service. Provide the following colored tape for the various piping services: 03720 - 042 -02 August 2013 Service Color Cable TV, Telephone Orange Gas Yellow Electric Red Water Blue 15075 -3 PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION Service Color Sewer Green Chemical Yellow Reclaimed Water Violet PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLING PIPE LABELS A. The Contractor shall provide a label and flow arrow at each connection to pumps or other mechanical equipment, at wall boundaries, at tees and crosses, and at 20 -foot centers on straight runs of piping. B. On piping having external diameters less than 6 inches (including insulation, if any), the Contractor shall provide full -band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location. C. On piping having external diameters of 6 inches and larger (including insulation, if any), provide either full -band or strip -type pipe markers but not narrower than three times letter height (and of required length), fastened by one of the following methods: 1. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe or insulation. 1. Strapped -to -pipe or insulation application of semirigid type with Type 304 or 305 stainless steel bands. 3.02 INSTALLING VALVE AND EQUIPMENT LABELS A. The Contractor shall attach labels to the valve or piece of equipment with Type 304 or 316 stainless steel chains unless otherwise noted. For sodium hypochlorite and hydrofluosilicic acid use thermoplastic chains to attach labels. B. The Contractor shall attach valve labels to the valve handwheels. If the valve has no handwheel, attach the label to the valve by tying the tag wire or chain around the operating shaft or nut. 3.03 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS SIGNS (NOT USED) 3.04 INSTALLING WALL AND DOOR SIGNS (NOT USED) 3.05 INSTALLING UNDERGROUND PLASTIC WARNING TAPE FOR METAL PIPE A. During backfilling of each exterior underground piping system, the Contractor shall install continuous underground -type plastic line marker directly over buried 03720 - 042 -02 15075 -4 PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND August 2013 VALVE IDENTIFICATION • • line at 6 to 8 inches above the top of the pipe. Where multiple small lines are buried in common trench and do not exceed overall width of 16 inches, install a single line marker. 3.06 INSTALLING UNDERGROUND DETECTABLE METALLIC PIPE WARNING TAPE A. The Contractor shall install tape 4 to 6 inches below finished ground surface directly over buried pipelines. Where multiple small pipelines are buried in a common trench and do not exceed an overall width of 16 inches, install a single marker tape. END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 15075 -5 PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND August 2013 VALVE IDENTIFICATION • • • SECTION 15110 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and install complete and ready for operation all valves as shown in the Drawings and as specified in this Section. All valves shall be complete with all necessary manual actuators, valve boxes, extension stems, and floor stands, which are required for proper valve operation and completion of the work. 1. All valves shall be of the sizes shown in the Drawings. All equipment of the same type shall be from one manufacturer, unless authorized in writing by the Engineer. 2. The valves shall include but not be limited to the following: a. Air valves b. Ball valves c. Butterfly valves d. Gate valves 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. B. Section 09900, Painting and Coating. C. Section 15055, Piping System — General. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. Product technical submittal data shall contain the following information and data: 1. Acknowledgment that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Manufacturer's operation and maintenance manuals. 03720 - 042 -02 15110 -1 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES August 2013 4. Data of valves, actuators, and accessories: a. Pressure and temperature rating. b. Materials of construction, with ASTM reference and grade. c. Linings and coatings. d. Dimensions and weight. e. Flow coefficient. f. Actuators and accessories details. g. Manufacturer's product brochure, cut - sheets, and parts diagrams. B. Dimensions and orientation of valve actuators as installed on the valves. Show location of internal stops for gear actuators. State differential pressure and fluid velocity used to size actuators. For worm -gear actuators, state the radius of the gear sector in contact with the worm and state the handwheel diameter. C. The following test reports: Performance Tests; Leakage Tests; Hydrostatic Tests; and Proof -of- Design Tests as applicable or required. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American National Standard Institute • • 1. ANSI A21.11— Rubber - Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 2. ANSI B1.20.1—Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch). 3. ANSI B1.20.7 —Hose Coupling Screw Threads (Inch). 4. ANSI B16.1—Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250. 5. ANSI B16.5 —Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard. 6. ANSI B16.10—Face to Face and End -to -End Dimensions of Valves. 7. ANSI B 16.18 —Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 8. ANSI B16.34—Valves Flanged, Threaded and Welding End. 9. ANSI B16.42—Ductile-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Classes 150 and 300. • 10. ANSI B16.47—Large Diameter Steel Flanges: NPS 26 through NPS 60. 03720 - 042 -02 15110 -2 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES August 2013 • • • 11. ANSI B16.104 Control Valve Seat Leakage. 12. ANSI B36.10— Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe. 13. ANSI B93.10— Static Pressure Rating Methods of Square Head Fluid Power Cylinders Part 1: Pressure Containing Components. 14. ANSI B93.15— Mounting Dimensions for Square Head Industrial Fluid Power Cylinders. 15. ANSI/NSF 61— Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects. B. American Petroleum Institute API 1. API 6D— Pipeline Valves (Steel Gate, Plug, Ball, and Check Valves). 2. API 6FA— Specification for Fire Test for Valves. 3. API 594 —Check Valves: Flanged, Lug, Wafer and Butt- Welding. 4. API 607 — Testing of Valves – Fire Type- Testing Requirements. C. American Society for Testing of Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A36— Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A47— Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. 3. ASTM A48— Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 4. ASTM A105— Standard Specification for Carbon -Steel Forgings for Piping Applications. 5. ASTM A108— Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold- Finished. 6. ASTM A126— Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. 7. ASTM A148— Standard Specification for Steel Castings, High Strength, for Structural Purposes. 8. ASTM A181— Standard Specification for Carbon -Steel Forgings, for General - Purpose Piping. 9. ASTM A182— Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy and Stainless -Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High- Temperature Service. 10. ASTM A193— Standard Specification for Alloy -Steel and Stainless -Steel Bolting Materials for High- Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications. 11. ASTM A194— Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High- Temperature Service, or Both. 12. ASTM A216— Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion - Welding, for High- Temperature Service. 13. ASTM A240— Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium - Nickel Stainless -Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. 03720- 042 -02 15110 -3 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES August 2013 14. ASTM A269— Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless -Steel Tubing for General Purpose. 15. ASTM A276— Standard Specification for Stainless -Steel Bars and Shapes. 16. ASTM A313— Standard Specification for Stainless -Steel Spring Wire. 17. ASTM A322— Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Alloy, Standard Grades. 18. ASTM A351— Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure - Containing Parts. 19. ASTM A395— Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile -Iron Pressure - Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures. 20. ASTM A436— Standard Specification for Austenitic Gray Iron Castings. 21. ASTM A439— Standard Specification for Austenitic Ductile -Iron Castings. 22. ASTM A449— Standard Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General Use. 23. ASTM A276 — Standard Specification for Stainless -Steel Bars and Shapes. 24. ASTM A479— Standard Specification for Stainless -Steel Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other Pressure Vessels. 25. ASTM A494— Standard Specification for Castings, Nickel and Nickel Alloy. 26. ASTM A516— Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon - Steel, for Moderate- and Lower - Temperature Services. 27. ASTM A536— Standard Specification for Ductile -Iron Castings. 28. ASTM A564— Standard Specification for Hot - Rolled and Cold- Finished Age- Hardening Stainless -Steel Bars and Shapes. 29. ASTM A582— Standard Specification for Free - Machining Stainless -Steel Bars. 30. ASTM A666— Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold - Worked Austenitic Stainless -Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. 31. ASTM A743— Standard Specification for Castings, Iron - Chromium, Iron- Chromium- Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for General Application. 32. ASTM A744— Standard Specification for Castings, Iron-Chromium- Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for Severe Service. 33. ASTM A890— Standard Specification for Castings, Iron- Chromium- Nickel - Molybdenum Corrosion- Resistant, Duplex (Austenitic/Ferritic) for General Application. 34. ASTM B16—Standard Specification for Free - Cutting Brass Rod, Bar and Shapes for Use in Screw Machines. 35. ASTM B21— Standard Specification for Naval Brass Rod, Bar, and Shapes. 36. ASTM B61— Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Fittings. 37. ASTM B62— Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. 03720 - 042 -02 15110 -4 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES August 2013 • • • • 38. ASTM B98— Standard Specification for Copper - Silicon Alloy Rod, Bar and Shapes. 39. ASTM B99— Standard Specification for Copper- Silicon Alloy Wire for General Applications. 40. ASTM B127—Standard Specification for Nickel - Copper Alloy (UNS N04400) Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 41. ASTM B 148— Standard Specification for Aluminum- Bronze Sand Castings. 42. ASTM B150—Standard Specification for Aluminum Bronze Rod, Bar, and Shapes. 43. ASTM B 164— Standard Specification for Nickel- Copper Alloy Rod, Bar, and Wire. 44. ASTM A169— Standard Specification for Aluminum Bronze Sheet, Strip, and Rolled Bar. 45. ASTM B193—Standard Test Method for Resistivity of Electrical Conductor Materials. 46. ASTM B371- Standard Specification for Copper- Zinc - Silicon Alloy Rod. 47. ASTM B427— Standard Specification for Gear Bronze Alloy Castings. 48. ASTM B446— Standard Specification for Nickel- Chromium- Molybdenum - Columbium Alloy (UNS N06625), Nickel- Chromium- Molybdenum - Silicon Alloy (UNS N06219), and Nickel- Chromium- Molybdenum - Tungsten Alloy (UNS N06650) Rod and Bar. 49. ASTM B443— Standard Specification for Nickel- Chromium- Molybdenum - Columbium Alloy (UNS N06625) and Nickel- Chromium- Molybdenum - Silicon Alloy (UNS N06219) Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 50. ASTM B462— Specification for Forged or Rolled UNS N06030, N06022, N06035, N06200, N06059, N06686, N06020, N06024, N06026, N08367, N10276, N10665, N10675, N10629, N08031, N06045, N06025, & R20033 Alloy Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, & Values & Parts for Corrosive High- Temperature Service. 51. ASTM B463— Standard Specification for UNS N08020, UNS N08026, and UNS N08024 Alloy Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 52. ASTM B472— Standard Specification for Nickel Alloy Billets and Bars for Reforging. 53. ASTM B584— Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. 54. ASTM B763— Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for Valve Applications. 55. ASTM D1248—Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable. 56. ASTM D1784— Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 03720 - 042 -02 15110 -5 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES August 2013 57. ASTM D1785— Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. 58. ASTM D2000— Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. 59. ASTM D3222— Standard Specification for Unmodified Poly (Vinylidene Fluoride) (PVDF) Molding Extrusion and Coating Materials. 60. ASTM D4101— Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials. 61. ASTM F441— Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80. 62. ASTM F467— Standard Specification for Non - Ferrous Nuts for General Use. 63. ASTM F468— Standard Specification for Non - Ferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs for General Use. D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 1. ASME 16.5 —Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2 through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard. 2. ASME B16.11—Standards of Pipes and Fittings. 3. ASME B16.24—Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes 150, 300, 400, 600, 900, 1500, and 2500. E. American Society of Safety Engineers (ASSE) 1. ASSE 1011— Performance Requirements for Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers. F. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1. AWWA C110— Ductile -Iron and Gray -Iron Fittings for Water. 2. AWWA C111— Rubber - Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 3. AWWA C115— Standard for Flanged Ductile -Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges. 4. AWWA C207 —Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service, Sizes 4 -Inch through 144 -Inch (100 mm through 3,600 mm). 5. AWWA C500— Metal- Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. 6. AWWA C504— Rubber- Sealed Butterfly Valves. 7. AWWA C507 —Ball Valves 6 -Inch through 48 -Inch (150 mm through 1200 mm). 8. AWWA C508— Swing -Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2 -Inch (50 mm) through 24 -Inch (600 mm). 9. AWWA C509— Resilient - Seated Gate Valves for Water- Supply Service. 03720 - 042 -02 15110 -6 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES August 2013 • • • 10. AWWA C512 —Air Release, Air/Vacuum, and Combination Air Valves for Waterworks Service. 11. AWWA C515— Reduced -Wall, Resilient - Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. 12. AWWA C550— Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants. 13. AWWA C606 Grooved and Shouldered Joints. 14. AWWA C800— Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings. G. Fluid Controls Institute (FCI) 1. FCI 70- 2— Control Valve Seat Leakage. H. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) 1. MSS SP-61--Pressure Testing of Steel Valves. 2. MSS SP -67— Butterfly Valves. 3. MSS SP -68 —High Pressure Butterfly Valves with Offset Design. 4. MSS SP- 81— Stainless - Steel, Bonnetless, Flanged Knife Gate Valves. 5. MSS SP -83 —Class 3000 Steel Pipe Unions Socket Welding and Threaded. 6. MSS SP- 108 — Resilient - Seated Cast - Iron - Eccentric Plug Valves. I. NACE International (NACE) 1. NACE MR -01— Materials Resistant to Sulfide Stress Cracking in Corrosive Petroleum Refining Environments. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. B. All valves, unless otherwise directed, shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting, and under no circumstances shall valves be dropped, skidded, or rolled. Valves shall 03720 - 042 -02 15110 -7 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES August 2013 not be stacked or placed under pipe, fittings, or other valves in such a manner that damage could result. C. Slings, hooks, or tongs used for lifting shall be padded in such a manner as to prevent damage to exterior surface or interior linings and valve components. If any part of the coating, lining, or components is damaged, the repairs or replacement shall be made by the Contractor at his expense and in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer before attempting to install such valves. D. Only new valves will be allowed for installation and shall be stored in a manner to prevent damage and be kept free of dirt, mud, or other debris. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS A. All of the valves shall be products of well - established firms which are fully experienced, reputable, have been selling this product for a minimum of 10 years, and are qualified in the manufacture of the particular product furnished. The valves shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the requirements and procedures of applicable AWWA standards and shall comply with these Specifications as applicable. 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) 1.12 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O &M) MANUALS A. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manuals. 1.13 VALVE TYPE CLASSIFICATIONS A. Air Valves (Type 100 series): 1. Type 125: Combination Air Valves for Water Services, Single Body. B. Ball Valves (Type 200 series): 1. Type 210: Double -Union PVC Ball Valves, 3 Inches and Smaller, for Water and Light Chemical Service. 2. Type 212: Double -Union PVC Ball Valves, 3 Inches and Smaller, with Vented Ball for Chemical Service. 03720- 042 -02 15110 -8 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES August 2013 • • 3. Type 220: Regular Port Threaded Stainless -Steel Ball Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller. 4. Type 221: Full -Port Threaded Stainless -Steel Ball Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller, for Water Service. C. Butterfly Valves (Type 300 series): 1. Type 300: Flanged, Rubber - Seated Butterfly Valves, 4 Inches through 72 inches, for Exposed Service. 2. Type 302: Mechanical- Jointed, Rubber - Seated Butterfly Valves, 4 Inches through 72 Inches, for Buried Service. D. Gate Valves (Type 600 series): 1. Type 630: Cast -Iron Gate Valves, 4 Inches through 48 Inches. E. Other Special Types of Valves (Type 1200 series): 1. Type 1200: Flow Control Valves. 2. Type 1250: PVC Injection Quill with Check Valve • PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL • A. Valves are identified in the Drawings by size and type number. For example, a callout of 36V300 refers to a 36 -in- diameter Type 300 valve. A Type 300 valve is a flanged, rubber - seated butterfly valve that is 4 inches through 72 inches for exposed service. B. All valves shall be complete with all necessary geared actuators, chainwheels and chains, handwheels, levers, valve bonnets, valve boxes, extension stems, operating nuts, and T- handle wrenches, which are required for proper valve operating and completing of the work included under this Section. Renewable parts including discs, packing, and seats shall be of types specified in this Section and acceptable by valve manufacturer for the intended service. All units shall have the name of the manufacturer and the size of the valve cast on the body or bonnet or shown on a permanently attached stainless -steel plate in raised embossed letters. All isolation valves shall be suitable for the intended service with bubble -tight shutoff to flow in either direction. 03720 - 042 -02 15110 -9 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES August 2013 C. Bronze or brass components in contact with water shall comply with the following requirements: Constituent Content Zinc 7% maximum Aluminum 2% maximum Lead 8% maximum Copper + Nickel + Silicon 83% minimum D. Valves and valve operators shall be factory prepared and primed and field finish coated in accordance with Section 09900, Painting and Coating. 2.02 VALVE ACTUATORS A. The valve actuator shall be an integral part of a valve. The valve actuator shall be provided, installed, and adjusted by the valve manufacturer. Actuator mounting arrangements shall facilitate operation and maintenance and shall be determined by the valve manufacturer unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer. B. All valves shall open counter clockwise as viewed from the top. Unless otherwise required by the Owner, the direction of rotation of the wheel or wrench nut to open each valve shall be to the left (counterclockwise). Each valve body or actuator shall have the word "Open" cast on it and an arrow indicating the direction to open. C. Actuators shall clearly indicate valve position and an adjustable stop shall be provided to set closing torque. All exposed nuts, bolts, and washers shall be AISI Type 304 stainless- steel. Unless noted otherwise, valves shall be equipped with the following manual actuators: 1. Exposed valves 6 inches and smaller: removable lever or handwheel actuators. 2. Exposed valves 8 inches and larger: geared actuators with handwheels. 3. Buried or Submerged Valves 6 inches and smaller: 2- inch - square operating nuts (with valve bonnets, valve boxes, and extension stems as required) and T- handle wrench. 4. Buried or Submerged Valves 8 inches and larger: Geared actuators with 2- inch - square operating nuts (with valve bonnets, valve boxes, and extension stems as required) and wrench. 03720 - 042 -02 15110 -10 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES August 2013 • • D. Levers or handwheels shall be provided to actuate the valves where the valves are within 6 feet and 7 inches from finished grade or the operating floor. Handwheels shall be constructed of ductile -iron. Levers and handwheels shall be coated in accordance with Section 09900, Painting and Coating. Handwheel diameters for traveling nut actuators shall not exceed 8 inches for valves 12 inches and smaller and shall not exceed 12 inches for valves 20 inches and smaller. E. Chainwheel and guide actuators shall be provided for all exposed valves installed with their centerlines more than 6 feet and 9 inches above finished grade. Chainwheels shall be cast -iron with stainless -steel stem, clip, and pins. The actuating chain shall be AISI Type 304 SS. Stainless -steel chain baskets shall also be provided with these units. Chainwheels shall be coated in accordance with Section 09900, Painting and Coating. Chainwheels and guides shall be Clow Figure F -5680, DeZurik Series W or LWG, Stockham, or equal. F. Gear actuators for valves 8 inches through 20 inches shall be of the worm -and- gear or of the traveling -nut type. Gear actuators for valves 24 inches and larger shall be of the worm- and -gear type. Gear actuators for motorized valves shall be of the worm- and -gear type, regardless of size. 1. Gear actuators should be designed assuming that the differential pressure across the valves is equal to the test pressure of the connecting piping and assuming a line fluid temperature range of 33 °F to 125 °F, unless otherwise required in the detailed valve specifications. 2. Gear actuators shall be enclosed and oil lubricated with seals provided on shafts to prevent entry of dirt and water into the actuator. Gear actuators for valves aboveground or in vaults and structures shall have handwheels. The actuators for valves in exposed service shall contain a dial indicating the position of the valve disc or plug. 3. Traveling nut and worm- and -gear actuators shall be of the totally enclosed design and proportioned to permit operation of the valve under full differential pressure rating of the valve with a maximum pull of 80 pounds on the handwheel or crank. Stop - limiting devices shall be provided in the actuators in the open and closed positions. Actuators shall be of the self - locking type to prevent the disc or plug from creeping. Design actuator components between the input and the stop- limiting devices to withstand without damage a pull of 200 pounds for handwheel or chainwheel actuators and an input torque of 300 foot - pounds for operating nuts when operating against the stops. 03720 - 042 -02 15110 -11 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES August 2013 4. The self - locking worm gear shall be a one -piece design of gear bronze material (ASTM B427; or ASTM B584, Alloy C86200) that is accurately machine cut. Actuators for eccentric and lubricated plug valves may use ductile -iron gears provided the gearing is totally enclosed with spring - loaded rubber lip seals on the shafts. The worm shall be hardened alloy steel (ASTM A322, Grade G41500 or G41400; or ASTM A148, Grade 105 -85) with thread ground and polished. Support worm -gear shafts at each end by ball or tapered roller bearings. The reduction gearing shall run in a proper lubricant. The handwheel diameter shall be no more than twice the radius of the gear sector in contact with the worm. Worm -gear actuators shall be Limitorque Model HBC, EIM Series W, or equal. G. For buried or submerged service, provide watertight shaft seals and watertight valve and actuator cover gaskets. Provide totally enclosed actuators designed for buried or submerged service. H. All buried valves shall have non - rising stems. All buried valves 3 feet below grade or deeper as measured at the valve centerline shall be furnished with an operator stem extension to extend the operating nut within 6 inches from the top of the valve box cover. 2.03 VALVE END CONNECTIONS A. Provide valve end connections conforming to connected piping and as shown in the Drawings. Generally, all buried valves shall be mechanical joint type end connectors. Exposed valves shall be screwed -end, socket -weld end, or flanged to conform to adjacent exposed connected piping system. B. Comply with the following standards: 1. Threaded: ANSI B1.20.1. 2. Flanged: ANSI B16.1 Class 125 unless other noted or AWWA C207. 3. Mechanical (gland) Type: AWWA C111. 4. Soldered: ANSI B16.18. C. Nuts, Bolts, and Washers: Wetted or internal to be bronze or stainless- steel. Exposed to be zinc or cadmium - plated. D. Epoxy Interior Coating: Provide epoxy coating for all interiors of ferrous valve body surfaces in accordance with AWWA C550. Coatings shall be NSF - approved for valves in all potable water piping services. Coatings shall not be required for stainless -steel valve interiors. 03720 - 042 -02 15110 -12 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES August 2013 • • • • 2.04 VALVE BOXES A. All buried valves 2 -inch size and larger shall be equipped with a standard cast - iron roadway valve box. Valve boxes shall be of the slip or sliding type with a round lid marked "Water" for potable water valves or "Sewer" for wastewater and a square lid marked "Reclaimed Water" for reclaimed water valves. The box shall be designed to prevent transfer of the surface loads directly to the valve or piping. Valve boxes must have a minimum adjustable range of 12 inches and a minimum inner diameter of 6 inches. All valve boxes and lids shall be produced from grey cast -iron conforming to the latest revision of specification for grey iron castings, ASTM designation A48, Class 20A -25A. All castings shall be true and free of holes and shall be cleaned according to good foundry practice, chipped and ground as needed to remove fins and rough places on castings. Valve boxes have to be rated to sustain FDOT H -20 loadings and have a minimum depth of 8 inches. The valve box lid shall fit flush in the top of the box without forcing and shall not rock, tip, or rattle. B. Provide debris cap as required in the Drawings. C. Coat buried cast -iron pieces as specified in Section 09900, System No. 21 or with fusion- bonded epoxy. D. Valve boxes shall be as manufactured by Tyler Pipe, Geneco, Star Pipe Products, or equal. 2.05 EXTENSION STEMS A. Where the depth of the valve is such that its centerline is more than 4 feet below grade, provide operating extension stems to bring the operating nut to a point 6 inches below the surface of the ground and/or box cover. Where the valve is submerged, provide operating extension stems to bring the operating nut to 6 inches above the water surface. Extension stems shall be Type 316 stainless - steel, solid core, and shall be complete with 2- inch - square operating nut. The connections of the extension stems to the operating nuts and to the valves shall withstand without damage a pull of 300 foot - pounds. 03720- 042 -02 15110 -13 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES August 2013 B. Extension stem diameters shall be as tabulated below: Valve Size (inches) Minimum Extension Stem Diameter (inches) 2 3h 3, 4 7/8 6 1 8 1 -1/8 10, 12 1 -1/4 14 1 -3/8 16, 18 1 -1 /2 20, 24, 30, 36 1 -3/4 42, 48, 54 2 C. Provide buried valves or valves located inside manholes or vaults with valve boxes cast in the manhole or vault roof with a valve position indicator designed to fit standard 5 -1/4 -inch valve boxes. The indicators shall show valve position and the direction and number of turns required to fully open (or close). All internal gearing shall be sealed. Ship each unit ready for field installation complete with valve box cast -iron adapter, capscrews, guide bushing, position indicator, flexible washer, centering plate, and 2 -inch AWWA nut. Valve box and indicator shall be provided by the valve manufacturer. Indicators shall be Westran Position Indicator, Pratt Diviner, or equal. 2.06 FLOOR STANDS A. When required by the installations, provide floor stands for the operation of valves. Floor stands shall be of the nonrising stem, indicating type, complete with steel extension stems, couplings, handwheels, stem guide brackets, and special yoke attachments as required by the valves and recommended and supplied by the stand manufacturer. Floor stands shall be cast -iron base type: Clow, Figure F -5515; Bingham and Taylor; Stockham; or equal. Handwheels shall turn counterclockwise to open the valves. B. Provide Type 316 stainless -steel anchor bolts. C. Provide Type 316 stainless -steel extension stems for valves in exposed service. Provide Type 316 stainless -steel stems for valves in submerged service. D. Provide adjustable stem guide brackets for extension stems. The bracket shall allow valve stems to be set over a range of 2 to 36 inches from walls. Provide bushings drilled to accept up to 2- inch - diameter stems. Base, arm, and clamp shall be Type 316 stainless - steel. Bushing shall be bronze (ASTM B584, Alloy C86400 or C83600). Bolts, nuts, screws, and washers (including wall anchor bolts) shall 03720 - 042 -02 15110 -14 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES August 2013 • • • • • • be Type 316 stainless- steel. Provide slots in the bracket to accept 3/4 -inch bolts for mounting the bracket to the wall. Products: Trumbull Industries, Inc., Adjustable Stem Guide or equal. 2.07 BOLTS, NUTS, AND GASKETS FOR FLANGED VALVES A. Bolts, nuts, and gaskets for flanged valves shall be as described in Section 15055. 2.08 PAINTING AND COATING A. Coat metal valves located aboveground or in vaults and structures the same as the adjacent piping. If the adjacent piping is not coated, coat valves as specified in Section 09900, System No. 7. Apply the specified prime and finish coat at the place of manufacture. The finish coat shall match the color of the adjacent piping. Coat handwheels the same as the valves. B. Coat buried metal valves at the place of manufacture as specified in Section 09900, System No. 21. C. Coat submerged metal valves, stem guides, extension stems, and bonnets at the place of manufacture as specified in Section 09900, System No. 7. D. Line the interior metal parts of metal valves 4 inches and larger, excluding seating areas and bronze and stainless -steel pieces, as specified in Section 09900, System No. 7. Apply lining at the place of manufacture. E. Coat floor stands as specified in Section 09900, System No. 21. F. Test the valve interior linings and exterior coatings at the factory with a low - voltage (22.5 to 80 volts, with approximately 80,000 -ohm resistance) holiday detector, using a sponge saturated with a 0.5% sodium chloride solution. The lining shall be holiday free. G. Measure the thickness of the valve interior linings as specified in Section 09900. Repair areas having insufficient film thickness as specified in Section 09900. 2.09 AIR VALVES (TYPE 100 SERIES) A. General Description 1. All valves shall meet or exceed all applicable provisions of the latest revision of AWWA C512, Standard for Air - Release, Air/Vacuum, and Combination Air Valves for Waterworks Service. All valves for drinking water services shall comply with ANSI/NSF Standard 61, Drinking Water 03720 - 042 -02 15110 -15 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES August 2013 Systems Components – Health Effects. Design pressure is 150 psig. Valves shall be operable for water temperatures of above freezing to 125 °F. 2. All valves shall consist of a float or a float assembly. Valves shall be identified properly in plates attached permanently on the valve body. The body and cover shall be cast -iron ASTM A126, Class B, or ASTM A48, Class 35. Valves 3 inches and smaller shall have threaded ends. Valves 4 inches and larger shall have flanged ends. Threaded ends shall comply with ANSI B1.20.1. Flanges shall comply with ANSI B16.1, Class 125. All flanges shall be flat faced. 3. The float shall be Type 304 or 316 Stainless - Steel. For valves with inlet sizes less than 4 inches, the float shall be able to withstand a collapse pressure of 1,000 psig. For inlet sizes 4 inches and larger, the float shall be capable of withstanding collapse pressures of 750 psig. Trim shall be Type 304 or 316 Stainless - Steel. The valve seat shall be of EPDM or other rubber materials applicable to wastewater and sludge. The valve seat shall be easily removed and replaced in the field. 4. Drain/test ports on all valves with inlet size 1 inch or larger shall have two 1/2-inch NPT minimum plugged ports, one near the bottom of the valve body and the other near the top of the valve. The plug shall be of bronze, ASTM B584, Alloy C83600. B. Type 125— Combination Air Valves for Water Services, Single Body: 1. Type 125 combination air valve for water service shall be 1 -inch through 4 -inch inlet size. It shall consist of an air and vacuum valve with an air - release valve in a single -body double- orifice arrangement. The valve body and cover shall be constructed of ASTM A126 Class B cast -iron. The body inlet shall be baffled with a Buna -N float cushion. The floats shall be 300 series stainless- steel. The seats shall be Buna -N and provide drop tight shut -off. Valves shall be APCO 140C Series, Val -Matic Model 201C – 204C, or equal. 2.10 BALL VALVES (TYPE 200 SERIES) A. Type 210— Double -Union PVC Ball Valves, 3 Inches and Smaller, for Water and Light Chemical Service: • • 1. Unless noted otherwise, ball valves installed in PVC piping systems 3 inches and smaller shall be constructed from polyvinyl chloride (PVC) • ASTM D1784, rated to 150 psi minimum from 30° to 120 °F, double -union 03720- 042 -02 15110 -16 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES August 2013 • design with two -way blocking capability, socket end connection except where threaded or flanged -end valves are specifically shown in the Drawings, double EPDM 0-ring seals and EPDM backing cushions, PTFE seals, ABS handle. Provide stem extensions when valves are installed in insulated piping. Stem extensions shall be of sufficient length to bring the bottom of the operating handle above the outside of the insulation. Valves shall be as manufactured by Asahi/America Inc., Quarter -Bloc Ball Valve Series, or approved equal. Note: Asahi Quarter -Bloc Ball Valves double 0-ring seals are made from EPDM. Quarter -Bloc Ball Valves are designed for water and light chemical applications only, sized from %z -inch to 2 inches. Please refer to Asahi's chemical resistance guide for more information. B. Type 212— Double -Union PVC Ball Valves, 3 Inches and Smaller, with Vented Ball for Chemical Service: 1. Vented PVC ball valves 3 inches and smaller for chemical service shall be rated at a pressure of 230 psi at a temperature of 70 °F and 150 psi at a temperature of 105 °F. Provide a machined vent hole, deburred, in the ball to allow gases to vent. Body, ball, and stem shall be PVC conforming to ASTM D1784, Cell Classification 12454 -A. Stems shall have double 0-rings and be of blowout -proof design. Seats shall be PTFE and shall have an elastomeric backing cushion of the same material as the valve seals. 0-ring seals shall be FKM. Valve ends shall be of the double -union design. Ends shall be socket - welded except where threaded or flanged -end valves are specifically shown in the Drawings. Valves shall have handles for manual operation. Valves shall be Asahi /America Type 21 or approved equal. C. Type 220 — Regular Port Threaded Stainless -Steel Ball Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller: 1. Stainless -steel ball valves 2 inches and smaller shall be rated at a minimum pressure of 1,500 psi WOG at a temperature of 100 °F. Valve body, ball, and stem shall be Type 316 stainless - steel, ASTM A276 or A351. Seat and seals shall be reinforced PTFE. Valves shall have plastic - coated lever actuators. Valves shall have screwed ends (ANSI B1.20.1) and nonblowout stems. Valves shall be Flowserve Marpac B780 Series, Apollo 76 -100 Series, or approved equal. 03720 - 042 -02 15110 -17 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES August 2013 D. Type 221 — Full -Port Threaded Stainless -Steel Ball Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller, for Water Service: 1. Stainless -steel ball valves 2 inches and smaller shall be rated at a minimum pressure of 1,000 psi WOG at a temperature of 100 °F. Provide full -port ball and body design. Valve body, ball, and stem shall be Type 316 stainless- steel, ASTM A276 or A351. Seat and seals shall be reinforced PTFE. Valves shall have lever actuators, plastic coated. Valves shall have screwed ends (ANSI B 1.20.1) and nonblowout stems. Valves shall be Worcester Series 59, Apollo 86A -100 Series, or approved equal. 2.11 BUTTERFLY VALVES (TYPE 300 SERIES) A. General Description 1. Butterfly valves shall meet or exceed the latest revision of AWWA C504, Standard for Rubber - Seated Butterfly Valves, Class 150B, unless otherwise specified in this Section. Each valve shall operate in fully opened and in intermediate positions as the valve opens and closes without noticeable flutter or vibration of the disk and shall be free of backlash and loose connections in the operating mechanism, linkage, and shaft connections. Valves shall be identified properly by size, type, serial number, and manufacturer in stainless -steel plates attached permanently on the valve body or bonnet. 2. The valve body shall be ductile -iron according to ASTM A536 Grade 65- 45 -12. The valve disc shall be ductile -iron in accordance with ASTM A536 (65- 45 -12). The disc seating edge shall be solid 316 stainless - steel. The disc shall be securely attached to the valve shaft using 304 stainless -steel taper pins. The valve disc shall be designed without using external reinforcing ribs. The valve disc shall provide an uninterrupted 360° seating edge. The valve seat shall be of EPDM or Viton materials. The valve seat shall be designed to provide a tight shutoff in both directions at the specified design differential pressure, with a pressure of 0 psig on the face of the disc opposite the pressurized side. The valve seat shall be molded in and bonded to the valve body for 3- to 24 -inch valves. For valves 30 inches and larger, the seat shall be field replaceable without disassembly of the disc and shaft and shall be retained within a dovetail groove in the valve body and locked in place by an epoxy compound edge. The valve shaft shall be of Type 304 stainless - steel. The valve shaft may be a one -piece unit extending completely through the disc or of the stub shaft type consisting of two separate shafts inserted into the valve disc hubs. Stub shafts shall extend into the disc hubs for a distance of at least 1.5 shaft diameters. The valve shaft shall 03720 - 042 -02 15110 -18 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES August 2013 • • have a diameter equal to or greater than that shown for Class 150B in Table 3 of AWWA C504. Connection between the shaft and disc shall be dowel or taper pins, which are mechanically secured. Alignment marks on the valve shaft and on the valve body shall be provided to indicate the fully closed and fully open positions. Valve shaft bearings shall be Teflon - lined with a non - metallic fiberglass composite backing and shall be permanently lubricated. The bearings shall be sleeve -type bearings contained in the hubs of the valve body. Design bearings in accordance with AWWA C504, Section 4.5.6. Thrust bearings shall be provided "as required" to hold the valve disc in the center of the valve seat. The valve shaft seal shall be self - compensating V -type packing with a minimum of four sealing rings. One -piece molded shaft seals and o -ring shaft seals are not acceptable. The shaft seal shall be of a design allowing replacement of seals without removing the valve shaft. Packing shall be made of resilient, nonmetallic material and shall not contain asbestos. Metallic components (e.g., dowels, pins, etc.) shall be 300 series stainless- steel, ductile -iron, or other materials approved by the Engineer. Brass, bronze, and copper alloy materials are not acceptable. Non - metallic components shall be EPDM, Viton, Teflon, or other materials approved by the Engineer. 3. Valves shall be as manufactured by DeZurik, Pratt, M &H, Val -Matic or an approved equal. B. Type 300 — Flanged, Rubber - Seated Butterfly Valves, 4 Inches through 72 Inches, for Exposed Service: 1. Type 300 valve bodies shall have flanged ends. Flanged -end valves shall be of the short-body design with 125 -1b flanged ends faced and drilled in accordance with ANSI B16.1 standard for cast -iron flanges. C. Type 302 — Mechanical- Jointed, Rubber - Seated Butterfly Valves, 4 Inches through 72 Inches, for Buried Service: 1. Type 302 valve bodies shall have mechanical jointed ends. The mechanical joint end valves shall meet the requirements of AWWA C111/ANSI A21.11 standard. 2.12 CHECK VALVES (TYPE 400 SERIES) (NOT USED) 2.13 DIAPHRAGM VALVES (TYPE 500 SERIES) (NOT USED) 03720 - 042 -02 15110 -19 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES August 2013 2.14 GA'Z'E VALVES (TYPE 600 SERIES) A. Type 630 — Cast -Iron Gate Valves, 4 Inches through 48 Inches: 1. Valves shall conform to AWWA C500 and the following. Valves shall be cast -iron or ductile -iron bodied, bolted bonnet, nonrising stem, solid bronze internal working parts, parallel faced, bottom wedging double - discs, and 0-ring seals. Discs for valves 12 inches and smaller shall be solid bronze; discs for valves larger than 12 inches shall either be solid bronze or shall be cast -iron or ductile -iron with bronze facings. Bronze for internal working parts, including stems, shall not contain more than 2% aluminum nor more than 7% zinc. Bronze shall conform to ASTM B62 (85- 5 -5 -5) or ASTM B584 (Alloy C83600), except that stem bronze shall have a minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi, a minimum yield strength of 30,000 psi, and a minimum of 10% elongation in 2 inches (ASTM B584, Alloy C87600). Body bolts shall be Type 316 stainless- steel, ASTM A276. End connections for exposed valves shall be flanged. End connections for buried valves shall be mechanical joint type to match the connecting pipe material. Valves shall be Clow AWWA gate valves, Mueller, or approved equal. 2.15 GLOBE AND ANGLE VALVES (TYPE 700 SERIES) (NOT USED) 2.16 PINCH (TYPE 800 SERIES) (NOT USED) 2.17 PLUG (TYPE 900 SERIES) (NOT USED) 2.18 SOLENOID VALVES (TYPE 1000 SERIES) (NOT USED) 2.19 OTHER SPECIAL TYPES OF VALVES (TYPE 1100) (NOT USED) 2.20 OTHER SPECIAL TYPES OF VALVES (TYPE 1200) A. Type 1200 —Flow Control Valves: 1. Flow control valves shall have all Type 316 stainless -steel wetted parts and Teflon o- rings. The minimum pressure rating shall be 150 psi. End connections shall be threaded. Valves shall have an accuracy of +/ -1.5% of the setpoint and a repeatability of 0.5% of the setpoint. Valves shall be W.A. Kates Company Model FB 11 TBE or approved equal. 03720 - 042 -02 15110 -20 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES August 2013 • • • • B. Type 1250 —PVC Injection Quill with Check Valve: 1. PVC injection quills with check valve shall be provided with male NPT threads both sides of quill body. Body and quill tube shall be PVC. Check valve shall be the spring loaded ball check type to prevent backflow. Ball shall be ceramic. Spring shall be Hastelloy C -276. PVC inject quill with check valve shall be rated for 150 psi. Body shall 0.5 -inch diameter. Injection quill length shall be 6 inches long. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 JOINTS A. Bolt holes of flanged valves shall straddle the horizontal and vertical centerlines of the pipe run to which the valves are attached. Clean flanges by wire brushing before installing flanged valves. Clean flange bolts and nuts by wire brushing, lubricate threads with oil and graphite, and tighten nuts uniformly and progressively. If flanges leak under pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, reseat or replace the gasket, reinstall or retighten the bolts and nuts, and retest the joints. Joints shall be watertight. B. Clean threaded joints by wire brushing or swabbing. Apply Teflon joint compound or Teflon tape to pipe threads before installing threaded valves. Joints shall be watertight. C. Install lug -type valves with separate hex head machine bolts at each bolt hole and each flange (two bolts per valve bolt hole). D. Install grooved -end couplings for valves in accordance with Section 15055. 3.02 INSTALLING EXPOSED VALVES A. Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings, install valves in horizontal runs of pipe having centerline elevations 4 feet 6 inches or less above the floor with their operating stems vertical. Install valves in horizontal runs of pipe having centerline elevations between 4 feet 6 inches and 6 feet 9 inches above the floor with their operating stems horizontal. B. Install valves on vertical runs of pipe that are next to walls with their stems horizontal, away from the wall. Valves on vertical runs of pipe that are not located next to walls shall be installed with their stems horizontal, oriented to facilitate valve operation. 03720- 042 -02 15110 -21 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES August 2013 3.03 INSTALLING BURIED VALVES A. Connect the valve, coat the flanges, apply tape wrapping or polyethylene encasement as required on the Drawings, and place and compact the backfill to the height of the valve stem. B. Place block pads under the extension pipe to maintain the valve box vertical during backfilling and repaving and to prevent the extension pipe from contacting the valve bonnet. C. Mount the upper slip pipe of the extension in midposition and secure with backfill around the extension pipe. Pour the concrete ring allowing a depression so the valve box cap will be flush with the pavement surface. D. In streets without concrete curbs and in open areas, install the valve box as for a paved area with concrete curb but include a marker post. Cut the marker post from 4- inch -by -4 -inch dense structural grade Douglas fir No. 2 or Southern Pine No. 2 surfaced on four sides to a length of 5 feet. Chamfer the top. Set the post in concrete, 2 feet into the ground, away from traffic, and to the side of the pipeline. Coat with a seal and finish coat of white alkyd exterior paint. On the side facing the valve, letter in black the word "VALVE" and the distance in feet from the marker post to the valve box cap. E. Install debris cap as close as possible under the cast -iron cover without interfering with the cover operation. Trim flexible skirt to provide a smooth contact with the interior or the extension pipe. 3.04 INSTALLING EXTENSION STEM GUIDE BRACKETS A. Install extension stem guide brackets at 6- to 8 -foot centers. Provide at least two support brackets for stems longer than 10 feet, with one support near the bottom of the stem and one near the top. 3.05 FIELD COATING BURIED VALVES A. Coat flanges of buried valves and the flanges of the adjacent piping and the bolts and nuts of flanges and mechanical joints, as specified in Section 09900, System No. 24. B. Wrap buried metal valves 6 inches and larger with polyethylene sheet as specified in Section 15155, Ductile -Iron Pipe and Fittings. 03720 - 042 -02 15110 -22 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES August 2013 • • • • • • 3.06 VALVE LEAKAGE AND FIELD TESTING A. Test valves for leakage at the same time that the connecting pipelines are tested. See Section 15144 for pressure testing requirements. Protect or isolate any parts of valves, actuators, or control and instrumentation systems whose pressure rating is less than the pressure test. Valves shall show zero leakage. Repair or replace any leaking valves and retest. B. Operate manual valves through three full cycles of opening and closing. Valves shall operate from full open to full close without sticking or binding. Do not backfill buried valves until after verifying that valves operate from full open to full closed. If valves stick or bind or do not operate from full open to full closed, repair or replace the valve and repeat the tests. C. Test gear actuators through three full cycles from full -open to full -close without binding or sticking. The pull required to operate handwheel- or chainwheel- operated valves shall not exceed 80 pounds. The torque required to operate valves having 2 -inch AWWA nuts shall not exceed 150 foot - pounds. If actuators stick or bind or if pulling forces and torques exceed the values stated previously, repair or replace the actuators and repeat the tests. Operators shall be lubricated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations before operating. END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 15110 -23 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES August 2013 • • • SECTION 15121 MISCELLANEOUS PIPE FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section describes requirements for materials and installation of miscellaneous piping specialties, such as quick- connect couplings and pre - filters for the sodium hypochlorite system. 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. Submit manufacturer's catalog data and descriptive literature showing dimensions and materials of construction by ASTM reference and grade. Show coatings. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI B 16.1 —Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A36— Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel 2. ASTM A240— Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium - Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. 3. ASTM A513— Standard Specification for Electric- Resistance - Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing. 4. ASTM A536— Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 03720- 042 -02 15121 -1 MISCELLANEOUS PIPE FITTINGS August 2013 AND ACCESSORIES 5. ASTM A635— Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy - Thickness Coils, Hot - Rolled, Alloy, Carbon, Structural, High - Strength Low - Alloy, and High - Strength Low -Alloy with Improved Formability, General Requirements for. 6. ASTM C219— Standard Terminology Relating to Hydraulic Cement. 7. ASTM D2000— Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. C. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1. AWWA C111 /ANSI A21.22— Standard for Rubber - Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 2. AWWA C213— Fusion - Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines. 3. AWWA C219— Standard for Bolted, Sleeve -Type Couplings for Plain - End Pipe. D. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 1. AISI C1012— Specification for Hard -Drawn Low - Carbon Steel. E. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 1. ASME SA36— Carbon Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars of Structural Quality for Use in Riveted, Bolted, or Welded Construction. 2. ASME SA675— Carbon Steel Middle Ring or Sleeve. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 03720 - 042 -02 15121 -2 MISCELLANEOUS PIPE FITTINGS August 2013 AND ACCESSORIES • • • • • • 1.11 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) 1.12 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O &M) MANUALS A. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manuals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METALLIC QUICK - CONNECT COUPLINGS (NOT USED) 2.02 NON METALLIC QUICK - CONNECT COUPLINGS (NOT USED) 2.03 COUPLINGS FOR METALLIC PIPING A. General 1. Thrust Ties: The Contractor shall provide thrust ties where shown and where required to restrain the force developed by 12 times the maximum operating pressure specified. a. Steel Pipe: Attach with fabricated lugs. b. Ductile Iron Pipe: Attach with bell hanger and wedge restraint glands for buried mechanical joint and push -on joint piping; and thrust retention plates and tie -rods, nuts, washers, and bolts for exposed, flanged piping. 2. Exposed Installations: Zinc - plated nuts and bolts. High- strength, low -alloy steel, in accordance with AWWA C111, may be substituted for use on cast -iron and ductile -iron couplings. 3. Buried and Submerged Installations: Provide Type 304 stainless steel tie rods, bolts, and nuts and assemble with an anti - galling compound. 4. Steel Middle Rings and Followers: Fusion- bonded epoxy -lined and coated in accordance with AWWA C213. 5. Restrained couplings or other fittings that use set screws, pointed -end screws to penetrate the outside surface of the pipe for restraint are not acceptable. 03720 - 042 -02 15121 -3 MISCELLANEOUS PIPE FITTINGS August 2013 AND ACCESSORIES B. Flexible Couplings: Coupling shall consist of a steel middle ring or sleeve, two steel or malleable iron flange or follower rings, two wedge- shaped resilient gaskets, and a sufficient number of track -head bolts and nuts. 1. Middle Ring or Sleeve: Steel construction, ASTM A513, ASTM A635, or ASME SA675 GR60, fabricated in a true circular section and free of surface defect. 2. Follower Rings or Flanges: Steel construction, AISI C1012 or ASME SA36, fabricated in a true circular section and free of surface defect. 3. Bolts and Nuts: Steel bolt, AWWA C111 /ANSI A21.22. 4. Gaskets: Grade 27 BUNA -S. 5. Shop Paint: Fusion - bonded epoxy coating. 6. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Dresser Manufacturing Division of Dresser Industries, Inc.; Dresser Styles 38 and 138. b. Or approved equal. C. Transition Couplings: Transition Coupling shall consist of a high - strength steel body, two steel or malleable iron flange or follower rings, a wedge shaped resilient gasket, and a sufficient number of follower bolts. 1. Adapter: Steel construction, ASTM A513, ASTM A635 or ASME SA675 GR60, free of surface defect. 2. Followers: AISI C1012 or ASME SA36. 3. Bolts: AWWA C 111 /ANSI A21.11. 4. Gasket: Grade 27 BUNA -S. 5. Shop Paint: Fusion - bonded epoxy coating. 6. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Dresser Manufacturing Division of Dresser Industries, Inc.; Dresser Styles 62 and 162. b. Or approved equal. 03720 - 042 -02 15121 -4 MISCELLANEOUS PIPE FITTINGS August 2013 AND ACCESSORIES • • • • • D. Flanged Coupling Adapters: Adapters shall consist of a cast -iron or high - strength steel body, two steel or ductile -iron follower rings, a wedge shaped resilient gasket, and a sufficient number of follower bolts. 1. 3- through 12 -inch DIP Flange Adapters a. Adapter: Ductile iron construction, ASTM A536, Grade 65- 45 -12, free of surface defect. Adapter shall be rated to 200 psi working pressure in accordance with AWWA C219, and -20 °F to 212 °F. b. Flanges: Ductile iron construction, ASTM A536, Grade 65- 45 -12, free of surface defect. Bolt circles and bolt holes shall match those of ANSI B16.1 Class 125 flanges. c. Bolts and nuts: Corrosion- resistant alloy bolts and nuts. d. Gasket: Grade 27 BUNA -S. e. Shop paint: fusion- bonded powder epoxy coating. f. Acceptable Manufacturers: i. Dresser Manufacturing Division of Dresser Industries, Inc.; Dresser Style 127. ii. Or Equal. 2. 14- through 36 -inch DIP Flange Adapters a. Adapter: Steel construction, ASTM A513, ASTM A635 or ASME SA675 GR60, free of surface defect. b. Flanges: Steel construction, ASTM A513, ASTM A635 or ASME SA675 GR60, free of surface defect. Bolt circles and bolt holes shall match those of ANSI B16.1 Class 125 flanges. c. Bolts and nuts: Alloy to AWWA C 111 /ANSI A21.11. d. Gasket: Grade 27 BUNA -S. e. Acceptable Manufacturers: i. Dresser Manufacturing Division of Dresser Industries, Inc.; Dresser Style 128. ii. Or approved equal. 03720 - 042 -02 15121 -5 MISCELLANEOUS PIPE FITTINGS August 2013 AND ACCESSORIES 2.04 BOLTED SPLIT - SLEEVE AND SINGLE- POINT CLOSURE COUPLINGS (NOT USED) 2.05 PRE- FILTERS FOR SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE FILL STATION (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLING QUICK - CONNECT COUPLINGS (NOT USED) 3.02 INSTALLING COUPLINGS A. Pipe for use with flexible couplings shall have plain ends as specified in the respective pipe sections in Division 15. B. Alloy steel bolts and nut for flanged joints shall be made with high - strength, low - alloy Cor -Ten bolts, nuts, and washers. Cor -Ten for mechanical joints shall be made with mild corrosion resistant alloy steel bolts and nuts. All exposed bolts shall be painted the same color as the pipe. All joints to be wrapped with 8 -mil color -coded poly wrap. C. Before sleeve -type couplings are installed, the pipe ends shall be cleaned thoroughly for a distance of 8 inches. Soapy water may be used as a gasket lubricant. A follower and gasket, in that order, shall be slipped over each pipe to a distance of about 6 inches from the end, and the middle ring shall be placed on the substantial completion date unless otherwise requested by the Owner. D. Mechanical joints shall be made in the standard manner. Valve stems shall be vertical in all cases. Set cast -iron box as shown on the Drawings. Boxes shall have sufficient bracing to maintain alignment during backfilling. Knobs on cover shall be parallel to pipe. Remove any sand or undesirable fill from valve box after installation. Extend tracing wire outside of valve box extension pipe and enter at valve box. E. Thoroughly clean oil, scale, rust, and dirt from the pipe to provide a clean seat for the gasket. F. Wipe gaskets clean before installations. G. Lubricate flexible couplings and flanged coupling adapter gaskets with soapy water or manufacturer's standard lubricant before installing on the pipe ends. H. Install couplings, service saddles, and anchor studs in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction. 03720 - 042 -02 15121 -6 MISCELLANEOUS PIPE FITTINGS August 2013 AND ACCESSORIES • • • • • I. Tighten bolts progressively, drawing up bolts on opposite sides a little at a time until all bolts have a uniform tightness. J. Use torque - limiting wrenches to tighten bolts to the manufacturer's specified torque values. 3.03 INSTALLING PRE - FILTERS (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720- 042 -02 15121 -7 MISCELLANEOUS PIPE FITTINGS August 2013 AND ACCESSORIES • SECTION 15124 CHEMICAL INJECTION ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section includes requirements for materials and installation of sodium hypochlorite injectors. The injector shall provide a single feed point into the reclaimed water main, as shown in the Drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit the following: A. Shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance, and the following. B. The manufacturer's catalog data and descriptive literature showing dimensions and materials of construction by ASTM reference and grade. • C. Documentation demonstrating that the solution diffusers are NSF 61 listed or • otherwise comply with FAC 62- 555.320, (3)(b). 1.03 SCOPE OF WORK (NOT USED) 1.04 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.05 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.06 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.07 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. The Public Health and Safety Company (NSF) 1. NSF 61— Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. 03720 - 042 -02 15124 -1 CHEMICAL August 2013 INJECTION ASSEMBLIES 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.09 WARRANTIES (NOT USED) 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED) 1.11 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.12 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.13 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) 1.14 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O &M) MANUALS (NOT USED) PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 CHEMICAL INJECTORS A. Chemical solution injectors shall be removable Hastelloy (Alloy C -276) chemical injection assemblies. The injection quills shall be rate at 150 psi. B. Solution tube tip shall enter into the main pipe to a minimum of 1/3 and a maximum of 1/2 the pipe diameter, and have a 45- degree angle cut facing downstream inside the pipe main. Diffusers shall be removable /insertion type that can be removed without shutting down the main process piping. A locking device shall be included to prevent accidental release of the solution tube from the pressurized main. A stainless steel safety chain shall be included to prevent withdrawal of the solution tube past the corporation stop. A ball check valve shall be included to prevent backpressure from the main from entering the chemical feed system. A flexible hose assembly shall be provided to connect from the containment piping to the injector. C. The manufacturer shall furnish and install one complete chemical injection assembly (injector, flexible hose, and isolation valve) at the each chemical application location indicated in the Contract Drawings. D. The manufacturer shall furnish and install one corp stop valve with plug at each unused tap at each chemical application location indicated in the Contract Drawings. E. Table 1 summarizes the injection tube size. The manufacturer shall furnish one complete spare of injection assembly. 03720- 042 -02 15124 -2 CHEMICAL August 2013 INJECTION ASSEMBLIES • • • • Table 1 Chemical Injection Tube Sizes Chemical Injection Point Injection Chemical Solution Injection Tube Size Reclaimed Water Main Sodium Hypochlorite 1/2 inch F. Injectors with flexible hosing shall be Saf -T -FLO by Saf -T -Flo Industries Corporation, Anaheim, CA, or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 15124 -3 CHEMICAL August 2013 INJECTION ASSEMBLIES • • SECTION 15144 PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section specifies the hydrostatic, pneumatic, and leakage testing of pressure piping for pumping stations, wastewater treatment plants, water treatment plants, and other facilities. 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. Test bulkhead locations and design calculations, pipe attachment details, and methods to prevent excessive pipe wall stresses. B. Six copies of the test records to the Engineer upon completion of the testing. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standards: 1. AWWA C600— Standard for Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains. 2. AWWA C605— Standard for Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 03720- 042 -02 August 2013 15144 -1 PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TEST PRESSURES A. Test pressures for the various services and types of piping are shown in the Piping Schedule in the Drawings. 1.11 TESTING RECORDS A. The Contractor shall provide records of each piping installation during the testing. These records shall include the following information: 1. Date and times of test. 2. Identification of process, pipeline, or pipeline section tested or retested. 3. Identification of pipeline material. 4. Identification of pipe specification. 5. Test fluid. 6. Test duration. B. Test pressure at low point in process, pipeline, or pipeline section. C. Remarks: Leaks identified (type and location), types of repairs, or corrections made. D. Certification by Contractor that the leakage rate measured conformed to the Specifications. 1.12 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) 03720- 042 -02 August2013 15144 -2 PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING • • • • • • 1.13 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O &M) MANUALS A. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manuals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 VENTS AND DRAINS FOR ABOVEGROUND PIPING A. The Contractor shall install vents on the high points of aboveground piping, whether shown in the Drawings or not. Install drains on low points of aboveground piping, whether shown in the Drawings or not. Provide a valve at each vent or drain point. Valves shall be 3/4 inch for piping 3 inches and larger and 1/2 inch for piping smaller than 3 inches. Valves shall be ball or gate valves unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Valves shall be rated for the pressure of the adjacent piping and shall be suitable for use with the adjacent pipe material. 2.02 MANUAL AIR- RELEASE VALVES FOR BURIED PIPING A. The Contractor shall provide temporary manual air - release valves at test bulkheads, pipe ends, and piping high points for pipeline test. Construct the pipe outlet in the same manner as for a permanent air valve and, after use, seal with a blind flange, pipe cap, or plug and coat the same as the adjacent pipe. 2.03 TEST BULKHEADS A. The Contractor shall design and fabricate test bulkheads in accordance with Section VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Materials shall comply with Part UCS of the code. Design pressure shall be at least 2.0 times the specified test pressure for the section of pipe containing the bulkhead. Limit stresses to 70% of yield strength of the bulkhead material at the bulkhead design pressure. Include air - release and water drainage connections. 2.04 TESTING FLUID A. The Owner will provide reclaimed water for the Contractor's use in filling the lines. The Contractor shall provide any requirement temporary pumps, piping, etc. to convey the reclaimed water to the point of use. The line shall be slowly filled with water. and the specified test pressure shall be maintained in the pipe for the entire test period by means of a pump furnished by the Contractor. Provide accurate means for measuring the quantity of water required to maintain this pressure. The amount of water required is a measure of the leakage. 03720 - 042 -02 August 2013 15144 -3 PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING B. Testing fluid shall be reclaimed water unless a pneumatic test is indicated on the Piping Schedule. C. Submit request for use of water from Owner 48 hours in advance. 2.05 TESTING EQUIPMENT A. The Contractor shall provide calibrated pressure gauges, pipes, bulkheads, pumps, compressors, chart recorder, and meters to perform the hydrostatic testing. The Contractor shall provide any necessary assistance required for testing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TESTING PREPARATION A. Pipes shall be in place, backfilled, and anchored before beginning pressure testing. B. The Contractor shall conduct pressure tests on exposed and aboveground piping after the piping has been installed and attached to the pipe supports, hangers, anchors, expansion joints, valves, and meters. C. For buried piping, the pipe may be partially backfilled and the joints left exposed for inspection during an initial leakage test. However, perform the final pressure test after completely backfilling and compacting the trench. D. Provide any temporary piping needed to carry the test fluid to the piping that is to be tested. After the test has been completed and demonstrated to comply with the Specifications, disconnect and remove temporary piping. Do not remove exposed vent and drain valves at the high and low points in the tested piping; remove any temporary buried valves and cap the associated outlets. Plug taps or connections to the existing piping from which the test fluid was obtained. E. Provide temporary drain lines needed to carry testing fluid away from the pipe being tested. Remove such temporary drain lines after completing the pressure testing. F. Before starting the test, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer and the Owner's Representative. 3.02 CLEANING A. Before conducting hydrostatic tests, the Contractor shall flush pipes with water to remove dirt and debris. For pneumatic tests, blow air through the pipes. Maintain 03720 - 042 -02 August 2013 15144 -4 PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING • • • a flushing velocity of at least 3 fps for water testing and at least 2,000 fpm for pneumatic testing. Flush pipes for the period given by the formula • T = 2L 3 in which: T = flushing time (seconds) L = pipe length (feet). B. For pipelines 24 inches or larger in diameter, acceptable alternatives to flushing are use of high - pressure water jet, sweeping, or scrubbing. Water, sediment, dirt, and foreign material accumulated during this cleaning operation shall be discharged, vacuumed, or otherwise removed from the pipe. 3.03 TESTING AND DISINFECTION SEQUENCE FOR POTABLE WATER PIPING (NOT USED) 3.04 LENGTH OF TEST SECTION FOR BURIED PIPING A. The maximum length of test section for buried pipe of 12 inches or smaller in diameter is 3,500 feet; for buried pipe larger than 12 inches, 1 mile. Provide intermediate test bulkheads where the pipeline length exceeds these limits. 3.05 INITIAL PIPELINE FILLING FOR HYDROSTATIC TESTING A. The maximum rate of filling shall not cause the water velocity in the pipeline to exceed 1 fps. Filling may be facilitated by removing automatic air valves and releasing air manually. 3.06 TESTING NEW PIPE WHICH CONNECTS TO EXISTING PIPE A. Before testing new pipelines that are to be connected to existing pipelines, the Contractor shall isolate the new line from the existing line by test bulkheads, spectacle flanges, or blind flanges. After the new line has been successfully tested, remove test bulkheads or flanges and connect to the existing piping. 3.07 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF ABOVEGROUND OR EXPOSED PIPING A. Open vents at high points of the piping system to purge air while the pipe is being filled with water. Venting during system filling may also be provided by temporarily loosening flanges. B. Subject the piping system to the test pressure indicated on the Piping Schedule in the Drawings. Maintain the test pressure for a minimum of 2 hours. Examine 03720 - 042 -02 August 2013 15144 -5 PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING joints, fittings, valves, and connections for leaks. The piping system shall show zero leakage or weeping. Correct leaks and retest until zero leakage is obtained. 3.08 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF BURIED PIPING A. Where any section of the piping contains concrete thrust blocks or encasement, the Contractor shall not make the pressure test until at least 10 days after the concrete has been placed. When testing mortar -lined or PVC piping, fill the pipe to be tested with water and allow it to soak for at least 24 hours to absorb water before conducting the pressure test. B. Apply and maintain the test pressure by a positive displacement hydraulic force pump. C. Maintain the test pressure for the 2 hours by restoring the pressure whenever it falls 5 psi. D. After the test pressure is reached, use a meter to measure the additional water added to maintain the pressure. This amount of water is the loss due to leakage in the piping system. The allowable leakage volume is defined by the formulas: PVC Pipe: in which: L ND(P) v2 C L = allowable leakage (gallons). N = number of rubber - gasketed joints in the pipe tested. D = diameter of the pipe (inches). P = specified test pressure (psig). C = 7,400. Ductile Iron Pipe: in which: 03720 - 042 -02 August 2013 L= SD(P) v2 C L = allowable leakage (gallons). S = length of pipe tested (feet). D = diameter of the pipe (inches). P = specified test pressure (psig). C = 133,200. 15144 -6 PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING • • • • • • E. The leakage test shall be a separate test following the pressure test and shall not be less than 2 hours long. All leaks evident at the surface shall be repaired and leakage eliminated regardless of the total leakage as shown by test. Lines that fail to meet tests shall be repaired and retested as necessary until test requirements are complied with. Defective materials, pipes, valves, and accessories shall be removed and replaced. F. The allowable leakage for buried piping having threaded, brazed, or welded (including solvent welded) joints shall be zero. G. Submit plan for testing to the Engineer for review at least 10 days before starting the test. H. Peening shall not be used to repair pinhole leaks in welded pipes. Any leakage in welded pipes shall be repaired by appropriate welding techniques. I. Repair and retest any pipes showing leakage rates greater than that allowed in the criteria above. 3.09 HYDROSTATIC FLUSHING AND TESTING OF FUEL OIL PIPING (NOT USED) 3.10 PRESSURE TESTING OF DOUBLE - WALLED CONTAINMENT PIPING (NOT USED) 3.11 REPETITION OF TEST A. If the actual leakage exceeds the allowable leakage, locate and correct the faulty work and repeat the test. Restore the work and all damage resulting from the leak and its repair. Eliminate visible leakage. 3.12 BULKHEAD AND TEST FACILITY REMOVAL A. After a satisfactory test, the Contractor shall remove the testing fluid, remove test bulkheads and other test facilities, and restore the pipe coatings /linings. 03720 - 042 -02 August 2013 END OF SECTION 15144 -7 PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING • SECTION 15155 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall provide all materials and incidentals, including piping, fittings, flanged joints, mechanical joints, retainer glands, polyethylene bagging for buried ductile iron piping, fittings, valves, and appurtenances for the ductile iron piping systems required for the work shown on the Drawings, in the Drawing— Piping Schedule, and described in Section 15060, Pipe Hangers and Supports. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. B. Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling. C. Section 02240, Dewatering. D. Section 02305, Earthwork for Utilities. E. Section 09900, Painting and Coating. F. Section 15055, Piping Systems— General. G. Section 15060, Pipe Hangers and Supports. H. Section 15144, Pressure Testing of Piping. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. All ductile iron pipe and fittings to be installed under this Contract shall be inspected and tested at the foundry where the material for this project is manufactured. The Contractor shall submit sworn certificates of such tests and their results. B. Shop Drawings, including layout drawings, shall be submitted as specified in Section 15055, Piping Systems— General. C. The Contractor shall submit the pipe manufacturer's certification of compliance with the applicable Sections of the Specifications. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 03720- 042 -02 15155 -1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS August 2013 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI A21.11— Rubber Gasket Joints Cast & Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe. 2. ANSI A21.53— Ductile -Iron Compact Fittings, 3 -Inch through 24 -Inch (76mm through 610mm) and 54 -Inch through 64 -Inch (1,400mm through 1,600mm), for Water Service. 3. ANSI B1.1—Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN & UNR Thread Form). 4. ANSI B16.1 —Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Pipe Fittings. 5. ANSI B16.21 Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A193— Standard Specification for Alloy -Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High - Temperature Service. 2. ASTM A194— Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High- Pressure and High- Temperature Service, or Both. 3. ASTM A307— Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. 4. ASTM A536— Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 5. ASTM A563— Standard Specification for Carbons and Alloy Steel Nuts. 6. ASTM B 117— Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. 7. ASTM C150— Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 8. ASTM C283— Standard Test Methods for Resistance of Porcelain Enameled Utensils to Boiling Acid. 9. ASTM D714— Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Blistering of Paints. 10. ASTM D792— Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement. 11. ASTM D1238— Standard Test Method for Melt Flow Rates of Thermoplastics by Extrusion Plastometer. 12. ASTM E96— Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 13. ASTM G95— Standard Test Method for Cathodic Disbondment Test of Pipeline Coatings (Attached Cell Method). 03720 - 042 -02 15155 -2 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS August 2013 • C. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1. AWWA C104— Cement - Mortar Lining for Ductile -Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. 2. AWWA C110—Ductile-Iron and Gray -Iron Fittings, 3 -Inch through 48 -Inch (75mm through 1,200mm) for Water and Other Liquids. 3. AWWA C111— Rubber - Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 4. AWWA C115— Flanged Ductile -Iron Pipe with Ductile -Iron or Gray -Iron Threaded Flanges. 5. AWWA C150— Thickness Design of Ductile -Iron Pipe. 6. AWWA C151— Ductile -Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water or Other Liquids. 7. AWWA C153— Ductile -Iron Compact Fittings, 3 -Inch through 16 -Inch (76mm through 610mm), for Water and Other Liquids. 8. AWWA C207 —Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service Sizes 4 -Inch through 144 -Inch (100mm through 3,600mm). 9. AWWA C600— Installation of Ductile -Iron Water Mains and their Appurtenances. 10. AWWA C651— Disinfecting Water Mains. D. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 1. ISO - 9001 — Quality Systems – Model for Quality Assurance in Production, Installation, and Servicing. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Quality Control: 1. The ductile iron pipe manufacturer shall submit certification that the pipe and fitting products meet all tests required by AWWA C151. 2. All materials shall be new and have a manufacturer's certificate verifying compliance to all tests and inspections as required in this Section. The weight, class, and casting period shall be shown on each piece of pipe. The manufacturer's "mark," the year produced, and the word "Ductile" or the letters "DI" shall be cast or stamped on all pipe. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 03720 - 042 -02 15155 -3 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS August 2013 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. See Section 15144, Pressure Testing of Piping for testing requirements. 1.11 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) 1.12 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O &M) MANUALS A. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manuals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All ductile iron piping shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with AWWA C150 and AWWA C151 for the following minimum operating conditions: 1. The minimum internal design pressure shall be 150 psi with a 100 -psi surge allowance, with a safety factor of 2, for a total internal design pressure of 500 psi. 2. The external loads design criteria shall be for the minimum cover indicated on the Drawings at 120 lb per cubic feet soil weight and live load based on one AASHTO H -20 truck load. The thickness design of ductile iron pipe shall be in accordance with AWWA C150. 3. The horizontal deflection of cement- mortar -lined ductile iron pipe resulting from external load conditions shall not exceed 3% of the pipe diameter based on the trench design shown on the Drawings. 03720- 042 -02 15155 -4 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS August 2013 • • 4. Pressure Class: All ductile iron piping shall meet the following minimum working pressure classes: • • (a) 4 inch through 12 inch: 350 psi (b) pipe greater than 12 inch: 250 psi 2.02 JOINTS A. Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be furnished with push -on joint, mechanical joints or flanged joint ends as shown on the Drawings and specified in this Section: 1. Push -On Joints: Push -on joints shall conform to ANSI A21.11 /AWWA C111. 2. Mechanical Joints: All buried ductile iron fittings shall be furnished with mechanical joint ends unless noted otherwise. Mechanical joints shall conform to ANSI A21.11 /AWWA C111. Glands shall be constructed of ductile iron. 3. Flanged Joints: Pipe for threaded flange fabrication shall be Special Thickness Class 53 in accordance with AWWA C110, AWWA C111, and AWWA C115. Bolt circle and bolt holes shall match those of ANSI B16.1 Class 125 flanges. Threaded flanges shall be individually fitted and machine tightened on the pipe ends. Flange facing shall be smooth or with shallow serrations in accordance with AWWA C115. 2.03 FITTINGS A. General: Ductile iron pipe fittings shall meet the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C110 or C153 where applicable. Where taps are shown on fittings, tapping bosses shall be provided. At a minimum, fittings shall have the same pressure rating as the connecting pipe. 1. Flanged Joint: ANSI /AWWA C110 /21.10 and ANSI B16.1, faced and drilled 125 -pound ANSI standard. 2. Mechanical Joint: ANSI /AWWA C110 /A21.10 or C153/A21.53 a. Provide mechanical joint fittings for all buried fittings as shown in the Drawings, unless noted otherwise. b. Provide specified gaskets. 03720 - 042 -02 15155 -5 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS August 2013 2.04 LINING AND COATING A. The Contractor shall provide lined ductile iron piping and fittings in accordance with the Drawing —Flow Stream Identification. The Contractor shall perform all field measurements confirming the accuracy of the piping sizes and lengths shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately before deviating from or altering the lining of ductile iron piping shown on the approved layout schedule. B. Cement -Lined Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings: Interior surfaces of all cement -lined ductile iron pipe, fittings, and specials shall be cleaned and lined in the shop with a standard thickness cement - mortar lining applied in conformity with AWWA C104, Portland cement mortar. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent damage to the lining. If lining is damaged or found faulty at delivery site, the Contractor shall repair or replace damaged or unsatisfactory portions with lining conforming to these Specifications at no additional cost to the Owner. All ductile iron pipe and fittings cement -mortar linings shall be surface sealed with an asphaltic seal coating, 1 mil, in accordance with AWWA C104. 2.05 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable ductile iron pipe manufacturers include US Pipe, American Ductile Pipe, Griffin Pipe, or approved equal. 2.06 BOLTS A. General: The Contractor shall provide carbon steel, ASTM A307, Grade A hex - head bolts and ASTM A563, Grade A hex head nuts. Threads shall be as specified in ANSI B1.1 coarse thread series, Class 2A external and Class 2B internal. Nuts, bolts, and gaskets for flanged fittings and blind flanges shall be designed to withstand the design and test pressure ratings for the pipe. 2.07 GASKETS A. Gaskets for mechanical joints shall be compatible with reclaimed water pipe service. See Section 15055, Piping System — General for gasket requirements. B. Gaskets for flanged joints shall be 1/8- inch - thick, cloth - inserted rubber conforming to applicable parts of ANSI B16.21 and AWWA C207. Gasket material shall be free from corrosive alkali or acid ingredients and suitable for use in reclaimed water lines. Gaskets shall be full -face type for 125 -pound flanges. See Section 15055, Piping System— General, for gasket requirements. 03720 - 042 -02 15155 -6 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS August 2013 • • • • • • 2.08 RETAINER GLANDS A. Retainer glands shall be provided for all buried ductile -iron mechanical joints, fitting, and ductile -iron pipe connections to buried valves. Retainer glands shall be designed for joint retaining through the use of a follower gland and set screw - anchoring devices that impart multiple wedging action against the pipe. The mechanical joint- restraint device shall be UL listed and shall have a working pressure of at least 250 psi with a minimum safety factor of 2. 1. Gland: Manufactured of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536. Gland dimensions shall match ANSI A21.11 and A21.53. 2. Restraining Devices: Manufactured of ductile iron heat treated to a minimum hardness of 370 BHN. Restraining devices shall incorporate a set screw /twist -off nut bolt to ensure the proper actuating of the restraining device. The twist -off nut shall be designed to come off at the torque limit desired to anchor the restraining device in place on the pipe. 3. Joint Deflection: Retainer gland joint deflection shall be limited to manufacturer's recommended maximum deflection angle. Joint deflection shall be applied before the set screws are torqued. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. EBAA Iron, Inc. — Megalug 1100 Series. b. Or approved equal. 2.09 EXTERNAL PIPE RESTRAINTS A. Ductile iron pipe push -on (bell and spigot) joint restraint shall be provided by a restraining harness consisting of a restraint ring, connecting tie -rods, and split - ring assembly installed at all push -on joints. The restraint ring shall consist of wedging components made from 60 -42 -12 ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536 and wedges heat treated to minimum 370 BHN. Torque limiting twist -off nuts shall be provided on each wedge to ensure proper applied installation torque. The split ring shall be made from 60 -42 -12 ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536. The connecting rods shall be made of steel conforming to ANSI /AWWA C111 /Al2.11. Sizes 4- to 16- inch - diameter restraining harnesses shall have 350 -psi maximum working pressure rating and 18- to 36- inch - diameter restraining harnesses shall have 250 -psi maximum working pressure rating. All harnesses shall be designed with a 2 -to -1 safety factor applied to the maximum working pressure rating. 03720 - 042 -02 15155 -7 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS August 2013 B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. EBAA Iron, Inc. — Series 1700. 2. Or approved equal. 2.10 INTERNAL PIPE RESTRAINT A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. American Ductile Iron Pipe: a. Fast Grip ® Gasket. b. Flex Ring ® Joint. 2. US Pipe: a. b. Field Lok oil Gasket. TR Flex Restrained Joint Pipe and Fittings. 3. Or Engineer- approved equal. 2.11 POLYETHYLENE BAGGING A. Polyethylene bagging for buried ductile iron pipe, fittings, and valves shall be 8 -mil thickness minimum polyethylene, manufactured in accordance with ASTM D1238, Type I, Class C, Grade El. 2.12 COLOR CODING OR MARKING A. All reclaimed water valves and outlets shall be appropriately tagged or labeled bearing the words in English and Spanish. All piping, pipelines, valves, and outlets shall be color coded or otherwise marked to differentiate reclaimed water from domestic or other water. Underground ductile iron pipe shall be color coded or marked using purple as a predominant color. If tape is used to mark the pipe, the tape shall be permanently affixed to the top and each side of the pipe (three locations parallel to the axis of the pipe). For pipes less than 24 inches in diameter, a single tape may be used along the top of the pipe. Visible, aboveground portions of the reclaimed water distribution system shall be clearly color coded or marked. 03720 - 042 -02 15155 -8 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS August 2013 • • • • PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 HANDLING PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Care shall be taken in loading, transporting, and unloading to prevent injury to the pipe, fitting, lining, and coating. Pipe and fittings shall not be dropped. All pipe and fittings shall be examined before installation, and no piece that the Engineer finds defective shall be installed. The Contractor shall repair any damage to the pipe and fittings coating and/or lining as directed by the Engineer. If the Engineer determines that the coating and/or lining cannot be repaired, the Contractor shall replace the damaged pipe and fittings at no additional compensation. B. All pipe and fittings shall be subjected to a careful inspection immediately before installation. C. If any defective pipe is discovered after it has been installed, the Contractor shall remove and replace it with a pipe in satisfactory condition at no additional expense to the Owner. 3.02 PIPE INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall provide and use proper implements, tools, and facilities for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves, and appurtenances shall be lowered carefully into the trench and at above -grade locations to prevent damage to the pipe, protective coating, lining, and polyethylene bagging. Under no circumstances shall pipeline materials be dropped off or dumped. A trench shall be dewatered before the pipe is installed. B. The Contractor shall carefully examine all pipe fittings, valves, and other appurtenances for damage and other defects immediately before installation and before bagging buried ductile -iron pipe. The Contractor shall mark and hold defective materials for inspection by the Engineer, who may prescribe corrective repairs or reject the materials. C. The Contractor shall remove all lumps, blisters, and excess coating from the socket and plain ends of push -on joint pipe for buried service. The outside of the plain end and the inside of the bell shall be wiped clean and dry and be free from dirt, sand, grit, or any foreign material before the pipe is laid in trench. D. The Contractor shall prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while the pipe is being placed in the trench. During installation, no debris, tools, clothing, or other materials shall be placed in the pipe. 03720- 042 -02 15155 -9 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS August 2013 E. As each length of buried pipe is placed in the trench, the joint shall be assembled and the pipe brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill material. F. When pipe is not being laid, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer. When practical, the plug shall remain in place until the trench is pumped completely dry. Care shall be taken to prevent pipe flotation should the trench fill with water. G. Trench width at the top of pipe, bedding conditions, and backfill placement and compaction shall be such that design loadings on the pipe will not be exceeded. H. Joint Assembly: Pipe joints shall be assembled in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the requirements of ANSI /AWWA C600. 1. Flanged Joint: Before connecting flanged pipe the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all faces of the flanges of all oil, grease, and foreign material. The rubber gaskets shall be checked for proper fit and thoroughly cleaned. Care shall be taken to ensure proper sealing of the flange gasket. Bolts shall be tightened so that the pressure on the gasket is uniform. Torque - limiting wrenches shall be used to ensure uniform bearing insofar as possible. If joints leak when the hydrostatic test is applied, the gaskets shall be removed and reset and bolts retightened. 2. Push -On, Restrained Joint, or Mechanical Joint: The Contractor shall joint piping in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Provide all special tools and devices, such as special jacks, chokers, and similar items required for proper installation. Lubricant for the pipe gaskets shall be furnished by the pipe manufacturer, and no substitutes will be permitted under any circumstance. Pipe Deflection: When it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line in either the vertical or horizontal plane or where long radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection shall not exceed that shown in ANSI /AWWA C600 and that recommended by the retainer gland manufacturer for mechanical joint pipe and fittings. J. Pipe Cutting: For inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces pipe shall be cut in a neat, workmanlike manner without damaging the pipe or lining. Ductile cast iron may be cut using an abrasive pipe saw, rotary wheel cutter, guillotine pipe saw, milling wheel saw, or oxyacetylene torch. Cut ends and rough edges shall be ground smooth, and for push -on joint connections the cut end shall be beveled. 03720 - 042 -02 15155 -10 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS August 2013 • • 3.03 ABOVE - GROUND PIPE INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall install pipe in horizontal or vertical planes, parallel or perpendicular to building surfaces unless otherwise shown. Support pipe and fittings to prevent strain on joints, valves, and equipment. Install flanged joints so that contact faces bear uniformly on the gasket. Tighten bolts in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. 3.04 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING A. All exposed pipe and fittings shall be painted as specified in Section 09900, Painting and Coating. B. All buried steel bolts, nuts, washers, rods, harnesses, clamps, sleeves, and appurtenances shall be painted with System No. 21 as specified in Section 09900, Painting and Coating. 3.05 INSPECTION, TESTING, AND DISINFECTION A. See Section 15055, Piping Systems— General, and Section 15144, Pressure Testing of Piping. END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 15155 -11 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS August 2013 • • SECTION 15220 SLUICE GATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section includes provisions for the complete installation of Owner pre - purchased sluice gates, as shown in the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. B. Section 01600, Materials and Equipment. C. Section 01770, Project Closeout. D. Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. E. Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. F. Section 09900, Painting and Coating. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. Submittals shall include at least the following: A. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation in accordance with Section 01600, Materials and Equipment. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor shall inspect the Owner pre - purchased equipment; take field measurements; and verify that he has all required items, equipment, manufacturer's instructions before proceeding with the installation. B. These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is required but do not cover all details that may vary in accordance with the exact requirements of the equipment as provided. They are, however, intended to cover the installation and field testing of all materials and apparatus as required. Any additional equipment necessary for the proper operation of the proposed 03720 - 042 -02 15220 -1 SLUICE GATES August 2013 installation not specifically mentioned in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings shall be furnished and installed at no change in Contract Price or Time. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. B. The Contractor shall do the following: 1. Store and handle equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Properly protect all equipment and parts so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the units and equipment are ready for operation. 3. Properly protect all equipment and parts against any damage during a prolonged storage period at the site. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) 1.12 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O &M) MANUALS (NOT USED) 1.13 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS OR CONDITIONS A. The sluice gates shall be substantially watertight under the design head conditions. 1. The leakage shall not exceed 0.10 gallon per minute per foot of periphery for the rated seating and unseating head at the maximum seating pressure specified, in accordance with AWWA C563. 03720 - 042 -02 15220 -2 SLUICE GATES August 2013 • • • • B. For the purpose of these specifications, gate types listed in the schedule shall be defined as meeting the leakage requirements under the head conditions on the table shown on the contract drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS (NOT USED) 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. The Owner has pre - purchased the sluice gates. A copy of the manufacturer's quote is report is included in an Appendix of these specifications. B. The Contractor shall review the manufacturer's quote, coordinate the requirements of the installation and any additional equipment and material needs with the manufacturer prior to bidding, and provide all additional items and equipment necessary for installation of the sluice gates. 2.03 APPURTENANCES (NOT USED) 2.04 PAINTING AND COATINGS (NOT USED) • PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION • A. The Contractor shall obtain all installation recommendations directly from the manufacturer. All work shall be performed according to the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Mounting of Sluice Gates —The gate shall be mounted directly to the channel wall with stainless steel anchor brackets and minimum of t/2 inch diameter anchor bolts and shall be provided by the manufacturer. C. The sluice gate equipment and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the installation manual furnished by the gate manufacturer. 1. Care should be used in the handling, storage and installation of this equipment to prevent damage or distortion to the equipment and to ensure proper performance. 03720 - 042 -02 15220 -3 SLUICE GATES August 2013 3.02 TESTING A. The completely assembled sluice gate, in the vertical position, shall be shop inspected for proper seating. 1. Seat facings shall be machined and wedges adjusted to meet equipment design tolerances previously specified. 2. The disc shall be fully opened and closed in its guide system to ensure that it operates freely and that the required clearance between the disc tongue and gate guide groove maintained at all times. 3. Floorstands and benchstands shall be shop operated to insure proper assembly and operation. 4. Field test shall be conducted on all gates to verify compliance with all seating tolerances and leakage requirements. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION A. The manufacturer' representative will review the installation, direct the Contractor to make any required corrective actions, and certify the installation after all corrective actions are complete. These manufacturer services are included in the manufacturer's quote. Should additional manufacturer services be needed due to improper planning or workmanship by the Contractor, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for cost of these services. The reimbursement amount will be deducted from the Contractor's pay application. END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 15220 -4 SLUICE GATES August 2013 • • • • SECTION 15225 HOSE AND TUBING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section includes materials and accessories for flexible reinforced PVC tubing/hose. 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit the following: A. Shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance, and the following. B. The manufacturer's catalog data and descriptive literature for hoses, tubing, and couplings. Show pressure rating and materials of construction for tube, carcass, and cover. Show design of hose and tubing ends. C. Procedures for making up insert fittings and joints and compression fittings and joints. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 13720- 042 -02 15225 -1 HOSE AND TUBING August 2013 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) 1.12 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O &M) MANUALS (NOT USED) PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 FLEXIBLE POLYESTER REINFORCED CLEAR PVC TUBING A. The Contractor shall provide clear PVC tubing with polyester reinforcement with smooth inside bore and smooth outside. Minimum operating pressure rating at 70 °F shall be 200 psi for tubing 3/4 inch and smaller, 150 psi for 1 inch, 100 psi for 1 -1/4 and 1 -1/2 inches, and 75 psi for 2- inch - diameter tubing. Burst pressure shall be at least four times the specified operating pressure. B. For tubing size 1 inch and less, the Contractor shall join tubing to rigid pipe with PVC adapter fittings, single -barb insert by Schedule 80 PVC solvent cement socket. Secure tubing to the barbed end of the fitting with stainless steel hose clamp. Connect tubing sections by means of single -barb PVC couplings with stainless steel clamps. C. Products: Ryan Herco heavy duty "Herco -Braid Clear PVC Tubing with Polyester Reinforcement" or equal. 2.02 PTFE LINED FLARED THROUGH BRAIDED POLYPROPYLENE HOSE (NOT USED) 2.03 INSERT FITTINGS FOR TUBING A. The completed tubing and fitting system shall have the same operating pressure ratings as specified for the tubing. B. Rigid PVC pipe to PVC tubing transition fittings shall be solvent cement socket x single -barb fittings with stainless -steel clamps. 13720 - 042 -02 15225 -2 HOSE AND TUBING August 2013 • • PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SERVICE CONDITIONS A. Service and design conditions for hoses and tubing shall be as follows: 1. Polyester Braided Reinforced PVC Tubing: a. Liquid Conveyed: 12.5% Sodium Hypochlorite. b. Tubing Size: See Drawings. • • c. Tubing Quantities: See Drawings and equipment Specifications for total lengths and quantities of hose and tubing. The Contractor shall provide the longest continuous lengths available to minimize the number of couplings and fittings. 3.02 FIELD TESTING A. The Contractor shall hydrostatically test hose for leakage in accordance with Section 15144, Pressure Testing of Piping. Leakage shall be zero. Test pressure shall be the same as the rigid piping to which the tubing or hose is attached unless otherwise noted. END OF SECTION 13720- 042 -02 15225 -3 HOSE AND TUBING August 2013 • • SECTION 15250 SMALL - DIAMETER PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall provide small - diameter pipe and fittings (nominal diameters less than 4 inches unless noted otherwise on the Drawings) as shown on the Contract Drawings and described in Section 15055, Piping Systems— General. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. B. Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling. C. Section 02240, Dewatering. D. Section 02305, Earthwork for Utilities. E. Section 09900, Painting and Coating. F. Section 15055, Piping Systems — General. G. Section 15144, Pressure Testing of Piping. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance and Section 15055, Piping Systems — General. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI B1.20.1—Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch). 2. ANSI B16.5 —Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. 3. ANSI B16.11—Forge Fittings, Socket - Welding and Threaded. 4. ANSI B18.2.1—Square and Hex Bolts and Screws Inch Series. 5. ANSI B36.10— Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe. 6. ANSI B36.19M— Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe. 03720 - 042 -02 15250 -1 SMALL- DIAMETER PIPING August 2013 B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A53— Standard Specification for Pipe, Black and Hot - Dipped, Zinc - Coated, Welded and Seamless. 2. ASTM A90— Standard Test Method for Weight [Mass] of Coating on Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc -Alloy Coatings. 3. ASTM A105— Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications. 4. ASTM A182— Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High- Temperature Service. 5. ASTM A193— Standard Specification for Alloy -Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and other Special Purpose Applications. 6. ASTM A194— Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both. 7. ASTM A312— Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenistic Stainless Steel Pipes. 8. ASTM A320— Standard Specification for Alloy -Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for Low - Temperature Service. 9. ASTM D1784— Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 10. ASTM D1785— Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. 11. ASTM D2464— Standard Specification for Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 12. ASTM D2466— Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. 13. ASTM D2467— Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 14. ASTM D2564— Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems. 15. ASTM F439— Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 16. ASTM F441— Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80. 17. ASTM F493— Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 18. ASTM F656— Standard Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 03720 - 042 -02 15250 -2 SMALL - DIAMETER PIPING August 2013 • • • C. Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI) 1. PPI TR31— Underground Installation of Polyolefin Piping. D. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials and manufacturing shall adhere to the standards referenced in Section 15055, Piping Systems — General. B. The Contractor shall strictly adhere to the manufacturer's written storage, handling, installation, and joining. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, and Section 15055, Piping Systems— General for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) 1.12 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O &M) MANUALS A. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manuals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All pipe joints and fittings shall have the same schedule, pressure ratings, thermal resistance, chemical resistance, and other pertinent properties as the pipe being joined or connected. Plastic fittings shall be manufactured of the same resin as used in the manufacture of the pipe being joined. 03720 - 042 -02 15250 -3 SMALL- DIAMETER PIPING August 2013 B. Each pipe length shall be clearly marked with the manufacturer's name or trademark, applicable ASTM standards, size, pressure rating, and/or schedule. C. Provide line size reducing tees for connecting lateral or instrumentation to pipe systems. Seal threaded fittings with TeflonTM tape or TeflonTM paste. Engage threaded fittings in accordance with ASTM A53. D. All flange bolts, nuts, and washers shall be AISI Type 304 stainless steel, ASTM A193, Grade B8M hex head bolts and ASTM A194, Grade 8M hex head nuts unless noted otherwise. Bolts shall be fabricated in accordance with ANSI B18.2.1 and shall be provided with washers. Treat all bolts with anti - galling compound before assembly. 2.02 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM D1785, manufactured from Class 12454 -B rigid PVC compounds with a hydrostatic design stress of 13.8 MPa (2000 psi) designated as PVC 1120. Provide Schedule 40 PVC piping and socket welded fittings and Schedule 80 PVC threaded fittings, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings or in the Specifications. B. Joints: Solvent- welded unless flanged or threaded joints are indicated on the Drawings or required for connection to equipment. C. Fittings: 1. Solvent - welded: ASTM D2466 or D2467, manufactured from Class 12454 -B rigid PVC compound. 2. Threaded: ASTM D2464 manufactured from Class 12454 -B rigid PVC compound; thread tape of Teflon. Only Schedule 80 PVC threaded pipe fittings shall be used. D. Flanges: PVC Schedule 80 ANSI Class 150 flanges manufactured from rigid PVC compounds conforming to ASTM D1784. 1. Gaskets: Flat -face elastomer as specified and compatible for pipe system service. 2. Bolts: AISI Type 304 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A320, Grade B. 03720 - 042 -02 15250 -4 SMALL - DIAMETER PIPING August 2013 • • E. Unions: ASTM D2467 manufactured from Class 12454 -B rigid PVC compound with elastomer o -rings as specified and compatible for service. Schedule 40 or 80 to match adjacent piping. F. Solvent Cement: 1. Solvent Cement in Other than Chemical and Chemical Carrier Water Service: a. Solvent cement for socket joints shall comply with ASTM D2564 and ASTM F656. 2. Solvent Cement in Chemical and Chemical Carrier Water Service: a. Solvent cement shall be free of silica. Products: IPS "Weld -On 724" or Oatey "Lo V.O.C. PVC Heavy Duty Gray." 2.03 CHLORINATED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE (CPVC) AND FITTINGS (NOT USED) 2.04 GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE (NOT USED) • 2.05 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE • A. Stainless Steel Pipe — Threaded Joints: Conforming to ASTM A312, Grade TP 304 and 316, and ANSI B36.19M, Schedule 40S. 1. Fittings: Conforming to ASTM A182, Grade F 304 and 316, and ANSI B16.11 Class 2000, or Class 3000 where indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications. 2. Threaded Joints: Conforming to ANSI B1.20.1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall lay and maintain all pipes straight and true to line in conformance with the lines, grades, and elevations indicated on the Drawings. Line and grade tolerances, where applicable, shall be in accordance with limits given for specific material. B. Trenching, bedding, and backfill shall be in accordance with Section 02305, Earthwork for Utilities, and shall be installed in accordance with Section 15055, Piping Systems — General. 03720 - 042 -02 15250 -5 SMALL- DIAMETER PIPING August 2013 C. During laying operations, the Contractor shall not permit debris, tools, clothing, or similar items to be placed inside pipes. Pipe interior shall be free of mud and kept clean at all times. The Contractor shall secure the open ends of all piping at the end of construction each work day or any portion of a work day to prevent the intrusion of debris, precipitation, or soil from erosion. The proposed method of securing pipe open ends shall be approved by the Engineer. If the Contractor fails to secure piping of if the secured end is dislodged, the Engineer shall require the Contractor to flush all affected piping to remove accumulated debris and verify that the piping is free of debris using a method acceptable to the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Pipe ends shall be kept clear and clean and the Contractor shall ensure that inside surfaces are maintained smooth and free from any projections that may interfere with joint assembly or flow through the completed line. E. The Contractor shall be careful when lowering pipe into trenches or on subgrade to prevent damage or twisting of the pipe. After laying and before completing backfill or cover operations, pipe shall be protected from any vehicular traffic. F. Existing piping flanged joints that are disassembled by the Contractor shall be fitted with new gaskets, as specified, upon reassembly. 3.02 PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTS A. Pressure Testing: 1. The Contractor shall pressure test and leak test all piping shown on the Drawings, the Flow Stream Identification Drawing, and Section 15055, Piping Systems— General, and Section 15144, Pressure Testing of Piping. END OF SECTION 03720 - 042 -02 15250 -6 SMALL- DIAMETER PIPING August 2013 • • • • • • DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL • • • SECTION 16050 ELECTRICAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required for a complete electrical system at Marshall Street Water Reclamation Facility Chlorine Contact Tank Improvements for the City of Clearwater, Florida as hereinafter specified and shown on the Drawings. B. The work, apparatus, and materials that shall be furnished under these Specifications and accompanying Drawings shall include all items listed hereinafter and/or shown on the Drawings. Certain equipment that will require wiring thereto and/or complete installation is indicated. All materials necessary for the complete installation shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor to provide complete power, lighting, instrumentation, and wiring and control systems as indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified herein. C. The Contractor shall furnish and install the necessary cables, motor controls, protective devices, conductors, supports, raceways, exterior electrical system, etc., to serve motor loads, lighting loads, and miscellaneous electrical loads as indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. The Contractor shall install any control panel provided under other Sections of the Specifications. D. The work shall include complete testing of all equipment and wiring at the completion of the work and making any minor connection changes or adjustments necessary for the proper functioning of the system and equipment. All workmanship shall be of the highest quality; sub - standard work will be rejected. E. For process instrumentation, furnish and install all conduit, wire, and interconnections between primary elements, transmitters, local indicators and receivers. F. It is the intent of these Specifications that the electrical system shall be suitable in every way for the service required. All material and all work that may be reasonably implied as being incidental to the work of this Section shall be furnished at no extra cost. 03720 - 042 -02 16050 -1 ELECTRICAL August 2013 1.02 SERVICE AND METERING A. Permanent electrical power is existing. 1.03 CODES, INSPECTION AND FEES A. All material and installation shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code and all applicable national, local and state codes, laws and ordinances. B. Pay all fees required for permits and inspections. 1.04 TESTS A. Test all systems and repair or replace all defective work. Make all necessary adjustments to the systems and instruct Owner's personnel in the proper operation of the systems. B. The following minimum tests and checks shall be made prior to the energizing of electrical equipment. Test shall be by the Contractor and a certified test report shall be submitted providing all test results and stating that the equipment meets and operates in accordance with the Manufacturer's and job specifications, and that equipment and installation conforms to all applicable Standards and Specifications: 1. Test protective relays for calibration and proper operation. 2. Test all 600 -volt wire insulation with a megohm meter after installation. Make tests at not less than 1,000 volts. Submit a written test report of the results to the Engineer. C. The Engineer shall be notified 48 hours before tests are made to enable the Owner to have designated personnel present. • • 1.05 RELATED WORK A. Excavation and backfilling for underground electrical work are included in other divisions. B. Concrete work is shown on the Drawings. 1.06 SLEEVES AND FORMS FOR OPENINGS A. Provide and place all sleeves for conduits penetrating floors, walls, partitions, etc. • 03720 - 042 -02 16050 -2 ELECTRICAL August 2013 • • • 1.07 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. All cutting and patching shall be done in a thoroughly workmanlike manner. 1.08 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS A. The Drawings are not intended to show exact locations of conduit runs. B. All three -phase circuits shall be run in separate conduits unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. C. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, conduit shown exposed shall be installed exposed; conduit shown concealed shall be installed concealed. D. Where circuits are shown as "home- runs," all necessary fittings and boxes shall be provided for a complete raceway installation. E. The Contractor shall harmonize the work of the different trades so that interferences between conduits, piping, equipment, and architectural and structural work will be avoided. All necessary offsets shall be furnished so as to take up a minimum space, and all such offsets, fittings, etc., required to accomplish this shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor without additional expense to the Owner. In case interference develops, the Owner's authorized representative will decide which equipment, piping, etc., must be relocated, regardless of which was installed first. F. Verify with the Engineer the exact locations and mounting heights of lighting fixtures, switches, and receptacles prior to installation. G. The locations of equipment, fixtures, outlets, and similar devices shown on the Drawings are approximate only. Exact locations shall be as approved by the Engineer during construction. Obtain in the field all information relevant to the placing of electrical work and in case of any interference with other work, proceed as directed by the Engineer, and furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete the work in an approved manner. H. Surface - mounted panel boxes, junction boxes, conduit, etc., shall be supported by spacers to provide a clearance between wall and equipment. I. Circuit layouts shown are not intended to show the number of fittings or other installation details. Furnish all labor and materials necessary to install and place in satisfactory operation all power, lighting, and other electrical systems shown. 03720- 042 -02 16050 -3 ELECTRICAL August 2013 Additional circuits shall be installed wherever needed to conform to the specific requirements of the equipment. J. The ratings of motors and other electrically operated devices together with the size shown for their branch circuit conductors and conduits are approximate only and are indicative of the probable power requirements insofar as they can be determined in advance of the purchase of equipment. K. All connections to equipment shall be made as shown, specified, and directed and in accordance with the approved shop and setting drawings, regardless of the number of conductors shown on the Electrical Drawings. 1.09 RECORD DRAWINGS A. As the work progresses, legibly record all field changes on a set of project Contract Drawings. When the project is complete, the Contractor shall provide Record Drawing in accordance with Section 01785, Record Documents. 1.10 COMPONENT INTERCONNECTIONS A. Component equipment furnished under this Specification shall not be furnished as integrated systems. B. Analyze all systems components and their shop drawings; identify all terminals and prepare drawings or wiring tables necessary for component interconnection. 1.11 SHOP DRAWINGS A. As specified under other Sections, shop drawings shall be submitted for approval for all materials, equipment, apparatus, and other items as required by the Engineer. B. The Manufacturer's name and product designation and catalog cutsheets shall be submitted for the following material: 1. Conduit, Wire. 2. Circuit Breakers. 3. Equipment Support Racks (with structural engineering certification). 4. Boxes and Fittings. 5. Disconnect Switches. 6. Control Relays. 7. Conduit Layout Drawings. 03720 - 042 -02 16050 -4 ELECTRICAL August 2013 • • • • • C. Prior to submittal by the Contractor, all shop drawings shall be checked for accuracy and contract requirements. Shop drawings shall bear the date checked and shall be accompanied by a statement that the shop drawings have been examined for conformity to Specifications and Drawings. This statement shall also list all discrepancies with the Specifications and Drawings. Shop drawings not checked and noted shall be returned. D. The Engineer's check shall be only for conformance with the design concept of the project and compliance with the Specifications and Drawings. The responsibility of, or the necessity of, furnishing materials and workmanship required by the Specifications and Drawings that may not be indicated on the shop drawings is included under the work of this Section. E. The responsibility for all dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site and for coordination of this work with the work of all other trades is also included under the work of this Section. F. No material shall be ordered or shop work started until the Engineer's approval of shop drawings has been given. 1.12 CONDUIT LAYOUT DRAWINGS A. In addition to the manufacturer's equipment shop drawings, the Contractor shall submit for the approval electrical installation working drawings for the lift station site and any other areas where there is work required to be performed containing the following: 1. Concealed and buried conduit layouts shown on floor plans drawn at not less than 1/4 -inch = 1- foot -0 -inch scale. The layouts shall include locations of process equipment, transformers, panelboards, control panels and equipment, motors, switches, motor starters, large junction or pull boxes, instruments, and any other electrical devices connected to concealed or buried conduits. 2. Plans shall be drawn on high - quality reproducible, double -sided mylar, size 36- x 24 -inch, and shall be presented in a neat, professional manner. 3. Concrete floors and/or walls containing concealed conduits shall not be poured until conduit layouts are approved. 4. Site plan conduit layout drawings shall be at 1 inch = 30 feet 0 inches. Note: ACAD drawing files are available from the Engineer 03720 - 042-02 16050 -5 ELECTRICAL August 2013 1.13 WARRANTY A. Provide a warranty for all the electrical equipment in accordance with the requirements of other Sections. Under no circumstances shall the warranty be for less than one year starting from substantial completion. 1.14 DEMOLITION A. Remove all electrical work associated with equipment scheduled for demolition except those portions indicated to remain or be reused. Remove all unused exposed conduit and wiring back to point of concealment. Remove unused wiring in concealed conduits back to source (or nearest point of usage). Electrical work to be removed corresponds to the associated mechanical equipment to be removed. B. Where electrical systems pass through the demolition areas to serve other portions of the premises, they shall remain or shall be suitably relocated and the system restored to normal operation. Coordinate outages in systems with the Owner. Where duration of proposed outage cannot be allowed by the Owner, provide temporary connections as required to maintain service. C. All removals and relocations of existing installations cannot be completely detailed on the Drawings. Survey the site before submitting bid proposal. D. Continuous service is required on all circuits and outlets affected by these changes, except where the Owner will permit outage for a specific time. Obtain Owner's written consent before removing any circuit from continuous service. E. Where required to disconnect and/or remove any part of an existing circuit, reconnect that circuit to reestablish service in the remaining portion. F. Remove exposed conduits, wireways, outlet boxes, pull boxes and hangers made obsolete by the alternations, unless specifically designated to remain. Exposed conduits shall be removed back to point of concealment, where they shall be cut and threaded for a cap. A threaded cap shall then be installed. Conduits may be removed back to first coupling if within 3 inches of point of concealment. Cut back in traffic areas to the floor level and patch. 1.15 DISPOSITION OF REMOVED MATERIALS AND EQUIPEMENT A. In general, it is intended that all materials and equipment indicated to be removed and disposed of by the Contractor shall, upon removal, become the Contractor's property and shall be disposed of off the site by the Contractor, unless otherwise directed by the Owner or as indicated on the drawings. 03720 - 042 -02 16050 -6 ELECTRICAL August 2013 • • • • • B. Reuse of wire shall not be permitted. An exception is the reuse or relocation when wire is part of an existing lighting branch circuit and reuse or relocation is specifically designated and can be accomplished without removing and re- pulling the wire. C. All reusable and salvageable disconnect switches, starters, control devices, control panels and instruments, receptacles, light fixtures, etc. shall be sorted and returned to the Owner. D. All electrical equipment to be salvaged shall be removed and shall be moved by the Contractor to a location on the site for storage as directed by the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The materials used in all systems shall be new, unused, and as hereinafter specified. All materials where not specified shall be of the very best of their respective kinds. Samples of materials or Manufacturer's specifications shall be submitted for approval as required by the Engineer. B. Materials and equipment used shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed and conform with applicable standards of NEMA and ANSI. C. Electrical equipment shall at all times during construction be adequately protected against mechanical injury or damage by water. Electrical equipment shall not be stored outdoors. Electrical equipment shall be stored in dry permanent shelters. If any apparatus has been damaged, such damage shall be repaired by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. If any apparatus has been subject to possible injury by water, it shall be thoroughly dried out and put through such special tests as directed by the Engineer, at the cost and expense of the Contractor, or shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense. D. All electrical panels, enclosures, boxes, cabinets, etc., shall be fabricated of stainless steel. Nonmetallic substitutes are not acceptable. This does not apply to buried work. 2.02 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS A. All conduits above finished grade (AFG) shall be aluminum and those below finished grade (BFG) shall be schedule 80 PVC, unless otherwise noted. Conduit elbows BFG including turn -ups shall be PVC - coated RGS Rob -Roy or approved equal. 03720 - 042 -02 16050 -7 ELECTRICAL August 2013 B. All instrumentation conduits shall be in PVC - coated GRS Rob -Roy or approved equal. C. Conduit fitting material and coating shall match corresponding conduit specification. 2.03 CONDUCTORS A. Conductors shall be copper. Power circuits shall have 600 volt PVC insulation (Underwriters' approved Type THWN -2). Conductors shall be color coded in accordance with the N.E.C. B. All motor controls, remote indicating lights, alarm circuits, and metering loops shall be wired with #14 stranded copper conductors. Insulation shall be PVC. C. All shielded instrumentation cable shall be 2/c #16 shielded with 600 -volt insulation and PVC outer jacket. D. Cable for Ethernet wiring shall be UTP Cat -6 cable suitable for wet locations. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A. Disconnect Switches: 1. Non - fusible disconnect switches shall be heavy -duty, NEMA type H. (NEMA 4X stainless Steel Enclosure), quick -make, visible blades, 600 -volt, 3 -pole with full cover interlock. All current carrying parts including lugs(AL /CU rated lugs are not acceptable) shall be copper. 2. Where disconnects are called for on the Drawings, the Contractor shall provide a 600 -volt, 3 -pole, fusible switch in a NEMA 4x, stainless -steel enclosure with copper lugs. 3. Each disconnect shall be provided with a plastic nameplate, affixed to the enclosure with self stainless steel screws, identifying the equipment served. 4. Switches shall be horsepower rated as manufactured by Square D Company. 03720 - 042 -02 16050 -8 ELECTRICAL August 2013 • • B. Lightning/Surge Protection • • 1. General — Additional lightning/surge protection shall be provided for all field instrumentation device to protect surges from propagating along the signal and power supply lines. The protection systems shall be such that the protective level shall not interfere with normal operation, but shall be lower than the instrument surge withstand level and be maintenance -free and self - restoring. Instrument transmitters shall be housed in a suitable metallic case, and properly grounded. Ground wires for all surge protection devices shall be connected to a good earth ground and, where practical, each ground wire shall be run individually and insulated from each other. The protector unit shall be EDCO SS 64 or approved equal. C. Boxes and Fittings 1. NEMA 4X boxes shall be used outdoors or in "wet" locations. Construction shall be Type 304 stainless steel. 2. Conduit hubs shall be as manufactured by Meyers Electric Products, Inc., Raco Div., Appleton Electric Co., or approved equal. 3. All entrances to outdoor boxes shall be made on the bottom or sides; top entrances are not permitted. 4. Conduit sealing bushings shall be O.Z. /Gedney Type CSB or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. Where conduits enter or leave all outlet boxes, cabinets safety switches, tap boxes, motor controllers, etc., other than those having threaded hubs, a standard lock nut shall be used on the outside of the box. Busings 1 -inch and larger shall be of an approved insulated type. Unless otherwise indicated, conduit 2- inches and larger shall be supported at intervals not exceeding 12 feet and for smaller sizes at intervals not exceeding 8 feet. All outdoor conduit penetrations into boxes, switches, motor controllers, and other devices shall be made using Myers hubs or approved equal; locknuts are not permitted. B. During construction, all installed raceways shall be temporarily plugged or otherwise protected from the entrance of moisture, dirt, trash, plaster, moisture, etc., through neglect of the Contractor to protect them, shall be replaced by the Contractor without additional expense to the Owner. No kinked, clogged, or 03720 - 042 -02 16050 -9 ELECTRICAL August 2013 deformed raceways will be permitted on the job. Raceways shall be cut to proper length so that ends will fit accurately in the outlets. Where raceways cross building expansion joints, a suitable raceway expansion fitting shall be used. C. Size of raceway shall not be less than National Electrical Code requirements, but in no case shall be less than indicated on the Drawings. Combining of circuits, other than detailed, shall not be permitted. The Contractor shall install larger size raceways than detailed where there is excessive length of unbroken run or excessive number of bends. D. Bends in metallic raceways shall be made while "cold," and in no case shall the raceways be heated. Raceways shall not be bent through more than 90 degrees. The radius of bends shall not be less than six times the internal diameter of the raceway. Not more than four (equivalent 90 degrees) bends will be permitted between outlets, the bends at the outlets being counted. E. Raceways shall be properly aligned, grouped, and supported. Exposed raceways shall be installed at the right angles to or parallel to the principal structural members. Concealed raceways, unless otherwise indicated, may take the most direct route between outlets. Raceways shall be firmly held in place. Raceways shall run to avoid trapping wherever possible. Where areas are indicated for future openings, foundations, etc., all raceways shall be run around such areas. The Contractor shall provide necessary inserts in poured concrete areas and shall furnish and install all necessary sleeves through walls, floors, and roofs for passage of raceways. Sleeves through roofs and/or exterior walls shall be properly sealed by the Contractor against entrance of moisture, etc., into the building. Where necessary, repairs shall be made to the building structure using material in no way inferior to that originally installed and using labor skilled in the trades involved. 3.02 BOXES A. Install all outlet boxes, tap, junction or pull boxes, device boxes, etc., necessary for the complete installation as indicated on the Drawing and/or specified herein. All boxes shall be rigidly mounted and shall be equipped with suitable stainless steel screw fastened covers. Where necessary for boxes to be supported away from the ceiling, structural steel members shall be provided for supports. All raceways entering boxes shall be mechanically and electrically secure. Open knock -outs or holes in boxes shall be plugged with suitable blanking devices. Boxes shall be cleared of all plaster, dirt, trash, etc., before the installation of any wiring devices and/or before the installation of cover plates. 03720 - 042 -02 16050 -10 ELECTRICAL August 2013 3.03 CONDUCTORS A. Splices, taps, and attachments of fittings and lugs shall be electrically and mechanically secure. Approved all copper solderless lugs and connectors shall be usued for all conductors with 2 -bolt type being used for sized No. 4/0 and larger. AL /CU rated lugs are not acceptable. There shall be additional slack cable in boxes, outlets, and cabinets to ensure that there is no binding at the bushings. All lugs shall be of the correct sizes for the conductor to fit the conductor into a lug. Taping of joints shall be either with Scotch electrical tape or varnished cambric tape and friction tape to secure insulation strength equal to that of the conductors joined. B. Splices or joints with friction tape outer covering in conductors of size No. 4 AWG or larger shall have three coats of suitable insulating varnish point applied over tape. Conductors shall be color coded in accordance with National Electrical Code. 3.04 GROUNDING A. Bond into the existing grounding system. All grounding materials shall be copper, including conductors and connectors. Gorun connections BFG shall be made by exothermic weld method with expection of in ground test wells that those connections shall be by copper clamps UL listed for that purpose. B. The entire electrical system shall be completely and effectively grounded as required by the National Electrical Code and as specified hereinafter. C. All metallic raceways shall be mechanically and electrically secure at all joints and at all boxes, cabinets, fittings, and equipment. Metallic raceways entering the motor control center control panels or other electrical boxes shall be grounded to the appropriate ground bus. All metallic raceways shall be electrically continuous throughout the entire conduit system. Bond wires shall be used in exterior concrete pull boxes. 3.05 CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING A. All conductors shall be color coded as specified hereinafter. Color coding shall be by means of colored insulation material, colored braid, or jacket over the insulation, or by means of suitable colored permanent, non -aging insulation tape equal to Scotch #471 or "Texcel 98" applied to conductors at each outlet, cabinet or junction point. 03720 - 042-02 16050 -11 ELECTRICAL August 2013 B. The following system of color coding shall be strictly adhered to: 1. Ground leads, green. 2. Grounded neutral leads, white. 3. Ungrounded phase wires of a 120/240 volt, 1- phase, 3 -wire system, black and red. 4. All control leads, other than line connected "hot" leads, shall be yellow, orange and brown and/or I.P.C.E.A. standard control cable coding provided method of identification is different from method used on power conductors. C. The color coding assigned to each phase wire shall be consistently followed throughout the Work. 3.06 SUPPORTS A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary supports for properly mounting all electrical equipment and raceways. All supports and support fittings such as conduit clamps and unistrut shall be stainless steel. Such supports shall be fabricated and installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, and care shall be taken that at no time shall any portion of the building structure be overloaded. Should the building structure sustain damage through carelessness or through failure of the Contractor to properly support and install the electrical equipment, the Contractor shall bear all costs involved in repairing or replacing such installation. B. All steel shapes exposed to the weather shall be stainless steel. All shop connections shall be welded or riveted, and all field connections shall be bolted on all outdoor structures. Where the field cutting or drilling of galvanized structural steel is necessary, the Contractor shall apply one coat of priming paint and one finish coat of aluminum and oil paint. END OF SECTION 03720 - 042-02 16050 -12 ELECTRICAL August 2013 • • • • • MANUFACTURERS' QUOTES • • • • enduro Proposal No. To: Attention: Phone: Email / Fax: Project: Location: Rep Firm: Enduro Mgr: 16602 Central Green Blvd. Houston, TX 77032 800.231.7271 • Fax 713.358.4100 13 -041_B Rev. 2 City of Clearwater Marshall St CCT Improvements Clearwater, FL Moss- Kelley_Brian Schuette (407) 805 -0063 Joe Getz (610) 792 -4744 This Enduro proposal is based upon: Scope of Work: Date: 6/14/13 • Supply only of materials for Enduro FRP Baffle Wall System including: - FRP Baffle Panels - FRP Angles (if applicable) - Fasteners, Anchors and Hardware • Freight prepaid by Enduro to Clearwater, FL. FOB Destination. • PE Stamped Drawings and Calculations — (once approved) • Four (4) Trips by an Enduro Field Representative shall be performed. - (2) Trips for field measurements, (2) Trips for installation inspection. - Each trip consists of (1) Eight (8) hour day — (4) Days total. • Installation Drawings for Enduro products (11" x 17" sheets). • Baffle Wall dimensions: o (4) Perforated "D" Baffle walls, Each at 10' -6 "W x 13' -4 "H o (3) Perforated "D" Baffle walls, Each at 12' -6 "W x 13' -4 "H o (2) "D" Baffle walls (Under Flow), each at 11' -6 "W x 7' -3 "H Specification Section: 06610 Drawing #: M -1 Addenda: N/A Page 1 of 3 Price for this Proposal: $51,305.00 • Price is in U.S. dollars and does not include taxes or duties. • Price is valid based on materials shipping within 9 months from date of quote. • Payment Terms are Net 30 days with approved credit. • Proposal is valid for 30 days only, then expires. • Proposal is based on Terms and Conditions included in this proposal. 1) Proposal is based on these exceptions /clarifications to the Specifications: a. 1.07.B. The Manufacturer shall warrant the products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for 2 years and failure due to corrosion of materials for 25 years starting after final acceptance. Enduro is including 1 extra year to our standard warranty on defects in materials and workmanship for a total of 2 years, but takes exception to the 25 year corrosion warranty. 2) Proposal includes: Enduro Fiberglass (FRP) Baffle Wall System with these components: a. AquaSpan D Series Baffle Panels - FRP - Resin: Polyester_Color: Gray - Glass fiber reinforcing content: 40% minimum - U.L. Certified to ANSI/NSF Standard 61 - Depth: 4 "_Cover Width: 24" - Thickness: 1/8" (.125 ")_Approximate Weight: 1.5 lbs /SF (3 lbs/LF) - Perforated Baffle panels (if applicable) shall have 2.5" diam. openings with 10% (max.) total open area. Installation Note: Contractor shall fasten baffle panels to supports (6 bolts per panel). endure b. FRP Angles - Resin: Polyester_Color: Gray - U.L. Certified to ANSUNSF Standard 61 Page 2 of 3 c. Fasteners and Hardware - 316 Stainless Steel unless noted otherwise - Anchors: Adhesive type and spaced at 18" on center. 3) Proposal is based on these assumptions: a. Water Differential Load = 2 in. Wind Load = 10 psf Baffle Panels: Minimum L/D = 60 Minimum Factor of Safety = 2.0 Baffle Framing: Minimum L/D = 100 Minimum Factor of Safety = 2.0 b. Specified loading may account for wind and water differential pressure only and not include fluid flow pressure or dynamic loads associated with mechanical equipment. Actual load requirements, which vary with process, should be determined and specified by the Design Engineer. c. Existing walls, floors or adjacent surfaces for attachment of FRP components shall be smooth, level, and straight (not sloped). d. Existing tank walls, floor, and other adjacent surfaces shall support load transfer reactions from connections with FRP components. e. Connections to walls, floors, and adjacent structures shall be allowed as needed to secure baffle components. f. Concrete strength is a minimum of 4000 psi. g. Buyer and Engineer shall approve Enduro Submittal Drawings and Data in writing. h. Buyer shall dismantle, relocate, or modify any interference points or existing equipment obstructions interfering with or penetrating baffle system layout. i. Warranty against material defects and workmanship shall be for 24 months following date of shipment. 4) Estimated Lead Time for Drawings and Submittal Data: a. 4 -6 weeks after executed contract and adequate information to prepare drawings has been provided to Enduro. - If Enduro is responsible for field dimensioning or survey, additional time will be required. 5) Estimated Lead Time for Start of Shipping: a. 8 -10 weeks after Enduro has received its approved Submittal Data. 6) Proposal does not include: a. Cutting of penetration holes. b. Bevel cutting of FRP components. Baffle panels shall be cut square in the factory and shall not match sloped foundation or sloped wall. For sloped foundations, contractor shall furnish and install a level support for baffle panels and columns. c. Staging, storage, unloading, installation or field labor of any kind. d. Field dimensioning, site visits, or field advisor, unless listed as included in the Scope of Work or Inclusion Section. e. Any handrail, grating, ventilation, duct, equipment, or other component unless listed as included in the Scope of Work or Inclusion Section. f. Permits, licenses, bonds, taxes or duties. g. Any material to modify concrete or other adjoining material surfaces. h. Sealants or gasket between baffle panels and between ends of baffle panels and support structures. i. Stainless steel angles and hardware to anchor the panels to columns and walls unless noted otherwise. j. Compliance with Specifications, Drawings, or Addenda not listed in this proposal. Enduro Proposal by: Joe Getz Enduro will appreciate your purchase order, which should be addressed to Enduro (as Seller), 16602 Central Green Blvd., Houston, TX 77032. Thank you for your consideration. Clearwater, FL_D Baftle_Scope #13- 041_B_Rev 2_6.11.13 .doc • • • enduro TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE 1. Terms: Each delivery made hereunder shall stand as a separate sale and is subject to credit arrangements or to receipt of cash. Seller reserves the right to withhold manufacture and /or delivery of all of any undelivered part of order if seller at any time becomes doubtful of buyer's ability to pay according to the terms hereof. Normal payment terms are Net 30 days from date of invoice with a minimum charge of $150.00 net. 2. Taxes: All excise, privilege, occupation, sales, personal property and other taxes (whether federal, state, or local) applicable to the sale, purchase, storage, use or ownership of any of the seller's products covered hereby, and for the payment or collection of which the seller shall be liable shall be added to the selling price of said products and shall be paid by the buyer although not specifically set out as an item in the price quoted herein. 3. Delays: Seller shall not be responsible for any delays on account of transportation difficulties, shortages of material or priorities of any kind, strikes or accidents at seller's factory, war, "Acts of God" or other causes beyond the seller's control. 4. Penalties: There are no penalties of liquidated damages except as may be specifically provided herein. 5. Freight: Material prices are quoted "F.O.B. Destination" the freight charges and, when applicable, the transportation tax will be for the account of the buyer. Should the freight rates or any transportation taxes thereon be increased, such increases will be in addition to the prices quoted. • Quantities involving one or more carloads of materials will be shipped at the railroad carload rate and minimum carload weight, and any additional expense incurred by the seller in making less than minimum carload shipments in order to meet the buyer's demands will be assumed by the buyer. 6. Loss or Damage in Transit: When material is sold "F.O.B. origin" the risk of loss or damage in transit and the responsibility for filing claims is the buyer's. 7. Seller's Liability for Shortages, Delivery of Improper Material or Delivery of Damages or Defective Material: The buyer agrees to carefully check material upon unloading at destination. The seller will recognize no claims for shortages, for delivery of improper material unless written notice specifying in detail the nature and extent of the shortage, defect or damage is mailed to the seller's office in Houston, Texas within ten (10) days from receipt. • Seller will in no case pay or be liable for any claims resulting from the use by the buyer of improper material or from the use by the buyer of material having apparent defects or damages when installed by the buyer. 8. Delayed Delivery Schedule: The buyer cannot cancel Orders. Unless provided to the contrary herein, the seller's obligation to furnish materials hereunder shall cease at its option if the seller is not permitted to complete shipment within twelve (12) months from the date of acceptance of this order. • A storage charge of 2% of the purchase price per month will be added in the event buyer requests Seller to delay shipment beyond 30 days following completion of manufacturing. Clearwater, FL_D Baffle_Scope #13- 04 1_B_Rev 2_6.11.13 .doc Page 3 of 3 9. Special Material: Material to be manufactured to the buyer's drawings and specification shall be furnished in accordance with such drawings and specification. The buyer may inspect such material during the manufacture thereof. The seller shall not be responsible for any failure of the material caused by defective design. • The buyer, upon its approval of the seller's drawings and /or quote, assumes responsibility for all material quantities supplied. Any and all material shortages will be supplied at an associated cost consistent with the pricing at that time. • In the event that any order for special material is canceled, either in whole or in part, the buyer shall pay to the seller all of the cost incurred by the seller incident to such cancellation, including, but not limited to engineering costs, cost of special tools, dies, equipment and raw material, plus 30% thereof for restocking or cancellation fee. In addition thereto, the buyer shall pay the unit price for all items of special manufacture completed before the seller receives notice of cancellation. • In the event any order for standard material is canceled, a 30% cancellation fee will be imposed. 10. Return of Goods: No material will be taken back and credited or replaced unless arrangements for such return have previously been made with our Houston, Texas office within thirty (30) days from date of shipment. Cable tray products and special cut/color Tuff Span products are made to order and are non - cancelable and non returnable. 11. This quotation is valid for 30 days or negotiated and documented, and is subject to Buyer's acceptance on or before that date. Thereupon it will become the entire agreement between the buyer and seller notwithstanding any previous communications or negotiations whether oral or written. The parties intend to be legally bound hereby and to be governed by Texas law upon acceptance of the order. In the event that buyer issues his own purchase order or prepares a contract based on this order the conditions contained herein shall be deemed to be incorporated in the said purchase order or contract unless exception is specifically taken thereto. 12. Partial Shipments: Order fulfillment can be by partial or multiple shipments, which can result in multiple invoices for the order. Enduro's Standard Terms and Conditions apply to each shipment and invoice. 13. Backcharges: Back charges, otherwise known as offset charges, are not accepted without written approval from Seller. 14. Color Notice: Polyester and vinyl ester resin products are subject to discoloration when exposed to atmospheric and environmental conditions. Accordingly, seller assumes no liability and expressly disclaims any responsibility for any loss or damage, direct, indirect or consequential, for any change of color for any polyester or vinyl ester product. • FITTFEO • • QUOTATION Date: Wednesday, 12 June 2013 To: Mr. Rob Fahey, Project Manager City of Clearwater 100 S. Myrtle Ave. Clearwater, FL 33756 Our ref: N33092 Project: Subject: Rob, Statiflo Corp 95 Wahconah Street Pittsfield, MA 01201 Tel: +1 413 684 9911 Fax: +1 413 464 8239 Email: inquiriesPstatiflocorp.com Website: www.statiflo.net Clearwater Marshall Street WRF Channel Mixer - Statiflo Project No. N33092 Section 11222 Statiflo Channel Mixers We thank you for your above referenced inquiry. We are pleased to offer the following Statiflo mixer quotation. 1 only STATIFLO SERIES 900 DUCT MIXER, 4.5 ft wide x 13.25 ft high (TWL) x 1.5 STMC elements (2.25 : 1 Pitch Ratio) Duct mixer will be manufactured in 316L stainless steel and designed to fit into an existing concrete basin. Mixer to have a 3' -6" long by 6' -10" wide by 13' -9" high inlet section of 316L plate to enclose existing sluice gate opening and apparatus to a level 0' -6" above existing 13' -3" top water level , the length calculated to keep spargers free of existing interference off wall. The inlet section is to be provided with drilled flanges for connection to the existing wall surrounding the sluice gate wall by means of concrete anchor bolts by others. The inlet section will be provided with a means of guiding and holding two sparger assemblies, one duty and one standby. Both assemblies will be removable to allow removal for maintenance of one assembly while the other is in service. Each sparger assembly is to have two legs drilled with release holes spaced and sized to maximize mixer performance. Each removable assembly to be fitted with a union inlet for connection to feed lines and will be sectioned into 5' lengths for ease of removal. The means of diverting flow from one assembly to the other is by others. The mixer element assembly to be 7' -2" long by 4' -6" wide by 4' -6" high and will connect to the inlet section by means of provided fasteners and will include drilled flanges for connection to the existing concrete floor by means of concrete anchor bolts by others. The mixer element assembly is to be covered with 316L plate on three sides. The inlet and mixer element assemblies will form a continuous duct work that forces the incoming flow from the sluice gate through the mixing elements. To further minimize short circuiting of flow around the mixing elements, the flanges of both the inlet and mixer sections are provided with rubber gaskets, concrete gasket mating area to be levelled by others. The overall mixer length, including the injection arrangement, will be approximately 10' -8 ". srm-ritn Page 2 Quotation Reference ClearwaterMarshallStreetWRFN33092 R1.doc Dated 13/06/2013 Please refer to General Arrangement Elevations below: UNION TYPICAL FLANGE HOLES FOR WALL CONCETE BOLTS TYPICAL WALL AND FLOOR SECTIONS SPARGER ASSY .. OOKING IN Fl (1W DIRECTION ASSUMED CLEAR BEYOND 2' OFF WALL ASSUMED BOT, OF WALKWAY EXIST. CONC. WALL SLUICE GATE ROD E mw (2) SPARGER ASSEMBLIESS (I) DUTY, (1) SPARE SPARSER SUPPORT HERE BY OTHERS SLUICE GATE COVER (3) SIDES MIXER COVER (3) SIDES INLET SEC EXIST. CONC, FLR. 10' 2' ELEMENT SECTION 10' B' Note: The above drawing is for reference only. In the event of an order, a detailed GA will be issued for approval. Duct Mixer price: Freight, standard LTL shipping, FOB jobsite: $ 3,500.00 USD extra Field Measurement and Startup: $ 3.000.00 USD extra Submittals: 3 working weeks ARO Delivery: 8 working weeks from approval to fabricate. $ 59,500.00 USD net each. CONDITIONS OF SERVICE The Statiflo Motionless Mixer offered has been designed to completely and efficiently mix your miscible process streams to ensure that a maximum CoV of 0.05 within a hydraulic diameter downstream of the injection point for the process conditions listed below. For a definition of CoV (coefficient of variation) please click:- Definition of CoV • • • • • T F l l l l Quotation Reference ClearwaterMarshallStreetWRFN33092 R 1. doc Dated 13/06/2013 Page 3 Process conditions:- Process medium: Water Flowrate (gpm): 2 MGD Min / 10 MGD Average / 25 MGD Peak Viscosity (cP): 1.0 (assumed) Specific Gravity: 1.0 (assumed) 12.5 % NaOCL (gph) 60 gph mimimum using carrier water as required. Pressure drop (psi): 2.2 psi @ 25 MGD TERMS AND CONDITIONS Terms of payment net 30 days. Subject to Statiflo's standard terms and conditions of sale. VALIDITY Our offer will remain valid for a period of 30 days. The pricing on this quotation includes for the following:- * The submission of general arrangement drawing for approval. * Submission of our standard installation & Maintenance Manual. * 1 day on -site for mfr /mfr representative will take field measurements to verify clearance requirements and obtain dimension information needed for fabrication of the mixer. * 2 days on -site to oversee installation and certify mixer is correctly installed. 2 days on -site for start -up testing and provide training (proper removal and cleaning of the sparger, etc.). Further QA/NDE, is available at extra cost. We trust our quotation meets your requirements. Should you require any further information or clarification, please do not hesitate to contact this office. Best regards, C.I.P.n UWilson/ Glenn Wilson STATIFLO CORP N33092 • • • June 12, 2013 Ashburn Simoij-Ilartley To: All Bidding Contractors. FTA: Estimating Department or Project Manager. Re: Marshall Street WRF, FL Chlorine Contact Chamber. Specification: Section 15220 Sluice Gates Ashbrook Quotation Number: 34937 Dear Gentlemen, 11600 East Hardy Houston, Texas 77093 (800) 362 - 9041 We are pleased to offer our bid, for the supply of the specified Coplastix Sluice Gate(s) to meet the intent and fulfill the requirements as detailed in the specification, based upon our Coplastix Design. We also include our Ten -Year Warranty, which is and has proven to be a great attribute to the longevity and quality of our equipment. The Coplastix equipment offered comes complete, ready for installation by the contractor unless noted otherwise. If you disagree with the take -off contained herein, you must advise us. 1. FRAME. Carbon steel, 5/16 minimum thickness, sand blasted to near white metal, flame zinc sprayed 4 to 6 mils. Primed and epoxy coated to a 12 to 14 mils. DFT. Frames are wall mounted against a 1" nominal grout base, no thimbles or flanges are needed or included. 2. SEALS Sluice gates frames shall be fitted with fixed sealing faces that are mounted in the frame sides. Seals shall be molecularly incompatible with the Disc face and shall have a co- efficient of friction of 0.10 or less. 3. DISCS Shall be manufactured from suitably reinforced composite plastic materials. The outer skin material shall have a minimum thickness of 1/8" and is non - toxic, ultra- violet light stabilized. The internal steel reinforcing members shall be designed to adequately withstand the hydraulic forces and/or the mechanical operating loads that will be imposed upon the Disc. The Disc shall be designed for a deflection of less than 1 /1000 of the span (Width of Opening /1000). 4. LEAKAGE RATES Per Specification (AWWAC501), no factory water testing will be performed as site testing will need to be done and passed, normal factory inspection and certification report issued. Item #1 June 12, 2013 Marshall Street WRF, FL Chlorine Contact Chamber Ashbrook Quote No.: 34937 Page 2 Qty.: Four (4) Size: 48" x 48" Gate: Wall mounted Coplastix Sluice Gate, suitable for 13' on & off Head pressure. Invert to floor 180" approx. Operator: Gearbox assembly mounted on a floor - mounted pedestal at floor level. Stem: Rising 316 stainless steel. NOTES AND EXCEPTIONS: A. Equipment offered is Coplastix Standard Design. B. Ashbrook excludes grout, packers, etc. C. Anchor Bolts: 316 stainless steel, Included. (if required) D. Initial service trip for field measurement is included (one day on site). E. Start -up, test and training service rate is $2,850.00 for one trip, one day on site; if needed this rate must be added to the Equipment Price below. If more are needed, please refer to service rates as attached to this quote. DO NOT assume any item not listed above is included in our proposal. Equipment Price = $64,800.00 Contact (MTS Environmental) Tel # (813) 929 -4454 for placing order. F.O.B. Houston, Texas, FFA to job site. NO TAXES INCLUDED. 1 Unless otherwise specified in this proposal, all installation of equipment supplied by Ashbrook shall be installed by others. Taxes: The quoted price does not include any local, state or federal taxes, permits or other fees. Any taxes or fees that may apply must be added to the quoted price and paid by the buyer. Note: Ashbrook is only registered to collect and remit sales tax in the following states, Texas, Louisiana, Florida, California, Massachusetts, Ohio, New Jersey, Georgia, Washington, and North Carolina. Taxable projects located in states outside of these will need to accrue and remit these taxes directly to the respective state. Proposal Acceptance: This proposal is offered for acceptance within thirty (30) days from date of this quotation or date of bid opening, whichever is the later date. Prices are subject to review thereafter. Prices are firm, based upon receipt of a Letter of Intent or Purchase Order and notice to proceed within this • • • • June 12, 2013 Marshall Street WRF, FL Chlorine Contact Chamber Ashbrook Quote No.: 34937 Page 3 thirty (30) day period and the review and return of submittal drawings to Ashbrook within thirty (30) days. Delays caused by slow return of submittals and/or other manufacturing delays caused by the contractor, owner, owner's agent or engineer may result in additional charges of 1% per month for such delays or part thereof. Submittal Drawings (2 to 3 weeks from receipt of written Purchase Order) Mechanical submittal and drawings on the preceding equipment will be submitted in accordance with the required delivery date of the equipment and after receipt of a firm purchase order. Note: A purchase order signed by both Ashbrook and the purchase order originator must be executed prior to any submittal being forwarded. Shipment: Shipment on the preceding equipment can be made within ten (10) to twelve (12) weeks from receipt of approved submittals. Payment Terms: 100% net 30 days and as such no provision for retainage will be allowed under the terms of this project. These payment terms are not contingent upon payment from owner to Purchaser. Shipments such as embedded metal or partial items will be invoiced as shipped on a prorated price to be determined by Ashbrook Simon - Hartley. If Purchaser delays shipment, Ashbrook Simon - Hartley may invoice and pass title to the Purchaser; Purchaser agrees to remit the amount due at the times stated, as if the equipment had shipped. All costs of storage shall be at the Purchaser's expense. Escalation Charges: In the event that delivery of equipment cannot be made on the scheduled delivery date agreed upon between Ashbrook and buyer and as evidenced by the terms of the contract, due to buyer delay, Ashbrook reserves the right to assess reasonable escalation charges to the project at the rate of 1% per month of the contract value for each month that the project is delayed. Terms: Ashbrook's Standard Terms and Conditions are enclosed and apply in their entirety. All applicable sales, use or other taxes are to be paid by buyer. If any taxes are to be paid by seller, the quotation price shall automatically be increased by the same amount. Failure to pay invoices promptly when due nullifies Ashbrook Simon - Hartley's obligation to perform work under warranty, installation and start-up in a timely manner. June 12, 2013 Marshall Street WRF, FL Chlorine Contact Chamber Ashbrook Quote No.: 34937 Page 4 The contractor explicitly agrees that subject to acceptance by the consulting engineer and/or the owner, Ashbrook Simon - Hartley may substitute a stand -by letter of credit in lieu of cash retainages required in the plans and specifications and contract documents, and 100% of the cash released by such acceptance will flow through immediately to Ashbrook Simon - Hartley. All orders are subject to credit approval prior to acceptance of contract and/or purchase order. General Notes: There is no provision included in the quoted price, unless noted, for field erection supervision, tests, inspections or adjustment of equipment. If factory representative is required for any of these services, please refer to "Service Terms" enclosed. The equipment offered by Ashbrook Simon - Hartley is our standard design, materials and manufacture. In the event that these items of equipment are subject to any alteration in design or materials or manufacture by the contractor, owner, owner's agent or engineer, such alterations shall be subject to change in the contract price and/or delivery schedule. We wish to thank you for the opportunity of offering this proposal. Should you have any questions, please feel free to contact our representative or us noted below. Sincerely, ply Alvaro Ramirez Fluid Control Project Manager cc. MTS Environmental (Bob Bierhorst), Ashbrook Local Representative cc. Mike McLaughlin, Ashbrook Regional Sales Manager • • • • GEOTECHNICAL REPORT • GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING STUDY SCREW PUMP REPLACEMENT AT MARSHALL STREET APCF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA JONES EDMUNDS JOB NO. 03720-033-02 PSI PROJECT NO. 0775-260 • Information .7i) Build On Engineering • Consulting • Testing Martin E. Mil!burg, P.E. Senior Geotechnical Engineer Florida License No. 36584 • TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 PROJECT INFORMATION 1 1.1 PROJECT AUTHORIZATION 1 1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION 1 1.3 PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF WORK 1 2.0 SITE AND SAMPLING 2 2.1 SITE DESCRIPTION 2 2.2 USDA SOIL SURVEY 3 2.3 USGS TOPOGRAPHIC SURVEY 3 2.4 SUBSURFACE TESTING 3 3.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 4 3.1 BORING INFORMATION 4 3.2 GENERALIZED SOIL CONDITIONS 4 3.3 GROUNDWATER CONDITIONS 4 4.0 ENGINEERING EVALUATIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS 5 4.1 GENERAL 5 4.2 SITE PREPARATION 5 4.3 FOUNDATION RECOMvIENDATIONS 6 4.4 CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS 7 4.5 EARTH PRESSURE ON WALLS 7 4.6 FILL AVAILABILITY 8 4.7 EXCAVATIONS 8 5.0 LIMITATIONS 8 APPENDIX USDA & USGS VICINITY MAPS SHEET 1 BORING LOCATION PLAN SHEET 2 SOIL BORING PROFILES SHEET 3 SOIL PARAMETERS TABLE 1 • • • • Jones Edmunds and Associates, Inc. PSI Project No. 0775 -260 Page 1 of 9 1.0 PROJECT INFORMATION 1.1 PROJECT AUTHORIZATION Authorization to proceed with this project was provided by Mr. Jack Drwiega, Project Manager of Jones Edmunds and Associates, Inc. through a Subconsultant Contract issued on August 26, 2009 for Project No. 03720 - 033 -02 . This study was conducted in accordance with our proposal for these services dated August 24, 2009, PSI Proposal No. 775 -7316. 1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION We understand the City of Clearwater has entered into an agreement with Jones Edmunds and Associates, Inc. to provide wastewater system improvements for the Marshall Street Advanced Pollution Control Facility (APCF). These improvements will include the construction of a new wet well and flow splitter box on the northwest side of the property. The wet well is planned to extend as deep as 9 feet below the ground surface. We anticipate bearing pressures at the base of the wet well will not exceed 1,000 pounds per square foot, more than currently exist. The flow splitter box is anticipated to be about 13 feet wide by 19 feet long and be constructed at grade. We assume the flow splitter box will be placed upon a shallow conventional or mat foundation, if possible. Mat foundation loads are not expected to be more than 1,000 pounds per square foot. Should any of the above information or assumptions made by PSI be inconsistent with the planned construction, we request that you contact us immediately to allow us to make any necessary modifications to the recommendations contained herein. 1.3 PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF WORK The purpose of this study is to provide a geotechnical study for developing geotechnical design criteria for the project site. In this regard, engineering assessments of the following items have been formulated: 1. Design parameters for the foundation system including allowable bearing pressures and expected settlements. 2. Soil subgrade preparation, including stripping, grubbing and compaction. Engineering criteria for placement and compaction of approved structural fill materials. 3. General location and description of potentially deleterious materials encountered in the borings which may interfere with construction progress or structure performance, including existing fills or surficial organics. ��r Jones Edmunds and Associates, Inc. PSI Project No. 0775 -260 Page 2 of 9 4. Identification of groundwater levels and estimated seasonal fluctuations at the boring location. We provided the following services in order to achieve the preceding objectives: 1. Reviewed readily available published topographic and soils information. This published information was obtained from the "Clearwater, Florida" Quadrangle Map published by the United States Geological Survey (USGS) and the "Soil Survey of Pinellas County, Florida" published by the United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) Soil Conservation Service (SCS). 2. Executed a program of subsurface exploration consisting of subsurface sampling and field testing. We performed two (2) Standard Penetration Test (SPT) borings to depths of 30 feet below the ground surface in the area of the proposed wet well. In the borings, samples were collected and SPT resistances were measured virtually continuously for the top 10 feet and on 5 foot intervals thereafter. In accordance with local regulations the borings were grouted upon completion. 3. Visually classified the samples in the laboratory using the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS). Identified soil conditions at each boring location and formed an opinion of the site soil stratigraphy. 4. Collected existing groundwater table and estimated seasonal high water levels (SHGWL). 5. Prepared this formal engineering report which summarizes the course of study pursued, the field and laboratory data generated, and the subsurface conditions encountered. 2.0 SITE AND SAMPLING 2.1 SITE DESCRIPTION The proposed wastewater system additions will be located in the existing Marshall Street APCF. The property is southeast of the intersection of Douglas Ave and Harbor Drive in Clearwater, Florida. Stevenson Creek bounds the property to the east. The wet well and flow splitter box will be located directly south of an existing filter complex. The project area is currently paved and partially enclosed by traffic bollards at this time. if • • • Jones Edmunds and Associates, Inc. PSI Project No. 0775 -260 Page 3 of 9 2.2 USDA SOIL SURVEY The "Soil Survey of Pinellas County, Florida ", published by the United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) Soil Conservation Service (SCS), was reviewed for general near- surface soil information within the general project vicinity. This information indicates the primary mapping unit of this project area is Matlacha and St. Augustine soils and Urban Land (mapping unit 16). This soil type is somewhat poorly drained on the lower coastal plains. Typically the soil is sandy with shell and limestone fragments in the upper 42 inches. The soils to about 80 inches deep are sandy with various quantities of shell fragments. In most years the water table is within 1 1/2 to 3 feet of the surface from June through October. The available water capacity is low and permeability is moderately rapid or rapid, except in clayey layers which have a slow permeability. The urban land portion of this mapping unit consists of parking lots, residential developments, commercial buildings and other types of impervious materials. It should be noted that information contained in the USDA Soil Survey is very general and may be outdated. It may not therefore be reflective of actual soil and groundwater conditions, particularly if recent development in the project vicinity has modified soil conditions or surface /subsurface drainage. 2.3 USGS TOPOGRAPHIC SURVEY The project is located within the United States Geological Survey (USGS) quadrangle map entitled "Clearwater, Florida ", dated 2000. The project site is located within Township 29 South, Range 15 East and Section 10. Based on review of this map, the existing ground surface elevation within the project vicinity is approximately +5 feet NGVD. A portion of this map, in reference to the project location, is shown on Sheet 1 of the Appendix. 2.4 SUBSURFACE TESTING The approximate boring locations are presented on Sheet 2 of the Appendix. The locations were established by PSI with assistance by Jones Edmunds personnel in the field. The boring locations presented on Sheet 2 should be considered approximate. Two (2) SPT borings were performed in the area of the proposed wet well and flow splitter box. The SPT boring procedure was conducted in general conformance with ASTM D -1586. SPT sampling was completed using a split barrel sampler with a 11/2 inch I.D. barrel and a 13 /s inch I.D. open shoe. A liner was not used within the barrel. Closely spaced soil sampling was performed within the top 10 feet and a 5 foot sample interval used thereafter. After seating the sampler 6 inches, the number of successive blows required to drive the sampler 12 inches into the soil constitutes the test result commonly referred to as the N- value. The N -value has been empirically correlated with various soil properties and is considered to be indicative of the relative density of cohesionless soils and the consistency of cohesive soils. The recovered split spoon samples were visually classified in the field with representative portions of the samples placed in jars and transported to our Tampa office for review by a geotechnical engineer and for confirmation of the field classification. Firewitte21.117 Jones Edmunds and Associates, Inc. PSI Project No. 0775 -260 Page 4 of 9 3.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 3.1 BORING INFORMATION The results of the subsurface exploration program including the soil profiles, laboratory results and pertinent exploration information such as SPT N- values are graphically presented on Sheet 3 of the Appendix. Soil stratification is based on review of recovered soil samples and interpretation of field boring logs by a geotechnical engineer. The stratification lines represent the approximate boundaries between soil types; however, the actual transition may be gradual. The soil strata were visually classified using the Unified Soil Classification System. Minor variations not considered important to our engineering evaluation may have been abbreviated or omitted for clarity 3.2 GENERALIZED SOIL CONDITIONS The upper two feet of soils in boring B -1 consisted of silty to clayey sand (SM/SC). The upper two feet of boring B -2 contained fill soils including wood, rocks, muck, sand and clay. Below two feet in both borings we encountered fine sand to slightly silty fine sand (Unified Classification SP /SP- SM to a depth of approximately 8 feet below ground surface. From about 8 to 11 feet in boring B -1 we encountered organic silt, muck (OL), with an apparent petroleum odor. Boring B -2 did not contain muck below 8 feet but dark brown silty to clayey sand (SM/SC) with an apparent petroleum odor. The SPT N- values of the upper 8 feet range from 8 to 24 blow per foot (BPF) and generally indicate loose to medium dense soils. Below the upper sands we encountered clayey sand (SC) and partially cemented sandy clay (CH) to a depth of approximately 22 feet. These clayey soils had N- values of 8 to 12 BPF that generally indicate medium stiff/dense soils. Limestone was encountered below to the boring termination depth with N- values greater than 50 BPF. 3.3 GROUNDWATER CONDITIONS Groundwater table measurements were taken at each of the borings performed. The measured groundwater level was 3 %2 feet below the ground surface. Groundwater conditions will vary with environmental variations and seasonal conditions, such as the frequency and magnitude of rainfall patterns, as well as man -made influences, such as existing swales, drainage ponds, underdrains and areas of covered soil (paved parking lots, side walks, etc.). We estimate the seasonal high groundwater level at this site will be about 3 feet below existing grade. This site may also be tidally influenced by Stevenson Creek. The creek lies to the east of the site. This Creek empties into the Intracoastal Waterway of the Gulf of Mexico less than %2 mile away from this site. • Nas • • Jones Edmunds and Associates, Inc. PSI Project No. 0775 -260 Page 5 of 9 4.0 ENGINEERING EVALUATIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS 4.1 GENERAL Based on the results of the borings, we are of the opinion that the subsurface conditions are generally favorable for supporting the proposed wastewater system improvements. A layer of organic silt was found from about 8 to 11 feet below ground surface at the location of boring B -1. This material should be removed prior to preparing the foundation for the proposed structures. In boring B -2 a two foot thick layer of poor quality fill was found under the asphalt surface. The material should be evaluated and likely removed and replaced with clean, compacted fill as directed below. The following design recommendations have been developed on the basis of the previously described project characteristics and subsurface conditions encountered. If there are any changes in these project criteria, including project location on the site, a review must be made by PSI to determine if any modifications in the recommendations will be required. The findings of such a review should be presented in a supplemental report. The soil parameters provided in the Appendix may be utilized in the design process, if required. Once final design plans and specifications are available, a general review by PSI is strongly recommended as a means to check that the evaluations made in preparation of this report are correct and that earthwork and foundation recommendations are properly interpreted and implemented. 4.2 SITE PREPARATION Much of the construction at this site is below grade. Site preparation recommendations provided below are applicable primarily for incidental construction which may be performed at the ground surface. These recommendations should be used as a guideline for the project general specifications prepared by the design engineer. 1. Surface organics and vegetation present within the proposed structure areas should be stripped and removed. Pavement and existing concrete should also be removed if it is within 12 inches of the base of any floor slabs, foundations, or new pavements. 2. It is recommended that the exposed subgrade be compacted to a minimum depth of 1 foot below stripped grade, to a dry density of at least 95% of the modified Proctor maximum dry density within the proposed structure areas. Areas that yield should be removed and replaced with compacted structural fill or stone. 3. Following satisfactory completion of surface compaction, the structure areas may be brought up to finished subgrade levels, or backfilling as needed, using structural fill. Structural fill should consist of fine sand with less than 12% passing the No. 200 sieve, free of rubble, organics, clay, debris and other unsuitable material. Fill should be tested and approved prior to acquisition. Approved sand fill should be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 12 inches in thickness and should be compacted to a minimum density of Nei Jones Edmunds and Associates, Inc. PSI Project No. 0775 -260 Page 6 of 9 95% of the modified Proctor maximum dry density. Density tests to confirm compaction should be performed in each fill lift before the next lift is placed. 4. All foundation excavations should be observed by the geotechnical engineer or their representative to explore the extent of any loose, soft, or otherwise undesirable materials. If the foundation excavations appear suitable as load bearing materials, the bottom of the foundation excavations should be compacted to a minimum density of 95% of the modified Proctor maximum dry density for a minimum depth of one foot below the bottom of the footing depth, as determined by field density compaction tests. Backfill soils placed adjacent to footings or walls should be carefully compacted with a light rubber -tired roller or vibratory plate compactor to avoid damaging the footings or walls. Approved sand fills to provide foundation embedment constraint should be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 6 inches and should be compacted to a minimum density of 95% of the modified Proctor maximum dry density. 5. If soft pockets or debris are encountered in the foundation excavations, the unsuitable materials should be removed. The proposed footing elevation may be re- established by backfilling after the undesirable material has been removed. This backfilling may be done with a very lean concrete (1,000 psi) or with a well - compacted, suitable fill such as clean sand, gravel, or crushed FDOT No. 57 or FDOT No. 67 stone. Backfill should be compacted to a minimum density of 95% of the modified Proctor maximum dry density. 6. Immediately prior to reinforcing steel placement, it is suggested that the bearing surfaces of all footing and floor slab areas be compacted using hand operated mechanical tampers. In this manner, any localized areas which have been loosened by excavation operations should be adequately recompacted. 7. A representative from our firm should be retained to provide on -site observation of earthwork and ground modification activities. Density tests should be performed in the top 1 foot of compacted existing soils, each fill lift, and the bottom of foundation excavations. 4.3 FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS Total mat bearing pressure will probably be on the order of 1,000 pounds per square foot. Considering that the mat foundation is anticipated to be constructed approximately 9 feet below existing grade, the net mat pressure developed within the underlying soils, after removal of the overburden soils, will not exceed 1,000 psf of additional bearing pressure. In view of the fact that the stresses produced within the anticipated soils due to wet well and flow splitter box construction should be relatively small, we would anticipate minimal stress induced settlements. With proper subgrade preparation, we would anticipate that maximum settlements would be on the order of 1 inch. In this regard, it is suggested that a nominal working platform of some 12 to 24 inches of gravel, such as an FDOT No. 57 or No. 89 grading, be used. The gravel should be uniformly compacted to form a firm and unyielding base prior to construction. These backfill soils will not only serve as a drainage aid to N.i • • • • • Jones Edmunds and Associates, Inc. PSI Project No. 0775 -260 Page 7 of 9 collect seepage or water entering the excavation, but would also help avoid disturbance of the subgrade soils due to construction activities. This backfill will also be beneficial in providing a firm and stable work area for foundation construction. The exploratory borings revealed that the soils at the base of the wet well will likely consist of organic silt, muck, as seen in boring B -1 and clayey sand (SC) (boring B -2). We recommend over - excavating to remove the organic silt or other soft, compressible soils that may be present at the base of the proposed wet well. Although stress induced settlement is expected to be minimal, settlement produced by disturbance and remolding could be significant. Accordingly, proper subgrade inspection and preparation will be required to provide a firm, stable working area for wet well construction. The above evaluation is based on the assumption that the excavation for the wet well construction will be appropriately dewatered to allow proper subgrade inspection and preparation. Furthermore, the dewatering system should be maintained until the dead weight of the structure is sufficient to counter hydrostatic uplift pressures produced by elevated groundwater levels. It is anticipated that the wet well may be constructed within a properly sheeted and braced excavation. With proper subgrade preparation, the wet well foundation may be designed based upon an allowable soil bearing pressure of up to 2,000 pounds per square foot. Backfill soils around the walls of the wet well should also be properly placed and compacted, particularly since these soils will be supporting the influent piping and valve vaults. Compaction of the backfill soils should achieve a maximum dry density of at least 95 percent of the modified Proctor value per ASTM D -1557. Special care should be exercised adjacent to these walls to avoid over compacting the backfill, which could damage the walls and increase lateral earth pressures. Intermediate size, hand guided equipment should be used for this application. 4.4 CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS It is recommended that PSI be retained to provide observation and testing of construction activities involved in the foundation, earthwork and related activities of this project. This will promote project continuity and will reduce the potential for misinterpretation of our recommendations. 4.5 EARTH PRESSURE ON WALLS Temporary and permanent walls for the project should be designed to resist pressures exerted by the adjacent soils and hydrostatic head. For walls that are not restrained during backfilling but are free to rotate at the top, active earth pressure should be used in design. Walls that are restrained should be designed assuming at -rest pressures. Recommended equivalent fluid densities for each pressure condition are presented below. I Active Pressure Above water table — 35 pcf Below water table — 85 pcf Jones Edmunds and Associates, Inc. PSI Project No. 0775 -260 Page 8 of 9 At -Rest Pressure Above water table — 50 pcf Below water table — 95 pcf To avoid the imposition of excessive horizontal loads on walls, only relatively light, hand operated compaction equipment should be used within 10 feet of retaining walls. 4.6 FILL AVAILABILITY The fine to slightly silty fine sands (SP /SP -SM) encountered from about 2 feet deep to a depth of approximately 8 feet in the borings can be used as structural fill material provided it is free of significant clay, organics or deleterious materials. 4.7 EXCAVATIONS In Federal Register, Volume 54, No. 209 (October 1989), the United States Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) amended its "Construction Standards for Excavations, 29 CFR, Part 1926, Subpart P ". This document was issued to better insure the safety of workmen entering trenches or excavations. It is mandated by this federal regulation that excavations, whether they be utility trenches, wet well excavations or footing excavations, be constructed in accordance with the new OSHA guidelines. It is our understanding that these regulations are being strictly enforced and if they are not closely followed, the owner and the contractor could be liable for substantial penalties. The contractor is solely responsible for designing and constructing stable, temporary excavations and should shore, slope, or bench the sides of the excavations as required to maintain stability of both the excavation sides and bottom. The contractors "responsible person ", as defined in 29 CFR, Part 1926, should evaluate the soil exposed in the excavations as part of the contractor's safety procedures. In no case should slope height, slope inclination, or excavation depth, including utility trench excavation depth, exceed those specified in all local, state, and federal safety regulations. We are providing this information solely as a service to our client. PSI does not assume responsibility for construction site safety or the contractor's or other parties compliance with local, state, and federal safety or other regulations. 5.0 LIMITATIONS Our professional services have been performed, our findings obtained, and our recommendations prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering principles and practices. This company is not responsible for the conclusions, opinions or recommendations made by others based on this data. s • • • • Jones Edmunds and Associates, Inc. PSI Project No. 0775 -260 Page 9 of 9 The scope of the exploration was intended to evaluate soil conditions within the influence of the proposed wet well and flow splitter box. This geotechnical study does not include an evaluation of potential deep soil problems such as sinkholes. The analysis and recommendations submitted in this report are based upon the data obtained from the soil borings performed at the locations indicated. If any subsoil variations become evident during the course of this project. A re- evaluation of the recommendations contained in this report will be necessary after we have had an opportunity to observe the characteristics of the conditions encountered. The applicability of the report should also be reviewed in the event significant changes occur in the design, nature or location of the proposed structures. The scope of our services does not include any environmental assessment or investigation for the presence or absence of hazardous or toxic materials in the soil, groundwater, or surface water within or beyond the site studied. Any statements in this report regarding odors, staining of soils, or other unusual conditions observed are strictly for the information of our client. After the plans and specifications are more complete, the geotechnical engineer should be retained and provided the opportunity to review the final design plans and specifications to check that our engineering recommendations have been properly incorporated into the design documents. This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of the Jones Edmunds and Associates, Inc. and its consultants for the specific application to the Screw Pump Replacement at the Marshall Street APCF in Clearwater, Florida. • • • APPENDIX APPROXIMATE SITE LOCATION REFERENCE: USDA SCS, "SOIL SURVEY OF PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA" TOWNSHIP: 29 SOUTH ISSUED: 2006 RANGE: 15 EAST PHOTO: 1998 SECTION: 10 SCALE: 1" = 2000' USDA VICINITY MAP APPROXIMATE SITE LOCATION REFERENCE: USGS "CLEARWATER, FLORIDA" QUADRANGLE MAP TOWNSHIP: 29 SOUTH RANGE: 15 EAST SECTION: 10 MAP VERSION: 1995 PHOTOREVISED: — SCALE: 1" = 2000' USGS VICINITY MAP DRAWN DJG CHECKED JH APPROVED M E M USDA & USGS VICINITY MAPS CLEARWATER SCREW PUMP REPLACEMENT MARSHALL STREET, CLEARWATER, FLORIDA SCALE NOTED 1 //''N''�N'''% Information i/t""I To Build On Engineering • Cornett' j • Testing tATE SEPT 09 I PRa. ND. 0775260 SHEET 1 J AERIAL PLAN VIEW NOT TO SCALE \ \ CHOvt. \ BLDG_ 1 N ALTER COMPLEX FTLIVR FEED PUMP STAiial BORING LOCATION PLAN 1" = 60' 0' DRAWN LEGEND Approximate SPT boring location DJG i CHECKED JH APPROVED MEM GEOTECHNICAL SERVICES CLEARWATER SCREW PUMP REPLACEMENT MARSHALL STREET, CLEARWATER, FLORIDA SCALE NOTED JJ'''''' '"'"§ Information i1i=u To Build On Enyheering • Consult' • Testing LATE SEPT 09 PRW. NO. 0775260 i SHEET 2 J • • `II \cad \O //, f— w w U_ n w 0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 B -1 11 13 10 12 50/1 50/2" er0 O :' MNi MN MN NIN NMI MN B -2 HAND HAND 24 I AUGER AUGER pp /OA A NNE smo mei LIE — 200 =19 50/0 50/1 SOIL PROFILES 0 5' VERTICAL SCALE LEG \D Light brown, gray fine SAND to slightly O silty fine SAND (SP /SP —SM) Dark brown, gray, greenish gray clayey O SAND (SC) 0 IMI Black organic SILT, MUCK (OL) Cream colored, light gray LIMESTONE O, FILL (wood, rock, muck, clay and sand) 0 Greenish gray sandy CLAY, partially cemented (CH) SP Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D 2487) group symbol as determined by visual review Groundwater level, September 2009 N SPT N —value in blows /foot 50/6" Fifty blows for six inches —200 Fines passing No. 200 sieve ( %) A Apparent petroleum odor DRAWN CHECKED APPROVED DJG JH MFM SCALE GEOTECHNICAL SERVICES CLEARWATER SCREW PUMP REPLACEMENT MARSHALL STREET, CLEARWATER, FLORIDA ■ Information / ■To Build On NOTED Engineering• Consulting Testing DA's SEPT 09 PR01 "a 0775260 SHEET 3 J • • TABLE 1 Project: Clearwater Screw Pump Replacement - Marshall St. APCF Client: Jones Edmunds and Associates, Inc. PSI Project No. 0775 -260 Date: September 24, 2009 GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING PARAMETERS - WET WELL BORINGS • Boring No. Approxima teDepth (ft) Soil Descriptio n Soil Type Average SPT -N Unit Weight (pcf) Cohesion (psf) Friction Angle (degree) Coefficient of Lateral Pressure Ultimate Unit Skin Friction (psf) Total Submerge Ka Kp Ko B -1 0 -8.5 SP /SP -SM Cohesionless 11 105 42.6 - 30 0.33 3.02 0.45 - 8.5 -10.5 OL Cohesionless 9 100 37.6 - - 1.00 1.00 1.00 - 10.5 -22 SC Cohesive 11 115 52.6 1375 - 1.00 1.00 1.00 - 22 -30 Limestone Rock 50 135 72.6 - - 1.00 1.00 1.00 8000 B -2 0 -9.5 SP /SP -SM Cohesionless 16 110 47.6 - 31 0.32 3.15 0.43 - 9.5 -22 SC /CH Cohesive 8 110 47.6 1000 - 1.00 1.00 1.00 - 22 -30 Limestone Rock 50 135 72.6 - - 1.00 1.00 _ 1.00 8000 SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS r • • SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Table of Contents: CONTRACT BOND 1 CONTRACT 3 CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT 6 PROPOSAL BOND 7 AFFIDAVIT 8 NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT 9 PROPOSAL 10 CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET 13 BIDDER'S PROPOSAL 14 SectionV.docx Page i 8/6/2013 • BOND NUMBER: 7 6 5 2 5 9 9 CONTRACT BOND (1) STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF MANATEE KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we TLC DIVERSIFIED, INC. as Contractor and WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY (Surety) whose home address is ONE PARK CIRCLE, WESTFIELD CENTER, OHIO, 44251 HEREINAFTER CALLED THE "Surety ", are held and firmly bound into the City of Clearwater, Florida (hereinafter called the "Owner ") in the penal sum of: FOUR HUNDRED SIXTY SEVEN THOUSAND SEVEN HUNDRED AND SEVENTY -FIVE Dollars ($467,775.00) for the payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administratorsouccessors, and assigns for the faithful performance of a certain written contract, dated the /,J day of (Q�a11 -ae�t 2013, entered into between the Contractor and the City of Clearwater for: CHLORINE CONTACT TANK IMPROVEMENTS ( #12- 0007 -UT) a copy of which said contract is incorporated herein by reference and is made a part hereof as if fully copied herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH, that if the Contractor shall in all respects comply with the terms and conditions of said contract, including the one year guarantee of material and labor, and his obligations thereunder, including the contract documents (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Form of Proposal, Form of Contract, Form of Surety Bond, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions and Technical Specifications) and the Plans and Specifications therein referred to and made a part thereof, and such alterations as may be made in said Plans and Specifications as therein provided for, and shall indemnify and save harmless the said Owner against and from all costs, expenses, damages, injury or conduct, want of care or skill, negligence or default, including patent infringements on the part of the said Contractor agents or employees, in the execution or performance of said contract, including errors in the plans furnished by the Contractor, and further, if such "Contractor" or "Contractors" shall promptly make payments to all persons supplying him, them or it, labor, material, and supplies used directly or indirectly by said Contractor, Contractors, Sub - Contractor, or Sub - Contractors, in the prosecution of the work provided for in said Contract, this obligation shall be void, otherwise, the Contractor and Surety jointly and severally agree to pay to the Owner any difference between the sum to which the said Contractor would be entitled on the completion of the Contract, and that which the Owner may be obliged to pay for the completion of said work by contract or otherwise, & any damages, direct or indirect, or consequential, which said Owner may sustain on account of such work, or on account of the failure of the said Contractor to properly and in all things, keep and execute all the provisions of said contract. SectionV .docx Page 1 of 16 8/6/2013 CONTRACT BOND (2) And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, executors, administrators, and assigns,jointly and severally, that they will amply and fully protect the said Owner against, and will pay any and all amounts, damages, costs and judgments which may be recovered against or which the Owner may be called upon to pay to any person or corporation by reason of any damages arising from the performance of said work, or of the repair or maintenance thereof, or the manner of doing the same or the neglect of the said Contractor or his agents or servants or the improper performance of the said work by the Contractor or his agents or servants, or the infringements of any patent rights by reason of the use of any material furnished or work done. as aforesaid, or otherwise. And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, heirs, executors, administrators, and assigns,jointly and severally, to repay the owner any sum which the Owner may be compelled to pay because of any lien for labor material furnished for the work, embraced by said Contract. And the said Surety, for the value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this day of 0(�bo r 2013. TL*-N RSIFIED,INC. COCTOR___ �Y� ATTE Westfield Insurance Company SURETY WITNESS: By: ATT '� -IN-FACT COUNTERSIGNED: SectionV_.docx Page 2 of 16 8162013 General POWER NO. 0992202 04 Power Westfidd Insurance Co. of Attorney Westfield National Insurance Co. CERTIFIED COPY Ohio Farmers Insurance Co. Westfield Center, Ohio Know All Men by These Presents, That WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and 01-110 FARMERS INSURANCF COMPANY, corporations, hereinafter referred to individually as a "Company" and collectively as "Companies," duly organized and existing under the laws Of the State of Ohio, and having its principal office in Westfield Center, Medina County, Ohio, do by these presents make,constitute and appoint THEODORE J.JEDLICK of DAVIE and State of FL its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, recognizances, undertakings, or other instruments or contracts of suretyship- - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - -- J LIMITATION: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY CANNOT BE USED TO EXECUTE NOTE GUARANTEE, MORTGAGE DEFICIENCY, MORTGAGE GUARANTEE, OR BANK DEPOSITORY BONDS, and to bind any of the Companies thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bonds were signed by the President,sealed with the corporate seal of the applicable Company and duly attested by its Secretary, hereby ratifying and confirming all that the said Attorney(s)-in-Fact may do in the premises. Said appointment is made under and by authority of the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of each of the WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY,WES1 FIEIT) NATIONAL, INSURANCE' COMPANY and 01 flO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY: "Be It Resolved,that the President, any Senior Executive, any Secretary or any Fidelity& Surety Operations Executive or other Executive shall be and is hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint any one or more suitable persons as Attorney(s)-in-Fact to represent and act for and on behalf of the Company subject to the following provisions: The Attorney-in-Fact, may be given full power an authority for and in the name of and on behalf of the Company,to execute,acknowledge and deliver, any and all bonds, recognizances, contracts, agreements of indemnity and other conditional or obligatory undertakings and any and all no t iv ices and documents canceling or terminating the Company's liability thereunder, and any such instruments so executed by any such Attorney-in-Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by the President and sealed and attested by the Corporate Secretary." "Be it Further Resolved, that the signature of any such designated person and the seal of the Company heretofore or hereafter affixed to any power of attorney or any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any power of attorney or certificate bearing facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached." (Each adopted at a meeting held on February 8, 2000). In Witness Whereof, VIES I FIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and 01.110 FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY have caused these presents to be signed by their National Surety Leader and Senior Executive and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed this 15th day of APRIL A.D., 2010 Corporate 'e"A%V R A#,N Seals N ",—. 0 6'v WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY 0 ... ... Affixed wmo WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY g,.. — , , 01-1110 FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY -0 SEMI In 84B By State of Ohio Dennis P. Baus, National Surety Leader and County of Medina ss.: Senior Executive On this 15th day of APRIL A.D.,2010 , before me personally came Dennis P. Baus to me known, who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say, that he resides in Wooster, Ohio; that he is National Surety Leader and Senior Executive of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY,WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, the companies described in and which executed the above instrument:that he knows the seals of said Companies;that the seals affixed to said instrument are such corporate seals;that they were so affixed by order of the Boards of Directors of said Companies;and that he signed his name thereto by like order. Notarial Seal A L Affixed Will m State of Ohio �ia J. Kahelin, A rney at Law, Notary Public My Commission Does Not Expire (Sec. 147.03 Ohio Revised Code) County of Medina ss.: 1, Frank A. Carrino, Secretary of WES1 FIELD INSURANCE COMPANY,WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney, executed by said Companies,which is still in full force and effect;and furthermore, the resolutions of the Boards of Directors, set out in the Power of Attorney are in fur, force and effect. In Witness Whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies at Wesffeld Center, Ohio, this day of YIA# i ........... ....kj* /.QN...........rp ......... SE ALL i SEAL rr, EGO,. secrdary Frank A. Carrino, Secretary 1848 BPOAC2 (combined) (06-02) • • CONTRACT (1) This CONTRACT made and entered into this 15 day of , 2013 by and between the City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City ", and TLC DIVERSIFIED, INC., of the City of PALMETTO County of MANATEE and State of FLORIDA, hereinafter designated as the "Contractor ". WITNESSETH: That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows: The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at their own cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the following: CHLORINE CONTACT TANK IMPROVEMENTS ( #12- 0007 -UT) in the amount of $467,775.00 (FOUR HUNDRED SIXTY SEVEN THOUSAND SEVEN HUNDRED AND SEVENTY -FIVE DOLLARS) In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any advertisement, instructions to bidders, general conditions, proposal and bond, which may be hereto attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City. If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations as contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in accordance with the provisions as contained herein. THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED CONTRACTOR, SUB CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES. SectionV .docx Page 3 of 16 8/6/2013 CONTRACT (2) In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform In connection with the performance of work under this contract, discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provi clause. to the following requirements: the Contractor agrees not to of race, sex, religion, color, or to, the following: employment, lay off or termination; rates of apprenticeship. The Contractor or applicants for employment, sions of the non discrimination The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub contractors for standard commercial supplies or raw materials. It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be due to the Contractor the sum of $1,000.00 per day for each day that the work to be performed by the Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1,000.00 per day shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is not to be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the Contractor to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract. It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of this contract and the surety bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms and conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or sureties upon such performance bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form satisfactory to it. The successful bidder /contractor will be required to comply with Section 119.0701, Florida Statues (2013), specifically to: (a) Keep and maintain public records that ordinarily and necessarily would be required by the City of Clearwater in order to perform the service; (b) Provide the public with access to public records on the same terms and conditions that the City of Clearwater would provide the records and at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided in this chapter or as otherwise provided by law; SectionV .docx Page 4 of 16 8/6/2013 r • • (c) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law; and (d) Meet all requirements for retaining public records and transfer, at no cost, to the City of Clearwater all public records in possession of the contractor upon termination of the contract and destroy any duplicate public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the City of Clearwater. SectionV_.docx Page 5 of 16 8/6/2013 • • • CONTRACT (3) IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and have executed this Agreement, in duplicate, the day and year first above written. CITY OF CLEARWATER IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA By: d',Z t o flC 7i Liam B. Home, II City Manager Countersigned: By: -4 wilt qc c\ttoS George N. Cretekos, Mayor (Contractor must indicate whether Corporation, Partnership, Company or Individual.) (The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title; where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Corporation). Camilo Soto Assistant City Attorney TLC DIVERSIFIED, INC. (Contractor) / / By: '[ail��1(IJL'' {A�) I.1 SectionV_.docx Page 6 of 16 8/6/2013 CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT ill(CORPORATION FORM) • • STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF MANATEE On this day personally appeared before me, the undersigned authority, duly authorized to administer oaths and take acknowledgments, , who after being duly sworn, deposes and says: That he is the (TITLE) of TLC DIVERSIFIED, INC., a Florida Corporation, with its principal place of business located at 2719 17TH STREET EAST, PALMETTO, FLORIDA, 34221 (herein, the "Contractor "). That the Contractor was the general contractor under a contract executed on the day of , 2013 with the CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, a municipal corporation, as Owner, and that the Contractor was to perform the construction of: CHLORINE CONTACT TANK IMPROVEMENTS ( #12- 0007 -UT) That said work has now been completed and the Contractor has paid and discharged all sub - contractors, laborers and material men in connection with said work and there are no liens outstanding of any nature nor any debts or obligations that might become a lien or encumbrance in connection with said work against the described property. That he is making this affidavit pursuant to the requirements of Chapter 713, Florida Statutes, and upon consideration of the payment of (Final Full Amount of Contract) in full satisfaction and discharge of said contract. That the Owner is hereby released from any claim which might arise out of said Contract. The word "liens" as used in this affidavit shall mean any and all arising under the operation of the Florida Mechanic's Lien Law as set forth in Chapter 713, Florida Statutes. Sworn and subscribed to before me This day of , 20 NOTARY PUBLIC AFFIANT BY: My Commission Expires: PRESIDENT SectionV_.docx Page 7 of 16 8/6/2013 • • • PROPOSAL BOND Not to be filled out if a certified check is submitted) KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned, TLC Diversified, Inc_ _ as Principal, and Westfield Insurance Company as Surety, who's address is One Park Circle , Westfield �11ter. O 44 1 , are held and firmly bound unto the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the sum of Ten Percent of Total Dollars ($ 10 % ) (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount) for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns. The condition of the above obligation is such that if the attached Proposal of TLC Divers ified, Inc. as Principal, and Westfield Insurance Company as Surety, for work specified as CHLORINE CONTACT TANKS IMPROVEMENTS 12 -0007 -UT all as stipulated in said Proposal, by doing all work incidental thereto, in accordance with the plans and specifications provided herefor, all within Pinellas County, is accepted and the contract awarded to the above named bidder, and the said bidder shall within ten days after notice of' said award enter into a contract, in writing, and furnish the required Performance Bond with surety or sureties to be approved by the City Manager, this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall be in full force and virtue by law and the full amount of this Proposal Bond will be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages. Signed this 12 day of September , 2013 (Principal must indicate whether corporation, partnership, company or individual) (The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title; where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Corporation). SocaonV.doec Page 8 at 1 amberson /VP Operations Principal TLC Divers i f ied, Inc . By: i itfe Theodore J. Jedlick/ Attorney -In -Fact Surety Wes tfield Insurance Co. A/5/2013 • • General Power of Attorney CERTIFIED COPY POWER NO. 0992202 04 Westfield Insurance Co. Westfield National Insurance Co. Ohio Farmers Insurance Co. Westfield Center, Ohio Know All Mon Oz The Presents. That WESTFIELO INSLRANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELC NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OI+ir FARMERS INSUTA►t:,F COWAN', '{ orations, hereinafter referred to individually as a 'Company • and collectively as "Companies:" duly organized ano existirg under the Jaws of the State of Cho. and havirg its principal office in Westfield r. `enter. Medina County, Ohio. do by these presents make. enstrtite and appoint THEODORE J. JEOLICK Ot DAVIE eat State of FL its true and luiitt;i Attorney(s)•in -r act with lull power and authority hereby conferred in its name, puce and iteao to execute. acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, recogniaanoes, undertakings. or other instruments or contracts tracts of suretyship- • . - .... • L TIM THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY CANNOT BE USED TO EXECUTE NOTE GUARANTEE. MORTGAGE DEFICIENCY. MORTGAGE . OR BANK DEPOSITORY BONDS. and to bind any of t'te Companies thereby as fully and to tee same extent as if such bonds were signed by the President. sealed with the corporate seal of the applicable Company and duly attested by as Secretary hereby ratifying and confirming ail that the said Attorney(s)an-Fact may do n the ',remits Said appointment .S , aae .under al a authority of the tollowrg resolution adopted ey1 the Board of Directors of each of the wit kE1 p 1.4buttAtiLt CS..IA/PANY V 5TFIF t Li NA' :.;NA, INS RANt,f ?VPANY and 0 -1C, FARMERS' tthStlkA'C . ; UMi ttN'Y 'Be it Resolved that the President. any Senior Executive, any Secretary or any Fidelity & Surety Cperations Executive or other Executve shall be and is hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint any one or more suitable persons as Attorneylsi -in -Fact to represent and act for and on behalf of the Company subject to the following or^vitcns the Attorney -in -fact. may oe given full power and - eteshority for and in ina name of Ames on tier:31 . f the ";unman, to ex(catt: arknnwletige and deliver, any and ail bonds, recognizances. contracts, agreements of indemnity and orner condit-onal or obligatory tatfertakr5 and any anti all notices and documents canceling or terminating the Company liability thereunder, aid any sirs. instryrients axe ..zed 04 any such Attorney-in-Fact snail be as binding upon the Company as d Sign:-kJ by the Piesident and sealed and attested by Inc- i. rparate Secretary., "Be It Further Resolved that the signature of any such designate° person and the seal of the Company he—etc/fore or hereafter affixed to any power of attorney or any certificate se ating C Pra_tc by tarsimtde and any pewe' .wf attnrnry or _ertifisate near g facsimile stgnat, res or facsimile seal shall 'bo valid and binning ti ,n mP . °rniMary with respect to any pond or undertaking to arnich it is attached." (Each adopted at a meeting raid on February 8 2000). M Witness Whereof. WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPAN'r, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY have caused these presents to be signed by their National Surety Leader and Senior Executive and their corporata seals to be beret° affixed this 15th day of APRIL A.D.. 2010 Corporate Seats Mixed State of Ohio County of Medina 55.: WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OHI FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY By: Dennis P. Bates. Nation, Surety Leader and Senior Executive On this 15th day of APRIL A.D., 2010 . before me personally came Denis P. Bats to me known, who, being by me duly sworn, d_d depose and ssaayy that he resides in Wooster, Ohio; that he is National Surety Leader and Senior Executive of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY. WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, the companies described in anC which executed the above instrument: that he knows the seals of said Companies; that the seals affixed to said instrument are such corporate seals. Mat they were so affixed by order of :he Boards of Directors of said Companies; and that he signed his nacre thereto by like o Notarial Seal ARiite¢ State of Ohio County of Medina William J. Kahelin. A• • ney at Law, Notary Public My Commission Does Not Expire (Sec. 147.03 Ohio Revised Code) 1, Frank A. Carrino, Secretary of WESTFiELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct co cf a Power of Attorney. executed by sad CompanieS. wh:cti s still in full force and effect; and furthermore. Ira resolutions of the Boards Of Directors, set out in the Power of Attorney are in full force and effect. in Witness Whereof 1 have hereunto set my nand ant afffxec the seals of said Companies at Westfield Center, Ohio, this II L clay of firs%e 06 r,.....•• re.:;' ,� e-...--3/4::\ • O t rio r ..NN -S s r .:_. ,�$t. }f z ;�: SEAL :�i f v /� 4„....„, s..l� �t'ti /OS �? 184s•;�/ Frank A. Carrino. Secretary � ..Jfr \t: '••� fie* BPOAC2 (combined) (06.02) • AFFIDAVIT (To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation) STATE OF FLORIDA ) COUNTY OF MANATEE ) Tiffany Monaco being duly sworn, deposes and says that he/she is AssistantSecretary of TLC Diversified, Inc. a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Florida, and having its principal office at: • • 2719 17th Street East Palmetto (Street & Number) (City) Manatee FL (County) (State) Affiant further says that he is familiar with the records, minute books and by -laws of TLC Diversified, Inc. (Name of Corporation) Affiant further says that Dalas Larnberson is VP Operations (Officer's Name) (Title) of the corporation, is duly authorized to sign the Proposal for TLC Diversified, Inc. or said corporation by virtue of Resolution of the Board -April 27, 2013 (state whether a provision of b laws or a Resolution of Board of Directors. If by ' a • e of adoption). Tiffany Monaco /Assistant Secretary Affiant Sworn to before me this 16th day of September , 2013 . "w' : LINDA KAY MOORE 1 S Notary Public - State of Florida ;„ My Comm. Expires Mar 20, 2016 Sko,re�dtr Commission # EE 168648 SectionV.docx Linda Kay Moore Type/print/stamp name of Notary Notary Public Title or rank, and Serial No., if any Page 9of.6 8162OI3 • • • CORPORATE RESOLUTION April 27, 2013 RE: Authority to Sign Legal Documents TO WHOM IT MAY CONCERN: TLC Diversified, Inc., being a legal Corporation organized under the Laws of the State of Florida in April, 1985, Mr. Thurston Lamberson and Mrs. Joanne Lamberson having 10096 of the outstanding shares of said Corporation owned since March of 1989, declares that the following as a matter of record. Mr. Dales Lamberson, Vice President Operations, and Ms. Tiffany Monaco, Assistant Secretary, shall have full power and authority to sign any and all Legal and Binding Documents and make all commitments of whatever nature for TLC Diversified, Inc. Signed this Twenty - Seventh day of April, 2013 Thurston Larberson /President Joanne R. Lamberson /Vice President Sworn to and subscribed before me, Thurston Lamberson and Joanne R. Lamberson, whom are personally known to me, this Twenty - Seventh day of April, 2013 LINDA KAY *DONE Notary Public • 61aIa o1 Florida My Comm. Expires Mar 20. 2010 Commission M EE 16!010 Linda Kay Moore /Notary • My Commission Expires: March 20, 2016 • • • NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF MANATEE ) Dalas Lamberson being, first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is VP Operations of TLC Diversified, Inc. the party making the foregoing Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham: that said bidder is not financially interested in or otherwise affiliated in a business way with any other bidder on the same contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or conference, with any person. to fix the bid price or affiant or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the City of Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the proposed contract; and that all statements contained in said proposal or bid are true; and further, that such bidder has not directly or indirectly submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto to any association or to any member o Sworn to and subscribed before me this 16th day of ;,,,•���► *vv„,, + LINDA KAY MOORE Notary Public •Stale of Florida • 4 y �i ' My Comm. Expires Mar 20, 2016 '�',;a ' •' Commission # EE 168648 Lamberson /VP Operations September ,201 3 . r triblikiiiiWa Kay Moore SecrionV.docx Page 10 of 16 8/6120 l3 • • ORIGINAL PROPOSAL (1) TO THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for CHLORINE CONTACT TANK IMPROVEMENTS ( #12- 0007 -L7) and doing such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance with the contract documents, marked CHLORINE CONTACT TANK IMPROVEMENTS (#12-0007-UT) Every bidder must take notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the documents signed by the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of the City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract without a certificate from the Finance Director that funds are available to cover the cost of the work to be done, or without the approval of the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract and all the pertinent documents relating thereto having been approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is hereby charged with this notice. The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties interested in this Proposal, are named in this Proposal, that he has carefully examined the Advertisement, Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specifications, General Conditions, Special Provisions, and Contract Bond, that he or his representative has made such investigation as is necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and he proposes and agrees that if the Proposal be accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form of contract; hereto annexed, to provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery, equipment, tools or apparatus, do all the work required to complete the contract within the time mentioned in the General Conditions and according to the requirements of the City of Clearwater, Florida, as herein and hereinafter set forth, and furnish the required surety bonds for the following prices to wit: SectionV.docx Page 11 of 16 8/6/2013 • • • PROPOSAL (2) If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall fail to execute a satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may, at its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal shall be null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to become the property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the full amount of said check shall be retained by the City, or if the Proposal Bond be given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying this Proposal, or the amount of said check, shall be returned to the undersigned as specified herein. Attached hereto is a bond or certified check on Westfield Insurance Company Bank for the sum of Ten Percent (5 10 % (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount). The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows: (If corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If firm or partnership, the names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall Iist not only his name but also the name of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's improvements, enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether sub contractor, materialman, agent, supplier, or employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder). NAMES: ADDRESSES: Thurston Lamberson /President /5539 2nd Ave.Cir.W.,Palmetto,FL 34221 Joanne Lamberson /Secretary /Same address as above Signature of Bidder: alas erson /VP Operations (The bidder must indicate whether Corporation, Partnership, ompany or Individu Section V.docx Page 12 of 16 xic'2Ol3 • • • PROPOSAL (3) The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title. Where the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice President, he must, by affidavit, show his authority, to bind the corporation. Principal: j—LC- 171 Dalas _--� Title: V P \5 erson /VP Operations ` ness Address of Bidder: 2719 17th Street East City and State: Palmetto, FL Zip Code 34221 Dated at Palmetto, FL , this 16th day of September , A.D., 2013 State of Incorporation is Florida Section' .docx Page 13 of 16 816:3(! 3 • • • CITY OF CLEARWATE,R ADDENDUM SHEET PROJECT: CHLORINE CONTACT TANK IMPROVEMENTS ( #12- 0007 -UT) Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and Specifications. Addendum No. NIA- Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Dalas Lamberson /VP Operations (Title of Officer) September 16, 2013 (Date) SectionV.doct Page 14 of :6 8/6/2013 • • • BIDDER'S PROPOSAL PROJECT: CHLORINE CONTACT TANK IMPROVEMENTS ( #12- 0007 -UT) CONTRACTOR: TLC Diversified, Inc. BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: $ 4 (a7i 7 7S in BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: Li-r-1, r'-t4 .-reartibcd seue - A':1e1� &[' , (Numbers) (Words) ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION EST. UNIT UNIT QTY UNIT PRICE TOTAL Chlorine Contact Tank Improvements I Chlorine Contact Tank Improvements 1 r LS 3C17) ( 3C\ 7, tS t) 2 Testing Allowance 1 AL 510,000 1 0, Ott Subtotal (Bid Item Nos 1 -2) = 4 07, WO 3 Owner's 10% Contingency Total (Bid Item Nos 1 -3) 40,1400' ti0-1717« THE BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED FOR EACH SECTION. THIS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN. SeclionV.docx Page 15 ell() R/02013 Base Bid Subtotal (Bid Item Nos. 1-2) _ 4071 Mt Subtotal Owner 10% Contingency (Bid Item No 3) - 40. 71)D Base Bid Grand Total (Bid Item Nos. 1 -3 - Li 4-7)76U ADDITIIVE ALTERNATE (Approval by the Owner and Engineer is Required Prior to Proceeding) ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION Stainless Steel Aeration Piping EST. UNIT 1 UNIT QTY LS UNIT PRICE j$ Z TOTAL 1 257 4 Additive Alternate Subtotal (Item em No. 4) = 1 3i 2S0 Owner's 10% Contingency == i , Additive Alternate Total (Item No. 4 -5) _ 20 . • Grand Total (Base Bid + Additive Alternate) - I L+ -1tw 00 THE BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED FOR EACH SECTION. THIS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN. SeclionV.docx Page 15 ell() R/02013 • • • SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM PER SECTION III, ITEM 25, IF YOUR BID IS $1,000,000 OR MORE, THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE BID PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM AS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that: 1. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the requirements of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or engaging in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to participate in this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engaged in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 3. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce; and 4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwater in writing, no later than five (5) calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engages in business operations in Cuba and Syria. STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF MANATEE Printed Name VP Operations Title TLC Diversified, Inc. Narne of Entity /Corporation The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me on this 16th day of September ,201,1_, by Dalas Lamberson (name of person whose signature is being notarized) as the VP Operations (title) of TLC Diversified. Inc. (name of corporation/entity), personally known to me as described herein XXX , or produced a (type of identification) as identification, and who did/did not take an oath. My Commission Expires: March 20, 2016 NOTARY SEAL ABOVE SectionV docx Page 16o(16 Notar�i Linda Kay Moore Printed Name UNDA RAY MOOAE Notary Public • Slate of Florio* My Comm. Expires Mar 20, 2018 Commission N EE 168648 • • • SECTION E - B D SUB)Mt1TAL FORD FLORIDA TRENCH SAFETY ACT CERTIFICATION ANO DISCLOSURE STATEMENT The urxlersigned acknowledges the requirements of the Florida Trench Safety Act (Section 553.60 et. seq. Florida Statutes). A. The Bidder further acknowledges that the Florida Trench Safety Act, (the Act) establishes the Federal excavation safety standards set forth at 29 C.F.R. Section 1926.650 Subpart P, as the interim state standard until such time as the state of Florida, through ks Department of tabor and Employment Security. or any successor agency, adopts, updates, or revises said interim standard. This State of Florida standard may be supplemented by special sharing requirements established by the State of Florida or any of its political sutxlivisions. S. The Bidder, as Contractor, shall comply with eel applicable excevatioMrench safety standards. C. The contractor shall consider the geotedtnicai data available from the County, if any, the Contractor's own sources, and eel other relevant information in Its design of the trench safety system to be employed on the subject Project. The Contractor acknowledges sole responsibilities for the selection of the data on which It relies kit designing the safety system, as weir as for the system itself. D. The amounts that the Bidder has set forth for pipe Installation includes the foNowtng excavation/trench safety measrses and the linear feet of trench excavated under each safety measure. These units. costs. and unit values shall be disclosed solely for the purpose of compliance with procedural requirements of the Act. No adjustment to the Agreement Time or price shell be made for any difference in the actual number of Maar feet of trench excavat ion. except as may be otherwise provided in these Contract VWY, ATM. Trench Safety Measure (Dowriptlon) Units of Measure (LF, SF) Untt (Quantify) Unit Cost Extended Cost 1. Trv"..- Go (F 140 at 00 $ 140 2 $ $ 3. $ $ 4. $ $ 5. $ $ For Information Only, Not for Payment Purposes S lc-10.06 Bidder may use additional sheets as necessary to extend this form Failure to complete the above may result in the bid being declared non- responsive. E. The amount disclosed as the cost of compliance with the applicable trench safety requirements does not constitute the extent of the Contractor's obligation to comply with said standards. The Contractor shall extend additional sums et no additional cost to the County, if necessary, to comply with the Act (except as otherwise be provided). F. Acceptance of the bid to which this certification and disclosure applies in no way represents that the County or its representatives has evaluated are thereby determined that the above costs are adequate to comply with the applicable trench safety requirements nor does it in any way relieve the Contractor of its sole responsibility to comply with the applicable trench safety reouirements. TLC Diversified, Inc. Name and Ti te ► .. as Lamberson -Vice President Operations (941) 722 -0621 / (941) 722 -1382 Address: Telephone/Fax 2719 17th Street East 59- 2513308 Palmetto, FL 34271 Federal Employee ID NO. (FEIN) tlamberson®ticdiversified.com Email of Account Representative • • • DRUG FREE WORKPLACE FORM The undersigned vendor in accordance with Florida Statute 287.087, as amended from time to time, hereby certifies that TLC Diversified, Inc. does: (Name of Business) 1. Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violation of such prohibition. 2. Inform employees about the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug -free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. 3. Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). 4. In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities, or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement, and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty, or nolo contendere to any violation of chapter 893, Florida Statutes, as amended from time to time, or of any controlled substance law of the United States, or any State, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction. 5. Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance, or rehabilitation program, if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is so convicted. 6. Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug -free workplace through implementation of this section. As the person authorized to sign the statement, I certify that this firm complies fully with the above requirements. TLC Diversified, Inc. Dalas Lamberson, VP Operations September 16, 2013 Date • • • PUBLIC ENTITY CRIME FORM SWORN STATEMENT UNDER SECTION 287.133(3) (a), FLORIDA STATUTES ON PUBLIC ENTITY CRIMES THIS FORM MUST BE SIGNED AND SWORN TO IN THE PRESENCE OF A NOTARY PUBLIC OR OTHER OFFICER AUTHORIZED TO ADMINISTER OATHS. 1. This sworn statement is submitted to City of Clearwater, FL Ix Dalas Lamberson, Vice President Operations (print individual's name and title) for TLC Diversified, Inc. (print name of entity submitting sworn statement) whose business address is 2719 17th St. E., Palmetto. FL 34221 and (if applicable its Federal Employer Identification Number (FEIN) is 59- 2513308 2. I understand that a "public entity crime" as defined in Para. 287.133(1)(g), Florida Statutes, means a violation of any state or federal law by a person with respect to and directly related to the transaction of business with any public entity or with an agency or political subdivision of any other state or with the United States, including, but not limited to, any bid or contract for goods or services to be provided to any public entity or an agency or political subdivision of any other state or of the United States and involving antitrust, fraud, theft, bribery, collusion, racketeering, conspiracy, or material misrepresentation. 3. I understand that "convicted" or "conviction" as defined in Para. 287.133(1)(b).. Florida Statutes means a finding of guilt or a conviction of a public entity crime, with or without an adjudication of guilt, in any federal or state trial court of record relating to charges brought by indictment of information after July 1, 1989, as a result of a jury verdict, non jury trial, or entry of a plea of guilty or nolo contendere. 4. I understand that an -affiliate" as defined in Para. 287.133(1)(a), Florida Statutes means: • • • a. A predecessor or successor of a person convicted of a public entity crime; or b. An entity under the control of any natural person who is active in the management of the entity and who has been convicted of a public entity crime. The term "affiliate" includes those officers, directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, and agents who are active in the management of an affiliate. The ownership by one person of shares constituting a controlling interest in another person, or a pooling of equipment or income among persons when not for fair market value under an arm's length agreement, shall be a prima facie case that one person controls another person. A person who knowingly enters into a joint - venture with a person who has been convicted of a public entity crime in Florida during the preceding 36 months shall be considered an affiliate. 5. 1 understand that a "person" as defined in Para. 287.133(1)(e), Florida Statutes means any natural person or entity organized under the laws of any state or of the United States with the legal power to enter into a binding contract and which bids or applies to bid on contracts for the provision of goods or services let by a public entity, or which otherwise transacts or applies to transact business with a public entity. The term "person" includes those officers, directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, and agents who are active in management of an entity. 6. Based on information and belief, the statement which I have marked below is true in relation to the entity submitting this sworn statement. Please indicate which statement applies: X Neither the entity submitting this sworn statement, nor any officers. directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, or agents who are active in management of the entity, nor any affiliate of the entity have been charged with and convicted of a public entity crime subsequent to July 1, 1989. The entity submitting this sworn statement, or one or more of the officers, directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members or agents who are active in management of the entity, or an affiliate of the entity has been charged with and convicted of a public entity crime subsequent to July 1, 1989. The entity submitting this sworn statement, or one or more of the officers, directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, or agents who are active in the management of the entity, or an affiliate of the entity has been charged with and convicted of a public entity crime subsequent to July 1, 1989. However, there has been a subsequent proceeding before a Hearing Officer of the State of Florida, Division of Administrative Hearings and the Final Order entered by the Hearing Officer determined that it was not in the public interest to place • • • the entity submitting this sworn statement on the convicted vendor list (attach a copy of the final order). I UNDERSTAND THAT THE SUBMISSION OF THIS FORM TO THE CONTRACTING OFFICER FOR THE PUBLIC ENTITY IDENTIFIED IN PARAGRAPH ONE ABOVE IS FOR THAT PUBLIC ENTITY ONLY AND, THAT THIS FORM IS VALID THROUGH DECEMBER 31 OF THE CALENDAR YEAR IN WHICH IT IS FILED. I ALSO UNDERSTAND THAT I AM REQUIRED TO INFORM THE PUBLIC ENTITY PRIOR TO ENTERING INTO A CONTRACT IN EXCESS OF THE THRESHOLD AMOUNT PROVIDED IN SECTION 287.017 FLORIDA STATUTES FOR CATEGORY TWO OF ANY CHANGE IN THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS FORM. TLC Diversified, Inc. berson, Vice President Operations Sworn to and subscribed before me this 16th day of September , 2013 Personally known to me. LINDA KAY MOORS olary Public • Slate of Florida My Comm. Expires Mar 20, 2018 Commission # EE 168648 Notary Public — State of Florida Notary Stamp: u of Linda K. Moore • STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY LICENSING BOARD (850) 487 -1395 1940 NORTH MONROE STREET TALLAHASSEE FL 32399 -0783 LAMBERSON, THURSTON T L C DIVERSIFIED INC 2719 17TH STREET EAST PALMETTO FL 34221 Congratulations! With this license you become one of the nearly one million Floridians Licensed by the Department of Business and Professional Regulation. Our professionals and businesses range from architects to yacht brokers. from boxers to barbeque restaurants, and they keep Florida's economy strong. Every day we work to improve the way we do business in order to serve you better. For information about our services, please log onto www.myfloridalicense.com. There you can find more information ebout our divisions and the regulations that impact you, subscribe to department newsletters and learn more about the Departments initiatives. Our mission at the Department is: License Efficiently, Regulate Fairly. We constantly strive to serve you better so that you can serve your customers. Thank you for doing business in Florida. and congratulations on your new license' DETACH HERE Ct:M1�EhT HAS A COLD EL 'JACwGFt ,JUNO • MSC R { }P PtN T!Nts • t AC # 6154368 STATE OFFLORIDA DEPARMgNiSpUBg NDFFYRLgaNg Sp BA ULATION EEG# L12060601290 RTATE OF FLOREtA AC# 6 L 5 4 3 6 8 DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION C00041816 06/06/12 110416241 CERTIFIED GENERAL CONTRACTOR LAMBERSON, THURSTON T L C DIVERSIFIED INC IS CERTIPIt3D under tso provisions of Ch.489 PS tRpttattan eau, 1100 31, 2014 L12060601290 M MO, PA(ENTE[) r'At'Ef DATE E3ATCH NUM[)ER LICENSE NBR 06/06/2012 110416241 CGC041816 The GENERAL CONTRACTOR Named below IS CERTIFIED Under the provisions of Chapter Expiration date: AUG 31, 2014 LAMBERSON THURSTON T L C DIVERSIFIED INC PALMETTO STREET EAST FL 34221 RICK SCOTT GOVERNOR DISPLAY AS REQUIRED BY LAW KEN LAWSON SECRETARY STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY LICENSING BOARD 1940 NORTH MONROE STREET TALLAHASSEE FL 32399 -0783 LAMBERSON, THURSTON T L C DIVERSIFIED INC 2719 17TH STREET EAST PALMETTO FL 34221 Congratulations! With this license you become one of the nearly one million Floridians licensed by the Department of Business and Professional Regulation. Our professionals and businesses range from architects to yacht brokers. from boxers to barbecue restaurants, and they keep Florida's economy strong. Every day we work to improve the way we do business In order to serve you better. For information about our services. please log onto www.moridaticense.com. There you can find more information about our divisions and the regulations that impact you, subscribe to department newsletters and learn more about the Departments initiatives. Our mission at the Department is: License Efficiently, Regulate Fairly. We constantly strive to serve you better so that you can serve your customers. Thank you for doing business in Florida, and congratulations on your new license! AC DETACH HERE TviS DQCU 6154670 STATE OF FLORIDA (850) 487 -1395 STATE OF FLOItl0A AC# 6 L 5 4 6? 0 DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION CUC053963 06/06/12 110416241 CERT UNDERGROUND & EXCAV CNTR LAMBERSON, THURSTON T L C DIVERSIFIED INC IS CERTIFIED under the provision- of ch.489 rs $xpirattoa tete: AJG 31, 2014 212060601592 DRBARTMCON STRUCTIONEINSDUSTRYRLICENSINGLBOARD�TION CONSTRUCTION !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!1! CUC053963 LICENSE NBR The UNDERGROUND UTILITY & EXCAVATION #'A3 Named below IS CERTIFIED Under the provisions of Chapter Expiration date, AUG 31, 2014 • LAMBERSON THURSTON T L C DIVERSIFIED INC 2719 17TH STREET EAST PALMETTO FL 34221 RICK SCOTT GOVERNOR DISPLAY AS REQUIRED BY LAW KEN LAWSON SECRETARY State of Florida Department o, f State I certify from the records of this office that T.L.C. DIVERSIFIED. INC. is a corporation organized under the laws of the State of Florida. filed on April 4, 1985. The document number of this corporation is H51364. I further certify that said corporation has paid all fees due this office through December 31, 2013, that its most recent annual report/uniform business report was filed on January 28, 2013, and its status is active. I further certify that said corporation has not filed Articles of Dissolution. Given wader my hand and the Greta Seal of the State of Florida at Tallahassee, the Capital, this is the Twenty eighth day of January, 2013 04LIA, Secretary of State Authentication ID: CC2267063797 To avthentkate this certifcate.visit the following site.enter this ID, and then follow the instructions displayed. htips://efile.sunbia.orgicertanthver.html